FDR Nano Service Manual - 018-241-08E

FUJIFILM DIGITAL RADIOGRAPHY
DR-XD 1000
Service Manual
The relationship between mR (milliroentgen), which

is the unit of radiation, and μC/kg (micro-coulomb/
kilogram), which is the SI derived unit of radiation, is
as follows.
1 mR = 0.258 μC/kg
FDR is a trademark or a registered trademark of FUJIFILM Corporation.
<No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted.>
Copyright © 2016 - 2020 FUJIFILM Corporation. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval

system, or transmitted in any form or by means, electronic,
mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior
Document No. 018-241-08E written permission of FUJIFILM Corporation.
Version 08E- Feb 29, 2020
2-26-30 Nishiazabu, Minato-ku, Tokyo

Printed in Japan
BLANK PAGE
0.1
Handling of This Manual Precautions for Handling of This Manual
1. FUJIFILM Corporation reserves all rights related to this manual.
2. This manual should be accessible only to technical service personnel authorized by
About This Manual FUJIFILM Corporation.
3. Since this manual contains confidential information of FUJIFILM Corporation, such
 Scope as the internal structure of the product, appropriate measures should be taken to
prevent illegal or inappropriate disclosure and/or use of this manual.
The Service Manual is applicable to the digital radiography DR-XD 1000. 4. The following conducts are prohibited without prior written approval of FUJIFILM Corporation:
- Copy or transcribe a whole or part of the contents of this manual.
DR-XD 1000
- Disclose, furnish, lend, and/or transfer a whole or part of the contents of this
DR-XD 1000PX (X-ray cart) manual to persons other than the afore-described technical service personnel.
- Use a whole or part of the contents of this manual for purposes other than
DR-ID 300CL (Image processing unit) technical servicing of the product.
DR-ID 1200MC (Control cabinet) 5. Portions of the descriptions in this manual may be revised due to improvements on
DR-ID 1200 (Flat panel sensor system) the product.
6. Accompanying documents were originally drafted in the English language.
DR-ID 1201SE (Flat panel sensor (14"x17"GOS) * Wireless-Supported type)
(other than Japan)
DR-ID 1211SE (Flat panel sensor (14"x17"CsI) * Wireless-Supported type)
DR-ID 1213SE (Flat panel sensor (24 cm x 30 cm CsI) * Wireless-Supported type)
Only for designated countries, the DR-ID 1270 (flat panel sensor system) can be used
instead of the DR-ID 1200 (flat panel sensor system).
DR-ID 1270 (Flat panel sensor system)

DR-ID 1275SE (Flat panel sensor (24 cm x 30 cm CsI) * Wireless-Supported type)
NOTE
For Brazil, the usable FPD is the DR-ID 1201SE and the DR-ID 1202SE.
018-241-06A
DR-XD 1000 Service Manual 0.1
0.2
About Notation in the Manual  Notation of Unit Symbols
For notation of unit symbols, metric units set forth in the International Systems of Units
 Notation of Warnings, Cautions, etc. (SI) are used, as a rule. However, metric units that are allowed in the Measurement
Law, not in the SI, are used in some cases.
The notation formats of "warning," "caution," "instruction," "note," and "reference" are
shown below.  Indication of Refer To
WARNING The "$" mark is used to indicate the chapter or section you should refer to.
Its format is as indicated below.
Used when death or serious injury may occur if the instruction is not observed.
$ {MC:1._Precautions for Check, Replacement, and Adjustment}
CAUTION  Notation in the Manual

This service manual may use the following notations.
Used when minor or medium levels of physical injury may be incurred if the
instruction is not observed. Name Notation
Also used when the machine may suffer serious trouble (such as unrecoverable Wireless LAN access point AP
or difficult-to-recover trouble).
Console Advance DR-ID 300CL, DX Console, Console, CL, CSL
INSTRUCTION Image Reader Unit RU
Used when the machine may suffer damage, or any failure or malfunction may occur, Flat panel sensor SE, Panel, FPD
if the instruction is not observed.
RU PC-TOOL PC-TOOL
NOTE
Notation of Symbols

Used to indicate the matters that need attention during steps of the procedure.
- Check/Adjustment indicator: Indicates that it is necessary to check or adjust the
installation location when the part or component
REFERENCE removed is to be reinstalled. This indicator is placed in
Used to indicate terminology or supplemental explanations. the illustration that depicts the procedures for removing/
installing the parts or components.
When you see this indicator in an illustration, see
" Check/Adjustment Procedures" or " CHECK" in a
later section.
- Half-punch indicator: Indicates that it is necessary to align the half-punches

when installing the parts or components. However,
it is not indicated for the half-punches for improving
ease of assembly or preventing erroneous assembly
procedures.
- 3B: Indicates that screw-locking bond needs to be applied

to screw sections of installed parts/components.
Recommended screw-locking bond: Three Bond 1401B
018-241-01E
0.3
Servicing Instruments and Tools That
Require Inspection/Calibration
The machine should be installed and serviced by use of servicing instruments and
tools that have been regularly inspected and calibrated as appropriate.
If the machine were serviced using servicing instruments and tools that have not
been inspected and calibrated, proper performance of the machine could not be
guaranteed.
Servicing instruments and tools that require inspection/calibration are as listed below.
The inspection/calibration should be planned and performed in accordance with the
specifications and operation manuals of the applicable servicing instruments and
tools.
 Instruments and Tools That Require Inspection/Calibration

Inspection/calibration
Name Inspection Calibration
manual No.
Dosimeter -  FF-001
Steel rule (150 mm)  - FF-005
Steel rule (300 mm)  - FF-005
Digital multimeter   FF-012
Calipers  () - FF-015
Torque driver -  -
: A block gauge for use in inspection requires calibration.
018-241-03E
Safety Precaution 0.4
DR-XD 1000 Service Manual - Contents
Safety Precaution
1. Safety Precautions ...................................................... Safety-1 4. Cautions on Electromagnetic Waves ...................... Safety-22

1.1 General Precautions............................................................ Safety-1 4.1 DR-XD 1000 ...................................................................... Safety-22
1.2 Precautions on Infection ...................................................... Safety-3 4.1.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) ........................................... Safety-22
4.1.2 Further Information for IEC 60601-1-2 (EN60601-1-2) ................. Safety-22
1.3 Precautions on the Patient Environment ............................. Safety-4
1.4 Cautions on the Table Tap and Extension Cord .................. Safety-5 5. CONNECTABLE PERIPHERALS .............................. Safety-25
1.5 Caution concerning mistaken panel .................................... Safety-5
1.6 Safety and Other Symbols .................................................. Safety-6
1.6.1 Japan .............................................................................................. Safety-6
1.6.2 Outside Japan ................................................................................. Safety-6
1.7 Precautions on Radiation .................................................... Safety-8
2. Labels ........................................................................... Safety-9

2.1 Rating Indication Labels and Caution Labels ...................... Safety-9
2.1.1 X-ray Source Section (1/2) .............................................................. Safety-9
2.1.2 X-ray Source Section (2/2) .............................................................Safety-11
2.1.3 Arm Section................................................................................... Safety-12
2.1.4 X-ray Cart Section (1/2) ................................................................ Safety-13
2.1.5 X-ray Cart Section (2/2) ................................................................ Safety-15
2.1.6 Battery ........................................................................................... Safety-17
2.1.7 Carry Cart (Option)........................................................................ Safety-17
2.1.8 In-vehicle Kit (Option).................................................................... Safety-18
2.1.9 FUJIFILM-made AP....................................................................... Safety-18
2.1.10 D-EVO2 Panels for Brazilian DR-XD 1000 ................................... Safety-20
3. CLASSIFICATION ...................................................... Safety-21

3.1 DR-XD 1000 ...................................................................... Safety-21
018-241-07E
Product Specifications 0.5
Product Specifications
1. Commodity Composition and Optional Items ............ Spec-1 10. Disposal of the Machine ............................................. Spec-18
1.1 Commodity Composition ....................................................... Spec-1 10.1 Lithium Batteries.................................................................. Spec-18
1.1.1 DR-XD 1000 ...................................................................................... Spec-1 10.2 SE ........................................................................................ Spec-18
1.1.2 Flat Panel Sensor ............................................................................. Spec-3
10.3 Lithium Ion Battery (SE Battery and Main Unit Battery) ...... Spec-18
2. Weight and Dimensions ............................................... Spec-4 10.4 DR-ID 300CL ....................................................................... Spec-18
2.1 DR-ID 1200 ........................................................................... Spec-4
2.2 DR-XD 1000 .......................................................................... Spec-4
3. Space for Use ................................................................ Spec-7

3.1 DR-XD 1000 .......................................................................... Spec-7
4. Means for Moving and Fixing the Machine ................. Spec-8
5. Environmental Conditions ........................................... Spec-9

5.1 DR-XD 1000 .......................................................................... Spec-9
6. Electrical Specifications ............................................. Spec-10

6.1 DR-XD 1000 ........................................................................ Spec-10
6.2 DR-ID 1200 ......................................................................... Spec-11
6.3 DR-ID 1270 ......................................................................... Spec-11
7. DR-XD 1000PX Specifications.................................... Spec-12
8. Other Specifications ................................................... Spec-13
9. Supported Disinfectants............................................. Spec-17
018-241-06E
Machine Description (MD) 0.6
Machine Description (MD)
1. Summary of the Machine................................................. MD-1 6. Noise-reducing Measures ............................................. MD-21

1.1 Features of the Machine...........................................................MD-1
7. Handling the SE Battery ................................................ MD-22
1.2 System Configuration Examples ..............................................MD-2
7.1 The Battery’s Operating State ................................................MD-22
1.3 General Configuration of the DR-XD 1000 and Names ...........MD-3
1.3.1 External View and Functions................................................................ MD-3 7.2 Battery State upon Shipment .................................................MD-22
1.3.2 Board Location ..................................................................................... MD-6 7.3 Transition of the Battery State
When the Battery Is Left for Long Periods of Time.................MD-22
2. Block Diagram .................................................................. MD-7 7.4 Restoring from the SE Battery Shutdown State .....................MD-23
2.1 System Block Diagram
(For New Configured Machines: #xxx50224 or later) ...............MD-7 8. Setting the mAs Value ................................................... MD-25
2.2 Signal Diagram
(For New Configured Machines: #xxx50224 or later) ...............MD-8 9. Software Overview ......................................................... MD-28
2.3 Fuse System Diagram ............................................................ MD-11 9.1 GNC Software ........................................................................MD-28
9.2 MC Software ...........................................................................MD-29
3. Effective Area and Center Position of Image .............. MD-13 9.2.1 V16.3 .................................................................................................. MD-29
3.1 Effective Area .........................................................................MD-13 9.2.2 V16.4 .................................................................................................. MD-30
3.1.1 1201SE / 1211SE / 1271SE / 1273SE ............................................... MD-13 9.2.3 V16.5 .................................................................................................. MD-31
3.1.2 1202SE / 1212SE / 1272SE / 1274SE ............................................... MD-13 9.2.4 V16.6 .................................................................................................. MD-33
3.1.3 1213SE / 1275E ................................................................................. MD-14 9.2.5 V16.7 .................................................................................................. MD-36
3.1.4 1214SE .............................................................................................. MD-14 9.2.6 V17.1 .................................................................................................. MD-38
3.2 Center of the Image................................................................MD-15 9.3 DR-XD1000 Maintenance Tool ...............................................MD-40

3.2.1 1201SE / 1211SE / 1271SE / 1273SE ............................................... MD-15 9.3.1 V1.0 .................................................................................................... MD-40
3.2.2 1202SE / 1212SE / 1272SE / 1274SE ............................................... MD-15 9.3.2 V1.1 .................................................................................................... MD-40
3.2.3 1213SE / 1275SE............................................................................... MD-16 9.3.3 V1.2 .................................................................................................... MD-40
3.2.4 1214SE .............................................................................................. MD-16 9.3.4 V1.3 .................................................................................................... MD-40
9.3.5 V1.4 .................................................................................................... MD-41
4. Calibration ...................................................................... MD-17 9.3.6 V1.5 .................................................................................................... MD-41
5. Changes in PC-GNC Connection Specifications ........ MD-18

018-241-08E
Machine Description (MD) 0.7
10. Design Changes Which Are Associated with

Static Electricity Countermeasures.............................. MD-42
11. Usable Radio Frequency Bands in Each Country

for DR-ID 12xxSEs and FUJIFILM-made AP................. MD-43
12. Changed the Installed OS

(Windows 7 to Windows 10) .......................................... MD-45
Appendix 1. Block Diagram

(For Older Configured Machines) .... Appx MD1-1
018-241-08E
Troubleshooting (MT) 0.8
Troubleshooting (MT)
1. Overview of Troubleshooting...........................................MT-1 4.8 If Irradiating Cannot Be Done ................................................. MT-48

1.1 Troubleshooting from Error Log................................................ MT-1 4.9 When the Caster Lock Pedal Does Not Rise All the Way Up ... MT-49
1.1.1 Checking the Error Log .........................................................................MT-1
1.1.2 Determining the Error Code of the Encountered Trouble ......................MT-2 5. GNC Board/SE IP Address Resetting Procedures .......MT-50
1.2 How to View Error Code ........................................................... MT-2 5.1 GNC board IP Address Resetting Procedures ....................... MT-50
1.3 How to Use the Detail Error Log............................................... MT-3 5.2 SE IP Address Resetting Procedures ..................................... MT-52
1.4 How to Use the Cart Part Log .................................................. MT-4
6. Troubleshooting from FUJIFILM-made AP Log ............MT-53
1.4.1 Example of Log Analysis .......................................................................MT-7
2. Error Code Table ...............................................................MT-8

2.1 Cart Unit ................................................................................... MT-8
2.2 MC .......................................................................................... MT-13
2.3 MC Detail Error Codes (11112, 11244) ................................... MT-27
2.3.1 11112 Error ..........................................................................................MT-27
2.3.2 11244 Error .........................................................................................MT-29
3. Troubleshooting ..............................................................MT-30
4. Parse Tree ........................................................................MT-37

4.1 ERR120, 122 .......................................................................... MT-37
4.2 ERR128 .................................................................................. MT-39
4.3 ERR130 .................................................................................. MT-40
4.4 When the Touch Panel Operations Feel Strange ................... MT-41
4.5 The Battery Cannot Be Charged
(The Battery Reserve Display LED Does Not Flash) ............. MT-44
4.6 When Noises Are Generated from the Monitor Arm ............... MT-47
4.7 If the SE Cannot Be Charged ................................................. MT-48
018-241-07E
Troubleshooting (MT) 0.9
Appendix 1. Aging ................................................... AppxMT1-1 Appendix 7. How to Handle a 1-LAN Port Which Was
Set for a 2-LAN Port Configuration ... AppxMT7-1
Appendix 2. 10753 Error Countermeasures.......... AppxMT2-1
1. The Isolation Flow ......................................................... AppxMT2-1
Appendix 8. Resolution Methods for When
the FUJIFILM-made AP Setting
2. Phenomenon and Countermeasure .............................. AppxMT2-2 Screen Cannot Be Accessed ............ AppxMT8-1
3. Confirming Analysis via the Log .................................. AppxMT2-13
Appendix 3. Procedures for Acquiring the Logs ... AppxMT3-1
Appendix 4. How to Obtain the Image Files When

There are A Abnormal Images .......... AppxMT4-1
1. Storage Location of Image Data (std data) ................... AppxMT4-1
2. How to check image data .............................................. AppxMT4-1
Appendix 5. Analysis Procedures When 11240 Line

Disconnecting Errors Occur in Wireless
Communications ................................ AppxMT5-1
1. Overview ....................................................................... AppxMT5-1
2. Analysis Procedures...................................................... AppxMT5-2
3. For Pattern C1 (Confirming the Radio Field Strength) ... AppxMT5-3
4. For Pattern C2 (SE Board) ............................................ AppxMT5-4
5. For Pattern C3 (Check for AP Anomalies,
Radio Wave Interference).............................................. AppxMT5-6
Appendix 6. Windows OS Recovery Procedures

Using a System Repair Disc ............. AppxMT6-1
018-241-07E
Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) 0.10
Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC)
1. Precautions for Check, Replacement, and Adjustment ... MC-1 2.21 Caster Lock Assembly ............................................................MC-61
2.22 Lockable Casters....................................................................MC-64
2. Cart Unit ............................................................................ MC-2
2.23 Caster .....................................................................................MC-68
2.1 Front Cover ..............................................................................MC-2 2.23.1 For New Caster .................................................................................. MC-68
2.2 Rear Cover ...............................................................................MC-4 2.23.2 For Older Caster ................................................................................ MC-71
2.3 Rear Cover Cushion .................................................................MC-6 2.24 Panel Lock Assembly .............................................................MC-72
2.4 Arm Front Cover .......................................................................MC-7 2.25 Lock Key Assembly ................................................................MC-75
2.5 Arm Rear Cover .....................................................................MC-10 2.26 Main Key Assembly ................................................................MC-76
2.6 Right-side Cover (GNC Board Side) ......................................MC-12 2.27 Securing Member of Monitor ..................................................MC-78
2.7 Left-side Cover (INV Board Side) ...........................................MC-15 2.28 Earthing Wire..........................................................................MC-79
2.8 USB Cover .............................................................................MC-18 2.29 Hand Switch ...........................................................................MC-80
2.9 Operation Panel Assembly .....................................................MC-24 2.30 AC Inlet Cover Assembly........................................................MC-83
2.9.1 For Older Configured Machines ......................................................... MC-24 2.31 DR Slot Base Cover ...............................................................MC-84
2.9.2 For New Configured Machines........................................................... MC-30
2.10 Top Cover ...............................................................................MC-37 3. Control Unit .................................................................... MC-85
2.11 DR Slot Assembly Front Cover ...............................................MC-38 3.1 Battery Assembly....................................................................MC-85
2.12 DR Slot Assembly Right-side Cover .......................................MC-39 3.2 Fan (POW Board) ...................................................................MC-90
2.13 DR Slot Assembly Left-side Cover .........................................MC-39 3.3 NFL Board ..............................................................................MC-92
2.14 DR Slot Assembly...................................................................MC-40 3.4 POW Board ............................................................................MC-94
2.15 DR Slot Frame ........................................................................MC-44 3.5 FET Board ..............................................................................MC-97
2.16 Cart Handle ............................................................................MC-45 3.6 INV Board ...............................................................................MC-99
2.17 DR Slot Damper .....................................................................MC-47 3.7 GNC Board ...........................................................................MC-102
2.18 V Block (Reference Side/INV Board Side) .............................MC-50 3.8 Fan (DDC Board) .................................................................MC-105
2.19 V Block (Opposite Reference Side/GNC Board Side) ............MC-53 3.9 DDC Board ...........................................................................MC-107
2.20 Brake Shaft.............................................................................MC-56 3.10 Noise Filter ...........................................................................MC-109
018-241-07E
4. Arm Unit ........................................................................ MC-112 6.3 LED Switch ...........................................................................MC-180

4.1 Guide Rails ........................................................................... MC-112 6.4 Adjust Knob ..........................................................................MC-181
4.2 Cable Protection Cover ........................................................ MC-115 6.5 DAP/Filter Rail Assembly .....................................................MC-183
4.3 Arm Handle .......................................................................... MC-116 6.6 Collimator Cover ...................................................................MC-184
4.4 Center Lock Pin Assembly ................................................... MC-117 6.7 ADC Board ...........................................................................MC-186
4.5 Gas Spring Assembly ........................................................... MC-119 6.8 ADC Board Attachment Bracket ...........................................MC-187
4.6 Arm .......................................................................................MC-130 6.9 LED Board Assembly ...........................................................MC-189
4.7 Cable Protection Sheet ........................................................MC-152 6.10 Potentiometer .......................................................................MC-196
4.8 Arm Joint Section’s Large Pulley ..........................................MC-153 6.11 Collimator Assembly .............................................................MC-200
4.9 Center Lock Pin ....................................................................MC-154 6.12 Irradiation Reticle Cover .......................................................MC-202
4.10 Arm Lock Release Handle Assembly ...................................MC-155
7. Mono-tank ..................................................................... MC-205
5. Operation Panel............................................................ MC-156 7.1 Top Cover of Mono-tank .......................................................MC-205
5.1 Monitor Arm ..........................................................................MC-156 7.2 Bottom Cover of Mono-tank .................................................MC-207
5.2 Monitor Arm Cover ...............................................................MC-158 7.3 Mono-tank Top Bracket ........................................................MC-208
5.3 Operation Panel Assembly Rear Cover................................MC-159 7.4 Mono-tank Bottom Bracket ...................................................MC-209
5.4 Console PC ..........................................................................MC-160 7.5 Right Cover of Mono-tank Retention Arm.............................MC-210
5.5 SSD ......................................................................................MC-170 7.6 Left Cover of Mono-tank Retention Arm ...............................MC-210
5.6 Front Bezel Assembly...........................................................MC-173 7.7 Mono-tank Assembly ............................................................ MC-211
5.7 Operation Panel Relay LAN Connector Kit ..........................MC-174 7.8 Angle Gauge ........................................................................MC-223
5.8 Memory ................................................................................MC-175 7.9 Torque Hinge (Small)............................................................MC-224
7.10 Torque Hinge (Large) ...........................................................MC-225
6. Collimator ..................................................................... MC-179
7.11 Head Arm Reinforcement Plate ............................................MC-229
6.1 Collimator Handle .................................................................MC-179
6.2 SOD Measure Assembly ......................................................MC-179
018-241-08E
8. DR Slot .......................................................................... MC-230 10. List of Tools .................................................................. MC-258

8.1 DR Slot Top Cover ................................................................MC-230 10.1 Standard Tools .....................................................................MC-258
8.2 Panel Approaching Unit ........................................................MC-232 10.2 Special Tools and Measuring Instruments ............................MC-260
8.3 Roller Assembly....................................................................MC-234 10.3 Special Consumables...........................................................MC-261
8.4 Bottom Bracket .....................................................................MC-235 10.4 Semi-Standard Tools ............................................................MC-261
8.5 Movable Tray Unit ................................................................MC-237
Appendix 1. Setting Country Code
8.6 SE Charging Terminal Assembly ..........................................MC-238 for the FUJIFILM-made AP ............... Appx MC1-1
8.7 DSC65A Board Assembly.....................................................MC-242
8.8 DR Slot Housing ...................................................................MC-245 Appendix 2. Changing the SE Country Code ...... Appx MC2-1
8.8.1 When Replacing the Housing in 3 Places ........................................ MC-245
8.8.2 When Replacing the Housing in 2 Places ........................................ MC-248 Appendix 3. Updating MP OS Version .................. Appx MC3-1
8.9 DR Slot Securing Member....................................................MC-250
Appendix 4. Replacing the Arm
8.10 DR Slot Damper ...................................................................MC-251 Open/Close Lock Block .................... Appx MC4-1
8.11 ESD67A Board .....................................................................MC-252
Appendix 5. Backing Up and Restoring System
9. Replacing the Fuses and Fuse Locations ................. MC-254 Images in Windows 7 ........................ Appx MC5-1
9.1 Fuse Classification and Replacement Procedures...............MC-254 1. Overview .......................................................................Appx MC5-1
9.2 NFL Board Fuses .................................................................MC-255 2. Backing up Windows 7 ..................................................Appx MC5-3
9.3 POW67A Board Fuse ...........................................................MC-255 3. Restoring System Images ...........................................Appx MC5-15
9.4 GNC67A Board Fuses ..........................................................MC-256
Appendix 6. Application of the Silent Fan Kit...... Appx MC6-1
9.5 DDC67A Board Fuses ..........................................................MC-256
9.6 INV67A Board Fuses ............................................................MC-257 Appendix 7. Gas Spring’s Reactive Force ........... Appx MC7-1
9.7 ADC67A Board Fuses ..........................................................MC-257
Appendix 8. Installing the X-ray Source Angle
Index Label Kit .................................. Appx MC8-1
018-241-08E
Appendix 9. Replacing the Operation Panel Appendix 11. Updating MC Software Version.......Appx MC11-1
Connector Cover ............................... Appx MC9-1 1. Updating MC Software Version ...................................Appx MC11-1
Appendix 10. Carry Cart ........................................ Appx MC10-1 Appendix 12. Setting the MC VA Expanded
1. Handle Corner Protector Sponge ................................Appx MC10-1 Security ............................................ Appx MC12-1
2. Sponge Pad (Monitor Pedestal) ..................................Appx MC10-2 1. Setting the MC VA Expanded Security ........................Appx MC12-1
3. Sponge Pad 2. Canceling the MC VA Expanded Security Settings ...Appx MC12-11
(Bottom Section of the Monitor Pedestal)....................Appx MC10-3
4. Cart Base Pad .............................................................Appx MC10-4 Appendix 13. Backup/Restoration with Acronis
True Image 2018 .............................. Appx MC13-1
5. Handle Section Edge Guard........................................Appx MC10-5
1. Storage Medium for Backup ........................................Appx MC13-1
6. Monitor Pedestal’s Bottom Section Edge Guard .........Appx MC10-5
2. Setting the Boot Drive .................................................Appx MC13-2
7. Fork Section Edge Guard ............................................Appx MC10-6
3. Backup Procedure .......................................................Appx MC13-3
8. DR Slot Pad .................................................................Appx MC10-6
4. Restoration Procedure ................................................Appx MC13-6
9. Rubber Insulator (Front Facing) ..................................Appx MC10-7
10. Rubber Insulator (Downward Facing)..........................Appx MC10-7 Appendix 14. Backing Up/Restoring the Device
11. Caster (50 mm in Diameter) ........................................Appx MC10-8 Settings ............................................ Appx MC14-1
12. Caster (75 mm in Diameter) ........................................Appx MC10-8 1. Backing Up the Device Information .............................Appx MC14-1
13. Fork Lock Pin ..............................................................Appx MC10-9 2. Restoring the Device Information ..............................Appx MC14-10
14. Ball Plunger ...............................................................Appx MC10-11
Appendix 15. Installing the RNDIS Driver
15. Brake Wire .................................................................Appx MC10-11 in Windows 10 Environment .......... Appx MC15-1
16. Brake Lever ...............................................................Appx MC10-16
17. Disc Brake Caliper .....................................................Appx MC10-19
18. Wheel Assembly ........................................................Appx MC10-25
018-241-07E
Appendix 16. Changes in PC-GNC Connection Appendix 19. Procedures for Upgrading to
(Applying the 2 LAN Ports Windows 10 ..................................... Appx MC19-1
Compatible Cable and Cover Kit)... Appx MC16-1 1. Procedures for Upgrading to Windows 10...................Appx MC19-1
1. The Objective of This Appendix ...................................Appx MC16-1 1.1 Preparation and Considerations....................................................... MC19-3
2. Requirement ................................................................Appx MC16-1 1.2 Backing Up System Image ............................................................... MC19-4
1.3 Upgrading DR-ID 300CL Application ................................................ MC19-4
3. Order Information ........................................................Appx MC16-1
1.4 Upgrading DR-ID 1200MC ............................................................... MC19-4
4. Changing Procedure ...................................................Appx MC16-2 1.5 Updating FUJIFILM's AP Firmware
(Only for Updating from V1.4 or earlier) ........................................... MC19-4
Appendix 17. Replacing the Label ........................ Appx MC17-1 1.6 Backing Up Settings Data ................................................................ MC19-4
1. For Japan and Brazil ...................................................Appx MC17-2 1.7 Upgrading OS (New Installation)...................................................... MC19-5
1.8 Installing DR-ID 300CL Application ................................................ MC19-20
2. For US .........................................................................Appx MC17-4
1.9 Acquiring and Activating Licence ................................................... MC19-24
3. For Other Overseas .....................................................Appx MC17-7 1.10 Installing DR-ID 1200MC Application ............................................. MC19-24
1.11 Setting Options and Software Settings .......................................... MC19-25
Appendix 18. Updating to FUJIFILM-made AP 1.12 Restoring Settings Data ................................................................. MC19-26
Windows 10 Compatible Firmware 1.13 Configuration of Additional PC Setting ........................................... MC19-28
(V1.5) ................................................ Appx MC18-1 1.14 Migration to Non-Administrator Account Environment ................... MC19-29
1.15 Confirming the Installation.............................................................. MC19-29
1.16 Backing Up System Image ............................................................. MC19-29
Appendix 20. Reinstalling OS and Application.... Appx MC20-1

1. Installation Flow...........................................................Appx MC20-1
1.1 Installing and Setting Windows 10 ................................................... MC20-2
1.2 Setting the OS .................................................................................. MC20-3
1.3 Installing the DR-ID 300CL Application ............................................ MC20-5
1.4 Installing the MC Application ............................................................ MC20-6
1.5 Installing the DRWM ...................................................................... MC20-13
1.6 Activating the OS (For Windows 7) ................................................ MC20-14
018-241-08E
Maintenance Utility (MU)
1. Starting/Exiting the DR-XD 1000 Maintenance Tool...... MU-1 3.13 mAs Offset Calibration ...........................................................MU-27
1.1 Starting the Maintenance Tool ..................................................MU-1 3.14 Collimator Potentiometer Calibration......................................MU-29
1.2 Exiting the Maintenance Tool ...................................................MU-2 3.15 Area Dose Calibration ............................................................MU-31
3.16 Changing Password ...............................................................MU-33
2. Functions and Overview of
DR-XD 1000 Maintenance Tool........................................ MU-3 4. PC-TOOL ......................................................................... MU-34
2.1 Main Menu Window ..................................................................MU-3 4.1 NEW .......................................................................................MU-37
2.2 Operation Items and Menu List ................................................MU-4 4.2 LIST OF EXISTING RU ..........................................................MU-37
2.2.1 Installation ............................................................................................ MU-4
4.3 DELETE .................................................................................MU-38
2.2.2 Maintenance......................................................................................... MU-5
2.2.3 Replacement ........................................................................................ MU-6 4.4 MUTL ......................................................................................MU-38
2.2.4 Management ........................................................................................ MU-7 [1] NETWORK SETTING ........................................................................ MU-44
[1.1] Local Network PreSetting >> ............................................................. MU-45
3. Menu Setup ....................................................................... MU-8 [1.2] SE Network Setting >> ....................................................................... MU-49
[1.3] MP Network Setting >> ...................................................................... MU-49
3.1 Irradiation Field Lighting Time ..................................................MU-9
[1.3.1] MP1 Network Setting >> .................................................................... MU-50
3.2 DAP Setting ............................................................................MU-10 [1.3.2] MP2 Network Setting >> .................................................................... MU-51
3.3 Displaying and Clearing Operating Information...................... MU-11 [1.4] MC ETH0 IP Setting >>...................................................................... MU-51
[1.5] Update Network Setting (MC ETH0) .................................................. MU-52
3.4 Saving Log Information ..........................................................MU-12
[1.6] Update Network Setting (MC ETH1) .................................................. MU-52
3.5 Backing Up and Restoring the GNC Board Data ...................MU-13 [1.7] Wireless Speed Measurement >> ...................................................... MU-52
3.6 Backing Up and Restoring of Operating Information Areas....MU-15 [2] SE Setting .......................................................................................... MU-53
3.7 Beep Setting ...........................................................................MU-17 [2.1] SE Registration >> ............................................................................. MU-53
[2.2] SE DELETE >> .................................................................................. MU-54
3.8 Updating the GNC Board Version ..........................................MU-18 [2.3] BATTERY INFORMATION >> ............................................................ MU-54
3.9 Checking the Board Version ...................................................MU-23 [2.4] Battery Remaining Time Threshold>>................................................ MU-55
3.10 Adjusting the Filament Preheating Voltage ............................MU-24 [2.5] SE Memory Exposure Setting>> ........................................................ MU-55
[2.6] SE LED Color Setting>> .................................................................... MU-56
3.11 Writing the kV Correction Voltage ..........................................MU-26
[3] Version Check .................................................................................... MU-57
3.12 kV Offset Calibration ..............................................................MU-26 [3.1] MC Version >> ................................................................................... MU-57
018-241-07E
[3.2] MP Version >>.................................................................................... MU-58 4.9 VERSION UP .........................................................................MU-78

[3.2.1] MP1 Version Check >> ...................................................................... MU-58
4.10 EDIT HISTORY ......................................................................MU-82
[3.2.2] MP2 Version Check >> ...................................................................... MU-59
[3.3] SE Version >> .................................................................................... MU-59 4.11 EDIT CONFIGURATION ........................................................MU-83
[4] Install .................................................................................................. MU-60 4.12 EDIT CL NAME ......................................................................MU-96
[4.1] Install MP Software >> ....................................................................... MU-60 4.13 BACKUP .................................................................................MU-97
[4.1.1] MP1 Install >> .................................................................................... MU-61
[4.1.2] MP2 Install >> .................................................................................... MU-61
4.14 RESTORE ..............................................................................MU-99
[4.2] Install SE Software >>........................................................................ MU-62 4.15 I/O TRACE EXPERT ............................................................MU-100
[5] Board State Check ............................................................................. MU-62 4.16 ERROR DB ..........................................................................MU-101
[5.1] MP Board State >>............................................................................. MU-63
4.17 UNINSTALL (ALL RUs) ........................................................MU-102
[5.1.1] MP1 Board State >>........................................................................... MU-63
[5.1.2] MP2 Board State >>........................................................................... MU-64 4.18 VERSION UP (ALL RUs) ......................................................MU-102
[5.2] SE Board State >> ............................................................................. MU-65 4.19 Configuration ........................................................................MU-103
[5.3] SE SerialID Write>> ........................................................................... MU-66 4.19.1 CDPath............................................................................................. MU-103
[6] Calibration .......................................................................................... MU-67
4.20 License (Unlocking the Security Lock) .................................MU-104
[6.1] Offset Calibration >> .......................................................................... MU-68
[6.2] Gain Calibration >> ............................................................................ MU-69
5. DR Maintenance Software ........................................... MU-105
[6.3] Defect Calibration >> ......................................................................... MU-70
[6.4] Lag Calibration >> .............................................................................. MU-71 5.1 UPDATE SOFTWARE ..........................................................MU-108
[6.5] SE Correct Data Save Status>> ........................................................ MU-72 5.1.1 Update MP ....................................................................................... MU-108
[6.6] SE Correct Data Transfer>>............................................................... MU-72 5.1.2 Update SE ........................................................................................ MU-108
[6.7] SE Correct Data Status>>.................................................................. MU-73 5.2 PANEL SETTING .................................................................MU-109
[6.8] SE Flash Correct Data Status >> ....................................................... MU-74 5.2.1 SE Registration/Deletion .................................................................. MU-109
[7] SYSTEM ............................................................................................ MU-74 5.2.2 SE Wireless Setting ......................................................................... MU-110
[7.1] Termination >> ................................................................................... MU-75 5.2.3 LED Color Setting .............................................................................MU-111
4.5 PING .......................................................................................MU-76 5.2.4 Memory Mode Setting .......................................................................MU-111
5.2.5 D-EVO GL Panel Registration/Deletion ........................................... MU-112
4.6 MON .......................................................................................MU-77
5.3 CONFIG SETTING ............................................................... MU-113
4.7 FTP .........................................................................................MU-77
5.3.1 MC Setting ....................................................................................... MU-114
4.8 INSTALL .................................................................................MU-78 5.3.2 RU Image Flag ................................................................................. MU-120
018-241-07E
5.3.3 Wireless Setting ............................................................................... MU-122 5.9.9 Replace Long Panel RMV Board ..................................................... MU-160
5.3.4 SE Sleep Mode Setting .................................................................... MU-126 5.9.10 Update SE CPU (0x0220) ................................................................ MU-161
5.4 CALIBRATION ......................................................................MU-127 5.9.11 Update SE FPGA ............................................................................. MU-162
5.4.1 SE Calibration .................................................................................. MU-127 5.9.12 Replace MP...................................................................................... MU-163
5.4.2 Long Panel Calibration ..................................................................... MU-133 5.9.13 LED Color RGB Setting.................................................................... MU-166
5.4.3 Sensitivity Correction Coefficient ..................................................... MU-134 5.9.14 Battery Threshold Setting................................................................. MU-166
5.4.4 GLG Calibration ............................................................................... MU-134 5.9.15 Force Charge the Battery ................................................................. MU-167
5.4.5 SE Correct Data Transfer ................................................................. MU-135 5.10 BACKUP/RESTORE ............................................................MU-168
5.5 NETWORK SETTING ..........................................................MU-138 5.10.1 SE Correct Data Backup/Restore .................................................... MU-168
5.5.1 Local Network .................................................................................. MU-139 5.10.2 D-EVO GL Panel Correct Data Backup/Restore .............................. MU-171
5.10.3 DR-ID 1422SE Panel Correct Data Backup/Restore ....................... MU-172
5.6 CHECK DEVICE STATE ......................................................MU-144
5.10.4 Config Setting Backup/Restore ........................................................ MU-172
5.6.1 Check Version .................................................................................. MU-144
5.10.5 HISTORY Backup ............................................................................ MU-174
5.6.2 Check Board Status ......................................................................... MU-145
5.10.6 LOG Backup..................................................................................... MU-174
5.6.3 SE Wireless Setting ......................................................................... MU-150
5.6.4 Battery Information ........................................................................... MU-151 6. Smart Log Acquisition Tool (SLAT) ............................ MU-179
5.6.5 SE Registration Information ............................................................. MU-151
6.1 Setting the Log Collecting Conditions ..................................MU-180
5.7 HISTORY..............................................................................MU-152
5.7.1 UPRIGHT ......................................................................................... MU-153 6.2 Collecting Logs .....................................................................MU-181
5.7.2 TABLE .............................................................................................. MU-154 6.3 Log Structure ........................................................................MU-182
5.8 LOG ......................................................................................MU-155
Appendix 1. Installing and Uninstalling the
5.9 UTILITY ................................................................................MU-156 DR-XD 1000 Maintenance Tool ......... AppxMU1-1
5.9.1 Terminate MC ................................................................................... MU-156
5.9.2 Reboot MC ....................................................................................... MU-157
5.9.3 Force Reboot MC ............................................................................. MU-157
5.9.4 Web Maintenance Status ................................................................. MU-158
5.9.5 Check PING ..................................................................................... MU-158
5.9.6 Check FTP ....................................................................................... MU-159
5.9.7 FTP Network Setting (Log FTP Destination Address) ...................... MU-159
5.9.8 Force Serial ID Writing ..................................................................... MU-160
018-241-07E
Service Parts List (SP) 0.18
Service Parts List (SP)

How to Use Service Parts List .................................................................SP-1 13A CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (#xxxx0171 or earlier) ................................SP-29
INDEX ....................................................................................................SP-2 13B CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (#xxxx0172 or later) ...................................SP-31
01A COVER 1 (X-RAY CART) ............................................................SP-3 13C CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (#xxx605 or later) ......................................SP-33
01B COVER 2 (DR SLOT) ..................................................................SP-5 14 PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE ..................................................SP-36
02A ARM 1 .........................................................................................SP-6 15 List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring..............................SP-37
02B ARM 2 .........................................................................................SP-7 16 Table of Screws / Washers Indication Symbols...........................SP-39
02C ARM 3 .........................................................................................SP-8 17 List of Quick Wearing Parts ........................................................SP-40
03 TANK ...........................................................................................SP-9 18A Parts that Need Labels (For USA) ..............................................SP-41
04A COLLIMATOR 1 .........................................................................SP-10 18B Parts that Need Labels (For Brazil).............................................SP-42
04B COLLIMATOR 2 ......................................................................... SP-11 18C Parts that Need Labels
05 OPERATION PANEL..................................................................SP-12 (For Overseas Other than USA and Brazil) ..................................SP-43
06A CONTROLLER 1 (POW) ............................................................SP-14 18D Parts that Need Labels (For Japan) ............................................SP-44
06B CONTROLLER 2 (DDC) ............................................................SP-15 A01 D-EVO2 Panels for Brazilian DR-XD 1000 .........................AppxSP1-1
06C CONTROLLER 3 (INV) ..............................................................SP-16
06D CONTROLLER 4 (GNC) ............................................................SP-17
07 SE LOCK UNIT ..........................................................................SP-18
08A FRAME 1 ...................................................................................SP-19
08B FRAME 2 ...................................................................................SP-20
09A DR SLOT 1 ................................................................................SP-21
09B DR SLOT 2 ................................................................................SP-22
10A OPTION 1 ..................................................................................SP-23
10B OPTION 2 ..................................................................................SP-24
10C OPTION 3 ..................................................................................SP-25
10D OPTION 4 ..................................................................................SP-26
11 TOOLS ......................................................................................SP-27
12 CABLE.......................................................................................SP-28
018-241-08E
Preventive Maintenance (PM) 0.19
Preventive Maintenance (PM)
1. Preventive Maintenance Program .................................. PM-1 4.14 Checking the Battery’s Tightness ........................................... PM-17
1.1 How to Use the Preventive Maintenance Volume .................... PM-1 4.15 Checking the Round Terminal of the INV/FET Board ............. PM-18
1.2 Notation of Age ......................................................................... PM-1
5. SE Locking Section........................................................ PM-20
1.3 Preventive Maintenance Program List ..................................... PM-2
5.1 Checking the SE Locking Mechanism .................................... PM-20
2. Checking the Error Log ................................................... PM-4 5.2 Check the Locking Key........................................................... PM-21
3. Removing the Cover ........................................................ PM-5 6. Arm Section .................................................................... PM-22

3.1 Removing the Cover (the 1st year) .......................................... PM-5 6.1 Applying Grease on the Friction Mechanism.......................... PM-22
6.1.1 Preparing a Grease Gun .................................................................... PM-22
3.2 Removing the Cover (the 2nd and 4th year) ............................ PM-5
6.1.2 Injecting the Grease ........................................................................... PM-23
4. Cart Section ...................................................................... PM-6 6.2 Replacing the Gas Spring Assembly ...................................... PM-24
4.1 Checking the Cart Handle ........................................................ PM-6
7. Mono-tank ....................................................................... PM-25
4.2 Checking the Casters ............................................................... PM-7
7.1 Replacing the Torque Hinge ................................................... PM-25
4.3 Checking the Additional Protective Earthing ............................ PM-8
7.2 Checking the Rotation ............................................................ PM-26
4.4 Replacing the Monitor Arm ....................................................... PM-9
4.5 Checking the Main Key .......................................................... PM-10 8. Installing the Cover ........................................................ PM-28
4.6 Checking the Cart Bumper ..................................................... PM-10 8.1 Installing the Cover (the 1st Year) .......................................... PM-28
4.7 Cleaning the Cooling Fan ....................................................... PM-11 8.2 Installing the Cover (the 2nd, 4th Year) .................................. PM-28
4.8 Checking the Arm's Horizontal Rotation ................................. PM-12 8.3 Cleaning the Cover................................................................. PM-28
4.9 Checking the Arm's Center Pin Receiver ............................... PM-13
9. Collimator ....................................................................... PM-29
4.10 Checking the Looseness of the Brake Shaft .......................... PM-14
9.1 Checking the Lighting of Light Irradiation Field ...................... PM-29
4.11 Replacing the Monitor Securing Buffering Member ................ PM-15
9.2 Checking the Filter ................................................................. PM-30
4.12 Checking the Battery Remaining Capacity ............................. PM-16
9.3 Checking the Opening and Closing for
4.13 Checking the Swiveling Mechanism ....................................... PM-16 the Irradiation Field Adjustment Blade.................................... PM-30
018-241-07E
Preventive Maintenance (PM) 0.20
9.4 Checking the Rotation ............................................................ PM-31

9.5 Checking the Deviation between
Light Irradiation Field and X-ray Irradiation Field ................... PM-31
10. Preventive Maintenance Items via Maintenance Tool ... PM-32

10.1 Saving the Log Information .................................................... PM-32
10.2 Updating the GNC Board Version .......................................... PM-33
10.3 Adjusting the Filament Preheating Voltage ............................ PM-33
11. Visual Inspection and Cleaning .................................... PM-34
018-241-07E
Installation (IN) 0.21
Installation (IN)
How to Read the Installation Manual ....................................... IN-1
018-241-07E
Installation (IN1) 0.22
Installation (IN1)
(DR Maintenance Software)
1. Installation Work Flowchart ............................................ IN1-1 8. Installing the DAP Kit (Optional) ................................... IN1-26
2. Installation Preparations ................................................. IN1-4 9. Attaching the Optional Items 1 ..................................... IN1-36
2.1 Tools and Measuring Instruments Required for Installation .....IN1-4
10. Attaching the Cover ....................................................... IN1-37
3. Precautions in Installation .............................................. IN1-5
11. Checking the Power Cable ............................................ IN1-42
4. Transfer and Unpacking .................................................. IN1-6
12. Attaching the Monitor Securing Buffering Members
4.1 Unloading and Preparation for Transfer ...................................IN1-6 (Optional) ........................................................................ IN1-43
4.2 Transfer of Instruments ............................................................IN1-6
4.3 Unpacking the DR-XD 1000PX ................................................IN1-6 13. Attaching the Cart Bumper ........................................... IN1-44
4.4 Unpacking the Battery ............................................................IN1-10 14. Installing the Monitor ..................................................... IN1-45
4.5 Unpacking the FUJIFILM-made Access Point ........................IN1-10
14.1 Installing the Operation Panel Assembly ................................IN1-45
4.6 Unpacking the SE...................................................................IN1-10
14.2 Installing the Hydro-AG Sheet ................................................IN1-50
5. Checking the Items Supplied ........................................ IN1-11
15. Installing the FUJIFILM-made Access Point ................ IN1-51
5.1 Items Supplied with DR-XD 1000PX ...................................... IN1-11
15.1 Attaching the Velcro Tape (Dual Lock) ...................................IN1-51
5.2 Items Supplied with Flat Panel Sensor...................................IN1-15
15.2 Installing the FUJIFILM-made Access Point...........................IN1-52
5.2.1 1201SE/1202SE/1211SE/1212SE ..................................................... IN1-15
5.2.2 1213SE/1214SE................................................................................. IN1-15
16. Safety Check / Operation Setup of Each Section........ IN1-53
5.3 Optional Items ........................................................................IN1-16
16.1 Checking the Key Switch........................................................IN1-53
5.3.1 Optional Item List ............................................................................... IN1-16
5.3.2 Flat Panel Sensor Related ................................................................. IN1-16 16.2 Checking the Caster Lock ......................................................IN1-54
16.3 Checking the Moving Motion ..................................................IN1-54
6. Removing the Cover ...................................................... IN1-17 16.4 Checking the Arm Lock ..........................................................IN1-55
7. Installing and Confirming for the Battery .................... IN1-22 16.5 Checking the Arm Motion .......................................................IN1-55
16.6 Checking the Arm Centering Function....................................IN1-56
018-241-07E
16.7 Checking the Collimator Operation ........................................IN1-56 20.3 Starting up the DR Maintenance Software .............................IN1-83
16.8 Checking the Light Irradiation Field ........................................IN1-57 20.4 Preparation before Setting DR Device ...................................IN1-84
16.9 Setting the Lighting Time of the Light Irradiation Field ...........IN1-58 20.5 Updating MP Application Software Version ............................IN1-85
16.10 Setting the DAP (Optional) .....................................................IN1-60
21. Configuration Setup....................................................... IN1-87
16.11 Aging ......................................................................................IN1-61
16.12 Checking the X-ray Dose .......................................................IN1-63 22. SE Registration .............................................................. IN1-90
22.1 Registering SE on DR-ID 300CL ............................................IN1-90
17. Difference between Default Setup of
DR-ID 1200 and DR-XD 1000 system (Reference) ....... IN1-64 22.2 Changing the GOS Exposure Conditions for DR-ID 300CL ...IN1-92
22.3 Registering SE Serial ID on DR Maintenance Software.........IN1-93
18. Setting the FUJIFILM-made AP and Network .............. IN1-65 22.4 Changing the SE Country Code .............................................IN1-94
18.1 Setting the Country Code for the 22.4.1 Preparation......................................................................................... IN1-94
FUJIFILM-made AP (Overseas Only) .....................................IN1-65 22.4.2 Setting ................................................................................................ IN1-94
18.1.1 Checking the IP Address of the FUJIFILM-made AP ......................... IN1-65 22.4.3 Checking the Settings ........................................................................ IN1-97
18.1.2 Setting the Country Code for FUJIFILM-made AP ............................. IN1-66 22.4.4 Troubleshooting (MC V16.5 or Earlier) .............................................. IN1-98
18.2 Setting the FUJIFILM-made AP..............................................IN1-69 22.4.5 Troubleshooting (MC V16.6 or later) .................................................. IN1-99
18.2.1 Network Settings ................................................................................ IN1-69 22.5 Setting IP Address for SE .....................................................IN1-101
18.2.2 Changing the Login Password of FUJIFILM-made AP....................... IN1-71
22.6 Upgrading SE Application.....................................................IN1-103
18.2.3 Changing the Wireless Settings of FUJIFILM-made AP ................... IN1-73
22.6.1 Checking the SE Application Software Version ................................ IN1-103
18.2.4 Confirming the MAC Address of FUJIFILM-made AP ........................ IN1-77
22.6.2 Upgrading SE Application ................................................................ IN1-103
18.2.5 Confirming the Stealth Settings.......................................................... IN1-78
22.7 Setting the Color for SE........................................................IN1-105
19. Upgrading MC Application ............................................ IN1-79 22.8 Installing the Machine-Specific Data ....................................IN1-106
20. Installing the DR Maintenance Software/ 23. Changing the IP Address of the System
Unlocking the Security Lock ......................................... IN1-81 (SE/MP/MC) ................................................................... IN1-109
20.1 Installing the DR Maintenance Software ................................IN1-81
24. Checking the MC_ID_MODE........................................ IN1-113
20.2 Unlocking the DR Maintenance Software’s Security Lock .....IN1-82
018-241-07E
25. Setting the MAC Address Filtering ............................. IN1-114 30. Checking for Image Problems .................................... IN1-141
30.1 Checking for Irregularities, Density Problems,
26. Checking the Radio Wave Conditions ....................... IN1-116 White Blank Portion, and
Sensitivity Problems in the Images ......................................IN1-141
27. Calibration .................................................................... IN1-118 30.2 Checking the Format ............................................................IN1-142
27.1 Preparations ......................................................................... IN1-119 30.3 Checking for False Images, Problems in Read Center and
27.2 Offset Calibration .................................................................. IN1-119 Film Character Format Information ......................................IN1-143
27.3 Gain Calibration....................................................................IN1-120
31. Initial Settings for SE Battery Pack ............................ IN1-145
27.4 Defect Calibration .................................................................IN1-122
27.5 Lag Calibration .....................................................................IN1-124 32. Checking the Error Log ............................................... IN1-146
27.6 Checking the Calibration Results .........................................IN1-126
33. Clearing the operational Information ......................... IN1-147
28. Attaching the Optional Items 2 ................................... IN1-127
34. Backing Up the Data .................................................... IN1-148
29. Checking the X-ray Source ......................................... IN1-128
35. Final Checks ................................................................. IN1-150
29.1 Checking the Variation between the Light Field and
Imaging Range .....................................................................IN1-128 35.1 Operation Check for DR Lock Knob .....................................IN1-150
29.2 Checking for Foreign Material in X-ray Tube ........................IN1-129 35.2 Operation Check for DR Slot ................................................IN1-150
29.3 Operation Check for DAP (Optional) ....................................IN1-129 35.3 Final Checks for X-ray Cart ..................................................IN1-150
29.4 Checking the Reproducibility (Optional) ...............................IN1-130 35.4 Applying the Product Label for the DR-ID1270 Panel ..........IN1-151
29.5 Calibration for Exposure Index (EI) (Optional) .....................IN1-131
36. Visual Inspection and Cleaning of the Device........... IN1-153
29.5.1 Installation Preparation .................................................................... IN1-132
29.5.2 Determine the Radiation Quality ...................................................... IN1-134
29.5.3 Determine the Irradiation Dose ........................................................ IN1-135
29.5.4 Confirm the EI Value ........................................................................ IN1-136
29.5.5 Adjust the EI Value ........................................................................... IN1-138
018-241-07E
Installation (IN2) (RU PC-TOOL)
1. Installation Work Flowchart ............................................ IN2-1 8. Installing the DAP Kit (Optional) ................................... IN2-26
2. Installation Preparations ................................................. IN2-4 9. Attaching the Optional Items 1 ..................................... IN2-36
2.1 Tools and Measuring Instruments Required for Installation .....IN2-4
10. Attaching the Cover ....................................................... IN2-37
3. Precautions in Installation .............................................. IN2-5
11. Checking the Power Cable ............................................ IN2-42
4. Transfer and Unpacking .................................................. IN2-6
12. Attaching the Monitor Securing Buffering Members
4.1 Unloading and Preparation for Transfer ...................................IN2-6 (Optional) ........................................................................ IN2-43
4.2 Transfer of Instruments ............................................................IN2-6
4.3 Unpacking the DR-XD 1000PX ................................................IN2-6 13. Attaching the Cart Bumper ........................................... IN2-44
4.4 Unpacking the Battery ............................................................IN2-10 14. Installing the Monitor ..................................................... IN2-45
4.5 Unpacking the FUJIFILM-made Access Point ........................IN2-10
14.1 Installing the Operation Panel Assembly ................................IN2-45
4.6 Unpacking the SE...................................................................IN2-10
14.2 Installing the Hydro-AG Sheet ................................................IN2-50
5. Checking the Items Supplied ........................................ IN2-11
15. Installing the FUJIFILM-made Access Point ................ IN2-51
5.1 Items Supplied with DR-XD 1000PX ...................................... IN2-11
15.1 Attaching the Velcro Tape (Dual Lock) ...................................IN2-51
5.2 Items Supplied with Flat Panel Sensor...................................IN2-15
15.2 Installing the FUJIFILM-made Access Point...........................IN2-52
5.2.1 1201SE/1202SE/1211SE/1212SE ..................................................... IN2-15
5.2.2 1213SE/1214SE................................................................................. IN2-15
16. Safety Check / Operation Setup of Each Section........ IN2-53
5.3 Optional Items ........................................................................IN2-16
16.1 Checking the Key Switch........................................................IN2-53
5.3.1 Optional Item List ............................................................................... IN2-16
5.3.2 Flat Panel Sensor Related ................................................................. IN2-16 16.2 Checking the Caster Lock ......................................................IN2-54
16.3 Checking the Moving Motion ..................................................IN2-54
6. Removing the Cover ...................................................... IN2-17 16.4 Checking the Arm Lock ..........................................................IN2-55
7. Installing and Confirming for the Battery .................... IN2-22 16.5 Checking the Arm Motion .......................................................IN2-55
16.6 Checking the Arm Centering Function....................................IN2-56
018-241-07E
16.7 Checking the Collimator Operation ........................................IN2-56 21. Configuration Setup....................................................... IN2-86
16.8 Checking the Light Irradiation Field ........................................IN2-57
22. SE Registration .............................................................. IN2-88
16.9 Setting the Lighting Time of the Light Irradiation Field ...........IN2-58
22.1 Registering SE on DR-ID 300CL ............................................IN2-88
16.10 Setting the DAP (Optional) .....................................................IN2-60
22.2 Changing the GOS Exposure Conditions for DR-ID 300CL ...IN2-90
16.11 Aging ......................................................................................IN2-61
22.3 Registering SE Serial ID on RU PC-TOOL.............................IN2-91
16.12 Checking the X-ray Dose .......................................................IN2-63
22.4 Changing the SE Country Code .............................................IN2-92
17. Difference between Default Setup of 22.4.1 Preparation......................................................................................... IN2-92
DR-ID 1200 and DR-XD 1000 system (Reference) ....... IN2-64 20.4.2 Setting ................................................................................................ IN2-92
22.4.3 Checking the Settings ........................................................................ IN2-95
18. Setting the FUJIFILM-made AP and Network .............. IN2-65 22.4.4 Troubleshooting ................................................................................. IN2-96
18.1 Setting the Country Code for the 22.5 Setting IP Address for SE .......................................................IN2-98
FUJIFILM-made AP (Overseas Only) .....................................IN2-65 22.6 Upgrading SE Application.......................................................IN2-99
18.1.1 Checking the IP Address of the FUJIFILM-made AP ......................... IN2-65
22.6.1 Checking the SE Application Software Version .................................. IN2-99
18.1.2 Setting the Country Code for FUJIFILM-made AP ............................. IN2-66
22.6.2 Upgrading SE Application ................................................................ IN2-100
18.2 Setting the FUJIFILM-made AP..............................................IN2-69 22.7 Setting the Color for SE........................................................IN2-103
18.2.1 Network Settings ................................................................................ IN2-69
18.2.2 Changing the Login Password of FUJIFILM-made AP....................... IN2-71
22.8 Installing the Machine-Specific Data ....................................IN2-104
18.2.3 Changing the Wireless Settings of FUJIFILM-made AP ................... IN2-73 22.9 Forced Transfer of SE Correction Data ................................IN2-107
18.2.4 Confirming the MAC Address of FUJIFILM-made AP ........................ IN2-77 22.9.1 Forced Transfer of SE Correction Data ............................................ IN2-107
18.2.5 Confirming the Stealth Settings.......................................................... IN2-78 22.9.2 Checking the Save Status of SE Correction Data ............................ IN2-107
19. Upgrading MC Application ............................................ IN2-79 23. Changing the IP Address of the System
(SE/MP/MC) ................................................................... IN2-108
20. Unlocking the RU PC-TOOL’s Security Lock ............... IN2-82
20.1 Unlocking the RU PC-TOOL’s Security Lock..........................IN2-82
24. Checking the MC_ID_MODE........................................ IN2-109
20.2 Updating MP Application Software Version ............................IN2-83 25. Setting the MAC Address Filtering ............................. IN2-110
018-241-07E
26. Checking the Radio Wave Conditions ....................... IN2-112 30. Checking for Image Problems .................................... IN2-137
30.1 Checking for Irregularities,
27. Calibration .................................................................... IN2-114 Density Problems, White Blank Portion, and
27.1 Preparations ......................................................................... IN2-115 Sensitivity Problems in the Images ......................................IN2-137
27.2 Offset Calibration .................................................................. IN2-115 30.2 Checking the Format ............................................................IN2-138
27.3 Gain Calibration.................................................................... IN2-116 30.3 Checking for
False Images, Problems in Read Center and
27.4 Defect Calibration ................................................................. IN2-118 Film Character Format Information ......................................IN2-139
27.5 Lag Calibration .....................................................................IN2-120
31. Initial Settings for SE Battery Pack ............................ IN2-141
27.6 Checking the Calibration Results .........................................IN2-122
32. Checking the Error Log ............................................... IN2-142
28. Attaching the Optional Items 2 ................................... IN2-123
33. Clearing the operational Information ......................... IN2-143
29. Checking the X-ray Source ......................................... IN2-124
29.1 Checking the Variation between the Light Field and 34. Backing Up the Data .................................................... IN2-144
Imaging Range .....................................................................IN2-124
29.2 Checking for Foreign Material in X-ray Tube ........................IN2-125 35. Final Checks ................................................................. IN2-145
29.3 Operation Check for DAP (Optional) ....................................IN2-125 35.1 Operation Check for DR Lock Knob .....................................IN2-145
29.4 Checking the Reproducibility (Optional) ...............................IN2-126 35.2 Operation Check for DR Slot ................................................IN2-145
29.5 Calibration for Exposure Index (EI) (Optional) .....................IN2-127 35.3 Final Checks for X-ray Cart ..................................................IN2-145
29.5.1 Installation Preparation .................................................................... IN2-128 35.4 Applying the Product Label for the
29.5.2 Determine the Radiation Quality ...................................................... IN2-130 DR-ID1270 Panel .................................................................IN2-146
29.5.3 Determine the Irradiation Dose ........................................................ IN2-131
29.5.4 Confirm the EI Value ........................................................................ IN2-132 36. Visual Inspection and Cleaning of the Device........... IN2-148
29.5.5 Adjust the EI Value ........................................................................... IN2-134
018-241-07E
Installation (AppxIN) 0.28
Installation (AppxIN)
Appendix 1. Nothing ..................................................... AppxIN1-1 3. Changing Folder Name ...........................................................AppxIN5-7
Appendix 2. Recommended Wifi Adapter ................... AppxIN2-1 Appendix 6. Attaching the Optional Items ................. Appx IN6-1
1. Available Wifi adapters ...........................................................AppxIN2-1 1. Attaching Accessory Case ......................................................AppxIN6-1
2. Attaching WLAN-LCUSB 2458 ...............................................AppxIN2-2 2. Attaching Wet Tissue Holder ...................................................AppxIN6-1
3. Attaching the WHG-AGDN/US-X ............................................AppxIN2-3 3. Attaching the Additional Filter .................................................AppxIN6-2
4. Attaching the High Type Handle .............................................AppxIN6-2
Appendix 3. Connecting the Bluetooth Barcode
5. Attaching the Apron Hanger ....................................................AppxIN6-4
Reader ....................................................... AppxIN3-1
1. Connecting DR-ID 300CL and Appendix 7. Installing the Irradiation Dose Correction
the Bluetooth Barcode Reader................................................AppxIN3-1 Kit ............................................................. Appx IN7-1
2. Disabling the Bluetooth Network Connection..........................AppxIN3-1
3. Setting the OPN-3002i (Factory Setting) ................................AppxIN3-5 Appendix 8. Individual Countermeasures
at Installation ........................................... Appx IN8-1
4. Pairing Setting for PC and the Barcode Reader .....................AppxIN3-7
1. Release of Maintenance Tool Ver.1.4 (ECN-000116)..............AppxIN8-1
5. Setting the Configuration Items...............................................AppxIN3-8
2. Release of POW Board Firmware V0012 and Firmware
6. Verification ..............................................................................AppxIN3-9 Upgrade Procedure (ECN-000128) ........................................AppxIN8-3
3. Release of BIOS Upgrade Procedure for Correcting PC
Appendix 4. Installing and Setting the Magnetic Card Time Error (ECN-000126) .....................................................AppxIN8-12
Reader ....................................................... AppxIN4-1
4. Prevention of Loading Error of 10 x 12 Inch/24 x 30 cm SE
1. Installing the Magnetic Card Reader.......................................AppxIN4-1 into DR Slot (ECN-000132)...................................................AppxIN8-14
2. Installing the Driver of Magnetic Card reader .........................AppxIN4-4 5. Checking Tightness of Mono-tank Fixing Screws
3. Setting the Magnetic Card Reader and Magnetic Card ..........AppxIN4-5 (ECN-000131) .......................................................................AppxIN8-16
6. Checking Tightness of Main Switch Fixing Nut
Appendix 5. Replacement Procedure of the Local (ECN-000125) .......................................................................AppxIN8-17
Network ................................................. AppxIN5-1 7. Checking the Position of Tape in the DR Slot
1. Local Network PreSetting >> ..................................................AppxIN5-1 (ECN-000127) .......................................................................AppxIN8-19
2. MC ETH0 IP Setting >> ..........................................................AppxIN5-6
018-241-07E
8. Checking the Loosening of the PC Power Cable Appendix 13. Installing the Operation Panel Assembly
(ECN-000133) .......................................................................AppxIN8-21 (For Older Configured Machines) ........ Appx IN13-1
9. Replacing the GNC Board
(10753 Error countermeasure) (ECN-xxxxxx).......................AppxIN8-22 Appendix 14. Initializing the FUJIFILM-made AP ...... Appx IN14-1
10. Updating the Demo Machine’s Board (ECN-xxxxxx) ............AppxIN8-23
Appendix 15. Precautions When Attaching
11. Checking the Tightening of the Front Wheel Casters
(ECN-000183) .......................................................................AppxIN8-24 the In-Vehicle Kit ................................... Appx IN15-1
Appendix 9. Nothing ..................................................... AppxIN9-1 Appendix 16. Measuring Method of mAs Value ........ Appx IN16-1
Appendix 10. Carry Cart .............................................. Appx IN10-1 Appendix 17. Installing the Internet Explorer 11 ... Appx IN17-1
1. Transfer and Unpacking ................................................Appx IN10-1 Appendix 18. Attaching the FUJIFILM-made AP
1.1 Unloading and Preparation for Transfer ............................................. IN10-1 Radio Law Label................................ Appx IN18-1
1.2 Transfer of Instruments ...................................................................... IN10-1
1.3 Unpacking the Carry Cart................................................................... IN10-1 Appendix 19. External Image Processing
2. Checking the Packing Contents ....................................Appx IN10-3 Unit Option ........................................ Appx IN19-1
1. Overview .......................................................................Appx IN19-1
Appendix 11. Installing the NFC Card Reader
for Contactless IC Cards ...................... Appx IN11-1 2. Precondition ..................................................................Appx IN19-1
1. Locally Procured Item....................................................Appx IN11-1 3. Optional Information ......................................................Appx IN19-2

3.1 Order Information ............................................................................... IN19-2
2. Attaching the NFC Card Reader ...................................Appx IN11-2 3.2 External Image Processing Unit ......................................................... IN19-2
3. Radiographer Login via Contactless IC Card ................Appx IN11-6 3.3 External Image Processing Upgrade Kit ............................................ IN19-2
3.1 Setting Procedure of IC Card Reader (RC-S380/S) made by Sony... IN11-6 4. Applying the External Image Processing Unit ...............Appx IN19-3
3.2 Service Utility Settings ....................................................................... IN11-9 4.1 Removing the Cart Unit Cover ........................................................... IN19-3
3.3 User Utility Settings ...........................................................................IN11-11 4.2 Applying the External Image Processing Upgrade Kit ....................... IN19-4
3.4 Login ................................................................................................ IN11-15 4.3 Installing the External Image Processing Unit.................................... IN19-5
4.4 Installing the Embedded Software for
Appendix 12. Wireless Channel Used for the Access the External Image Processing Unit ................................................... IN19-7
Point ....................................................... Appx IN12-1 4.5 Assembly............................................................................................ IN19-8
018-241-07E
5. Settings
(General Data Receiving and DICOM SC Outputting) ...Appx IN19-9
Appendix 20. Allowing Non-Administrator Users to

Log In ................................................. Appx IN20-1
1. Migration flow (DR-ID 300CL-AP) .................................Appx IN20-1
1.1 Adding an Account ............................................................................. IN20-1
1.2 Uninstalling DR-ID 300CL-AP ............................................................ IN20-4
1.3 Re-installing DR-ID 300CL-AP ........................................................... IN20-7
1.4 Setting the Operation Account (XrayConsole) ................................. IN20-10
1.5 Confirming the Installation................................................................ IN20-11
2. Maintenance after Migration to
Non-Administrator (XrayConsole) Account..................Appx IN20-12
3. Changing Password for FFService Account (Optional) ...Appx IN20-12
4. Cautions ......................................................................Appx IN20-13
5. Reference ....................................................................Appx IN20-14
5.1 Application List ................................................................................. IN20-14
5.2 Profile list (DR-ID 300CL DR-XD1000 (Windows10 LTSC)) ............ IN20-15
Appendix 21. Nothing .............................................. Appx IN21-1
018-241-07E
Performance Check (PC) 0.31
Performance Check (PC)
DR-XD 1000 Performance Check List .....................................PC-1
018-241-08E
BLANK PAGE
018-241-08E
BLANK PAGE
018-241-08E
BLANK PAGE
018-241-08E
Control Sheet
Issue date Revision number Reason Pages affected
10.20.2016 01 New release (FM9394) All pages
11.30.2016 02 Revision (FM9462) 6, 7, 9, 12, 13
05.31.2017 03 Revision (FM9471) 9 to 14
11.30.2017 04 Revision for MC V16.2 (FM9486) 9 to 15
DR-XD 1000 Service Manual

11.30.2017 04 Changes in pagination (FM9486) 16 to 23
10.31.2018 05 Revision for MC V16.6 (FM9528) 10, 16, 18
10.31.2018 05 Changes in pagination (FM9528) 11 to 15, 17, 19 to 23
05.31.2019 06 Revision for U.S. and Brazil (FM9565) 14, 15, 18
09.30.2019 07 Revision for MC V17.1 (FM9587) 15, 16, 18, 19
09.30.2019 07 Changes in pagination (FM9587) 17, 20 to 27
Safety Precaution
018-241-07E
Safety-1
1. Safety Precautions  Grounding
Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power cable and
additional protective ground wire connections and securing the parts with retaining
Warnings, operating precautions, and instructions should be observed to avoid possible
screws. To maintain safety, ensure that the parts and retaining screws removed for
physical hazards and serious accidents that may occur during installation and servicing.
servicing purposes are restored to states existing upon installation. After the parts and
Labels and name plates that describe relevant precautions are attached to the machine. retaining screws are restored to the above-mentioned states, follow the procedures set
The instructions on such labels and name plates should also be observed while installation/ forth in this Service Manual to verify that the retaining screws are securely tightened
servicing procedures are performed. to properly secure the parts.
1.1 General Precautions

 Screws
 Electrical System Components/Parts - All existing screw connections must be tightened sufficiently firmly, but they may not
- Be sure to turn OFF the main circuit breaker on the machine and remove the AC be overstressed when tightening. Screw connections with incorrect stress can result
cable before an installation and servicing. If an installation and servicing procedure in physical injury or property damage.
is performed while the power is ON, you may experience an electric shock, burn, - Damaged or missing screws may be replaced only with our specified ones.
short circuit, or machine malfunction. Since some parts are not fully discharged (such
as the power supply) or remain at a high temperature even after the power is turned
OFF, exercise due care not to touch them. Installation or servicing procedures that  Lithium Batteries
are to be performed with the power turned ON must be completed while exercising Handling of lithium batteries mounted on the built-in PC and main unit need sufficient
due care to avoid electric shock and short circuit, as instructed in this Service attention, since chemically active lithium metal and combustible materials such as
Manual. organic electrolyte are used. Observe the instructions in the Service Manual for
- Fully exercise care not to splash water on the SE. handling and disposal of the lithium batteries.
- When servicing a board, be sure to wear an antistatic wristband to ground your
body. If your body is not grounded, static buildup on your body may damage
electronic components on the board.
 Heavy Objects
When removing or installing a heavy object, pay due attention to your working posture
and get an assistant(s) as needed. Also, use suitable ancillary gear as appropriate.
 Safety Devices
Always keep effective, the safety features of the safety devices such as fuses, circuit
breakers and covers. Do not make any alternation or modification that may impair
their functionality.
018-241-01E
DR-XD 1000 Service Manual Safety-1
Safety-2
 Batteries (Lithium Ion Batteries) - If a liquid leaking from the battery attaches to the skin or clothing, immediately rinse
with clean water such as tap water. If not rinsed off, a rash on the skin might result.
- When a battery mounted on the SE is to be stored for a long time, fully charge the - If a liquid leaks or an unusual odor is felt, immediately keep the battery away
battery, then remove it from the SE, and store in a cold and dark space. Re-charge from the fire. An electrolyte leaking from the battery might ignite, resulting in heat
the battery during storage semiannually or annually. If the battery is not re-charged, generation, smoke generation, rupture, ignition or the like.
a drop in capacity of the battery might result.
- If the batteries are to be transported by boat or aircraft, use the packing box
designated by FUJIFILM.  Handling Hazardous Materials
- Observe the instructions in the Service Manual when handling or disposing of the battery.
- Do not leave a battery in a vehicle or near a stove at a high temperature. If it is left Hazardous materials are designated as substances which can ignite or explode or
under a high temperature atmosphere, heat generation, smoke generation, rupture, which are toxic, injurious to health, corrosive or irritating. Their properties together
ignition or the like might result. with the relevant hazards and protective measures are identified clearly by symbols.
Therefore, the required protective measures must be complied with to secure safety
- Make sure that the room temperature ranges from 5 to 35°C when a battery is to be
before handling the hazardous materials.
charged. If charged out of the range of 5 to 35°C, a protective device in the battery might
get damaged, resulting in heat generation, smoke generation, rupture, ignition or the like.
- Do not disassemble, alter or solder the battery. A safety mechanism or a protective
device in the battery might get damaged, resulting in heat generation, smoke
 Other Precautions
generation, rupture, ignition or the like. - When performing a servicing procedure while the power is turned ON with covers
- Do not apply heat to the battery (throw into the fire or heat in a microwave oven), nor removed, carefully proceed with the procedure while observing the instructions
put in a high-pressure vessel. A safety mechanism in the battery might get damaged, described in this Service Manual. Further, exercise care not to drop screws or other
resulting in heat generation, smoke generation, rupture, ignition or the like. fasteners into the machine. If any fastener is dropped, be sure to collect it.
- Do not use the battery for other machines. Otherwise, abnormal current might - Keep clean the product name plates, safety standards labels, product serial number
flow in some machines to have the battery damaged, or heat generation, smoke labels, caution labels, and other labels attached to the machine, and do not peel
generation, rupture, ignition or the like might result. them or put another name plate or label over them.
- Use the dedicated battery charger to charge the battery. Otherwise, excessive - Upon completion of the servicing procedures, put covers, screws, and other
current might flow, and heat generation, smoke generation, rupture, ignition or the fasteners back to their original locations and secure them in place.
like might result. - Replace a damaged or worn component with the component specified in the manual.
Stop charging the battery if it is not completely charged after a predetermined
charging time (approx. 4 hours). Heat generation, smoke generation, rupture,
ignition or the like might result.
- Do not short-circuit between a positive terminal and a negative terminal of a battery
via a metallic material such as a wire. Short-circuiting causes excessive current to
flow, and heat generation, smoke generation, rupture, ignition or the like might result.
- Do not take action for damaging or shocking the battery (as piercing, hammering,
trampling or throwing). A protective device in the battery might get damaged,
resulting in heat generation, smoke generation, rupture, ignition or the like.
- Do not use a battery with flaws, deformation, unusual odors, tarnish or heat. Heat
generation, smoke generation, rupture, ignition or the like might result.
- Do not wet the battery with water. If the battery is wetted, a protective device in the
battery might get damaged, resulting in heat generation, smoke generation, rupture,
ignition or the like.
- If a liquid leaking from the battery splashes into the eye, immediately flush with clean
water such as tap water without rubbing. Contact a doctor immediately afterwards. If
left untreated, a failure in the eye might result.
018-241-01E
Safety-3
1.2 Precautions on Infection
The machine can be contaminated by infected blood or other bodily fluids.
Comply with safety information on protection against infectious diseases when
servicing the machine. Do not touch blood or other biological fluids.
If not observed, severe injury and even death may result.
018-241-01E
Safety-4
1.3 Precautions on the Patient Environment  Medically-used room
Room equipped with protective grounding (medical use outlet or medical use
Before the machine is installed, the supervisor at the machine installation site (the grounding terminal) implemented by the medical grounding method. The protective
hospital’s director) should check to see whether the machine is installed in the patient grounding inside the medically-used room is equipotential, and the protective
environment or not. grounding of this medically-used room is equipotential to that in the other medically-
used room. Generally, a portion of the medically-used room is the patient environment.
 Definition of the Patient Environment,
Medically-Used Room and Non-Medically Used Room
 Non-medically used room
 Patient environment Areas outside the medically-used room are considered the non-medically used room.
The patient environment is defined as an area where a patient gets medical practice
(treatment, tests, diagnosis or monitoring), measuring 2.5 m in all horizontal directions
from the patient’s body and 2.5 m in height during the medical practice. It excludes the
space traveled by the patient to reach the medically-used room.
<For bed-type machine>
<For stand-type machine>
018-241-01E
Safety-5
1.4 Cautions on the Table Tap and Extension Cord 1.5 Caution concerning mistaken panel
Do not use a table tap or an extension cord to supply the power to the system components. In order to prevent a mistaken panel when multiple panels are used, always confirm
that the LED color of the panel being used and the color of the active panel icon on
the console screen are matched before taking pictures.
018-241-01E
Safety-6
1.6 Safety and Other Symbols 1.6.2 Outside Japan
The safety symbols applied in the machine are listed below:
1.6.1 Japan Symbol Description
The safety symbols applied in the machine are listed below: This symbol indicates compliance of the equipment with Directive 93/42/EEC.
Symbol Description
Attention, consult ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTS.
Attention, consult ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTS.
OFF (To indicate disconnection from the mains, at least for mains
OFF (To indicate disconnection from the mains, at least for mains switches or their positions, and all those cases where safety is involved.)
switches or their positions, and all those cases where safety is involved.) ON (To indicate connection to the mains, at least for mains switches or
ON (To indicate connection to the mains, at least for mains switches or their positions, and all those cases where safety is involved.)
their positions, and all those cases where safety is involved.)
Protective earth (ground)
Protective earth (ground)
Alternating current
Alternating current
This symbol indicates that the equipment is a Type B Applied Part.
Type B applied part
Ready (To indicate the machine is ready for operation.)
Ready (To indicate the machine is ready for operation.)
Electric energy
Electric energy
General mandatory action sign
General mandatory action sign
Stand-by
Stand-by
This symbol indicates that this product is not to be disposed of with your
household waste, according to the WEEE Directive (2002/96/EC) and
Point load your national law.
This product should be handed over to a designated collection point.
Improper handling of this type of waste could have a possible negative
Surface load
impact on the environment and human health due to potentially
hazardous substances that are generally associated with EEE.
This symbol includes RF transmitters or indicates equipment that At the same time, your cooperation in the correct disposal of this product
intentionally applies RF electromagnetic energy for diagnosis or treatment. will contribute to the effective usage of natural resources.
For more information about waste, please contact FUJIFILM dealers.
Refer to Instruction Manual/Booklet Year of manufacture
Environmentally Friendly Use Period (EFUP)

No pushing
Point load
Recycle symbol (three arrows)
This symbol means that the product must not be disposed of as
household wastes. Surface load
018-241-02E
Safety-7
Symbol Description
This symbol indicates that the flat panel sensor supports the automatic
X-ray detection function.
This symbol includes RF transmitters or indicates equipment that

intentionally applies RF electromagnetic energy for diagnosis or treatment.
Refer to Instruction Manual/Booklet
No pushing
Recycle symbol of Europe (crossed out dust bin symbol)
Recycle symbol of USA and Canada (RBRC symbol)
Recycle symbol of Taiwan
Chinese RoHS mark

The symbol means that the product contains specific toxic substances (6
substances) designated as RoHS and that the product conforms to the
Chinese RoHS directive.
018-241-02E
Safety-8
1.7 Precautions on Radiation
 Safety information about radiation
If violating the safety regulations, it may lead to illness, irreversible damage to body
cells and the genotype, severe injuries and even death.
For those processes that must release radiation, pay special attention to the followings:
- Use available radiation protective devices.
- Wear radiation protective clothing (lead apron).
- Stay as far away as possible from the radiation source.
- Release radiation only if necessary.
- Set the radiation dose as low as possible (low kV and low mAs).
- Release radiation for as short a time as possible.
 Radiation protection
Ionizing radiation can lead radiation injuries if handled incorrectly. When radiation is
applied, the required protective measures must be complied with in any event.
 Precautions on exposure
- When performing the exposure, keep a distance from the X-ray cart to prevent from
being exposed to radiation.
- Confirm that there is no other person around the X-ray cart when perform the
exposure.
018-241-01E
Safety-9
2. Labels (A) X-ray Tube Device Label (405N200729F)
2.1 Rating Indication Labels and Caution Labels

(B) Angle Meter Scale Cover Label (β axis) (64% size) (405N130030A)
2.1.1 X-ray Source Section (1/2)
(C) Arm Lock Release Label (382N130036B)
(D) Collimator Label (405N130029C) (E) HHS Certification Label

(For U.S.) (405N201211)
(F) Collimator Aperture Indication Label (upper blade) (80% size)

(405N130033A)
(G) Angle Meter Scale Cover Label (α axis) (80% size) (405N130014C)
018-241-04E
Safety-10
 NOTE 
(A) The switching machine for the X-ray tube device label (405N200729) is as per the
following.
- #xxxx0144 or earlier: 405N200729D
- #xxxx0145 or later: 405N200729E
- #xx0222 or later (Japan), # xx0227 or later (Overseas): 405N200729F
018-241-05E
Safety-11
2.1.2 X-ray Source Section (2/2) (C) Protective Ground Terminal Mark (engraved mark)
(D) Collimator aperture indication label (lower blade) (405N130034B)
(E) Additional Filter Material Indication Label (405N130036C)
(F) Additional Filter Label (405N130035C)
(A) Arm Lock Release Label (382N130049) (G) Angle Meter Scale Cover Label (α axis) (80% size) (405N130014C)
(B) High Voltage Caution Label (405N200727)
018-241-05E
Safety-12
2.1.3 Arm Section (A) Do Not Push Label (405N200702)
(B) Do Not Strike Label (For U.S.) (405N201298)
(C) Load Capacity Label (Optional: Apron Hanger) (405N200801)
018-241-05E
Safety-13
2.1.4 X-ray Cart Section (1/2) (A) Cassette Approaching Label (B) SE Connector Label
(405N201401) (405N201402)
(C) SE Cassette Variation Label

(405N201403A)
(D) Trademark Label

For Japan (405N200738)
For U.S. (405N200740)
For overseas countries other than U.S. (405N200741)
018-241-05E
Safety-14
(E) X-ray Exposure Caution (H) HHS Warning Label
Label (405N200786A) For U.S. (405N201210)
For overseas countries other than U.S.

(405N201393A)
(F) Cassette Lock Label (I) Key Switch Label (405N200724C)

(405N130001C)
(G) High Voltage Caution (J) Consult Accompanying Documents

Label (405N200727) Label (405N102618)
 NOTE 
For Brazil, there is no label for the (H) section.
018-241-06A
Safety-15
2.1.5 X-ray Cart Section (2/2) (G) Rating/Standard/Identification Label (80% size)
For Japan (405N200805B)
For U.S. (405N200694D)
For overseas countries other

than U.S. (405N200797A)
(A) Accessory Case (B) Accessory Case

Identification Label Withstand Load Label
For Brazil (405N201981)
(405N200803) (405N200802)
(C) Protective Ground Terminal (D) Wet Tissue Holder

Mark (engraved mark) Identification Label
(405N200804)
(E) Breaker Switch Label (F) Consult Accompanying

(405N200723C) Documents Label
(405N102618)
018-241-07E
Safety-16
(H) HHS Certification Label (For U.S.) (405N201211) (H) EU-REP Label (For Europe and Australia) (405N202277)
 NOTE 
(G) The rating/standard/Identification label for the other overseas switching machine
(405N200797) is as per the following.
- #xxxxx226 or earlier: 405N200797
- #xxxxx227 or later: 405N200797A
 NOTE 
(G) The rating/standard/Identification label for Japan switching machine (405N200805)
is as per the following.
- #xxxxxxxx or earlier: 405N200805A
- #xxxxxxxx or later: 405N200805B
018-241-07E
Safety-17
2.1.6 Battery 2.1.7 Carry Cart (Option)
(A) Carry Cart Identification Label (405N200956)
(A) Battery Label (405N200728C)
018-241-07E
Safety-18
2.1.8 In-vehicle Kit (Option) 2.1.9 FUJIFILM-made AP
(A) Access Point Product Label
(B) Access Point Radio Act Certification Label
(A)
POCX01Sa02054J.ai
 NOTE  (A) (B) (C)

The in-vehicle kit label is applied on the dummy cassette.
(A) In-vehicle Kit Label (Outside for the U.S.) (405N201941) POCX01Sp01016.ai
(C) Additional Radio Act Certification Label

Target country Radio Certification label
Morocco
In-vehicle Kit Label (For U.S.) (405N201952)

Taiwan
Australia/
New Zealand
UAE
Serbia
018-241-07E
Safety-19
Chile
Vietnam
Mexico
Argentina
Brazil Brazil 1
Brazil 2
 NOTE 
The additional Radio Certification label need to be attached at the time of installation
by the country.
$ {IN: Appendix 18._Attaching the FUJIFILM-made AP Radio Law Label}
018-241-07E
Safety-20
2.1.10 D-EVO2 Panels for Brazilian DR-XD 1000  DR-ID 1202SE
 DR-ID 1201SE
(A)
(A)
POCX01Sa02056J.ai
POCX01Sa02055J.ai
(A) SE pharmaceutical certification label (405N201967)
(A) SE pharmaceutical certification label (405N201966)
For labels other than above, refer to the DR-ID 1200 Service Manual.
018-241-07E
Safety-21
3. CLASSIFICATION
3.1 DR-XD 1000

1. According to the type of protection against electrical shock
Class I machine (when using commercial power)
Inner power device (when battery is used)
2. According to the degree of protection against electrical shock

Type B applicable
3. Protection against harmful ingress of water

(protection class against water penetration)
IPX0
4. According to the degree of safety of application in the presence of a

flammable anesthetics mixture with air or with oxygen or nitrous oxide
Equipment not suitable for use in the presence of a flammable anesthetics mixture
with air or with oxygen or nitrous oxide.
5. According to the mode of operation

Continuous use
018-241-07E
Safety-22
4. Cautions on Electromagnetic Waves 4.1.2 Further Information for IEC 60601-1-2 (EN60601-1-2)
1 Medical electrical equipment needs special precautions regarding EMC and needs
to be installed and put into service according to the EMC information provided in the
4.1 DR-XD 1000 accompanying documents.
2 Portable and mobile RF communications equipment can affect medical electrical
equipment.
4.1.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) 3 Information regarding the cable affecting EMC is as follows.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for medical Maximum
Name Connected Device General Specification
devices to the IEC 60601-1-2 (EN60601-1-2), Medical Device Directive 93/42/EEC. Length
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful <Connection>
- Cat5e or more (UTP type)
interference in a typical medical installation. Network cable
Between the DR-XD 1000
20 m - 1000 Base-T
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not and the hospital network
<Connection>
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference - Straight cable
to other devices in the vicinity.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular Power cable DR-XD 1000 3m Use a hospital-grade power cable.
installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to other devices, which can be
determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to 4 The use of accessories, transducers and cables other than those specified, with the
correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: exception of transducers and cables sold by FUJIFILM Corporation as replacement
- Reorient or relocate the receiving device. parts for internal components, may result in increased emissions or decreased
- Increase the separation between the equipment. immunity of the DR-XD 1000.
- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the 5 The DR-XD 1000 should not be used adjacent to or stacked with other equipment.
other device(s) are connected. If adjacent or stacked use is necessary, the DR-XD 1000 should be observed to
verify normal operation in the configuration in which it will be used.
6 Basic performance of the equipment and the system Image data are acquired from
If the problem cannot be solved with the above measures, stop using this equipment
the DR-ID 1200 and are saved in and displayed on the DR-ID 300CL.
and consult the manufacturer or our official dealer for help.
7 Test item. (table 1 to table 4)
WARNINGS
- Do not place devices generating electromagnetic wave near this equipment.
- If a device(s) other than those specified is connected, predetermined EMC
performance cannot be guaranteed.
018-241-07E
Safety-23
Table 1 Table 2
Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - electromagnetic emissions Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - electromagnetic immunity
The DR-XD 1000 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The DR-XD 1000 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below.
The customer or the user of the DR-XD 1000 should assure that they are used in such an The customer or the user of the DR-XD 1000 should assure that they are used in such an
environment. environment.
Electromagnetic Electromagnetic
Emissions test Compliance Immunity test IEC 60601 test level Compliance level environment -
environment - guidance
guidance
RF emissions The DR-XD 1000 uses
CISPR 11 RF energy only for their Electrostatic ±6 kV contact ±6 kV contact Floors should be
internal function. discharge (ESD) wood, concrete or
Therefore, their RF IEC 61000-4-2 ±8 kV air ±8 kV air ceramic tile. If floors
Group 1 emissions are very low are covered with
and are not likely to cause synthetic material,
any interference in nearby the relative humidity
electronic equipment. should be at least
30%.
RF emissions The DR-XD 1000 is
CISPR 11 Class B Electrical fast ±2 kV for power ±2 kV for power Mains power quality
suitable for use in all transient/burst supply lines supply lines should be that of a
establishments other IEC 61000-4-4 typical commercial or
Harmonic emissions than domestic and those
Complies ±1 kV for input/output ±1 kV for input/output hospital environment.
IEC 61000-3-2 directly connected to lines lines
the public low-voltage
Voltage fluctuations/ power supply network that Surge ±1 kV differential ±1 kV differential Mains power quality
flicker emissions Complies supplies buildings used for IEC 61000-4-5 mode mode should be that of a
IEC 61000-3-3 domestic purposes. typical commercial or
±2 kV common mode ±2 kV common mode hospital environment.
Voltage dips, short <5% UT <5% UT Mains power quality
interruptions and (>95% dip in UT ) (>95% dip in UT ) should be that of a
voltage variations on for 0.5 cycle for 0.5 cycle typical commercial or
power supply input hospital environment.
lines 40% UT 40% UT If the user of the DR-
IEC 61000-4-11 (60% dip in UT ) (60% dip in UT ) XD 1000 requires
for 5 cycles for 5 cycles continued operation
during power mains
70% UT 70% UT interruptions, it is
(30% dip in UT ) (30% dip in UT ) recommended that
for 25 cycles for 25 cycles the DR-XD 1000 be
powered from an
<5% UT <5% UT uninterruptible power
(>95% dip in UT ) (>95% dip in UT ) supply or a battery.
for 5 s for 5 s
Power frequency 3 A/m 3 A/m Power frequency
(50/60 Hz) magnetic magnetic fields
field should be at levels
IEC 61000-4-8 characteristic of a
typical location in a
typical commercial or
hospital environment.
NOTE: UT is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.
018-241-07E
Safety-24
Table 3 Table 4
Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - electromagnetic immunity Recommended separation distances between Portable and mobile RF
communications equipment and the DR-XD 1000
The DR-XD 1000 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The DR-XD 1000 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment in which
The customer or the user of the DR-XD 1000 should assure that they are used in such an radiated RF disturbances are controlled.
environment. The customer or the user of the DR-XD 1000 can help prevent electromagnetic
IEC 60601 Compliance interference by maintaining a minimum distance between portable and mobile RF
Immunity test Electromagnetic environment - guidance communications equipment (transmitters) and the DR-XD 1000 as recommended
test level level
below, according to the maximum output power of the communications equipment.
Conducted RF 3 Vrms 3 Vrms Portable and mobile RF communications
IEC 61000-4-6 150 kHz to equipment should be used no closer to any Separation distance according to frequency of transmitter
80 MHz Rated maximum m
part of the DR-XD 1000, including cables, output power of
than the recommended separation distance transmitter 80 MHz to 800 MHz to
calculated from the equation applicable to 150 kHz to 80 MHz
W 800 MHz 2.5 GHz
the frequency of the transmitter. d = 1.2
d = 1.2 d = 2.3
0.01 0.12 0.12 0.23
Recommended separation distance
d = 1.2 0.1 0.38 0.38 0.73
Radiated RF 3 V/m 3 V/m d = 1.2 80 MHz to 800 MHz 1 1.2 1.2
IEC 61000-4-3 80 MHz to 2.3
2.5 GHz d = 2.3 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz 10 3.8 3.8 7.3
100 12 12 23
where P is the maximum output power rating
of the transmitter in watts (W) according to For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the
the transmitter manufacturer and d is the recommended separation distance d in metres (m) can be estimated using the
recommended separation distance in metres equation applicable to the frequency of the transmitter, where P is the maximum
(m). output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter
Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters, manufacturer.
as determined by an electromagnetic site NOTE 1: At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency
survey,a should be less than the compliance range applies.
level in each frequency range.b NOTE 2: These guidelines may not apply in all situations.
Interference may occur in the vicinity Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and reflection from
of equipment marked with the following structures, objects and people.
symbol:
NOTE 1: At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is
affected by absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.
a
Field strength from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless)
telephones and land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV
broadcast cannot be predicted theoretically with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic
environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be
considered. If the measured field strength in the location in which the DR-XD 1000 is used
exceeds the applicable RF compliance, the DR-XD 1000 should be observed to verify normal
operation. If abnormal performance is observed, additional measures may be necessary,
such as reorienting or relocating the DR-XD 1000.
b
Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strength should be less than 3 V/m.
018-241-07E
Safety-25
5. CONNECTABLE PERIPHERALS
Peripheral equipment to be connected with the analog interface or the digital interface
should conform to the related standards (that is, the IEC60950-1 for a data processor,
and the IEC60601-1 or JIS T 0601-1 for medical equipment).
Furthermore all configurations shall comply with the system standard IEC 60601-1-1
or JIS T 0601-1-1.
Everybody who connects additional equipment to the signal input part or signal
output part configures a medical system, and is therefore responsible that the system
complies with the requirements of IEC 60601-1-1 or JIS T 0601-1-1.
018-241-07E
Safety-26
BLANK PAGE
018-241-07E
Safety-27
BLANK PAGE
018-241-07E
Control Sheet
11.30.2016 02 Revision (FM9462) 1 to 4, 6, 8, 10, 11
11.30.2016 02 Changes in pagination (FM9462) 5, 7, 9, 12 to 15
05.31.2017 03 Revision (FM9471) 1 to 4, 10, 13

11.30.2017 04 Revision for MC V16.2 (FM9486) 2, 10, 12, 13, 15
11.30.2017 04 Changes in pagination (FM9486) 14
10.31.2018 05 Revision for MC V16.6 (FM9528) 2, 5, 6, 14 to 16
10.31.2018 05 Changes in pagination (FM9528) 7 to 13, 17 to 19
05.31.2019 06 Revision for U.S. and Brazil (FM9565) 1, 3, 11, 13, 17
09.30.2019 07 Revision for MC V17.1 (FM9587) 1, 2, 14, 15
02.29.2020 08 Revision for CSL V13.0 (FM9630) 14
Product Specifications
018-241-08E
Spec-1
1. Commodity Composition and  Supplied Options
Optional Items Abbreviated product

name
Product
Place of
destination
Remark
DR-XD 1000 BATTERY # Japan When installed,

1.1 Commodity Composition
integrated into the X-ray
cart. Because this is a
X-ray cart battery pack hazardous object, it is
DR-XD 1000 BATTERY E Overseas specially packaged and
1.1.1 DR-XD 1000 transported via a cargo
flight.
 Main Unit Integrated into the X-ray
Access point cart when installed in
Abbreviated product Place of DR-XD 1000 AP E Overseas
Product Remark (overseas) order to comply with the
name destination Radio Law for overseas.
With FUJIFILM-made
X-ray cart main unit AP embedded
DR-XD 1000 MBL
(For Japan, Windows Japan Product name:
WIN10 A #
10-installed model) FUJIFILM DR
CALNEO AQRO
X-ray cart main unit Overseas
DR-XD 1000 MBL Product name:
(For overseas, Windows other than
WIN10 E FUJIFILM FDR nano
10-installed model) U.S.
X-ray cart main unit
(For USA, Windows U.S.
WIN10 US E FUJIFILM FDR AQRO
10-installed model)
(For Brazil, Windows Brazil
WIN10 BR E FUJIFILM FDR nano
10-installed model)
With FUJIFILM-made
AP embedded
DR-XD 1000 MBL A # Japan Product name:
(For Japan)
FUJIFILM DR
CALNEO AQRO
Overseas
X-ray cart main unit Product name:
DR-XD 1000 MBL E other than
(For overseas) FUJIFILM FDR nano
U.S.
DR-XD 1000 MBL US E U.S.
(For USA) FUJIFILM FDR AQRO
DR-XD 1000 MBL BR E Brazil
(For Brazil) FUJIFILM FDR nano
018-241-07E
DR-XD 1000 Service Manual Spec-1
Spec-2
 Options Abbreviated product
Product
Place of
Remark
name destination
Abbreviated product Place of
Product Remark DR-XD 1000
name destination Japan
MCR MOUNTING KIT # Magnetic card reader A kit for fixing the
DR-XD 1000 FILTER # Japan A dedicated additional fixation kit magnetic card reader
Additional filter DR-XD 1000
DR-XD 1000 FILTER E Overseas filter for DR-XD 1000. Overseas
MCR MOUNTING KIT E
DR-XD 1000 The supplemental AL
Japan
HIGH HANDLE KIT # High type handle An option for changing sheet kit for supporting
DR-XD 1000 AL SHEET Irradiation dose
Option the driving handle height. Overseas the dose efficiency
DR-XD 1000 KIT E compensation filter kit
Overseas standards in each
HIGH HANDLE KIT E country
DR-XD 1000 A pocket for storing the DR-XD 1000
Japan Japan
ACCESSORY CASE # power cord, disposable IN-VEHICLE KIT #
Accessory case
DR-XD 1000 bags, battery packs for Kit for in-vehicle
Overseas the SE, etc. Overseas
ACCESSORY CASE E DR-XD 1000 mounting the DR-XD
In-vehicle kit other than
IN-VEHICLE KIT E 1000 without lying it
U.S.
DR-XD 1000 BT BCR sideways
Japan An overseas kit for the
KIT # Bluetooth barcode DR-XD 1000
Bluetooth barcode reader U.S.
reader IN-VEHICLE KIT US E
DR-XD 1000 BT BCR and its wireless adapter.
Overseas
KIT E DR-XD 1000 WIN10
Japan OS upgrade kit on the
OS UPG KIT # Windows 10 OS market market
DR-XD 1000 BT BCR Bluetooth BCR USB Wireless adapter for
Japan upgrade kit Win7 Pro Emb→Win10
USB # adapter Bluetooth barcode reader DR-XD 1000 WIN10
Overseas LTSC2019
OS UPG KIT E
DR-XD 1000
Japan
WET TISSUE HOLDER # Wet tissue case holder DR-XD 1000 300CL 300CL V12.1 upgrade DR-ID 300CL V12.1
Wet tissue holder Japan
stand V12.1 UPG # kit (For Japan) Japan upgrade kit
DR-XD 1000
Overseas
WET TISSUE HOLDER E DR-XD 1000 300CL 300CL V12.1 upgrade DR-ID 300CL V12.1
Overseas
V12.1 UPG E kit (For Overseas) Overseas upgrade kit
DR-XD 1000
Japan A bar for hanging the
APRON HANGER # X-ray protection apron  NOTE 
X-ray protection apron
DR-XD 1000 hanger
Overseas next to the arm. (*) When installing the Area dose imeter fixation kit, in addition purchase the following.
APRON HANGER E - DAP: Vacutech-made VacuDAP OEM No.1560015
DR-XD 1000 - Cable: Vacutech-made VacuDAP Interface Cable RS-232 No.9520061
Japan
DAP METER FIX KIT # Area dose meter
Kit for attaching and Cable length 3.0 m
wiring the Dose Area - Guide: Vacutech-made VacuDAP U-guide-pair 132mm No.1560048
DR-XD 1000 fixation kit
Overseas Product (DAP) meters.(*)
DAP METER FIX KIT E (**) To use 898Y201046 for FDR nano #### or earlier, purchase 898Y201045 as well.
DR-XD 1000
Japan
CARRY CART # Cart for transporting the
X-ray cart carry cart
DR-XD 1000 X-ray cart
Overseas
CARRY CART E
018-241-07E
Spec-3
1.1.2 Flat Panel Sensor  Options
 Flat Panel Sensor (SE) Product abbreviation Name of machine Destination Remarks
Type DR1200 SE BATTERY # Japan

Model Size Destination Product abbreviation Remarks Battery Pack for the
*1 Lithium-ion battery
DR1200 SE BATTERY SE
Japan DR-ID 1201 SE # Overseas
E
DR-ID 1201 SE 14"x17" Overseas DR-ID 1201 SE E DR1200 SE-DS
Japan
ADAPTER # For 1201SE, 1202SE,
Brazil DR-ID 1201 SE BR A E SE Adapter
GOS DR1200 SE-DS 1211SE, 1212SE
ADAPTER E
DR-ID 1202 SE 17"x17" Overseas DR-ID 1202 SE E DR1214 SE-DS
Japan
Brazil DR-ID 1202 SE BR A E ADAPTER # SE Adapter
For 1213SE and 1214SE
DR1213 SE-DS (Small type)
DR-ID 1211 SE 14"x17" ADAPTER E
Overseas DR-ID 1211 SE E
DR-XD 1000 1270 DS Designated
Adapter for the FPD For DR-ID1270 panel
Japan DR-ID 1212 SE # ADAPTER E countries
DR-ID 1212 SE 17"x17"
CsI Overseas DR-ID 1212 SE E DR1270 SE BATTERY Battery Pack for the Designated Lithium-ion battery for
E SE countries DR-ID1270 Panel
24 cm
DR-ID 1213 SE x Overseas DR-ID 1213 SE E
30 cm
DR-ID 1214 SE 10"x12" Japan DR-ID 1214 SE #
DR-ID1271SE 14"x17" DR-ID1271 SE E
GOS
Designated
DR-ID1274SE 17"x17" countries DR-ID1274 SE E
CsI
24 cm
DR-ID1275SE x DR-ID1275 SE E
30 cm
*1: Scintillator material
018-241-06A
Spec-4
2. Weight and Dimensions  Dimensions (with arm completely extended horizontally)
W600 x D1720 x H1460 (mm)
2.1 DR-ID 1200

$ {DR-ID 1200CL Service Manual: Spec}
2.2 DR-XD 1000

 Weight
Approx. 90.0 kg (excluding the flat panel sensor)
 Dimensions (with arm retracted)

- Countries other than U.S. : W600 x D770 x H1460 (mm)
- For U.S. : W600 x D851 x H1460 (mm)
 Dimensions (with arm completely extended vertically)

W600 x D1500 x H2100 (mm)
018-241-03E
Spec-5
 Dimensions (Reference Axis and Focal Spot)  NOTE 
The “Collimator installation reference surface” is not the cover surface, it can be seen
by removing the collimator, it is the following yellow surface.
REFERENCE
The rotation range of the unit is as follows.
018-241-05E
Spec-6
 Dimensions (Carry Cart)
W950 x D1582 x H826 (mm)
Weight: Approx. 35 kg
018-241-05E
Spec-7
3. Space for Use
 NOTE 
- In accordance with the Radio Law, the W52 and W53 type channels (36, 40, 44,
48, 52, 56, 60 and 64) cannot be used outdoors. If wireless communications are to
be used outdoors, select a 5 GHz other than the aforementioned channels or a 2.4
GHz. All of the channels can be used indoors.
- When selecting 2.4 GHz on the AP, select 20 MHz on the “Channel Width”. Do not
select 40 MHz.
- When the W53 or W56 type channel is selected, if interference is detected, then
perform the following workaround operations. This is because avoiding interference
with the weather radar is required by the DFS (Dynamic Frequency Selection).
- In order to detect radar waves about one minute before starting the communication with
each channel, the wireless communication cannot be performed during the detection.
- If radar waves are detected during wireless communications, the wireless
communications will be interrupted, and the channel will be changed. After the
channel has been changed, then the radar wave detection will be implemented
again in about one minute, and if no radar waves are detected, then the wireless
communications will be resumed on the changed channel. At this time, the SE will
automatically follow over to the AP channel. The wireless communications will be
maintained on the changed channel until the AP is restarted.
- In case of the FUJIFILM-made AP, the “WSTAT” LED flashes red during the DFS
search operation.
3.1 DR-XD 1000

Spaces for using are as followings for the DR-XD 1000.
Variation Installation area Ground tilt
Countries other than U.S. 550 mm x 765 mm Less than 5°
U.S. 550 mm x 846 mm Less than 5°
018-241-05E
Spec-8
4. Means for Position of
the caster
Status of the
Movement of the X-ray cart
Moving and Fixing the Machine
rear wheels
lock pedal
Top Rightward/
leftward
 Moving movement,
oblique
Not specified. movement
and rightward/
 Fixing leftward rotation
are locked
The caster lock pedal changes the state of the rear wheels. The caster lock pedal is
located on both the front and rear side of the X-ray cart. This pedal locks or releases
the rear wheels to fix or move the X-ray cart.
Middle All locks are

released
Bottom All casters are The X-ray cart is fixed.

locked
* Set the caster lock pedal in the top position to make a right/left turn more smoothly.
018-241-05E
Spec-9
5. Environmental Conditions
5.1 DR-XD 1000

The environmental conditions for installing the DR-ID 1000 are described below.
 Temperature and humidity conditions

Product specification
Temperature 15°C−30°C
15%−80% RH
Humidity
Operating (without moisture condensation)
Atmospheric pressure 700−1060 hPa
Temperature 5°C−35°C
10%−80% RH
Non-operating Humidity
(without moisture condensation)
Temperature -10°C−50°C
10%−90% RH
Transit/storage Humidity
 Floor (Machine Surface) Vibration

10 to 55 Hz in frequency and 0.0075 mm or less in amplitude
 Installation Site Conditions

Avoid the following installation sites:
- Places where the temperature changes drastically
- Places near heat sources such as heaters
- Places where water leakage or machine submersion may occur
- Places where a corrosive gas may be generated
- Dusty places
- Places where the machine is subject to constant or excessive vibration or shock
- Places exposed to direct sunlight
- Places where no ventilation equipment is provided
018-241-05E
Spec-10
6. Electrical Specifications  I/F Cable
For some parts, such as network cables, locally obtained parts may be used. In this
case, parts that meet the requirements set forth below should be obtained locally.
6.1 DR-XD 1000  Network cable
 Frequency Connected Device
Maximum
General Specification
Cable Length
50−60 Hz
<Grade>
 Input Voltage - Category 5e or more (UTP type)
Between the DR-XD 1000
100-240 V ~ ±10% 20 m - 1000Base-T
and the hospital network
<Connection>
 Power Source and Grounding Conditions Straight cable
AC outlet (3-pin)
 Rated Amperage
8 - 3.33 A (AC100-240V)
 Overload Protection
Circuit breaker incorporated (3A)
 Power Consumption
Less than 800 W
 Maximum allowable impedance of power source

0.5 Ω
 Grounding resistance
Ground terminal: Class D, ground resistance 0.1 Ω or less
Additional protective ground wire connector: Class D, ground resistance 0.1 Ω or less
018-241-05E
Spec-11
 Power Cable 6.2 DR-ID 1200
 Japan $ {DR-ID 1200 Service Manual: Spec}
- Use the supplied cable.
 USA
- Wire diameter : 18 AWG or more
- Rated voltage : 125 VAC or higher 6.3 DR-ID 1270
- Rated current : 7 A or higher $ {DR-ID 1270 Service Manual: Spec}
- Cable type : SJT
- Cable length : 3 m or shorter
- The caution label indicating that the cable should be grounded with an outlet
conforming to the UL60601 must be applied.
- Use a detachable power cable as UL listed.
- Use a plug of the hospital grade.
 Canada
- Wire diameter : 18 AWG or more
- Rated voltage : 125 VAC or higher
- Rated current : 7 A or higher
- Cable type : SJT
- Plug
Mold type: Use a plug of the hospital grade conforming to the CSA C22.2 No. 21.
Assembly type: Should conform to the SA C22.2 No. 42.
- Cable: Should conform to the CSA C22.2 No. 21.
 Europe
- Use the cable certified by the country where the machine is to be installed.
- Cable section area : 1.0 mm2 or more
- Rated voltage : 250 VAC or higher
- Rated current : 6 A or higher
- Cable type : H05VV-F
018-241-06E
Spec-12
7. DR-XD 1000PX Specifications Item Specification
Operating Mode Continuous usage with intermittent load
 X-ray tube device Continuous Operation
160 shots / 1 hour
(100kV 2.5mAs, non-stop 6 hours, 22.5 second interval)
Item Specification
When measuring the X-ray output with neighboring
Maximum output power 2.5 kW(100 kV, 25 mA) setting of tube current-time product on the specific
range while exposing, the measurement value
2.5 kW (100 kV, 25 mA, 0.1 s) Linearity of air kerma in the specific of neighboring setting should meet the following
(Multiply the maximum tube current by the maximum range of the X-ray tube load formula.
Nominal maximum output power
tube voltage when the tube voltage is 100kV and the condition
elapsed time is 0.1 second.)
Nominal maximum tube voltage and the
maximum tube current when nominal 100 kV, 25 mA
maximum tube voltage is reached
Maximum tube current and the  Collimator
maximum tube voltage when the 71 kV, 35 mA
maximum tube current is reached Item Specification
The tube voltage and the tube current 0−31 cm×31 cm (SID 65 cm)
100 kV, 25 mA Irradiation field
that makes the maximum output power 0−47 cm×47 cm (SID 100 cm)
Nominal maximum output power 0.25 mAs Light irradiation field illuminance 200 lx or more (SID 100 cm)
Minimum tube current-time product 40−100 kV : 0.25−25 mAs 30 seconds (can be set to 60, 90, 120, 180 seconds)
Lighting time
Auto lights-out timer
Tube current-time product
400 mAs (100 kV)
depending on tube voltage Irradiation field dimension
Acceptable total mAs for 1 hour 40−100 kV 1 kV step indication (SID 100 cm)
Tube voltage range ±10 % Inherent filtration 1.2 mmAl equivalent 70 kV

0.25, 0.32, 0.4, 0.5, 0.63, 0.8, 1.0, 1.25, 1.6, 2.0, 2.5, Distance Max 200 cm
Tube voltage accuracy
3.2, 4.0, 5.0, 6.3, 8.0, 10.0, 12.5, 16.0, 20.0, 25.0
Range of tube current-time product (mAs) ±(10 % + 0.2 mAs)
 X-ray tube device holding section
Accuracy of tube current-time product 1.2
Item Specification
Target angle 16°
X-ray tube holder Pantagraph arm
Anode heat
35 kJ(50 kHU) Distance from the focus to Maximum : 2,000mm
content
X-ray tube the ground Minimum : 370mm
Maximum anode
250 W(350 HU/s)
cooling rate Recommended SID 100cm
Accessible surface temperature of
41°or lower
X-ray tube device
47 cm x 47 cm (100cm from the focus)
Maximum symmetrical irradiation field
According to JIS Z 4122
018-241-05E
Spec-13
8. Other Specifications  Image quality; Noise (DQE), Sharpness (MTF)
- DR-ID 1200 series SE
DR-ID 1211SE
 SE DR-ID 1201SE
DR-ID 1212SE
DR-ID 1202SE
DR-ID 1213SE
 X-ray conversion mode
DQE (1mR, 0cyc) 45%±10% 72%±10%
Indirect conversion mode (GOS/CsI* scintillator)
* GOS: Terbium-activated gadolinium oxysulfide; one of materials emitting light by DQE (1mR, 1cyc) 30%±10% 54%±10%
X-ray energy. Gd2O2S. DQE (0.01mR, 1cyc) 22%±20% 44%±20%
CsI: Cesium iodide ; one of materials emitting light by X-ray energy.
MTF (1cyc) * 75%±10% 80%±10%
 Number of pixels and effective image area MTF (2cyc) * 42%±10% 54%±10%
Maximum recording size Number of pixels (pixel) Effective image area (mm) *The above MTF values for DR-ID 1201SE/DR-ID 1202SE are for the operation in high
sharpness mode.
9.1" x 11.3" (24 cm x 30 cm) 1,920 x 1,536 288 x 230.4
- DR-ID1270 series SE
9.7" x 11.7" 1,648 x 1,980 247.2 x 297
DR-ID1273SE
13.8" x 16.8" 2,336 x 2,836 350.4 x 425.4 DR-ID1271SE
DR-ID1274SE
DR-ID1272SE
DR-ID1275SE
16.7" x 16.8" 2,832 x 2,836 424.8 x 425.4
DQE (1mR, 0cyc) 45%±10% 72%±10%
 Pixel resolution DQE (1mR, 1cyc) 31%±10% 54%±10%

0.15 (mm/pixel) DQE (0.01mR, 1cyc) 22%±20% 44%±20%
MTF (1cyc) * 75%±10% 80%±10%
 Concentration resolution
16 bit MTF (2cyc) * 42%±10% 54%±10%
*The above MTF values for DR-ID1271SE/DR-ID1272SE are for the operation in high
sharpness mode.
 Withstand load
- DR-ID 1200 series SE
Point load (Φ40) Surface load
160 kgf 310 kgf
- DR-ID1270 series SE
Point load (Φ40) Surface load
120 kgf 300 kgf
018-241-06E
Spec-14
 Minimum inherent filtration  Supported software
Total filtration: 2.5mmAl equivalent 70kV (without additional filter)
 When the OS is Windows7
- DR-ID 300CL : V10.0 or later
 DR-ID 300CL (computer) minimum specification
- DR-ID 1200MC : V14.0 or later
Item General Specification - DR-XD1000 maintenance tool : V1.0 or later
Manufacturer/Model Avalue Japan / BFC-1208-430A1-07R
CPU Intel Haswell ULT Core i5-4300U (1.9GHz)  When the OS is Windows10
Main Memory 4GB or more - DR-ID 300CL : V12.1 or later
- DR-ID 1200MC : V17.1 or later
Built-in SSD 128GB SATAIII MLC SSD - DR-XD1000 maintenance tool : V1.5 or later
Image storage domain 60GB
Approximately 3000 images (17" x 17", 20 MB/image)  Performance
Recorded image count
Approximately 7500 images (24 cm x 30 cm, 8 MB/image)
Windows 7 Pro Embedded64bit  Starting time
OS
Windows10 IoT Enterprise 2019 LTSC
Time from turning ON the power of the portable X-ray device and image processing
USB port (USB 2.0 port): 2 ports unit to the status of ready to expose is 200 seconds or less.
Port USB port (USB 3.0 port): 2 ports * Version DR-ID 300CL : V10.0 or later, DR-ID 1200MC : V14.0 or later
COM port (RS232C): 3 ports
Input device Keyboard and touch panel  Exposure interval
Display 1024 x 768 resolution color monitor (touch panel type), 12-inch It is possible to expose 45 pieces in a row with the minimum interval of 10 seconds.
* Exposure condition 85kV, 1.6mAs
 Weight and dimensions  Charging time
Approx. 3.0 kg Charging time from empty to full : 4 hours
W225.4 x D50.14 x H292.9 (mm) Charging time from empty to the level which 20 pieces per hour can be exposed : 15 minutes
 Temperature and humidity conditions * Exposure condition 85kV, 1.6mAs
Product specification  Battery persistence time

Operating Temperature 0°C−40°C Exposing 20 pieces per hour for 12 hours.
* Fully charged brand new battery
Humidity 0%−90%RH (without moisture condensation)
* Exposure condition 85kV, 1.6mAs
Atmospheric pressure -
Non-operating Temperature -10°C−50°C
Humidity 0%−90%RH (without moisture condensation)
Atmospheric pressure -
 Electrical specifications
- Frequency: 50/60Hz
- Input Voltage: 100-240V
- Max. Input Current: 5A
018-241-08E
Spec-15
 Noise  SW1
- Reset to factory setting: Power ON the switch for about 5 seconds after powering on
 #xxx50223 or earlier the power with the switch ON.
Operation : 55 dB or less - Soft reset: Power ON the switch for about 3 seconds or more while it is running.
Standby : 44 dB or less (except single noise)  NOTE 
The country code will not be reset.
 #xxx50224 or later
Operation : 25 dB or less
Standby : 25 dB or less (except single noise)
REFERENCE
The values are measured at positions that are 1.2 to 1.5 m above the floor and a 1 m
from the cart surface.
SW2
 FUJIFILM-made AP SW1
POCX01Sp01015.ai
 Status lamp
 SW2
Green Flash Startup processing - Wireless LAN OFF: During wireless LAN operation, power ON the switch for about 3
POWER Green Light up Startup complete seconds or more.
- Wireless LAN ON: Power ON for about 3 seconds or more while the wireless LAN is
Red Flash USB communications error OFF. (Soft reset is automatically done to update setting information.)
Green Light up 5 GHz band
 External dimensions and weight
WIRELESS Orange Light up 2.4 GHz band
W39 x D95 x H27 (mm)
Light off Wireless LAN OFF Less than 0.1 kg
Green Transmitting/receiving data 95 27
WSTAT
Red DFS operating
39
POCX01Sp01017.ai
 Wireless network interface

IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n
WIRELESS (Usable channels differ according to the radio laws of each country.)
WSTAT $ {MD: 11._Usable Radio Frequency Bands in Each Country for DR-ID 12xxSEs
POWER POCX01Sp01014.ai and FUJIFILM-made AP}
 NOTE 
 USB interface
For the new configured machines, since USB communications are not performed,
a USB communications error may be displayed, but this is within the specifications USB 2.0 port (Micro-B type): 1 port
range so it is not a problem.
018-241-08E
Spec-16
 Environmental Conditions  Bluetooth BCR and Bluetooth USB Adapter Selection Standards
In Japan, Europe and the United States, use DR-XD 1000 BT BCR KIT.
Product specification
In regions other than Japan, Europe, and the United States, select Bluetooth BCR and
Temperature 15°C−30°C Bluetooth USB adapters which satisfy the following.
Operating 20%−80% RH  NOTE 
Humidity
- For Bluetooth BCR and Bluetooth USB adapters which are selected according to
Temperature -20°C−50°C this standard, the quality itself is not guaranteed by FTYO.
Storage 20%−80% RH - Whenever there are changes in the operating environments (OS, Bluetooth drivers,
Humidity etc.), confirm that they operate each time.
If they do not work, reconsider the settings, and reselect the devices that are operating.
 Factory setting
IP address: 192.168.0.25  Bluetooth BCR
Subnet: 255.255.255.0
- Use OPTO Electronics OPN-3002i (or a product equivalent to OPTO Electronics) if
Channel: 44ch
available.
Channel width: 20MHz
- When OPTO Electronics OPN-3002i (or a product equivalent to OPTO Electronics)
SSID: FUJIAP05 cannot be obtained, select one that satisfies the following conditions.
Encryption: None - Bluetooth connection
 NOTE  - Operates with the SPP (Serial Port Profile).
If it is built into the DR-XD 1000 and it is shipped, it is shipped configured for the DR- - “ETX” can be set as a common suffix.
XD 1000 as per the following. - “Transfer ST/SP” can be set to Code 39.
- Channel: 44ch - “Abcd / abcd” can be set in ST/SP of Codabar (NW 7).
- SSID: FFaQro87 - The memory mode can be disabled when it is out of communications range.
- Encryption: ENCRYPTION - The Terminator can be set to “None”.
- Password: fujiFilm34
 Bluetooth USB adapter
Select one that satisfies the following conditions.
- Support the selected Bluetooth BCR Bluetooth version.
- Work with the Windows 7 standard Bluetooth driver.
- Operate with the SPP (Serial Port Profile).
 GPU Unit
Control board: Connect Tech Inc. ASG003
GPU: Nvidia Jetson TX2i (Industry type)
Communication: 1000Base-T
Power: 24VDC
018-241-07E
Spec-17
9. Supported Disinfectants
Disinfectants and neutral detergents based upon the following components are usable
on the DR-XD 1000.
- Disinfectant ethanol (76.9 - 81.4% ethanol volume), or anhydrous ethanol
- Isopropyl alcohol (concentration of 99.0% or less)
- Sodium hypochlorite (0.5% or less dilution)
REFERENCE
The above disinfectants can be used on every parts of DR-XD 1000.
$ For DR-ID 1200 series SE, refer to the DR-ID 1200 Service Manual.
For DR-ID1270 series SE, refer to the DR-ID1270 Service Manual.
018-241-06E
Spec-18
10. Disposal of the Machine 10.3 Lithium Ion Battery
Dispose of the machine or its components in compliance with the local regulations.
(SE Battery and Main Unit Battery)
Classify the wastes according to the local situations for collection or disposal. Dispose of according to local rules of the country or local government.
Take appropriate actions as consigning to waste disposers in principle.
WARNING
Observe precautions mentioned in the “Safety Precautions” and “Checks, 10.4 DR-ID 300CL
Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC)” when a component is to be When the DR-ID 300CL is to be disposed of, completely destroy the personal
removed. information.
10.1 Lithium Batteries

Dispose of according to local rules of the country or local government.
10.2 SE
Parts of the components of the SE contain such substances which possibly may
contaminate the environments if inadvertently disposed of.
Be sure to return the SE to the Parts Center when the machine is to be disposed of.
However, if the contamination of the SE surface is intense and can not be removed, do
not return the SE to the Parts Center, and dispose of according to the local regulations.
018-241-06E
Spec-19
BLANK PAGE
018-241-06E
Control Sheet
11.30.2016 02 Revision (FM9462) 6
05.31.2017 03 Revision (FM9471) 2, 4, 5 to 10

11.30.2017 04 Revision for MC V16.2 (FM9486) 2, 6, 8 to 12, 15, 16, 18 to 21
11.30.2017 04 Changes in pagination (FM9486) 13, 14, 17, 22, 23
2, 7 to 9, 12, 17 to 19, 22 to 35,
10.31.2018 05 Revision for MC V16.6 (FM9528)
AppxMD 1-1 to 1-4
05.31.2019 06 Revision for U.S. and Brazil (FM9565) 1, 12 to 16, 34
09.30.2019 07 Revision for MC V17.1 (FM9587) 17, 23, 26, 35 to 43
02.29.2020 08 Revision for CSL V13.0 (FM9630) 2, 36 to 39, 45
02.29.2020 08 Changes in pagination (FM9630) 40 to 44, 46, 47
Machine Description (MD)
018-241-08E
MD-1
1. Summary of the Machine
1.1 Features of the Machine

 DR-XD 1000
- Miniaturization and weight-saving are realized by using the sensitive system
combining the flat panel sensor (DR-ID 1201SE/DR-ID 1202SE/DR-ID 1211SE/
DR-ID 1212SE/DR-ID 1213SE/DR-ID 1214SE) and the image processing
software Virtual Grid. Furthermore, the cart caster mechanism enables free and
omnidirectional rotation and movement of the mobile X-ray device, which was not
possible in the past.
- The compact main body and the slim arm secure the vision of the front and lower
side when moving.
- The DR slot is equipped so that charging of flat panel sensor and panel sharing are
possible. Work of placing the flat panel sensor into the disposable bag is supported
by using the front-back mechanism of DR slot. In addition, the flat panel sensor can
be locked by the keylock.
- The operation panel combining the X-ray controller and the image processing unit
enables rotation, tilt, hoisting freely according to different users or situations.
- The exposure values of tube voltage, tube current-time product or the auto-
calculated area dose value will be placed into the DICOM tag. The Virtual software
is optimized automatically based on those values.
- By using the high-performance Li-ion battery, long period of use and boosting
charge is available. Furthermore, even if in low battery condition, commercial power
is also usable for exposure.
- By using the tray, accessory case, X-ray protection apron, it is possible to carry the
necessary things that are needed for exposure.
- Operation section is coated for antibacterial protection.
- As operating the adjust knob, the light irradiation field lights up automatically.
*Only for designated countries, the DR-ID1270 series SE (DR-ID1271SE/1272SE/127
3SE/1274SE/1275SE) can also be used instead of the DR-ID 1200 series SE.
018-241-06A
DR-XD 1000 Service Manual MD-1
MD-2
1.2 System Configuration Examples DR-XD 1000
The machine consists of the DR-XD 1000PX and DR-ID 1200. Mobile X-ray device Wireless Flat panel sensor
DR-XD 1000PX DR-ID 12xxSE
Configuration Remarks
A personal computer with monitor Battery pack
DR-XD 1000 Mobile digital X-ray device (BFC-1208) Wired
DR slot connection
DR-XD 1000PX X-ray cart section
adapter
Software for control cabinet
Built-in PC BFC-1208
DR-ID 1200MC
X-ray source device
FUJIFILM-made AP
Software for image processing unit
Li-ion battery DR-ID 300CL
DR-ID 300CL Software for image processing unit
DR-ID 1200MC* Software for control cabinet
DR-ID 1200 (System) Power
Flat panel sensor Battery 100 - 240 V
DR-ID 12xxSE
* Up to 5 pieces can be registered.
Battery pack for DR-ID 1200
Network line
DR slot connection adapter
*: Is the same as the DR-ID 1200 system. However, due to administrative reasons, the Image diagnosis workstation Printer
discs may be supplied with the number “114Y2312200 *” in the DR-ID 1200 system and POCX010102003E.ai
“114Y2335100 *” in the DR-XD 1000 system.
018-241-08E
MD-3
1.3 General Configuration of No. Name Descriptions
the DR-XD 1000 and Names I. X-ray source device

This term is collectively used to refer to collimators and
x-ray tube assemblies.
1.3.1 External View and Functions II. Collimator Restrict the X-ray field size of the collimator.
A high-pressure generator and X-ray tube are sealed with
■ Front side III. X-ray tube device insulating oil. It generates X-ray by applying high voltage
to the X-ray tube.
IV. Arm section It holds the X-ray source device.
It consists of an X-ray controller and an image processing
V. Operation panel
unit.
It turns ON/OFF the power supply of the X-ray source.
VI. Key switch
The key can be removed in OFF state.
VII. Hand switch It is the X-ray irradiation switch. It is a two-step switch.
VIII. Cart handle It is a handle used for moving the X-ray cart.
IX. DR lock key It locks the movable section of the DR lock knob.
X DR lock knob It secures the flat panel sensor to the DR slot.
One flat panel sensor can be stored.
The flat panel sensor should be placed against the left
XI. DR slot side. All flat panel sensor sizes are supported.
Storing the flat panel sensor will enable the battery to be
charged.
XII. Caster lock pedal It is used for securing or moving the X-ray cart.
When a bump (up to 1 cm high) is encountered while
XIII. Wheelie pedal moving the cart, the front wheels of the cart can be lifted
by stepping on the wheelie pedal.
It switches ON/OFF the connection between the battery
Main breaker and internal circuit. The battery can be charged even in
OFF state.
Power cable connecting It is used for charging the X-ray cart.
XIV.
section An adequately earthed 3-pole receptacle should be used.
When connecting the power cable and irradiating X-ray,
Additional protective
additional ground wire needs to be connected to the
grounding section
protective grounding terminal of a steady equipment.
018-241-01E
MD-4
■ Rear side No. Name Descriptions
Connector for external Connect the USB dongle.
I.
connection (USB) Do not connect the jig's disk drive.
II. FUJIFILM-made AP Communicate wireless with the flat panel sensor.
Connector for external
III. It is used for network connection with an external source.
connection (LAN)
IV. Arm joining section Holds the X-ray source device.
Connector for external Connect the magnetic card reader, jig’s keyboard, jig's
V.
connection (USB) disk drive, etc.
VI. Cart base The base of the X-ray cart including the casters, etc.
VII. Caster lock pedal It is used for securing or moving the X-ray cart.
018-241-03E
MD-5
■ X-ray tube / collimator No. Name Descriptions
It is used for adjusting the field size. Turning the knob
I. Adjust knob
turns on the light field lamp.
Light irradiation field Switch ON/OFF the collimator lamp. This is the same
II.
switch function as the light field switch of the X-ray controller.
It measures the SID (the distance between the focal point
and the flat panel sensor) during imaging. The scales on
III. Measure the measure do not start from zero, taking into account
the distance from the measure attachment position to the
focal position.
It indicates the rotation angle around the holding shaft of
IV. Angle meter
the X-ray tube assembly.
V. Angle scale It indicates the rotation angle around the arm shaft.
VI. Collimator handle Move the position of the X-ray source.
Additional filter insertion
VII. Insert the additional filter.
section
VIII. DAP installing section Install a DAP (Dose Area Product).
018-241-03E
MD-6
1.3.2 Board Location No. Name Descriptions
Display the exposure condition and device status using
I. OPP67A LED. Press the switch to change the exposure condition
or turn on the light field.
- The board that controls the device. It sets the exposure
condition and acquire the actual values. It also stores
the calibration data on the board.
II. GNC67A - Communicate with the console, maintenance tools,
FUJIFILM-made AP, exposure SW, INV board, DSC
board, POW board, OPP board, and DAP.
- Equipped with the same functions as the previous MP.
A noise filter board for the AC power supply.
III. NFL67A This board is located between the POW board and the
AC inlet, and removes power supply noises.
- Convert inputs from the AC battery or the battery to DC
50V and supplies the DC voltage to the DCC board
when the power is turned on. Also, recharges the
battery.
IV. POW67A - Communicate with the ADC board and receives the
thermistor and the potentiometer values as AD-converted
data.
- Notify the GNC board of warning errors and the
potentiometer values due to the thermistor values.
It supplies low-voltage DC power. (GNC board, PC, DAP)
V. DDC67A Drive fans for cooling the inside of the device.
Boost the voltage 57 - 48 V from the battery to 250 V and
supply the boosted voltage to the mono-tank.
VI. INV67A Battery (57 - 48 V) -> INV board (250 V) -> Mono-tank
(100 kV/25 mA)
Turn on the power from the battery to the inverter when
the shot switch SW1 is pressed.
VII. FET67A Supply the power from the battery to the POW board and
the inverter exposure system.
VIII. DSC65A It supplies signals and power to the SE.
Located in the collimator.
It performs AD conversion of the voltage values of the
collimator, potentiometer, and thermistor.
IX. ADC67A Control the exposure switch and the additional filter
switch.
Communicate with the POW board, and the GNC board.
X. LMP67A A light field LED board.
018-241-04E
MD-7
2. Block Diagram
2.1 System Block Diagram (For New Configured Machines: #xxx50224 or later)
Main Unit Head Unit
TNK67A Mono-tank
INV67A
Transformer-1 Arm Unit
AC250V 100kHz AC9kV 100kHz DC+50kV
Booster Booster
transformer circuit
Transformer-2
AC250V 100kHz AC9kV 100kHz
Key Booster Booster
DC-50kV
Switch transformer circuit
(for Operation
Panel)
TNK3
INV3
Hand Booster
X-ray Tube
TNK2
INV2
switch transformer
CN11/12/13
Thermistor
DC+12V
DDC67A
DR Slot DC+24V-1
DDC5
Unit Collimator Unit
ADC7
ADC6
ADC5
DC/DC
DSC65A LED LMP67A
ADC1
ADC2
Switch
DC+24V+2
DDC6/7
USB USB
ADC67A
DC/DC *2
CN31/41
GNC3/4/5
GNC22/23
GNC14
GNC7/8
GNC9
GNC67A
DC+12V
DC/DC *1
F1
F2
FET67A
DC+15V
DDC2/4/8
GNC11
DC/DC 2 1
GNC1/2/15
USB USB
FET3
6/24/26
DC+15V Operator Panel

DDC1/9
GNC
GNC18
GNC16
DC/DC
GNC13/25
Arm Unit
LAN
DC+24V
*2 FAN-A
POW2
POW6
Screen
*1
Touch
POW67A DC+5V
CSL_PC
Transformer(T1)
FAN1 CPU
USB
POW1
LAN Access
DC70V 3-Terminal
point
Regulator
POW7
OPP1
DC70V
DC+12V
POW3/9
NFL67A Transformer(T ) DC/DC
LAN
LAN
OPP67
F1 DC70V
NFL2
NFL1
DC+70V D38 D39

F2
LINE LOAD
DC70V
Battery Assy Breaker
DC+57.4V
±0.42V
POW8
Circuit CC/CV Battery A

Photo (UL2054, IEC62133) DC+57.4V
AC100~240V Protector Circuit ±0.42V
coupler
DC70V AC Line (L)
Noise (PC3)
Filter DC Line
Battery B AC High Voltage Line
Inlet (UL2054, IEC62133) DC+57.4V DC High Voltage Line
Photo +
coupler
±0.42V Board
(PC3) DC70V
*** Connector
POCX010102025J.ai
For the system block diagram in the case of the older configured machine, refer to the following.
$ {MD: Appendix 1._Block Diagram (For Older Configured Machines)}
For details on the differences between the new configured machine and the older configured machine, refer to the following.
$ {MD: 5._Changes in PC-GNC Connection Specifications}
018-241-05E
MD-8
2.2 Signal Diagram (For New Configured (2) Shot 1 ON
1. Input Shot 1 signal into the GNC board
Machines: #xxx50224 or later)
2. Transmit Shot 1 signal to the SE from the MP
■ Signal System Diagram Monitor
2.
Monitor Shot 1
LAN CSL
LAN
Eth1 Hosp
CSL GNC board MC
USB MC USB
GNC board LAN Shot 1 MP AP Maintenance
Wifi Tool
Shot SW MP AP Maintenance 1.
LAN Tool Shot 1
X-CON
X-CON DAP
Serial Serial OPP board
DAP
Serial SE
OPP board
Wireless LAN
POCX010102028J.ai
SE
3. Check that Shot 1 OK? to the CSL from the SE
POCX010102026J.ai
4. Return OK to the SE from the CSL

(1) When registering the menus
Monitor
Transmit the exposing conditions to the SE and the XCON on the GNC board from 3.
the CSL. Shot 1
OK? CSL
Monitor
GNC board MC
CSL
Shot 1 MP AP Maintenance
Tool
GNC board MC 4. OK
X-CON
Shot SW MP AP Maintenance
Tool DAP
OPP board
X-CON
SE
DAP POCX010102029J.ai
OPP board
SE
POCX010102027J.ai
018-241-05E
MD-9
(3) Shot 2 ON (4) After exposure
1. Input Shot 2 signal into the GNC board 1. Forward the actual results to INV board → GNC board → CSL
2. Transmit Shot 2 signal to the SE from the MP 2. Forward the preview images and actual images to SE → (AP) → MC/CSL
Cart Monitor
Cart Monitor
2. Shot 2
INV board CSL 1.
INV board CSL
GNC board MC
GNC board MC
Tool
1. Shot 2 Tool
X-CON
X-CON
DAP
DAP
OPP board
OPP board
SE 2.
POCX010102030J.ai
SE
POCX010102032J.ai
3. Transmit Shot 2 signal to the CSL from the SE

4. Transmit ShotGO=OK to the MP from the SE
5. Transmit EXP ON to the INV board from the MP
Cart 4. Monitor
5. EXP ON ShotGO
INV board =OK
CSL
GNC board MC
Tool
X-CON 3. Shot 2
DAP
OPP board
SE
POCX010102031J.ai
018-241-05E
MD-10
■ Exposing Sequence (9) (1)
(2) fil kV set
Shot 1 (7)
(1) Shot 1 inputs to the GNC board (Hand SW)
GNC board (4) STB_OK
Shot 2 (5)
(2) GNC board → POW board: Not rechargeable transmission (9) (2) (10) (6) EXP_ON
GNC board → INV board: Filament heat voltage set, exposing (8) kV, mAs
conditions transmission (2) (10) ON OFF
GNC board → FET board: ON Charge Charge Mono-tank
OFF ON FET board
(3) Battery → FET board → INV board: Power supply
(3)
POW board INV board
(4) INV board →GNC board: Irradiation preparations completed (STB_OK)
Battery
(5) Shot 5 inputs to the GNC board
POCX010102011J.ai
(6) GNC board →INV board: Exposure start (EXP_ON)
(7) GNC board →INV board: Acquire the actual values (kV value, mA value
(analog values)), the A/D conversion, integrate the mA time and
calculate mAs.
(8) GNC board: If it is detected that the set mAs value has been reached,
the irradiation shuts off
(9) Shot 1 and Shot 2 releases (OFF)
(10) GNC board →FET board: OFF

GNC board →POW board: Chargeable transmission
018-241-04E
MD-11
2.3 Fuse System Diagram
NFL67A POW67A DDC67A
DDC7 DDC6 DDC5

24V
F401
1
CSL PC
1 F1 1
POW1
NFL2
NFL1
36~65V
F3
POW3
1
DDC1
3
F2 3 24V DDC Fan
100~240V
24V POW Fan
12V
GNC67A
F101
GNC2 GNC1
DDC2
3
12V
F102 4
-15V
F301 2
DDC4
GNC6 GNC8 GNC14

6 ADC67A LMP67A
OPP1 DSC31 ADC
LMP
24V 12V F6 3
F501 4
F1
15V
F201 12V 1
F1 DSC67A
57.4V 57.4V 1 12V
F2 2
DDC3
POW7 POW8
5V
F4
2 OPP67A
(option)
DAP
5V 15V
DSC31
GNC5
-15V INV67A
F3
1
24V
GNC11
FET03
Battery 36~65V FET67A
TB1 TB2
FET01
FET015
Monotank
F1 F1
F2 F2
FET04
R1 R1
DC Line R2 R2 Thermal
AC Line Fuse
F1 Replaceble Fuse
F1 Un-replaceble Fuse
*The connector suffixes are the pin numbers POCX010102018E.ai
018-241-04E
MD-12
Board Fuse Rated Rated
Power Supply Phenomena When Malfunctioning Resolutions When Malfunctioning
Name Name Voltage (V) Amperage (A)
POW67A 36~65V F3 DC450V 20A Do not power ON the device. If the fuse is blown, replace the POW67A board.
NFL67A 100~240V F1 250V 15A Do not power ON the device. If the fuse is blown, replace the NFL67A board.
100~240V F2 250V 15A The radiation field lamp does not come on. If the fuse is blown, replace the NFL67A board.
ADC67A 12V F1 DC24V 3.15A The radiation field lamp does not come on. If the fuse is blown, replace the ADC67A board.
GNC67A 12V F1 ACDC48V 1A The panel cannot be charged. If the fuse is blown, replace the fuse (137S1417).
12V F2 ACDC48V 1A The panel cannot be charged. If the fuse is blown, replace the fuse (137S1417).
5V F3 DC50V 5A ERR120 is output when irradiating without the FET ON/ Follow the “ERR120 Analysis Flow”, and implement
OFF. analyzing and replacing.
$ {MT:4.1_ERR120、122}
5V F4 DC50V 2A The operation panel does not come on. If the fuse is blown, replace the GNC67A board.
12V F6 DC50V 2A The irradiation field lamp does not come on, and the kV If the fuse is blown, replace the GNC67A board.
and mAs are correct when irradiated.
The area dose is wrong.
DDC67A 12V F101 DC72V 3.15A Just the FAN powers ON, the device does not power ON. If the fuse is blown, replace the DDC67A board.
12V F102 DC72V 3.15A Do not power ON the device. If the fuse is blown, replace the DDC67A board.
15V F201 DC72V 3.15A The DAP does not power ON, a CSL initialization error Follow the “ERR120 Analysis Flow”, and implement
is output. Power is not being supplied to the INV board, analyzing and replacing.
error 120 is output when irradiating. $ {MT:4.1_ERR120、122}
-15V F301 DC72V 3.15A Power is not being supplied to the INV board, error 120 is Follow the “ERR120 Analysis Flow”, and implement
output when irradiating. analyzing and replacing.
$ {MT:4.1_ERR120、122}
24V F401 DC72V 3.15A Do not power ON the PC. If the fuse is blown, replace the DDC67A board.
24V F501 DC72V 3.15A Power is not being supplied to the INV board, error 120 is Follow the “ERR120 Analysis Flow”, and implement
output when irradiating. analyzing and replacing.
$ {MT:4.1_ERR120、122}
INV67A F1 DC24V 1A Error 120 is output when irradiating. Follow the “ERR120 Analysis Flow”, and implement
analyzing and replacing.
$ {MT:4.1_ERR120、122}
018-241-06E
MD-13
3. Effective Area and 3.1.2 1202SE / 1212SE / 1272SE / 1274SE
Center Position of Image An effective area of an image extends over 16.7 x 16.8 inches (2,832 x 2,836 pixels).
425.40mm (2836Pixel)
3.1 Effective Area

3.1.1 1201SE / 1211SE / 1271SE / 1273SE SE
An effective area of an image extends over 13.8 x 16.8 inches (2,336 x 2,836 pixels).
425.40mm (2836Pixel)
424.80mm (2832Pixel)
Center of the image area
SE
350.40mm (2336Pixel)
1200_100006E.ai
1200_100005E.ai
018-241-06E
MD-14
3.1.3 1213SE / 1275E 3.1.4 1214SE
An effective area of an image extends over 9.1x11.3 inches (1,536x1,920 pixels). An effective area of an image extends over 9.7x11.7 inches (1,648x1,980 pixels).
288mm (1920Pixel) 297mm (1980Pixel)
SE SE
230.4mm (1536Pixel)
247.2mm (1648Pixel)
Center of the image area Center of the image area
1200_100020E.ai 1200_100021E.ai
018-241-06E
MD-15
3.2 Center of the Image 3.2.2 1202SE / 1212SE / 1272SE / 1274SE
459.9
The center of the image is as shown below:
229.95
3.2.1 1201SE / 1211SE / 1271SE / 1273SE

459.9
229.95 SE
229.95
191.95
SE Center of the image area
459.9
383.9
Unit: mm Unit: mm
1200_100008E.ai
1200_100007E.ai
018-241-06E
MD-16
3.2.3 1213SE / 1275SE 3.2.4 1214SE
328 333
164 166.5
132.65
141
SE SE
Center of the image area Center of the image area

268.3
282
Unit: mm Unit: mm
1200_100022E.ai
1200_100023E.ai
018-241-06E
MD-17
4. Calibration
The machine generates the image calibration data by four kinds of the calibrations below.
Background
Automatic offset update Full calibration Automatic defect calibration
calibration
When the machine is running and Set the implementation propriety and the start
- At installation- At preventive
Timing At machine start-up (*1)/termination the exposure menu has not been time in EDIT CONFIGURATION
maintenance
registered (about 10 minutes interval) (default: 4 AM)
Service engineer executes
Method Automatic execution Automatic execution from the DR Maintenance Automatic execution
Tool.
Necessity of exposure Not necessary Not necessary Necessary Not necessary
- For offset calibration - For offset calibration
Image calibration data (at start-up only) - For gain calibration
- For offset calibration - For defect calibration
to be generated - For defect calibration - For defect calibration
(at termination only) - For lag calibration (*2)
Required time (per
About 30 seconds About 30 seconds About 40 minutes
one panel)
*1: Background calibration is not performed for startups after short-time power supply interruptions (up to about 5 minutes) such as battery replacements. The SE can be immediately used after the
device is started up and initialized.
If the SE is connected after a certain period of time has elapsed since the SE was turned off, the background calibration will be performed after the SE stabilization time has elapsed for about 80
seconds after the device is initialized. In addition, the stabilization time may be longer when Console operations occur immediately after exposure or during initialization.
*2: The full calibration does not generate the lag calibration data itself but calculates the lag calibration factor only. The lag calibration data is calculated by multiplying the offset image captured
automatically when the exposure menu is registered at a normal exposure by the lag calibration factor.
018-241-07E
MD-18
5. Changes in PC-GNC Connection ■ Connection configuration
Specifications ● Older configured

The communications between the PC and GNC board are via the FUJIFILM-made AP.
Between the PC and the FUJIFILM-made AP, communications are via USB (RNDIS).
For the DR-XD 1000, previously, the GNC board (MP) and PC MC communications
were implemented via the FUJIFILM-made AP. As a consequence, if communications Power supply &
errors are generated between the FUJIFILM-made AP and PC, communications can communications USB (Eth1)
no longer be carried out between the MC and GNC board (MP), the error code 10753: 192.168.0.10
“MC-MP line disconnection error” might be generated. FUJIFILM-made AP
Since the “MC-MP line disconnection error” is set to not be generated even if Older PC
192.168.0.25 1 LAN port
communications problems occur between the PC, the FUJIFILM-made AP and GNC
board (MP), the PC specifications are changed, and the connection configurations
LAN LAN (Eth0)
between the PC and GNC board (MP) have been changed.
communications (Hospital network)
This explains the switching machines, and the range of the change effects which
correspond to these specifications changes.
■ Target machines 192.168.0.20

Distinguished by the last five digits of the serial number. GNC
board
For Older Configured Machines For New Configured Machines POCX010102012E.ai
Serial number #xxx50171 or earlier #xxx50172 or later ● New configured

The communications between the PC and GNC board are direct communications via
LAN connections.
■ Details of Changes
The communications between the PC and the FUJIFILM-made AP are via the GNC
For Older Configured Machines For New Configured Machines board.
The power supply to the FUJIFILM-made AP is implemented via USB from the PC.
Connection
configurations Via the FUJIFILM-made AP Directly connect the PC and  NOTE 
between the PC and GNC board via LAN cable
GNC board With the new configuration, do not install the RNDIS driver. Also, do not assign an IP
address to the USB port.
2 LAN ports (hospital LAN
1 LAN port
PC specifications connections and GNC board
(hospital LAN connections)
connections) Only power supply
USB
The cable cover Set up the hospital LAN Set up the hospital LAN
configuration on the connection LAN connector on the connection LAN connector on
operation panel rear lower side of the monitor the rear side of the monitor FUJIFILM-made AP New PC
192.168.0.25 2 LAN ports
J editions or later
H editions or earlier
3 LAN ports
GNC board 1 LAN port LAN LAN (Eth1) LAN (Eth0)
(FUJIFILM-made AP connections,
(FUJIFILM-made AP connections)
PC connections, extras) communications 192.168.0.10 (Hospital network)
 NOTE 
The GNC board switches are anticipated for these configuration changes, and 192.168.0.20
are implemented via #xx160 or later. Therefore, some machines with the older
GNC
configurations also are equipped with the GNC board J editions.
board
POCX010102014E.ai
018-241-05E
MD-19
■ PC ■ Cable cover
On the new PC, LAN ports have been added for connecting the GNC board via LAN New cover have been added whereas the hospital LAN connection LAN port are rear
cable. facing.
Older cover New cover
Parts number 350Y200063 898Y200484
● Older cover
POCX010102017J.ai
Eth1 is set to the LAN port which connect with the GNC board.
Since the FUJIFILM-made AP communicates via the GNC board, and does not
communicate via USB (RNDIS), RNDIS driver is not required, so it is not installed.
Older PC New PC
1 LAN port
LAN port connections and GNC board
connections) ● New cover
Eth1 (192.168.0.10) USB (RNDIS) port LAN port (left side)
Eth0 (172.16.0.20) LAN port LAN port (new, right side)
RNDIS driver Required Not required
For Japan: 898Y200279D For Japan: 898Y200504
Parts number
For Overseas: 898Y200280D For Overseas: 898Y200505
 NOTE 
Converting from an older PC to a new PC is feasible, but converting from a new PC to
an older PC is not feasible. When using a new PC, use the new PC parts numbers.
In addition, after the inventory of older PC is depleted, new PC will be provided even
for older PC parts number. For further details, refer to “■ Range of influence”.
018-241-05E
MD-20
■ GNC board ● Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC)
For the new board, two LAN port have been added. For the following parts, the replacement methods will be changed.
Older board New board - PC assembly
For converting older PC to older configured machines
Parts number 113Y120290H 113Y120290J
For converting new PC to older configured machines
For converting new PC to new configured machines
Older board New board $ {MC: 5.4_Console PC}
GNC23 GNC21 GNC23 GNC21 - Cable cover
GNC16 GNC20 GNC16 GNC20 For converting older cover to older configured machines
GNC10 GNC19 GNC10 For converting new cover to older configured machines
GNC24 GNC18 GNC24 For converting new cover to new configured machines
GNC6 GNC6 $ {MC: 2.9_Operation Panel Assembly}
GNC26 GNC26
GNC7 GNC7 - USB cover
GNC13 GNC13
GNC9 GNC9 In conjunction with the connection configuration changes, the removable cables are
GNC25 GNC25 different.
GNC8 GNC11 GNC8 GNC11
$ {MC: 2.8_USB Cover}
GNC15 GNC4 GNC15 GNC4
GNC1 GNC1
- GNC board
GNC3 GNC3
GNC2 GNC2 For converting older board to older configured machines
GNC5 GNC5
For converting new board to older configured machines
GNC14 GNC14 For converting new board to new configured machines
POCX010102016J.ai POCX010102015J.ai
$ {MC: 3.7_GNC Board}
● Service Parts List (SP)

■ Range of influence Circuit diagram will be changed.
Refer to the circuit diagram to the #xxx50172 machines or later to the comprehensive
● Installation (IN) schematic for the new configured machines.
For the newer configured machines, the installation methods will be changed.
The cable routing between the GNC board and the OPP will be changed.
$ {IN1: 14._Installing the Monitor}
● Preventive Maintenance (PM)

No effect.
018-241-04E
MD-21
6. Noise-reducing Measures ■ Range of influence
● Preventive Maintenance (PM)
For the DR-XD 1000, previously, there were 2 kinds of fans (for the DDC and POW
boards) which were installed on the control unit. For the new configured machines, the DDC board fan dust collectors are not needed.
Due to changes in the specifications pertaining to noise, the POW board fans have
been changed to silent fan, and the DDC board fan is no longer built in. ● Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC)
This explains the range of influence of the switching machines, and the changes
which correspond to these specifications changes. The provision of the older type fan parts will be discontinued. If the fan needs to be
replaced in machines equipped with older type fan, it will need to be converted with
the silent fan kit (898Y200506).
■ Target machines $ {AppxMC: 6._Application of the Silent Fan Kit}
Distinguished by the last five digits of the serial number. If the fan needs to be replaced in machines equipped with silent fan, refer to the fan
replacement procedures.
For Older Configured Machines For New Configured Machines
$ {MC: 3.2_Fan (POW Board)}
Serial number #xxx50223 or earlier #xxx50224 or later
● Service Parts List (SP)

■ Details of Changes Circuit diagram will be changed.
For Older Configured Machines For New Configured Machines Refer to the circuit diagram to the #xxx50172 machines or later to the comprehensive
schematic for the new configured machines.
Fan (POW Board) 119Y200017 (Old fan) 119Y200017 (Silent fan)
Fan (DDC Board) 119Y200017 (Old fan) Not required
Specifications Operating: 55 dB or less Operating: 25 dB or less
pertaining to noise Standby: 44 dB or less Standby: 25 dB or less
018-241-04E
MD-22
7. Handling the SE Battery 7.2 Battery State upon Shipment
Upon shipment, the battery level is 30% or less, and is shipped in the battery control
microcomputer shutdown state.
7.1 The Battery’s Operating State This is for dealing with regulations regarding the air transportation of lithium ion
batteries, and for preventing them from deeply discharging while in stock.
The battery outputs 7.4 V when the capacity state is sufficient, but in conjunction
Refer to the following when setting up, and implement.
with the decrease in output voltage the remaining capacity also decreases, and the
remaining capacity becomes 0% at the output voltage of 6 V. $ {MD: 7.4_Restoring from the SE Battery Shutdown State}
Even when the battery is left as it is, the output voltage decreases due to self-
discharging. When the output voltage falls below 5 V, the battery control
microcomputer is shut down (shutdown state). If the voltage drops below 2.6 V, the
battery goes into a deep discharge state and becomes unusable. 7.3 Transition of the Battery State When the
Can not restart Unusable
Battery Is Left for Long Periods of Time
Deep Shutdown When a battery with a 30% level discharges, it will go into a shutdown state
discharge state 2.6V state* approximately half a year to one year later due to self-discharging.
When it has further been discharged from the shutdown state, it will go into a state of
Charged deep discharge about half a year to one year later.
battery  NOTE 
Restored to 5V or less
6.5 V or greater You cannot use a battery that has gone into a deep discharge state. It needs to be
replaced.
6V or less
Normal state Residual 0%
indication
Charged
Nominal voltage 7.4 V battery Unusable
* The battery is in the shutdown state when it is shipped.
$ {MD: 7.2_Battery State upon Shipment}
Refer to the following about how to restore from the shutdown state.
$ {MD: 7.4_Restoring from the SE Battery Shutdown State}
 NOTE 
You cannot use a battery that has gone into a deep discharge state. It needs to be
replaced.
018-241-05E
MD-23
7.4 Restoring from the SE Battery Shutdown ■ Starting the process of charging with the SE
State Ɣ Normal Ɣ Shutdown Ɣ Updating microcomputer
In the “shutdown state”, the SE battery’s control microcomputer is in a shutdown state.
Battery SE Battery SE Battery SE
In this state, since the SE and the SE battery cannot communicate, even if the battery
is inserted into a wired and powered SE, it will not be charged, and the battery status Connection
LED display will not be normal *. Communication Starts
REFERENCE charging
The battery status LED display * varies depending on the MC software version. Starts
- MC V16.3 or earlier charging
Three battery indicators light up green regardless of the charging state.
- MC V16.4 or later POCX010102021E.ai
While the SE is acquiring battery information, the battery level LED flashes.
● Normal (when the battery microcomputer is alive)
When the battery is in the shutdown state, the battery state cannot be acquired, and Battery microcomputer - SE: Can communicate
the battery level LED continues flashing. The SE starts charging the battery
In order to charge the battery in the shutdown state, implement the following (1) or (2).
(1) Charge the battery with the battery charger.
● The battery microcomputer is shutdown
Battery microcomputer - SE: Cannot communicate
(2) Insert the battery into an SE which has a wired power supply, and Since there is no signal from the battery, charging does not start.
implement the “Forced battery charging” function from the DR
maintenance software, and charge the battery without disconnecting ● Updating the SE microcomputer
the power and removing the battery from the SE. Without communications between the battery and the SE, the battery starts forcibly
$ {MU: 5.9.15_Force Charge the Battery} being charged from the SE.
 NOTE 
In order to recover from the shutdown state, the battery needs to be charged until the
voltage reaches 6.5 V. If the charging is stopped before 6.5 V is reached, then the
control microcomputer will be shut down.
REFERENCE
The “Forced battery charging” function is usable with MC V16.6 or later.
For earlier versions, after inserting the battery into an SE which has a wired power
supply, install the SE microcomputer from the RU PC-TOOL, and charge the battery
without disconnecting the power and removing the battery from the SE.
During the microcomputer installation process, the SE starts charging the battery
without it communicating with the battery.
018-241-07E
MD-24
■ The SE Battery Charging LED Display ● MC V16.3 or earlier
LED0 Microcomputer installing:
Error LED is light up
While charging (When SE - battery communications are not possible):
Battery LED 1, 2, and 3 are light up green (same state as a fully charged battery)
LED3 LED2 LED1
POCX010102023J.ai
While charging (When there are SE - battery communications):
The battery level display LED flashes in accordance with the battery level
- When charged
LED Display ● MC V16.4 or later
Microcomputer installing:
Fully charged LED 1, 2, 3: Green Light up
Error LED is light up
Usable time 60 minutes or more LED 3: Green Flash, LED 1, 2: Green Light up While charging (When SE - battery communications are not possible):
Battery LED 1, 2, and 3 are light up green
Usable time 30 minutes or more,
LED 2: Green Flash, LED 1: Green Light up While charging (When there are SE - battery communications):
less than 60 minutes
The battery level display LED flashes in accordance with the battery level
Usable time less than 30 minutes LED 1: Green Flash
- When uncharged
■ Recommended Timing for Replacing the SE Battery
LED Display
If the “Battery Capacity” falls below 2160 mAh, it is the recommended time to replace
Usable time 60 minutes or more LED 1, 2, 3: Green Light up the SE battery (the standby time is about 3 hours or less).
Usable time 20 minutes or more, REFERENCE
LED 1, 2: Green Light up
less than 60 minutes
The recommended time for replacing the battery is a rough estimate of 60% relative to
Usable time less than 20 minutes LED 1: Green Light up the initial capacity 3200 mAh of the DR-ID 1200 series SE.
Usable time 10 minutes or less LED 0: Orange Light up Also for the DR-ID 600 series SE, and since the initial capacity is 2400 mAh, the 60%
rough estimate is 1440 mAh.
018-241-05E
MD-25
8. Setting the mAs Value Tube voltage
(kV)
Tube
With the DR-XD 1000, the tube current values [mA] and irradiation times [ms] are current 40 - 45 46 - 55 56 - 62 63 - 71 72 - 75 76 - 83 84 - 100
determined according to the irradiation conditions, they cannot be individually set. time
The combinations for the tube current values and irradiation times for each tube voltage cumulative
value [kV] and tube current time cumulative value [mAs] are shown in the following chart. (mAs)
To change the tube current values or irradiation times to the desired values, refer to 0.064 sec 0.053 sec 0.048 sec 0.046 sec 0.048 sec 0.053 sec 0.064 sec
the following chart for changing the mAs values. 1.6
25 mA 30 mA 33 mA 35 mA 33 mA 30 mA 25 mA
■ The Relationships between the Irradiation Conditions and 0.08 sec 0.067 sec 0.061 sec 0.057 sec 0.061 sec 0.067 sec 0.08 sec
Exposure Times, and the Tube Current 2.0
25 mA 30 mA 33 mA 35 mA 33 mA 30 mA 25 mA
 NOTE  0.1 sec 0.083 sec 0.076 sec 0.071 sec 0.076 sec 0.083 sec 0.1 sec
2.5
With the DR-XD 1000, only the specific tube current-time product (mAs) values shown 25 mA 30 mA 33 mA 35 mA 33 mA 30 mA 25 mA
in the table below can be used. If other tube current-time product (mAs) values are
set, the closest usable tube current-time product (mAs) value will be used. 0.126 sec 0.126 sec 0.095 sec 0.09 sec 0.095 sec 0.126 sec 0.126 sec
3.2
25 mA 25 mA 33 mA 35 mA 33 mA 25 mA 25 mA
Tube voltage
(kV) 0.16 sec 0.16 sec 0.16 sec 0.16 sec 0.16 sec 0.16 sec 0.16 sec
Tube 4.0
current 40 - 45 46 - 55 56 - 62 63 - 71 72 - 75 76 - 83 84 - 100 25 mA 25 mA 25 mA 25 mA 25 mA 25 mA 25 mA
time
cumulative 0.2 sec 0.2 sec 0.2 sec 0.2 sec 0.2 sec 0.2 sec 0.2 sec
5.0
(mAs) 25 mA 25 mA 25 mA 25 mA 25 mA 25 mA 25 mA
0.01 sec 0.01 sec 0.01 sec 0.01 sec 0.01 sec 0.01 sec 0.01 sec
0.25 0.252 sec 0.252 sec 0.252 sec 0.252 sec 0.252 sec 0.252 sec 0.252 sec
25 mA 25 mA 25 mA 25 mA 25 mA 25 mA 25 mA 6.3
25 mA 25 mA 25 mA 25 mA 25 mA 25 mA 25 mA
25 mA 30 mA 33 mA 33 mA 33 mA 30 mA 25 mA 8.0
25 mA 25 mA 25 mA 25 mA 25 mA 25 mA 25 mA
25 mA 30 mA 33 mA 35 mA 33 mA 30 mA 25 mA 10.0
25 mA 25 mA 25 mA 25 mA 25 mA 25 mA 25 mA
25 mA 30 mA 33 mA 35 mA 33 mA 30 mA 25 mA 12.5
25 mA 25 mA 25 mA 25 mA 25 mA 25 mA 25 mA
25 mA 30 mA 33 mA 35 mA 33 mA 30 mA 25 mA 16.0
25 mA 25 mA 25 mA 25 mA 25 mA 25 mA 25 mA
25 mA 30 mA 33 mA 35 mA 33 mA 30 mA 25 mA 20.0
25 mA 25 mA 25 mA 25 mA 25 mA 25 mA 25 mA
1.0 1 sec 1 sec 1 sec 1 sec 1 sec 1 sec 1 sec
25 mA 30 mA 33 mA 35 mA 33 mA 30 mA 25 mA 25.0
25 mA 25 mA 25 mA 25 mA 25 mA 25 mA 25 mA
1.25
25 mA 30 mA 33 mA 35 mA 33 mA 30 mA 25 mA
018-241-05E
MD-26
■ How to Change the mAs Value for Each Menu ■ Exposure Conditions
The mAs value is set in the << Reserved 1 [mAs value] >> field in the user utility. The default values for exposure conditions for each exposure region are as per the
With the DR-XD 1000, the tube current [mA] and irradiation time [ms] values are following.
ignored. Csl GOS
Exposure
Thickness Criterion
region kV mAs SID kV mAs SID
Less than
Medium 90 1.25 100 90 2 100
Front of 25 cm
thorax 25 cm
Big 99 1.25 100 99 2 100
or more
Less than
Medium 70 2 100 70 3.2 100
Front of 15 cm
shoulder joint 15 cm
Big 77 2 100 77 3.2 100
or more
Less than
Front of Medium 85 5 100 85 8 100
25 cm
thoracic
POCX010102023J.ai
vertebra 25 cm
Big 94 5 100 94 8 100
or more
Less than
Side of Medium 90 5 100 90 8 100
30 cm
thoracic
vertebra 30 cm
Big 99 5 100 99 8 100
or more
Less than
Front of Medium 80 10 100 80 16 100
35 cm
abdomen
Big 35 - 40 cm 88 10 100 88 16 100
Less than
Medium 85 5 100 85 8 100
Pelvis 35 cm
Big 35 - 40 cm 94 5 100 94 8 100
Less than
Hip joint Medium 85 8 100 85 12.5 100
30 cm
frontal view
Big 30 - 35 cm 94 8 100 94 12.5 100
Less than
Lumbar spine Medium 80 10 100 80 16 100
35 cm
frontal view
Big 35 - 40 cm 88 10 100 88 16 100
Less than
Lumbar spine Medium 85 10 100 85 16 100
35 cm
frontal view
Big 35 - 40 cm 94 10 100 94 16 100
018-241-07E
MD-27
Csl GOS  NOTE 
Exposure
Thickness Criterion When imaging a subject with a thickness of 40 cm or more, imaging it at 100 kV is
region kV mAs SID kV mAs SID
recommended.
Less than
Medium 75 4 100 75 6.3 100
Cranium 18 cm
frontal view 18 cm
Big 83 4 100 83 6.3 100
or more
Less than
Medium 75 4 100 75 6.3 100
Cranium 18 cm
lateral view 18 cm
Big 83 4 100 83 6.3 100
or more
Less than
Medium 75 4 100 75 6.3 100
12 cm
Cervical spine
12 cm
Big 83 4 100 83 6.3 100
or more
Less than
Medium 70 4 100 70 6.3 100
15 cm
Thigh
15 cm or
Big 77 4 100 77 6.3 100
more
less than
Medium 70 2 100 70 3.2 100
15 cm
Knee joint
15 cm
Big 77 2 100 77 3.2 100
or more
less than
Medium 50 1 100 50 1.6 100
5 cm
Hand
5 cm
Big 55 1 100 55 1.6 100
or more
less than
Medium 55 2 100 55 3.2 100
Upper arm/ 8 cm
elbow joint 8 cm
Big 61 2 100 61 3.2 100
or more
less than
Medium 55 1.25 100 55 2 100
5 cm
Foot
5 cm
Big 61 1.25 100 61 2 100
or more
less than
Medium 70 2 100 70 3.2 100
Infant's chest 20 cm
and abdomen 20 cm
Big 77 2 100 77 3.2 100
or more
018-241-05E
MD-28
9. Software Overview Target Outline
When the battery level is low, disabling the X-ray exposure
to be performed, the warning “BATTERY 0” appears on the
9.1 GNC Software XCON operation panel.
Warning to be displayed
With the # xxx50229 or later, the GNC software has been upgraded to V1.1. when the battery level is
This section explains about V1.1. low
REFERENCE
This software has also been released via ECN. In addition, even if the key switch is turned ON, the console
does not start up.
■ Specification Change Contents ■ How to Upgrade Versions

Target Outline Refer to the following to upgrade the GNC software version.
When the device is ready for exposure after SW1 is pressed, $ {MU: 3.8_Updating the GNC Board Version}
a sound is heard.
Sound to notify that
* In the default setting, the sound is disabled to be heard
the device is ready for
exposure
when the exposure is ready. To enable this function, it is ■ Confirmation after Upgrading
necessary to specify the setting by using the maintenance
tool V1.4. Refer to the following to upgrade the GNC software version.
Acceleration of repeat $ {MU: 3.9_Checking the Board Version}
The repeat processing when the tube voltage and
processing of the tube
voltage and tube current
tube current time product switches are long pressed is Check the GNC software version as per the following.
accelerated.
time product switches Item V1.0 V1.1
When the breaker is turned OFF with the device connected GNC Soft Ver. 0x01 0x01
to the outlet via the AC cable, the warning “BREAKER OFF”
appears on the XCON operation panel. GNC Minor Ver. 0x00 0x01
GNC PEMS Ver. 0x01 0x01
GNC Month 0x08 0x07
Warning to be displayed
when the breaker is turned GNC Day 0x25 0x05
OFF In addition, even if the key switch is turned ON, the console
does not start up. REFERENCE
* To enable the function to display the warning when the
breaker is turned OFF, the POW board V0012 is needed. “GNC Month” and “GNC Day” indicate the release dates. There is no problem even if
For DR-XD1000 #76550164 or later, the POW board V0012 the numerical values are decreasing.
is installed. For DR-XD1000 #76550164 or earlier, upgrade
the version of the POW board.
018-241-05E
MD-29
9.2 MC Software Item Outline Change
At the time of insertion into the DR slot, the
9.2.1 V16.3 LED displaying the remaining battery capacity
normally lights up right after the successful
communication between the panel and the DR
■ Release Date Late LED lighting may
slot. However, when the communication fails
occur at the time of
several times in insertion and removal into MCU
November 28, 2017 insertion into the DR
and from the DR slot, communication retry is
slot
performed at a slower timing than usual, resulting
in late LED lighting.
■ Input Instrument Correction has been made to the MCU so that
the retry processing is performed properly.
#xx275 or later
■ SE Software Version
■ Specification Change Contents AplWlan fpgaRmv GLG MCU PIC
Item Outline Change DR-ID 1201SE 0x0226 0x0081 302 100A 5
With the MC V16.2 and earlier, when the SE DR-ID 1202SE 0x0226 0x00A1 302 100A 5
was in the Ready state, even if abnormalities
occurred due to electrical noise and exposing DR-ID 1211SE 0x0226 0x0091 302 100A 5
could not be done, the SE would not go into the
exposing prohibited state and exposing was DR-ID 1212SE 0x0226 0x00B1 302 100A 5
possible. DR-ID 1213SE 0x0226 0x00B9 302 100A 5
With the MC V16.3, this has been changed so
Countermeasure that an error message is displayed when a noise DR-ID 1214SE 0x0226 0x00C9 302 100A 5
against ADAS header anomaly occurs, and furthermore the SE's Ready
FPGA, MC
error due to electric lamp goes out and exposing cannot be done. By
noise clicking the OK button on the error message, the ■ Restriction Item
Ready lamp goes back on, and it transits to a
state whereas exposing can be done. ● Connectable CSL Versions
Message ID: 13043
Title: Electrical Noise Detected V10.0, V11.0
Message: Electrical noise has been detected
on the panel. Click the OK button and check the ● Inter-system Restrictions
ready indicator before you make any shot. When the same SE is used between systems, the following combination of MC
In MC V16.2 or earlier, When a time out occurs software is required.
in the connection confirmation processing DR-ID 600 V16.2
between the CSL and the MC due to network and DR-ID 700 V16.2
processing delays, inconsistency of a connection DR-ID 800 V15.2 (Except 12XXSE)
Improving the state between the MC side and the CSL side
connection confirmation occurs, resulting in the unlit state of the READY DR-ID 900 V14.0 (Except 12XXSE)
MC
processing between lamp. DR-ID 1200 V16.3
the CSL and the MC In MC V16.3, when a time out occurs in the
connection confirmation processing, the ● Install the DR Maintenance Tool
reconnection processing is performed between
the CSL and the MC to restore the connection If the DR maintenance tool is not installed, then install it.
state.
■ How to Upgrade Versions
Refer to the following to upgrade the MC software version.
$ {IN1: 19._Upgrading MC Application}
018-241-05E
MD-30
9.2.2 V16.4 ■ SE Software Version
■ Release Date AplWlan fpgaRmv GLG MCU PIC
February 23, 2018 DR-ID 1201SE 0x0226 0x0082 302 100B 5

DR-ID 1202SE 0x0226 0x00A2 302 100B 5
■ Input Instrument DR-ID 1211SE 0x0226 0x0092 302 100B 5
#xx375 or later
DR-ID 1212SE 0x0226 0x00B2 302 100B 5
DR-ID 1213SE 0x0226 0x00BA 302 100B 5
■ Specification Change Contents
DR-ID 1214SE 0x0226 0x00CA 302 100B 5
Item Outline Change
With the MC internal processing, when
Dealing with the initialization processing and menu registration ■ Restriction Item
problem that the Ready processing occur simultaneously, a state was
lamp does not light up rarely occurring whereas it would fail to transit to
MC ● Connectable CSL Versions
after the selector is the initialization completed state.
changed on the Study With V16.4, this has been corrected so that the V9.0, V10.0, V11.0
screen. menu registration normally completes even in
such cases.
● Inter-system Restrictions
The density unevenness problem is caused
Dealing with the by the exposure performed during SE's image When the same SE is used between systems, the following combination of MC
problem that a density reading process due to a communication delay software is required.
unevenness is found between the SE and the MC at the start of the DR-ID 600 V16.2
in the image having a exposure. MC
white blank in its upper In MC V16.4, a control change is made so that
DR-ID 700 V16.2
area with the DR-ID when a communication delay occurs between DR-ID 800 V16.2 (Except 12XXSE)
1211 SE the SE and the MC, the X-ray exposure is not DR-ID 900 V14.0 (Except 12XXSE)
performed. DR-ID 1200 V16.4
There were issues whereas when it would shut
down due to over discharging, or when the ● Install the DR Maintenance Tool
Have resolved the batteries inserted into the SE could no longer
issues whereas communicate with the SE due to malfunctions, the If the DR maintenance tool is not installed, then install it.
batteries which were battery level LED would display (3 lit) fully charged.
inserted into the * Since fully charged was displayed, if the user
SE that could not disconnected from the power source thinking MCU ■ How to Upgrade Versions
communicate would that the charging had been completed, but
display that they were since in actuality the battery could not be Refer to the following to upgrade the MC software version.
fully charged in the charged, the SE’s power supply would drop off. $ {IN1: 19._Upgrading MC Application}
shutdown state, etc. A change is made so that when a battery inserted
into the SE cannot perform the communication,
the three LEDs blink instead of lighting up.
This problem is caused by the countermeasure
Dealing with problems
against ADAS header error implemented with V16.3.
that the gain calibration
When an Xfree exposure is performed in mode
is aborted and the FPGA
0, the SE may not send a notification of ShotGo.
count-up is not
A correction is made so that the notification is
performed.
performed normally.
018-241-05E
MD-31
9.2.3 V16.5 ■ Other Software Version
 NOTE  Ver
In conjunction with the VA expanded security support for MC V16.5, the SE country DR Maintenance Tool V1.2.0
code has been changed. For details, refer to the ECN which corresponds to the
country code. Also, the new country code setting file is usable with all of the MC PC-TOOL V7.0.0
versions.
■ Restriction Item
■ Specification Change Contents
Item Outline Change ● Changing the SE Country Code Settings File
In conjunction with the addition of the VA expanded security functions, the SE country
Compliance with the notice issued by the United code setting file has been changed.
States Department of Veterans Affairs (VA):
Eliminating the use of the unencrypted communication MC For details, refer to the SEI.
Compliance with VA
protocols (FTP and Telnet) in information systems SE
security
introduced to facilities for veterans. MP ● Connectable CSL Versions
The protocol used between MC, MP and SE is
eliminated and replaced with the secured one. V9.0, V10.0, V11.0
■ SE Software Version When the same SE is used between systems, the following combination of MC
software is required.
AplWlan fpgaRmv GLG MCU PIC
DR-ID 600 V16.2
DR-ID 1201SE 0x0227 0x0082 302 100B 5 DR-ID 700 V16.2
DR-ID 800 V16.2 (Except 12XXSE)
DR-ID 1202SE 0x0227 0x00A2 302 100B 5
DR-ID 1211SE 0x0227 0x0092 302 100B 5 DR-ID 1200 V16.5
DR-ID 1212SE 0x0227 0x00B2 302 100B 5
● Install the DR Maintenance Tool
DR-ID 1213SE 0x0227 0x00BA 302 100B 5
If the DR maintenance tool is not installed, then install it.
DR-ID 1214SE 0x0227 0x00CA 302 100B 5
● Restore Restrictions
■ MP Software Version Do not restore the configuration file backed up with V16.4 or earlier with V16.5.
When restoring the V16.4 or earlier configuration file in relation to V16.5 via the setting
AplWlan ALPS items which were added in V16.5, inconsistencies occur in the configuration file, and
the MC software does not operate normally.
DR-ID 1200MP 00.04.04 14.16.01
018-241-05E
MD-32
● Precautions which Accompany the Addition of VA Expanded Security
Functions
Do not use the following EDIT CONFIGURATION setup items unnecessarily.
- FTP over SSL on MC (Default: OFF)
- FTP over SSL on FCR (Default: OFF)
This setting provides the use of FTPS among MC, MP, and SE without using FTP
transfer.
Do not make this setting at facilities other then aforementioned ones because it is to
comply with the notice issued for information systems introduced to Veterans Affairs’
facilities.
To apply this setting, implement security setting according to “2. Setting the MC
Expanded Security” below.
$ {MC: Appendix 11._Updating MC Software Version}
● Precautions for Post Activation of VA Expanded Security Functions

When adding or replacing the MP or SE after enabling the VA expanded security
functions, temporarily disable the VA expanded security functions.
An SE equipped with software with a CPU software version less than 0x227, and an
MP equipped with MP software less than 04.04 do not operate properly even if they
are connected since they do not support the VA expanded security functions.
When adding or replacing these MPs or SEs, implement “3. Canceling the MC VA
Expanded Security Settings” as per the following, and temporarily disable the VA
expanded security functions, then add or replace.
● Password Management for VA Expanded Security Functions

Strictly store the VA expanded security functions password.
Password input is required when implementing the VA expanded security settings.
Strictly manage the password you enter here, and do not share it with third parties.

018-241-05E
MD-33
9.2.4 V16.6 Item Outline Change
 NOTE  Wireless driver for The wireless driver has been updated to the one
compliance with complying with the new European radio law EN SE
In conjunction with the VA expanded security support for MC V16.5, the SE country European radio law 301 893 V2.1.1.
code has been changed. For details, refer to the ECN which corresponds to the
country code. Also, the new country code setting file is usable with all of the MC The RMV65A board and RMV66A board have
versions. updated the revision because of discontinued
Alternative to Flash memory on the board. A function is added
SE
Discontinued FLASH to MC software to distinguish between new
revision and old revision of these boards to install
■ Specification Change Contents the applicable FPGA.
Item Outline Change Previously, only when a uniquely shaped
Dealing with problems defect was recorded in DefectFac02.cmp, the
Wireless driver that countermeasure defect detection processing ran into an infinite
The wireless LAN driver is updated to the MC
providing a against defect loop, causing MC software to be turned OFF.
one providing a countermeasure against
countermeasure SE calibration failure A countermeasure against this problem is
vulnerabilities of wireless LAN communication
against WPA implemented.
protocol WPA2.
vulnerabilities
When wired mode was switched to wireless mode
In V16.5 or earlier, when the battery was over- for the first time after the startup of panel with the
discharged, it was necessary to insert the battery Dealing with problems encryption setting for wireless communication
into the battery charger as it was impossible to that countermeasure turned ON, the connection switching took about
charge by inserting it into the SE with the cable against slow switching 20 to 30 seconds, which is longer than usual. A SE
Addition of battery connected. from wired mode to countermeasure is implemented to perform the
forced charging In order for hospitals not having a battery charger MC wireless mode switching promptly when wired mode is changed
function to charge the battery in wired connection, a to wireless mode regardless of whether it is the
forced battery charge function is added to DR first time or not.
Maintenance tool.
$ {MU: 5.9.15_Force Charge the Battery} Add the Xair mode ON/OFF to Configuration
Xair mode addition (Default: OFF). MC
To correct the following MP-related failures, Not used with the DR-XD 1000, is set to OFF.
countermeasures are implemented:
1. When divided packets are received, The internal structure of the SE’s CPU software
commands cannot be recognized correctly. In the has been changed since 0x220.
worst case, a memory access violation occurs, Therefore, if the SE’s CPU version is less than
Countermeasures causing the MP to be turned OFF. 0x0218, the latest version cannot be upgraded
against MP 2. Line disconnection and transmission failure MP to unless 0x0220 is once upgraded to. SE
communication failures are not distinguished. Accordingly, even if a line upgrading functions for less than 0x218 have
Installing the update
disconnection occurs when a command is sent, been installed in the DR maintenance tool. MC, DR
functions from CPU
the communication thread remains activated. For SE CPU versions which are less than maintenance
software version 0x218
As a result, MC’s attempt to connect with MP 0x0218, use “Top Page > Utility > SE CPU tool
or less
again fails because this attempt is recognized as Update (0x0220)” via the DR maintenance tool,
multiple connections. and upgrade to 0x0220.
Afterwards, use “Top Page > Software Update
Previously, when calibrations were performed > SE Software Version Upgrade” via the DR
successively using DR maintenance tool maintenance tool, and upgrade to the latest
Countermeasure version.
(i.e. performing defect calibration after offset
against a failure of
calibration), the Ready display remained turned MC
DR maintenance tool
OFF in the DR maintenance tool window in rare
server task switching
cases. A countermeasure against this problem is
implemented.
018-241-05E
MD-34
■ SE Software Version ■ Restriction Item
AplWlan fpgaRmv GLG MCU PIC ● Connectable CSL Versions
DR-ID 1201SE 0x0229 0x0083 302 100B 5 V9.0, V10.0, V11.0, V12.0
DR-ID 1202SE 0x0229 0x00A3 302 100B 5
DR-ID 1211SE 0x0229 0x0093 302 100B 5
When the same SE is used between systems, the following combination of MC
DR-ID 1212SE 0x0229 0x00B3 302 100B 5 software is required.
DR-ID 600 V16.2
DR-ID 1213SE 0x0229 0x00BB 302 100B 5
DR-ID 700 V16.2
DR-ID 1214SE 0x0229 0x00CB 302 100B 5 DR-ID 800 V16.2 (Except 12XXSE)
 NOTE  DR-ID 1200 V16.6
Each software for the DR-ID1270 series SE uses the same software as the DR-ID
1200 series SE below. ● Install the DR Maintenance Tool
DR-ID1271SE - DR-ID 1201SE
If the DR maintenance tool is not installed, then install it.
DR-ID1274SE - DR-ID 1212SE ● Restore Restrictions
DR-ID1275SE - DR-ID 1213SE Do not restore the configuration file backed up with V16.5 or earlier with V16.6.
When restoring the V16.5 or earlier configuration file in relation to V16.6,
inconsistencies occur in the configuration file, and the MC software does not operate
normally.
■ MP Software Version
AplWlan ALPS
DR-ID 1200MP 00.04.05 14.16.01 Functions
■ Other Software Version - FTP over SSL on FCR (Default: OFF)
Ver
transfer.
DR Maintenance Tool V1.2.0 Do not make this setting at facilities other then aforementioned ones because it is to
comply with the notice issued for information systems introduced to Veterans Affairs’
PC-TOOL V7.0.0 facilities.
Expanded Security” below.
018-241-06E
MD-35
● Precautions which Accompany the Addition of Xair Mode
The following setting items have been added to EDIT CONFIGURATION, but do not
use with DR - XD 1000.
- Xair MODE (Default: OFF)
● Precaution to be taken when upgrading the SE version

If the fpgaRmv (FPGA) software version is following (corresponding to MC V16.1) or
earlier, the software cannot update directly to the latest version. Then a message “The
selected SE does not support this function.” appears, resulting in failure of upgrade of
the FPGA software.
Panel fpgaRMV (FPGA) software
DR-ID 1201SE 0x0080
DR-ID 1202SE 0x00A0
DR-ID 1211SE 0x00B0
DR-ID 1212SE 0x00B0
DR-ID 1213SE 0x00B8
DR-ID 1214SE 0x00C8
In such a case, select “Top page > UTILITY > Update SE CPU (0x0220)” in the DR
Maintenance Tool toupdate to an intermediate version of the FPGA. Then select
“Top Page> Software Update> SE Software Upgrade” in the DR Maintenance Tool to
update the latest version.
$ {MU: 5.9.11_Update SE FPGA}

018-241-07E
MD-36
9.2.5 V16.7 ■ Restriction Item
■ Specification Change Contents ● Connectable CSL Versions
V11.0, V12.0, V12.0 HF0002
Item Outline Change
A change is made so that when the error 11231 ● Inter-system Restrictions
Serial ID and panel
(Invalid data generated for defect correction)
ID added in the log of When the same SE is used between systems, the following combination of MC
occurs, both serial ID and panel ID are shown in the MC
invalid data generation software is required.
log to enable identification of the panel in which the
for defect correction
error is occurring. DR-ID 600 V16.7
In order to comply with the U.S. DoD’s security DR-ID 700 V16.7
Compliance with DoD requirement, a change is made so that the DR-ID 800 V16.2 (Except 12XXSE)
MC
security requirement application can be operated with the general user DR-ID 900 V16.1 (Except 12XXSE)
privilege account. DR-ID 1200 V16.7
Error message
An error message in the error DB, which had been
correction in the error ● Install the DR Maintenance Tool
corrected in V16.3, returned to the original state in MC
DB returning to the
V16.5. This error message is corrected again. If the DR maintenance tool is not installed, then install it.
original state
● Restore Restrictions
■ SE Software Version
Do not restore the configuration file backed up with V16.6 or earlier with V16.7.
AplWlan fpgaRmv GLG MCU PIC When restoring the V16.6 or earlier configuration file in relation to V16.7,
inconsistencies occur in the configuration file, and the MC software does not operate
DR-ID 1201SE 0x0229 0x0083 302 100B 5 normally.
DR-ID 1202SE 0x0229 0x00A3 302 100B 5
DR-ID 1211SE 0x0229 0x0093 302 100B 5 ● Precautions which Accompany the Addition of VA Expanded Security
DR-ID 1212SE 0x0229 0x00B3 302 100B 5 Functions
DR-ID 1213SE 0x0229 0x00BB 302 100B 5
- FTP over SSL on FCR (Default: OFF)
■ MP Software Version This setting provides the use of FTPS among MC, MP, and SE without using FTP
transfer.
AplWlan ALPS
DR-ID 1200MP 00.04.05 14.16.01 comply with the notice issued for information systems introduced to Veterans Affairs’
facilities.
■ Other Software Version Expanded Security” below.
Ver
DR Maintenance Tool V1.2.1
PC-TOOL V7.0.0
018-241-08E
MD-37
● Precautions which Accompany the Addition of Xair Mode
The following setting items have been added to EDIT CONFIGURATION, but do not
use with DR - XD 1000.
- Xair MODE (Default: OFF)
● Precaution to be taken when upgrading the SE version

If the CPU version of SE is earlier than 0x0218 at the time of SE upgrade, it needs to
be upgraded to 0x0220 before upgrading to the latest version.
In such a case, upgrade the CPU to 0x0220 through DR Maintenance Tool “Top page
> UTILITY > Update SE CPU (0x0220)”. Then, through the DR Maintenance Tool to
update the latest version using “Top Page> Software Update> SE Software Upgrade”.
$ {MU: 5.9.10_Update SE CPU (0x0220)}
● General user privilege setting

This change is for compliance with the notification regarding information systems used
in U.S. DoD institutions. For hospitals other than DoD institutions, do not perform this
setting.
- To specify the setting for general user privileges, refer to the following.
$ {IN: Appendix 20._Allowing Non-Administrator Users to Log In}
- For DR-XD 1000 maintenance tool, log in as “Administrator” and perform the
uninstallation. Then, log in as “FFservice” and perform the installation again. For the
uninstallation and installation procedures, refer to the following.
$ {MU: Appendix 1._Installing and Uninstalling the DR-XD 1000 Maintenance Tool}
- To specify service settings, log off the XrayConsole account and log in again by
using the FFService user account. Then, specify the settings. In the configuration
having an MC, it is necessary to log off the XrayConsole account on the MC-PC and
log in as FFService user.
- If the XrayConsole account is used for specifying service settings, the setting
may not be performed correctly. After the service settings are specified with the
XrayConsole account, perform the setting again with the FFServer user account.
In addition, if MCManager is restarted via the service tool in the configuration
having an MC, the restart fails. In such a case, log in the MC-PC directly to restart
MCManager.

018-241-08E
MD-38
9.2.6 V17.1 ■ SE Software Version
■ Specification Change Contents AplWlan fpgaRmv GLG MCU PIC
DR-ID 1201SE 0x022A 0x0085 302 100B 5
Item Outline Change
DR-ID 1202SE 0x022A 0x00A5 302 100B 5
Countermeasures
MP board status checking and shot switch
taken in the field: DR-ID 1211SE 0x022A 0x0095 302 100B 5
1 and 2 tests using the PC-TOOL and WEB
Shot switch test using MC
maintenance tool returns an error. This error has DR-ID 1212SE 0x022A 0x00B5 302 100B 5
MP v04.05 results in an
been fixed.
error.
DR-ID 1213SE 0x022A 0x00BD 302 100B 5
The current FPGA limits the size of installable
files. The update file (No. 3) exceeds this limit.
Added a function To install the update file, the file whose limit is DR
to install FPGA temporarily removed (intermediate file) must be Maintenance ■ MP Software Version
intermediate files installed. A function to install FPGA intermediate Tool
files has been implemented. AplWlan ALPS
DR-ID 1200MP 00.04.05 14.16.01
The MC software compresses log files in the
process of termination. Force-quitting the MC
leaves intermediate files, eating up the disk
Log file bloating space. MC ■ Other Software Version
The MC will be improved by adding the processing
to delete intermediate files in the process of Ver
termination.
DR Maintenance Tool V1.4.0
FLASH implemented on DR-ID 12xxSE will be
A solution to
discontinued. FPGA for the revised board will be MC
discontinued FLASH
implemented on MC.
■ Restriction Item
MCManager has ended abnormally at several
facilities. ● Connectable CSL Versions
There are two causes of this problem.
Countermeasures against this problem will be V12.1
taken as follows:
1. Invalid timeout processing at the time of SE
connection ● Inter-system Restrictions
Countermeasures
An error handling for line disconnection that When the same SE is used between systems, the following combination of MC
taken in the field:
occurred when register reading was requested MC software is required.
MCManager ends
at SE connection was invalid. This invalid error
abnormally. DR-ID 1200 V17.1
handling will be fixed.
2. Memory leak DR-XD 1000 V17.1
Correction data transfer at the time of SE
connection caused a memory leak. Memory
leaks caused by repeated correction data ● Install the DR Maintenance Tool
transfer ended the application abnormally. This If the DR maintenance tool is not installed, then install it.
memory leak problem has been fixed.
018-241-08E
MD-39
● Restore Restrictions ● General user privilege setting
Do not restore the configuration file backed up with V16.5 or earlier with V16.6. This change is for compliance with the notification regarding information systems used
When restoring the V16.5 or earlier configuration file in relation to V16.6, in U.S. DoD institutions. For hospitals other than DoD institutions, do not perform this
inconsistencies occur in the configuration file, and the MC software does not operate setting.
normally. - To specify the setting for general user privileges, follow the instruction in the
attached document.
$ {IN: Appendix 20._Allowing Non-Administrator Users to Log In}
Functions - For DR-XD 1000 maintenance tool, log in as “Administrator” and perform the
uninstallation. Then, log in as “FFservice” and perform the installation again. For the
Do not use the following EDIT CONFIGURATION setup items unnecessarily. uninstallation and installation procedures, see the Service Manual.
- FTP over SSL on FCR (Default: OFF) - To specify service settings, log off the XrayConsole account and log in again by
using the FFService user account. Then, specify the settings. In the configuration
having an MC, it is necessary to log off the XrayConsole account on the MC-PC and
transfer.
log in as FFService user.
comply with the notice issued for information systems introduced to Veterans Affairs’ - If the XrayConsole account is used for specifying service settings, the setting
facilities. may not be performed correctly. After the service settings are specified with the
To apply this setting, implement security setting according to “2. Setting the MC XrayConsole account, perform the setting again with the FFServer user account.
Expanded Security” below. In addition, if MCManager is restarted via the service tool in the configuration
$ {MC: Appendix 11._Updating MC Software Version} having an MC, the restart fails. In such a case, log in the MC-PC directly to restart
MCManager.
● Precaution to be taken when upgrading the SE version (FPGA)
● Precautions which Accompany the Addition of Xair Mode If the fpgaRmv (FPGA) software version is following (corresponding to MC V16.1) or
The following setting items have been added to EDIT CONFIGURATION, but do not earlier, the software cannot update directly to the latest version. Then a message “The
use with DR - XD 1000. selected SE does not support this function.” appears, resulting in failure of upgrade of
- Xair MODE (Default: OFF) the FPGA software.
● Precaution to be taken when upgrading the SE version (CPU) DR-ID 1201SE 0x0080
If the CPU version of SE is earlier than 0x0218 at the time of SE upgrade, it needs to
DR-ID 1202SE 0x00A0
be upgraded to 0x0220 before upgrading to the latest version.
In such a case, upgrade the CPU to 0x0220 through DR Maintenance Tool “Top page DR-ID 1211SE 0x00B0
> UTILITY > Update SE CPU (0x0220)”. Then, through the DR Maintenance Tool to
DR-ID 1212SE 0x00B0
update the latest version using “Top Page> Software Update> SE Software Upgrade”.
$ {MU: 5.9.10_Update SE CPU (0x0220)} DR-ID 1213SE 0x00B8
In such a case, select “Top page > UTILITY > Update SE CPU (0x0220)” in the DR
Maintenance Tool toupdate to an intermediate version of the FPGA. Then select
“Top Page> Software Update> SE Software Upgrade” in the DR Maintenance Tool to
update the latest version.

018-241-08E
MD-40
9.3 DR-XD1000 Maintenance Tool 9.3.3 V1.2
Installed after # xxx50xxx.
9.3.1 V1.0 ● Specification Change Contents
First release
Item Outline
Added function Added back up and restore functions for operating information.
9.3.2 V1.1
Improved function Automated the adjusting for the filament preheat voltage
This version has not been released. adjusting.
Improved function Added area dose calibration functions.
● How to Install
$ {MU: Appendix 1._Installing and Uninstalling the DR-XD 1000 Maintenance
Tool_1. Install}
● How to Uninstall
Tool_2. Uninstall}
● How to Update Versions

(1) Back up the operating information.
$ {MU: 3.6_Backing Up and Restoring of Operating Information Areas}
(2) Uninstall the maintenance tools for the older version.

$ {MU: Appendix 1._Installing and Uninstalling the DR-XD 1000
Maintenance Tool_2. Uninstall}
(3) Install maintenance tool V1.4.

Maintenance Tool_1. Install}
9.3.4 V1.3
This version has not been released.
018-241-08E
MD-41
9.3.5 V1.4 9.3.6 V1.5
Installed in #xxx50186 or later. This software is also released via ECN. Installed in #xxx50xxx or later. This software is also released via ECN.
● Specification Change Contents ● Specification Change Contents

Item Outline Item Outline
Changed the log Changed the log acquisition days from 15 days to 30 days. Windows 10 compatible The maintenance software is Windows 10-compatible.
acquisition days This version is exclusively for Windows 10. Use V1.4 for
Windows 7 environments.
Revised the GNC back Shortened the GNC board’s back up and restore times. The functions do not change from V1.4.
up and restore functions The times required for backing up and restoring the GNC board
are shortened to 25 minutes and 25 minutes from the previous
45 minutes and 100 minutes.
● How to Install
Added the POW board Added the POW board version display to the item “Maintenance”
version display functions > “Check board version”. $ {MU: Appendix 1._Installing and Uninstalling the DR-XD 1000 Maintenance
Tool_1. Install}
Added the beep setting Added the “Beep setting function” from the X-ray cart unit when
for exposure the DR-XD1000’s exposure button is pressed to stage 1 in
“Installation” > “Beep setting”. ● How to Uninstall
The default is OFF. In addition, XCON software V1.1 is required
in order to use this function. $ {MU: Appendix 1._Installing and Uninstalling the DR-XD 1000 Maintenance
Tool_2. Uninstall}
● How to Install ● How to Upgrade Versions

None.
Tool_1. Install}
● How to Uninstall
Tool_2. Uninstall}
● How to Upgrade Versions

(1) Back up the operating information.
$ {MU: 3.6_Backing Up and Restoring of Operating Information Areas}
(2) Uninstall the maintenance tools for the older version.

Maintenance Tool_2. Uninstall}
(3) Install maintenance tool V1.4.

Maintenance Tool_1. Install}
018-241-08E
MD-42
10. Design Changes Which Are ■ 3. GNC board M version or later equipped machines
Associated with Static Electricity

The following instruments are equipped with a GNC board (M version or later) which
is integrated with ESD65A board countermeasures.
Countermeasures
Depending upon the installed GNC board (M version or later), an ESD board will not
be installed.
- #xxx605 or later
In the DR-XD1000, when a panel was inserted into the DR slot, the GNC board
stopped operating because it was enveloped by static electricity from the DR slot. Refer to the following for the circuit diagram.
In order to deal with the operating stoppage of the GNC board due to the static
electricity, static electricity countermeasures as per the following details are being $ {SP:13C._CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (#xxx605 or later)}
carried out.
■ 1. Machines which have not had static electricity

countermeasures enacted on them
The following machines do not have static electricity countermeasures enacted
on them.
- For Japan : #xxx220 or earlier
- For overseas : # xxx226 or earlier
Implement static electricity countermeasures for when malfunctions occur due to static
electricity.
$ {MT:Appendix 2._10753 Error Countermeasures}
■ 2. ESD65A board-equipped machines

In the following machines, a static electricity countermeasure board (ESD65A board)
is mounted which prevents the propagation of static electricity on the paths between
the DR slot and the GNC board.
- For Japan : #xxx221 to #xxx604
- For overseas : #xxx227 to #xxx604
The installation methods and periodic maintenance methods are not impacted by this
board being installed.
Refer to the following for the ESD board replacement procedures.
$ {MC: 8.11_ESD67A Board}
Refer to the following for the circuit diagram.
$ {SP:13B._CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (#xxxx0172 or later)}
018-241-08E
MD-43
11. Usable Radio Frequency Bands in
Each Country for DR-ID 12xxSEs
and FUJIFILM-made AP
Country code
Frequency Channel (*3) Country Remarks
MC (*1) SE (*2)
2.412 to 2.472 GHz 1-13ch

4036 4015 5.180 to 5.320 GHz 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64ch Japan
5.500 to 5.700 GHz 100, 104, 108, 112, 116, 120, 124, 128, 132, 136, 140ch
2.412 to 2.462 GHz 1-11ch

5.180 to 5.320 GHz 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64ch
120,124,128ch is not
4036 841 5.500 to 5.700 GHz 100, 104, 108, 112, 116, 132, 136, 140ch USA, Canada
possible
(Excluding 5.600 to 5.640 GHz)
5.745 to 5.825 GHz 149, 153, 157, 161, 165ch
2.412 to 2.472 GHz 1-13ch

4036 56 5.180 to 5.320 GHz 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64ch Europe
5.500 to 5.700 GHz 100, 104, 108, 112, 116, 120, 124, 128, 132, 136, 140ch
2.412 to 2.472 GHz 1-13ch
W58 is restricted to
156 156 5.180 to 5.350 GHz 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64ch China
indoors
5.745 to 5.825 GHz 149, 153, 157, 161, 165ch
Dual channel setting is
2.412 to 2.462 GHz 1-11ch
158 158 Taiwan only for 60 ch + 64 ch,
5.280 to 5.320 GHz 56, 60, 64ch
and 64 ch + 60 ch
2.412 to 2.472 GHz 1-13ch Russia, Serbia, Turkey, Macedonia, Kosovo,
4036 643
5.180 to 5.240 GHz 36, 40, 44, 48ch Bosnia-Herzegovina
Mexico, Brazil, Colombia, Argentina,
Venezuela, Nicaragua, Costa Rica, Australia,
New Zealand, Hong Kong, India, Thailand,
Singapore, Vietnam, Malaysia, Bahrain,
Cambodia, UAE, Israel, Saudi Arabia, South 2.4GHz band indoor
Africa, Morocco, Algeria, South Korea, Chile, limited: Algeria, Bolivia
Panama, Uruguay, Guatemala, Dominican Dual is restricted to
Republic, Bangladesh, Philippines, Tunisia, indoors : Egypt
2.412 to 2.462 GHz 1-11ch
4036 392 Iraq, Egypt, Kuwait, El Salvador, (Ecuador), Dual setting is not
5.180 to 5.240 GHz 36, 40, 44, 48ch
Cuba, Afghanistan, Albania, Ukraine, Oman, available: Mongolia
Kazakhstan, Kenya, Sri Lanka, Tajikistan, Korea: Do not set 48ch
Paraguay, Palestine, Peru, Moldova, 5 Ghz band usage is
Montenegro, Jordan,Lebanon, Republic prohibited: Libya
of Trinidad and Tobago, Iran, Myanmar,
Tanzania, Zambia, Mongolia, Bolivia,
Mauritius, Libya, Republic of Maldives, Côte
d'Ivoire
018-241-08E
MD-44
Country code
Frequency Channel (*3) Country Remarks
MC (*1) SE (*2)
Dual channel not
2.412 to 2.472 GHz 1-13ch
360 360 Indonesia available
5.745 to 5.805 GHz 149, 153, 157, 161ch
(40MHz width)
2.412 to 2.472 GHz 1-13ch W58 is restricted to
634 634 Honduras, Nigeria, Pakistan, Nepal
5.745 to 5.825 GHz 149, 153, 157, 161, 165ch indoors: Pakistan
586 586 5.745 to 5.825 GHz 149, 153, 157, 161, 165ch Qatar Restricted to indoors
*1: It can be confirmed via [OPERATION] > [CONFIG SETTING] > [Wireless Setting]
> [Country Code] in the DR maintenance software. The country code is set by the MC.
*2: It can be confirmed via [OPERATION] > [Panel Settings] > [SE Wireless Setting] >
[SE Country Code Display] in the DR Maintenance Software. The country code is set
by the panel.
The frequency bands which the FUJIFILM-made APs can use in each region also
comply with this table.
*3: The underlined channels are the channels whereby the DFS functions work.
018-241-08E
MD-45
12. Changed the Installed OS ● Effects on Service Procedures

Setting up procedures for the machine
(Windows 7 to Windows 10) Procedures are changed as per the following. Refer to IN (Installation).
- Network setting procedures
The DR-XD 1000 previously used Windows 7, but the OS has been changed to - Backing up procedures*
Windows 10 prior to Microsoft ending support for this OS. * In Windows 7 equipped machines, factory default image discs were included for
recovery. In Windows 10 equipped machines, instead of image discs, the software
“Win10 Image Backup/Recovery Tool (Acronis True Image 2018) for creating backup
■ Details of Changes images is included. Use this software to acquire backup images after installation.
● Changed the installed OS for CSL PC How to set up new options

- Before the change: Windows 7 Professional for Embedded Systems The existing Windows 7-equipped machine can be upgraded to Windows10 using the
- After the change: Windows 10 IoT Enterprise 2019 LTSC newly added “OS UPGRADE” option.
Refer to the following for applicable procedures.
 NOTE 
$ {MC: Appendix 19._Procedures for Upgrading to Windows 10}
In Windows 10 environments, the DR-XD1000 software requires the following versions
or later. Periodic maintenance procedures
- DR-ID300CL V12.1, There are not any effects in conjunction with OS changes.
- DR-ID1200MC V17.1
$ {MD: 9.2.6_V17.1} Maintenance procedures
- DR-XD1000 Maintenance Software V1.5 Windows 10 PC are configured as new parts.
$ {MD: 9.3.6_V1.5} Item Part NO.
Also, the PC hardware has not been changed. DR-XD1000 PC assembly (Windows 10, Japan) 898Y201174
DR-XD1000 PC assembly (Windows 10, Overseas) 898Y201175
● Product changeover instrument Use these parts when replacing a PC with Windows 10-equipped machines.
# 5xxxxx Use the previous following PC parts with Windows 7-equipped machines.
From this machine or later, Windows 10, DR-ID300CL V12.1, DR-ID1200MC V17.1, Item Part NO.
DR-XD1000 maintenance software V1.5 are installed and shipped.
DR-XD1000 PC assembly (Japan) 898Y200504
● Added option DR-XD1000 PC assembly (Overseas) 898Y200505

This is an upgrade option for changing the OS of the machines installed with Windows However, the above parts equipped with Windows 7 will be discontinued when the
7. providing of support for Windows 7 is discontinued, and the PC will be replaced with
Windows 10-equipped PC.
Due to Windows 10 licensing restrictions, Windows 10-equipped PC cannot be
installed with Windows 7, nor can they be operated.
Therefore, when replacing PC, set up the system after replacing the PC without
migrating the system via SSD replacing.
$ {MU: 5.10.4_Config Setting Backup/Restore}
018-241-08E
MD-46
BLANK PAGE
018-241-08E
MD-47
BLANK PAGE
018-241-08E
AppxMD1-1
Appendix 1. Block Diagram (For Older
Configured Machines)
1.1 System Block Diagram

Main Unit Head Unit
TNK67A Mono-tank
INV67A
Transformer-1 Arm Unit
AC250V 100kHz AC9kV 100kHz DC+50kV
Booster Booster
transformer circuit
Transformer-2
AC250V 100kHz AC9kV 100kHz
Key Booster Booster
DC-50kV
Switch transformer circuit
(for Operation
Panel)
TNK3
INV3
Hand Booster
X-ray Tube
TNK2
INV2
switch transformer
CN11/12/13
Thermistor
DC+12V
DDC67A
DR Slot DC+24V-1
DDC5
Unit Collimator Unit
ADC7
ADC6
ADC5
DC/DC
DSC65A LED LMP67A
ADC1
ADC2
Switch
DC+24V+2
DDC6/7
USB USB
ADC67A
DC/DC *2
CN31/41
GNC3/4/5
GNC22/23
GNC14
GNC7/8
GNC9
GNC67A
DC+12V
DC/DC *1
F1
F2
FET67A
DC+15V
DDC2/4/8
GNC11
DC/DC 2 1
GNC1/2/15
USB USB
FET3
6/24/26
DC+15V Operator Panel

DDC1/9
GNC
GNC16
DC/DC
GNC13/25
Arm Unit
LAN
DC+24V
*2 FAN-A
POW2
POW6
Screen
*1
Touch
POW67A DC+5V
CSL_PC
Transformer(T1)
FAN1 CPU
USB
POW1
LAN Access
DC70V 3-Terminal
point
Regulator
POW7
OPP1
DC70V
DC+12V
POW3/9
NFL67A Transformer(T ) DC/DC
OPP67
F1 DC70V
NFL2
NFL1
DC+70V D38 D39

F2
LINE LOAD
DC70V
Battery Assy Breaker
DC+57.4V
±0.42V
POW8
Circuit CC/CV Battery A

Photo (UL2054, IEC62133) DC+57.4V
AC100~240V Protector Circuit ±0.42V
coupler
DC70V AC Line (L)
Noise (PC3)
Filter DC Line
Battery B AC High Voltage Line
Inlet (UL2054, IEC62133) DC+57.4V DC High Voltage Line
Photo +
coupler
±0.42V Board
(PC3) DC70V
*** Connector
POCX010102002J.ai
018-241-05E
DR-XD 1000 Service Manual AppxMD1-1
AppxMD1-2
1.2 Signal Diagram (2) Shot 1 ON
1. Input Shot 1 signal into the GNC board
■ Signal System Diagram 2. Transmit Shot 1 signal to the SE from the MP

Monitor
Monitor
LAN
Hosp CSL
USB CSL
Eth1
USB GNC board 2. MC
GNC board MC
Wifi Shot 1
LAN Tool
Tool 1.
Shot 1
X-CON
X-CON
Serial Serial DAP
DAP
Serial OPP board
OPP board
Wireless LAN SE
SE
POCX010102008J-01.ai
POCX010102006J.ai
3. Check that Shot 1 OK? to the CSL from the SE

(1) When registering the menus 4. Return OK to the SE from the CSL
Transmit the exposing conditions to the SE and the XCON on the GNC board from
the CSL. Monitor
Monitor
CSL
3.
CSL GNC board Shot 1 MC
OK?
GNC board MC Shot 1 MP AP Maintenance
4. OK Tool
Tool X-CON
DAP
X-CON
OPP board
DAP
SE
OPP board POCX010102008J-02.ai
SE
POCX010102007J.ai
018-241-05E
AppxMD1-3
(3) Shot 2 ON (4) After exposure
1. Input Shot 2 signal into the GNC board 1. Forward the actual results to INV board → GNC board → CSL
2. Transmit Shot 2 signal to the SE from the MP 2. Forward the preview images and actual images to SE → (AP) → MC/CSL
Cart Monitor
Cart Monitor
INV board CSL 1.

2. Shot 2 INV board CSL
GNC board MC
GNC board MC
Tool
1. Shot 2 Tool
X-CON
X-CON
DAP
DAP
OPP board
OPP board
SE 2.
POCX010102009J-01.ai
SE
POCX010102010J.ai
3. Transmit Shot 2 signal to the CSL from the SE

4. Transmit ShotGO=OK to the MP from the SE
5. Transmit EXP ON to the INV board from the MP
Cart Monitor
4.
INV board 5. EXP ON ShotGO CSL
=OK
GNC board MC
Tool
X-CON 3. Shot 2
DAP
OPP board
SE
POCX010102009J-02.ai
018-241-05E
AppxMD1-4
■ Exposing Sequence (9) (1)
(2) fil kV set
Shot 1 (7)
(1) Shot 1 inputs to the GNC board (Hand SW)
GNC board (4) STB_OK
Shot 2 (5)
(2) GNC board → POW board: Not rechargeable transmission (9) (2) (10) (6) EXP_ON
GNC board → INV board: Filament heat voltage set, exposing (8) kV, mAs
conditions transmission (2) (10) ON OFF
GNC board → FET board: ON Charge Charge Mono-tank
OFF ON FET board
(3) Battery → FET board → INV board: Power supply
(3)
POW board INV board
(4) INV board →GNC board: Irradiation preparations completed (STB_OK)
Battery
(5) Shot 5 inputs to the GNC board
POCX010102011J.ai
(6) GNC board →INV board: Exposure start (EXP_ON)
(7) GNC board →INV board: Acquire the actual values (kV value, mA value
(analog values)), the A/D conversion, integrate the mA time and
calculate mAs.
(8) GNC board: If it is detected that the set mAs value has been reached,
the irradiation shuts off
(9) Shot 1 and Shot 2 releases (OFF)
(10) GNC board →FET board: OFF

GNC board →POW board: Chargeable transmission
018-241-05E
Control Sheet
11.30.2016 02 Revision (FM9462) 4, 7 to 19
05.31.2017 03 Revision (FM9471) 4 to 10, 20, 25 to 32, 33 to36

05.31.2017 03 Changes in pagination (FM9471) 11 to 19, 21 to 24, 37 to 39
8 to 10, 25 to 27, 31 to 33, 35, 36,
11.30.2017 04 Revision for MC V16.2 (FM9486) 39 to 41, Appx MT 1-1 to 1-4,
AppxMT 2-1 to 2-12, AppxMT 3-1 to 3-4
11.30.2017 04 Changes in pagination (FM9486) 28 to 30, 34, 37, 38, 42, 43
4 to 7, 9 to 11, 13, 25 to 32, 34 to 39,
42 to 48, 50, AppxMT 1-1,
AppxMT 2-1 to 2-8, AppxMT 2-10 to2-13,
AppxMT 3-1, 3-2, AppxMT 4-1 to 4-4,
AppxMT 5-1 to 5-8, AppxMT 6-1 to 6-4,
AppxMT 7-1 to 7-4
8, 12, 14 to 24, 33, 40, 41, 49, 51,
10.31.2018 05 Changes in pagination (FM9528) AppxMT 2-9, AppxMT 2-14 to 2-16,
Troubleshooting (MT) 05.31.2019 06 Revision for U.S. and Brazil (FM9565)

AppxMT 3-3
19, 25, 27 to 29, 37, 39, 51,
AppxMT 2-13
05.31.2019 06 Changes in pagination (FM9565) 26, 30 to 36, 38, 40 to 50, 52 to 55
17, 18, 21, 25 to 28, 35, 36,
09.30.2019 07 Revision for MC V17.1 (FM9587) AppxMT 1-1, AppxMT 6-1 to 6-3,
AppxMT 7-2, 7-3, AppxMT 8-1 to 8-4
09.30.2019 07 Changes in pagination (FM9587) 19, 20, 22 to 24, 29 to 34, 37 to 55
018-241-08E
MT-1
1. Overview of Troubleshooting 1.1 Troubleshooting from Error Log
The SE (FPD) used in the machine is an expensive component. 1.1.1 Checking the Error Log
If the SE (FPD) malfunctions, check the status indication of the status lamps (LED’s)
provided on the SE, and check the error log for analysis. Using the RU PC-TOOL ERROR DB, view the error log and check the occurrence of
It is undesirable to replace the SE (FPD) unit without careful consideration even if the error codes.
SE (FPD) is suspected to have a failure. START
Start the RU PC-TOOL.
Back Up the ERROR LOG.
Start the ERROR DB to view the error log.
END
600_200001.ai
 Purpose of Making a Backup of the Error Log

An error log is added to the file whenever an error occurs during the operation of the
machine, and when the file becomes full, its entries are overwritten on a first-in, first-
out basis.
Before troubleshooting, back up the error log, which contains the information about
errors encountered during the user’s use of the machine.
 Purpose of Viewing the Error Log

When an error occurs, it may incur two or more additional errors. The error code
displayed on the CL represents the last-encountered error.
You must therefore view the error log to locate the error code related to the
encountered trouble before proceeding to perform troubleshooting.
018-241-01E
DR-XD 1000 Service Manual MT-1
MT-2
1.1.2 Determining the Error Code of the Encountered 1.2 How to View Error Code
Trouble An error code is expressed as a 5-digit number starting with “1”.
(1) Group the errors that occurred from the error codes displayed on the
ERROR DB window of the RU PC-TOOL. 1XYZZ
(Example)
00 to 99: Reference number for each error category
Divide into error occurrence groups A and B based on the error occurrence time.
1 to 9: Error category
(2) Locate the error that is responsible for the encountered trouble (the 0 to 2: Error level
error that occurred first). 1: Always 1
600_200003.ai
(Example)
The first error in the error occurrence group A is “12500”.  X: Error Level
Error code that occurred first. Indicates the error level.
Start the analysis from this error code.
Error DB window
0: FATAL error
Level where the system shuts down and routine processing cannot be continued.
The user is notified of the error by the indication on the CL. It is necessary to
[12500] 2009/07/27 18:11:52 023913 @xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx immediately troubleshoot and take remedial action when a FATAL error occurs.
[12500] 2009/07/27 18:13:11 023913 @xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
[12500] 2009/07/27 18:13:12 023B5B @xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
A [12610] 2009/07/27 18:19:32 023913 @xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 1: WARNING error
[12610] 2009/07/27 18:19:52 023913 @xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Level where an error occurs due to erroneous user operation, but routine processing
[12210] 2009/07/27 18:23:50 0244C0 @xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
can be continued.
[12103] 2009/07/27 19:10:43 023FE9 @xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx The user is notified of the error by the indication on the CL. The user can continue
B [12103] 2009/07/27 19:12:40 023FE9 @xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
routine processing after confirmation. If erroneous user operations frequently occur, it
is necessary to guide the user for improvement.
2: LOG error
Level where an accidental retry error causing no problem in performance, and routine
processing can be continued.
An error is logged, but the user is not notified when the error occurs.
It is necessary to check the error log in periodic servicing and take remedial action.
The logged errors may be used for design analysis.
600_200002.ai
018-241-01E
MT-3
 Y: Error Category 1.3 How to Use the Detail Error Log
Indicates a part where the error is detected. Error codes appearing on the ERROR DB window of the RU PC-TOOL or error codes
Value Category Description appearing when an error occurs in carrying out utilities store the log of various kinds
of detail error information in response to the situations of the error. You can narrow
1 Vacant -
down the cause of the error from the detail error information.
2 Error in panel Error related to the panel (FPD)
Error in mechanical Error related to the mechanism such as bucky control  Display Example of the Detail Error Log
3
control
<Display example>
Error in retro radiation Failure in communication with the retro radiation source, [12500] 2009/07/27 18:11:52 023913 @complementMAS...428 PARAM=uAs VALUE=0
4
source or data inconsistency
5 Error in CL (IIP) Failure in communication with the CL (IIP) Error code Expansion error log
6 Error in file Failure in reading/writing data from/in the HDD and FTP
Error DB window
Failure in communication with the MP or SE, or data
7 Error in MP
inconsistency
8 Vacant -
9 Error in software Item not applicable to 1 to 8 (for debugging software) [12500] 2009/07/27 18:11:52 023913 @xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
[12500] 2009/07/27 18:13:12 023B5B @xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
 ZZ: Serial Number for Error Category [12610] 2009/07/27 18:19:32 023913 @xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
[12210] 2009/07/27 18:23:50 0244C0 @xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Indicates a serial number for each error category.
[12103] 2009/07/27 19:10:43 023FE9 @xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
[12103] 2009/07/27 19:12:40 023FE9 @xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
600_200004.ai
018-241-01E
MT-4
1.4 How to Use the Cart Part Log  OPERATION LOG (Operation log: OP)
The cart logs are saved inside the folders which store the logs, and in the logs for  Format
each recorded date. The DR-XD 1000 maintenance tools write out to the logs which
have been recorded in CAB format files. YYYY:MM:DD:hh:mm:ss.ms,Tick:0xOStick,kV:kV values (condition),mAs:mAs
values (condition),mA:mA values (condition),Body type (setting), SE interlock
Log type Storage destination file name setting, kV:kV values (actual calculation values),mAs:mAs values (actual calculation
Operation log (OPERATION LOG) OPER.CAB values),mA:mA values (actual calculation values),mS:Irradiation time (actual calculation
Operating information (RUNNING LOG) RUN.CAB values),Gy:Area dose (actual calculation values),Ulnf:0x Device information
Error Log (ERROR LOG) ERRB.CAB kV values (condition) 0.1kV units
Trace log (TRACE LOG) TRACE.CAB mAs values (condition) 0.01mAs units
mA values (condition) 0.1mA units
In addition, the log destination folder can be specified from the DR-XD 1000 maintenance 0: Standard body type
tools. Body type (setting)
1:Large body type
$ {MU: 3.4_Saving Log Information} 0: With SE interlock
SE interlock setting
1: Without SE interlock
kV values (actual calculation values) 0.1kV units
 Description
mAs values (actual calculation values) 0.01mAs units
Log Type Item Description Description mA values (actual calculation values) 0.1mA units
Exposure conditions: Irradiation time 0.1ms units
kV values, mAs values, (actual calculation values)
mA values, Body type,
Exposure conditions SE interlock setting Push the SW1 switch, Area dose (actual calculation values) 0.001uGycm2 units
OPERATION LOG and exposure Exposure performance: when the switch was Bit allocation
performance kV values, mAs values, pushed back B0: Absence or presence of temperature warning
mA values, mSec (1=presence)
values Device information
B1: Absence or presence of additional filter
Area dose (1=presence)
- Total exposure count B2-31: Spare
The counter values
- Gas spring exposure
and cumulative mAs Push the SW1 switch,
count  Display example
RUNNING LOG values which include when the switch was
- Tube exposure count
this irradiation pushed back 2015/11/07 10:27:09.480,Tick:0x01234567,kV:850,mAs:25,mA:250,0,0,
- Total mAs value
Battery status Battery information (1) (2)
Error code, Detailed When an error is kV:851,mAs:25,mA:248,mS:100,Gy:2450000,UInf:0x00000001
ERROR LOG Error information
information generated (3) (4)
Event Log
Send all of the buffer  How to read
TRACE LOG State transition log For trace information when the
key is OFF (1) On November 7, 2015 10: 27: 09: 480
Trace log
(2) 850x0.1kV, 25x0.01mAs, 250x0.1mA standard body type, irradiation
with SE interlock conditions
(3) Actual calculation values are 851x0.1kV, 25x0.01mAs, 248x0.1mA,
100*0.1ms, 2450000x0.001μGy cm2
(4) With temperature warning, no additional filter
018-241-05E
MT-5
 RUNNING LOG (1) (Operating log: CT)  RUNNING LOG (2) (Battery log: BT)
 Format  Format
YYYY:MM:DD:hh:mm:ss.ms,Tick:0xOStick,Cnt:Total count value,mAs:Total mAs YYYY:MM:DD:hh:mm:ss.ms,Tick:0xOStick,
value,GasCnt:Count value for gas spring,TubeCnt:Count value for tube BatA:Battery 1 state•,BatB:Battery 2 state
Total count value Total exposure count
Battery data A
Total mAs value Total mAs Battery 1 state
16 blocks with 4 digits separated by commas
Count value for gas spring Total exposure count for gas spring Battery data B
Battery 2 state
Count value for tube Total exposure count for tube 16 blocks with 4 digits separated by commas
 Display example
 Display example 2016/12/10 10:34:45.178,Tick:0x0000EE4A,
2015/11/07 10:27:09.480,Tick:0x01234567,Cnt:28345,mAs:4583340,Cnt:12445, BatA:1012,2C88,19EE,003B,0064,002F,0064,C82F,00E0,0030,0040,
(1) (2) (3) (4) (1) (2)
0000,0000,0000,0000,0000,
TubeCnt:28345 BatB:1012,2C88,1888,0038,0064,002F,0064,C824,00B3,0000,0000,
(5) 0000,0000,0000,0000,0000
 How to read
 How to read This includes the way to read the underlined (1) sections.
The “1012” part is a hexadecimal number which indicates the battery’s status flag.
(1) The number of times would be as per the following, 2015 11-7, When it is as per the following status, each bit becomes 1.
10:27.09, 480 exposures.
Status definitions bit Status
(2) Total exposure count: 28,345 times Charger mode 0 Battery is being charged
(3) Total mAs value: 4,583,340 (mAs) Body mode 1 Battery is using
(4) Total exposure count for gas spring: 12,445 times 0% detecting state 2 Design application
Over discharging state 3 Design application
(5) Total exposure count for tube: 28,345 times
Main unit connection status 4 Design application
Charger connection status 5 Design application
PL detection flag 6 Design application
Fully charged state 7 Design application
Regenerating prohibited flag 8 Design application
Error status 9 Design application
Rapid charging allowed 10 Design application
Pre-charging allowed 11 Design application
Stop charging 12 Charging stopped state because the battery is charged
Reserve 13 Design application
018-241-05E
MT-6
Since respective hexadecimal numbers are also the underlined (2) part of “2C88” and ** Hexadecimal notation according to the extent of battery consumption is as per the
onward, replace them with decimal numbers. The extent of battery consumption is following.
confirmed by the battery’s absolute capacity, so when this value is “0032” (50%) or Hexadecimal Extent of battery
less, battery replacement is recommended time. ** notation consumption
Decimal 0064 100%
Log
value after Read Description
(Hexadecimal) 005F 95%
replacement
Battery total capacity The dischargeable battery capacity 005A 90%
2C88 11400
11400 mAh from a fully charged battery 0055 85%
Battery remaining The dischargeable battery 0050 80%
19EE 6638
capacity 6638 mAh* capacity
004B 75%
Battery relative Reserve capacity/total capacity x
003B 59 0046 70%
capacity 59%* 100 [%]
Absolute battery Total capacity/initial total capacity 0041 65%
0064 100
capacity 100% x 100 [%] 003C 60%
Convert up battery relative capacity 0037 55%
002F 47 Battery remaining 47%
to the termination voltage
0032 50%
Battery internal
0064 100 Battery internal resistance 002D 45%
resistance 100*
Battery total voltage
C82F 51247 Total battery voltage value
51247 mV*
Battery current values  ERROR LOG (2) (Error log: ER)
Positive values: discharging
00E0 224 Battery current 224 mA
current  Format
Negative values: charging current
YYYY:MM:DD:hh:mm:ss.ms,Tick:0xOStick,Cnt:Task ID,Err:Error code,Info:Detailed
Number of cycles which were information
converted from the discharging
0030 48 Number of cycles 48
summation capacity/initial total
capacity  Display example
Fully charged OFF → ON number 2015/11/07 10:27:09.480,Tick:0x01234567,Tid:20,Err:0x121,Info:0x0
0040 64 Charging 64 times
of times (1) (2)
* Design application
 How to read
2015 November 7, 10: 27: 09: 480, error 121 occurred
(1) (2)
REFERENCES
See the following about error codes.
$ {MT:2._Error Code Table}
018-241-05E
MT-7
1.4.1 Example of Log Analysis  RUNNING LOG (2) (BATTERY LOG: BT)
An analysis example case whereas ERR 120 occurred on 1/5 17:28 based upon the - 2017/01/05 17:28:15.947,Tick:0x0017A346, (Charging)
error log, operation log, and battery log is shown. BatA:0501,2C74,2BE5,0063,0063,0063,0064,DA9D,0000,0004,0008,0000,0000,
0000,0000,0000,BatB:1181,2C6F,2C52,0064,0063,0063,0064,DAA9,0000,0004,
 Outline 000A,0000-,0000,0000,0000,0000
Status 0501 → The lower 4 digits are operating during the charging mode because
1.In looking at the error log, ERR 120 is generated at 17: 28, and 17: 29. 0001: the 1st bit is 1, and the 2nd bit is 0. The battery current is 0000 (battery not
2. When confirming the operation log, since the actual values could not be taken, the used as power supply)
17: 28 and 17: 29 exposing could not be exposed, so it is understood that they were
normally exposed at 17: 33, and 17: 34. - 2017/01/05 17:29:16.685,Tick:0x0017BB01, (Charging)
3. Battery log is saved when Shot 1 is pressed. In looking at the battery log, it is seen BatA:0501,2C74,2BE5,0063,0063,0063,0064,DA9D,0000,0004,0008,0000,0000,
that the cart was charging during the 17: 28, and 17: 29 exposing. After that, it is 0000,0000,0000,BatB:1181,2C6F,2C52,0064,0063,0063,0064,DAA9,0000,0004,
seen that the cart charging was at 17: 33, and 17: 34. 000A,0000-,0000,0000,0000,0000
In conclusion, it can be seen that the following ERR 120 was caused by being Status 0501 → The lower 4 digits are operating during the charging mode because
connected to the power supply during exposing. 0001: the 1st bit is 1, and the 2nd bit is 0. The battery current is 0000 (battery not
used as power supply)
 NOTE 
- 2017/01/05 17:33:22.380,Tick:0x00005862, (Non-charging)
This instrument cannot expose while it is connected to a power supply.
BatA:1012,2C74,2BD0,0063,0063,0063,0064,DA47,009D,0004,0008,0000,0000,
0000,0000,0000,BatB:1092,2C6F,2C3C,0064,0063,0063,0064,DA53,00B6,0004,
000A,0000-,0000,0000,0000,0000
 1. ERROR LOG (ERROR LOG: ER) Status 1012 → The lower 4 digits are operating during the charging mode because
2017/01/05 17:28:16.025,Tick:0x0017A34C,Tid:1,Err:0x120,Info:0x604f300 0010: the 1st bit is 0, and the 2nd bit is 1. The battery current is 009D = 157
2017/01/05 17:29:16.779,Tick:0x0017BB07,Tid:1,Err:0x120,Info:0x604f300
The ERR 120 occurred at 17:28, and 17:29, and the power supply to the INV board is
abnormal.
 2. OPERATION LOG (OPERATION LOG: OP)

- 2017/01/05 17:28:16.009,Tick:0x0017A346,kV:800,mAs:100,mA:0,0,0,kV:0,mAs:0,
mA:0,mS:0,Gy:0,UInf:0x0000
Could not expose due to error (set at 800 x 0.1 = 80 kV 100 x 0.01 = 1 mAs, no
exposure results)
- 2017/01/05 17:29:16.748,Tick:0x0017BB01,kV:800,mAs:100,mA:0,0,0,kV:0,mAs:0,
mA:0,mS:0,Gy:0,UInf:0x0000
Could not expose due to error (set at 80 kV, 1 mAs, no results)
- 2017/01/05 17:33:22.427,Tick:0x00005862,kV:800,mAs:100,mA:0,0,0,kV:792,mAs:
99,mA:298,mS:332,Gy:99795,UInf:0x0000
Normal exposing (set at 800 x 0.1 = 80 kV 100 x 0.01 = 1 mAs, actual values are
79.2 kV, 0.99 mAs, 9.9 mA, 29.8 msec, and 3.32 μGy*cm2)
- 2017/01/05 17:34:04.598,Tick:0x000068DC,kV:800,mAs:100,mA:0,0,0,kV:792,mAs:
99,mA:298,mS:332,Gy:99795,UInf:0x0000
Normal exposing (set at 800 x 0.1 = 80 kV 100 x 0.01 = 1 mAs, actual values are
79.2 kV, 0.99 mAs, 9.9 mA, 29.8 msec, and 3.32 μGy*cm2)
018-241-05E
MT-8
2. Error Code Table
2.1 Cart Unit

 Resolving when errors are generated
When cart part errors are generated, implement the following procedures.
If the X-ray cart’s main key is turned OFF, the cart part logs will be saved.
(1) Turn OFF the main key of the X-ray cart.
(2) Shut down the DR-ID 300CL.
(3) Turn the main breaker OFF on the side of the X-ray cart.
(4) After unplugging the power cable, reinsert it.
(5) Turn the main breaker ON on the side of the X-ray cart.
(6) Start the DR-ID 300CL.
(7) Turn the X-ray cart’s main key ON.
 Error code table
Error Workarounds for Unresolrable

Error Type Error Cause Checks, and Workarounds
Code Situations on the Left
Concomitantly generated with
090 Software logic error (Fatal)
other errors
Eliminate other error conditions. Replace the GNC board
Check whether the harness (136Y121498) is not unplugged,

POW communication GNC board and POW board check that it is unplugged or plugged in. In addition, and (1) Replace 136Y121498
100 error serial communication errors check whether they are any aberrations such as it being (2) Replace the GNC board, and POW board
damaged, disconnected, stripped, etc.
Check whether the harness (136Y121501) is not unplugged,
GNC board and OPP board check that it is unplugged or plugged in. In addition, and (1) Replace 136Y121501
101 OPP communication error
serial communication errors check whether they are any aberrations such as it being (2) Replace the GNC board, and OPP board
damaged, disconnected, stripped, etc.
Check whether the harness (136Y121501, 136Y200059) is
(1) Replace 136Y121501 and 136Y200059
GNC board and Console PC not unplugged, check that it is unplugged or plugged in. In
102 CSL communication error
serial communication errors addition, and check whether they are any aberrations such
(2) Replace the GNC board
(3) Replace the OPP board, and PC
as it being damaged, disconnected, stripped, etc.
Check whether the harness (136Y121501, 136Y200059) is
(1) Replace 136Y121501 and 136Y200059
Maintenance GNC board and Console PC not unplugged, check that it is unplugged or plugged in. In
103 communication error serial communication errors addition, and check whether they are any aberrations such
(3) Replace the OPP board, and PC
as it being damaged, disconnected, stripped, etc.
018-241-05E
MT-9
Communication errors with
Check whether any particles such as metallic fragments are
105 I2C eroor the EEPROM inside the GNC
not adhered on the GNC board.
Replace the GNC board
board
Communication errors with the
106 AD conversion error AD Converter inside the GNC
board
Communication errors with the
107 DA conversion error DA Converter inside the GNC
board
Read error of EEPROM inside Check whether any particles such as metallic fragments are
110 EEPROM read error
the GNC board not adhered on the GNC board.
Write error of EEPROM inside Check whether any particles such as metallic fragments are
111 EEPROM write error
the GNC board not adhered on the GNC board.
When ERR120 has been generated while adjusting the

filament preheating voltage, implement the following tasks. If errors are generated even if the left is implemented 3 times,
Power supply fault to the INV (1) Check the cable wiring if implementing replacing before or when the filament preheat voltage is not being adjusted,
120 Standby error
board adjusting the filament preheating voltage refer to the analysis tree (ERR120, 122) and resolve.
(2) Turn on the power again, and reimplement adjusting the $ {MT:4.1_ERR120, 122}
filament preheating voltage
Check whether the harness (136Y121510, 136Y121511)
(1) Replace 136Y121508
is incorrectly wired, or if there is a ground fault. (Be careful
The feedback line between the (2) Replace the GNC board
Disconnection in high- since there are round terminals.)
121 voltage circuit
INV board and monotank is
Check whether the harness (136Y121512, 136Y121508)
(3) Replace the INV board and mono-tank
disconnected. (4) Replace the arm assembly
is unplugged/if there are any problems, and check that it is
(136Y121510, 136Y121511, 136Y121512)
unplugged or plugged in.
Implement aging.
$ {AppxMT:1._Aging}
When using the instrument, if the user does not implement
the warm-up aging, tell the user to implement the warm-up
The voltage drops in the high- aging. Whether or not warm-up aging is to be implemented If the error 122 is reproduced multiple times after aging, refer
Voltage drop in high-
122 voltage circuit
voltage circuit between the INV can be confirmed via the OPERATION LOG. to the analysis tree (ERR 120, 122) and resolve it.
board and the monotank $ {MT:4.1_ERR120, 122}
$ {MT:1.4_How to Use the Cart Part Log}
For warm-up aging, refer to the following or the “Instruction
Manual Chapter 5 Daily Inspections and Care”.
$ {AppxMT:1._Aging}
018-241-05E
MT-10

Implement aging. When reenacting it even after aging, check whether the
harness (136Y121510, 136Y121511) is miswired, and is not
$ {AppxMT:1._Aging} grounded. (Be careful since it is a round terminal)
When using the instrument, if the user does not implement Check that the harness (136Y121512, 136Y121508) is not
the warm-up aging, tell the user to implement the warm-up unplugged/no anomalies, and unplug and plug it in.
Overcurrent in the high-voltage aging. Whether or not warm-up aging is to be implemented
Overcurrent in filament If errors occur even after the above is implemented, then
123 circuit
circuit between the INV board can be confirmed via the OPERATION LOG. implement the following.
and the monotank
$ {MT:1.4_How to Use the Cart Part Log} (1) Replace 136Y121508
For warm-up aging, refer to the following or the “Operation (2) Replace the GNC board
Manual Chapter 5 Daily Inspections and Care”. (3) Replace the INV board and mono-tank
(4) Replace the arm assembly
$ {AppxMT:1._Aging} (136Y121510, 136Y121511, 136Y121512)
Overvoltage in the high-voltage aging. Whether or not warm-up aging is to be implemented
Overvoltage in filament If errors occur even after the above is implemented, then
124 circuit
circuit between the INV board can be confirmed via the OPERATION LOG. implement the following.
and the monotank
$ {AppxMT:1._Aging} (136Y121510, 136Y121511, 136Y121512)
Implement aging.
$ {AppxMT:1._Aging}
aging. Whether or not warm-up aging is to be implemented
can be confirmed via the OPERATION LOG. (1) Replace 136Y121508
Overcurrent in filament $ {MT:1.4_How to Use the Cart Part Log} (2) Replace the GNC board
125 circuit
Filament overcurrent For warm-up aging, refer to the following or the “Operation (3) Replace the INV board and mono-tank
Manual Chapter 5 Daily Inspections and Care”. (4) Replace the arm assembly
(136Y121510, 136Y121511, 136Y121512)
$ {AppxMT:1._Aging}
Check that the harness (136Y121510, 136Y121511) is not
miswired, nor are there any shorts. (Be careful since it is a
round terminal.)
unplugged/no anomalies, and unplug and plug it in.
018-241-05E
MT-11
Implement aging.
$ {AppxMT:1._Aging}
aging. Whether or not warm-up aging is to be implemented
can be confirmed via the OPERATION LOG. (1) Replace 136Y121508
Overvoltage in filament $ {MT:1.4_How to Use the Cart Part Log} (2) Replace the GNC board
126 circuit
Filament overvoltage For warm-up aging, refer to the following or the “Operation (3) Replace the INV board and mono-tank
Manual Chapter 5 Daily Inspections and Care”. (4) Replace the arm assembly
(136Y121510, 136Y121511, 136Y121512)
$ {AppxMT:1._Aging}
miswired, nor are there any shorts. (Be careful since it is a
round terminal.)
unplugged/no anomalies, and unplug and plug it in.
Check that the harnesses (136Y121510, 136Y121511) are
(1) Replace 136Y121508
not incorrectly wired, and whether or not there is a ground.
Failure in tube current INV board tube current monitor (Be careful, since they are round terminals.)
127 monitor circuit circuit malfunction Check whether the harness (136Y121512, 136Y121508)
(3) Replace the INV board and mono-tank
(136Y121510, 136Y121511, 136Y121512)
Refer to the analysis tree (ERR128), and resolve.
$ {MT:4.2_ERR128}
Temperature rise in high- Monotank temperature rise <Reference>
128 pressure tank error 45 °C: Warning displays (temperature warning LEDs light up
on the operation panel). Irradiating is feasible.
* Warnings are not recorded in the log.
50 °C: This error is displayed. Exposing is not feasible.
Temperature rise in high- INV board temperature rise The INV board thermo switch is worn out. Replace the INV
129 pressure circuit error board.
The cooling fan operations Refer to the analysis tree (ERR130), and resolve.
130 Cooling fan rotation stop
stop $ {MT:4.3_ERR130}
Generated when the short time aging. Whether or not warm-up aging is to be implemented
If errors occur even after the above is implemented, then
190 Software logic error (Error) exposing has occurred via can be confirmed via the OPERATION LOG. implement the following.
monotank discharging, etc.
$ {AppxMT:1._Aging} (136Y121510, 136Y121511, 136Y121512)
018-241-05E
MT-12
Check that the battery outputs are not incorrectly wired, and
200 Battery error The battery is in an error state
whether or not there is a ground, and replace the battery.
Replace the POW board
Check whether the Ready LED stays lit (the SW1 is not
Temperature rise in INV board filament circuit continuing to be pressed), and if the Ready LED stays lit,
12A filament circuit temperature rise error replace the (1) Shot SW, and (2) GNC board.
If the Ready LED does not stay lit, replace the INV board.
The exposing dose reaches
Exposure in excess of 60 (1) Replace the INV board
12C mAs
60mAs, and the exposing Replace the GNC board
(2) Replace the monotank
terminates
ShotGo signal error inside the
12D Panel signal error
GNC board
Replace the harness (136Y121508) and GNC board
Restart the DR-XD 1000 maintenance tool, check that the

phenomenon is reproduced. If it is not reproduced, look over
(1) Replace 136Y121501 and 136Y200059
Maintenance IF sequence Communications error with the the situation.
12E error DR-XD 1000 maintenance tool Check whether the harness (136Y121501, 136Y200059)
(3) Replace the OPP board and PC
Exposing condition setting
Exposing condition setting Replace the GNC board.
12F value error
value error which is held inside
Do not back up nor restore the GNC data at this time.
the GNC board
Gas spring due for The gas spring has reached its Replace the gas spring, and reset the count via the DR-XD
A01 replacement time for replacement 1000 maintenance tool.
Monotank due for The monotank has reached its Replace the monotank, and reset the count via the DR-XD
A02 replacement time for replacement 1000 maintenance tool.
The gas spring and monotank
Gas spring and monotank Replace the gas spring and monotank, then reset the count
A03 due for replacement
has reached its time for
via the DR-XD 1000 maintenance tool.
replacement
018-241-05E
MT-13
2.2 MC
The error code shown here is an error code common to the MC software.
The code that is not generated in the DR-XD 1000 is also included.
Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
Memory map reconfiguration A retry of memory map reconfiguration is made, but an error is detected,
10150 resulting in system shutdown.
error
[During bootup/routine processing]
A high temperature (Approx. 60°C or higher) of the FPD is detected,
resulting in system shutdown. - Check the temperature and humidity of the examination
room.
10212 FPD high temperature error <Reference>
- You can know the No. of the FPD of interest and the temperature when - Check the MP cooling fan (P-FAN).
the error is detected on the error log. - Check the FPD.
- This temperature is an estimate since it fluctuates depending on the SE
type and the external temperatures.

A low temperature (Approx. -10°C or lower) of the FPD is detected,
resulting in system shutdown.
- Check the temperature and humidity of the examination
10213 FPD low temperature error <Reference>
- You can know the No. of the FPD of interest and the temperature when
room.
- Check the FPD.
the error is detected on the error log.
IP address multiple connection [During bootup/routine processing]

10214 The FPD with the same IP address is connected, and the system shuts - Check the IP address setting.
error down.
[During bootup]
An attempt is made to read the correction data from the SSD and load
onto the CPU board memory and the SODIMM mounted on the SPC
board, but read from the SSD fails. After two retries are made, a retrial
10600 Correction data load error count is over, resulting in system shutdown. - Check the SSD.
<Reference>
You can know the file name where a failure in loading occurs on the error
log.
[During bootup]
An attempt is made to read the system file (except the correction data)
from the SSD and load onto the CPU board memory and the SODIMM
10601 System file load error mounted on the SPC board, but read from the SSD fails. - Check the SSD.
<Reference>
You can know the file name where a failure in loading occurs on the error
log.
018-241-05E
MT-14
Error
Code
10750 MPX fuse blown error A blown fuse of the MPX board is detected, and the system shuts down.
[During bootup/routine processing] - Check the fan (FAN1).

10751 MP fan stop MP cooling fan (FAN1) stop is detected, and the system shuts down. - Check the MPC board.

10752 MPX connector disconnected The system shuts down, as the cable is disconnected from the MPX - Check the MPX board.
board or the cable is unconnected.
[During bootup/routine processing] - Check the MP power. (If the power of the MP is OFF,
Disconnection of a line between the MP and the MC is detected. turn it ON.)
10753 MP connection error - Select a defective item from the detail error log
mentioned in ERRORDB.LOG, and check it.
[During bootup]
10900 Parameter error Parameter settings for the stand and the bed are not made, and the - Check the parameters.
system shuts down.
[During bootup]
The following mismatches are found when the config is checked during
startup of the MC:
10902 System configuration error - Emergency mode ON & Long-time accumulation ON
- An invalid combination is set in the config.
- AutoDetect OFF & Long-time accumulation ON
- Third panel configuration ON & Emergency mode OFF

10990 Software logic error An error is detected in the logic for controlling the software, and the
system shuts down.

10991 Parameter file key not hit An attempt is made to load the parameter file, but the key is not detected,
resulting in system shutdown.

- The RMV board detects blowout of a fuse of the POW board mounted
on the FPD, and disables the FPD.
- The RMV board detects a failure in connection of a power connector of
the GTD board mounted on the FPD, and disables the FPD.
- The RMV board detects an error of the MP cooling fan (P-FAN), and
disables the FPD.
- Check the FPD.
11111 RMV board blown fuse detected - Check the MP cooling fan (P-FAN).
[During M-Utility]
Blowout of a fuse of the POW board is detected by the RMV board during
the check of fuses.
<Reference>
You can know which device (fuse, connector or fan) is defective on the
error log.
018-241-05E
MT-15
Error
Code
Although an attempt is made to set the reading mode for the RMV
board mounted on the FPD, an error in communication is detected when
RMV board communication reading back the register value after setting of the reading mode. The - Select a defective matter from the detail error log
11112 communication is retried, but results in a failure. The FPD is disabled. indicated in ERRORDB.LOG, and check it.
error
[During M-Utility]
- An error is detected by Communication Check of RMV.
[During routine processing]

11140 CPU image correction error Processing of the CPU image correction library fails.
Exposure time sequence [During routine processing]

11160 Signals necessary for continuing the exposure cannot be received after
timeout starting the exposure, resulting in timeout.

MP cooling fan stop is detected.
11201 FAN stop error - Check the MP cooling fan (P-FAN).
<Reference>
You can know which fan stops on the error log.

A low temperature (Approx. 10°C or lower) in the FPD is detected, and
the FPD is disabled.
- Check the environments at the installation site.
11210 FPD low temperature warning <Reference> - Check the use conditions.
- You can know the No. of the FPD of interest and the temperature when - Check the FPD.

The panel gets high temperature (Approx. 40°C or higher) and is disabled.
- Check the environments at the installation site.
<Reference> - Check the use conditions.
11211 FPD high temperature warning - You can know the No. of the FPD of interest and the temperature when - Check the MP cooling fan (P-FAN).
the error is detected on the error log. - Check the FPD.
Battery high temperature [During bootup/routine processing]

- Check the ambient temperature.
11215 The battery temperature rises to the warning level.
- Space exposures to lower the temperature in the FPD.
warning
018-241-05E
MT-16
Error
Code
[During bootup/routine processing] - Remove the battery from the FPD. If the removed
The battery temperature rises to the banning-of-use level. battery remains hot, replace it with a new one, as the
battery is defective.
11216 Battery high temperature error - Remove the battery from the FPD. If the temperature
of the removed battery lowers, check the cables in the
FPD.
Battery low temperature [During bootup/routine processing]

11217 The battery temperature lowers to the warning level. - Check the ambient temperature.
warning
11218 Battery low temperature error The battery temperature lowers to the banning-of-use level.
- Check the ambient temperature.

The board ambient temperature rises to the banning-of-use level (Approx.
Panel high temperature error 60°C or higher). - Check the ambient temperature.
11219 <Reference> - Check the thermistor (temperature sensor).
(SE board ambient temperature) This temperature is an estimate since it fluctuates depending on the SE

The board ambient temperature lowers to the banning-of-use level
Panel low temperature error (SE (Approx. -10°C or lower). - Check the ambient temperature.
11220 <Reference> - Check the thermistor (temperature sensor).
board ambient temperature) This temperature is an estimate since it fluctuates depending on the SE

The remaining battery capacity has reached 10 min*.
* The setting can be changed by [BATTERY WARNING] of Configuration. - Connect the panel to the SE cable.
11223 Battery level drops <Reference> - Replace by a charged battery.
The SE serial ID of the error occurrence panel can be confirmed in the
error log.

The remaining battery capacity has reached 0 min.
- Replace by a charged battery.
11224 No battery power remains <Reference>
- Charge the battery with a battery charger.
The detected SE serial ID of the error occurrence panel can be confirmed
in the error log.
[During bootup/panel connection] - Execute [SE(n) Board State] of SE by MUTL and

A self-diagnosis request has been made from the MC to the panel and the confirm that the board has no abnormality.
response from the panel was NG. - Confirm that the network between MC-SE us connected
11225 Panel self-diagnosis error <Reference> normally.
The detected SE serial ID can be confirmed in the error log. - Inspect the boards (RMV, wireless module, POW, GTD,
ABA, ABB) and the cables in the panel.
018-241-05E
MT-17
Error
Code
[During bootup/panel connection]
At the time of active AUTO DETECT, connection of a panel not compatible
with AUTO DETECT has been detected as the result of checking the SE - Check that no panel not compatible with AUTO DETECT
11226 Not supporting AUTO DETECT serial ID. is connected.
- Check for wrong input of an SE serial ID with PC-TOOL.
<Reference>
The detected SE serial ID can be confirmed in the error log.

- Checking for external damage to the equipment
The GLG board has detected a panel drop time or an impact to the panel
- Collection of the GLG log
in excess of the specified value.
- Execution of GLG board self-analysis
11227 G sensor impact detection - Execution of GLG calibration
<Reference>
- Inspection of the GLG board
When there is no panel defect, the user can continue use of the SE after
- Inspection of the GLS board
confirmation of the message.
[During menu registration]

11228 Panel cracking judgment error The SE has detected a panel cracking and informs the MC.
- Panel breakage (9 mm x 9 mm or more) is detected.
X-ray irradiation is performed on a panel not registered in the menu. - X-ray irradiation is performed on a panel not registered
11229 Wrong exposure detection error in the menu.
[During bootup]
The value of the maximum defect pixel size or defect pixel density
exceeding the specification is detected in defect correction data
generation of background calibration (calibration automatically taking
place when the CU starts up).
Invalid data generated for [ During full calibration]
11231 The value of the maximum defect pixel size or defect pixel density
- Check the FPD.
defect correction exceeding the specification is detected in defect correction data
generation of full calibration.
<Reference>
You can know in which specifications the error is detected on the error
log.
[During routine processing] - Restart the panel.

11232 Panel noise warning The SE has detected electrical noise. - If this occurs multiple times, then check the noise
source.
018-241-07E
MT-18
Error
Code
[During initialization calibration] - This might occur if X-rays were irradiated during the
The calibration requirement for the SE is NG. initialization calibration, or if it was affected by magnetic
field noise from nearby electronic devices which were
being operated nearby. If this occurs several times, then
11239 Initialization calibration error check reducing the noise.
In addition, even if the initialization calibration fails, if
the subsequent offset calibration succeeds, and no
abnormalities are generated in the exposure images,
then there is no problem.
[During bootup/routine processing] - Check the switch-HUB incorporated in the MP.
Disconnection of the line to the panel is detected. - Check the network interface board incorporated in the MC.
11240 Panel disconnection detected - Check the wireless module.
- Check the POW board.
[During bootup/routine processing] - Check the RMV board.
11242 Unregistered panel detected A panel with an unregistered serial ID is detected. - Check the cable connecting between the POW board
connector and the GTD board connector.
Image acquisition timeout [During routine processing] - Check the wireless module.
11243 An error occurs in the image acquisition sequence from the panel. - Check the POW board.
(between panel and MC) - Check the RMV board.
- Check the wireless module.
An error occurs on the WLAN board.
11244 WLAN error - Check the SD card.
- Check that the country code setting file is applied.
SE communication error [During bootup/routine processing] - Check communication between the FPD and the MP.
11246 An error occurs in a control command to the panel. - Check the connection with the AP (for wireless type).
(warning level) - Check the connection of the SE cables (for wired type).
Exposure menu registration [During registration of exposure menu]

- Check the connection with the AP (for wireless type).
11247 An error occurs in exposure menu registration.
- Check the connection of the SE cables (for wired type).
error
Mode 2 accumulation time [During bootup]
- Start up the MUTL and set the mode 2 accumulation
11248 Values of the mode 2 accumulation time set in the SE and the MC do not
time.
mismatch error match.
[During SE connection] - RMV board malfunction

When the RMV board PPC was accessing the wireless module while Replace the RMV board.
starting up, an NG was generated. - Wireless module malfunction
11254 Wireless configuration error Replace the wireless module.
- A contact fault between the RMV board and the wireless
module
Reinstall the RMV board and the wireless module.
[During SE connection]
- A SE that does not support the FIPS mode is connected. - Connect the SE that supports the FIPS mode.
11256 FIPS configuration error - The SE has not been upgraded. - Restart the SE.
- A communication error occurs.
018-241-07E
MT-19
Error
Code
[During SE connection] - Change to the wired connection.
11257 FIPS function error - FIPS error occurs inside the SE. - Restart the SE.
- Version mismatch among MC, AplWlan and fpgaRmv. - Re-acquire the image data from the CL.
The SE detects an error of the SD card and informs the MC.
11270 SD card error - The SE detects an error of the SD card.
The SE detects an error of MCU (microcomputer) and informs the MC.

11271 MCU error - The SE detects an error of the microcomputer.

11404 DAP communication error A DAP communication error occurs.
Check the DAP relay cable.

X-ray irradiation before it is At the time of active AUTO DETECT, exposure has been implemented
11408 after exposure menu registration before completion of the exposure
- Register the exposure menu again and expose again.
ready for exposure error preparation (before lighting of the ShotReady icon of the CL).
The exposure image is acquired at the time of disconnection of the The communication line of the SE could have been
communication line during the X-free exposure. disconnected in the period from when the Ready lamp is
turned on to X-ray irradiation.
<Reference> - Check if the image is the correct study image.
11409 Image acquisition error The SE outputs the image if the MC/CSL mechanism for protecting loss - If the failed menu remains, open the menu to import the
of images determines concordance between the UIDs of the MC and the exposure image.
CSL. In the case of discordance between the statuses of the CSL and the If not remain, the exposure image is imported as it is.
SE during the X-free exposure in the period from when the Ready lamp is - In the cases other than above, check the communication
turned on to X-ray irradiation, this error message appears to promote the status of the SE and retry exposure.
user to check the image at the time when the exposure image is acquired.
Long-time accumulation mode [During exposure menu registration] - The long-time accumulation mode menu is registered
11505 The long-time accumulation mode menu is registered for a panel that for a panel that does not support the long-time
unsupported panel selected does not support the long-time accumulation mode. accumulation mode.
[During bootup]
Read of the correction data load file fails (when the maximum retry count
is exceeded).
11602 Correction data load error - Rewrite the file you failed to read.
<Reference>
You can check the file name you failed to read on the error log.
[During bootup] - Check communication among the MC, the MP and the
Correction data transfer error An error occurs in transfer of the correction data from the MC to the SE. FPD.
11603 - Check the connection with the AP (for wireless type).
(MC → SE) - Check the connection of the SE cables (for wired type).
MP communication connection [During bootup/routine processing]

11750 Disconnection of a line from the MP is detected.
error
018-241-07E
MT-20
Error
Code
11751 MPC fuse blown error A blown fuse on the MPC board is detected.
Panel connector disconnection During bootup/routine processing]

11752 Disconnection of the panel connector connected in the MP is detected.
in MP
[During bootup]
11900 Parameter error An error is detected in an item set by service personnel (wrong value
setting, inconsistency of combination, or the like)
Memory map reconfiguration [During bootup/routine processing]

12150 A retry of memory map reconfiguration fails.
retry
12199 Image processing error An error is detected during image processing.

As a result of comparison of the configuration settings with the information
acquired from the FPD (presence of FPD connection, direct/indirect type)
is made, connection of the FPD of CALNEO (DR-ID300) not conforming
to the machine (indirect type) is recognized. - Check the configuration settings.
12210 Specified FPD type not installed - Check the FPD.
<Reference>
You can check the FPD No. of interest, the FPD specified in the
configuration and information of the actually connected FPD on the error
log.

Although the configuration setting is specified as a 1-panel system, the
2-panel system is determined due to erroneous software setting during
the manufacturing process. Setting for the unconnected FPD is made.
Specified FPD does not match
12211 [During M-Utility] N/A
FPD configuration An attempt is made to carry out respective modes of offset calibration/
defect calibration/residual image calibration, but results in failure.
<Reference>
You can check the FPD No. of interest on the error log.

12215 Battery access error A battery access error occurs in the SE.

The FPD temperature restores from a low temperature to such conditions
FPD recovered from low that exposures can take place. - Check the environments at the installation site.
12220 - Check the FPD.
temperature state <Reference>
You can know the FPD No. of interest on the error log.
018-241-07E
MT-21
Error
Code
The FPD temperature restores from a high temperature to such conditions
FPD recovered from high that exposures can take place. - Check the environments at the installation site.
12221 - Check the FPD.
temperature state <Reference>
You can know the FPD No. of interest on the error log.
Initialization error during SE [During bootup]

12222 An error occurs in bootup in connecting the SE. - Check the board condition in the FPD.
connection
[During full calibration] The following cases are being considered.
Gain correction data generation cannot take place due to excess or 1. The exposure conditions (kV, mAs, SID) are
insufficiency of X-ray irradiation and insufficiency of the irradiation field. inappropriate, and the dose is insufficient.
2. The dose is sufficient, but the irradiation field is
[During M-Utility] narrow, and the entire panel is not being irradiated
An attempt is made to carry out gain calibration but results in failure. with X-rays.
Gain correction data generation 3.The dose and field are both normal, but the TFT is
12230 <Reference> splitting and no signals are being output from some of
error You can check the FPD No. of interest, and the conditions of the dose the regions.
and the irradiation field under which the gain correction data cannot be
generated on the error log. In the case of 1, measure the dose with a dosimeter.
In the case of 2 and 3, check the images which were
exposed under the calibration and same conditions, and
check whether the X-rays are being recognized in the
assumed regions.
[During bootup]
The values of a total defective pixel count, continuous defect lines
and a total defective line exceeding the specifications are detected in
defect correction data generation of background calibration (calibration
automatically taking place when the CU starts up).
Defect correction data [During full calibration]
12231 The values of a total defective pixel count, continuous defect lines and
- Check the FPD.
generation error a total defective line exceeding the specifications are detected in defect
correction data generation.
<Reference>
You can know the No. of the FPD of interest and in which specifications
[During full calibration]

Grid detected at start of Although an attempt is made to start gain calibration with exposure or
12232 defect calibration, the calibration cannot take place since the grid is
- Check the grid.
calibration detected to be mounted.
018-241-07E
MT-22
Error
Code
After gain calibration is to take place, the number of exposures necessary - Check the exposure count.
Insufficient number of for the gain calibration is recognized to be insufficient. - Continue exposures until the necessary exposure count
12233 for the gain calibration is reached, and click [Create a
exposures for gain calibration <Reference> Gain Data].
Sixteen exposures are necessary to carry out the gain calibration.

After defect calibration is to take place, the number of exposures - Check the exposure count.
Insufficient number of necessary for the defect calibration is recognized to be insufficient. - Continue exposures until the necessary exposure count
12234 for the defect calibration is reached, and click [Create a
exposures for defect calibration <Reference> Gain Data].
Five exposures are necessary to carry out the defect calibration.

After residual image calibration is to take place, the number of exposures
Insufficient number of necessary for the residual image calibration is recognized to be - Check the exposure count.
- Continue exposures until the necessary exposure count
12235 exposures for residual image insufficient.
for the residual image calibration is reached, and click
calibration <Reference> [Create a Gain Data].
A single exposure is necessary to carry out the residual image calibration.
Compression or decompression of the defect map fails.

Defect map compression/
12236
decompression failure
[When calibrating] Since the objective is to record the corrections which
12237 FPD sensor error detection 1 Errors were detected by the X-ray automatic detection sensors. were made in relation to the errors, no workarounds are
needed.
[When calibrating] Since the objective is to record the corrections which

12238 FPD sensor error detection 2 Errors were detected by the X-ray automatic detection sensors. Can be
consecutively used via the X-ray connections.
were made in relation to the errors, no workarounds are
needed.
[During exposure menu registration] - Check communication among the MC, the MP and the
Exposure menu error (SE not The exposure menu cannot be accepted because the SE is not FPD.
12240 connected. - Check the connection with the AP (for wireless type).
connected) - Check the connection of the SE cables (for wired type).
Exposure menu error (serial ID [During exposure menu registration]

12242 The exposure menu cannot be accepted because the SE serial ID is not - Register the serial ID of the SE.
not registered) registered.
[During routine processing] - Check communication among the MC, the MP and the
Image transfer fails. Or an error occurs in the exposure sequence. FPD.
12243 Image transfer error (log level) - Check the connection with the AP (for wireless type).
- Check the connection of the SE cables (for wired type).
018-241-07E
MT-23
Error
Code
[During exposure menu registration]
Exposure menu error (panel - Select a defective item from the detail error log, and
12245 The exposure menu cannot be accepted because the panel is
check it.
degeneration) degenerated.
[During exposure menu registration] - Check communication among the MC, the MP and the
Panel communication error (log An error occurs in a control command to the panel. FPD.
12246 - Check the connection with the AP (for wireless type).
level) - Check the connection of the SE cables (for wired type).

12250 DR cassette unit error An error is detected in the DR cassette unit.
Memory exposure image [During memory exposure image acquisition or deletion] - Acquisition of memory exposure image cannot be
12274 Starting the memory image acquisition fails. started from the SE.
acquisition start error
Memory exposure image [During memory exposure image acquisition or deletion] - An error occurred during acquisition of memory
12275 Memory image acquisition fails. exposure image from the SE.
acquisition error
Memory exposure image [During memory exposure image acquisition or deletion] - Acquisition of memory exposure image could not be
12276 Aborting the memory image acquisition fails. aborted from the SE.
acquisition abort error
Memory exposure image [During memory exposure image acquisition or deletion] - Deletion of memory exposure image cannot be started
12277 Starting the memory image deletion fails. from the SE.
deletion start error
Memory exposure image [During memory exposure image acquisition or deletion] - An error occurred during deletion of memory exposure
12278 Memory image deletion fails. image of the SE.
deletion error
Unexpected notification of [During routine processing]
12405 The exposure performance is notified although the exposure conditions
exposure performance are not notified.
Exposure performance out of The exposure performance notified from the retro radiation source is out
12406 of the range defined by the CU.
range
The following error occurs in the serial communication with the retro
12407 Serial communication error irradiation source.

Exposure condition parameters sent from the CL are unrecognizable
values.
12500 Invalid exposure parameters - Check the CL exposure conditions.
<Reference>
You can know the unrecognizable items and values on the error log.
018-241-07E
MT-24
Error
Code
An application mode which cannot be supported by the system controller
of the CU is sent from the CL.
<Reference>
- An application mode refers to a mode of exposures such as normal
still image exposure, long cassette exposure, tomography and energy
12501 Invalid application mode subtraction. - Check the CL exposure conditions.
- The unsupportable mode application mode means such conditions
that an erroneous mode is set against the operative method, such as
tomography in the chest position or long cassette exposure in the bed
position.
- You can know the application mode and the operative method on the
error log.

12502 Line disconnection detected Breakage of the line with the CL is detected. - Check the LAN cable.
(Except when the line is intentionally cut for termination or utility)

An unrecognizable message is received during communication with the
CL.
- Check the CL software version.
12503 Invalid message from CL - Check the CU software version.
<Reference>
You can know the command name which is received but cannot be
recognized on the error log.

12504 CL response error Response other than normal is received from the CL.

12599 CL system error An error is detected in the CL system.
[During bootup]
An attempt is made to read the correction data from the SSD (solid state
device) and load into the CPU board memory and the SODIMM mounted
on the SPC board, but results in a failure in reading from the SSD. The
12600 Correction data load read retry attempt is retried.
- Check the SSD.
<Reference>
You can know the file name which cannot be read on the error log.
[During bootup]
As reading of the system file fails, a retry is made to read from the backup
file. - Check the SSD.
12601 System file load retry - Make another attempt to update in version.
<Reference>
You can check that recovery is made during bootup on the error log.
018-241-07E
MT-25
Error
Code
Transfer to the FTP (file transfer protocol) fails.
- Check the FTP server.
12610 FTP transfer failed - Check the LAN cable.
<Reference>
You can know the file name which cannot be transferred on the error log.
[During routine processing] If this occurs in an MC V16.5 or later usage environment

Occurs when the FTP connection settings (user name, password, IP during the installation, then upgrade the MP version
address) which are being used for the MP version upgrade etc. cannot be (requires 00.04.05 or later). The FTP connections will be
12611 FTP setting failed set. set to the MP by this work.
Occurs when there are mismatches in the versions between the MP and This may be recorded when starting up in an MC V17.1
MC. environment, but the occurrence of this error is not a
problem.

12699 File operation error An error is detected during file operation.
[During bootup]
Some processing takes place during background calibration (calibration
Process request from MUTL automatically taking place when the CU starts up).
12700 - Check the user operation.
rejected [During M-Utility]
An attempt is made to carry out respective modes of offset calibration/
defect calibration/residual image calibration, but results in failure.

12900 Parameter error An error is detected in an item set by service personnel (wrong value
setting, inconsistency of combination, or the like)
Exposure menu error (operative [During exposure menu registration]

The exposure menu cannot be accepted because the operative method is - Check the selector menu of the CL.
12901 - Check the settings in EDIT CONFIG.
method not specified) not specified.

An item that needs to be edited from its default value is not changed in
12902 System configuration error EDIT CONFIG.
- There are missing settings in the config.
Example) MC ID Code

12910 Control timeout detected The application software detects control timeout.
[During bootup] - Check communication among the MC, the MP and the
Unknown machine connection A machine to which the standard sequence cannot pass is connected FPD.
12920 during connection. - Check the connection with the AP (for wireless type).
error - Check the connection of the SE cables (for wired type).
018-241-07E
MT-26
Error
Code
Software logic error (only in [During bootup/routine processing]
12990 The application program detects a logic error for software control.
log)
[During routine processing] - Added from MC V16.3. The ready lamp turns off when
A noise error is detected in the panel. an electrical noise error occurs, and an error message
is displayed after the exposure cannot be done.
- Click [OK] and check that the ready lamp turns on again.
13043 Electrical noise detection error
<NOTE>
When a 13043 error occurs, 11112 (detail code:
0x00800000) is recorded in the error log.
 MC Manager
Error Code Error Name Probable Cause and Remedy
MCMNG001 Multiple startup failure Reinstall the MC Manager.
MCMNG002 Ini file acquisition failure Reinstall the MC Manager.
MCMNG003 Setting file acquisition failure Reinstall the MC Manager.
018-241-07E
MT-27
2.3 MC Detail Error Codes (11112, 11244)
2.3.1 11112 Error
When the 11112 error occurs, the following information for identifying the failure is displayed in the detail error log.
Display example:
[11112]2010/03/09 18:43:39 00E8DD @SE[M120001] err[0x01000000]
@SE[val1] err[val2]
- val1: Serial ID
- val2: RMV detail error (in hexadecimal system)
 1201SE/1202SE/1211SE/1212SE/1213SE/1214SE
Bit Detailed code Detailed error name Countermeasure
Disconnect and insert the RMV21 cable or replace the RMV board.
0 0x00000001 Connector (ABA1_CNCHK_1)
If it does not improve, replace the SE.
1 0x00000002 Connector (ABA1_CNCHK_2)
2 0x00000004 Connector (ABB2_CNCHK_1)
3 0x00000008 Connector (ABB2_CNCHK_2)
Disconnect and insert the harness between RMV3-POW2.
4 0x00000010 Connector (POW)
If it does not improve, replace the POW board.
5 0x00000020 Impact detection (GLG) Escalation is not required
6 0x00000040 Disconnection detection (X free) Replace the SE.
For V16.2 or earlier: Upgrade the MC to version V16.3 or later, and also upgrade the SE accordingly.
For V16.3 or later: If it occurs via a timing other than READY, it is probably being generated by static electricity etc., so restore by
7 0x00000080 ADAS header error restarting the SE.
If it does not restore even if it is restarted, then replace the POW board and the RMV board.
If it does not restore even if the boards are replaced, then replace the SE.
8 0x00000100 Connector (POW_ABB_1) Check the connection conditions of the RMV board and POW board connectors. If it does not improve, replace the POW board.
Connector Check the RMV board, POW board and GLG board’s connect connection condition.
9 0x00000200
(POW_ABB_2, POW_PDV_FUSE) If it does not improve, replace the POW board.
Connector (GTD_CNCHK_1) / Disconnect and insert the RMV23 cable.
10 0x00000400
RMV23 harness check If it does not improve, replace the SE.
Disconnect and insert the RMV24 cable.
11 0x00000800 Connector (GTD_CNCHK_2)
Malfunctioning is occurring via one of the RMV/LEC/REC/SPR.
12 0x00001000 Connector (LED)
Replace the corresponding parts, and perform isolating/handling.
13 0x00002000 Fuse (5V) Replace the POW board.
14 0x00004000 Fuse (2.5V) Replace the POW board.
Disconnect and insert the cable between the RMV board and the GLG board.
15 0x00008000 Connector (GLG)
If it does not improve, replace the RMV board and the GLG board.
018-241-07E
MT-28
Bit Detailed code Detailed error name Countermeasure
16 0x00010000 Sleep mode recovery error Replace the RMV board.
17 0x00020000 Image FLASH error Replace the RMV board.
X-ray detection before ready
18 0x00040000 Escalation is not required
User operation error.
If the image is white, replace the GLG board, POW board, and RMV board.
19 0x00080000 Panel cracking judgment Otherwise, disconnect and insert the cables connected to the RMV board, POW board, and GLG board.
20 0x00100000 DDR2 error Replace the RMV board.
21 0x00200000 Config error Replace the RMV board.
22 0x00400000 PPC access error Replace the RMV board.
Occurring due to static electricity, etc.
23 0x00800000 Electrical noise detection If this occurs frequently, then an on-site investigation which includes the facility environment and users, etc. needs to be conducted.
"Error code: 13043 Electrical noise detected" is displayed on the CSL.
Restart.
24 0x01000000 Thermistor error There is a high probability that this is occurring due to static electricity, etc.
If this occurs frequently, then an on-site investigation which includes the facility environment and users, etc. needs to be conducted.
25 0x02000000 Undefined
Check the RMV board’s connect connection condition.
26 0x04000000 Long panel error
Also check that the panel ID settings are correct.
Replace the RMV board and SE connector.
27 0x08000000 IP address jig error For the DR-ID1214SE (the initial letter of panel ID is Y), and DR-ID1213SE (the initial letter of panel ID is W), also replace the BCN
board.
Replace the RMV board and POW board.
28 0x10000000 Gate IC error
Error occurs via the SE’s FPGA.
29 0x20000000 Serial ID registration error
Upgrade or downgrade the SE’s FPGA.
30 0x40000000 Image processing error Replace the RMV board.
31 0x80000000 Exposure sequence error Replace the RMV board.
Replace the GLG board, POW board and RMV board.
32 0x10080000 Gate IC/Panel cracking judgment
018-241-07E
MT-29
 RMV board error 2.3.2 11244 Error
If the RMV board connectors are not inserted correctly or the RMV board cables are When the 11112 error occurs, the information for identifying the failure is indicated in
disconnected, the following errors appear. the detail error log.
Connector Error display Probable cause 11244 error Error Probable Cause
RMV1 No error The RMV65A power does not turn on. 0x00000001 Initialization error
Does not recognize the battery. 0x00000002 H/W error The wireless module is not installed.
RMV2 No error Does not recognize the memory switch and the sleep 0x00000004 Power error
recovery switch. 0x00010000 Setting file error
RMV3 11112 error POW board Same as the connector LED.
Wired communication is invalid. 0x00020000 MCU error
RMV4 No error MCU communication is invalid.
Does not recognize the DS. 0x00040000 SD card error The SD card is not installed.
RMV5 - Device not
RMV6 11244 error H/W error 0x80000000
implemented
RMV7 -
RMV8 11112 error GLG board
RMV9 11244 error SD card error
RMV10 No error
RMV11 11112 error LED
11112 error,
RMV12 LED does not appear.
MCU error
RMV13 No error MCU JTAG
RMV14 No error
RMV15 No error Debug serial report
Does not recognize returning of the IP address.
RMV16 No error Does not recognize the wired cable connection. Wireless
communication is valid.
RMV17 No error PPC JTAG
RMV18 No error FPGA JTAG
RMV19 11112 error Connector (ABB2_CNCHK_2)
RMV20 11112 error Connector (ABA1_CNCHK_2)
RMV21 11112 error Connector (ABA1_CNCHK_1)
RMV22 11112 error Connector (BB2_CNCHK_1)
RMV23 11112 error Gate IC error
RMV24 11112 error Gate IC error
RMV25 11112 error Thermistor error
RMV27 11112 error Long panel
RMV28 11112 error Long panel
018-241-07E
MT-30
3. Troubleshooting
Type Error Occurrence Location Phenomenon Probable Cause and Remedy
- Cannot log in to the DR Maintenance Software - If the security key is not released then release it.
Installation
DR Maintenance Software - Cannot open the MUTL in the RU PC Tool - If the security key expiration date has expired, then update the security
Maintenance
key.
The DR Maintenance Software’s top screen opens, but - The DR Maintenance Software and MC application software versions must
clicking on the Installation/Function tab produces an match. Check the software version.
Installation error - Access to the DR Maintenance Software requires access via the “http: //
DR Maintenance Software
Maintenance <IP address>: 19101 / index.html” format.
When accessing via “http: // localhost: 19101 / index.html”, the Internet
Explorer operation mode is different, so it does not operate normally.
The DR Maintenance Software does not start up

Installation Internet Explorer V11 is required for running the DR Maintenance Software.
DR Maintenance Software
Maintenance Update if V10 or earlier is installed.
Would like HDD images Refer to the following to resolve.

Installation
PC $ {AppxMC:5._Backing Up and Restoring System Images in
Maintenance
Windows 7}
Would like to acquire HDD images Refer to the following to resolve.

Installation
PC $ {AppxMC:5._Backing Up and Restoring System Images in
Maintenance
Windows 7}
Cannot change the exposure condition (mAs) values With the DR-XD1000, the exposure conditions which specify the mA and
msec cannot be set. Set the mAs value.
Installation
DR-ID 300CL $ {MD:8._Setting the mAs Value}
Maintenance When the panel accumulation time is changed from Mode 2: 1.2 sec, the
accumulation may end without waiting for the exposing to end. Set to Mode 2:
1.2 sec.
Cannot expose - Check that the Num of MP is not set to 0.

Installation - Refer to the following to resolve.
Installation
Maintenance
$ {MT:4.8_If Irradiating Cannot Be Done}
Installation When performing the gain calibration, a 102 error - If the CSL is not started up, then start it up.
Installation
Maintenance occurs - If it is in panel non-interlock mode, then unlock it.
Installation The panel battery pack cannot be charged Refer to the following to resolve.
Installation
Maintenance $ {MD:7._Handling the SE Battery}
The panel cannot updated If the Eth 1 name is not set in the local communications port, the panel and
Installation
Communication the MC cannot communicate, and they will not operate normally. If the panel
Maintenance
cannot be updated, etc., then confirm the Eth 1 setting.
018-241-07E
MT-31

Cannot wirelessly communicate with the panel Check the communications path.
The default IP address for each device on the communications path is as
per the following.
ping 192.168.0.20 (GNC-MP)
ping 192.168.0.25 (AP)
ping 192.168.0.30 (SE wired)
ping 192.168.0.40 (SE wireless)
- When the SE wireless is connectable
Check that the MC Manager starts, and confirm the MC settings. Make
sure the MC IP address setting, and the Eth 0 setting are correct.
Installation
Communication - When the SE wireless is not connectable
Maintenance
Confirm that the country code is applied to the AP and SE. Check the
AP setting and MC setting (ESSID, BSSID, channel, channel width,
encryption). After changing the MC settings, the MC needs to be restarted
in order to reflect the settings to the MC, and in order to reflect the
wireless settings to the SE, the SE needs to be connected via wires after
the settings have been reflected to the MC. Therefore, restart the MC
after changing the MC settings. After that, connect the SE via wires, and
reconfirm that SE wireless connections are feasible.
- When the AP or GNC cannot communicate
Check their respective wirings and boards.
The maintenance tool cannot be uninstalled Refer to the following to resolve.

Installation
DR-XD 1000 Maintenance Tool $ {AppxMU:1._Installing and Uninstalling the DR-XD 1000
Maintenance
Maintenance Tool}
Would like to acquire log Refer to the following to resolve.

Installation
Maintenance
DR-XD 1000 Maintenance Tool $ {AppxMT:3._Procedures for Acquiring the Logs}
If malfunctions occur, use SLAT, and consider acquiring all of the logs.
Exposing conditions are not reflected on the X-ray Confirm that XCON is displayed on the CSL screen.
control panel even if the exposure menu is selected Confirm the “XCON is not displayed on the CSL screen” countermeasures
Using Operation panel with the DR-ID 300CL which are on the following pages.
Confirm that the exposure conditions are properly set.
$ {MD:8._Setting the mAs Value}
If the additional filter LED on the X-ray control panel is Check the operations of the additional filter detection microswitches (2
Using Operation panel
lit while the additional filter is not installed places) which are attached to the filter rail.
Replacement codes “A01”, “A02” and “A03” are It is a code which indicates that it is time to replace the gas spring, and
displayed on the operation panel mono-tank. If the kV, and mA up and down buttons are pressed, the error
Using Operation panel is canceled, and the operations can be continued. After replacing each
one of them, reset the exposure count from the DR-XD 1000 maintenance
tool’s “Displaying and Clearing the Operation Information”.
018-241-07E
MT-32

The caster lock pedal does not rise up and cannot be Check whether the brake shaft is not bent.
locked If the brake shaft is bent, and interferes with the cart, the brake will no longer
rise up.
$ {MT:4.9_When the Caster Lock Pedal Does Not Rise All the
Using Mechanism
Way Up}
In addition, from the #xx168 or later, the shaft materials have been changed
from aluminum to SUS (shapes, and installation methods are not changed).
If part #319N200113 was purchased, the SUS parts will be supplied.
The battery consumption is intense Batteries are consumables. Confirm the absolute battery capacity from the
cart log, and if it is below 50% (0032 in hexadecimals) then replace it.
Using Mechanism In standard usage, if it exceeds 4000 cycles the absolute capacity is less
than 50%. When charging at high temperatures, and low temperatures,
etc., degradation will be quicker.
The arm cannot be held in anywhere If it cannot be held in a diagonal 45 degree downward orientation, etc., the
Using Mechanism
friction of the arm is weakened. Replace the arm.
Calculated area dose display remains 0 - Perform the collimator potentiometer calibration.
$ {MU:3.14_Collimator Potentiometer Calibration}
Using DR-ID 300CL - If the situation does not change after the calibration, the following parts are
the suspect parts.
The ADC board, POW-ADC harness, and potentiometer
Calculated area dose display is not stable Noise is probably affecting the ADC board.
Make sure that each cable in the mono-tank section is properly clamped,
Using DR-ID 300CL and that the ferrite cores are attached.
$ {MC:7.7_Mono-tank Assembly}
The exposure result is smaller than the setting value - The aging is probably insufficient.
Using DR-ID 300CL - Refer to the following to resolve.
$ {AppxMT:1._Aging}
Fuses blow In regard to phenomena when fuses blow and their resolutions, refer to the
Using Fuse following to resolve.
$ {MD:2.3_Fuse System Diagram}
018-241-07E
MT-33

XCON is displayed on the CSL screen For communications between the CSL and XCON (GNC board), the
following two systems need to be able to communicate.
- XCON (GNC board) - CSL (PC’s COM1)
- XCON (GNC board) - Maintenance tool (PC’s COM2)
- Confirm that the connectors on the communication path between the

computer and GNC board are correctly inserted. The frequency of insertion
faults occurring are mostly in the order of the OPP 1, OPP 3, and GNC 24
connectors.
Using DR-ID 300CL
- Refer to DR-ID 300CL Service Manual IN Appendix 61 and Appendix 2.3,

and confirm the following settings. These settings are set at the time of
shipment.
1 Serial port number for X-CON control: 1
2 Implementation condition reception settings: Receive
3 Exposure conditions transmission settings: Send (* 1)
4 X-CON type: use film related code as dose information
5 Area Dose unit: mGycm2
6 X - CON Serial transfer rate: 4800 bits
- If the situation does not change after the above is implemented, the
following parts are the suspect parts.
The Harness between the PC-GNC board, GNC board, and PC
018-241-07E
MT-34

Cannot communicate with VacuDAP - Check the setting.
The “fail initialized dap” error is displayed. Reference: IN Appendix 1
Reference: DR-ID 300 CL Service Manual IN Appendix 27 DAP (Dose-area
Product Meter)
- Check communication path and power supply path.

Communication route: Is there a problem with the wiring from the serial
port (COM 3) on the computer up to the DAP?
Using DR-ID 300CL
- Power supply path: Check that the DAP power supply (15 V) is being
output.
Disconnect the DAP and the cables attached to the DAP, and measure the
voltage between the following pins and GND (via the device frame is fine).
In addition, since measuring with a tester might be difficult, if measuring

cannot be done, then measure the 136Y200064 harnesses’ (in the room
where the GNC board is) DAP - S connectors.
Images are displayed on the DR-ID 300CL after There might be an XCON connection malfunction.
Using DR-ID 300CL exposing but the actual values are not displayed Confirm the “XCON is not displayed on the CSL screen” countermeasures
which are on the previous pages.
018-241-07E
MT-35

X-rays are not irradiated even if the hand switch is - Confirm that the key switch is ON.
pushed Even if the main breaker is ON, the X-rays are not irradiated when the key
Using Irradiating operations switch is OFF.
- Confirm that the additional filter is inserted all the way in.
If the additional filter is half-inserted, the X-rays will not be irradiated.
Can not irradiate - The additional filter is inserted all the way in, but the X-rays cannot be
irradiated, or no additional filter is attached but the X-rays cannot be
irradiated.
Using Irradiating operations Check the operations of the additional filter detection microswitches (2
places) which are attached to the filter rail.
Refer to the following to resolve.
$ {MT:4.8_If Irradiating Cannot Be Done}
In addition to the exposure results being smaller than A discharge occurred in the X-ray tube device, and the X-ray irradiating was
the set values, the images are displayed as per the aborted.
following. - There may be insufficient aging.
Using Image
- A white image is displayed. - Refer to the following to resolve.
- A grainy image with an S value of 5 digits is displayed. $ {MT:Appendix 1._Aging}
- An image with poor graininess is displayed.
018-241-07E
MT-36

When setting up the panel, it can be connected Confirm that the country code is being applied to both the AP and SE.
via wires, but wireless communications cannot be In addition, if MC V16.6 or later is being used, a country code which supports
accomplished MC V16.6 or later needs to be applied to the panel.
$ {IN1:22.4_Changing the SE Country Code}
$ {IN1:18.1_Setting the Country Code for the FUJIFILM-
made AP (Overseas Only)}
Check that the AP settings and MC settings (ESSID, BSSID, channel,
channel width, and encryption) are present.
Wireless settings are saved in both the MC and SE, and both of the settings
need to be updated.
After changing the settings on the MC, restart the MC to reflect the settings
onto the MC. In order to reflect the wireless settings to the SE, restart the
MC, and after the settings are reflected onto the MC, the SE needs to have
a wired connection.
If the settings cannot be confirmed, set the AP and MC settings once as per
the following, then check if connecting is possible.
- BSSID: 00000000
- Encryption: OPEN
- Stealth setting: OFF
Installation - MAC address filter: OFF
Communication
Maintenance Then, return the settings one by one, and check if there are any deficiencies
in the settings.
The following shows an often made mistake,
- The AP’s MAC address is not specified in BSSID
$ {IN1:18.2.4_Confirming the MAC Address of FUJIFILM-
made AP}
- An encryption method which does not support the encryption method is specified.
WPA2-PSK is the only method that can be used as an encryption method.
$ {IN1:18.2.3_Changing the Wireless Settings of FUJIFILM-
made AP}
- The MAC address which is set in the MAC address filter is incorrect.
If the ALLOW list (white list) is going to be used, the MAC address for the
panel's wireless communications port needs to be registered.
Since the MAC addresses for the wired communications port and the
wireless communications port for the panel are different, specify the MAC
address for the wireless communications port here.
$ {IN1:25._Setting the MAC Address Filtering}
- Check whether the AP can be accessed wirelessly from the service PC.
If the settings are correct, and just the panel cannot communicate
wirelessly, a malfunction in the wireless module failure is to be suspected.
The CSL PC powers off via unintended timing It is thought that the CSL PC, and the DDC board which supplies power to
the CSL PC are malfunctioning. Replace the CSL PC, DDC board, and the
Using CSL PC~DDC board
cables (136Y200060) between the CSL and PC-DDC board. In addition,
send the replaced parts to FTYO for design analysis to be conducted.
The arm lifting operation is heavy. The retention strength of the gas spring decreases with the number of uses.
As a result the arm lifting operation is going to get heavy.
Using Arm operations
These parts are parts which are to be periodically replaced every two years,
periodically replace them.
018-241-07E
MT-37
4. Parse Tree
4.1 ERR120, 122

Measure the voltage of pins 1, 3, and Are the FET04 connectors
Is the breaker switched ON?
YES 5 in the INV board CN11, with the key OK YES Replug in the connectors
unplugged/half plugged in?
ON and no errors being produced, and
are they respectively 15V±5%, CHECK: FET04 connectors
-15V±5%, and 24V±5%?
NO Are pins 1 and 2 of the FET04 YES Are pins 1 and 2 of the FET04
CHECK: INV board CN11 shorted? grounded? A
voltages of pins 1, 3, and
CHECK: FET04 resistance CHECK: FET04 pins 1 – 2 (grounding)
5 (respectively 15V±5%,
-15V±5%, 24V±5%) between pins 1 – 2
24V is NG Unplug the harness from the GNC5 NO Replace the harnesses
connectors, and measure the pin 5 B (136Y200201, 136Y121512).
voltage of the GNC5, and is it 24V±5%?
Replace: 136Y200201, Arm Assy
CHECK：GNC5の5 pin
（24V±5%）
±15V is NG Unplug the harness from the GNC5

connectors, and measure the voltage of C
pins 1 and 3 of the GNC5, and are they
respectively 15V±5%, -15V±5%?
NO 㼀㼡㼞㼚㻌㻻㻺㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼎㼞㼑㼍㼗㼑㼞㻚
CHECK: GNC5 pins 1 and 3
(15V±5%, -15V±5%)
Specify the grounding areas between

YES the FET board and thermo switches,
A and replace the components.
Replace: 136Y200201,
Arm Assy, FET board
㻺㻻 Is the harness (136Y121499) YES Replace the FET board, and are YES Completed
disconnected/grounded? errors no longer being produced?
CHECK: 136Y121499 Replace: FET board Replace: FET board

(disconnections/grounding)
NO Replace the harness (136Y121499). NO Replace the harness (136Y121506).
If it still seems like errors are being produced, replace the GNC board.
If it still seems like errors are being produced, replace the INV board.
Replace: 136Y121499 If it still seems like errors are being produced, replace the battery.
Replace: 136Y121506, GNC board, INV board, battery
018-241-07E
MT-38
Unplug the harness (136Y141508) from the YES Replug in the connectors, or replace the
YES
B connectors (both sides), are they harness.
disconnected/half plugged in/grounded?
Replace: 136Y121508
CHECK: 136Y121508
(disconnected/half plugged in/ NO Unplug the harness (136Y121513) from the YES Replace the harness.
grounded) connectors (both sides), are pins 1, 2 and
3 grounded?
*Check that the shield is still clamped onto Replace: Arm Assy
the frame.
NO Replace the INV board. If it still seems like
CHECK: 136Y121513 (grounded) errors are being produced, replace the
mono-tank.
Replace: INV board, mono-tank
NO Unplug the harness (136Y121500) from the YES Replace the GNC board.
GNC2 connectors, and measure the voltage
of pin 5 on the harness side, and is it
24V±5%? Replace: GNC board
CHECK: GNC2 pin 5 (24V±5%) YES Replug in the connectors, or replace the
NO Unplug the harness (136Y121500) from the
connectors (both sides), are they harness.
Replace: 136Y141500
CHECK: 136Y121500
(disconnected/half plugged in/ NO Replace the DDC board.
grounded)
Replace: DDC board
Unplug the harness (136Y141508) from the YES Replug in the connectors, or replace the
YES
C connectors (both sides), are they harness.
Replace: 136Y121508
CHECK: 136Y121508
(disconnected/half plugged in/ NO Replace the INV board.
grounded)
Replace: INV board
NO Unplug the harness (136Y121500) from the YES Replace the GNC board.
GNC2 connectors, and measure the voltage
of pins 1 and 4 on the harness side, and are
they respectively 15V±5%, -15V±5%? Replace: GNC board
CHECK: GNC2 pins 1 and 4 YES Replug in the connectors, or replace the
NO Unplug the harness (136Y121500) from the
(15V±5%, -15V±5%) connectors (both sides), are they harness.
Replace: 136Y121500
CHECK: 136Y121500
(disconnected/half plugged in/ NO Replace the DDC board.
grounded)
Replace: DDC board
018-241-07E
MT-39
4.2 ERR128
Did you perform a lot of irradiations in Leave it for a little while, to cool down.
㼅㻱㻿
a short time up until the errors are
produced?
CHECK: OPER log (kV, mAs,

irradiation counts, irradiation
㻺㻻 Start up the maintenance tool, press 㻻㻷 Replace 136Y200099, are the errors 㼅㻱㻿 Completed
intervals) the potentiometer calibration readout being released?
button about 10 times, and are there
any variations in the read data? Replace: 136Y200099
(NG if there are about 20 variations)
㻺㻻 Replace the ADC board, and if the errors

are not released, replace the POW
board, and GNC board in sequence.
Replace: ADC board, POW board,

GNC board
㻺㻳 Are there ferrite cores attached to 㼅㻱㻿 Replace 136Y200099, are the errors 㼅㻱㻿 Completed
136Y121509, 136Y121510, being released?
136Y121511, 136Y121512, and
136Y121513, and are shields clamped Replace: 136Y200099
onto the FG?
CHECK：136Y121509 to Are the ferrite cores and clamps properly 㻺㻻 Replace the ADC board, and if the errors
136Y121513 㻺㻻 attached to 136Y121509, 136Y121510, are not released, replace the POW
136Y121511, 136Y121512, and board, and GNC board in sequence.
136Y121513?
Replace: ADC board,
POW board, GNC board
018-241-07E
MT-40
4.3 ERR130
REFERENCE
The POW board FAN does not operate when the AC cable is not inserted.
Therefore, execute isolation with or without the AC cable.
Are the DDC board FAN

Are errors being produced via
YES (136Y200182) and the harness YES Replug in the connectors
unconnected AC cables?
(136Y200051) unplugged?
CHECK: 136Y200182,
136Y200051 (unplugged) NO Replace the DDC board FAN YES Completed
(136Y200182) and harness
(136Y200051), and are errors
no longer being produced?
Replace: 136Y200182, NO Are they half plugged in/disconnected/ YES Replug in the connectors.
grounded into the harness Also, replace 136Y121500.
136Y200051 (136Y121500 (DDC08- GNC15))?
Replace: 136Y121500
CHECK: 136Y121500
(DDC08-GNC15) NO Replace the DDC board, and are YES Completed
Are the POW board FAN (half plugged in/ errors no longer being produced?
NO (136Y200183) and the harness YES Replug in the connectors
(136Y200051) unplugged?
disconnected/grounded) Replace: DDC board
CHECK: 119Y200003, NO Replace the GNC
board.
136Y200051 (unplugged) NO Replace the POW board FAN YES Completed
(136Y200183) and harness
(136Y200051), and are errors no
Replace: GNC
longer being produced? board
Replace: 119Y200003, NO Are they half plugged in/disconnected/ YES Replug in the connectors.
grounded into the harness Also, replace 136Y121500.
136Y200051 (136Y121500 (DDC08- GNC15))?
Replace: 136Y121500
CHECK: 136Y121500
(DDC08-GNC15) NO Replace the DDC board, and are YES Completed
(half plugged in/ errors no longer being produced?
disconnected/grounded) Replace: DDC board
NO Replace the GNC
board.
Replace: GNC
board
 NOTE 
DDC board side FAN (136Y200182) is not installed in the machines with noise-reduction*. When replacing the DDC board side FAN or POW board side FAN for the machines without
noise-reduction, refer to the following and use the noise-reduction FAN kit (898Y200506) for replacement.
$ {MD:6._Noise-reducing Measures}
* Machines with noise-reduction: For Japan #xxx50221/For Overseas #xxx50227 or later.
018-241-07E
MT-41
4.4 When the Touch Panel Operations Feel (5) Click "Calibrate" in the "Display" tab.
Strange
 Touch Panel Calibration
When there is a adjustment request from the installation site, calibrate the touch
panel.
(1) Select "Control Panel" from [Start] menu.
The All Control Panel Items window opens.
(2) Click "Tablet PC Settings".

The “Tablet PC Setting” window opens.
(3) Click "Reset" in the "Window" tab.

POCX010305009E.ai
(6) Follow the onscreen instructions, and calibrate the touch panel.
POCX010305008E.ai
The Confirmation window appears.
(4) Click [OK].

The system return to the “Tablet PC Settings” window.
POCX010305010E.ai
(7) Press <ESC> key.

The Confirmation window appears.
018-241-07E
MT-42
(8) Click [OK].  Upgrading the Touch Panel Controller File
The system return to the “Tablet PC Settings” window.
The touch panel might malfunction due to touch panel controller parameter file errors.
- If the PC’s SSD was replaced.
(9) Close “Tablet PC Settings” window. The old PC’s touch panel controller parameter files were carried over, which turned
The system return to the desktop screen. into errors.
- If the symptoms do not improve even if the touch panel was calibrated
 NOTE 
In these cases, upgrade the touch panel controller parameter files.
If the touch panel adjusting is insufficient even if the aforementioned steps were
followed, then without resetting, implement the steps subsequent to Step 5 until the  NOTE 
strangeness is resolved.
- This section corresponds to the ECN-000284.
If a resetting is not done, then just 4 points are to be adjusted.
- Prepare the USB mouse and the “BFC-1208 P-CAP Touch SensorTester.zip”
distributed via the ECN in advance.
(1) Turn ON the main key, and start up the PC.
(2) Within a period of 5 seconds after the initial window opens,

sequentially click the upper left and upper right corners of the window.
The “IIP Service Utility” window opens.
(3) Click [Exit Service Utility].

The system returns to the desktop.
(4) Unzip “BFC-1208 P-CAP Touch SensorTester.zip” on the desktop.
(5) Open the unzipped folder, and double-click the “eGalaxSensorTester3.

POCX010305011E.ai
exe”.
The “eGalaxSensorTester3-Demo” window opens.
018-241-07E
MT-43
(6) As the touch panel does not respond to touch here, use the mouse to (7) When “Pass!!” appears, make sure that “Pass” is displayed for all the
click [Start Test]. test items excluding OPDraw and click [OK].
 NOTE 
(8) Perform the “ Touch Panel Calibration”.
While “Testing. Don’t Touch” is displayed, do not touch the touch window.
(9) Check the following.

- Make sure that previously unresponsive parts have become responsive to
touch.
- Make sure that other parts such as screen edges are responsive to touch with
no problem.
POCX010305013J.ai
018-241-07E
MT-44
4.5 The Battery Cannot Be Charged (The Battery Reserve Display LED Does Not Flash)
㻰㼛㼑㼟㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼄㻯㻻㻺㻌㼛㼜㼑㼞㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌 Does the LED on the upper Battery charging in process.
㼜㼍㼚㼑㼘㻌㼜㼛㼣㼑㼞㻌㻸㻱㻰㻌㼘㼕㼓㼔㼠㻌㼡㼜㻌㼢㼕㼍㻌㼅㻱㻿 right of the POW board light LE1 is lit It is assumed that there is an OPP board battery LED
㼎㼞㼑㼍㼗㼑㼞㻌㻻㻲㻲㻛㻭㻯㻌㼏㼍㼎㼘㼑㻌 up via the AC cable malfunction.
㼏㼛㼚㼚㼑㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚㼟㻫 connection state?
Replace: OPP board
CHECK: XCON operation CHECK: POW board
panel LED LED LE2 is lit Battery malfunction.
If there are not any problems in the harness between the
POW and the battery, replace the battery.
CHECK: 136Y121495 (disconnections, grounding)
Replace: 136Y121495, battery ASSY
㻺㻻 LE3 is lit POW board malfunction.
Check whether or not the POW board has a grounding
A fault, replace the POW board.
CHECK: 136Y121495 resistance between pins 1-3, and between pins 2-4
(POW7 connectors are unconnected) (greater than several kiloohms)
CHECK: 136Y121496 resistance between pins 3-4
Replace: 136Y121495, 136Y121496, POW board
㼁㼚㼘㼕㼠 Is the charging permission signal Is POW board charging output Malfunction between the POW and battery.
㼅㻱㻿㼅㻱㻿 If there are not any problems in the harness between the
from the GNC board putting out 5V? being output?
POW and the battery, replace the battery.
CHECK: POW2 pin 7 voltage CHECK: POW2 voltage of CHECK: 136Y121495 (disconnections, grounding)
(4V or greater) pins 1-2 (42V or greater) Replace: 136Y121495, battery ASSY
POW board malfunction.
㻺㻻 Check whether or not the POW board has a grounding fault,
replace the POW board.
If it is grounded, replace the grounding destination board
(battery or DDC).
CHECK: 136Y121495 resistance between pins 1-3,
and between pins 2-4 (POW7 connectors are
unconnected) (greater than several kiloohms)
(POW3 connectors are unconnected)
(greater than several kiloohms)
LE4 Replace: 136Y121495, 136Y121496, POW board,
LE3
(battery), (DDC)
LE2
LE1 㻺㻻 Is the charging permission signal 㼅㻱㻿 Detach 136Y121498, specify the grounding area
grounded? (board or harness), and replace the broken component.
CHECK: 136Y121498, GNC board, POW board
CHECK: POW2 resistance
Replace: 136Y121498, GNC board, POW board
between pin 7 and GND
㻺㻻 Check whether or not 136Y121498 is disconnected, and
if there are not any problems, replace the GNC board.
POW board CHECK: 136Y121498 (disconnections)

Replace: 136Y121498, GNC board
018-241-08E
MT-45
㻺㻻 Is the DIP switch (SW1) on the POW Since the GNC board is in upgrade
㻻㻺
A board ON?
mode, it does not function.
Shut off the power, switch SW1
CHECK: POW board SW1 to OFF, then power up again.
(ON/OFF)
㻻㻲㻲 Is the AC power being input into the 㼅㻱㻿 Is the POW board secondary system 㼅㻱㻿 Is the LED on the upper right of the POW
power being output? board lit with the AC cable connected?
B
POW board?
CHECK: POW1 connector CHECK: POW3 pin 3 voltage CHECK: POW board LED
voltage (AC) between pins 1-3 (65 V or greater)
㻺㻻 Specify the disconnections, and the

grounded areas between the inlets
and the NFL board.
CHECK: Inlet, 136Y121493,

circuit protector, 136Y20061,
noise filter, 136Y121494, NFL
board (disconnections, grounding)
POW board malfunction. Check whether
㻺㻻 the POW board output is grounded, and
CHECK: 136Y121495 resistance between
pins 1-3, and between pins 2-4
018-241-07E
MT-46
㼁㼚㼘㼕㼠 Is the charging permission signal 㼅㻱㻿 Is the POW board charging output 㼅㻱㻿 If there are not any problems in the harness
B from the GNC board outputting 5V? being output? between the POW and battery, replace the battery.
CHECK: POW2 pin 7 voltage CHECK: POW7 voltage of CHECK: 136Y121495 (disconnections, grounding)
(4V or greater) pins 1-2 (42V or greater) Replace: 136Y121495, battery ASSY
Check whether the POW board output is grounded,
㻺㻻 and replace the POW board.
If it is grounded, replace the grounding destination
board (battery or DDC).
Replace: 136Y121495, 136Y121496, POW board, (battery), (DDC)
Remove 136Y121498, and specify the grounding
㻺㻻 Is the charging permission signal 㼅㻱㻿 area (boards or harnesses), and replace broken
grounded?
components.
CHECK: POW2 resistance CHECK: 136Y121498, GNC board, POW board
between pin 7 and GND Replace: 136Y121498, GNC board, POW board
㻺㻻 Is the DDC board power being output normally? 㼅㻱㻿 Check that there are not any problems in the
harness between the DDC and GNC, replace
LE1 is lit Charging in progress. Is the power 㼅㻱㻿 Check that there are not any problems the GNC board.
being output to the GNC and OPP in the harness between the GNC and
CHECK: DDC02 voltage of pins 3-4
board? OPP, and replace the OPP board. CHECK: 136Y121500 (disconnections)
(11V or greater)
CHECK: GNC6 pin 2 voltage Replace: 136Y121500, GNC board
CHECK: 136Y121501 (disconnections)
(4.5V or greater) Replace: 136Y121501, OPP board (GNC board) Check whether the DDC board output is
㻺㻻 grounded, and replace the DDC board. If it is
grounded, replace the grounding destination
Check whether theGNC board output is board (GNC).
㻺㻻
grounded, and replace the GNC board. CHECK: 136Y121500 between pins 3-4 and
the GND (DDC02 connectors are unconnected)
CHECK: 136Y121501 resistance between
pin 2 and GND (greater than several kiloohms)
Battery malfunction. If there are not any Replace: 136Y121500, DDC board
㻸㻱㻞㻌㼕㼟㻌㼘㼕㼠 (GNC6 connectors are unconnected)
problems in the harness between the (GNC board)
POW and battery, replace the battery.
Replace: 136Y121501, GNC board (OPP board)
CHECK: 136Y121495 (disconnections, grounding)
Replace: 136Y121495, battery ASSY
Battery malfunction. Check whether
㻸㻱㻟㻌㼕㼟㻌㼘㼕㼠
the POW output is grounded, and
018-241-07E
MT-47
4.6 When Noises Are Generated from the (2) Spray lubricant on to the monitor arm.
Monitor Arm
Spray lubricant on to the monitor arm via the following steps.
(1) Remove the monitor arm cover.
#1 Use a screwdriver, etc. and remove the tabs.
#2 Remove the monitor arm cover.
#1
POCX010604018.ai
(3) Attach the monitor arm cover.

#1
#2
POCX010604017.ai
018-241-07E
MT-48
4.7 If the SE Cannot Be Charged 4.8 If Irradiating Cannot Be Done
START START
Q1 When inserted into the SE does it make a “beeping” sound? Q1 Are error codes being produced?
N Y
Panel detecting is not being done. Look at the error code chart to resolve it
Y Unplug the GNC board – DSC board cables, and confirm the board faults. N
Q2 Measure the voltage at the end of the FUSE on the GNC board, and is it producing Q2 Does the state of the additional filter match with the status display of the LED display?
12 V?
N
N Check that the additional filter detection microswitches are operating.
The GNC board – DSC board communications cables are connected, but Y $ {MC:6.5_DAP/Filter Rail Assembly}
Y power is not being supplied from the GNC board.
Check the GNC board F1 and F2 fuses.
Q3 Can irradiating be done in the X-ray non-interlock mode?
Make sure that the cables between the GNC - DSC boards are properly
connected.
Confirm GNC board defect. N
A
The communications cable is connected, and power is also being supplied from Y
the GNC board.
Unplug the GNC board – DSC board cables, and confirm the DSC board faults.
Q4 Is the SE Ready? (CSL’s green lamp)
Check the SE (Can you charge other SEs with the SE adapter?, the SE adapter
is not dirty?, is the SE battery normal?)
N
The “Num of MPs” in the EDIT CONFIGURATION is “1”?
Is the SE’s LINK LED lit, and can wireless communicating be done?
Y Is the CSL selector selected?
GNC
SE power The SE is not malfunctioning?
FUSE
supply SW ESD Board DSC Board
(F1, F2)
ON/OFF Q5 Is the SmartSwitch set?
DC
12V N
SE communications The GNC board becomes the suspected part. Send the MC and cart logs,
detection buzzer Y and request analysis.
SE SE Adapter
POCX010201013E.ai
Without using the SmartSwitch, set to the XCON interlock settings
Q6 If SW1 is pressed, does the Ready lamp light up?
N
If the shot buzzer sounds, check the path between the OPP board – GNC
Y board.
If it does not sound, check the shot SW – GNC board path.
Shot SW (SW 2) is the suspected part. Replace shot SW.
If it still does not improve, the communications path between the GNC board –
TNK is the suspected part.
018-241-07E
MT-49
4.9 When the Caster Lock Pedal Does Not Rise  Example whereas the rear side pedal is interfering with the cart
chassis
All the Way Up
If the caster lock pedal does not fully rise upwards, the brake shaft may be bent.
When the brake shaft is bent, because the interval between the rear side and the
front side narrows, when the pedal is pushed up, one pedal interferes with the main
chassis, and the other will no longer rise up.
For the aforementioned, check the brake shaft, and replace it if it is bent.
 Example of a bent brake shaft
POCX010201011J.ai
 Example whereas the front side pedal is coming out of the gap
POCX010201012J.ai
POCX010201010J.ai
018-241-07E
MT-50
5. GNC Board/SE IP Address Resetting 5.1 GNC board IP Address Resetting
Procedures Procedures
If the IP address of the GNC board/SE is lost by mistake, you can restore the IP
WARNING
address to the default value (as shipped from the factory).
You must never work on the equipment with the power supplied in any situation
Described below are the procedures for restoring the IP address of the GNC board/SE for servicing the equipment. Always turn OFF the power of the equipment before
to the default value. servicing.
<IP address of the GNC board (default value)>
If you work with the power supplied, an accident such as electric shock hazard,
192.168.0.20 burn or short-circuiting might occur, resulting in death or serious injury.
<IP address of the SE (default value)>
192.168.0.30
With the DR-XD1000 system, by changing the GNC board DIP SW (S4) settings, the
GNC board IP address for the MP function can be returned to their defaults.
(1) Confirm that the main breaker has been turned OFF.
(2) Remove the following components.

$ {MC:2.1_Front Cover}
$ {MC:2.2_Rear Cover}
$ {MC:2.4_Arm Front Cover}
$ {MC:2.6_Right-side Cover (GNC Board Side)}
(3) Check that the main breaker has been turned OFF.
(4) Remove the shield plate of the GNC board.

#1 Remove the screws.
#2 Remove the shield plate.
#1
TP3x6 (x6)
#2
POCX010303022J.ai
018-241-07E
MT-51
(4) Peel off the film of the DIP SW (S4) on the GNC board, turn both 1 and (7) Turn ON the main key, and start up CSL.
2 ON.
(8) Terminate CSL and turn OFF the main key.
(9) Turn OFF the main breaker. Remove the AC cable if it is connected.
REFERENCES
Since the power supply to the GNC board needs to be terminated in order to
ON reflect the IP address settings to the GNC board, implement Step (9).
(10) Remove the shield plate.

Perform again the procedures for (3).
S4 (11) Turn the GNC board DIP SW (S4) OFF.
(12) Attach the cover.

Reverse the procedures for (1), (3).
 NOTE 
When the MP IP address has been changed, the MC setting needs to be changed.
Perform the following procedure.
$ {MU:5.9.12_Replace MP}
In addition, if the RU PC-TOOL is being used, uninstall and install the MC application
before changing the MC settings.
POCX010201005J.ai
S2 S3 S1 S5
REFERENCES
The GNC board DIP SW (S1 – S5) defaults are OFF.
(5) Attach the shield plate.

Reverse the procedures for (3).
(6) Turn ON the main breaker.

The GNC board IP address will be reset.
(7) Turn OFF the main breaker.
018-241-07E
MT-52
5.2 SE IP Address Resetting Procedures (3) Install the battery pack to the SE.
WARNING (4) Make sure that two external positions of the status lamp (LED) of the
SE flash three times successively.
You must never work on the SE with the power supplied in any situation for You can know that the IP address of the SE is changed to the default value if the
servicing the SE. Always disconnect the SE cable from the SE, and remove the LED flashes three times successively.
battery pack from the SE. #1 Check: LED
If you work with the power supplied, an accident such as electric shock hazard,
burn or short-circuiting might occur, resulting in death or serious injury.
If the battery pack is available, perform the following procedure.

REFERENCES
For the procedure without battery pack, refer to the following.
$ {IN: Appendix 4.2_Restoring the IP Address of the SE} in DR-ID 1200 Service Manual
$ {IN: Appendix 3.2_Restoring the IP Address of the SE} in DR-ID1270 Service Manual
(1) Disconnect the SE cable from the SE.

(2) Connect the jig connector.
#1 Connect: Jig connector
#1
1200_700153.ai
(5) Remove the battery pack from the SE.
(6) Remove the jig connector.
(7) Set the COUNTRY CODE in “WIRELESS SETTING” window of EDIT

CONFIGURATION.
$ {MU:4.11_EDIT CONFIGURATION}
$ {MU:5.3.3_Wireless Setting}
#1
1200_700160.ai
018-241-07E
MT-53
6. Troubleshooting from FUJIFILM- (3) Select “LOG Information” from “Maintenance” menu to check the log.
made AP Log
Log in to the FUJIFILM-made AP from a browser and then check the log.
 Checking the log

(1) Open Internet Explorer, enter “192.168.0.25” into the address bar and
press the [Enter] key.
(2) When the following window opens, enter “fuj1Film” into the password
area and click [Login].
 NOTE 
If the password has been changed, enter the changed password.
1200_200006E.ai
 NOTE 
When sending the log for analysis, copy and paste the contents in the "Show log"
window to create a text file.
700_700051E.ai
018-241-07E
MT-54
 Details to be checked in the log
 How to interpret the log
The log appears from "2000/01/01 00:00:04" every time when the AP starts up.
In an example below, the "2000/01/01 00:00:04" in the first line is an event at first start-up, the "2000/01/01 00:00:04" in the seventh line is an event at the seventh start-up.
Line Log Description
1 2000/01/01 00:00:04 eth0: link down AP began to start-up (1st)/Ethernet LAN stopped working.
2 2000/01/01 00:00:04 system_start. AP is starting up
3 2000/01/01 00:00:07 eth0: link down AP is starting up
4 2000/01/01 00:00:20 RNDIS start AP is starting up (USB-LAN began to start-up)
5 2000/01/01 00:00:42 http login, 192.168.0.10 IP address 192.168.0.10 logged in AP.
6 2000/01/01 00:00:42 http login success
7 2000/01/01 00:00:04 eth0: link down AP began to start-up (2nd)
8 2000/01/01 00:00:04 system_start.
9 2000/01/01 00:00:19 eth0: link down
10 2000/01/01 00:00:24 certification was aes(ccm)
11 2000/01/01 00:00:25 DFS start on channel 5260 Because the start channel was DFS-targeted 52 ch (=5260 MHz), the frequency band is scanned for 1 minute when started up.
12 2000/01/01 00:00:25 wlan RF on.
13 2000/01/01 00:00:30 RNDIS start
14 2000/01/01 00:01:39 wlan client connected 00:80:92:6f:cb:19 SE (MAC address 00:80:92:6f:cb:19) connected to AP through encryption.
16 2000/01/01 00:00:04 eth0: link down AP began to start-up (3rd)
17 2000/01/01 00:00:04 system_start.
18 2000/01/01 00:00:19 eth0: link down
20 2000/01/01 00:00:25 DFS start on channel 5260
21 2000/01/01 00:00:25 wlan RF on.
22 2000/01/01 00:00:36 RNDIS start
23 2000/01/01 00:01:35 wlan client connected 00:80:92:6f:cb:19
25 2000/01/01 00:01:49 DFS start on channel 5280 DFS functioned to move the channel to 5280 MHz = 56 ch (1 minute frequency band scanning started.)
26 2000/01/01 00:01:49 connect channel is 56
27 2000/01/01 00:02:48 connect channel is 60 DFS functioned to move the channel to 5300 MHz = 60 ch (1 minute frequency band scanning started.)
28 2000/01/01 00:02:48 DFS start on channel 5300
31 2000/01/01 00:11:07 eth0: link up, full duplex, speed 100 Mbps Wired LAN function was activated (SE is wired to AP).
32 2000/01/01 00:11:39 eth0: link down Wired LAN function was deactivated (Wired AP is disconnected).
018-241-07E
MT-55
 Events to be obtained from log  Checking DFS operation

Events that can be obtained from the log are as shown below. The underlined parts When the W53, W56 type channels are selected, if interference is detected, perform
are examples for the contents of the log the following workarounds as per the following.
Event type Occurrence timing Log contents This is because they are obliged to avoid interfering with weather radar due to DFS
(Dynamic Frequency Selection).
AP power-on system_start
- Since radar wave detecting is performed for about 1 minute before each channel
Start-up USB-LAN Link up starts communicating, communications cannot be performed during that time.
Termination USB-LAN Link down - When the AP detects radar waves during communications, the communications
Hardware eth0:link up, full duplex, speed 100 are interrupted, and the channel is changed. The surrounding radar wave detecting
Wired LAN link-up is performed without radio waves being emitted again for about 1 minute after the
event Mbps
channel is changed, and if no radar waves are being detected, then communications
Wired LAN link-down eth0:link down will restart on the channel after it was changed (DFS operations). At those times,
Wireless LAN operation-on wlan RF on the SE automatically follows the AP channel. Communications are continued on the
Wireless LAN operation-off wlan RF off channel after it was changed until the AP is restarted.
- The “WSTAT” LED flashes red while the DFS is searching.
IP addresses of clients who tried log-
in certification to the configuration http login 192.168.0.10 The log is recorded when the DFS is operating.
Access window
event to Web Ex.: A log when the channel moved from 56ch to 60ch. After moving to ch 60, search
Successful certification to Web
configuration http login success for 1 minute, then start communicating with the SE.
configuration window
window
Failed certification to Web 2000/01/01 00:01:49 DFS start on channel 5280
http login fail 2000/01/01 00:01:49 connect channel is 56
configuration window
Connection between AP and client wlan client connected 2000/01/01 00:02:48 connect channel is 60
Wireless LAN 2000/01/01 00:03:58 wlan client connected 00:80:92:6f:cb:19
event Certification information between AP
certification was aes(ccm)
and client The channel and frequency have the relation shown as below.
DFS operation-on DFS start Channel Frequency Channel Frequency
DFS event Channel resulted from DFS
connected channel is 56 52ch 5260MHz 112ch 5560MHz
operation
56ch 5280MHz 116ch 5580MHz
60ch 5300MHz 120ch 5600MHz
64ch 5320MHz 124ch 5620MHz
100ch 5500MHz 128ch 5640MHz
104ch 5520MHz 132ch 5660MHz
108ch 5540MHz 136ch 5680MHz
140ch 5700MHz
018-241-07E
AppxMT1-1
Appendix 1. Aging  Warm-up aging log example
If warm-up aging is being implemented, the exposure which is set via “80 kV, 25 mAs
(kV: 800, mAs: 2500)” is recorded five times at the times when that is equivalent to the
When using the DR-XD 1000, ageing needs to be implemented in order to suppress the
start of 1 day of work.
X-ray tube’s consumption.
When the X-ray tube is not used for a while, the vacuum level inside the tube
decreases. If the vacuum level decreases, then discharging may occur inside the X-ray  Example 1
tube. In the following examples, five exposures are performed from around 3/24 8:11.
Even if the vacuum level inside the X-ray tube decreases, the vacuum level can be
raised (recovered) by conducting exposure at the maximum mAs value. 2018/03/24 8:11:40.272,Tick:0x000026C2,kV:800,mAs:2500,mA:0,0,1,kV:791,mAs:25
05,mA:249,mS:10059,Gy:0,UInf:0x0000
At that time, discharging might occur, but the occurring of that itself is not abnormal.
2018/03/24 8:13:25.036,Tick:0x0000671F,kV:800,mAs:2500,mA:0,0,1,kV:790,mAs:25
If the frequency of the discharging occurring is so high that the discharging occurs via
06,mA:249,mS:10064,Gy:0,UInf:0x0000
each exposure, then the mono tank and inverter may need to be replaced.
2018/03/24 8:14:31.353,Tick:0x00009878,kV:800,mAs:2500,mA:0,0,1,kV:791,mAs:2
Conduct aging under the conditions contained in this appendix in accordance with the
505,mA:249,mS:10061,Gy:0,UInf:0x0000
device’s usage status.
2018/03/24 8:15:38.049,Tick:0x000114F9,kV:800,mAs:2500,mA:0,0,1,kV:791,mAs:25
In addition, these conditions are also contained in the user’s instruction manual.
05,mA:249,mS:10058,Gy:0,UInf:0x0000
(1) Fully enclose the collimator irradiation field. 2018/03/24 8:16:40.272,Tick:0x000026C2,kV:800,mAs:2500,mA:0,0,1,kV:790,mAs:2
505,mA:249,mS:10060,Gy:0,UInf:0x0000
Turn the irradiation field adjustment knob.
(2) Set to the memory exposing non-interlocking mode.  Example 2

Long press the X-ray controller DR interlocking switch for 2 seconds, the DR In the following examples, five exposures are performed from around 3/26 8:33.
interlocking switch “Goes out”. In addition, for the first time, essentially about 1,000 milliseconds was irradiated for
only 694.2 milliseconds, and the mAs value only reached 17.39. Since no errors
(3) Irradiate the X-ray. occurred in this log, it is assumed that the shot switch was released during the shot.
2018/03/26 8:33:40.272,Tick:0x000026C2,kV:800,mAs:2500,mA:0,0,1,kV:790,mAs:17
CAUTION 30,mA:249,mS:6942,Gy:0,UInf:0x0000
2018/03/26 8:35:25.036,Tick:0x0000671F,kV:800,mAs:2500,mA:0,0,1,kV:791,mAs:25
So that people do not get exposed to radiation, irradiate the X-rays directed 06,mA:249,mS:10064,Gy:0,UInf:0x0000
towards the floor. When aging, keep the SE away from the X-ray irradiation 2018/03/26 8:36:31.353,Tick:0x00009878,kV:800,mAs:2500,mA:0,0,1,kV:791,mAs:2
sphere, and do not irradiate the X-rays towards the SE. 505,mA:249,mS:10061,Gy:0,UInf:0x0000
2018/03/26 8:37:38.049,Tick:0x000114F9,kV:800,mAs:2500,mA:0,0,1,kV:791,mAs:25
The types of aging and irradiation conditions are as per the following. 05,mA:249,mS:10058,Gy:0,UInf:0x0000
2018/03/26 8:38:40.272,Tick:0x000026C2,kV:800,mAs:2500,mA:0,0,1,kV:790,mAs:1
 Warm-up aging 730,mA:249,mS:6942,Gy:0,UInf:0x0000
Implement aging as per the following conditions on the initial day used. The tube
current instability phenomena will be suppressed by conducting this aging, and the
X-ray tube can be stably used.
Tube voltage Standby time Number of
Step mAs
(kV) (sec) times
1 80 25 60 5
018-241-07E
DR-XD 1000 Service Manual AppxMT1-1
AppxMT1-2
 Aging
When instability phenomena are witnessed in X-ray irradiating, and when it has not
been used for a month or more, implement aging as per the following conditions.
Step mAs
(kV) (sec) times
1 60 25 60 5
2 80 25 60 5
3 90 25 60 5
4 100 25 60 5
 Aging (when not used for 6 months or more)

Implement aging as per the following conditions.
Step mAs
(kV) (sec) times
1 40 12.5 60 5
2 60 12.5 60 5
3 70 12.5 60 5
4 80 12.5 60 5
5 90 12.5 60 5
6 100 12.5 60 5
7 60 3.2 60 5
8 70 3.2 60 5
9 80 2.5 60 5
10 60 25 60 5
11 80 25 60 5
12 100 25 60 5
CAUTION
- If aging is not implemented, when X-rays are exposed, the X-ray tube device
might cause electrical discharges.
- The overcurrent protection circuit might generate work errors during aging.
Release the errors by operating the key switch ON/OFF, then implement
aging.
018-241-05E
AppxMT1-3
BLANK PAGE
018-241-04E
AppxMT1-4
BLANK PAGE
018-241-04E
AppxMT2-1
Appendix 2. 10753 Error  Isolating the spots where the malfunctions are occurring via
PING
Countermeasures  In the case of the old configuration
In the DR-XD1000, 10753 [line disconnection of MC-MP] error might be generated. GNC board
This contains countermeasure steps for those cases.
SE HUB AP PC
REFERENCES
In the DR-XD 1000, the functions of the MP, which are used in DR-ID 1200, are
mounted on the GNC67A board. If communication between the MC and the GNC67A MP
board is broken, 10753 error occurs. The functions of the MP on the GNC67A board POCX01020B022.ai
are referred to as “MP” for short.
Implement PING confirming, and isolate “Between GNC board - AP” and “Between AP
- PC”.
- When there is a PING response from the AP
1. The Isolation Flow Malfunctioning between the AP-GNC boards.
Check the GNC board’s IP address.
START
The cables between the GNC board and AP - GNC board are the suspected part.
- When there is no PING response from the AP
Q1 Restored via the breaker’s ON/OFF? Malfunctioning between the AP-PC.
The cables between the AP and AP - PC are the suspected part.
N  In the case of the new configuration

Implement the following, “■ Isolating the Spots Where the Malfunctions Are
Y Occurring via PING” GNC board
Q2 Have ARP, and network driver countermeasures been implemented? SE HUB PC
N
Implement the following, “■ Case 1”, “■ Case 2”
Y AP MP
POCX01020B023.ai
Q3 When the SE is connected to the DR slot, is the line disconnecting? *
The PC – GNC boards are directly connected. Therefore, if there is no PING response
from the GNC board, implement the following.
- Check the of the GNC board’s IP address.
Y
See the following, “■ Case 3” - The suspect parts are the cables between the PC – GNC boards, or the GNC board.
N
Send the MC, CSL, and cart logs.
* When the timing of the line disconnecting is unknown, implement “3. Confirming
Analysis via the Log”.
018-241-05E
AppxMT2-2
2. Phenomenon and Countermeasure  Execute the batch files (if the MP IP address is not going to be
changed)
2.1 Case 1 (1) Copy the batch file “DR-XD1000_arp_set.bat” to the desktop and
double-click to execute.
 Phenomenon 1
(2) Copy the batch file “DR-XD1000_arp_check.bat” to the desktop and
Connect the DR-XD 1000 via the hospital LAN, and if there is a gateway (router) on double-click to execute.
the in-hospital LAN side, if the DR-XD 1000 is started up, then 10753 error will be
generated. The Command Prompt window appears.
(3) Confirm that “192.168.0.20” has been registered as “static” under

 Cause 1 “Interface: 192.168.0.10”.
Since the local packets are sent to the hospital LAN side before the MP network (device
local network) is established, and the establishing of the network with the local side is
slow, the MC will produce a timeout error.
Implement “2.2 Countermeasure 1”.
 Countermeasure 1: Running the APR table setting batch files

(ECN-000196)
Use the batch files which are distributed via the ECN, and register the GNC board in POCX01020B001E.ai
the Windows ARP table.

(4) Shut down the PC and turn OFF the device.
 NOTE 
The aforementioned countermeasures have been already implemented for #xxx20173  NOTE 
or later. Turn OFF the breaker and unplug the AC cable.
If the MP IP address is going to be changed, implement “● Changing the IP address of
the MP”.
(5) Turn ON the breaker with the security key switch left ON. When the
CSL starts, make sure that no error occurs.
 NOTE 
To confirm, make sure the system is connected to the hospital network.
018-241-05E
AppxMT2-3
 Changing the IP address of the MP (5) Rewrite the IP address after “Eth1” with the set IP address of the MP.
To change the IP address of the MP because the hospital network is “192.168.0.xx” or  NOTE 
the like, make settings by the following procedure after changing the local IP address.
Do not rewrite any part other than the IP address.
(1) Copy the batch file “DR-XD1000_arp_set.bat” to the desktop.
(2) Open the batch file with any text editor.

 NOTE 
Make sure not to execute by double-clicking.
POCX01020B004E.ai
(3) Select the file and right-click or press the property key on the screen (6) Save the file and close.
key board.
(7) Double-click the edited batch file “DR-XD1000_arp_set.bat” to execute.
(8) Copy the batch file “DR-XD1000_arp_check.bat” to the desk top to

execute.
The Command Prompt window appears.
REFERENCES
In the case of changing Eth1 to 172.16.0.10 and MP to 172.16.0.20, the
POCX01020B002E.ai
registration is completed when “172.16.0.20” has been registered as “static”
under “Interface: 172.16.0.10”.
(4) Select [Edit].
(9) Shut down the PC and turn OFF the device.

 NOTE 
Turn OFF the breaker and unplug the AC cable.
(10) Turn ON the breaker with the security key switch left ON. When the
CSL starts, make sure that no error occurs.
 NOTE 
To confirm, make sure the system is connected to the hospital network.
POCX01020B003E.ai
The text editor will display a memo, etc.
018-241-05E
AppxMT2-4
 Clearing the incorrect setting of IP address (5) Rewrite the IP address after “Eth1” with the incorrect IP address.
Delete the IP address which was incorrectly set via the batch file “DR-XD1000_arp_  NOTE 
delete.bat”.
Do not rewrite any part other than the IP address.
(1) Copy the batch file “DR-XD1000_arp_delete.bat” to the desktop.
(2) Open the batch file with any text editor.

 NOTE 
Make sure not to execute by double-clicking.
POCX01020B004E.ai
(3) Select the file and right-click or press the property key on the screen (6) Save the file and close.
key board.
(7) Double-click the edited batch file “DR-XD1000_arp_set.bat” to execute.
(8) Copy the batch file “DR-XD1000_arp_check.bat” to the desktop to

execute.
(9) Make sure that the incorrect IP address has been deleted.
POCX01020B002E.ai
(4) Select [Edit].
POCX01020B005E.ai
REFERENCES
“192.168.0.20” is not displayed if it is deleted.
POCX01020B003E.ai
018-241-05E
AppxMT2-5
2.2 Case 2 (4) When the following window appears upon completion of installation,
click [Close].
 Phenomenon 2
While using the DR-XD 1000, 10753 errors are generated. It is assumed that the
causes are a network driver malfunction, and static electricity.
 Cause 2
An issue whereas there are no longer any responses from the TCP/IP protocols in the
Windows standard network drivers which are installed in the DR-XD 1000 Console
PC.
Implement “■ Countermeasure 2”.
 Countermeasure 2: Update the network device driver (ECN-

000202)
POCX01020B007E.ai
Correct the error by applying the updates provided by Microsoft. REFERENCES

Install the files “Windows6.1-KB2905407-x64.msu” and “Windows6.1-KB2913431-x64.
msu” which are attached to the ECN via the following steps. Even when clicking [Restart Now], simply perform the work after the restart.
 NOTE 
The aforementioned countermeasures have been already implemented for #xxxx0172 (5) Copy the installation file “Windows6.1-KB2913431-x64.msu” to the
or later. desktop and double-click to execute.
(1) While pressing the <Shift> key, terminate the application of CSL. (6) When the following window appears, click [Yes].
The system return to the desktop screen.
(2) Copy the installation file “Windows6.1-KB2905407-x64.msu” to the

desktop and double-click to execute.
(3) When the following window appears, click [Yes].

POCX01020B008E.ai
POCX01020B006E.ai
018-241-05E
AppxMT2-6
(7) When the following window appears upon completion of installation,
click [Restart Now].
POCX01020B009E.ai
CSL restarts.
(8) Check the performance after the restart.
018-241-05E
AppxMT2-7
2.3 Case 3  Countermeasure 3: Add on the static electricity countermeasures
kit (ECN-000378)
 Phenomenon 3 Add on the static electricity countermeasures board in to the device’s inside.
While using the DR-XD 1000, 10753 errors are generated. It is assumed that the  NOTE 
causes are a network driver malfunction, and static electricity.
The aforementioned countermeasures have been already implemented for following
machines.
- FDR nano: #76950226 or earlier
 Cause 3
- FDR AQRO: #76850214 to #76850220
Depending upon the usage environment, static electricity gets charged in the SE.
When the SE has been set in the DR slot, errors will be generated by static electricity
being discharged inside the device.  Structure of the Static Electricity Countermeasures Kit (898Y200551)
Implement “■ Countermeasure 3”.
Part number Part name Qty. Remarks
1 113Y200243 ESD67A board 1
2 345Y200031 DDC shield plate assembly 1
3 316S1274 Clamp 2
4 308S0414 TP3x6 screw 4 For fixing the board
5 356N200503A DR slot relay bracket 1
6 136Y200684 Relay cable 1
#1
#2
#5
#4
#3
#6
POCX01020B010J.ai
018-241-05E
AppxMT2-8
 Remove the DR slot assembly  Replacing the DR slot relay bracket
(1) Shut down the PC and turn OFF the device. (1) Remove the relay connector for DR slot relay bracket, and remove the
DR slot relay bracket.
 NOTE 
#1 Remove the relay connector.
Turn OFF the breaker and unplug the AC cable.
 NOTE 
Remove the relay connector in advance.
(2) Perform the following procedure and remove the cover, DR slot
assembly, DR slot frame. #2 Remove the screw.
#3 Remove the relay bracket.
$ {MC:2.5_Arm Rear Cover}
$ {MC:2.7_Left-side Cover (INV Board Side)} #2
$ {MC:2.11_DR Slot Assembly Front Cover} TP3x6 [1]
#3
$ {MC:2.12_DR Slot Assembly Right-side Cover}
$ {MC:2.13_DR Slot Assembly Left-side Cover}
$ {MC:2.14_DR Slot Assembly}
$ {MC:2.15_DR Slot Frame}
#1
POCX01020B012J.ai
POCX01020B011J.ai
018-241-05E
AppxMT2-9
(2) Attach the new DS relay bracket which is supplied in the kit. #4 Attach the connector on the main unit side.
#1 Attach the new relay bracket.
#2 Remove the screw.
#4
#2
TP3x6 [1]
#1
POCX01020B013J-03.ai
REFERENCE
The arrow section’s width on the new DS relay bracket is wider, which facilitates
#3 Attach the relay connector.
attaching the cables.
#3
#4
POCX01020B014J.ai
018-241-05E
AppxMT2-10
 Replacing the DDC board shield plate and attach the ESD67A board (2) Attach the DDC shield plate assembly which is supplied in the kit.
#1 Attach the DDC shield plate assembly which is supplied in the kit.
(1) Remove the DDC board shield plate. #2 Attach the screws.
#2
TP3x6 [1] (x5)
#1
TP3x6 [1] (x5)
#1
#2
POCX01020B015J.ai
POCX010303025J.ai
(3) Attach the clamp and ESD67A board.

#1 Attach the clamp.
#1
POCX01020B016J.ai
018-241-05E
AppxMT2-11
#2 Attach the ESD67A board.  Attaching the relay cable
 NOTE  (1) Attach the relay cable.
The attachment orientation for the ESD67A board is determined. The attachment #1 Attch the connector on the ESD67A side.
hole width on the top is wider than that of the bottom. #2 Attch the connector on the DSC-P relay side.
#3 Clamp the cable.
Wide
#2
#1
#3
Narrow
POCX01020B017J.ai
POCX01020B019J.ai
#3 Attach the screws.

 Removing Unneeded Clamps
Remove the red round sections of the clamps as per the following photo since they
#3 A #3 B
will not be needed.
TP3x6 [1] TP3x6 [1]
#2
#3 C #3 D
TP3x6 [1] TP3x6 [1]
POCX01020B018J.ai
 NOTE 
Attach the screws in the sequence A to D. POCX01020B020J.ai
018-241-05E
AppxMT2-12
 Attach the DR slot frame  Function check
Attach the DR slot frame. Before attaching the covers, implement function checks as per the following steps.
(1) Turn on the breaker, turn on the key switch, activate CSL.
 Attach the DR slot assembly

(2) Insert the SE whose batteries were removed in to the DR slot, and
Attach the DR slot assembly. check that the power is ON (the LEDs on the 4 sides of the SE are
$ {MC:2.14_DR Slot Assembly} flashing).
 NOTE 
The DR assembly cable attachment position has been changed. Pass it past the (3) Check that the panel is connected by wire via the CSL icon.
clamp as per the following photo, and connect it to the left side of the ESD67A board.
(4) If there are not any problems in (1) - (3), shut down the CSL, and
switch the breaker OFF.
INSTRUCTION
If malfunctions are generated, check whether the ESD67A board and relay
connectors are properly connected.
 Attach the covers

(1) Perform the following procedure and attach the cover.
POCX01020B021J.ai
$ {MC:2.11_DR Slot Assembly Front Cover}
 Checking the DR Slot Assembly Cables
$ {MC:2.7_Left-side Cover (INV Board Side)}
Oscillate (fully open, fully closed) the DR slot assembly, and check the cables.
If the harness gets taut, or the cables catch onto something when oscillating, check
whether the cable routing is correct. $ {MC:2.5_Arm Rear Cover}
 Performance check
Turn ON the breaker, turn ON the key switch, and confirm that the device starts
normally.
018-241-05E
AppxMT2-13
3. Confirming Analysis via the Log  When There Are Problems in the MP
This describes the analysis procedures based on the 10753 error log which is a MP There is a life check request (LifeCkRq) record, but no response (LifeCkRs) from the
communications connection fault. MP.
2017/02/19 13:46:59 00191361 192.168.0.20 0005000710010200

 Analysis procedure LifeCkRq
Check the following when the MC is running. :
:
(1) RU PC-TOOL: Check ERROR DB to find the time of the 10753 error
occurrence. * LifeCkRq: Life check request from the MC to the MP (Life Check Request)
LifeCkRs: Life check response from the MP to the MC (Life Check Response)
(2) Get MC log. In regard to the life check request, there is no response from the 192.168.0.20 MP.
With the DR-XD 1000, the MP functions are mounted in the GNC board, which
(3) Check the behavior of the MP (GNC), and SE at the corresponding therefore becomes the suspected part.
times from the following files in the “TRACE” folder in the folder of the
backed up log.
“MC_WLAN_COM.LOG” or “MC_WLAN_COM2.LOG”  When the SE was inserted into the DR slot before an error occurred
For details of the log structure, refer to the following. Due to static electricity from the charged SE, it is suspected that the MP functions
$ {MT:Appendix 3._Procedures for Acquiring the Logs} have terminated.
 When normal 2013/12/13 09:12:24 000023D4 CONNECT NEW SE 0006000510010300

WakeUpNt 0000
The Life check request (LifeCkRq)/response (LifeCkRs) processing is periodically
2013/12/13 09:12:24 000023D4 CONNECT NEW SE 0005100600010400
performed between the MC - MP.
RMLRegRq 01001800
2017/12/13 09:48:18 00000F04 192.168.0.20 0005000710010200 2013/12/13 09:12:24 000023D4 CONNECT NEW SE 1006000500010600
LifeCkRq RMLRegRs 000018000421AA0C
2017/12/13 09:48:18 00000F04 192.168.0.20 0007000510010300 2013/12/13 09:12:24 000023D4 192.168.0.30 0005100600010500
LifeCkRs 0000 RMLRegRq 020030003400
:
* LifeCkRq: Life check response request from the MC to the MP :
LifeCkRs: Life check response from the MP to the MC
“CONNECT NEW SE” is a log indicating that the SE is connected to the MC.
This is recorded when the wired/wireless are switched, and new communications
start.
If the life check response from the MP is stopped after being connected via wire
(IP address is 192.168.0.30 by default), it is suspected that the MP functions have
stopped due to static electricity from a charged SE.
018-241-06E
AppxMT2-14
BLANK PAGE
018-241-05E
AppxMT2-15
BLANK PAGE
018-241-05E
AppxMT2-16
BLANK PAGE
018-241-05E
AppxMT3-1
Appendix 3. Procedures for Acquiring ├─CONSOLE
│ CONSOLE.LOG
/// Communications log between CSL-MC ///
the Logs │
├─ERROR /// Error log ///
│ ERRORB.LOG
When malfunctions are generated, acquire the following logs. │
This explains the procedures for acquiring these logs. ├─ES_IMAGE /// Do not use with the DR-XD 1000 ///
- MC │ BackupESImage.bat
- CSL │
- DR-XD 1000 Maintenance Tool ├─GLG ///GLG log ///
REFERENCE │ GLG.bat
The service tool the Smart Log Acquisition Tool (SLAT) is distributed via the ECN │ glg.exe
which acquires the aforementioned 3 logs in a batch. │ glg_devo2.exe
$ {MU:6._Smart Log Acquisition Tool (SLAT)} │ SE_GSENS_N120109.LOG /// Are generated by each panel ///
│ SE_GSENS_N170006.LOG /// Are generated by each panel ///
│
├─IOT /// For designing ///
 MC │ APL.IO2
Acquire a log with DR Maintenance Tool or RU PC-TOOL. │ IOT.IO2
│
 DR Maintenance Tool ├─ISC /// For designing ///
Acquire by [LOG ALL] command. │ ISC.LOG
$ {MU:4.13_BACKUP} │
├─LP_IMAGE /// Do not use with the DR-XD 1000 ///
The structures of the log files are as per the following. │ BackupLPImage.bat
20180507143515 (Date and time of acquisition)-MC-ALLLOG │
├─CALIB /// Calibration history /// ├─MONOLITH
│ CALIB.LOG ├─NETWORK /// Network log ///
│ │ AP.LOG
├─CONFIG /// Storing of the setting files /// │ BATTERY.LOG
│ BATTERY.CFG │ FI.LOG
│ batterythrtime.conf │ TCPDUMP.zip
│ centerledcolor.conf │
│ DAP.CFG
│ GLG.CFG
│ HISTORY.CFG
│ IRSET.CFG
│ IRSTATUS.CFG
│ NETWORK.CFG
│ SHARE_CORDATA.CFG
│ VERSION.DAT
│
018-241-07E
AppxMT3-2
└─TRACE /// For designing ///  RU PC-TOOL
ALPS_COM.LOG
Click [ALL Log] to acquire it.
ALPS_COM2.LOG
$ {MU:5.10.6_LOG Backup}
BKY.LOG
CDM.LOG
COMDAT.LOG  CSL
ENT.LOG
EXPCOND.LOG Acquire via the “IIP Service Utility”.
FCT.LOG For details, refer to “MU: 13._Collecting the Log and Configuration Files — Log/
FIL.LOG Configuration Files Acquisition Tool” in DR-ID 300CL Service Manual.
HSM.LOG
HST.LOG
HST2.LOG
IMO.LOG
LONGPANEL.LOG
MCMNG.LOG
MC_WLAN_COM.LOG /// Communications log between MC-SE-MP ///
MC_WLAN_COM2.LOG /// Communications log between MC-SE-MP ///
MC_WLAN_ERR.LOG
MC_WLAN_ERR2.LOG
MC_WLAN_IF.LOG
MC_WLAN_IF2.LOG
MNT.LOG
MOC.LOG
OAL.LOG
OAL2.LOG
OIF.LOG
OIF_SIC.LOG
OPER.LOG
RAD.LOG
SERegistInfo.txt /// SE registration information ///
SE_IMGPRM.LOG
SQC.LOG
SWL.LOG
SYS.LOG
XFREE.LOG
018-241-05E
AppxMT3-3
 DR-XD 1000 Maintenance Tool
Click [Save all] to acquire it.
$ {MU:3.4_Saving Log Information}
INSTRUCTION
- When communications malfunctions are generated, in conjunction with them,
acquire the FUJIFILM AP logs. Refer to the following in regard to acquisition
procedures.
$ {MT:6._Troubleshooting from FUJIFILM-made AP Log}
- If there are mechanical malfunctions (operational defects, external defects), take
photos of the defective spots, and submit the pictures.
018-241-07E
AppxMT3-4
BLANK PAGE
018-241-04E
AppxMT4-1
Appendix 4. How to Obtain the Image 2. How to check image data
Files When There are A  Download and install ImageJ
Abnormal Images (1) Download the free software ImageJ, and install it.
Search for “Image J” via a search engine, or download it at “http://rsbweb.nih.gov/ij/”.
 NOTE 
1. Storage Location of Image Data (std data) The tool can also be localized into Japanese.
 Image data
They are in the following folder.  Using ImageJ
C:\Program Files\Fujifilm\IIP\Data\Image
The image data file creation date and time will be the exposing date and time. Search (1) Start ImageJ.
for the target file based on the file creation date and time.
(2) Click “File” - “Import” - “Raw”, select image data (std file) (# 1) and
click “Open” (# 2).
 File name
The names will be as per the following.
Routine number .std (Raw data)
REFERENCES #1
Collecting images can also be done with the DX image pickup tool distributed by ECN.
If the DX image pickup tool is usable, use the DX image pickup tool.
#2
POCX01020D007.ai
018-241-05E
AppxMT4-2
(3) Since the following subwindow is displayed, set the inside of the  Read image
frame, and click [OK].
Since the read image information is displayed in the upper left frame of the window,
Image type: Select “16-bit Unsigned” confirm that the Pixel value and Image Type are the correct values.
Width: Differs with the size of each SE (refer to the following chart) Example) 17x17 size image: 2832 x 2836 Pixels, 16-bit
Height: Differs with the size of each SE (refer to the following chart)
White is zero: Check ON
Little-endian byte order: Check ON
POCX01020D008.ai
 Pixel values for each SE size when reading raw data

POCX01020D009.ai
SE Size Width Height

NG example) When Image Type is incorrect NG Example) Incorrectly entering SE size
17 x 17 2832 2836 Read in 8 bits Pixel value When reading 17x17 with 14x17
14 x 17 2336 2836
10 x 12 1648 1980
24 x 30 1536 1920
POCX01020D010E.ai
018-241-05E
AppxMT4-3
BLANK PAGE
018-241-05E
AppxMT4-4
BLANK PAGE
018-241-05E
AppxMT5-1
Appendix 5. Analysis Procedures When  Procedure outline flow
11240 Line Disconnecting Check the occurrence
Errors Occur in Wireless

status of the “10753”
and “11240” errors
Communications The “10753” error Display only

also occurs "11240" error
1. Overview
This describes the procedures for isolating occurrence (problem sections) sections Pattern C1:
when communications disconnection errors occur during wireless communications. Check whether the AP
Check that the “10753” radio wave strength is
Check the error code that is being generated, and if there is an error (10753) between error is resolved
the MC and MP, confirm the resolution for the 10753 error. greater than the specified
value (-71 dB)
When a communications error (11240 error) between the MC and the SE is occurring Less than specified value
in the wireless communications environment, it is conceivable that the cause is an Above the
insufficiency of the communications radio field intensity (pattern C1), an SE simplex specified value
problem (pattern C2), an AP problem, or radio wave interference (pattern C3).
Implement a Check the SE line status
These isolation procedures are described subsequently.
countermeasure flow from the log, and check
REFERENCES pertaining to the radio the SE with the problem
This item is created based upon “DRCSTC 064”. field intensity occurrence
A specified SE disconnects
All of the multiple
SEs disconnect
 Example of error code display when line disconnecting occurs
10753: MP connecting fault Pattern C2: Pattern C3:
[10753] 2016/04/20 11:53:22 0064B9 @MP-MC NOT CONNECT Check and resolve Confirm AP anomalies
11240: Panel disconnection detection the SE board’s status and radio interference
[11240] 2016/04/20 11:53:12 006076 @COM SE[W920001] POCX01020E002E.ai
Refer to the following in regard to when 10753 errors occur.

$ {AppxMT: 2._10753 Error Countermeasures}
018-241-05E
AppxMT5-2
2. Analysis Procedures
 How to check the error log
(1) Extract ERROR.cab inside of LOG ALL (MC).
POCX01020E003.ai
(2) Open ERRORB.LOG in WordPad.
POCX01020E004.ai
(3) Check the error code that is occurring, and implement the procedures
for the corresponding pattern.
When the 10753 and 11240 errors are occurring: First, implement the 10753 error
countermeasures were implemented.
If only the 10753 error is occurring: implement the 10753 error countermeasures.
If only the 11240 error is occurring: Implement patterns C1, C2, and C3 based upon “■
Procedure outline flow”
018-241-05E
AppxMT5-3
3. For Pattern C1 (Confirming the Radio Field  Action procedure
Strength)  If the radio field strength at the time of the error occurrence is
By checking the radio field strength from the AP which the SE is receiving, the line less than “-71” (when the number is 70 or more)
disconnection is detected via the insufficiency of the radio field strength. It is thought that this malfunction is caused by the weakening of the radio field
When the radio field strength is less than -71 dB, the strength is insufficient (e.g. -80 strength.
dB: NG, -60 dB: OK) - Reproduce the conditions when the line disconnection/transfer delay occurred (setup,
Confirm the presence or absence of insufficient radio field strength via the following presence or absence of obstructions)
procedures. - Identify factors that weaken the radio field strength (presence of obstructions,
changes in panel/AP positions, etc.): Countermeasures for the causes
<Past cases>
3.1 Confirming the radio field strength - Distance between the SE and AP is too far (15 m) → Move the SE-AP closer
together
- Use in an L-shaped room where the distance between the AP-SE cannot be seen
(1) Acquire the log, and open the NETWORK folder> FI.log. → Move the SE-AP closer together
When log is acquired with DR Maintenance Software: NETWORK folder> FI.log - Use things to cover metal members which shield the radio waves to the AP
When log is acquired with RU PC-TOOL: in NETWORK folder> NETWORK.CAB section, etc., and shield and absorb the radio waves
* When log is acquired via SLAT: → Remove obstructions in the AP section
FCR\DR-ID1200\SYSTEM\127.0.0.1\Log\NETWORK\FI.log
 When the radio field intensity at the time of error occurrence is
(2) Check the radio field intensity in the time zone (± 10 minutes) in which
the malfunction occurred higher than “-70” (when the number is smaller than 70)
[2018/03/06 13:07:57] 0054F5 W120102,-54,-95,93,94 Implement the procedures in patterns C2 and C3.
[2018/03/06 13:08:12] 005AD3 W120102,-54,-95,93,94
[2018/03/06 13:08:27] 0060B0 W120102,-55,-95,93,94
[2018/03/06 13:08:42] 006680 W120102,-54,-95,94,94
[2018/03/06 13:08:57] 006C5F W120102,-53,-95,94,94
[2018/03/06 13:09:12] 00723B W120102,-54,-95,93,94
[2018/03/06 13:09:27] 007818 W120102,-53,-95,94,94
[2018/03/06 13:09:42] 007DF6 W120102,-54,-95,93,94
[2018/03/06 13:09:57] 0083D3 W120102,-55,-95,93,94
How to read
[Date and time] Date and time serial value (6 digits) panel ID, received radio
intensity (dBm) of the panel, noise level (dBm)
(3) If an error occurs even if the insufficient radio field intensity is
Compare the radio wave intensity before the line disconnection with the radio
improved, implement the pattern C2 and C3 procedures.
wave intensity at the time of the disconnection, and proceed to the next “ Action
Procedure”.
018-241-05E
AppxMT5-4
4. For Pattern C2 (SE Board) (3) Check the times when the line disconnections occurred via the MC_
WLAN_COM.LOG in the TRACE folder.
 Specifying the panels where the communications disconnections Check whether all of the connected SEs were disconnected, or whether only
specified SEs were disconnected. The following display examples are for when one
occur SE is installed.
Check the log via the following procedures, and check the SE’s communications Res Responder Destination Rq
status. IP address IP address
If multiple SEs are being used, it can be determined from the log whether a specific
SE is disconnecting, or if all of the SEs are disconnecting.
If there is an environment whereas the problems are reproduced, they can be also
checked via Ping.
Confirm the wireless
connection with
the SE via Ping
Does not connect with Does not connect with

all of the multiple SEs the specified SEs
SE4 is not
responding
Perform pattern C3 Perform procedure (4)
POCX01020E011E.ai
(1) Confirm the IP addresses for the SE and MP which are connected via Rq POCX01020E009E.ai
the MUTL. In the above examples, SeStatNt and Rs information from 192.168.0.43 are cut
off, and communications are interrupted. If multiple SEs are connected, check
(2) Check the SE panel line disconnection times via the MC error log whether it is occurring to all of the SEs or to a specific SE.
(ERRORB.LOG). - SeStatNt: State of the information periodically being transmitted from the SE to
[12211] 2016/04/20 13:12:01 0043A1 @W120001 the MC
[11240] 2016/04/20 13:12:53 0057CE @COM SE[W920001] - RMLRegRq: Information requests from MC to SE
- BatREMRq: Information requests from MC to SE
- RMLRegRs: Response (response) in relation to Request (request)
- BatREMRs: Response (response) in relation to Request (request)
Based upon the isolation results, implement the following countermeasures.
- For a specific SE only when the line is disconnected: AP malfunction is unlikely.
Perform procedure (4).
- When all of the multiple SEs have disconnected lines: radio interference due to
an AP malfunction or environmental cause can be inferred. Perform pattern C3.
- When only one SE is installed: Perform procedure (4) and pattern C3.
018-241-05E
AppxMT5-5
(4) Perform the following flows for specific SEs.
Check the SE's POWER
/(' FKHFNZKHWKHU
VRIWZDUHLVUXQQLQJ
POWER LED has gone out LED ON POWER LED goes

VRIWZDUHLVQRWUXQQLQJ 21ĺ2))ĺ21 JRHVRXW
at about 45-second cycles)
VRIWZDUHLVQRWDFWLYDWHG
POW board malfunction Confirm that the RMV board malfunction

SE's LINK LED is lit
2)) ON
7KH0&VWDUWVXSWZLFH &RQILUPZKHWKHU
/,1./('OLJKWVXSYLD YHUVLRQFDQEH
ZLUHG DFTXLUHGYLD087/
ĺ:LUHOHVVPRGXOH
1*HYHQZLWKZLUHG NO YES
ĺRMV board
&RQILUPZKHWKHUDQHUURU
RMV board malfunction FRGH³ QRGHWDLOHG
code)” is occurring
Error occurred
Wireless module or
RMV board malfunction
POCX01020E010E.ai
018-241-05E
AppxMT5-6
5. For Pattern C3 (Check for AP Anomalies,  Recommended wireless LAN settings
Radio Wave Interference) When an SE and a FUJIFILM-made AP are placed on a table against a wall, since
that caused a difference in the radio reception strength between the two antennas
(1) Check whether the AP’s LED display is normal. inside the FUJIFILM-made AP, the wireless LAN was disconnected. Since this pertains
to situations whereas a difference in radio wave reception strength is produced
$ {Spec: 8._Other Specifications} between the antennas, and even if only a part of the SE is covered over by part of a
If the AP LED is not normal, plug in and unplug the power cable. (May improve human body, gel mat, etc. that is blocking the radio waves, it is recommended that the
physical contact faults, contact faults due to oxide film) following settings be set.
→ If there is no improvement via plugging in and unplugging the power cable, (1) When the “WLAN AUTO RATE” is “CONSTANT” with the MUTL, or
regardless of the AP being powered up, but the LED does not light up, then the Web Maintenance Software wireless settings, set it to “VARIABLE”.
AP is malfunctioning.
REFERENCES
With the DR-XD 1000, “VARIABLE” is the default setting.
(2) Restart the MC, and insert the SE into the DR slot.
REFERENCES
With the conventional wireless settings, due to the fixed communications speeds,
there were restrictions that needed the radio wave intensity to be input to the same
degree for multiple antennas. These restrictions can be avoided by setting the “WLAN
AUTO RATE” from “CONSTANT” to “VARIABLE”.
Wireless settings Communication Communication
WLAN AUTO RATE speed conditions
The same degree of radio field intensity
CONSTANT Fixed to high-speed
signal input to all of the antennas
Variable according to the
VARIABLE Limitless
environment
Since the communications are at conventional speeds if the communications
environment is good, there is no decrease in the perceived communications speed
caused by this countermeasure. However, if the communications environment is
so bad that wireless communications are not feasible (radio strength is weak, radio
interference, etc.), the communications environment will not be improved even if this
countermeasure is implemented.
018-241-05E
AppxMT5-7
(3) When line disconnections occur at specific locations, radio
interference can be considered, so implement the following.
- Confirm that no other wireless devices are using the same channel, and
consult with the installation site about resetting them to an available channel.
- Check that DFS operations are not occurring.
$ {MT:6._“● Checking DFS operation” in “Troubleshooting from FUJIFILM-made
AP Log”}
In addition, since there are the following past cases with interference due to radio
wave generating devices, refer to them to resolve them.
- Affected due to microwave therapy devices → Use away from microwave
treatment devices
- Affected due to mobile phone suppression devices → Use away from mobile
phone suppression devices
(4) If the error is not repaired even if the radio interference is dealt with,
then replace the AP.
018-241-05E
AppxMT5-8
BLANK PAGE
018-241-05E
AppxMT6-1
Appendix 6. Windows OS Recovery (2) Select [Update & Security].
Procedures Using a System (3) Select [Recovery] in the field on the left.
Repair Disc
If Windows does not normally start up due to SSD corruption, etc. this describes the
startup restoration procedures for diagnosing and correcting whether there might be
problems which are interfering with the starting up. The startup restoration functions
can restore certain startup problems, such as missing or corrupted system files, etc.
 For Windows 10
(1) Select [Settings] from [Start] menu.
POCX01020F007J.ai
(4) Select [Restart now] from [Advanced setup].
POCX01020F006J.ai
POCX01020F008J.ai
018-241-07E
AppxMT6-2
 Startup Repair  For Windows 7
(1) In the [Choose an option] window, select [Troubleshoot]. (1) Insert the system repair disk in the DVD drive, and restart the
computer.
(2) Select [Advanced options].
(2) Press the <F2> key when starting up.
(3) In the [Advanced options] window, select [Startup Repair].
Bios window appears.
(4) In the [Startup Repair] window, select the account (Administrator) to (3) Select the DVD drive with “Save & Exit”, and press the <Enter> key.
implement.
(5) Enter the password (fcr-iip) and select [continue].

Startup repair starts
 NOTE 
If this procedure does not restore the Windows OS, it is necessary to restore from
backup.
POCX01020F001J.ai
(4) When “Press any key to boot from CD or DVD” is displayed,

immediately press any key.
After “Windows is loading files” has been displayed for a little while, a dialog appears
(5) Select “US”, and click [Next].
POCX01020F002J.ai
 NOTE 
If the mouse and keyboard are not recognized, turn the power OFF and restart it.
018-241-07E
AppxMT6-3
(6) Select “Use recovery tools that can help fix problems starting (8) When the completion window is displayed, click [Finish] and restart
Windows”, and click [Next]. the PC.
POCX01020F003J.ai
REFERENCES
For overseas, the confirmation window of the administrator password may
appear. POCX01020F005J.ai
(7) Select “Startup Repair”, and execute it. (9) Check that the OS is started up.
 NOTE 
Recovering from the Recovery Media is needed when the Windows OS does not
recover even if these procedures are implemented.
POCX01020F004J.ai
Startup repair started
018-241-07E
AppxMT6-4
BLANK PAGE
018-241-05E
AppxMT7-1
Appendix 7. How to Handle a 1-LAN (3) Click [Change adapter settings].
#1 Click: [Change adapter settings]
Port Which Was Set for a #1
2-LAN Port Configuration

This describes the procedures for returning to 2-LAN port settings when a 1-LAN port
configuration has been erroneously set for a 2-LAN port configuration.
 Deleting the Eth1 name

Delete the Eth1 name from the RDNIS driver.
(1) Click [Control Panel] from [Start] menu. 600_700239.ai
The All Control Panel Items window opens. The Network Connections window opens.
#1 Click: [Start] menu
#2 Click: [Control Panel] (4) Right-click “Eth1”, change the name to “Eth99”, and set the IP address
#2 to “Automatic”.
#1 600_700237.ai
The “All Control Panel Items” window opens.
(2) Click [Network and Sharing Center].

The Network and Sharing Center window opens.
018-241-05E
AppxMT7-2
 Deleting the RNDIS driver  Setting the Eth1
Delete the FUJIFILM-made AP RNDIS driver. Set the IP address and subnet mask as Eth1 to the LAN port which is connected to
the GNC board.
(1) Click [Control Panel] from [Start] menu.
The All Control Panel Items window opens. (1) Click [Control Panel] from [Start] menu.
#1 Click: [Start] menu The All Control Panel Items window opens.
#2 Click: [Control Panel] #1 Click: [Start] menu
#2
#2 Click: [Control Panel]
#2
#1 600_700237.ai
#1 600_700237.ai

(2) Click [Device Manager].
The “Device Manager” window opens.
The “Network and Sharing Center” window opens.
(3) Right-click “RNDIS driver (Remote NDIS6 basedDevices)” of the
network adapter, and select “Delete”. (3) Click [Change adapter settings].
#1
600_700239.ai
The “Network Connections” window opens.
018-241-07E
AppxMT7-3
(4) Right-click [Intel (R) I210 Gigabit network Connection # 2] and select (15) Select “Use the following IP address” and make the following settings.
“Rename”. I. Enter the IP address. (ex. : 192.168.0.10)
II. Enter the Subnet mask. (ex. : 255.255.255.0)
(5) Change the name to “Eth0”.
(6) Select “Eth0” and select “Properties”.

The “Eth0 Properties” window opens.
(7) Select “Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)” and click [Properties]. I.

The “Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties” window opens. II.
(8) Select “Use the following IP address” and appropriately change the IP 600_712033a.ai
address to match that of the network inside the hospital.

(ex.) IP address: 172.16.1.20 (16) Click [OK].
Subnet mask: 255.255.0.0
The system returns to the “Eth0 Properties” window.
(9) Click [OK]. (17) Click [Close].

The system returns to the “Network Connections” window.
(10) Click [Close]. (18) Confirm communication by PING.

Enter “ping 192.168.0.20, 192.168.0.25, 192.168.0.30/40” and confirm that
communication with MP, AP and SE is normal, respectively.
(11) Right-click the LAN port (Intel (R) Ethernet Connection I218-LM) which
is connected to the GNC board, and select “Rename”. (19) Shut down the PC.
(12) Change the name to “Eth1”. (20) Turn ON the key switch and start the PC.

(14) Select “Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)” and click [Properties].

The “Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties” window opens.
018-241-07E
AppxMT7-4
(21) Confirm that if the CSL is started up that 10753 error or 10224 error is
not displayed.
 NOTE 
If Eth1 cannot be set even after performing these procedures, delete the FUJIFILM-
made AP RNDIS driver via the following procedures, then set Eth1.
1. Start the Command prompt and execute the following commands. (Δ shows a
single-byte space)
set Δ devmgr_show_nonpresent_devices=1
Start Δ DEVMGMT.MSC
600_300187.ai

2. Select “Show hidden devices” from [View] menu.
600_300188.ai
3. Right-click the old network adapter (semi-transparent icon state) and select
“Uninstall”.
When deletion of the old network adapter is completed, connect the PC-GNC board
with the LAN cable and set Eth1.
018-241-07E
AppxMT8-1
Appendix 8. Resolution Methods for  For FUJIFILM-made AP Firmware V1.7 or Later
When the FUJIFILM-made

If the FUJIFILM-made AP is the following machine or later, then firmware V1.7 or
higher is installed.
AP Setting Screen Cannot Abbreviated product name

DR-XD 1000 MBL A #
Shipment machine
***618
Be Accessed (For Japan)
DR-XD 1000 AP E (AP kit for overseas) ***0444
With this version, https which has been strengthened more than conventional http is
 For Windows 10 used as a communications protocol when accessing the AP setting screen.
In order for the FUJIFILM-made AP to do RNDIS communications in Windows 10 Since the setting screen may not be accessible depending on the PC settings, the
environments, the FUJIFILM-made AP firmware needs to be V1.5 or later. countermeasures are explained.
If the FUJIFILM-made AP is the following machine or later, then firmware V1.5 or later REFERENCE
is installed.
Abbreviated product name Shipment machine
The setting screen’s URL has been changed from http://192.168.0.25 to https:
//192.168.0.25 by this firmware update, but if Internet Explorer is being used, if
DR-XD 1000 MBL A # ***0221 192.168.0.25 is entered in the URL field, Internet Explorer will automatically determine
(For Japan) whether the communications protocol is http or https.
DR-XD 1000 AP E (AP kit for overseas) ***0087 Therefore, http: //, or https: // do not need to be entered when accessing the setting
screen.
If the subject machine is a previous one, update the firmware then install the RNDIS
driver.
$ {MC: Appendix18._Updating to FUJIFILM-made AP Windows 10 Compatible Firmware (1) If the following screen appears, select “Proceed viewing this website
(V1.5)} (not recommended)”.
$ {MC: Appendix15._Installing the RNDIS Driver in Windows 10 Environment}
In addition, with newly configured machines (# *** 0171), the FUJIFILM-made AP does
not perform RNDIS communications with the PC. Therefore, the firmware does not
need to be updated, nor do the RNDIS drivers need to be installed.
POCX01030K029J.ai
(2) If it cannot be connected, enable TLS 1.0 by following the steps below.
The Network and Sharing Center window opens.
018-241-07E
AppxMT8-2
 Activating TLS 1.0  When the AP’s IP address is unknown
(1) Click [Tools] - [Internet Options] in Internet Explorer. Reset the FUJIFILM-made AP.
$ {IN: Appendix14._Initializing the FUJIFILM-made AP}
(2) Click [Internet Options] - [Advanced Settings] tab.
(3) In [Security], put a checkmark in [Use TLS 1.0].
(4) Click [OK].
1200_200012.ai
(5) Restart Internet Explorer.
018-241-07E
AppxMT8-3
BLANK PAGE
018-241-07E
AppxMT8-4
BLANK PAGE
018-241-07E
Control Sheet
2 to 9, 12, 15, 18, 19, 22, 23, 28 to 33,
11.30.2016 02 Revision (FM9462) 44 to 46, 53 to 65, 71, 77 to 79, 83,
85, 88 to 93, 100, AppxMC 1-1 to 1-4
20, 21, 24 to 27, 34 to 43, 47 to 52, 66

11.30.2016 02 Changes in pagination (FM9462) to 70, 72 to 76, 80 to 82, 84, 86, 87,
94 to 99, 101 to 103
1 to 142, 147 to 150, AppxMC 1-1 to 1-4,
05.31.2017 03 Revision (FM9471)
AppxMC 2-1 to 2-8, AppxMC 3-1 to 3-4
05.31.2017 03 Changes in pagination (FM9471) 143 to 146, 151
1 to 5, 7 to 218, 225, AppxMC 2-4, 2-5,
AppxMC 4-1 to 4-4, AppxMC 5-1 to 5-24,
11.30.2017 04 Revision for MC V16.2 (FM9486) AppxMC 6-1 to 6-4, AppxMC 7-1 to 7-4,
AppxMC 8-1 to 8-4, AppxMC 9-1 to 9-8,
AppxMC 10-1 to 10-16
6, 219 to 224, 226, 227,
11.30.2017 04 Changes in pagination (FM9486)
AppxMC 2-6 to 2-8
Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of

16, 17, 24, 28, 32, 37, 45, 57, 61, 64,
68 to 72, 80, 81, 83, 84, 88, 89,
98 to 101, 112 to 115, 117, 119, 126,
130, 136, 141, 152 to 156, 174, 180,
Parts (MC) 10.31.2018 05 Revision for MC V16.6 (FM9528)

182, 183, 187, 188, 190, 194, 195,
199, 202, 203, 205, 210 to 212, 214,
217, 219 to 221, 225, 227 to 247,
AppxMC 1-1, AppxMC 2-1 to 2-3,
AppxMC 4-1, AppxMC 5-8, 5-11,
AppxMC 6-1, AppxMC 8-1,
15, 18 to 23, 25 to 27, 29 to 31,
33 to 36, 38 to 44, 46 to 56, 58 to 60,
62, 63, 65 to 67, 73 to 79, 82, 85 to 87,
90 to 97, 102 to 111, 116, 118,
120 to 125, 127 to 129, 131 to 135,
10.31.2018 05 Changes in pagination (FM9528) 137 to 140, 142 to 151, 157 to 173,
175 to 179, 181, 184 to 186, 189,
191 to 193, 196 to 198, 200, 201, 204,
206 to 209, 213, 215, 216, 218,
222 to 224, 226, 248 to 255,
AppxMC 10-32
05.31.2019 06 Revision for U.S. and Brazil (FM9565) 183 to 185, 192, 196, 198, 207, 252
186 to 191, 193 to 195, 197,
199 to 206, 208 to 251, 253 to 259
7, 15, 37, 183 to 185, 192, 196, 198,
201, 218, 254, AppxMC 1-2,
AppxMC 2-1 to 2-3, AppxMC 5-1,
AppxMC 11-7, 11-8,
AppxMC 12-1 to 12-16,
09.30.2019 07 Revision for MC V17.1 (FM9587) AppxMC 13-1 to 13-12,
AppxMC 14-1 to 14-16,
AppxMC 15-1 to 15-4,
186 to 191, 193 to 195, 197,
09.30.2019 07 Changes in pagination (FM9587) 199 to 200, 202 to 217, 219 to 253,
255 to 259
172, 175 to 178, AppxMC 5-19, 5-23,
AppxMC 13-2, 13-3, 13-5, 13-6, 13-9,
02.29.2020 08 Revision for CSL V13.0 (FM9630)
018-241-08E
MC-1
1. Precautions for  INSTRUCTIONS 
- The yellow-painted screws require adjustments when components are reinstalled.
Check, Replacement, and Adjustment When reinstalling the components, follow the check/adjustment procedures.
- Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power cable and
- In this volume, descriptions are omitted regarding components that do not require additional protective ground wire connections and securing the parts with retaining
special attention or adjustment during their removal/reinstallation. For removal screws. To maintain safety, ensure that the parts and retaining screws removed
procedures for such components, refer to the Service Parts List Volume. for servicing purposes are restored to states existing upon installation. After the
- When performing check/replacement/adjustment procedures on the machine, the parts and retaining screws are restored to the above-mentioned states, follow the
following precautions should be observed. procedures set forth in this Service Manual to verify that the retaining screws are
securely tightened to properly secure the parts.
WARNINGS - Do not leave an object which might cause damage on the SE (Flat Panel Sensor)
(such as a tool, a screw or a removed component). If the SE gets scratched,
 To avoid electric shock hazards, switch OFF the device’s main breaker, and abnormalities in image might result.
remove the AC cable, then perform the work. - Do not drop the SE nor apply a load larger than specified onto the exposure plane.
 Wear safety shoes for operation. $ {Operation Manual: Precautions}
 NOTE 
WARNING/CAUTION
Photos used for describing the procedures or the like in the manual may sometimes
Observe the warnings and cautions described in the "Safety Precautions". appear to be different from the actual machine.
REFERENCE
CAUTIONS The following characters are used as abbreviations to express colors of cables or the
- When servicing a board, be sure to wear a wristband to ground your body. like.
If your body is not grounded, static buildup on your body may damage Abbreviation Color Abbreviation Color
electronic components on the board. RED Red ORN Orange
- When servicing a board, do not apply force to the center of the board or bend WHT White GRY Gray
the board while holding both sides of the board. If the board is bent or force BLK Black YEL Yellow
is applied to its center, a crack may occur on a soldered connection, resulting GRN Green BLU Blue
in a failure in its connection. BRN Brown PUR Purple
- When servicing a board, do not touch connector pins mounted on the board Y/G Spiral of yellow and green
with bare hands.
- Never remove the red-painted screws.
018-241-04E
DR-XD 1000 Service Manual MC-1
MC-2
2. Cart Unit (2) Remove the front cover.
NOTE
The front cover is secured by velcro tape (dual lock). Be careful when removing
2.1 Front Cover it.
Screws
 #1 Remove the screws.
#2 Remove the front cover.
Symbol in the
Parts name Parts code Numbers
figure
TP Screw (3x12) TP3x12 308S0419 2
Removal procedures

NOTE
In order to prevent the screw covers and screws from falling, cover over the DR slot
opening with tape, etc.
(1) Remove the screw covers.

#1 Remove the screw covers (tab position vertical).
#2 Remove the screw covers (tab position horizontal).
018-241-04E
MC-3
Reinstallation procedures

Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
NOTE
There are velcro tapes (dual locks) on the front cover. Press and hold the front cover
when reinstalling it.
Dual lock
POCX010302122J.ai
The front cover latches onto the tabs on the top of the cover and secures it as per the
encircled section of the top cover in the following photo.
- The top of the front cover is secured by the tabs.
- After installing, make sure that the top section of the cover does not come off.
POCX010302160.ai
018-241-04E
MC-4
2.2 Rear Cover Removal procedures

NOTE
Do not detach the rear cover cushion except when replacing it. A new double-sided tape
is required for installing the rear cover cushion.
In addition, the replacement procedures for the rear cover pads are as per the
following.
$ {MC:2.3_Rear Cover Cushion}
(1) Spread the arm.

#1 Spread the arm.
Screws

Symbol in the
figure (2) Remove the screw covers.
TP Screw (3x6) [1] TP3x6 [1] 308S0414 2 #1 Remove the screw covers (tab position horizontal).
018-241-04E
MC-5
(3) Remove the rear cover. Reinstallation procedures

#2 Remove the rear cover.
NOTE
Since there are 8 places where there are tabs on both the right and left sides, install
the rear cover while pressing in the tabs.
NOTE POCX010302100J.ai
When detaching the rear cover, since there are tabs on the top side of the cover, after
lifting the cover up a little (1), press on both the right and left sides (2), then detach the
side of the rear cover.
(2) (2)
(1)
POCX010302099J.ai
018-241-04E
MC-6
2.3 Rear Cover Cushion Reinstallation procedures

Removal procedures
 NOTE
(1) Remove the rear cover cushion. Prepare a new double-sided tape when reinstalling the rear cover cushion.
#1 Remove the rear cover cushion.
NOTE
The rear cover pads are applied in the positions outlined in red in the photo with
double-sided tape. Be careful when removing them.
POCX010302098J.ai
018-241-04E
MC-7
2.4 Arm Front Cover (2) Remove arm front cover.
REFERENCES
INSTRUCTION
No need to remove the apron hanger if it has been attached.
For the US, the label must be reapplied when this cover is replaced. Refer to the
following about precautions when placing orders and reapplying.
$ {MC: Appendix 17._Replacing the Label}
Screws

Parts name Symbol in the figure Parts code Numbers
TP Screw (3x6) [1] TP3x6 [1] 308S0414 1
Removal procedures

(1) Remove the screw cover.
POCX010302136J.ai
#1 Move the operation panel assembly away.
#2 Remove the screw cover (tab position horizontal).
#2 Remove the arm cap on the right side of arm.
#3 Remove the front cover of arm.
#2
#3
#1
TP3x6 [1]
POC010302012.ai
018-241-07E
MC-8
NOTE - Tabs on the cover
Since the tabs are configured to be inserted into the underside, when removing
The arm cap and the arm front cover are fixed with the velcro tapes (dual locks).
the cover, face it towards the topside and remove it.
To detach the cap and cover, peel the portions around the velcro tapes (dual
locks) until the velcro tapes (dual locks) click. Face the cover upwards then
detach it according to the tabs.
POCX010707005J.ai
- Velcro tapes (Dual locks)
POCX010707007J.ai
POCX010707006-01J.ai
018-241-04E
MC-9

NOTE
There are velcro tapes (dual locks) on the arm front cover and arm cap. Press and
hold the front cover and arm cap when reinstalling them.
POCX010707006-01J.ai
018-241-04E
MC-10
2.5 Arm Rear Cover NOTE
The arm’s rear surface cover is secured by the velcro tapes (dual locks). When
Screws
 removing it, peel away the velcro tapes (dual locks) until they make a “Click”.
Then face them outward and remove the cover.
- Velcro tapes (Dual locks)
TP Screw (3x6) [1] TP3x6 [1] 308S0414 8
Removal procedures

(1) Remove arm front cover.
(2) Remove the arm rear cover.

#1 Spread the arm.
#3 Remove the arm rear cover.
POCX010707006-02J.ai
018-241-04E
MC-11

INSTRUCTION
When installing the arm rear cover and the arm front cover, install them from the lower
side of the arm. Then press the covers around the velcro tapes (dual locks) since the
velcro tapes (dual locks) are at the following positions.
POCX010707006-02J.ai
018-241-04E
MC-12
2.6 Right-side Cover (GNC Board Side) (2) Perform the following procedures before removing the right-side
cover.
#1 Rotate the arm to a position that will not block the top cover.
Screws

Parts name Symbol in the figure Parts code Numbers #3 Remove the screws.
TP Screw (3x6) [1] TP3x6 [1] 308S0414 7 REFERENCE
TP Screw (3x12) TP3x12 308S0419 8 Remove the screws, but the top cover itself does not need to be removed.
Removal procedures

018-241-04E
MC-13
(3) Remove the right-side cover. #5 Remove the screws.
#1 Remove the screw covers (tab position vertical). #6 Remove the screws.
#2 Remove the screw covers (tab position horizontal). #7 Remove the right-side cover.
#3 Loosen the screws on the inner side of the cover.
REFERENCE
If the screws in #3 are removed, the screws might drop into the DR slot. Loosen
the screws in #3 without removing them.
#4 Raise the top cover to move it up a little, then the screws on the right side of
the cover can be accessed.
#4
INSTRUCTION
When removing the right-side cover, pass the USB cover and the cables through
POCX010302137J.ai
the gap to remove the right-side cover.
Cover gap
POC010302052E.ai
018-241-04E
MC-14

INSTRUCTION
- When attaching the right side cover, attach the cushioning onto the TP3x12 (x4).
The orientation of the cushioning is as per the following.
POCX010302138J.ai
- When attaching the top cover, secure the TP3x6 (#2) while pressing on the top
cover at the top (#1).
Since the front cover latches on to and secures the top cover, if the top cover is not
pushed upward and not secured, the front cover cannot be attached.
#2 #2 #2
#1
POCX010302131J.ai
018-241-04E
MC-15
2.7 Left-side Cover (INV Board Side) Removal procedures

INSTRUCTION (1) Remove the following components.
The label must be reapplied when this cover is replaced. Refer to the following about $ {MC:2.1_Front Cover}
precautions when placing orders and reapplying. $ {MC:2.2_Rear Cover}
$ {MC: Appendix 17._Replacing the Label} $ {MC:2.4_Arm Front Cover}
(2) Perform the following procedures before removing the left-side cover.
Screws
 #2 Remove the screws on the rear side of the top cover.
#3 Remove the screws on the front side of the top cover.
REFERENCE
TP Screw (3x6) [1] TP3x6 [1] 308S0414 6
Remove the screws, but the top cover itself does not need to be removed.
TP Screw (3x12) TP3x12 308S0419 8
018-241-07E
MC-16
(3) Remove the left side cover. Reinstallation procedures

#1 Remove the screw covers (tab position horizontal).
INSTRUCTION
REFERENCE
- When attaching the left side cover, attach the cushioning onto the TP3x12 (x4). The
If the screws in #2 are removed, the screws might drop into the DR slot. Loosen
orientation of the cushioning is as per the following.
the screws in #2 without removing them.
#3 Raise the top cover to move it up a little, then the screws on the left side of
the cover can be accessed.
POCX010302138J.ai
#6 Remove the left side cover.
- When attaching the left side cover, since the main power switch and the left
DETAIL B side cover may interfere with each other, fasten the screws as per the following
sequence.
#3
OK NG
B
#3
#5
TP3x12 (x4) DETAIL A
A
#2
POCX010706003J.ai
TP3x12 (x2) # 1 Install the screws (TP 3 x 6) in the sequence of (A) → (B) in a position where the
breaker lever and the cover’s notch edge do not strike each other. The installation
#6 sequence for the other screws is not the same sequence.
(A) (B)
#1
#4
TP3x6 [1] (x3) POC010302008.ai
 NOTE 
The screws removed at #4 are also on the inner side of the switch cover. Be sure POCX010706004J.ai
to remove them.
018-241-05E
MC-17
# 2 After installing all of the above screws, there will be a gap between the breaker
lever and the cover as per the below, so check that in operating the lever up and
down that it operates smoothly, and that it does not catch onto the cover.
POCX010706005J.ai
- When attaching the top cover, secure the TP3x6 (#2) while pressing on the top
pushed upward and not secured, the front cover cannot be attached.
#2 #2 #2
#1
POCX010302131J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-18
2.8 USB Cover #3 Remove the connectors.
#4 Remove the ground wire.
Depending upon the PC-GNC connections configurations, some of the removal/
reinstallation procedures are different for the USB cover. Here the steps in common
are explained, and differences are included in the notes.
NOTE
Refer to the following in regard to differences in the PC-GNC connections configurations.
$ {MD:5._Changes in PC-GNC Connection Specifications}
Screws
 #3 #3
OPP1 CSL_PC
TP Screw (3x6) [1] TP3x6 [1] 308S0414 8
Bind V3x6 308S4780306 3
TP Screw (3x4) TP3x4 308S0665 1
#4
TP3x4
Removal procedures

POC010302065.ai
#5 Remove the cable wrapping from the CSL PC connector cable.

(2) Remove the operation panel connector cover.

#1 Remove the screws. #5
#2 Remove the connector cover. POCX010302170J.ai
#2
#1
V3x6 (x3)
POC010302064.ai
018-241-05E
MC-19
(3) Remove the shield plate. (5) Pull out the cable from the USB cover.
#1 Remove the screws. #1 Cut the banding bands (x3).
#1
POC010302056.ai
NOTE
When cutting the banding bands, cut the round parts as per the following.
(4) Remove the USB cover.

#2 Remove the USB cover.
POCX010302102J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-20
#2 Remove the connectors of the cable running through the USB cover from the #3 Pull out the cable from the USB cover.
GNC board.
#3
#2 CSL_PC
GNC16 #3
#2 OPP1
GNC20
#3
SW-P

#2
#3
SW-P
GNC16
#2
GNC18
POCX010302148J.ai
 NOTE  #3
GNC20
Remove the GNC18 connector just for the new configured machines (#xxx50172
or later).
#3
GNC18
POCX010302149J-1.ai
NOTE 
Pull out the GNC18 connector just for the new configured machines (#xxx50172
or later).
018-241-05E
MC-21
 Reinstallation procedures (2) Attach the operation panel side connectors.
#1 Pass the CSL PC connector cables through the cable wrapping.
(1) Pass the cable into the USB cover.
#1 Pass the cable into the USB cover.
#1
CSL_PC
#1 #1
OPP1 POCX010302170J-01.ai
#2 Attach the connectors.

#3 Fix the ground wire.
#1
SW-P
#1 #2 #2
GNC16 OPP1 CSL_PC
#3
TP3x4
#1 POC010302041.ai
GNC20
 NOTE 
When wiring the cables through, install them so that 2 ferrite positions do not
overlap.
#1
GNC18
POCX010302103J-1.ai
NOTE 
Pass through the GNC18 connector just for the new configured machines
(#xxx50172 or later). POCX010707008J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-22
(3) Attach the connectors of the GNC board. (4) Fix the cables.
#1 Attach the connectors. #1 Make a loop by passing the banding bands through the holes (2 places) on
the top of the main unit’s cable slot.
#2 Pass the banding bands through the 2 loops, and bind the 5 cables.
#3
#1
GNC16
#1
GNC20
#2
POCX010302150J.ai
 NOTE 
- When binding the cables, bind the hand switch cable on the left side, the 3 thin
cables in the center, and the thick cable on the right side.
#1 - Bind the hand switch cable in a place where there is protective tubing.
SW-P
It is not good to bind cables
together in places where
#1
there are not any protective tubes.
GNC18
POCX010302105E.ai
POCX010302148J-01.ai
 NOTE 
Attach the GNC18 connector just for the new configured machines (#xxx50172 or
later).
018-241-05E
MC-23
(5) Attach the USB cover. (6) Attach the shield plate.
#1 Attach the USB cover. #1 Attach the shield plate.
#2 Attach the screws. #2 Attach the screws.
#1
#2
TP3x6 [1] (x2)
POCX010302106J.ai
 NOTE 
Check that the USB cover cable position is as per the following. (7) Attach the connector cover of the operation panel.
- The hand switch cable on the left side #1 Attach the connector cover.
- The 3 thin cables in the center #2 Attach the screws.
- The thick cable on the right side
#1
#2
V3x6 (x3)
POCX010302101J-1.ai
(8) Attach the following components.

018-241-05E
MC-24
2.9 Operation Panel Assembly 2.9.1 For Older Configured Machines
Depending upon the PC-GNC connections configurations, some of the removal/
reinstallation procedures are different for the operation panel assemblies.
Removal procedures

In accordance with the PC-GNC connections configurations, the removal/reinstallation (1) Remove the FUJIFILM-made AP.
procedures are explained.
#1 Remove the cover.
NOTE #2 Remove the USB cable which are connected to the FUJIFILM-made AP’s
Refer to the following in regard to differences in the PC-GNC connections configurations. top section.
NOTE
#2
Remove the hexagon bolt fixing the arm when replacing the operation panel assembly.
#1
Q6x15
POC010302038.ai
(2) Remove the connector cover.

#2 Remove the connector cover.
POCX010302073J.ai
Screws

Parts name Size Symbol in the Parts code Numbers
figure
Monitor installation Hexagon 5 mm Q6x15 - (Attached screw) 1 #2
screw
#1
Bind V3x6 308S4780306 3 V3x6 (x3) POC010302039.ai
018-241-05E
MC-25
 NOTE  (4) Pull out the FUJIFILM-made AP cable from the cover.
Do not remove the four screws fixing the rear side of the operation panel when #1 Remove the LAN cable which is connected to the FUJIFILM-made AP’s
replacing the operation panel assembly. bottom section.
#2 Remove the FUJIFILM-made AP.
#3 Pull out the FUJIFILM-made AP LAN cable from the cover.
#2
#1#3
POCX010302074J.ai
LAN cable
(3) Remove the connector.
#1 Remove the connector. POC010302042.ai
#1 #1 #1
OPP1 FG CSL_PC
#1
POC010302041 ai
018-241-05E
MC-26
(5) Pull out the cable from the connector cover. (6) Cut off the banding band.
#1 Pull out the cable from the connector cover. #1 Cut off the banding band.
#1
#1 POC010302043.ai
POC010302044.ai
REFERENCE
(7) Remove the operation panel assembly.
It is best to pull out the cable as per the following sequence.
#1 Remove the hexagon bolt.
#2 Remove the operation panel assembly.
#4
USB cable
#2
#2
CSL_PC #1
Q6x15
#3
AP cable
POC010302045.ai
#1
OPP1  NOTE 
POCX010302151E.ai
The operation panel assembly should be pulled out in the upward direction while
keeping the arm vertical.
POC010302046.ai
018-241-05E
MC-27
 NOTE
- The operation panel assembly should be pulled in the downward direction
(1) Attach the operation panel assembly. while keeping the arm vertical.
#1 Attach the operation panel assembly.
#2 Attach the hexagon bolt.
#1
POC010302046-01.ai
#2 - When attaching the operation panel assembly, route the cables between the
Q6x15 monitor arm and arm section.
If the cables are wired through differently, when the operation panel assembly
rotates, the surplus length of the cables might be insufficient.
POC010302045-01.ai
POCX010302165J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-28
(2) Attach the cable to the connector cover. (3) Attach the connector.
#1 Attach the cable to the connector cover. #1 Attach the connector.
#1 #1 #1
OPP1 FG CSL_PC
#1 POC010302043.ai
REFERENCE
The depiction of the operation panel rear side wiring is as per the following. #1
USB
AP PC
POC010302041.ai
LAN
FC (4) Attach the FUJIFILM-made AP.
FC LAN USB #1 Attach the FUJIFILM-made AP cable to the cover.
#2 Attach the FUJIFILM-made AP.
CSL_PC OPP1
：External port #2
To GNC board
：Tab
FC ： Ferrite core
: Operation panel external
wiring LAN ： Connector
: Internal wiring
: Cables to be wired during installation POCX010302172E.ai #1
LAN cable
POCX010302159E.ai
018-241-05E
MC-29
(5) Attach the cover. (6) Attach the banding band.
#1 Attach the cover. #1 Attach the banding band.
#1
#1
#2
V3x6 (x3) POC010302039-01.ai POCX010302145J.ai
#3 Attach the FUJIFILM-made AP cover.

 NOTE 
Screw down the clamp on to the operation panel support post, then pass the
banding band through.
#3
POC010302038-01.ai
018-241-05E
MC-30
#2 Bundle the cables, and secure them with a banding band. 2.9.2 For New Configured Machines
Removal procedures

(1) Remove the FUJIFILM-made AP.
#2 Remove the USB cable which are connected to the FUJIFILM-made AP’s
#2 top section.
#2
#1
POCX010302158.ai
 NOTE 
POCX010302152J.ai
When attaching the cables on to the operation panel support post, let the 3
cables have excess length as per the following, then fasten them with 2 banding (2) Remove the connector cover.
bands.
#2
#1
POCX010302146J.ai
V3x6 (x3) POCX010302153J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-31
 NOTE  (4) Pull out the FUJIFILM-made AP cable from the cover.
Do not remove the four screws fixing the rear side of the operation panel when #1 Remove the LAN cable which is connected to the FUJIFILM-made AP’s
replacing the operation panel assembly. bottom section.
#3 Pull out the FUJIFILM-made AP LAN cable from the cover.
#2
POCX010302154J.ai

#1#3
#1 Remove the connector.
LAN cable
#1 Remove the LAN cable.
POC010302042.ai
(5) Pull out the cable from the connector cover.

#1 Pull out the cable from the connector cover.
#1 #1 #1
OPP1 FG CSL_PC
#1
#1
POCX010302156J.ai
#2
LAN cable (Hospital)
#2
LAN cable (GNC)
POCX010302155E.ai
018-241-05E
MC-32
REFERENCE (6) Remove the LAN cable.
- It is best to pull out the cable as per the following sequence. #1 Remove the LAN cable (hospital) from the relay LAN connector of the
connector cover.
#1
#4
OPP1
USB cable
#3
AP cable
#5
LAN cable
(GNC)
#2
CSL_PC #1
POCX010302162J.ai
POCX010302157E.ai
- The depiction of the operation panel rear side wiring is as per the following. (7) Cut off the banding band.
Use the LAN relay connector LAN port for connecting with the in-hospital LAN.
#1 Cut off the banding band.
USB
AP PC
LAN
FC #1
FC LAN LAN USB
LAN relay
connector
CSL_PC OPP1
FC
FC
POC010302044.ai
：Operation panel external ：External port

wiring ：Tab
: Internal wiring To GNC board FC ：Ferrite core
: Cables to be wired during installation LAN ： Connector
POCX010302171J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-33
(8) Remove the operation panel assembly. Reinstallation procedures

#1 Remove the hexagon bolt.
#2 Remove the operation panel assembly. (1) Attach the operation panel assembly.
#1 Attach the operation panel assembly.
#2 Attach the hexagon bolt.
#2
#1
#1
Q6x15
#2
POC010302045.ai
Q6x15
 NOTE 
The operation panel assembly should be pulled out in the upward direction while
keeping the arm vertical. POC010302045-01.ai
POC010302046.ai
018-241-05E
MC-34
NOTE (2) Attach the cable to the connector cover.
- The operation panel assembly should be pulled in the downward direction #1 Attach the cable to the connector cover.
while keeping the arm vertical.
#1
POC010302046-01.ai
POCX010302156J.ai
- When attaching the operation panel assembly, route the cables between the
monitor arm and arm section. (3) Attach the connector.
If the cables are wired through differently, when the operation panel assembly #1 Attach the connector.
rotates, the surplus length of the cables might be insufficient. #2 Attach the LAN cable.
#1 #1 #1
OPP1 FG CSL_PC
#1
POCX010302165J.ai
#2
LAN cable (Hospital)
#2
LAN cable (GNC)
POCX010302155E.ai
018-241-05E
MC-35
NOTE (4) Attach the LAN cable.
- Attach the LAN cable (GNC) ferrite core in positions that are 40 mm from the #1 Attach the LAN cable (hospital) from the relay LAN connector of the
ends as per the following. connector cover.
40 mm
#1
POCX010302143J.ai
- Attach the LAN cable (hospital) ferrite core in positions that are 60 mm from
the ends as per the following. POCX010302163J.ai
(5) Attach the FUJIFILM-made AP.

#1 Attach the FUJIFILM-made AP cable to the cover.
#2
60 mm
POCX010302144J.ai
#1
- Clip the LAN cable (hospital) and FUJIFILM-made AP cable on to the operation LAN cable
panel’s side tab.
POCX010302159E.ai
POCX010302147J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-36
(6) Attach the cover. #2 Bundle the cables, and secure them with a banding band.
#1 Attach the connector cover.
#2
#3
#1
POCX010302158.ai
#2
V3x6 (x3)  NOTE 
POCX010302153J-01.ai
When attaching the cables on to the operation panel support post, let the 3
(7) Attach the banding band. cables have excess length as per the following, then fasten them with 2 banding
#1 Attach the banding band. bands.
#1
POCX010302146J.ai
POCX010302145J.ai
 NOTE 
Screw down the clamp on to the operation panel support post, then pass the
banding band through.
018-241-05E
MC-37
2.10 Top Cover Reinstallation procedures
INSTRUCTION
INSTRUCTION
For the US and the other overseas, the label must be reapplied when this cover is
replaced. Refer to the following about precautions when placing orders and reapplying. when attaching the top cover, secure the TP3x6 (#2) while pressing on the top cover
$ {MC: Appendix 17._Replacing the Label} at the top (#1).
pushed upward and not secured, the front cover cannot be secured.
Screws

TP Screw (3x6) [1] TP3x6 [1] 308S0414 3
TP Screw (3x12) TP3x12 308S0419 2
Removal procedures

(1) Remove the following components. #2 #2 #2
#1
$ {MC:2.9_Operation Panel Assembly}
(2) Remove the top cover.

#3 Remove the top cover.
POCX010302131J.ai
018-241-07E
MC-38
2.11 DR Slot Assembly Front Cover Reinstallation procedures

Screws
 NOTE
Parts name Symbol in the figure Parts code Numbers There are 3 places where there are velcro tapes (dual locks) on the DR slot assembly
front surface cover. Press against them when attaching it.
TP Screw (3x12) TP3x12 308S0419 2
Removal procedures
REFERENCES
When detaching the DR slot assembly front surface cover, the cart cover does not
need to be removed.
(1) Remove the DR slot assembly front cover.

 NOTE 
The DR slot assembly front surface cover is secured via the velcro tapes (dual
locks). Be careful when detaching it.
#1 Remove the screw covers.

#3 Remove the DR slot assembly front cover.
018-241-05E
MC-39
2.12 DR Slot Assembly Right-side Cover 2.13 DR Slot Assembly Left-side Cover
Screws
 Screws

Parts name Symbol in the figure Parts code Numbers Parts name Symbol in the figure Parts code Numbers
TP Screw (3x6) [1] TP3x6 [1] 308S0414 2 TP Screw (3x6) [1] TP3x6 [1] 308S0414 2
Removal procedures Removal procedures

(1) Remove the following components. (1) Remove the following components.
$ {MC:2.1_Front Cover} $ {MC:2.1_Front Cover}
$ {MC:2.2_Rear Cover} $ {MC:2.2_Rear Cover}
$ {MC:2.4_Arm Front Cover} $ {MC:2.4_Arm Front Cover}
$ {MC:2.6_Right-side Cover (GNC Board Side)} $ {MC:2.7_Left-side Cover (INV Board Side)}
$ {MC:2.11_DR Slot Assembly Front Cover} $ {MC:2.11_DR Slot Assembly Front Cover}
(2) Remove the DR slot assembly right-side cover. (2) Remove the DR slot assembly left-side cover.
#1 Remove the screws. #1 Remove the screws.
#2 Remove the DR slot assembly right-side cover. #2 Remove the DR slot assembly left-side cover.
Reinstallation procedures Reinstallation procedures


Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
018-241-05E
MC-40
2.14 DR Slot Assembly (2) Remove the cable.
#1 Remove the connector (DSC-P: bottom side).
Screws
  NOTE 
Parts name Symbol in the figure Parts code Numbers Since the narrow part of the cable for the relay connector (DSC-P: bottom side) is
easy to break, remove it holding the red cables side part.
TP Screw (3x6) [1] TP3x6 [1] 308S0414 4
TP Screw (4x8) TP4x8 308S0424 4
#2 Release the clamp.
Removal procedures

#1
DSC-P
#2
POC010302047.ai
(3) Remove the bracket and extension coil spring.
CAUTIONS
When removing the extension spring, exercise caution to prevent the docking
stand from collapsing toward the front.

#2 Remove the bracket.
#3 Remove the extension coil spring.
#2 #2
#3
#1 #1
TP4x8 (x2) TP4x8 (x2)
POC010302048.ai
018-241-05E
MC-41
(4) Remove the DR slot assembly. Reinstallation procedures

#3 Remove the DR slot assembly. NOTE
- The attachment orientation of the bracket which was removed in step (4) is as per
the following.
#2
POCX010302140J.ai
- When attaching the connectors which were detached in step (2), attach them so that
the harness colors for the top and bottom connectors match.
#1
DSC-P
#2
POC010302047.ai
018-241-05E
MC-42
 Check/Adjustment Procedures (2) Looseness the screw.
 NOTE 
 Adjusting the DR slot damper gear
Do not securely tighten the screw such that the DR slot damper can rotate a little
When replacing the DR slot damper, adjust the engagement of the damper.
around the screw hole.
(1) Temporarily tighten the screw into the upper screw hole, and move the
DR slot in the direction of the arrow until the tip of the screw hits the
mechanical stopper plate.
 NOTE 
Implement with the bracket removed which is secured via TP4x8.
#1
TP3x6 [1]
POCX010302076J.ai
(3) Check that the center of the damper is roughly aligned with the
scratch line, and then press the tooth top of the damper lightly against
#1 the gear bracket in the direction indicated.
TP4x8
POCX010302075J.ai
#1
POCX010302077J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-43
(4) Holding the status of step 3, securely tighten the screw. (7) Detach the TP4 x8 which were provisionally tightened in step 1, attach
the bracket and secure it via TP4 x8 (x2).
#1 #2 Attach the bracket.
TP3x6 [1] #3 Attach the screws.
POCX010302078J.ai
(5) Securely tighten the screw fixed temporarily in step 2.

#1
#2 TP4x8
#3
TP4x8 (x2)
POCX010302141J.ai
 Check item
- Confirm energization to the SE
#1 Pull out the SE battery, and connect the SE to the DR slot, then the SE can be starts
TP3x6 [1] up.
POCX010302079J.ai
- Confirm the wired communications with the SE
Start up the system, and connect the SE to the DR slot, then the SE icon will be
(6) Swing the DR slot assembly and check that the engagement of the displayed in the wired connection state on the CSL panel status display screen.
gears is smooth.
 NOTE 
If there is too much gap when swinging, the tooth tip of the damper may have
excessively come in contact with the tooth bottom of the plate gear. In this case,
adjust the engagement again.
018-241-05E
MC-44
2.15 DR Slot Frame (2) Remove the DR slot frame.
Screws
 #2 Remove the DR slot frame.

TP Screw (3x6) [1] TP3x6 [1] 308S0414 5
Removal procedures


Check/Adjustment Procedures

 Check item
Pull out the SE battery, and connect the SE to the DR slot, then the SE can be starts
up.
displayed in the wired connection state on the CSL panel status display screen.
018-241-05E
MC-45
2.16 Cart Handle (2) Remove the cart handle.
Screws
 #2 Remove the handle cover.
Symbol in the #4 Remove the screws.
Parts name Size Parts code Numbers
figure
Special Low Head
Special Low
Hexagon Socket 304S0054 8
head 6x12
Screw
Hexagon Socket
Hexagon 3 mm Q4x8 304S3180408 8
Screw (Q4x8)
Removal procedures

REFERENCES
The torque value when fixing the screw is as follows.
- #1 Q4x8: 120 cNm
- #3 Special Low Head 6x12: 420 cNm
INSTRUCTION
When fixing the screws #1, screw lock coatings are required.
018-241-05E
MC-46

NOTE
The cart handle screws are installed from the outside, make sure that there are not
any gaps on the outside.
POCX010302109J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-47
2.17 DR Slot Damper Reinstallation procedures

Screws

Parts name
Symbol in the
Parts code Numbers  Check/Adjustment Procedures
figure
TP Screw (3x6) [1] TP3x6 [1] 308S0414 2  Adjusting the DR slot damper gear
(1) Temporarily tighten the screw into the upper screw hole, and move the
Removal procedures
 DR slot in the direction of the arrow until the tip of the screw hits the
mechanical stopper plate.
 NOTE 
$ {MC:2.2_Rear Cover} Implement with the bracket removed which is secured via TP4x8.
(2) Remove the DR slot damper.

#2 Remove the DR slot damper.
#1
TP4x8
POCX010302075J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-48
(2) Temporarily fix the screw. (4) Holding the status of step (3), securely tighten the screw.
 NOTE 
Do not securely tighten the screw such that the DR slot damper can rotate a little #1
around the screw hole. TP3x6 [1]
POCX010302078J.ai
(5) Securely tighten the screw fixed temporarily in step (2).

#1
TP3x6 [1]
POCX010302076J.ai
(3) Check that the center of the damper is roughly aligned with the
scratch line, and then press the tooth top of the damper lightly against
the gear bracket in the direction indicated.
#1
TP3x6 [1]
POCX010302079J.ai
(6) Swing the DR slot assembly and check that the engagement of the
#1 gears is smooth.
 NOTE 
If there is too much gap when swinging, the tooth tip of the damper may have
excessively come in contact with the tooth bottom of the plate gear. In this case,
adjust the engagement again.
POCX010302077J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-49
(7) Detach the TP4 x8 which were provisionally tightened in step 1, attach
the bracket and secure it via TP4 x8 (x2).
#2 Attach the bracket.
#1
#2 TP4x8
#3
TP4x8 (x2)
POCX010302141J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-50
2.18 V Block (Reference Side/INV Board Side) Removal procedures

 NOTE  (1) Remove the following components.
The V blocks are different on the reference side and the opposite reference side.
Refer to the following, and attach them as per the following so that they are not $ {MC:2.2_Rear Cover}
incorrect. $ {MC:2.4_Arm Front Cover}
When attaching both the reference side and the opposite reference side, have them $ {MC:2.5_Arm Rear Cover}
be as per the following. $ {MC:2.6_Right-side Cover (GNC Board Side)}
- The top section’s V notch is near the cart unit side.
- The center section’s screw holes are near the cart unit side.
Opposite $ {MC:2.12_DR Slot Assembly Right-side Cover}
Reference side $ {MC:2.13_DR Slot Assembly Left-side Cover}
reference side
(2) Remove the V block (reference side).

#1 Remove the screws (x2).
#2 Remove the V block (Reference Side).
#2
#1
TP3x6 [1] (x2)
Cart unit Cart unit

POCX010302164E.ai
Screws

POCX010302115J.ai
Symbol in the
figure
TP Screw (3x6) [1] TP3x6 [1] 308S0414 2
018-241-05E
MC-51
 (2) Attach the V block (reference side).
#1 Determine the position with the red line, and attach the V block (reference
Use the V block (reference side) attachment jig to attach.
side).
#2 Attach the screws (x2).
POCX010302134J.ai #1
(1) Attach the position adjustment jig on the V block (reference side).
#1 Attach the position adjustment jig so that it is visually perpendicular with the
red line. #2
#2 Attach the screws. TP3x6 [1] (x2)
#1
#2
TP3x6 [1] (x2)
POCX010302117J.ai
(3) Detach the position adjustment jig.
POCX010302116J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-52

 Check item
up.
018-241-05E
MC-53
2.19 V Block (Opposite Reference Side/GNC Removal procedures

Board Side) (1) Remove the following components.
 NOTE 
The V blocks are different on the reference side and the opposite reference side. $ {MC:2.4_Arm Front Cover}
Refer to the following, and attach them as per the following so that they are not
incorrect.
When attaching both the reference side and the opposite reference side, have them
be as per the following. $ {MC:2.7_Left-side Cover (INV Board Side)}
- The top section’s V notch is near the cart unit side. $ {MC:2.11_DR Slot Assembly Front Cover}
- The center section’s screw holes are near the cart unit side. $ {MC:2.12_DR Slot Assembly Right-side Cover}
Opposite
Reference side $ {MC:2.14_DR Slot Assembly}
reference side
(2) Remove the V block (Opposite reference side).

#1 Remove the screws (x2).
#2 Remove the V block (Opposite reference side).
#2
#1
TP3x6 [1] (x2)
Cart unit Cart unit

POCX010302164E.ai
POCX010302118J.ai
Screws

Symbol in the
figure
TP Screw (3x6) [1] TP3x6 [1] 308S0414 2
018-241-05E
MC-54
 (2) Attach the following components.
Use the V block (Opposite reference side) attachment jig to attach.
POCX010302133J.ai $ {MC:2.4_Arm Front Cover}
(1) Attach the V block (Opposite reference side). $ {MC:2.1_Front Cover}
#1 Temporarily tighten the V block (Opposite reference side).
#2 Position the position adjustment jig, and align the V block (Opposite
reference side) and the surface with the red line section.
#3 Fully tighten the screws (x2).
#2
#3
TP3x6 [1] (x2)
#1
POCX010302119J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-55

 Check item
up.
018-241-05E
MC-56
2.20 Brake Shaft (3) Move the shot switch in the direction which the cart is being tipped
over on its side, and to the opposite side.
Removal procedures

(1) Lower the arm and stow it away, move until the lock position (until it
audibly clicks) is symmetrically centered.
POCX010302087J.ai
(4) Secure the monitor with the monitor securing buffering members.
POCX010302085J.ai
(2) Store the collimator.
POCX010302088J.ai
 NOTE 
If the monitor securing buffering members could not be attached, then secure the
monitor with the buffering members, etc.
POCX010302086J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-57
(5) Locking the casters and lockable casters. (7) Lift the handle, and slowly tip the cart over on its side.
#1 Lock the casters. #1 Lift the handle.
#2 Lock the lockable casters. #2 Slowly tip the cart over on its side.
#1
#1
#2
#1 #2
POCX010302089J.ai
POCX010302091J.ai
(6) Pull the cart down on its side onto the floor on thick cloth, or buffering
members.  NOTE 
- Tilt the breaker so that it is in an upward orientation.
- While tipping the cart over, be careful that the cloth or buffering members do
not slide.
- Do not hold the handle in the direction that the arm and the cart are being
tipped over on their sides.
Breaker
POCX010302090J.ai
POCX010302092J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-58
(8) Loosen the nut on both sides of the brake shaft. Reinstallation procedures

#1 Secure the brake shaft’s center.
#2 Loosen the Hexagon nut on both sides of the brake shaft. (1) Attach the nuts (M8) on both sides of the brake shaft.
Scribe lines
#2
M8
#1
#2
M8
POCX010302095J.ai
 NOTE 
POCX010302093J.ai
- Be careful since the directions that the nuts on the rear side are rotated in differ
from the usual. There are scribe lines on the brake shaft’s rear side. Refer to
 NOTE  the scribe lines when attaching the nuts.
Be careful since the directions that the nuts on the rear side are rotated in differ - Rotate the nuts all the way to the rear.
from the usual.
(2) Attach the brake shaft about halfway on the front side’s rod end.
(9) Remove the brake shaft.
#1 Rotate the brake shaft and detach it.
Scribe lines
POCX010302096E.ai
REFERENCES
If the front side’s brake is positioned in the center, then the brake shaft will be
#1 easy to attach.
POCX010302094J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-59
(3) Attach the brake shaft onto the rear side’s rod end, and rotate the (5) Rotate the brake shaft and extend it, then move the rubber bushings
brake shaft until the rod end is at its shortest position. in the rear side brakes whereas they are positioned against the cart
base’s wall surface.
POCX010302097J.ai
 NOTE 
While checking that both sides of the brake shaft are attached, rotate the brake
shaft. POCX010302111J.ai
 NOTE 
(4) Set the brakes on the front side, then check that the rubber bushings Do not overly deform the rubber bushings.
are set against the cart base’s slanted surface.
POCX010302110J.ai
 NOTE 
Do not overly deform the rubber bushings.
018-241-05E
MC-60
(6) Secure the nut on both sides of the brake shaft. Check/Adjustment Procedures

#1 Secure the brake shaft’s center.
#2 Secure the nut on both sides of the brake shaft.  Check item 1
Check that the front and rear caster lock pedals normally operate.
$ {Product Specifications:4._Means for Moving and Fixing the Machine}
#2
M8
#1  Check item 2
As operation checks after the cart is turned onto its side, check that the following
#2 normally operate.
M8 - The arm, and DR slot open and close, and rotate normally.
- The collimator swivels normally.
- The cart rolls normally.
- The hand switches normally operate.
POCX010302093J.ai
 NOTE 
After securing the rear side nuts, then lift up the rear side, and secure the front
side nuts.
REFERENCES
The torque value when fixing the nut is as follows.
- #2 M8: 1000 cNm
INSTRUCTION
When fixing the nuts #2, screw lock coatings are required.
(7) Checking that the rear wheel casters (front side) operate normally.
Lock position: the casters do not rotate or swivel from any position.
Free position: the casters freely rotate or swivel.
Swivel lock position: the casters no longer swivel front and rear 180 degree
positions. The wheels rotate.
(8) Hold the handle, and slowly lift the cart up and return it to its normal
state.
018-241-05E
MC-61
2.21 Caster Lock Assembly (3) Release the caster lock assembly on the front wheel side.
Screws

Symbol in the
figure
Hexagon Socket
Hexagon 4 mm Q5x10 304S3180510 4
Screw (Q5x10)
Hexagon Socket
Hexagon 5 mm Q6x12 304S3180612 8
Screw (Q6x12)
Removal procedures

(1) Step on the caster lock pedals, and completely lock the casters.
#1
Q5x10 (x4)
POCX010302071J.ai
(2) Tip over the cart, and remove the brake shaft.
$ {MC:2.20_Brake Shaft}
018-241-05E
MC-62
(4) Detach the caster lock assembly on the rear wheels side. Reinstallation procedures

(1) Attach the caster lock assembly on the rear wheels side.
#1 #1
Q6x12 (x8) Q6x12 (x8)
REFERENCES NOTE
After being removed, the caster lock assembly is as follows. After pressing the caster lock assembly on the rear wheels side against the
following directions, secure it.
POCX010302132J.ai
POCX010302113J.ai
REFERENCES
- #1 Q6x12: 420 cNm
018-241-05E
MC-63
(2) Attach the caster lock assembly on the front wheels side.
#1 to #4 Attach the screws.
#2
Q5x10
#4
Q5x10
#3
Q5x10
#1
Q5x10
POCX010302084J.ai
REFERENCES
- #1 to #4 Q5x10: 600 cNm
INSTRUCTION
When fixing the screws #1 to #4, screw lock coatings are required.
(3) Attach the brake shaft, and raise the cart.

018-241-05E
MC-64
2.22 Lockable Casters (2) Step on the caster lock pedals, and completely lock the casters.
(3) Remove the screws on both sides of the lockable casters.

Screws
 #1 Remove the screws.
Symbol in the REFERENCES
figure Since the screws can no longer be removed if tip over the cart, remove the
Hexagon Socket Hexagon screws before tip over the cart.
Q4x12 304S3180412 2
Screw (Q4x12) 3 mm
Hexagon Socket Hexagon
Q5x10 304S3180510 4
Screw (Q5x10) 4 mm
Q6x12 304S3180612 1
Screw (Q6x12) 5 mm
Removal procedures
 #1
Q6x12
$ {MC:2.4_Arm Front Cover} POCX010302068J.ai
$ {MC:2.5_Arm Rear Cover} REFERENCES

$ {MC:2.6_Right-side Cover (GNC Board Side)} The torque value when fixing the screw is as follows.
$ {MC:2.7_Left-side Cover (INV Board Side)} - #1 Q6x12: 1000 cNm
$ {MC:2.12_DR Slot Assembly Right-side Cover} INSTRUCTION
$ {MC:2.13_DR Slot Assembly Left-side Cover} When fixing the screws #1, screw lock coatings are required.
018-241-05E
MC-65
(4) Tip over the cart from the opposite of the batteries. (7) Pull out the bearing from the bracket.
Implement (1) through (7) in the following “ Removal procedures”. #1 Remove the screws.
$ {MC:2.20_Brake Shaft} #2 Pull out the bearing from the bracket.
(5) Release the casters.

NOTE
The locks on the replacement casters are unlocked when they are shipped out.
They are unlocked so that the right and left caster locks can be aligned when
they are installed.
#2
(6) Release the caster lock assembly on the front wheel side. Bearing (x2)
#1
Q4x12 (x2)
POCX010302066E.ai
REFERENCES
- #1 Q4x12: 3000 cNm
INSTRUCTION
#1
Q5x10 (x4)
POCX010302071J.ai
REFERENCES
- #1 to #4 Q5x10: 600 cNm
INSTRUCTION
When fixing the screws #1 to #4, screw lock coatings are required.
018-241-05E
MC-66
(8) Sliding the shaft up and down, and remove the lockable casters. Reinstallation procedures

#1 Slide the caster lock assembly shafts up and down.
 INSTRUCTION 
- When installing the casters, make sure that the phase of the left and right casters
are facing the same direction, and that they have identical locked states (unlocked).
#1 Just one side of the casters is marked green. As per the following photo, arrange
both the right and left casters so that they are attached with the green marks facing
toward the left side.
POCX010302067J.ai
#2 Remove the caster.
DETAIL A
A
#2
POCX010302130J.ai
- Insert the spindles into the unlocked casters, align them in an unlocked state.
POCX010302135J.ai
If the casters are attached in various different locked states (one is direction-
restricted and the other is fully-restricted), or in differing phases, the caster lock
mechanisms will not function correctly.
018-241-05E
MC-67
NOTE
- When tightening the bearings, press them against the respective directions as per
the following photo, and fasten them.
POCX010302129J.ai
- When attaching the caster lock assembly on the front wheels side, since the caster
lock pedals are attached horizontally, secure them with the screws as per the
following sequence.
#2
Q5x10
#4
Q5x10
#3
Q5x10
#1
Q5x10
POCX010302084J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-68
2.23 Caster 2.23.1 For New Caster
In conjunction with the model change, #xxx50287 or later is equipped with new
casters. Also, the replacement parts have already been switched to the new casters.
Checking the packed items

This describes the replacement procedures for each model. The rear caster assembly’s packed items (898Y200344) are as per the following.
NOTE Item Parts number Image Qty.
For the new casters, one flat washer has been added. When installing the new
casters, do not forget to install the flat washers. Hexagonheaded
304S3181070 1
bolt
POCX010302174J.ai
Stepped-over
319N120369 1
shaft
POCX010302175J.ai
Stepped-over
346N120202 1
block
POCX010302176J.ai
Screws
 Retaining seal 401N200008 1
Symbol in the
POCX010302177J.ai

figure
Hexagon Socket Screw Hexagon
Q10x70 304S3181070 1 Rear Caster 367N200001 1
(Q10x70) 8 mm
POCX010302178J.ai
Flat washer 309S0120010 1

POCX010302179J.ai
NOTE
- When replacing the casters on both sides, set up the two rear caster assemblies.
- For the following subject device numbers, separately set up 401N200012 as a non-
slip sticker.
For Japan:
#67050001,#67050024,#67050031,#67050042,#67050050,#67050052,#67050054,
#67050066
For overseas:
#67050025,#67050030,#67050043,#67050049, #67050051, #67050059,#67050061
018-241-05E
MC-69
Removal procedures
 (3) Remove the casters on one side.
#1 Remove the retaining seal.
(1) Jack up the X-ray cart. #2 Secure the screws on the lower side, and remove the screws on the upper
#1 Hold down the caster lock pedal to fully lock the casters. side.
#2 Jack up the X-ray cart on the opposite side of the lockable casters. #3 Remove the caster.
#1
#2 #3
Q10x70
hexagonal wrench 8 mm
#2 #2
Stepped-over shaft
POCX010302069J.ai
POCX010302070J.ai
REFERENCES
The cart can also be tipped over. (4) By repeating step 3, remove the caster on the opposite side.
To tip over the cart, implement (1) through (7) in the following “ Removal
procedures”.
(2) Peel off the retaining seal.

#1 Peel off the retaining seal.
#1
POCX010302180J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-70
 (2) Insert the hexagonheaded bolt into the cart, and secure it with a
hexagonal wrench.
REFERENCES #1 Insert the hexagonheaded bolt into the cart.
Install the parts in the sequence as per the following photo. #1 secure it with a hexagonal wrench.
#1
#2
Q10x70
POCX010302181J.ai
(1) Place a flat washer, stepped-over block, and stepped-over shaft on the #2
rear caster. Stepped-over shaft
#1 Attach the flat washer. hexagonal wrench 6 mm
POCX010302185E.ai
#1 REFERENCES
- #2 Q10x70: 2000 cNm
INSTRUCTION
POCX010302182J.ai
(3) Stick the retaining seal.
#2 Attach the stepped-over block. #1 Stick the retaining seal.
#2
#1
POCX010302183J.ai
#3 Attach the stepped-over shaft.
#3
POCX010302180J.ai
(4) Remove the jack, and confirm that there are no problems with it
moving.
POCX010302184J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-71
2.23.2 For Older Caster (2) Remove the casters on one side.
#1 Remove the retaining seal.
Removal procedures
 #2 Secure the screws on the lower side, and remove the screws on the upper
side.
(1) Jack up the X-ray cart. #3 Remove the caster.
#1 Hold down the caster lock pedal to fully lock the casters.
#2 Jack up the X-ray cart on the opposite side of the lockable casters.
#2 #3
#1 Q10x70
#2
Stepped-over shaft
#2 hexagonal wrench 6 mm
POCX010302070J.ai
POCX010302069J.ai
REFERENCES
REFERENCES The torque value when fixing the screw is as follows.
The cart can also be tipped over. - #2 Q10x70: 2000 cNm
To tip over the cart, implement (1) through (7) in the following “ Removal
procedures”. INSTRUCTION
(3) By repeating step 2, remove the caster on the opposite side.

018-241-05E
MC-72
2.24 Panel Lock Assembly (1) Remove the following components.
Screws

Symbol in the
Parts name Parts code Numbers #1 Remove the screws.
figure
TP Screw (3x6) [1] TP3x6 [1] 308S0414 12
Removal procedures

NOTE
- Before removing the panel lock assembly, apply tape to the position as per the
below to prevent the screws from falling in.
(3) Remove the panel lock assembly.

#3 Remove the panel lock assembly.
POCX010302173J.ai
- These procedures are for replacing the panel lock assembly. Except for when
replacing the panel lock assembly, remove each top and bottom bracket on the
panel lock assembly.
018-241-05E
MC-73
 (2) Temporarily tighten the panel lock assembly.
#1 Temporarily tighten the screws.
Reinstall the panel lock assembly with positioning it.
(1) Turn the key counterclockwise to unlock.
 NOTE 
Do not securely tighten the screws such that the panel lock assembly can be
moved in the vertical direction.
POCX010302080J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-74
(3) Install the SE on the DR slot assembly and tighten the screws (5) Attach the shield plate.
temporarily tighten in step 2 at a point where the buffering member of #1 Attach the shield plate.
the panel lock assembly comes in contact with or compressed 1 mm #2 Tighten the screws.
or less by the SE.
 NOTE 
Securely tighten the screws hidden by the SE in step 4.
#1 Position the panel lock assembly.

#2 Securely tighten the screws.
#2 #1
TP3x6 [1] (x5)
(6) Install the following parts.
POCX010302082J.ai
(4) Pull the SE out of the DR slot assembly and securely tighten the
screws hidden by the SE.
018-241-05E
MC-75
2.25 Lock Key Assembly Reinstallation procedures

Removal procedures
 NOTE
(1) Remove the following components. - The parts circled in red as per the following are not included in the lock key
$ {MC:2.1_Front Cover} assembly. When replacing them, remove the following parts from the plate, then
$ {MC:2.24_Panel Lock Assembly}
attach the new plate.
(2) Remove the lock key assembly.

#1 Remove the nuts (Nax).
#2 Remove the stopper.
#3 Remove the nuts (Nax).
#4 Remove the lock key assembly.
#1 #3
POCX010302121J.ai
- Attach the lock key assembly with the lock key keyhole on the underside of the
center.
#4 - When installing the lock key assembly, tighten the screws while holding the plate
with your fingers. If not holding the plate, the lock key's shaft is loaded with some
torque and the lock key may result in breakage.
#1 #2 #3 #4
POCX010302072J.ai
POCX010302120J.ai
REFERENCES
- #1 nut (small): 300 cNm
- #3 nut (large): 350 cNm
018-241-05E
MC-76
2.26 Main Key Assembly (3) Remove the main key assembly.
#1 Retract the top cover.
Screws

Symbol in the
figure
TP Screw (3x6) [1] TP3x6 [1] 308S0414 9
Removal procedures

POCX010302166J.ai

#1 Remove the screws. #2 Remove the connector.
#1
TP3x6 [1] (x6) #2
Key-S
#2
POCX010303008J.ai
POCX010302167J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-77
#3 Remove the screws. Reinstallation procedures

#3
TP3x6 [1] (x3)
POCX010302168J.ai
#4 Remove the main key assembly.
#4
POCX010302169J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-78
2.27 Securing Member of Monitor Reinstallation procedures

(1) Remove the double-stick tape from the buffering member.
Removal procedures
 #1 Remove the double-stick tape.
(1) Remove the securing member of monitor.
#1 Remove the securing member of monitor with the double-stick tape.
#1
#1
POCX010708003J.ai
POCX010708004J.ai
(2) Attach the buffering member.
#1 Attach the buffering member right next to the cart handle holding arm.
#1
POCX010708004J.ai
INSTRUCTION
Install the securing member of monitor with the cut side down.
018-241-05E
MC-79
2.28 Earthing Wire Reinstallation procedures

(1) Attach the earthing wire.
Screws
 #1 Attach the earthing wire as per the direction in the following photo.
Symbol in the #2 Attach the screws.
figure
TP Screw (3x6) [1] TP3x6 [1] 308S0414 1
#1 #2
Removal procedures
 TP3x6 [1]
(1) Tip over the cart.

Implement (1) through (7) in the following “ Removal procedures”.
(2) Remove the earthing wire. POCX010302124J.ai

#2 Remove the earthing wire.
(2) Raise the cart.
Implement (8) through (10) in the following “ Reinstallation procedures”.
#2 #1
TP3x6 [1] (3) Check that the earthing wire is correctly attached.
- The earthing wire is to be attached as per the direction in the following photo.
POCX010302123J.ai
POCX010302125J.ai
- Even if the casters are rotated, the earthing wire does not get tread upon
- The earthing wire does not pop out of the device
- The earthing wire is installed onto the floor
018-241-05E
MC-80
2.29 Hand Switch NOTE
When cutting the binding bands, cut the round section as per the following.
Screws

Symbol in the
figure
TP Screw (3x6) [1] TP3x6 [1] 308S0414 8
Removal procedures

POCX010302102J.ai

$ {MC:2.1_Front Cover} #2 Remove the cable from the GNC board SW-P relay connector.
(2) Remove the USB cover

#2
Implement (2) through (4) in the following “ Removal procedures”.
$ {MC:2.8_USB Cover}
(3) Remove the hand switch.

#1 Cut the binding band (x3).
#1
POCX010302126J.ai
#3 Pull out the cable from the USB cover.
POC010302056.ai
#3
POC010302057.ai
018-241-05E
MC-81
 (2) Fix the cables.
#1 Make a loop by passing the binding bands through the holes (2 places) on
(1) Pass the hand switch cable into the USB cover. the top of the main unit’s cable slot.
#1 Pass the cable into the USB cover and the main unit cable slot. #2 Pass the binding bands through the 2 loops, and bind the 5 cables.
#2
#1
POCX010302128J.ai
 NOTE 
#1 - When binding the cables, bind the hand switch cable on the left side, the 3 thin
cables in the center, and the thick cable on the right side.
- Bind the hand switch cable in a place where there is protective tubing.
POCX010302127J.ai
It is not good to bind cables

#2 Attach the cable to the GNC board SW-P relay connector. together in places where
there are not any protective tubes.
POCX010302105E.ai
#2
POCX010302126J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-82
(3) Attach the USB cover. (4) Attach the shield plate.
#1 Attach the USB cover. #1 Attach the shield plate.
#1
#2
TP3x6 [1] (x2)
POCX010302106J.ai
 NOTE 
Check that the USB cover cable position is as per the following. (5) Attach the following components.
- The hand switch cable on the left side $ {MC:2.6_Right-side Cover (GNC Board Side)}
- The 3 thin cables in the center $ {MC:2.4_Arm Front Cover}
- The thick cable on the right side $ {MC:2.2_Rear Cover}
018-241-05E
MC-83
2.30 AC Inlet Cover Assembly Reinstallation procedures

Screws
 NOTE
Symbol in the If the screw clamp’s position is incorrect, the cover will no longer fit securely. When
figure installing, install the screws so that the cover fits securely.
Thin Head (M3x10) Thin Head (M3x10) 308S0783 2
OK NG
Removal procedures

(1) Remove the AC inlet cover assembly.
#1 Open the AC inlet cover.
#3 Remove the AC inlet cover assembly.
#1#3
POCX010302188J.ai
#2
Thin Head
M3x10 (x2)
POCX010302187J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-84
2.31 DR Slot Base Cover Reinstallation procedures

Screws

Symbol in the
figure
TP Screw (3x12) TP3x12 308S0419 2
Removal procedures

(1) Remove the DR slot base cover.
#2 Remove the DR slot base cover.
#1
#2
#2 #1
#1 TP3x12 #2
TP3x12
POCX010302189J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-85
3. Control Unit Removal procedures

CAUTIONS $ {MC:2.1_Front Cover}
- When accessing the board section, after making sure to execute the following,
then access after the stipulated time.
(2) Turn OFF the circuit breaker, and secure it with tape, etc. $ {MC:2.7_Left-side Cover (INV Board Side)}
(3) Detach the AC cable. (2) Remove the 3 brackets.
- When maintaining the boards and batteries, be careful to not mistakenly wire #1 Remove the screws.
them. #2 Remove the bracket.
3.1 Battery Assembly #5 Remove the screws.
CAUTIONS #7 Remove the inlet assembly.
- Be careful with falling battery, it might cause injury.

- Be careful with electric shock when touching the terminal section of the
battery.
- The battery or machine may get damaged if the battery is not being replaced
correctly. Do not use batteries other than the type (or equivalent level)
specified by the maker.
- Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions.
Screws

TP Screw (3x6) [1] TP3x6 [1] 308S0414 5

TP Screw (4x8) TP4x8 308S0424 4
Low Head Hexagon Socket
Q5x10 304S3000510 2
Screw (Q5x10)
018-241-05E
MC-86
(3) Use tapes to secure the circuit breaker. REFERENCE
#1 Secure the circuit breaker to OFF with tapes. Rotate the encircled section in the photo, and detach the connector.
#1
POCX010707015J.ai
(5) Remove the cable from the FET board.

#1 Remove the screw on the + side.
#2 Remove the screw on the - side.
POCX010303001.ai
#3 Remove the round terminal.
#4 Insulate the removed round terminal with the protective cover or tape.
 NOTE 
#1 Remove the battery connector (BAT_A).
#2 Remove the battery connector (BAT_B). In order to prevent battery and device malfunctions, steadfastly implement the
steps in #4.
#5 Pull out the cable from the clamp.
#1
#3
#4 #5
#2
BAT_B
#1 #2
BAT_A
POCX010303003J.ai
POCX010303004J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-87
(6) Temporarily move away the cable and connector to the clamp. (7) Loosen the nut securing the battery and remove the screws.
#1 Pull out the cable of round terminal from the clamps on top. #1 Loosen the nut.
#1
Na5
(8mm)
#1
#3 #4
TP4x8 (x2)
POCX010303044J.ai
#2 Retract the connector cables which are connected to the battery.

#3 Retract the cable for AC inlet side to the clamps.
#2
Q5x10 (x2) POCX010303006J.ai
(8) Remove the battery.

#2 Move away the cable.
#3 Pull out the battery.
#2
#3
#1
#2
POCX010303005J.ai
#3
CAUTION
If the cables are pinched by the batteries, the cable sheaths might get damaged.
Confirm the state of the cables, and replace any cables that are damaged. If
damaged cables are used, there might be shorts, and they might generate
smoke and catch fire. POCX010303007J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-88
 - Do not attach the ring terminal cable caps until just before the screws are installed.
- Be careful not to mistake the installation positions when installing the round
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. terminals onto the FET board.
 NOTE  In addition, the mounting torque is specified for the round terminals. Be careful not
to damage the board by applying excessive force. When the mounting torque is low,
- The battery might catch partway when it is being installed. Push it in so that the far
the contact resistance value increases, and malfunctions are generated whereas
side of the battery rises up.
sufficient current does not flow to the device.
- After pushing the battery all the way in, then pull on it slightly. This makes the next
steps of fastening the bolts easier to do. Cable color Terminal size Installation torque
- Be careful to not pinch the cables and connectors with the cart and battery. + side (top) red M5 (smaller) 200 cNm ± 20%
- side (bottom) black M6 (larger) 200 cNm ± 20%
 INSTRUCTION 
- Implement the securing of the battery as per the following sequence.
#1 Fix the bolts (bundled with the battery).
#2 Press in the battery bracket (bundled with the main unit).
#3 Loosen the nut (top side).
#4 Fix the the nuts (bottom side) until they abut against the bracket’s position.
#5 Fix the the nuts (top side).
#6 Attach the screws (bundled with the main unit).
#3#5 #2
Na5 (8 mm)
#4
Na5 (8 mm)
#6
TP4x8 (x2)
#1
Q5x10 (x2) (4 mm) POC010707007.ai
018-241-05E
MC-89

 Check item 1
Before attaching the cover, check that the AC inlet terminal (except for the GND
terminal) via a tester that they are not conducting with the device’s frame.
POC010704014.ai
 NOTE 
- If the power is switch ON and the AC inlet terminal (except for the GND terminal) are
conducting with the device’s frame, the institution’s power source and the battery
might be damaged.
- If the AC inlet terminal (except for the GND terminal) is conducting with the device’s
frame, the cables might be pinched in the frame or in the batteries. Check the cable
connections, and if the cables are damaged, replace them.
 Check item 2
Confirm that it powers ON.
 NOTE 
If it does not power ON, perform the following measures.
- Firmly secure the round terminals.
- Charge the battery.
018-241-05E
MC-90
3.2 Fan (POW Board) Removal procedures

The POW board fan has been changed to a silent fan from #xxx50224, but the (1) Remove the following components.
replacement procedures are not changed. $ {MC:2.1_Front Cover}
Fan location

#1
TP3x6 [1] (x6)
#2
POCX010303008J.ai
Screws

TP Screw (3x6) [1] TP3x6 [1] 308S0414 8

TP Screw (3x18) TP3x18 308S0422 2
018-241-05E
MC-91
(3) Remove the POW fan assembly. Reinstallation procedures

#3 Remove the POW fan assembly. CAUTION
#1
FAN1 Before attaching the covers, check that the POW board heat sink is not
conducting with the device’s frame via a tester.
If the power is switched ON with the POW board heat sink conducting with the
#3
device’s frame, the institution’s power source might be damaged.
#2
TP3x6 [1] (x2)
POCX010303009J.ai
(4) Remove the fan of POW board.

#3 Remove the fan of POW board.
#3
#1
#2
TP3x18 (x2)
POCX010303010J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-92
3.3 NFL Board (2) Remove the cable.
#1 Remove the connector (POW1) from the POW board.
Board location
 #2 Release the clamp.
#3 Remove the ferrite from the clamp.
#3
#1 #2
POW1
POCX010303011J.ai

#3 Remove the shield plate while removing the cable from the clamp.
Screws

#1
TP Screw (3x6) [1] TP3x6 [1] 308S0414 6 TP3x6 [1] (x2) #3 #2
POCX010303012J.ai
Removal procedures

$ {MC:3.2_Fan (POW Board)}
018-241-05E
MC-93
(4) Remove the NFL Board. Reinstallation procedures

#3 Remove the NFL board.

 Check item 1
If the power is switch ON and the AC inlet terminal (except for the GND terminal) are
might be damaged.
If the AC inlet terminal (except for the GND terminal) is conducting with the device’s
 Check item 2
Before attaching the cover, check that the heat sink of POW board via a tester that
they are not conducting with the device’s frame.
If the power is switch ON and the heat sink of POW board are conducting with the
device’s frame, the institution’s power source and the battery might be damaged.
If the POW board heat sink is conducting with the device’s frame, check the following.
- The NFL board’s case
- Have the screws, etc. fallen out, is there any pinching, etc.
018-241-05E
MC-94
3.4 POW Board Removal procedures

CAUTIONS
When accessing the POW board, be sure to switch OFF the power before $ {MC:2.2_Rear Cover}
removing the cover. $ {MC:2.4_Arm Front Cover}
Board location
 $ {MC:3.3_NFL Board}
(2) Remove the bracket.

#2 #1
TP3x6 [1]
POCX010303014J.ai
Screws

TP Screw (3x6) [1] TP3x6 [1] 308S0414 13
018-241-05E
MC-95
(3) Remove the POW board. Reinstallation procedures

#3 Remove the POW board. REFERENCES
The POW board DIP switches are OFF in default. Since charging cannot be done with
them ON, check that they are OFF when installing.
OFF
POCX010303042J.ai
 INSTRUCTION 
When detaching the POW board, hold it near the right, left and center (red frame
in the photo) and perform the task. If the board is held at the top and bottom, the
board might get damaged.
POCX010303041J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-96
 Check/Adjustment Procedures
 Check item 1
If the power is switch ON and the AC inlet terminal (except for the GND terminal) are
might be damaged.
If the AC inlet terminal (except for the GND terminal) is conducting with the device’s
 Check item 2
Before attaching the cover, check that the heat sink of POW board via a tester that
they are not conducting with the device’s frame.
If the power is switch ON and the heat sink of POW board are conducting with the
device’s frame, the institution’s power source and the battery might be damaged.
If the POW board heat sink is conducting with the device’s frame, check the following.
- The NFL board’s case
- Have the screws, etc. fallen out, is there any pinching, etc.
 Check item 3
- The power is ON both with the AC cable plugged in and unplugged.
- The cart can be charged.
For a NG situation, check the POW board cable connections and the DIP switches.
018-241-05E
MC-97
3.5 FET Board Removal procedures

(1) Check that the main breaker has been turned OFF and the AC cable is
CAUTIONS detached.
When accessing the FET board, be sure to switch OFF the power before REFERENCE
removing the cover.
As described above, the DR-ID 300CL is OFF.
Board location


#2
#1
TP3x6 [1] (x2)
POCX010303016J.ai
Screws

TP Screw (3x6) [1] TP3x6 [1] 308S0414 6
018-241-05E
MC-98
(4) Remove the bracket. Reinstallation procedures

#1 Remove the screws which are fixing the round terminals.
#2 Remove the round terminals.
#3 Remove the connector.  INSTRUCTION 
#4 Remove the screws which are fixing the board. - Be careful not to mistake the installation positions when installing the round
#5 Remove the FET board. terminals (FET01) onto the FET board.
- Installation torque for the round terminal (FET01, FET05) on the FET board is
specified. Do not use too much strength otherwise the board might be damaged.
When the mounting torque is low, the contact resistance value increases, and
malfunctions are generated whereas sufficient current does not flow to the device.
Cable color Terminal size Installation torque
FET01A (+ side) red M5 (smaller) 200 cNm ± 20%
FET01B (- side) black M6 (larger) 200 cNm ± 20%
FET05A (+ side) red M5 (smaller) 200 cNm ± 20%
FET05B (- side) black M6 (larger) 200 cNm ± 20%
 Check item 1
Irradiate with the following values.
1. 40 kV, 0.25 mAs
2. 100 kV, 25 mAs
After irradiating, check that the actual values are within the following range.
- 1. 40 kV±10%, 0.25 mAs±10%+0.1 mAs (36 - 44 kV, 0.225 - 0.375 mAs)
- 2. 100 kV±10%, 25 mAs±10%+0.1 mAs (90 - 110 kV, 22.5 - 27.6 mAs)
018-241-05E
MC-99
3.6 INV Board Removal procedures

(1) Check that the main breaker has been turned OFF and the AC cable is
CAUTIONS detached.
When accessing the INV board, be sure to switch OFF the power before REFERENCE
removing the cover.
As described above, the DR-ID 300CL is OFF.
 Board location
$ {MC:3.5_FET Board}
(3) Remove the shield plate of the rear side of the device.
#1
TP3x6 [1] (x6)
#2
Screws

Symbol in the
figure
TP Screw (3x6) [1] TP3x6 [1] 308S0414 6
B8x6 (Attached screw) B8x6 - 2 POCX010303018J.ai
B4x5 (Attached screw) B4x5 - 4

TP Screw (4x12) TP4x12 308S0426 5
018-241-05E
MC-100
(4) Remove the connector (rear side). (6) Remove the INV board.
#1 Remove the connector. #1 Remove the screws.
#2 Remove the screws. #2 Remove the INV board.
(5) Remove the round terminals (front side).

#2 #2
R1 F2
#2 #2
R2 F1
#1
B4x5 (x4)
POCX010303020J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-101

 INSTRUCTION 
Installation torque for the round terminal (TB1, TB2, R1, R2, F1, F2) on the INV board
is specified. Do not use too much strength otherwise the board might be damaged.
Installation torque: 200 cNm ± 20%
 NOTE 
The TB1 and TB2 connector positions and the cable colors which are attached to the
INV board are as per the following. Be careful to not mistake the attachment positions.
The INV board, FET board, and the batteries might get damaged.
TB1 (+) (Red)
TB2 (-) (Black)
POCX010303047J.ai
 Filament calibration
$ {MU:3.10_Adjusting the Filament Preheating Voltage}
 Area Dose Calibration

$ {MU:3.15_Area Dose Calibration}
018-241-05E
MC-102
3.7 GNC Board Removal procedures

NOTE
Board location

Before detaching the GNC board, back up the calibration information etc.
$ {MU:3.5_GNC Board Backup & Restore}
However, if several kinds of calibrating are being performed, then backing up is not
required.


#1
TP3x6 [1] (x6)
Screws
 #2
Symbol in the
figure
TP Screw (3x6) [1] TP3x6 [1] 308S0414 15
POCX010303022J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-103
(3) Remove the DAP connector. (Only when the DAP kit is used.) (4) Remove the GNC board.
#1 Remove the serial connector. #1 Remove the connectors.
#2 Remove the DAP-DCC relay connector. #2 Remove the screws.
#3 Remove the GNC board.
#1
#2
POCX010303023J.ai
NOTE
- The GNC10 connector is just used when using the DAP.
- The GNC18 connector is just used for new configured machine.
- The GNC18 and GNC19 connectors are being added from the GNC board J
editions.

018-241-05E
MC-104
 Check/Adjustment Procedures  Dip switch
 Restoration or calibration  Placement
If you backed up the GNC board before the GNC board was removed, then execute
restoring.
$ {MU:3.5_GNC Board Backup & Restore}
In the cases other than above, execute the following calibrations in order from the top.
- Aging
$ {IN1:16.11_Aging}
$ {IN2:16.11_Aging}
- Filament calibration
$ {MU:3.10_Filament Preheat Voltage Adjustment}
- mAs calibration
$ {MU:3.13_mAs Offset Calibration}
POCX010303043J.ai
- Potentio calibration S2 S3 S1 S4 S5
$ {MU:3.14_Collimater Potentiometer Calibration}
- Area dose calibration

$ {MU:3.15_Area dose Calibration}
 Default value
S1 to S5: OFF
 Updating the version of the GNC board
Update the version of the GNC board using the maintenance tool. NOTE
$ {MU:3.8_Updating the GNC Board Version} If the GNC board (MP) IP addresses are reset, after S4 is turned ON, start up the DR-
XD 1000. After the IP addresses are reset, return the S4 to OFF.
 Check item $ {MT:5.1_GNC Board IP Address Resetting Procedures}
- Errors are not generated when starting up.
If errors are generated, check the GNC board cable connections.
- Implement operational checks for the main unit side’s USB port (GNC22/GNC23).
- Implement operational checks for the hand switch (GNC9).
- Implement checks for the dose linearity.
$ {IN1:16.12_Checking the X-ray Dose}
$ {IN2:16.12_Checking the X-ray Dose}
If the dose linearity is NG, execute mAs calibrating.

$ {MU:3.13_mAs Offset Calibration}
018-241-05E
MC-105
3.8 Fan (DDC Board) Removal procedures

The DDC board fan has become obsolete from #xxx50224. When the DDC fan breaks (1) Remove the following components.
down, apply the silent fan kit. $ {MC:2.1_Front Cover}
$ {AppxMC:6._Application of the Silent Fan Kit}
Fan location
 $ {MC:2.7_Left-side Cover (INV Board Side)}

#1
TP3x6 [1] (x5)
#2
Screws

Symbol in the
figure
TP Screw (3x6) [1] TP3x6 [1] 308S0414 7
POCX010303025J.ai
TP Screw (3x18) TP3x18 308S0422 2
018-241-05E
MC-106
(3) Remove the DDC board fan assembly. Reinstallation procedures

#3 Remove the DDC board fan assembly.
#3
#2  Check item
TP3x6 [1] (x2)
#1 - Confirm energization to the SE
FAN-A Pull out the SE battery, and connect the SE to the DR slot, then the SE can be starts
up.
POCX010303026J.ai
(4) Remove the fan of DDC board.

#4 Remove the fan of DDC board.
#3
TP3x18 (x2)
#2
#4
#1
POCX010303027J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-107
3.9 DDC Board Removal procedures

Board location
 $ {MC:2.1_Front Cover}
$ {MC:3.8_Fan (DDC Board)}
(2) Remove the DDC board.

#1 Remove the connectors.
#3 Remove the DDC board.
Screws

Symbol in the
figure
TP Screw (3x6) [1] TP3x6 [1] 308S0414 5
018-241-05E
MC-108
  Check/Adjustment Procedures
 Check item 1
up.
 Check item 2
- Start up and that there are not any errors, and the CSL starts up.
- Irradiate with the following values.
1. 40 kV, 0.25 mAs
2. 100 kV, 25 mAs
- After irradiating, check that the actual values are within the following range.
1. 40 kV±10%, 0.25 mAs±10%+0.1 mAs (36 - 44 kV, 0.225 - 0.375 mAs)
2. 100 kV±10%, 25 mAs±10%+0.1 mAs (90 - 110 kV, 22.5 - 27.6 mAs)
018-241-05E
MC-109
3.10 Noise Filter Removal procedures

Board location

Screws
 #1
TP3x6 [1] (x5)
Symbol in the
figure
TP Screw (3x6) [1] TP3x6 [1] 308S0414 7
#2
POCX010303029J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-110
(3) Remove the round terminals. Reinstallation procedures

#1 Remove the nuts.
NOTE
- The sequence for attaching the round terminals are as per the following.
Round terminal
Washer (small) Washer (large)
#2
LOAD3
#2 Nut
#2 LOAD4
LINE1 #1
POCX010303046J.ai
Nax (7 mm) (x4) - The cable colors and cable terminal cover colors which attach to the noise filter are
as per the following.
#1
#2 Cable color Cable terminal cover color
LINE2 LINE1 black blue
POCX010303030J.ai
LINE2 white blue
(4) Remove the noise filter. LOAD3 black red

#1 Remove the screws. LOAD4 white red
#2 Remove the noise filter.
#2 LOAD3
LINE1
#1
TP3x6 [1] (x2) LOAD4
LINE2
POCX010303030J-01.ai
POCX010303031J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-111
 Check item 1
up.
 Check item 2
- The power is ON both with the AC cable plugged in and unplugged.
- The cart can be charged.
018-241-05E
MC-112
4. Arm Unit Removal procedures

4.1 Guide Rails
Screws
 (2) Remove the guide rails on both sides.
Symbol in the #1 Remove the screws.
Parts name Parts code Numbers #2 Remove the guide rails.
figure
Thin Head (3x6) [1] Thin Head 3x6 308S0653 30
#2
#2
#2
#2
#2
#2
#1 #2
Thin head 3x6
#2 (x15)
#2
Opposing arm block side

#1
Thin head 3x6
(x15)
#2
Arm block side POC010302014.ai
018-241-05E
MC-113
 - When attaching the guide rails, attach the guide rails while pressing them in the
directions of the arrows.
 NOTE 
- There are positioning holes for the guide rails. Secure the screws from the following
positioning holes.
Arm block side Opposing arm block side POCX010304084J.ai
POCX010304082J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-114
REFERENCE ● Older parts
Guide rails consist of the following 7 parts (A to G).
C has a new lock block installed on it. If a new block lock is not installed, refer to the
old parts. A A A
A
● New parts
Dual lock C B D
B
Cushion
F G A
E
A E
B B
POCX010304083J.ai
Arm block
C D
Arm block side Opposing arm block side
E E
POCX010304106J.ai
- The shapes of the guide rails are common for A, F and G, but the dual lock and
cushion positions and number are different.
A: Two dual locks attached
F: Dual lock and cushion attached
G: Dual lock and cushion attached
- When replacing F and G, purchase 898Y200665.

When replacing A, purchase 898Y200677.
When attaching the dual lock and cushion to F and G, refer to the photo above, and
align it between the screws which secure the guide rail, and apply it to the edge on
the inside of the guide rail.
018-241-05E
MC-115
4.2 Cable Protection Cover (2) Remove the cable protection covers.
Screws
 #2 Slide the arm side covers toward the X-ray source device.
#3 Remove the arm side covers.
Symbol in the #4 Remove the cable protection covers.
figure
Bind (V3x6) V3x6 308S0029 4 #2
Removal procedures

(1) Remove the following components. #1
$ {MC:2.4_Arm Front Cover} V3x6 (x4)
$ {MC:4.1_Guide Rails}
#3
#3
#4
#4
POC010302015.ai

018-241-05E
MC-116
4.3 Arm Handle Reinstallation procedures

Screws
  NOTE 
Symbol in the When attaching the following bracket, secure it so that it does not get bent. Then,
figure attach the screws while holding the arm handle.
Low Head Screw Hexagon If the bracket is bent, then it might contact the center lock pin.
Q8x18 304S0116 2
(Q8x18) 5 mm
Removal procedures

Bracket
(2) Remove the arm handle.

#2 Remove the arm handle and bracket.
#1 #2
Q8x18 (x2) POCX010304016J-1.ai
POCX010304016J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-117
4.4 Center Lock Pin Assembly (2) Remove the bracket.
#1
Special Low Head
Q4x8 (x8)
#2
POCX010304007J-1.ai
Screws

POCX010304004E.ai
Symbol in the
figure
Special Low Head Hexagon Special Low 304S0104 or #1 Remove the screws.
12
Screw (Q4x8) 2 mm Head Q4x8 304S0114
Q4x12 304S3180412 1
Screw (Q4x12) 3 mm
Special Low Head Hexagon Special Low 304S0105 or #1
4 Special Low Head
Q4x8 (x4)
#2
Removal procedures

$ {MC:4.2_Cable Protection Cover} POCX010304005E.ai
$ {MC:4.3_Arm Handle}
018-241-05E
MC-118
(4) Remove the wire. Reinstallation procedures

#3 Remove the wire.  INSTRUCTION 
The wire should be attached to the center lock pin assembly under the following
conditions.
#3 #1 The arm is lowered.
#2 The arm is in the center position.
#3 The center lock pin is in the bottommost position.
#2
#1
Q4x12
POCX010304006J.ai
REFERENCES #1
#3
- #1 Q4x12: 300 cNm
(5) Remove the center lock pin assembly.

#2 Remove the center lock pin assembly. #2
POCX010304009J.ai
#2 #1
Special Low Head
Q5x10 (x4)
POCX010304007J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-119
4.5 Gas Spring Assembly (2) Remove the bracket.
Screws
 #2 Remove the bracket.
#1
Symbol in the Special Low Head
figure Q4x8 (x8)
Special Low Head Hexagon Special Low 304S0103 or
2
18
#2
1
Q4x12 304S3180412 1
Screw (Q4x12) 3 mm
Removal procedures

(1) Remove the following components. POCX010304004E.ai

$ {MC:2.5_Arm Rear Cover} (3) Remove the bracket.
$ {MC:4.1_Guide Rails} #1 Remove the screws.
$ {MC:4.2_Hinge Cover} #2 Remove the bracket.
#1
Special Low Head
Q4x8 (x4)
#2
POCX010304005E.ai
018-241-05E
MC-120
(4) Remove the wire. #3 Remove the screws (both sides).
#1 Remove the screws. #4 Loosen the screws (both sides).
#2 Remove the bracket. #4
#3 Remove the wire. Special Low Head
Q4x8 (x4)
#3
#2 #3
#1 Special Low Head
Q4x12 Q4x8 (x2)
POCX010304014E.ai
#5 Extend the arm to its maximum angle.

#6 Install the arm fixation jig pin.
POCX010304006J.ai
#5
(5) Install the arm fixation jig pin.
#2 Remove the arm angle control pin.
#6
#2
POCX010304003J.ai
 NOTE 
Before installing the arm fixation jig pin, move the arm up and down to align the
holes.
#1
Special Low Head
Q5x6 (x2) POCX010304002E.ai
REFERENCE
In order to release the gas spring, remove the arm angle control pin. Then attach
the arm fixation jig pin at the arm’s maximum angle.
018-241-05E
MC-121
(6) Remove the pin of center lock pulley.  NOTE 
#1 Remove the KL clip. - The screws on the shaft of the gas spring assembly cannot be removed by
#2 Remove the pin and spacers (x4) of center lock pulley. turning only one of the screws (left or right) with a hexagonal wrench as it will
cause the entire shaft slip.
#1
KL clip
#2
POCX010304010J.ai
- If it is hard to remove the gas spring assembly, remove the arm joint section’s
POCX010304008E.ai
large pulley.
$ {MC:4.8_Arm Joint Section’s Large Pulley}
(7) Remove the axis of gas spring assembly.
#1 Remove the screw and washers.
REFERENCE
#2 Remove the axis and spacers (x3) of gas spring assembly.
The gas spring assembly is controlled via the following parts.
A) Arm angle control pin: Step (5) #2
B) Gas spring shaft: Step (7) #2
C) Arm joint section’s large pulley: {MC:4.8_ Arm Joint Section’s Large Pulley}
If the aforementioned A and B are removed, the gas spring assembly can be
removed.
If the assembly is hard to remove even if A and B are removed, then remove C.
#1
Special Low Head
Q5x10 #2
POCX010304011E.ai
018-241-05E
MC-122
(8) Remove the gas spring assembly. Reinstallation procedures

#1 Move the gas spring assembly away from the arm.
(1) Install the gas spring assembly.
#2 Turn the gas spring assembly to remove it.
#1 Turn the gas spring assembly to install it.
#2
#1
#1
Rod
 NOTE 
- When attaching the gas spring, rotate the cylinder, and line up the phases of
the gas spring’s two rod ends. Do not touch the rod sections.
- Since the rod end sides will rust if hand oils and perspiration get onto them,
when securing the gas spring securing shafts, wipe the shafts with a cloth that
has ethanol applied to it and attach them.
018-241-05E
MC-123
(2) Install the axis of gas spring assembly. - The screws on the shaft of the gas spring assembly cannot be installed by
#1 Install the axis and spacers (x3) of gas spring assembly. turning only one of the screws (left or right) with a hexagonal wrench as it will
#2 Install the screws and washers. cause the entire shaft slip. To install the screws on the shaft, install by turning
only one of the screws (left or right) with a hexagonal wrench and fix the other
side screw.
#2
Special Low Head
#1 Q5x10
POCX010304019E.ai POCX010304010J.ai
 NOTE 
(3) Remove the arm fixation jig pin.
- The gas spring assembly shaft configuration is as per the following.
#1 Remove the arm fixation jig pin.
Axis
Screw
#1
Spacers Washer
POCX010304092E.ai
POCX010304017J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-124
(4) Install the pin of center lock pulley. (6) Install the arm angle control pin.
#1 Install the pin and spacers (x4) of center lock pulley. #1 Install the arm angle control pin.
#2 Install the KL clip. #2 Install the screws.
#1
#2
KL clip
Spacers (short)
#1 #2 Special Low Head

Spacers (long) Q5x6 (x2)
POCX010304022E.ai
POCX010304020E.ai
(7) Install the wire.
#1 Install the wire.
 NOTE  #2 Install the bracket.
Attach the center lock pulley so that the outside is oriented as per the above #3 Install the screws.
figure.
#1
(5) Install the fixing screws for gas spring.
#1 Fully tighten the screws (both sides).
#2 Install the screws (both sides). #2
#3
#1
Q4x12
Special Low Head
Q4x8 (x4)
#2
Special Low Head
Q4x8 (x2) POCX010304023J.ai
POCX010304021E.ai
018-241-05E
MC-125
 INSTRUCTION  (8) Install the bracket.
When attaching wires to the center lock pin assembly, attach them in the following #1 Install the bracket.
states. #2 Install the screws.
#1 With the arm lowered
#2 With the arm in the center position
#3 With the center lock pin lowered all the way down #2
Special Low Head
Q4x8 (x4)
#1
POCX010304024E.ai
#1
(9) Install the bracket.
#3 #1 Install the bracket.
#2 Install the screws.
#2
#2
Special Low Head
POCX010304009J.ai
Q4x8 (x8)
REFERENCE
The torque value when fixing the screws is as follows.
- #3 Q4x12: 300 cNm
#1
POCX010304025E.ai
018-241-05E
MC-126
 NOTE   Check/Adjustment Procedures
Press the bracket tabs into the arm section.
 Weight adjustment with ballast
CAUTION
The ballast is made of lead. After you touch the ballast with your hands, wash
your hands well.
According to the mean reaction force of the two gas springs, execute the weight
adjustment with ballast.
$ {MC:7.1_Top Cover of Mono-tank}
(2) Check the number of weights I and weights II on the top cover of
mono-tank.
POCX010304087J.ai
(10) Install the following components.

$ {MC:4.2_Cable Protection Cover}
REFERENCE
The shape of weights (weight 50g) I and weights II (weight 150g) is as follows.
018-241-05E
MC-127
(3) Based on the number of weights checked in step 2, check the weight (4) Check the numbers (reaction force of the gas spring) on the labels of
configuration (A to T) in the table below. the two gas springs before replacing them, and calculate the average
value.
The number of
Weight weights (pieces)
configuration
Weight I Weight II
T 1 8
S 0 8
R 5 6
Q 4 6
P 3 6 POCX010304028J.ai
O 2 6
(5) Check the actual arm weight in the table below on the basis of the
N 1 6 mean reaction force of the gas spring calculated in step 4 and the
M 0 6 weight configuration (A to T) checked in step 3.
L 5 4 Actual arm Gas spring reaction force

weight 820 - 830 830 - 840 840 - 850 850 - 860 860 - 870 870 - 880
K 4 4
J 3 4 11888 - 11942 H K N Q T
I 2 4 11942 - 11997 G J M P S
H 1 4 11997 - 12051 F I L O R
G 0 4 12051 - 12105 E H K N Q T
F 5 2 12105 - 12160 D G J M P S
E 4 2 12160 - 12214 C F I L O R
D 3 2 12214 - 12269 B E H K N Q
C 2 2 12269 - 12323 A D G J M P
B 1 2 12323 - 12378 C F I L O
A 0 2 12378 - 12432 B E H K N
12432 - 12486 A D G J M
(6) Refer to the table in step 5, check the weight configuration (A to T)

installed on the top cover of mono-tank on the basis of the numbers
(reaction force of the gas spring) on the labels of the two gas springs
after replacing them and the actual arm weight checked in step 5.
018-241-05E
MC-128
(7) Refer to the table in step 3, check the required number of weights (9) Reinstall the following components.
I and weights II on the basis of the weight configuration (A to T) $ {MC:7.1_Top Cover of Mono-tank}
checked in step 6.
(8) Attach the weights on the top cover of mono-tank as much as the REFERENCE
number checked in step 7.
Based on the above procedure, example of weight adjustment with ballast is described
 NOTE  below.
- Step 2: Check the number of weights I and weights II on the top cover of mono-tank
- The weights I and II must be arranged evenly on the right and left. If the before replacing them.
number of the weights I is odd, attach the weight I one piece greater to one
Weights I: 2 weights, Weights II: 4 weights
side than the other.
- Be careful not to scratch the following shaded area on the mono-tank (do not - Step 3: Check the weight configuration before replacement.
drop, do not insert screwdrivers, etc.).
The number of
Weight weights
configuration
Weight I Weight II
M 0 6
L 5 4
K 4 4
J 3 4
I 2 4
#1 Attach weights I.
#2 Attach weights II. H 1 4
#3 Attach the weight fixing plates. Weight configuration: "I"
#4 Attach screws (M3x12 (x8)).
- Step 4: Check the numbers (reaction force of the gas spring) on the labels of the two
gas springs before replacing them, and calculate the average value.
POCX010304028J.ai
Average value: (848+846)/2=847
018-241-05E
MC-129
- Step 5: Check the actual arm weight on the basis of the mean reaction force (847) - Step 7: Check the required number of weights I and weights II on the basis of the
of the gas spring and the weight configuration (I). weight configuration (L) replacing them.
Actual arm Gas spring reaction force The number of

Weight weights
weight 820 - 830 830 - 840 840 - 850 850 - 860 860 - 870 870 - 880 configuration
Weight I Weight II
12051 - 12105 E H K N Q T
M 0 6
12105 - 12160 D G J M P S
L 5 4
12160 - 12214 C F I L O R
K 4 4
12214 - 12269 B E H K N Q
J 3 4
Actual arm weight: 12160-12214
I 2 4
- Step 6: Check the numbers (reaction force of the gas spring) on the labels of the two
gas springs replacing them, calculate the actual arm weight, and check the weight H 1 4
configuration after replacing them. Weights I: 5 pieces, Weights II: 4 pieces (Weight I increased 3 pieces)
Actual arm weight: 12160-12214 - Step 8: Increase the total of 3 weights I; 2 weights I on one side and 1 weight I on
the other side.
 Resetting the number of exposure for the gas spring

$ {MU:3.3_Displaying and Clearing the Operation Information}
POCX010304028J.ai
Mean reaction force of the gas spring after replacement: (858+856)/2=857
Actual arm Gas spring reaction force

weight 820 - 830 830 - 840 840 - 850 850 - 860 860 - 870 870 - 880
12051 - 12105 E H K N Q T
12105 - 12160 D G J M P S
12160 - 12214 C F I L O R
12214 - 12269 B E H K N Q
Weight configuration: "L"
018-241-05E
MC-130
4.6 Arm  Remove the cart unit (cover, DR slot assembly, shield plate)
Screws
Symbol in the $ {MC:2.2_Rear Cover}
figure $ {MC:2.4_Arm Front Cover}
TP screw (3x6) [1] TP3x6 [1] 308S0414 37 $ {MC:2.5_Arm Rear Cover}
TP screw (4x8) TP4x8 308S0424 9
B4x5 (Attached screw) B4x5 - 4 $ {MC:2.11_DR Slot Assembly Front Cover}
Special Low Head Hexagon Special Low $ {MC:2.12_DR Slot Assembly Right-side Cover}
304S0103 2
Screw (M5x6) 3 mm Head M5x6 $ {MC:2.13_DR Slot Assembly Left-side Cover}
Special Low Head Hexagon $ {MC:2.14_DR Slot Assembly}
Q5x10 304S0105 14
Screw (Q5x10) 3 mm $ {MC:2.15_DR Slot Frame}
Removal procedures

Remove the cable in the cart unit, then remove the arm.
START
Remove the cart unit (cover, DR slot assembly, shield plate)
Remove the front side connector
Remove the rear side connector
Remove the arm
END
018-241-05E
MC-131
(2) Remove the 3 shield plates of the cart unit. (3) Remove the shield plate on the cart’s center unit.
#2 Remove the shield plates (x3). #2 Remove the shield plate.
#1
TP3x6 [1] (x6) #1
TP4x8 (x7)
#2
#2
#1
#1
TP3x6 [1] (x5)
TP3x6 [1] (x5)
#2
#2 POCX010304031J.ai
POCX010304030J.ai REFERENCE
REFERENCE The arm’s four cables are housed in the cart’s center unit.
In order to remove the shield plates in step (2), the DR slot assembly and the two
shield plates at the bottom in step (2) need to be removed.
1 4
2 3
POCX010304102J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-132
(4) Remove the2 shield plates on the back of the cart unit.  Remove the front side connector
#2 Remove the shield plates (x2). (1) Remove the INV board round terminals.
#1 #2 Remove the round terminals.
TP3x6 [1] (x6) #3 Pull the cables in “1” and “2” to the cart’s center section.
#2 #2
R1 F2
#2 #2
#1 R2 F1
TP3x6 [1] (x6)
#1
B4x5 (x4)
#2 #2
#3
POCX010304032J.ai
POCX010304033J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-133
(2) Remove the POW board connector.  Remove the rear side connector
(1) Remove the connector and ferrite core which are on the top of the INV
board.
#2 Release the clamps (x4).
#1
#3 Remove the ferrite cores (x3).
POW6
#4 Pull the cables (INV2, INV3) in “3” to the cart’s center on the front side.
#1
FU-S
#3
#1
INV1
#4 #2
“3”“4”
#1
POCX010304034J.ai
INV2
#1
INV3
POCX010304038J.ai
 NOTE 
- Since the ferrite cores which are removed in this procedure will be used for
attaching later, keep them.
- Pull the cables in “4” to the cart’s center on the front side in the subsequent
steps.
018-241-05E
MC-134
(2) Remove the GNC board connector. (3) Remove the ground wire and ferrite core which are on the bottom of
#1 Remove the connector. the INV board.
#2 Remove the clamps (x2). #1 Remove the ground wire.
#3 Pull the cables (INV2, INV3) in “4” to the cart’s center on the front side. #2 Release the clamp.
#3 Remove the ferrite core.
#3 #4 Pull the ground wire to the cart’s center on the front side.
“4”
#2
#2
#3 #1
#1
GNC14
POCX010304035J.ai
#4
POCX010304040J.ai
 NOTE 
Since the ferrite cores which are removed in this procedure will be used for
018-241-05E
MC-135
 Remove the arm (2) Remove the clamp and ferrite core which are fix the cables.
#1 Remove the screws and clamp.
 NOTE  #2 Loosen the binding band.
Before removing the arm, check that the four arm cables are pulled to the cart’s
center.
 NOTE 
The binding band in #2 are reusable. Loosen the binding band without cutting
them and remove the ferrite core.
#3 Remove the ferrite core.

1
3 #1
TP3x6 [1] (x4)
2 4
#2
#3
POCX010304103 J.ai
(1) Remove the plate which fix the cables.

#2 Remove the plate.
#1
TP4x8 (x2)
POCX010304041J.ai
#2  NOTE 
Since the screws, binding band and ferrite cores which are removed in this
procedure will be used for attaching later, keep them.
POCX010304046J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-136
(3) Lift up the arm. (5) Install the following components.
 NOTE 
Lift up the arm in order to weaken the arm unit’s spring tension.
$ {MC:4.4_Center Lock Pin Assembly}
$ {MC:4.5_Gas Spring Assembly}
(4) Remove the resin bracket from the cart’s front surface.
$ {MC:7.7_Mono-tank Assembly)}
#1 Remove the spring hanging on the resin bracket.
#2 Cut the binding band (x8).  NOTE 
#3 Remove the resin bracket.
Do not remove the collimator assembly.
$ {MC:7.10_Torque Hinge (Large)}

#1
(6) Pull out the jig pin.
#2
#2
#1
#3
POCX010304100J.ai
POCX010304047J.ai
 NOTE 
Since the resin bracket and spring which are removed in this procedure will be
used for attaching later, keep them.
018-241-05E
MC-137
(7) Remove the arm unit plates. (8) Remove the arm’s opening and closing lock block.
#2 Remove the plates (x5). #2 Remove the arm’s opening and closing lock block.
#2
#2
#1
Special Low Head
M5x6 (x2)
#2
POCX010304104J.ai
#2  NOTE 
Since the screws and arm’s opening and closing lock block which are removed in
#1 this procedure will be used for attaching later, keep them.
TP3x6 [1] (x5)
(9) Pull out the cable from the cart unit.

POCX010304048J.ai
#1 Pull out cables (x5) from the cart unit.
 NOTE 
Since the screws and plates which are removed in this procedure will be used for
#1
POCX010304049J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-138
(10) Remove the arm.  NOTE 
#1 Remove the screws. - When removing the screws the arm might bend the screws via its own weight.
#2 Remove the arm. Remove the screws while holding onto the arm.
- When removing the arm, remove it in a posture whereas both hands are
shouldering it.
#2
#1 POCX010304059J.ai
Q5x10 (x14)
POCX010304050J.ai
 NOTE 
Since the screws which are removed in this procedure will be used for attaching
later, keep them.
018-241-05E
MC-139
 #2 Insert the positioning pin.
START  INSTRUCTION 
When Temporarily tightening the screws #3, screw lock coatings are required.
Attach the arm
 NOTE 
Attach the connector
Use the removed screws in the removal procedure.
Attach the cart unit (cover, DR slot assembly, shield plate) #4 Remove the positioning pin.
#5 Fully tighten the screws.
END
 Attach the arm #1
(1) Attach the arm.

#1 Attach the arm to the cart and position it.
 NOTE 
After positioning the side of the arm which has the protrusions on it so that it #3, #5
contacts the cart unit, then insert the positioning pins. Q5X10 (x14)
#2, #4
POCX010304051J.ai
POCX010304060J.ai
REFERENCE
- #5 Q5x10: 300 cNm
018-241-05E
MC-140
(2) Attach the plates attached to the arm. (3) Attach the arm’s opening and closing lock block.
#1 Attach the plates (x5). #1 Attach the arm’s opening and closing lock block.
 NOTE 
#1
Use the removed plates and screws in the removal procedure.
#2
#1 Special Low Head
M5x6 (x2)
POCX010304105J.ai
#1
 NOTE 
Use the removed arm’s opening and closing lock block and screws in the removal
procedure.
#1
(4) Insert the cables into the cart.
#2
#1 Insert the cables (x5) into the cart.
TP3x6 [1] (x5)
POCX010304061J.ai
#1
POCX010304062J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-141
#2 Pass the cable through the front of the cart as the following. (5) Install the following components.
$ {MC:7.7_Mono-tank Assembly)}
#2 $ {MC:4.3_Arm Handle}
 NOTE 
Before attaching the mono-tank assembly, lift up the arm, and secure the jig pin.
Jig pin
POCX010304052J.ai
REFERENCE
- This works best if the cables are inserted one at a time.
- This works best if the thin cables are taped up at the ends and inserted.
 NOTE 
Arrange the arm unit cables as per the following sequence (numerical sequence
which is applied to the cables).
POCX010304101J.ai
1 Ground wire
POCX010304069J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-142
(6) Attach the resin bracket from the cart’s front side. #2 Latch the spring onto the resin bracket.
#1 Attach the cables to the resin bracket with the binding bands (x8).  NOTE 
 NOTE  Use the removed spring in the removal procedure.
- Use the resin bracket which was removed in the removal steps.
- Align the red lines on the cables with the resin bracket indentations and attach
them.
- Attach the binding band in the sequence of “1”, “2”, ground wire, “3”, and “4”.
#1
#1
- Attach the binding band heads so that they come to the inside of the resin
bracket.
#2
POCX010304055J.ai
POCX010304075J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-143
(7) Attach the ferrite cores and the clamps to the cables, and fix the  NOTE 
plates.
- Attach the ferrite cores in #1 so that they do not overlap each other.
#1 Attach the ferrite cores to the cables in “1” and “2” (no coils). - Align the ferrite cores which are attached to the cables in “1” and “2” with the
#2 Fix the ferrite cores (x2) of the cables in “1” with the binding band. marks as per the following and attach them.
 NOTE 
Use the removed ferrite cores and binding band in the removal procedure.
#2
#1 POCX010304070J.ai
POCX010304056J.ai
POCX010304071J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-144
#3 Fix the clamps (x4) to the cable and attach the screws to the plate.  Attach the arm
 NOTE  (1) Wiring the cable of “1”.
Use the removed clamps and screws in the removal procedure. #1 Wiring the cable of “1”.
#2 Attach the round terminal of R1, R2.
#3
TP3x6 [1] (x4)
#2#3 #1
R2: B4x5
#2#3
R1: B4x5
#1
“1”
POCX010304057J.ai
 NOTE  POCX010304093J.ai
Arrange the marks on the cables within the range of the arrows in the above and
attach them.
018-241-05E
MC-145
(2) Wiring the cable of “2”. (3) Wiring the cable of “3”.
#1 Wiring the cable of “2”. #1 Wiring the cable of “3” (POW6, FU-S).
#2 Attach the round terminal of F1, F2. #2 Attach the connector.
#3 Attach the screws. #3 Wiring the cables (INV2, INV3) in “3” from the front side to the rear side.
#1
#2#3 #1
F2: B4x5
#2#3
F1: B4x5
#1
“2”
#2
POW6
#3
POCX010304094J.ai
#1
“3”
#2
FU-S
POCX010304095J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-146
#4 Attach the ferrite cores (x2). (4) Wiring the cable of “4”.
#5 Attach the connector. #1 Wiring the cables (INV1) in “4” from the front side to the rear side.
#3 #5
#1
“4”
#4
POCX010304097J.ai
#5
INV2
#5
INV3
POCX010304096J.ai
 NOTE 
- Use the removed ferrite cores in the removal procedure.
- Attach the ferrite cores which are fixed to the INV2 and INV3 cables as per the
following.
Binding band
No coil 120mm
POCX010304053J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-147
#2 Attach the ferrite cores. #5 Wiring the cables (GNC14) in “4” from the front side to the rear side.
#3 Attach the connector. #6 Attach the connector.
#4 Fix the clamps (x4). #7 Fix the clamps (x2).
#1
#5
#7
#2 #6
GNC14
#4
#3
INV1 POCX010304099J.ai
POCX010304098J.ai
 NOTE 
- Use the removed ferrite cores in the removal procedure.
- Attach the two ferrite cores which are attached to the INV1 cable as per the
following.
2 coils
10mm
Marking Marking
POCX010304054J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-148
(5) Attach the ground wires and the ferrite core that are on the INV #3 Fix the clamp.
board’s bottom section. #4 Fix the ground wire.
#1 Wiring the ground wire from the front of the cart.
 NOTE 
Wiring the ground wire so that it comes under the black and red cables.
#3
#2 #4
#1
POCX010304076J.ai
#2 Attach the ferrite core (2 coils).

 NOTE 
- Use the removed ferrite core in the removal procedure.
- Attach the end of the ground wire so that it is from 80 mm to 85 mm from the
ferrite cores.
POCX010304067J.ai
80mm 85mm
POCX010304074J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-149
 Attach the cart unit (cover, DR slot assembly, shield plate) #2 Attach the plate to the cart.
(1) Attach the plate to secure the cable to the cart.
#1 Wiring the cables from the back of the cart unit towards the front in a
#3
U-shape.
TP4x8 (x2)
#2
#1
018-241-05E
MC-150
(2) Attach the shield plates on the back of the cart unit. (3) Attach the shielde plate in the center of the cart unit.
#1 Attach the shield plates (x2). #1 Attach the shield plate.
#2
TP3x6 [1] (x6)
#2
TP4x8 (x7)
#2
TP3x6 [1] (x6)
#1
#1 #1
018-241-05E
MC-151
(4) Attach the 3 shielde plates in the cart unit. (5) Install the following components.
#1 Attach the shield plates (x3). $ {MC:2.24_Panel Lock Assembly}
#2 Attach the screws. $ {MC:2.15_DR Slot Frame}
#2 $ {MC:2.12_DR Slot Assembly Right-side Cover}
TP3x6 [1] (x6) $ {MC:2.11_DR Slot Assembly Front Cover}
#1 $ {MC:2.4_Arm Front Cover}
#2
#2
TP3x6 [1] (x5)
TP3x6 [1] (x5)
#1
#1
POCX010304079J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-152
4.7 Cable Protection Sheet (2) Remove the cable protection sheet.
Screws
 #2 Remove the cable protection sheet.
Symbol in the
figure
Thin head (3x6) Thin head 3x6 308S0653 2
Removal procedures

(1) Remove the following components. #1
Thin head 3x6
(x2)
 NOTE 
Cover the base of the arm unit with tape, etc. so that screws do not fall down into
the arm unit.
#2
POCX010606006.ai

POCX010304088J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-153
4.8 Arm Joint Section’s Large Pulley (3) Remove the arm joint section’s large pulley.
#1 Move the cables so that the arm joint section’s large pulley is visible.
Screws
 #2 Remove the arm joint section’s large pulley.
#1
Symbol in the
figure
Special Low Head Hexagon Special Low
304S0103 2
Screw (Q5x6) 3 mm Head Q5x6
Removal procedures

$ {MC:4.2_Cable Protection Cover} #2
$ {MC:4.7_Cable Protection Sheet}
POCX010304080J.ai
(2) Remove the arm angle control pin.  NOTE 

The arm joint section’s large pulley is secured via tabs at four spots. When
#2 Remove the arm angle control pin. removing it, release the tabs at the four spots.
#2
POCX010304081J.ai
#1
Special Low Head
Q5x6 (x2)

POCX010304002J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-154
4.9 Center Lock Pin (3) Remove the center lock pin from the bracket.
#1 Pull out the center lock pin from the bracket.
Screws

Symbol in the
Parts name Size Parts code Numbers #1
figure
Q4x15 304S3180415 1
Screw (Q4x15) 3 mm
Removal procedures

$ {MC:2.5_Arm Rear Cover} POCX010304090J.ai
$ {MC:4.2_Cable Protection Cover} #3 Remove the center lock pin.
(2) Remove the spring from the center lock pin assembly.
#1 Remove the spring.
#2
Q4x15 #3
#1
POCX010304091J.ai
POCX010304089J.ai Reinstallation procedures


018-241-05E
MC-155
4.10 Arm Lock Release Handle Assembly #3 Remove the handle.
Screws

Symbol in the
figure
Q3x6 4
Screw (Q3x6) 2.5 mm
#3
Removal procedures
 POCX01070A022J.ai
(1) Remove the handle.  NOTE 

#1 Peel off the labels which are on both the right and left sides of the arm. Do not reuse the labels.
#1

POC010320005.ai
#2 Remove the screws which are in both the right and left sides of the arm.
#2
Q3x6 (x4)
POCX01070A021J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-156
5. Operation Panel - When detaching the operation panel assembly, do not remove the 4 screws
which secure the panel’s rear surface.
5.1 Monitor Arm

Screws

Symbol in the
figure
Monitor arm
Hexagon 5 mm Q6x15 -(Attached Screw) 1
attached screw
Cross-recessed
Truss Head Screw M4x15 301S0066 4 POCX010302074J.ai
W Sems (M4x15)
(2) Remove the Arm.

Removal procedures
 #1 Remove the screws on the operation panel’s rear surface.
(1) Remove the following components. #2 Remove the Arm.
$ {MC:2.9_Operation Panel Assembly} #2
#1
 NOTE  M4x15 (x4)
- When detaching the operation panel assembly, remove the hexagonal bolt
which secures the arm, and implement detaching.
Q6x15
POCX010305011J.ai
POCX010302073J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-157

 NOTE 
Wiring the cables so that they pass through the monitor arm at the cart arm.
POC010707019.ai
018-241-05E
MC-158
5.2 Monitor Arm Cover
Removal procedures

(1) Remove the Monitor Arm Cover.
#1 Use a tool such as flat-blade screwdriver to unlock the tab of the cover.
#2 Remove the monitor arm cover.
#1
#2
POCX010604017.ai
 NOTE 
Detached monitor arm covers cannot be reused. Prepare a new monitor arm cover for
attaching.

018-241-05E
MC-159
5.3 Operation Panel Assembly Rear Cover #4 Remove the operation panel assembly rear cover.
Screws

#4
Bind (V3x6) V3x6 301S4780306 7
Removal procedures

(1) Remove the following components. POCX010305023J.ai

$ {MC:5.1_Monitor Arm}
(2) Remove the operation panel assembly rear cover.

#1 Remove the screws (V3x6 (x7)). Reinstallation procedures

#2 Remove the connector (USB). Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
 NOTE 
For the newly configured machines, remove two LAN cables (for the GNC and hospital).
#1
V3x6 (x7) #2
#3 POCX010305024J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-160
5.4 Console PC  NOTE 
In conjunction with the changes in PC-GNC connections configurations, on the older - Precautions for when replacing older PC with new PC
PC there is 1 LAN port, and on the new PC there are 2 LAN ports.
Therefore, there are changes in the following 3 replacement patterns as per replacing. - Regardless of the configuration changes, use the pre-replacement configurations for the
- Older PC (1 LAN port) → older PC (1 LAN port) network configurations. Therefore, even when replacing older PC with new PC, use the
- Older PC (1 LAN port) → new PC (2 LAN ports) network configurations when the PC are older as per the following.
- New PC (2 LAN ports) → new PC (2 LAN ports) Power supply &
communications USB (Eth1)
In addition, there are not any differences in removal/reinstallation procedures.
192.168.0.10
 NOTE  FUJIFILM-made AP New PC
192.168.0.25 2 LAN ports
- The difference in older PC and new PC
LAN LAN (Eth0)
On the new PC, LAN ports have been added for connecting the GNC board via LAN cable.
communications (Hospital network)
192.168.0.20
GNC
board
POCX010102013E.ai
- Since the new PC which are equipped with SSD are set for new configuration usage, “■
Network Settings” need to be implemented in order to use older configurations.
Therefore, when replacing older PC with new PC, when the PC’s SSD is not used before
POCX010102017J.ai
replacing it, implement the “■ Network Settings” after replacing it.
Eth1 is set to the LAN port which connect with the GNC board.
Since the FUJIFILM-made AP communicates via the GNC board, and does not communicate
via USB (RNDIS), RNDIS driver is not required, so it is not installed. Screws

Older PC New PC Parts name Symbol in the figure Parts code Numbers
1 LAN port TP Screw (3x6) [1] TP3x6 [1] 308S0414 5
LAN port connections and GNC board
connections)
Thin Head (3x4) Thin Head 3x4 308S0786 1
Eth1 (192.168.0.10) USB (RNDIS) port LAN port (left side)
TP Screw (4x6) TP4x6 308S0416 4
Eth0 (172.16.0.20) LAN port LAN port (new, right side)
RNDIS driver Required Not required
For Japan: 898Y200279D For Japan: 898Y200504
Parts number
For Overseas: 898Y200280D For Overseas: 898Y200505
018-241-05E
MC-161
Removal procedures
 (3) Remove the Console PC.
(1) Remove the following components. #2 Loosen the screws.

#1 Release the clamps (x13).
#2 Remove the connector (COM1/COM2/COM3/OPP4). #1 #1
TP3x6 [1] (x3) TP3x6 [1] (x2)
#2
#2
#2 POCX010305021J-1.ai
#2
POCX010305020J.ai
#3
018-241-05E
MC-162
#4 Remove the screws. #6 Remove the Console PC.
#4 #4
TP4x6 (x2) TP4x6 (x2)
#6
POCX010305013J.ai
POCX010305022J ai
#5
POCX010305012J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-163
 REFERENCE
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. When replacing a 1 LAN port PC → 2 LAN ports PC, the LAN connectors are covered over
by the operation panel assembly rear cover, but this is normal. It is not a problem since 1
 INSTRUCTION  LAN connector is going to be used.
If the SSD for a 1 LAN port PC is started up before being replaced, incorporate the SSD in
the pre-replacement PC in to the post replacement 2 LAN ports PC.
1 LAN Port PC 2 LAN Ports PC
POCX010305015J.ai
POCX010305014J.ai
If the SSD for a 1 LAN port PC is not started up before being replaced, keep on using the PC
with the SSD that will have 2 LAN ports after replacement.
In this case, implement the “■ Network Settings”.
018-241-05E
MC-164
Network Settings
 (3) Double-click “RNDIS/EthernetGadget”.
 NOTE 
In systems whose PC-GNC connections configurations are the older configurations, 1 LAN
port PC are replaced with 2 LAN ports PC, but if the SSD was not replaced these steps are
needed.
If the SSD was replaced, and if 2 LAN ports PC were replaced with 2 LAN ports PC, these
steps are not needed.
● Installing the RNDIS driver

700_700057E.ai
#2
The “RNDIS/EthernetGadget Properties” window opens.
(4) Click [Update Driver].
#1 600_700237.ai
(2) Click [Device Manager].

700_700058E.ai
The “Update Driver Software” window opens.
018-241-05E
MC-165
(5) Click “Browse my computer for driver software”. (7) Select “Show All Devices”and click [Next].
700_700059E.ai 700_700061E.ai
(6) Click “Let me pick from a list of device drivers on my computer”. (8) Click [Have Disk].
700_700060E.ai 700_700062E.ai
The “Install From Disk” window opens.
018-241-05E
MC-166
(9) Click [Browse]. (12) Click [Yes].
700_700063E.ai
The “Windows Security” window opens.

700_700066E.ai
(13) Select “Install this driver software anyway”.

The “Lotate File” window opens.
The “Windows has successfully updated your driver software” window opens.
(10) Insert the “114Y2255903 RNDIS Device Driver (Windows 7)” supplied
disc with the product or ECN into the Jig drive, select “rndis_v6_ff_ (14) Click [Close].
V011.inf”, and click [Open].
700_700067E.ai
(11) Click [Next].

700_700070E.ai
The system returns to the “Device Manager” window.
700_700068E.ai
The “Update Driver Warning” window opens.
018-241-05E
MC-167
(15) Confirm that “Remote NDIS6 based Device” appears in “Network  Setting the IP address
adapters”.
Setting the IP address.

#2
700_700071E.ai
(16) Close the “Device Manager” window. #1 600_700237.ai
The system returns to the desktop screen.

(3) Select [Change adapter settings].

#1
(4) Right-click “Eth0” and select “Rename”.
018-241-05E
MC-168
(5) Rename “Eth0” to “Eth99”. (14) Select “Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)” and click [Properties].
 NOTE  The “Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties” window opens.
This port becomes a LAN port not to be used.
(15) Select “Use the following IP address” and make the following settings.
USB(Eth1)
USB 192.168.0.10
PC PC
I.
LAN (Eth1) LAN (Eth0) LAN (Eth0) Not use II.
192.168.0.10 172.16.1.20 172.16.1.20 III.
POCX010305026E.ai
600_712033.ai
I. Enter the IP address. (ex. : 192.168.0.10)

(6) Right-click “Eth99” and select “Properties”. II. Enter the Subnet mask. (ex. : 255.255.255.0)
The “Eth99 Properties” window opens. III. Keep the Default gateway in blank. (Do not enter)
NOTE
(7) Select “Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)” and click [Properties]. Depending upon the connections to the hospital network, appropriately change the
The “Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties” window opens. wired LAN and the wireless network settings.
(8) Select “Automatically acquiring the IP address” and click [OK]. (16) Click [OK].
The system returns to the “Eth99 Properties” window. The system returns to the “Eth0 Properties” window.
(9) Click [Close]. (17) Click [Close].

The system returns to the “Network Connections” window. The system returns to the “Network Connections” window.
(18) Right-click “Remote NDIS6 based Devices” and select “Rename”.

(10) Right-click “Eth99” and select “Disable”.
(19) Rename “Remote NDIS6 based Devices” to “Eth1”.

(11) Right-click “Eth1” and select “Rename”.
(20) Right-click “Eth1” and select “Properties”.

(12) Rename “Eth1” to “Eth0”.

The “Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties” window opens.
018-241-05E
MC-169
(22) Select “Use the following IP address” and make the following settings.  Setting the network priority
(1) Select “Advanced Settings” from the [Advanced] menu.
REFERENCE
When the menu bar is not displayed, press the <Alt> key.
The “Advanced Settings” window opens.
(2) Set [Connections] and [Bindings for xxx] area (“xxx” is the connection
name) to be displayed in order from highest to lowest priority.
I.
II. When changing the network priority, select the target protocol and click the up-arrow
button or down-arrow button.
 INSTRUCTIONS 
600_712033-01.ai
- In case of a wireless connection with the hospital network, set the network
(23) Click [OK]. priority in the following order.
Eth1 → Eth0 (Wireless) → Eth2 (Wired)
The system returns to the “Eth1 Properties” window. - In case of a wired connection with the hospital network, set the network priority
in the following order.
(24) Click [Close]. Eth1 → Eth0 (Wired) → Eth2 (Wireless)

(3) Click [OK].
(25) Shut down the PC.
(26) Turn ON the key switch and start the PC. (4) Close the “Network Connections” window.
(27) Confirm that if the CSL is started up that there are not any errors REFERENCE
displayed.
- When the wireless networks of the CSL connects the “FUJIAPxx” access point,
If any 10753 errors are generated here, there is a high probability that the the connection must be cancelled. When the setting becomes “Auto Connect”,
aforementioned settings are incorrect, redo from “● Setting the IP address”. select [Network and Internet] - [Manage wireless networks] and the auto
connection must be cancelled.
- Connecting the “Eth0” adapter to the hospital network via the wireless LAN is
confirmed.
018-241-05E
MC-170
5.5 SSD (2) Remove the rear cover.
 NOTE  #2 Remove the rear cover.
In conjunction with the changes in the PC-GNC connections configurations, there are some Side View
changes to the PC’s internal layout, but there are not any changes to the SSD replacement
steps.
$ {MD:5._Changes in PC-GNC Connection Specifications} #1
TP2.6x4 (x3)
Screws

TP Screw (2.6x4) (Attached

TP2.6x4 - 8
Top View
screw)
#2
Removal procedures

$ {MC:5.1_Monitor Arm} #1
$ {MC:5.3_Operation Panel Assembly Rear Cover} TP2.6x4 (x3)
$ {MC:5.4_ Console PC}
Side View
POCX010305016J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-171
(3) Remove the SSD. Reinstallation procedures

#2 Remove the connectors (x2).
#3 Remove the SSD. REFERENCE
For the installing direction of the rear cover, refer to the following.
Check the position of a dent for the LAN connector before installing the rear cover.
#3
#2
POCX010305018J.ai
#1
TP2.6x4 (x2)
REFERENCE
POCX010305019J.ai
If the SSD mounted on the configured console PC is transferred to other console PC, the
following settings are transferred and no setting operation is required.
- Device drivers
- Console settings
- MC settings (including SE information)
- Edit Configuration settings (including wireless settings)
018-241-05E
MC-172

When formatting or replacing the SSD due, for instance, to its failure, it is necessary
to restore the OS and AP.
$ {MC:Appendix 20._Reinstalling OS and Application}
 Touch panel calibration

When executed the SSD replace, execute the touch panel controller file upgrading
and the touch panel calibrating.
$ {MT:4.4_When the Touch Panel Operations Feel Strange}
018-241-08E
MC-173
5.6 Front Bezel Assembly
Removal procedures

$ {MC:5.3_Operation Panel Assembly Rear Cover}
(2) Remove the front bezel assembly.

#2 Remove the cable.
#1
OPP3
#2
POCX010305001J.ai

018-241-05E
MC-174
5.7 Operation Panel Relay LAN Connector Kit Reinstallation procedures

Screws
 NOTE
Symbol in the Install the LAN connector kit as per the following orientation.
figure
Bind (V3x6) V3x6 308S0029 3
Removal procedures

(1) Remove the connector cover.
#2
POCX010305028J.ai
#1
V3x6 (x3) POCX010302153J.ai
(2) Remove the LAN connector kit.

#2 Remove the tab of the LAN connector kit.
#3 Remove the LAN connector kit.
#1
#3
#2
POCX010305027J.ai
018-241-05E
MC-175
5.8 Memory (2) Remove the rear cover.
 NOTE  #2 Remove the rear cover.
In conjunction with the changes in the PC-GNC connections configurations, there are Side View
some changes to the PC’s internal layout, but there are not any changes to the memory
replacement steps.
$ {MD:5._Changes in PC-GNC Connection Specifications} #1
TP2.6x4 (x3)
Screws

TP Screw (2.6x4) (Attached screw) TP2.6x4 - 6 Top View
Removal procedures
 #2

$ {MC:5.3_Operation Panel Assembly Rear Cover} #1
TP2.6x4 (x3)
Side View
POCX010305016J.ai
Memory
POCX010305029E.ai
018-241-08E
MC-176
(3) Remove the memory.  For the optional expansion configurations (MEM: 8 GB)
#1 Open the tabs on both sides of the memory to the outsides.
#2 Since the memory will rise up, pull it out of the slot. NOTE
If the PC memory expansion kit (898Y201238) is used, install two new memories. In
this case, discard the memories which were installed in the original PC. If two memories
whose versions are different are installed, they may not work properly.
#2 #1 Insert the first memory into the bottom slot, then press the top of the
memory, and lock the tabs.
#2 Insert the second memory into the top slot, then press the top of the memory,
and lock the tabs.
#1 #1
#1
#2
POCX010305030J.ai

(1) Attach the memory.
POCX010305032J.ai
 For the standard configurations (MEM: 4 GB)

#1 Insert the memory into the top slot, then press the top of the memory, and
lock the tabs.
#1
POCX010305031J.ai
018-241-08E
MC-177
(2) Attach the rear cover. Check/Adjustment Procedures

#1 Attach the rear cover.
(1) Start the PC and open the control panel.
#1
Align the dent with the LAN connector’s position.
(2) Press <Windows> + <R> key.
The “Run...” window opens.
(3) Enter “Control” and click [OK].

(4) Click “System”.

The “System” window opens.
(5) Check the memory capacity.

 For the standard configurations (MEM: 4 GB)
Check that the Installed memory (RAM): display is 4.00 GB.
POCX010305033E.ai
NOTE
Confirm the LAN connector’s dent positions for the rear cover’s attachment orientation,
then attach it.
#2 Attach the side screws (x6).

$ {MC:5.3_Operation Panel Assembly Rear Cover}
POCX010305034E.ai
018-241-08E
MC-178
 For the optional expansion configurations (MEM: 8 GB)
Check that the Installed memory (RAM): display is 8.00 GB.
POCX010305035E.ai
018-241-08E
MC-179
6. Collimator 6.2 SOD Measure Assembly
Screws

6.1 Collimator Handle Symbol in the
figure
Screws

Bind (V3x6) V3x6 308S0029 2
Symbol in the
figure
TP Screw (4x8) TP4x8 308S0424 8 Removal procedures

(1) Remove the SOD measure assembly.
Removal procedures
 #2 Remove the connector.
(1) Remove the collimator handles. #3 Remove the SOD measure assembly.
#1 Remove the screw covers.
#3 Remove the collimator handles.


018-241-08E
MC-180
6.3 LED Switch
Removal procedures

(1) Remove the SOD measure assembly.
$ {MC:6.2_SOD Measure Assembly}
(2) Remove the LED switch.

#1 Remove the fixing bracket.
#2 Remove the LED switch.

018-241-08E
MC-181
6.4 Adjust Knob Reinstallation procedures

(1) Attach the adjust knob.
Screws
 #1 Attach it so that it matches the adjust knob’s D-shaped chamfer.
Symbol in the
figure
Hexagon Headed Screw
TP3x6 [1] 308S0414 2
(TP3x6) [1]
#1
Removal procedures

(1) Remove the adjust knobs.
#1 Remove the seals.
#2 Remove the screws. POC010302039.ai
#3 Remove the adjust knobs #2 Rotate the adjust knob clockwise, and justify any rattling.
#2
POC010302040.ai
 NOTE 
On the adjust knob the looseness is about the width of the graduations.
POC010302041.ai
018-241-08E
MC-182
#3 Attach the screws with the adjust knob going clockwise.
#3
POC010302042.ai
#4 Attach the seal.
018-241-08E
MC-183
6.5 DAP/Filter Rail Assembly (2) Remove the DAP/filter rail.
 NOTE  #2 Remove the DAP/filter rail.
Filter detection microswitches are included for the DAP/filter rail assembly, they are adjusted #3 Disconnect the connectors.
when shipped.
When replacing the microswitches, replace each one of them on both sides of the filter rails.
Screws

Symbol in the
figure
Special Low Head Hexagon Special Low
304S0043 8
Screw (Q3x6) 1.5 mm Head Q3x6
Removal procedures

(1) Rotate the mono-tank 180°.

 NOTE 
The connectors which are attached to the filter rails are SW1 and SW2.
- Filter rail (measure side): SW1.
- Filter rail (opposite measure side): SW2.
018-241-08E
MC-184
6.6 Collimator Cover (3) Remove the collimator cover.
Screws
  NOTE 
Symbol in the Unplug the ADC8 connector before removing the collimator so that the ADC8
Parts name Size Parts code Numbers cables are secured to the collimator cover’s rear side.
figure
Special Low Head Screw Hexagon Special Low Head
304S0043 2
(Q3x6) 1.5 mm (Q3x6)
Bind (V3x6) V3x6 308S0029 4
Removal procedures

(1) Remove the following components. POCX010306022J.ai

$ {MC:6.3_LED Switch} #2 Remove the collimator cover.
$ {MC:6.4_Adjust Knobs}
$ {MC:6.5_DAP/Filter Rail Assembly}
#2
$ {MC:7.2_Bottom Cover of Mono-tank} #1
V3x6 (x4)
(2) Remove the radiator plate cover.
#2 Remove the radiator plate cover.
POC010302035.ai
018-241-08E
MC-185

 NOTE 
So that the cables do not get pinched, before attaching the collimator cover, fix the cables to
the rear side of the cover then attach.
POCX010306023J.ai
018-241-08E
MC-186
6.7 ADC Board REFERENCE
If the connector is hard to remove, it is best to remove the ADC board first, then implement.
Screws

Symbol in the
figure
TP3x6 [1] 308S0414 4
(TP3x6) [1]
Removal procedures

$ {MC:6.3_LED Switch}
POCX010306024J.ai
$ {MC:6.5_DAP/Filter Rail Assembly}

$ {MC:7.2_Bottom Cover of Mono-tank}

$ {MC:6.6_Collimator Cover}
(2) Remove the ADC board.
#2 Remove the screws. Check/Adjustment Procedures

#3 Remove the ADC board.
 Collimater potentio calibration
When the ADC board is replaced, execute the collimator potentio calibration.
#1 $ {MU:3.14_Collimater Potentio Calibration}
ADC4 ADC3
#3
 Lighting confirmation for light irradiation field LED
Operate the collimator switches, and the adjust knob, and confirm that the light
irradiation field LED lights up.
ADC5 ADC2
#2
TP3x6 [1] (x4)
ADC7 ADC1 ADC6
POCX010306025J.ai
018-241-08E
MC-187
6.8 ADC Board Attachment Bracket (2) Remove the collimator cover.
#1 Before removing the collimator cover, remove the ADC8 connector.
Screws

TP3x6 [1] 308S0414 4
(TP3x6) [1]
#1
V3x6 V3x6 4
Ramimate M3x6 Ramimate M3x6 301S0035 2
Removal procedures

POCX010306040J.ai
(1) Remove the following components. REFERENCE

The DAP filter rail does not need to be removed.
#3 Remove the collimator cover.
$ {MC:6.11_Collimator Assembly}
#3
#2
V3x6 (x4)
POCX010306041J.ai
018-241-08E
MC-188
(3) Remove the ADC board. (4) Remove the ADC board attachment bracket.
#1 Remove the connectors.
#3 Remove the ADC board.
#1
ADC4 ADC3
#3
ADC5 Ramimate
ADC2
M3x6 (x2)
POCX010306042J.ai
#2 REFERENCE
TP3x6 [1] (x4)
ADC7 ADC1 ADC6 The fixing screws of the ADC board attachment bracket can be accessed from
POCX010306025J.ai
the rear of the bracket.
REFERENCE
If the connector is hard to remove, it is best to remove the ADC board first, then implement. CAUTION
Be careful to not strip the screw holes when removing the fixing screws
because the screwlock (ThreeBond1401B) is applied to the fixing screws. Apply
the screwlock (ThreeBond1401B) when reattaching the screws.
 NOTE 
The clamps for the ADC board attachment bracket are not included in the replacement parts.
Remove them from the bracket before replacement and reuse them.
POCX010306024J.ai

018-241-08E
MC-189
6.9 LED Board Assembly Removal procedures

For the #xxx50151 or later, since the light irradiation field adjustment range is (1) Remove the following components.
expanded, spacers have been added to the LED board assembly. $ {MC:6.2_SOD Measure}
Number of Spacer retention $ {MC:6.3_LED Switch}
Screw
spacers (small) position
- LED board retention screws: $ {MC:6.5_DAP/Filter Rail Assembly}
(TP3x6) [3] (x2) $ {MC:7.1_Top Cover of Mono-tank}
LED board side
Older board 2 - Spacer retention screws $ {MC:7.2_Bottom Cover of Mono-tank}
surface
(LED board side surface) $ {MC:6.6_Collimator Cover}
(TP3x6) [3] (x2) (2) Remove the LED board assembly.
- LED board retention screws: #1 Unclamp the clamp.
Hexagon Headed TP Screw #2 Disconnect the connector.
(M3x12) (x2) #3 Remove the screws.
LED board top
Newer board 4 - Spacer retention screws
surface
(LED board side and top Older board: TP3x6 [3] (x4)
surface) Newer board: Ramimate M3x10 (x4)
Ramimate M3x10 (x4) #4 Remove the LED board assembly.
 NOTE 
With the older board equipped machines, the light irradiation field size is adjustable via the
range of one spacer (small). Just use one spacer (small) when replacing the LED board
assembly.
Screws (older board)


TP Screw (TP3x6) [3] TP3x6 [3] 308S0561 4
Screws (newer board)


TP Screw (3x12) TP3x12 308S0419 2

018-241-08E
MC-190
 Check/Adjustment Procedures

 Checking the variation between the light field and imaging range

 INSTRUCTION 
(1) Turn ON the main breaker, and then turn ON the main key.
The LED board assembly needs to be installed in the predefined reference position.
Make sure to align the LED board assembly to the predefined reference position before (2) Set the SID to 100 cm and adjust the light field such that it fits inside
securing with screws. the border of the SE.
#1 Align the LED board assembly to the reference position of the round screw holes.
REFERENCE
#2 Align the LED board assembly to the reference position of the long screw hole.
#3 Install the screws. When using a 1417 panel, the light field should be adjusted as shown in the
Older board: TP3x6 [3] (x2) picture below.
Newer board: TP 3x12 (x2)
#3 #1
#2 #3
POCX010306004J.ai
POCX010306002J.ai
(3) Place a hexagonal wrench, steel scale, etc. according to the radiation
field.
#1 Place a hexagonal wrench, etc. according to the radiation field.
#1
POCX010306003J.ai
018-241-08E
MC-191
(4) Perform imaging in the desired condition and check the variation  Adjust the light field size
between the light field and imaging range.
(1) Terminate DR-ID 300CL and switch OFF the main breaker and main
 INSTRUCTION 
key.
It should be checked with the user whether he/she wishes to adjust the light field based on
the result of checking the variation between the light field and imaging range. The light field (2) Remove the LED board assembly cover.
should be adjusted based on the user’s request. #1 Remove the screws.
When adjusting both the size and position of the light field, make sure to perform “ Adjust #2 Remove the LED board assembly cover.
the light field size” first.
To change the size of the light field : Perform “ Adjust the light field size”
To change the position of the light field : Perform “ Adjust the light field position”.
#1
V3x6 (x4)
#2
POCX010306001J.ai
018-241-08E
MC-192
(3) Remove the LED board assembly. (4) Remove the spacer.
Older board: TP3x6 [3] (x2) Older board: TP3x6 [3] (x2)
Newer board: TP 3x12 (x2) Newer board: Ramimate M3x10 (x2)
#2 Remove the LED board assembly. #2 Remove the spacer.
#1 #2
#1
#2
 NOTE  (5) Install/remove spacers as required and install the LED board
The cable attached to the LED board assembly has been soldered. Be careful not assembly.
to damage the cable when removing the LED board assembly.
 INSTRUCTION 
The LED board assembly needs to be installed in the predefined reference position.
Make sure to align the LED board assembly to the predefined reference position
before securing with screws.
#1 Align the LED board assembly to the reference position of the round screw
holes.
#2 Align the LED board assembly to the reference position of the long screw hole.
Older board: TP3x6 [3] (x2)
#3 #1
POCX010306006J.ai
#2 #3
POCX010306004J.ai
018-241-08E
MC-193
REFERENCE  To increase the size of the light field
When enlarging the irradiation field, decrease the number of spacers, and when #1 Install the LED board assembly without using the spacer.
reducing, increase the number of spacers. The combinations of spacers (large)
and (small) are as per the following.  NOTE 
- Older board Apply the removed spacers to the LED assembly spacer retention position.
Spacer (large) Spacer (small)
0 0
Number of spacers 1 0
1 1
- Newer board
Spacer (large) Spacer (small)
0 0
1 0
Number of spacers POCX010306034J.ai
1 1
For older boards, make the spacer attachment position lie as per the following.
1 2
Spacer (large): 1mm Spacer (small): 2mm
POCX010306038J.ai
POCX010306033J-01.ai
018-241-08E
MC-194
 To decrease the size of the light field (6) Perform “ Check the variation between the light field and imaging
#1 Install a large spacer with the screws. range” and confirm that the size of the light field has been adjusted.
Older board: TP3x6 [3] (x2)  INSTRUCTION 
Newer board: Ramimate M3x10 (x2)
When adjusting the position of the light field after adjusting its size, make sure to
perform " Adjust the light field position" without attaching the LED board cover.
(7) Reverse the procedure in Step 2 to install the LED board assembly
cover.
#1
POCX010306008J.ai
#2 Wedge a spacer (small) into a spacer (large), and attach the screws.
Newer board: Ramimate M3x10 (x2)
Spacer (large): 1mm Spacer (small): 2mm
#2
Spacer (large)
#2
Spacer (small) #2
POCX010306033J.ai
#3 Attach the LED board assembly.
018-241-08E
MC-195
 Adjust the light field position (6) Adjust the position of the LED board assembly while checking the
light field.
(1) Terminate DR-ID 300CL and switch OFF the main breaker and main REFERENCE
key.
The relationship between the adjustment direction of the LED board assembly
and that of the light field is as described below.
(2) Remove the LED board assembly cover.
Adjustment direction of the LED Adjustment direction of the light
#1 Remove the screws. board assembly field
#2 Remove the LED board assembly cover.
Slide upward Move backward
Slide downward Move forward
Slide to the right Move to the right
#1 Slide to the left Move to the left
V3x6 (x4)
#1 Adjust the position of the LED board assembly.

#2 Secure the LED board assembly with screws.
#2 Older board: TP3x6 [3] (x2)
POCX010306001J.ai
(3) Loosen the screws of LED board assembly.

#1 Loosen the screws.
#2
#1
#1
POCX010306010J.ai
(7) Perform “ Check the variation between the light field and imaging
range” and confirm that the position of the light field has been
adjusted.
(8) Reverse the procedure in Step 2 to install the LED board assembly
POCX010306009J.ai cover.
(4) Turn ON the main breaker and main key.
(5) Light up the light radiation field.
018-241-08E
MC-196
6.10 Potentiometer Removal procedures

$ {MC:6.6_Collimator Cover}
Adjust knob Adjust knob
(For outer blade) (For inner blade)
(2) Remove the potentiometer (for inner blade).
POCX010306035J.ai
REFERENCE #1
ADC4
The positions of the inner and outer vanes inside the collimator are as per the
following.
Outer blade
POCX010306026J.ai
Inner blade
POCX010306039J.ai
Screws

TP Screw (TP3x6) [3] TP3x6 [3] 308S0561 2
018-241-08E
MC-197
#2 Remove the screws. (3) Remove the potentiometer (for outer blade).
#1
ADC3
#2
TP3x6 [3]
POCX010306027J.ai
#3 Remove the potentiometer. POCX010306029J.ai
#2
TP3x6 [3]
#3 POCX010306030J.ai
POCX010306028J.ai
018-241-08E
MC-198
#3 Release the clamps. #4 Remove the potentiometer.
 NOTE 
Since the cables are hard to remove from the clamps, remove them from the
clamps while holding both sides of the cables.
#3
#4
POCX010306031J.ai

 INSTRUCTION 
- The potentiometer must be installed with all light irradiation field adjust blades in
closed state.
- The potentiometer must be installed in alignment with the reference position.
POCX010306032J.ai
018-241-08E
MC-199
  Collimator Potentiometer Calibration
When the potentiometer is replaced, execute the collimator potentiometer calibration.
 Checking the resistance value $ {MU:3.14_Collimator Potentiometer Calibration}
Attach the potentiometer, and measure the resistance values between the
potentiometer cable connector terminal pins with the potentiometer cables not inserted
into the ADC board connectors, and check that they are within the range.
(1) Close all of the light irradiation field adjust blades.
(2) Measure the R1 (resistance values between the ADC3 1 pin - 3 pin) and
the R2 (resistance values between the ADC3 2 pin - 3 pin), and check
that they are within the range.
R1/R2 = 0.69±0.06
(3) Measure the R3 (resistance values between the ADC4 1 pin - 3 pin) and
the R4 (resistance values between the ADC4 2 pin - 3 pin), and check
that they are within the range.
R3/R4 = 0.69±0.06
(4) Open all of the light irradiation field adjust blades.
(5) Measure the R1' (resistance values between the ADC3 1 pin - 3 pin)
and the R2' (resistance values between the ADC3 2 pin - 3 pin), and
check that they are within the range.
R1'/R2' ≤ 0.21
(6) Measure the R3' (resistance values between the ADC4 1 pin - 3 pin)
and the R4' (resistance values between the ADC4 2 pin - 3 pin), and
check that they are within the range.
R3'/R4' ≤ 0.79
018-241-08E
MC-200
6.11 Collimator Assembly Reinstallation procedures

Screws
  NOTE 
Parts name Symbol in the figure Parts code Numbers - When attaching the following screws, apply screw lock (ThreeBond 1303N).
Special Screw 308N120061 Special Screw 308N120061 3

Removal procedures

$ {MC:7.4_Mono-tank Bottom Bracket}
POCX010306016J-2.ai
(2) Remove the collimator assembly. - After tightening the screws on the collimator side, apply 0.125 cc or more of the
#1 Loosen the screws. grease to each of the four concave portions of the screw holes so that the grease is
#2 Unclamp the clamps (x2). convex. Also, apply 1 cc or more so that the grease will be contiguous on the entire
#3 Disconnect the connector. circumference of the corner (the red part below). For the grease use the following.
#4 Remove the collimator assembly. 891S0024: Sumico Lubricant Co., Ltd. Sumigrease EP No. 2
POCX010306016J-1.ai
018-241-08E
MC-201
 (3) Check the number which was checked in step (2), and adjust the
weight I on top of the mono-tank.
 Weight adjustment with ballast  NOTE 
The weight must be arranged evenly on the right and left. If the number of the
CAUTION weight is odd, attach the weight one piece greater to one side than the other.
The ballast is made of lead. After you touch the ballast with your hands, wash #1 Attach weight I.
your hands well. #2 Attach the weight fixing plates.
#3 Attach screws.
According to the weight of the collimator, execute the weight adjustment with ballast.
(1) Check the collimator weights described on the collimator assembly
before and after replacing them.
POCX010306016J.ai
(2) Calculate "collimator weight before replacement - collimator weight

after replacement" and check the adjusted number of weights I.
 NOTE 
Difference in Weight I The weight of the weight, is weight I is 50g, and weight II is 150g.
collimator weights adjusted number
When decreasing the number of weight I, if the number of weight I is insufficient,
-158 to -106 g -2 then resolve as per the following.
1. Decrease the number of weight IIs by one.
-105 to -53 g -1
2. Increase the number of weight Is by three.
-52 to +52 g 0 3. Needed numbers, decrease the number of weight Is by one.
+53 to +105 g +1
+106 to +158 g +2
 Collimator potentiometer calibration and area dose calibration
When the Collimator is replaced, execute the collimator potentio calibration and area
dose calibration.
$ {MU:3.14_Collimator Potentiometer Calibration}
018-241-08E
MC-202
6.12 Irradiation Reticle Cover Removal procedures

NOTE (1) Remove the Collimator Reticle Cover.
The shapes and screw positions for the irradiation reticle cover differ depending upon the
machines. Attach the cover which corresponds to the machine. There are not any differences
#2 Remove the irradiation reticle cover.
in the removal, and attachment steps.
- #76450153 or early
POCX010306020J.ai
- #76450153 or later
Covered by a metal frame.
Metal frame
POCX010306021J.ai
Screws

Bind (V3x6) V3x6 308S0029 4
018-241-08E
MC-203
 (4) Fully tighten the irradiation reticle cover in the position (position
where the slit light becomes shadows in the crosshairs) where it is
(1) With the optical irradiation LED lit up, operate the adjust knob (for visually aligned with the crosshairs which correspond to the slit light,
outer blade), and open (open up a little bit from fully closed) the and the irradiation reticle cover.
irradiation field adjustment blade (outer blade) up to a slit.
NOTE
For the #76450153 or earlier, when fully tightening, be careful that the irradiation
reticle cover does not ride up on the bar ring that is on the collimator side. If it
is fully tightened while it has ridden up, then the irradiation reticle cover will be
deformed. For newer types these steps are not required.
Adjust knob
(For outer blade) Bar ring
POCX010306036J.ai
OK NG
(2) Move the irradiation reticle cover to the position (position where the
slit light becomes shadows in the crosshairs) where it is visually
aligned with the crosshairs which correspond to the slit light, and the
irradiation reticle cover, and provisionally tighten it. POCX010306014E.ai
(5) Visually check that the gap between the irradiation reticle cover and
the collimator is 1 mm or less.
Move the cover Provisionally tighten the screws

POCX010306013E.ai
(3) With the optical irradiation LED lit up, operate the adjust knob (for inner
blade), and open (open up a little bit from fully closed) the irradiation
field adjustment blade (inner blade) up to a slit.
1mm or less POCX010306015J.ai
NOTE
If there is not a visual gap of 1 mm or less between the irradiation reticle cover
Adjust knob
and the collimator, loosen all of the screws and reattach them.
(For inner blade)
(6) The SID positions the instrument in the 1000 ± 50mm conditions, and
lights up the optical irradiation field with the irradiation field adjustment
blades fully closed, visually check that the light cannot be seen.
POCX010306037J.ai
018-241-08E
MC-204

018-241-08E
MC-205
7. Mono-tank Removal procedures

(1) Remove the screws.
#1 Tilt the mono-tank forward.
7.1 Top Cover of Mono-tank #2 Remove the screws.
INSTRUCTION
The label must be reapplied when this cover is replaced. Refer to the following about
precautions when placing orders and reapplying.
$ {MC: Appendix 17._Replacing the Label}
Screws

Symbol in the
figure
Special Low Head Screw
Hexagon 1.5 mm Q3x6 304S0043 2
(Q3x6)
The label is required when purchasing the mono-tank top cover


- Mono-tank label (405N200729F)
When placing an order, convey the S/N and manufacturing date which is printed on
the label before replacing.
018-241-08E
MC-206
(2) Remove the top cover of mono-tank.
#1 Remove the top cover of mono-tank.

 NOTE 
- When installing the front cover of the mono-tank, make sure to align the tab on the
front cover of the mono-tank securely into the groove on the bottom cover of the
mono-tank.
- If the mono-tank top surface cover is to be replaced, also order a mono-tank label,
and after replacing the mono-tank, apply the label on the mono-tank top surface
cover.
018-241-08E
MC-207
7.2 Bottom Cover of Mono-tank (3) Rotate the mono-tank 180 degrees.
Screws

Symbol in the
figure
Special Low Head Screw
Hexagon 1.5 mm Q3x6 304S0043 8
(Q3x6)
Removal procedures

(1) Remove the top cover of mono-tank.
(2) Remove the screws.

(4) Remove the bottom cover of mono-tank.
#2 Remove the bottom cover of mono-tank.

018-241-08E
MC-208
7.3 Mono-tank Top Bracket (2) Remove the overlapping.
#2 Remove the overlapping securing plates.
CAUTION #3 Remove the overlapping II.
#4 Remove the overlapping I.
The outer surface of the mono-tank and the ballast are made of lead. After you
touch them with your hands, wash your hands well.
Screws


Removal procedures

NOTE 
Be careful not to scratch the following shaded area on the mono-tank (do not
drop, do not insert with screwdriver, etc.).
018-241-08E
MC-209
(3) Remove the mono-tank top bracket. 7.4 Mono-tank Bottom Bracket
#2 Remove the washer. Screws

#3 Remove the mono-tank top bracket.
Symbol in the
#2 Parts name
figure
Parts code Numbers
washer (x4)
#3
#1 Removal procedures

Ramimate
M3x6 (x12) (1) Remove the following components.
(2) Remove the mono-tank bottom bracket.

#2 Remove the mono-tank bottom bracket.
POCX010307014J.ai
#1 #2
 Ramimate
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. M3x6
POCX010307018J.ai

018-241-08E
MC-210
7.5 Right Cover of Mono-tank Retention Arm 7.6 Left Cover of Mono-tank Retention Arm
Screws
 Screws

Symbol in the Symbol in the
Parts name Size Parts code Numbers Parts name Size Parts code Numbers
figure figure
Special Low Head Special Low Head
Hexagon 1.5 mm Q3x6 304S0043 6 Hexagon 1.5 mm Q3x6 304S0043 6
Screw (Q3x6) Screw (Q3x6)
Removal procedures
 Removal procedures

(1) Remove the right cover of mono-tank retention arm. (1) Remove the left cover of mono-tank retention arm.
#2 Remove the right cover of mono-tank retention arm. #2 Remove the left cover of mono-tank retention arm.
 Reinstallation procedures

018-241-08E
MC-211
7.7 Mono-tank Assembly Screws

CAUTION
TP Screw (4x8) TP4x8 308S0424 10
The outer surface of the mono-tank and the ballast are made of lead. After you
touch them with your hands, wash your hands well. B3x6 (Attached screw) B3x6 - 4
REFERENCE
The mono-tank assembly layout and the wiring depiction are as per follows. Removal procedures

Clamp
Ferrite
Connector
CAUTION
FG line
Power system
To the collimator side When removing the mono-tank assembly, for safety, fix the arm.
Signal system
ADC6-S
ADC7-S (1) Remove the following components.
TH-S
TH $ {MC:2.4_Arm Front Cover}
R1/R2
THSW
NOTE 
TANK3
If removing the gas-spring is required for the preventive maintenance etc.,
remove the gas-spring before removing the mono-tank.
Torque hinge $ {MC:4.5_Gas Spring Assembly}
Axis side
(small) side
CAUTION
TANK1
F1/F2 TANK2 When removing the mono-tank assembly, since the arm is secured, attach the
POC010710011.ai
arm fixing jig pin.
(2) Attach the arm fixation jig pin.

#1 Adjust the arm angle.
#2 Attach the arm fixation jig pin.
Torque hinge
Axis side #2
(small) side
#1
POC010710010.ai POCX010307019J.ai
018-241-08E
MC-212
(3) Remove the following components. (4) Pull out the cables from the axis side of mono-tank.
$ {MC:7.1_Top Cover of Mono-tank} #1 Release the clamps.
$ {MC:7.2_Bottom Cover of Mono-tank} #2 Remove the connectors.
$ {MC:7.3_Mono-tank Top Bracket} #3 Remove the ferrite core.
$ {MC:7.5_Right Cover of Mono-tank Retention Arm}
$ {MC:7.6_Left Cover of Mono-tank Retention Arm}
$ {MC:6.11_Collimator Assembly} #2
TNK1
NOTE 
- Removal of the following parts is unnecessary during preventive maintenance. #3
$ {MC:6.11_Collimator Assembly} Ferrite core
- Be careful not to scratch the following shaded area on the mono-tank (do not
drop, do not insert with screwdriver, etc.). #2
TNK2
#1
#2
TNK3
#1
POCX010306032J.ai
018-241-08E
MC-213
#4 Pull out the cables from the axis side of mono-tank. (5) Pull out the cable from the torque hinge (small) side of mono-tank.
#5 Remove the screws. #1 Release the clamps (x4).
#6 Remove the metal clamps.
#6
#5
TP4x8 (x2)
#4 #1
POCX010307004J.ai

POCX010307003J.ai
NOTE 
#3 #3 #3 #3
When pulling out the cable, hold the connector upright if the connector is too F1 F2 R1 R2
large for the hole.
#2 #2
B3x6 (x2) B3x6 (x2)
POCX010307005J.ai
018-241-08E
MC-214
#4 Pull out the two cables and the FG from the mono-tank’s torque hinge (small) REFERENCE
side.
Access the one resin ring screw from the hole on the bottom side and remove it.
#6 Remove the metal clamps.
#6
#5
TP4x8 (x2)
#4
POCX010307051J.ai
POCX010307006J.ai
(6) Remove the resin ring on the axis side of mono-tank.

#1 Remove the screws. (7) Remove the axis from the axis side of mono-tank.
#2 Remove the resin ring. #1 Remove the screws.
#2 Remove the axis.
#1
Ramimate
M3x6 (x3)
#1
Q4x8 (x3)
#2
POCX010307050J.ai
#2
POCX010307007J.ai
018-241-08E
MC-215
(8) Remove the screws from the torque hinge (small) side of mono-tank. Reinstallation procedures

 NOTE 
#1
Q4x8 (x3) Pay attention to the mono-tank assembly’s orientation and implement attaching.
(1) Install the mono-tank assembly.

#1 Install the mono-tank assembly.
POCX010307021J.ai
 NOTE 
When removing the mono-tank’s torque hinge (small) side screws, remove the #1
screws in a position whereas the screws for removing the torque hinge are
visible.
POCX010307009J.ai
(9) Remove the mono-tank assembly. (2) Install the screws from the torque hinge (small) side of mono-tank.
#1 Remove the mono-tank assembly. #1 Remove the screws.
#1
Q4x8 (x3)
#1
REFERENCE INSTRUCTION
The torque hinge (small) and the angle gauge are not attached to the mono-tank When fixing the screws #1, screw lock coatings are required.
assembly. When replacing the mono-tank assembly, use the already attached
torque hinge and angle gauge.
018-241-08E
MC-216
(3) Install the axis from the axis side of mono-tank. (5) Install the cable from the torque hinge (small) side of mono-tank.
#1 Install the axis. #1 Insert the cable from the torque hinge (small) side of mono-tank.
#2 Install the screws. #2 Install the metal clamps.
#2
#2
Q4x8 (x3) #3
TP4x8 (x2)
#1
POCX010307023J.ai
#1
INSTRUCTION POCX010307027J.ai
When fixing the screws #2, screw lock coatings are required.  NOTE 
- Refer to the following figure for wiring the cable. Fix the metal clamp at about
30 mm from the covering.
(4) Install the resin ring on the axis side of mono-tank.
#1 Install the resin ring.
#2
TP3x6[4] (x3)
POCX010307025J.ai
#1 - The cables’ top and bottom positions are as per the following.
Torque hinge (small) side: the longer portion is on the top side
POCX010307024J.ai
INSTRUCTION
POCX010307048J.ai
018-241-08E
MC-217
#4 Install the round terminals.
#6 Pass F1, F2, R1, R2, and FG to the clamps, and fix via the clamps (x4).
#4#5
R1 (black)
#4#5 B3x6
F1 (black)
B3x6 #4#5
R2 (white)
#4#5 B3x6
F2 (white)
B3x6
#6
#6
#5
FG
POCX010307053J.ai
 INSTRUCTION 
POCX010307032J.ai Installation torque for the round terminal (R1, R2, F1, F2) on the Mono-tank is
specified. Do not use too much strength otherwise the board might be damaged.
018-241-08E
MC-218
(6) Install the cables from the axis side of mono-tank. #4 Fix the clamps.
#1 Insert the cable from the axis side of mono-tank.
#2 Install the metal clamps.
#2
#3 #4
TP4x8 (x2)
#1
POCX010307056J.ai
 NOTE 
The number of clamps in #4 is different depending upon the machine.
- #xxx20240 or earlier: 2 clamps
POCX010307031J.ai
- #xxx20241 or later: 1 clamp (Separately add 1 NK clamp)
 NOTE  For #xxx20240 or earlier, connect the cables of TNK1, TNK2, TNK3 through
- Refer to the following figure for wiring the cable. Fix the metal clamp on the the two clamps of # 4 and then connect to the specified connector.
coated end. For # xxx20241 or later, secure the clamp and NK clamp as per the following
procedures.
#1 Fix the shielded portion of the thick cable with the NK clamp (M3x12).
#1
POC010302023.ai
#2 Fix the 2 cables with a clamp.
POCX010307026J.ai
- The cables’ top and bottom positions are as per the following.
Axis side: the longer portion is on the bottom side
#2
POC010302024.ai
POCX010307049J.ai
018-241-08E
MC-219
#5 Install the connectors. #7 Pass the TANK1 cables to the ferrite cores and coil them twice, and stop
#6 Fix the clamps. them in the middle of the three clamps.
Do not pass the ferrite cores for the TANK2 cables to the secured clamps,
wire them on the inside.
#6
#5
TNK3
#7
POCX010307057J.ai
 NOTE 
#5
TNK1 Wire the following connectors to the collimator side, and install the connectors.
- ADC6-S
- ADC7-S
- TH-S
#5
TNK2 ADC6-S
TH-S
TNK1
ADC7-S
110mm
POCX010307052J.ai
POCX010307054J.ai
 NOTE 
Do not pass the TNK2 cable through the clamp that installs the noise filter. Wire
the TNK2 cable inside.
018-241-08E
MC-220
(7) Remove the arm fixation jig pin.  NOTE 
- During preventive maintenance, installation of the following parts is unnecessary.
- On the mono-tank label which is applied on the mono-tank top surface cover,
the tube serial number is printed. Reapply the label which is supplied with the
mono-tank assembly that was replaced.
(7)
POCX010307035J.ai

$ {MC:7.3_Mono-tank Top Bracket}
$ {MC:7.2_Bottom Cover of Mono-tank} (9) Install the following components.
 INSTRUCTION 
Before attaching the mono-tank’s top cover, implement adjusting the weight of the
ballast.
$ { Check/Adjustment Procedures}
018-241-08E
MC-221

 Check/Adjustment Procedures (3) Check the number which was checked in step (2), and adjust the
weight I on the top of the mono-tank.
 Weight adjustment with ballast  NOTE 
CAUTION - The weight must be arranged evenly on the right and left. If the number of the
weight is odd, attach the weight one piece greater to one side than the other.
The ballast is made of lead. After you touch the ballast with your hands, wash - Be careful not to scratch the following shaded area on the mono-tank (do not
your hands well. drop, do not insert screwdrivers, etc.).
According to the weight of the mono-tank, execute the weight adjustment with ballast.
(1) Check the mono-tank weights described on the mono-tank before and
after replacing them.
Collimator
#1 Attach weight I.
#2 Attach the weight fixing plates.
#3 Attach screws.
POCX010307044J.ai
REFERENCE
For above example, the mono-tank weight is "6431.4".
(2) Calculate "mono-tank weight before replacing it - mono-tank weight

after replacing it" and check the adjusted number of weights I.
Difference in Weight I
collimator weights adjusted number
-158 to -106 g -2
-105 to -53 g -1
-52 to +52 g 0
+53 to +105 g +1
+106 to +158 g +2
018-241-08E
MC-222
 NOTE   Checking the X-ray Dose
The weight of the weight, is weight I is 50 g, and weight II is 150 g. $ {IN1:16.12_Checking the X-ray Dose}
When decreasing the number of weight Is, if the number of weight Is is
insufficient, then resolve as per the following.
1. Decrease the number of weight IIs by one.  Replacing the Mono-tank Label
2. Increase the number of weight Is by three. Attach the label supplied with the replacement parts for the mono-tank assembly to
3. Needed numbers, decrease the number of weight Is. the top cover of the mono-tank.
$ {MC:Appendix 17._Replacing the Label}
REFERENCE
The shape of weight I (weight 50g) is as follows.
 Resetting the total exposure count

Reset the total exposure count, total mAs and exposure count for tube.
NOTE
Do not reset the exposure count for gas spring.
$ {MU:3.3_Displaying and Clearing Operating Information}
 Filament calibration
 Aging
Refer to the following procedures in “ If 6 months or more have elapsed since
manufacturing”, and implement Aging.
$ {IN1:16.11_Aging}

018-241-08E
MC-223
7.8 Angle Gauge Reinstallation procedures

Screws

Symbol in the
figure
Removal procedures

(2) Remove the angle gauge.

#2 Remove the angle gauge.
#2 #2
#1 #1
Ramimate M3x6 (x4) Ramimate M3x6 (x4)
POCX010307011J.ai
018-241-08E
MC-224
7.9 Torque Hinge (Small) (2) Remove the torque hinge (small) from the right-side of mono-tank.
#2 Remove the torque hinge (small).
CAUTION
The outer surface of the mono-tank is made of lead. After you touch the tank #2 #1
with your hands, wash your hands well. S3x10 (x3)
Screws

Symbol in the
figure
S3x10 3
POCX010307042J.ai
INSTRUCTION
Removal procedures

$ {MC:7.4_Mono-tank Bottom Bracket} Reinstallation procedures

018-241-08E
MC-225
7.10 Torque Hinge (Large) (3) Remove the receiving attachment for the mono-tank retention arm.
CAUTION #2 Remove the attachment.
The outer surface of the mono-tank is made of lead. After you touch the tank
with your hands, wash your hands well.
Screws
 #2
Symbol in the
figure
Special Low Head
Hexagon 3 mm Q5x10 304S0105 10
Screw (Q5x10)
Hexagon Socket
Hexagon 4 mm Q5x12 304S3180512 4 #1
Screw (Q5x12)
Q5x12 (x4) POCX010307015J.ai
Removal procedures

(4) Remove the torque hinge (large).
$ {MC:7.1_Top Cover of Mono-tank} #2 Remove the bracket.
$ {MC:7.2_Bottom Cover of Mono-tank} #3 Remove the screws.
$ {MC:7.3_Mono-tank Top Bracket} #4 Remove the torque hinge (large).
#2
(2) Remove the mono-tank retention arm.
#2 Remove the mono-tank retention arm.
#2
#3
Q5x10 (x4)
#1
Q5x10 (x2)
POCX010307016J.ai
#1
Q5x10 (x4)
POCX010307010J.ai
018-241-08E
MC-226
 (2) Install the torque hinge (large).
#1 Install the torque hinge (large).
(1) Install the spacer. #2 Install the screws.
#3 Install the bracket.
(1) #4 Install the screws.
#3
#1
POCX010307036J.ai
 NOTE  #2
- For #xxxxxx or earlier, the spacer is not included in the torque hinge. If the Q5x10 (x4)
#4
spacer is not included, install the spacer that is included with the replacement Q5x10 (x2)
components. POCX010307037J.ai
- Face the “LAMP PAT” and the engraved portion downward and attach the  NOTE 
torque hinge (large).
- Install the torque hinge (large) with printed "LAMP PAT" facing downward.
- Since it interferes with the mono-tank retention arm socket bracket if the
screws which attach the torque hinge (large) and the bracket are loose,
securely tighten the screws.
REFERENCE
- #2, #4 Q5x10: 240 cNm
POCX010307047J.ai
INSTRUCTION
When fixing the screws #2 and #4, screw lock coatings are required.
018-241-08E
MC-227
(3) Install the receiving attachment for the mono-tank retention arm. (4) Install the mono-tank retention arm.
#1 Install the attachment. #1 Install the mono-tank retention arm.
#2 Install the screws. #2 Install the screws.
#1
#1
#2
Q5x10 (x4)
#2
Q5x12 (x4) POCX010307038J.ai POCX010307040J.ai
 NOTE  INSTRUCTION
Place the receiving attachment for the mono-tank retention arm with the recessed When fixing the screw #2, screw lock coatings are required.
part facing downwards and oriented to fit the arm, then pass the cable through
and install it on the arm. If reversed when attached, then the mono-tank will not
be at the correct angle.
POCX010307039J.ai
REFERENCE
- #2 Q5x12: 240 cNm
INSTRUCTION
018-241-08E
MC-228
 NOTE  (5) Install the following components.
- The attachment orientation for the mono-tank retention arm is determined. $ {MC:7.7_Mono-tank Assembly}
Face it towards the device, and attach it so that the holes with grooves are on $ {MC:7.6_Left Cover of Mono-tank Retention Arm}
the left side. $ {MC:7.5_Right Cover of Mono-tank Retention Arm}
POCX010307046J.ai
- Install the mono-tank retention arm so that there is no gap between it and the
arm. If reversed when attached, gaps will open up.
POCX010307041J.ai
REFERENCE
- #2 Q5x10: 240 cNm
INSTRUCTION
018-241-08E
MC-229
7.11 Head Arm Reinforcement Plate (3) Remove the head arm reinforcement plate.
Screws
 #2 While holding the cables aside, remove the head arm reinforcement plate.
#1
Symbol in the
Parts name Size Parts code Numbers Special Low Head
figure
Q5x6 (x12)
TP Screw (4x8) TP4x8 308S0424 4
Special Low Head Special Low
Hexagon 3 mm 304S0103 12
Screw (Q5x6) Head Q5x6
Removal procedures

#2
(2) Remove the screw fixing the cable. POC010710009.ai

#1
TP4x8 (x4)
POC010710008.ai
018-241-08E
MC-230
8. DR Slot (2) Remove the DR slot top cover.
#2 Remove the DR slot top cover.
8.1 DR Slot Top Cover
Screws

#2
Symbol in the
figure
#1
TP Screw (3x6) [1] TP3x6 [1] 308S0414 5
TP3x6 [1] (x5)
Deltite (DT3x6) DT3x6 306S0101 3
Removal procedures

DT3x6 (x3)
POCX010308001J.ai

018-241-08E
MC-231

 Check item
up.
POCX010308017J.ai
018-241-08E
MC-232
8.2 Panel Approaching Unit (2) Remove the panel approaching unit.
Screws
 #2 Remove the panel approaching unit.
Symbol in the
figure
Removal procedures

$ {MC:2.1_Front Cover} #2
#1
DT3x6 (x2)
$ {MC:2.7_Left-side Cover (INV Board Side)} POCX010308002J.ai

018-241-08E
MC-233

 Check item
 NOTE  - Confirm energization to the SE
- After aligning the panel approaching unit’s spring with the projection on the plate, Pull out the SE battery, and connect the SE to the DR slot, then the SE can be starts
then attach the panel approaching unit. up.
- When installing the panel approaching unit, place it against the red-lined part and fix
it.
POCX010308039J.ai
018-241-08E
MC-234
8.3 Roller Assembly Reinstallation procedures

Removal procedures
  NOTE 
(1) Remove the following components. Align the roller assembly with the notches on the plate and install it.
POCX010308037J.ai
(2) Remove the roller assembly.

#1 Remove the extension coil spring. Check/Adjustment Procedures

#2 Remove the KL rings.
#3 Remove the bearings (smaller).  Check item
#4 Remove the E rings.
#5 Remove the bearings (biger). - Confirm energization to the SE
#6 Remove the roller assembly. Pull out the SE battery, and connect the SE to the DR slot, then the SE can be starts
up.
#3 - Confirm the wired communications with the SE
#5 #2
#5 Start up the system, and connect the SE to the DR slot, then the SE icon will be
KL4
#4 displayed in the wired connection state on the CSL panel status display screen.
#3
#4 E6
E6
#2
KL4
#1
#6
#5
#3 POCX010308017J.ai
#4
#2 E6
KL4 #1 POCX010308003J.ai
018-241-08E
MC-235
8.4 Bottom Bracket (3) Remove the bottom bracket.
Screws
 #2 Remove the bottom bracket.
Symbol in the
figure
TP Screw (3x6) [1] TP3x6 [1] 308S0414 8
Removal procedures

(2) Remove the brackets from the inner side of the cover.
#2 Remove the brackets from the inner side of the cover.
018-241-08E
MC-236

 Check item
up.
POCX010308017J.ai
018-241-08E
MC-237
8.5 Movable Tray Unit Reinstallation procedures

Screws

Symbol in the
figure
Deltite (DT3x6) DT3x6 306S0101 3 Check/Adjustment Procedures

 Check item
Removal procedures
 - Confirm energization to the SE
(1) Remove the following components. up.
$ {MC:2.1_Front Cover} - Confirm the wired communications with the SE
$ {MC:2.2_Rear Cover} Start up the system, and connect the SE to the DR slot, then the SE icon will be
$ {MC:2.4_Arm Front Cover} displayed in the wired connection state on the CSL panel status display screen.
$ {MC:8.4_Bottom Bracket}
POCX010308017J.ai
(2) Remove the movable tray unit.

#2 Remove the movable tray unit.
#2
#1
DT3x6 (x3)
POCX010308006J.ai
018-241-08E
MC-238
8.6 SE Charging Terminal Assembly Removal procedures

REFERENCE (1) Remove the following components.
The SE charging assembly includes DSC65A board. $ {MC:2.11_DR Slot Assembly Front Cover}
(2) Remove the cover backing bracket.

#2 Remove the cover backing bracket.
#2
#1
POCX010308020J.ai TP3x6 [1] (x2)
Screws

Symbol in the
figure
POCX010308005J.ai
TP Screw (3x6) [1] TP3x6 [1] 308S0414 2 (3) Remove the SE charging terminal assembly.
Deltite (DT3x6) DT3x6 306S0101 2 #1 Remove the screws.
#2 Remove the SE charging terminal assembly.
Special Screw
Special 3x8 308S0517 2
(shoulder screw) (3x8)
#2
#1
DT3x6 (x2)
POCX010308007J.ai
018-241-08E
MC-239
#3 Remove the cable. Reinstallation procedures

INSTRUCTION
(1) Remove the DSC65A board assembly from the replacement SE
To ensure the extra length of the cables when installing it, if there are four clamps charging terminal assembly.
on the top side, remove the one on the far right.
 NOTE 
Since the DSC65A board assembly terminals are prone to warpage, do not touch
the terminals.
POCX010308010J.ai
POCX010308015J.ai
#2 Remove the DSC65A board assembly.
(4) Remove the DSC65A board assembly.
#1 Special3x8 (x2)
Special3x8 (x2)
#2
POCX010308019J.ai
POCX010308008J.ai

#3
#2
POCX010308009J.ai
018-241-08E
MC-240
(2) Attach the connector to the DSC65A board assembly, and attach it to (3) Attach the SE charging terminal assembly.
the replacement SE charging terminal assembly. #1 Wiring the cable.
#1 Attach the connector.
INSTRUCTION
#2 Attach the DSC65A board assembly.
The DSC65A board assembly cable should be arranged as per the following. If
#2 the cables are not arranged as per the following, the connectors may come off.
- Position the cable ties as per the following, and secure the clamps and arrange
the cables.
#1
POCX010308011J.ai
#3
Special3x8 (x2)
POCX010308013J.ai
- To ensure the extra length of the cables, pass the cables through the three
clamps on the top side and arrange them. If there are four clamps on the top
side, remove the one on the far right.
POCX010308012J.ai
POCX010308015J.ai
018-241-08E
MC-241
#2 Attach the SE charging terminal assembly. (4) Attach the cover backing bracket.
 NOTE  #1 Attach the cover backing bracket.
Set up the SE charging terminal assembly inside the bottom bracket. If it is not
positioned on the inside, it might not be able to be connected when the SE is
inserted into the DR slot.
OK NG
#1
#2
It fits inside of TP3x6 [1] (x2)
the unevenness It is riding on top
of the unevenness
POCX010308044J.ai
#3 Attach the screws. POCX010308016J.ai

#1

#2  Check item
#3
DT3x6 (x2)
up.
POCX010308014J.ai - Confirm the wired communications with the SE
POCX010308017J.ai
018-241-08E
MC-242
8.7 DSC65A Board Assembly Removal procedures

(2) Remove the cover backing bracket.

POCX010308021J.ai
#2 Remove the cover backing bracket.
Screws

Symbol in the
figure
TP Screw (3x6) [1] TP3x6 [1] 308S0414 2
#2
Special Screw #1
Special 3x8 308S0517 2
(shoulder screw) (3x8) TP3x6 [1] (x2)
POCX010308005J.ai
018-241-08E
MC-243
(3) Remove the SE charging terminal assembly. Reinstallation procedures

#2 Remove the SE charging terminal assembly.
 NOTE 
- Since the DSC65A board assembly terminals are prone to warpage, do not touch
the terminals.
#2
#1
DT3x6 (x2)
POCX010308010J.ai
- Set up the SE charging terminal assembly inside the bottom bracket. If it is not
POCX010308007J.ai
positioned on the inside, it might not be able to be connected when the SE is
inserted into the DR slot.
(4) Remove the DSC65A board assembly. OK NG
#1
Special3x8 (x2)
It fits inside of
the unevenness It is riding on top
of the unevenness
POCX010308044J.ai
POCX010308008J.ai

#3
#2
POCX010308009J.ai
018-241-08E
MC-244
INSTRUCTION Check/Adjustment Procedures

The DSC65A board assembly cable should be arranged as per the following. If
the cables are not arranged as per the following, the connectors may come off.  Check item
- Position the cable ties as per the following, and secure the clamps and arrange - Confirm energization to the SE
the cables. Pull out the SE battery, and connect the SE to the DR slot, then the SE can be starts
up.
POCX010308013J.ai
POCX010308017J.ai
- To ensure the extra length of the cables, pass the cables through the three
clamps on the top side and arrange them. If there are four clamps on the top
side, remove the one on the far right.
POCX010308015J.ai
018-241-08E
MC-245
8.8 DR Slot Housing Removal procedures

POCX010308026J.ai
The two housings that are not on the terminal side can be replaced without removing $ {MC:2.5_Arm Rear Cover}
the bottom bracket. $ {MC:2.6_Right-side Cover (GNC Board Side)}
The replacement procedures vary depending on whether or not the terminal side $ {MC:2.7_Left-side Cover (INV Board Side)}
housing is replaced.
- For replacing which includes the terminal side housing
$ {MC:8.8.1_When Replacing the Housing in 3 Places}
- For replacing except for the terminal side housing $ {MC:2.14_DR Slot Assembly}
$ {MC:8.8.2_When Replacing the Housing in 2 Places} $ {MC:8.1_DR Slot Top Cover}
8.8.1 When Replacing the Housing in 3 Places

When replacing the housing in three places, including the housing on the terminal
side, carry out these procedures.
Screws

Symbol in the
figure
Bind V3x6 308S4780306 1
018-241-08E
MC-246
#2 Remove the guide from the SE insertion opening.
CAUTIONS
When removing the guides and DR slot housing, insert a hand into the DR slot,
and be careful to not get injured by touching the edges of the metal plate. #2
POCX010308025J.ai
(2) Remove the DR slot housing.

POCX010308032J.ai
#3 Remove the DR slot housing from the SE insertion opening.
#3
#1
V3x6 (x2)
POCX010308031J.ai
POCX010308033J.ai
018-241-08E
MC-247

CAUTIONS
and be careful to not get injured by touching the edges of the metal plate.
POCX010308025J.ai
 NOTE 
When installing the guide, insert the guide from the SE insertion opening, and insert
the tab into the hole diagonally downward, and secure it with the screw.
POCX010308034J.ai
018-241-08E
MC-248
8.8.2 When Replacing the Housing in 2 Places CAUTIONS
When replacing the housing in two other places, when not replacing the housing on When removing the guides and DR slot housing, insert a hand into the DR slot,
the terminal side, perform these procedures. and be careful to not get injured by touching the edges of the metal plate.
POCX010308025J.ai
(2) Remove the guide on the opposing terminal side.

#1 Push down on the damper on the opposing terminal side.
#3 Remove the guide from the SE insertion opening.
Screws

Symbol in the
figure
Bind V3x6 308S4780306 1
#1
#3
Removal procedures

#2
V3x6
$ {MC:2.12_DR Slot Assembly Right-side Cover} POCX010308035J.ai

$ {MC:8.1_DR Slot Top Cover}
018-241-08E
MC-249
(3) Remove the DR slot housing. Reinstallation procedures

#1 Remove the DR slot housing from the SE insertion opening.
#1
CAUTIONS
and be careful to not get injured by touching the edges of the metal plate.
POCX010308025J.ai
 NOTE 
POCX010308036J.ai
When installing the guide, insert the guide from the SE insertion opening, and insert
the tab into the hole diagonally downward, and secure it with the screw.
POCX010308034J.ai
018-241-08E
MC-250
8.9 DR Slot Securing Member Reinstallation procedures

POCX010308027J.ai
Removal procedures

(2) Remove the DR slot securing member.

#1 Remove the DR slot securing member.
#1
POCX010308029J.ai
018-241-08E
MC-251
8.10 DR Slot Damper (2) Remove the DR slot damper.
#1 Remove the DR slot securing member.
#2 Remove the DR slot damper.
#1
#2
POCX010308028J.ai
Removal procedures

POCX010308030J.ai

$ {MC:2.6_Right-side Cover (GNC Board Side)} Reinstallation procedures

018-241-08E
MC-252
8.11 ESD67A Board (2) Remove the ESD67A board.
#1
POCX010308042J.ai

#3 Remove the ESD67A board.
POCX010308043J.ai
#2 #2
Screws
 TP3x6 [1] TP3x6 [1]

TP Screw (3x6) [1] TP3x6 [1] 308S0414 4
Removal procedures

(1) Remove the following components. #2 #3 #2
TP3x6 [1] TP3x6 [1]
POCX010308041J.ai

018-241-08E
MC-253

 NOTE 
- The attachment orientation for the ESD67A board is determined. The width of the
top side mounting hole is wider than that of the bottom side.
Wide
Narrow
POCX01020B017J.ai
- Install the screws in the sequence of A – D.
A B
TP3x6 [1] TP3x6 [1]
C D
TP3x6 [1] TP3x6 [1]
POCX010308040J.ai
018-241-08E
MC-254
9. Replacing the Fuses and Fuse Locations  Fuse Replacement Procedures
CAUTIONS
9.1 Fuse Classification and Replacement Procedures - When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to
ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body
may cause damage to electronic parts on the board.
 Fuse Classification - When replacing the fuse, check the rated amperage of the fuse to be replaced, and
replace it with a fuse of the same rated amperage. At that time, check the Rated
 How to understand fuse notations
amperage (A) silk-screened on the board as well.
An example of classification symbols and rated amperage is shown below.
- To remove the fuse, pull it straight up and off.
- When attaching the fuse, exercise care not to bend the pins of the fuse.
Rated amperage of (1) Pull out the fuse, and replace it with a new one.
1.6A
Fuse classification
symbol
[Remove]
Fuse
Pin
018-241-08E
MC-255
9.2 NFL Board Fuses 9.3 POW67A Board Fuse
 Fuse Location  Fuse Location
 Fuse Location
 Fuse Information
Rated Rated
Board indications Type Replace ability
Board Rated Rated voltage (V) amperage (A)
Type Replace ability
indications voltage (V) amperage (A)
F3 Fuse DC450 V 20 A No
F1 Glass fuse 250V 15A Yes
F2 Glass fuse 250V 15A No
* 250V, T15A, 1500A breaking capacity
018-241-08E
MC-256
9.4 GNC67A Board Fuses 9.5 DDC67A Board Fuses

Board Rated Rated Board Rated Rated
Type Replace ability Type Replace ability
indications voltage (V) amperage (A) indications voltage (V) amperage (A)
F1 Micro Fuse ACDC48 V 1A Yes (137S1417) F101 Fuse DC72 V 3.15A No
F2 Micro Fuse ACDC48 V 1A Yes (137S1417) F102 Fuse DC72 V 3.15 A No
F3 Tip Fuse DC50 V 5A No F201 Fuse DC72 V 3.15 A No
F501 Fuse DC72 V 3.15 A No
018-241-08E
MC-257
9.6 INV67A Board Fuses 9.7 ADC67A Board Fuses
 Fuse Location
Board Rated Rated
Type Replace ability
indications voltage (V) amperage (A)
F1 Tip Fuse DC24 V 3.15 A No
 Fuse Location
Rated Rated
Board indications Type Replace ability
voltage (V) amperage (A)
F1 Fuse DC72 V 1A No
018-241-08E
MC-258
10. List of Tools Phillips screwdriver No. 1 Phillips screwdriver No. 2
Reference type: NO.6300-1 Reference type: NO.6300-2
Reference manufacturer: Reference manufacturer:
10.1 Standard Tools

VESSEL VESSEL
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Remarks: Remarks:
 NOTE 
To service the machine, use the servicing instruments and tools that have been
inspected and calibrated.
If the machine were serviced using servicing instruments and tools that have not Thin-blade screwdriver Phillips stubby screwdriver
been inspected and calibrated, proper performance of the machine could not be Reference type: NO.110-4 Reference type: NO.195-2
guaranteed. Reference manufacturer: Reference manufacturer:
PB PB
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Adjustable wrench 150 mm Nippers 150 mm
Remarks: Remarks:
Reference type: W-120 Reference type: N-25
HOZAN HOZAN
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Remarks: Remarks:
Thin-blade stubby screwdriver High-frequency screwdriver
Reference type: NO.135.2 Reference type: D-29
PB HOZAN
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Long-nose pliers 150 mm Pliers 150 mm
Remarks: Remarks:
Reference type: P-22 Reference type: JP-200
HOZAN HOZAN
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Remarks: Remarks:
Jeweler's screwdriver set Combination box-open-end wrench (5.5 mm)
Reference type: NO.146 Reference type: M41-5.5
ENGINEER KTC
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Water pump pliers Tweezers 125 mm
Remarks: Remarks:
Reference type: P-245 Reference type: P-87
HOZAN HOZAN
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Combination box-open-end wrench (7 mm) Combination box-open-end wrench (8 mm)
Remarks: Remarks:
Reference type: M41-7 Reference type: M41-8
600_300090.ai KTC KTC
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Remarks: Remarks:
600_300091.ai
018-241-08E
MC-259
Combination box-open-end wrench (10 mm) Combination box-open-end wrench (13 mm) Cutter Calipers
Reference type: M41-10 Reference type: M41-13 Reference type: - Reference type: N-15
Reference manufacturer: Reference manufacturer: Reference manufacturer: Reference manufacturer:
KTC KTC Any commercially available one Mitutoyo
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Remarks: Remarks: Remarks: Remarks: Inspection required.

A block gauge for use in
inspection requires calibration.
Allen wrench set Allen wrench Steel rule (150 mm) Steel rule (300 mm)
Reference type: BLX-9 Reference type: 1.5 mm Reference type: Type C Reference type: Type C
Bondhus Bondhus YAMAYO YAMAYO
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Remarks: Remarks: Used to attach/ Remarks: Inspection required Remarks: Inspection required
detach a bolt fixing the SE rear
cover.
Digital multimeter Midget ratchet set Steel tape measure (5.5 m) Soldering iron (30 W)
Reference type: CD731 Reference type: 7331 Reference type: WS5005 Reference type: Dash15
SANWA CHAPMAN NEOLOCK HAKKO
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Remarks: Inspection and Remarks: Remarks: Remarks:

calibration required
Crimp pliers Crimp pliers Solder Desoldering tool with a vacuum attachment
Reference type: P-73 Reference type: A125 Reference type: NO.66 Reference type: US140
HOZAN IZUMI HAKKO EDSYN
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Remarks: Remarks: Used to replace a Remarks: Remarks:

terminal of the X-ray shot
cable.
Wire stripper Scissors Adapter plug Penlight

Reference type: P-95 Reference type: - Reference type: 999-1 Reference type: BF-318

HOZAN Any commercially available one HAKKO MATSUSHITA ELECTRIC
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Remarks: Remarks: Remarks:

Remarks:
600_300092.ai 600_300093.ai
018-241-08E
MC-260
Loupe Blower 10.2 Special Tools and Measuring Instruments
Reference type: 10X Reference type: JUMBO
 NOTE 
PEAK HURRICANE
To service the machine, use the servicing instruments and tools that have been
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
inspected and calibrated.
Remarks: Remarks:
If the machine were serviced using servicing instruments and tools that have not
been inspected and calibrated, proper performance of the machine could not be
guaranteed.
Cloth Wristband
Reference type: - Reference type: - Vacuum cleaner Maintenance PC
Reference manufacturer: - Reference manufacturer: - Reference type: - Reference type:
Reference manufacturer:
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 Reference manufacturer: -
Any commercially available one
Remarks: Remarks: Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Remarks: Remarks:
Push-pull gauge Dosimeter

Reference type: - Reference type: - Dust-free paper Torque driver
Reference manufacturer: - Reference manufacturer: - Reference type: Kimwipe Reference type: Screw diameter: M3, M4, M5,
Reference manufacturer: M6
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 CRECIA Reference manufacturer: - Screw shape: +
Remarks: For 1kg. Remarks: Calibration required Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1

Inspection and calibration
required Remarks: Remarks: Include 60 cNm and
200 cNm in torque adjustment
600_300094.ai
range. Calibration required.
USB disk drive USB keyboard

Reference type: Reference type:
Reference manufacturer: - Reference manufacturer: -
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Remarks: Remarks:
USB mouse
Reference type:
Reference manufacturer: -
Qty.: 1
Remarks:
POCX010310001E.ai
018-241-08E
MC-261
10.3 Special Consumables 10.4 Semi-Standard Tools
Electrical tape Cable tie Box driver (7 mm) Box driver (8 mm)
Reference type: 33+ Reference type: PLT1M Reference type: D-50 (2757) Reference type: D-50 (2758)
Reference manufacturer: Reference manufacturer: Reference manufacturer:
Reference manufacturer: 3M
KITAGAWA KOGYO HOZAN HOZAN
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 50 Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Remarks: Remarks: Remarks: Remarks:
Cable tie Cable tie IC clip IC clip

Reference type: PLT1.5M Reference type: PLT2M Reference type: TC-16 Reference type: TC-24
Reference manufacturer: 3M Reference manufacturer: 3M
KITAGAWA KOGYO KITAGAWA KOGYO
Qty.: 50 Qty.: 50 Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Remarks: Remarks: Remarks: Remarks:
Screw locking bond Lubricant Magnetized Phillips screwdriver Closed wrench (17 mm)
Reference type: Reference type: Molykote Reference type: Reference type:
#1401B
EM-30L
Three Bond
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 Qty.: 2
Qty.: 1
Remarks: Remarks: Remarks:
Remarks:
600_300097.ai
Undercoat paint Instant adhesive

Reference type: Reference type:
LOCTITE #770 LOCTITE #406
LOCTITE LOCTITE
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Remarks: Remarks:
For pasting the corner guide For pasting the corner guide
600_300096.ai
Polyimide tape
Reference type: No.5412
Reference manufacturer: 3M
Qty.: 1
Remarks: For retaining the

cables in the SE.
308S0086
018-241-08E
MC-262
BLANK PAGE
018-241-08E
MC-263
BLANK PAGE
018-241-08E
AppxMC1-1
Appendix 1. Setting Country Code for (4) Click [Exit Service Utility].
the FUJIFILM-made AP (5) Start the Internet Explorer.
As a factory default setting for overseas, the wireless function of FUJIFILM-made AP
is disabled. (6) Enter “192.168.0.25” to the address bar and press the <Enter> key.
To enable the wireless function, configure the country code settings of FUJIFILM-made
AP.
REFERENCES POCX010709001E.ai
To set the FUJIFILM-made AP country code, the following is necessary. The login window of FUJIFILM-made AP opens.
- The FUJIFILM-made AP’s IP address is 192.168.0.25 (default)
- Communications between the DR-ID 300CL and FUJIFILM-made AP are established (7) Enter “fujifilm” into the password field and click [Login].
- The FUJIFILM-made AP is properly connected
- 192.168.0.10 is set to the DR-ID 300CL’s Eth1 port
1. Checking the IP Address of the FUJIFILM-made AP

Login the FUJIFILM-made AP to check if the IP address of the FUJIFILM-made AP is
the default one.
(1) Connect the keyboard jig and mouse jig to the USB port.
(2) Turn ON the switch key.

The DR-ID 300CL-AP starts.
(3) Within a period of 3 seconds after the initial window opens, POCX010709002E.ai
sequentially click the upper left and upper right corners of the window. The FUJIFILM-made AP setup window opens.
Click the upper left corner and then the upper right corner.
(8) Terminate the Internet Explorer.
DXL04010001.ai
018-241-05E
DR-XD 1000 Service Manual AppxMC1-1
AppxMC1-2
2. Setting the Country Code for FUJIFILM-made AP (2) Double-click the “region_set_to_xx.bat” file in the “AP_Countrycode”
folder.
REFERENCES
■ Executing the batch file for FUJIFILM-made AP country code
setting The “xx” in the file name “region_set_to_xx.bat” changes according to different
country.
(1) Copy the “AP_Countrycode.zip” attached on the SEI file and paste it
to the DR-ID 300CL, then unzip the file.
 INSTRUCTION 
Since the “AP_Countrycode.zip” file contains invisible files, the batch file will not
run properly if unzipping the file before copying and pasting the contents to the
DR-ID 300CL. 1200_700300.ai
Therefore, copy the “AP_Countrycode.zip” file and paste it to the DR-ID 300CL, The command prompt window opens.
then unzip it in DR-ID 300CL.
REFERENCE
For overseas, the batch files for setting the country codes are distributed by ECN,
and the usable frequency bands vary from country to country. 1200_700301.ai
$ {MD: 11._Usable Radio Frequency Bands in Each Country for DR-ID

12xxSEs and FUJIFILM-made AP}
(3) Press the <Enter> key.
The country code setup starts.
The command prompt automatically terminates after the settings.
NOTE
When the message “mini-AP not working...” appears, check the following items,
and redo the procedures from step 1.
- Check that the DR-ID 300CL is connected correctly to the FUJIFILM-made AP.
- Check if FUJIFILM-made AP can be connected by using “192.168.0.25”.
1200_700302.ai
018-241-07E
AppxMC1-3
■ Execution confirmation of FUJIFILM-made AP country code (4) Check that setting values are displayed for “Channel”, “Mac address”
setting batch and “Transmit power”.
Before setting
(1) Check that the “WIRELESS” LED of FUJIFILM-made AP lights up.
Before setting After setting
1200_700337E.ai
(2) Start the Internet Explorer.

After setting
(3) Enter “192.168.0.25” to the address bar and press the <Enter> key.
POCX010709001E.ai
The login window of FUJIFILM-made AP opens.
(4) Enter “fujifilm” into the password field and click [Login].
1200_700338E.ai
POCX010709002E.ai
The FUJIFILM-made AP setup window opens.
018-241-03E
AppxMC1-4
■ Troubleshooting
● Phenomenon
When the FUJIFILM-made AP country code setting batch is running, the processing
freeze at the following window or all of the windows close.
1200_700339.ai
● Cause
- Lack of files required for executing the FUJIFILM-made AP country code setting
batch file.
- The IP address of FUJIFILM-made AP is not default IP address (192.168.0.25).
● Coping strategy
- Unzip the “AP_Countrycode.zip” again.
- Check that the IP address of FUJIFILM-made AP is “192.168.0.25”.
018-241-03E
AppxMC2-1
Appendix 2. Changing the SE Country 2. Setting
Code  INSTRUCTION 
Turn ON the power when changing the SE country code for only one SE.
NOTE
Be sure to perform this procedure in order to observe the Radio Law. (1) Make configuration settings.
The SE radio function is turned OFF at the factory.
$ {MU:5.3.3_WIRELESS Setting}
The SE country code needs to be changed in order to perform - ESSID: Follow the settings of installed facility
- CHANNEL & MODE: Follow the settings of installed facility
the wireless connection.
- BSSID: Follow the settings of installed facility
 NOTE  - ENCRYPTION: Follow the settings of installed facility
- WLAN OUTPUT: Do not change the default (ON)
With the MC V16.5 or later, the communications method between the MC and the
- WLAN AUTO RATE: Do not change the default (VARIABLE)
SE is changed, and the country code corresponding to the new communications
method is needed for setting the SE country code. The new country code settings are - COUNTRY CODE: Change the default value (4036) to the setting value
distributed via the ECN. for the corresponding country in accordance with the
“Country Code (MC)” column in the table below.
Also, the new country code setting file is usable with all of the MC versions.
$ {MD: 11._Usable Radio Frequency Bands in Each Country for DR-ID
REFERENCE
1. Preparation The country code set in this step is set in the MC software.
(1) Copy the zip file (SE_Countrycode.zip) supplied by ECN to the DR-ID
(2) Left-click the MC Manager from the task tray and perform “EXIT”.
300CL and unzip it on the DR-ID 300CL.
Check that the MC Manager icon has disappeared from the task tray, and then
 NOTE  start the MC Manager from “Start menu” → “Start-up”.
Since the unzipped folder contains invisible files, if just the visible files are copied,
it will not normally operate.
018-241-07E
AppxMC2-2
(3) Set the SE to the DR slot. (7) When the following window opens, enter the IP address (default:
192.168.0.10) for the image local network side of DR-ID 300CL, and
 NOTE  click [OK].
When the following error appears, click [OK].
1200_700303.ai
 NOTE 
- The command prompt completes automatically after several minutes if the IP
address of SE is different. In this case, check the IP address and perform the
procedures from step (1).
- When the Standard mode and Enhance mode selections are displayed, select
“2. Enhanced” only when setting the VA expanded security. Normally select “1.
800_700190.ai Standard”.
(4) Close all unnecessary windows.

(8) Check that the following window is displayed.
- A completion message is displayed
(5) Execute the batch file (replace_countrycode.bat).
- The following code (differs from the value entered in EDIT CONFIGURATION
REFERENCE in step 1) is displayed
The batch file for changing the SE country code is supplied by ECN. $ {MD: 11._Usable Radio Frequency Bands in Each Country for DR-ID
The following command prompt is displayed automatically.
800_700191.ai
(6) When the following window opens, enter the IP address of SE and
click [OK].
800_700192.ai
800_700193.ai
Perform the procedures from step (5) again if the above window is not displayed.
018-241-07E
AppxMC2-3
(9) Close the command prompt.
(10) Restart the SE and check that the SE LED changes from flashing to
lighting up (about 30 seconds).
lighting up.
(12) Restart the SE.

REFERENCE
After restarting the SE 3 times, the wireless output of the SE will turn to ON.
- After restarting the SE for the first time, the SE country code is enabled.
- After restarting the SE for the second time, the wireless setting is enabled.
- After restarting the SE for the third time, the error state is cleared and the
wireless output of the SE will turn ON.
(13) Left-click the MC Manager from the task tray and execute “EXIT”.
Check that the MC Manager icon has disappeared from the task tray, and then
start the MC Manager from “Start menu” → “Start-up”.
018-241-07E
AppxMC2-4
3. Checking the Settings (3) Check that the correct country code has been set, and click [Next].
 DR Maintenance Software
(1) Set the SE to the DR slot.
(2) Select the target SE from the drop-down list box in DR Maintenance
Software, and click [GET].
1200_700500E.ai
 NOTE 
If the SE country code is wrong, set the SE country code again.
1200_700499E.ai
018-241-04E
AppxMC2-5
 RU PC-TOOL (4) Click [SE Board State] and check that the correct country code has
been set.
(1) Set the SE to the DR slot. #1 Click: [SE Board State]
(2) Start up the MUTL. #2 Check: SE country code
SE Board State >> window
(3) Click [BOARD STATE CHECK], and then click [SE Board State >>].
#1 Click: [BOARD STATE CHECK]
#2 Click: [SE Board State >>]
#3 Input: Target SE No. #2
#4 Click: [SET] #1
BOARD STATE CHECK window
#1
#2
SE Board State >> window 1200_700383.ai
 NOTE 
#3 #4
1200_700382.ai
018-241-04E
AppxMC2-6
4. Troubleshooting ■ Countermeasure / Action
Unzip the zip file of the batch file again. Check the IP address of SE and the IP
■ Phenomena address for image local network side of DR-ID 300CL and then check that the
communications between the DR-ID 300CL and SE are established. After performing
The SE country code batch file stops at the following window while it is being all the above, execute the batch file again.
executed, or all of the windows close.
- Wrong SE IP address
1200_700340.ai
- Wrong IP address for image local network side of DR-ID 300CL
1200_700341.ai
- Non-existent invisible files
1200_700342.ai
018-241-04E
AppxMC2-7
BLANK PAGE
018-241-04E
AppxMC2-8
BLANK PAGE
018-241-04E
AppxMC3-1
Appendix 3. Updating MP OS Version (3) Click [Display MP1 Kernel Version] on the MP1 Version Check >>
window to display the version of the MP application software.
Check that the displayed version coincides with the version indicated in Readme.
txt in the MP OS media.
1. Checking the MP OS Version #1 Click: [Display MP1 Kernel Version]
#2 Check: Version
(1) Start up the MUTL. Display MP1 Software Version <Display example>
(2) Click [VERSION CHECK] command, and then click [MP Version >>]
and [MP1 Version Check >>].
#1 Click: [VERSION CHECK]
#2 Click: [MP Version >>] #1
#3 Click: [MP1 Version Check >>] #2
VERSION CHECK window
#1
#2
MP Version>>window
1200_600164E.ai
This procedure is terminated when the version coincides with the version
indicated in Readme.txt.
Follow the procedures below when the version does not coincide with the version
$ {2._Updating MP OS Version}
REFERENCE
The appropriate version of the MP OS is indicated in Readme.txt in the MP OS
media.
MP1 Version Check>>window Readme.txt <Display example>
New MP Kernel ver
#3
Old MP Kernel ver
1200_300179.ai
1200_700092E.ai
018-241-03E
AppxMC3-2
2. Updating MP OS Version ■ Updating OS Version
CAUTION (1) Insert the MP OS Installer Ver. 1.0 media into the DVD drive for the DR-
ID 300CL and open Windows Explorer.
- Do not detach the AC cable while the MP OS is being upgraded.
(2) Open “D:\kernel_fwupdate_ip_fix\debian_version” folder and execute
- Do not switch OFF the main breaker while the MP OS is being upgraded.
“fwupdate.bat”.
NOTE
- This procedure is an example whereas the MP IP address is “192.168.0.20”.
- This procedure is an example whereas the DVD drive is the D drive.
- When upgrading the MP OS, execute the upgrade after attaching the AC cable.
■ Preparations
(1) Turn ON the DR-ID 300CL.
(2) Select “Shut Down” in the menu of the DR-ID 300CL while pressing
the <Shift> key to terminate the DR-ID 300CL application and the MC
application.
1200_300166.ai
The Command Prompt window appears.

1200_300167.ai
(4) Enter the MP IP address (192.168.0.20) and press the <Enter> key.
1200_300168.ai
018-241-03E
AppxMC3-3
(5) Enter the IP address of the currently operating PC (192.168.0.10) and (6) The MP restarts automatically after the following window appears.
press the <Enter> key.
1200_300169.ai
The OS version update starts.
1200_300171.ai
1200_300170.ai
(7) Press the <Enter> key to close the Command Prompt window.
It takes up to approx. 5 minutes to complete the installation.
(8) Remove the MP OS Installer Ver. 1.0 media from the DVD drive for the
CAUTION DR-ID 300CL and restart the system.
While write into the HDD is in progress, never turn OFF the MP power. If turned (9) Check the MP OS version.
OFF, the data on the HDD gets damaged, and the MP cannot boot up as a result. $ {1._Checking the MP OS Version}
018-241-03E
AppxMC3-4
BLANK PAGE
018-241-03E
AppxMC4-1
Appendix 4. Replacing the Arm  Removal procedures
Open/Close Lock Block (1) Remove the following components.

In order to increase the strength margin of the arm open/close lock block, the shape of $ {MC:2.5_Arm Rear Cover}
the arm open/close lock block is to be changed from that of the machine No. ****0201.
INSTRUCTION
Therefore, this includes the procedures for replacing the old type arm open/close lock
block with the new type arm open/close lock block. If the new type components are removed, Steps (2) and (3) do not need to be
implemented. Proceed to Step (4).
NOTE
Old type arm open/close lock block is installed on machine No. ****0200 or earlier.
Machine No. ****0201 has been redesigned and it is not covered by this procedure. (2) Remove the guide rails on both sides.
#2 Remove the guide rails.
 Parts to be Changed #3 Remove the screws.
Parts to be changed between the old type and the new type are the following. #4 Remove the guide rails.
Part name Old type part New type part
#6 Remove the guide rails.
Arm open/close #8 Remove the guide rails.
lock block POCX01070H014.ai
#5
POCX01070H013.ai Thin head 3x6 (x3)
Guide rail #6
POCX01070H011.ai
#1
POCX01070H012.ai
Thin head 3x6 (x4)
Special low head
screw
Special low head M5x6 (x2) Special low head M5x8 (x3)
(for arm open/ #7
close lock block) Thin head 3x6 (x3)
NOTE #2
The shapes of the new type arm open/close lock block for USA and for other than
USA differ. Purchase parts which are compatible for the country where it will be
installed. The attachment procedures are not different. #3
Thin head 3x6 (x2)
#8
Screws

Symbol in the
figure #4
Thin Head (3x6) [1] Thin Head 3x6 308S0653 12
Special Low Head Special Low Head POCX01070H001E.ai
Hexagon 3 mm 306S0101 3
Screws (M5x6) M5x6
018-241-05E
AppxMC4-2
(3) Apply the screwlock (ThreeBond1401B). (4) Remove the old type arm open/close lock block.
#1 Lift the cable protection cover. #1 Remove the screws.
#2 Remove the screw. #2 Remove the arm open/close lock block.
#3 Apply the screwlock (ThreeBond1401B). #3 Remove the screws.
#4 Install the screw.
#2
#3
Special Low Head
M5x6 (x2)
#1
Special Low Head
#1 M5x6 (x2)
#2
#3
#4
POCX01070H003E.ai
INSTRUCTION
When removing the new type arm open/close lock block, implement as per the
following steps.
#2 Remove the arm open/close lock block.
#1
Special Low Head
M5x8 (x3)
POCX01070H002.ai
NOTE
#2
If the lock pin is subjected to high loads over and over, and if the above screw is
loose, this might lead to the arm malfunctioning. Apply the screwlock (ThreeBond
1401B), and firmly secure the screw.
POCX01070H015E.ai
018-241-04E
AppxMC4-3
 Reinstallation procedures (2) Put the cable protection cover and install the guide rails on both
sides.
(1) Install the new type arm open/close lock block. #1 Put the cable protection cover and install the new type component guide
#1 Install the arm open/close lock block. rails.
#2 Temporarily tighten the screws. NOTE
#3 Press the arm open/close lock block in the direction of the arrow.
#4 Securely tighten the screws. Use the new type component guide rails in the above #1 procedure.
NOTE #2 Install the screws.
Use the new type arm open/close lock block and the new type component screws #3 Put the cable protection cover and install the guide rails.
(special low head M5x8 (x3)) in the above procedures. #4 Install the screws.
#5 Put the cable protection cover and install the guide rails.
#7 Put the cable protection cover and install the guide rails.
#2, #4
Special Low Head #5
M5x8 (x3)
#3 #6
Thin head 3x6 (x3)
#1
#7
POCX01070H004E.ai
#1 #8
Thin head 3x6 (x3)
INSTRUCTION
#2
When replacing the new type components which were removed, Step (2) does not
Thin head 3x6 (x4)
need to be implemented. Proceed to Step (3).
#3
#4
Thin head 3x6 (x2)
POCX01070H005E.ai
REFERENCE
When putting the cable protection cover on the guide rail, attaching it will be
made easier if the arm is lifted up a bit.
018-241-04E
AppxMC4-4
NOTE  Confirm operations
When installing the guide rails, press them in the direction of the arrows and Confirm the arm operations.
install the screws.
- With the arm lock release knob lowered, the arm is locked, do not lift up the arm.
- If the arm lock release knob is pulled up, the arm lock will be unlocked, and the arm
can be lifted up.
NOTE
If the lock release knob is pulled up while the arm is being lifted up, the arm lock pin
will interfere with the arm open/close lock block, and the lock will not be unlocked.
Check that the arm lock is unlocked, then lift up the arm.
Arm lock pin
Arm open/close
lock block
POCX01070H015Ea.ai
POCX01070H006.ai

018-241-04E
AppxMC5-1
Appendix 5. Backing Up and Restoring  Recording media for backup
System Images in Windows 7  NOTE 

The recording media for backup must not be taken outside of facilities since
personal information is included.
 NOTE 
This section only contains the backing up procedures for Windows 7. “DVD-R” or “USB hard disk dedicated to backup” is used as the recording media for
For Windows10, refer to the below. backup.
In case of “DVD-R”, it is required to connect a writable DVD drive.
$ {MC: Appendix 13._Backup/Restoration with Acronis True Image 2018}
Prepare adequate DVD-Rs since the number of “DVD-R”s differs depending on the
data volume and compression effi ciency.
In case of “USB hard disk dedicated to backup”, it is required to connect a USB hard
1. Overview disk dedicated to backup for facilities.
Acquire the content of built-in hard disk as backup images using the functions
mounted standardly to Windows 7.  System repair disc
When the data is lost due to a hard disk failure or others, it can be restored from when
The system repair disc, which is created by procedures of “Creating the system
the data is backed up.
image”, is used as a starting disk to restore the backup data by using the acquired
 NOTE  backup images.
A “DVD-R” or a “CD-R” will be used.
This procedure is not necessary for the systems, which are synchronized with external
equipment, such as “CLUSTER CONSTITUTION”. The inconsistency may occur
during synchronization with external equipment though the backup data is restored.
 How to restore
Use “System Recovery Option” in “Re-image Your Computer” which is a standard
function of Windows 7.
How to back up
 Start “System Recovery Option” from “system repair disc”.
Use “Create system image” in “Backup and Restore” which is a standard function of
Windows 7.
Back up the data after starting the OS with all the applications are complete in
advance.
018-241-07E
AppxMC5-2
 Measurement result of backup/restoration (reference)  Precaution
The measurement result of backup/restoration in different environment is shown as Depending on the DVD drive, media and version of drive software, when the data
below. is backed up to DVD-R, the backup/restoration may be not performed normally, so
confirm the operation with the same environment of client in advance.
 NOTE 
Take the data as a rough guide since the measurement result differs depending on the
conditions.
 Measurement environment and Measurement condition
Case Measurement environment Measurement

No. PC Spec Backup destination condition
- Intel(R)Core(TM)
i5-4300U
DR-ID 300CL V10.0
- CPU1.9GHz/2.50 - External USB DVD
28.8GB Used
1 DR-XD1000 PC GHz drive (DVD-R)
C: 19.9GB/39.0GB
- Mounted memory - External USB HDD
I: 70.4GB/80.1GB
4.00GHz
- System type 64bit
 Measurement result
Backup destination
Case
Backup/Restore Built-in hard disk
No. External USB HDD
(DVD-R)
Backup 50m 12m
1
ReStore 24m 15m50s
018-241-04E
AppxMC5-3
2. Backing up Windows 7
2.1 Confirmation Before Backup

(2) Confirm that there is no study in the output queue list.

NOTE
Delete the examination from output or the output queue.
(3) Click “Shut Down” in the menu.

The exit window opens.
(4) Click while holding down the <Shift> key.

(5) If exists in the taskbar, select “End” from the right-click menu.
NOTE
Perform step (6) after waiting for about 5 seconds.
(6) Start Task Manager and end the following processes.

- “CooperManager.exe”
- “RemoteLoginChecker.exe”
- “PPSMonitor.exe”
- “SKBLauncher.exe”
(7) When “MCManager” is running, click the “MCManager” icon on the

taskbar and select “Exit”.
018-241-04E
AppxMC5-4
2.2 Confirming and Changing Windows Services (3) Double-click the “Services”.
To start “Backup and Restore” which is a standard function of Windows 7, confirm and
change the settings of “Startup Type” for Windows services.
 Confirming the “Startup Type”

(1) Select “Control Panel” from the menu.
DXCL14030F017.ai
The “Services” window opens.

(4) Note down the settings of “Startup Type” for the following Windows
services.
AWV32150.ai
The “All Control Panel Items” window opens. 1

2
3
(2) Select . 4
5
6
7
DXCL14030E018.ai
Name of Windows Services

1 Block Level Backup Engine Service
2 COM+ Event System
DXCL14030F016.ai
The “Administrative Tools” window opens. 3 Microsoft Software Shadow Copy Provider
4 Remote Procedure Call (RPC)
5 System Event Notification Service
6 Volume Shadow Copy
7 Windows Backup
NOTE
Keep the setup value of “Startup type” safe because it will be used for
comfirmation after backup or restoration.
018-241-04E
AppxMC5-5
 Changing the “Startup type” Setting
 (2) Select “Manual” from the “Startup type” pull-down menu, and click
[Apply].
Procedure of changing “COM+ Event System” is described as an example. Change
the settings for all Windows services with a different setup value.
Performing “backup and restoration” is premised on the basis of the following setup
values of “Startup Type” for Windows services.
Name of Windows Services Startup type

1 Block Level Backup Engine Service Manual
2 COM+ Event System Manual
3 Microsoft Software Shadow Copy Manual
Provider
4 Remote Procedure Call (RPC) Automatic
5 System Event Notification Service Automatic
6 Volume Shadow Copy Manual
7 Windows Backup Manual
DXCL14030F020.ai
(1) Double-click the “COM+ Event System”.

(3) Click .
The system returns to the “Services” window.
(4) Confirm that the setup value of “Startup Type” has changed.
DXCL14030F019.ai
The “COM+ Event System Properties (Local Computer)” window opens.

DXCL14030F021.ai
(5) Perform steps 1 through 4 again to set other Windows services.
(6) Close the “Services” window.

The system returns to the “Administrative Tools” window.
(7) Close the “Administrative Tools” window.

The system returns to the “All Control Panel Items” window.
018-241-05E
AppxMC5-6
2.3 Creating the Backup Image (3) Click the “Create a system image”.
 For using DVD

Create backup images into “DVD-R” by using “Backup and Restore” which is a
standard function of Windows 7.
 Creating the System Image

(1) Connect the DVD drive to the USB port of PC. DXCL14030F023.ai
(4) Select “On one or more DVDs” and click [Next].
AWS14030E027.ai
(2) Click . DXCL14030F024.ai
DXCL14030F022.ai
The “Backup and Restore” window opens.
018-241-04E
AppxMC5-7
(5) Confirm the backup settings, and click [Start backup]. (6) Write down the label displayed in the window to the surface of DVD-R,
and insert it to the PC.
The “Are you sure you want to format this media?” window opens.
NOTE
Using a ball pen or a pencil may hurt the DVD media. Write down with a magic
marker.
REFERENCE
The example for a label is shown as follows.
POCX01030E011E.ai
The “Label and insert a blank media bigger than 1GB” message displays.
REFERENCE AWS14030E121.ai
The drives with checkmarks are displayed in “The following drives will be backed
up:”.
(7) Click .
018-241-04E
AppxMC5-8
(8) Click [Format].  Creating the “system repair disc”
After the backup, “The backup completed successfully.” message and The “Do you
want to create a system repair disc?” window opens.
(1) Click [Yes].
The “Create a system repair disc” window opens.
(9) Perform steps 6 through 8 again for backing up large capacity of data. (2) Insert an unused DVD-R (or an unused CD-R) into the PC and click
REFERENCE [Create disc].
- The use area of hard disk is 15 GB in the status immediately after inserting a Start the creating “system repair disc”.
new DVD-R (no data is stored). In this case, it takes about 30 minutes to write After 2 to 3 minutes, the creation of “system repair disc” is completed.
to 2 DVD-Rs. The “Using the system repair disc” window opens.
- In case of the use area of hard disk is 50 GB in total, it takes about 85 minutes
REFERENCE
to write to 8 DVD-Rs.
DVD-R ejection takes about 15 sec when you replace the DVD-R (CD-R).
NOTE
If there is a “System restore disc”, there is no need to implement the following “● (3) Remove the DVD-R (or CD-R) from PC and write down the information
Creating the “system repair disc””. The System restore disc is bundled with the to the label.
product.
NOTE
marker.
REFERENCE
POCX01030E011J.ai a
AWS14030E122.ai
018-241-05E
AppxMC5-9
(4) Click [Close].  For using USB HDD
The “Create a system repair disc” window opens. Create backup images into “USB hard disk dedicated to backup” by using “Backup
and Restore” which is a standard function of Windows 7.
(5) Click [OK].
The “Create a system image” window opens.  Connecting the “USB hard disk dedicated to backup”
(6) Click [Close]. (1) Connect the USB hard disk to the USB port of PC.
(7) Click “Control Panel Home”.
DXCL14030F032.ai
The system returns to the “All Control Panel Items” window. AWS14030E027.ai
(8) Close the “All Control Panel Items” window. The “AutoPlay” window opens.
(2) Close the “AutoPlay” window.
(9) Keep the media that recorded the backup data.
Keep together the setup values noted down in “system repair disc (a DVD-R or a CD-
R)”, “USB hard disk dedicated to backup” and “2.2.1 Confirming the “Startup Type” as
a set.
018-241-04E
AppxMC5-10
 Creating the System Image (4) Confirm the backup settings, and click [Start backup].
(1) Click the “Backup and Restore” from “All Control Panel Items”.
DXCL14030F022.ai
(2) Click the “Create a system image”.
POCX01030E011E.ai
After backup completed, the “The backup completed successfully.” message

displays and “Do you want to create a system repair disc?” window opens.
REFERENCE
DXCL14030F023.ai
- The drives placed to checkmarks are displayed in “The following drives will be
The “Where do you want to save the backup?” window opens. backed up:”.
- The use area of hard disk is 15 GB in the status immediately after inserting a
new DVD-R (no data is stored). In this case, it takes about 5 minutes to back
(3) Select “On a hard disk”, select the connected HDD and click [Next]. up the data.
- In case of the use area of hard disk is 50 GB in total, it takes about 35 minutes
to back up the data.
DXCL14030F035.ai
The “Which drives do you want to include in the backup?” window opens.
018-241-04E
AppxMC5-11
NOTE (3) Remove the DVD-R (or CD-R) from PC and write down the information
If there is a “System restore disc”, there is no need to implement the following “● to the label.
Creating the “System Repair Disc””. The System restore disc is bundled with the NOTE
product.
marker.
REFERENCE
POCX01030E011J.ai
 Creating the “System Repair Disc”

(1) Click [Yes].
AWS14030E122.ai
The “Create a system repair disc” window opens.

(4) Click [Close].
(2) Insert an unused DVD-R (or an unused CD-R) into the PC and click The “Create a system repair disc” window opens.
[Create disc].
Start the creating “system repair disc”. (5) Click [OK].
The “Create a system image” window opens.
After 2 to 3 minutes, the creation of “system repair disc” is completed.
The “Using the system repair disc” window opens.
(6) Click [Close].
018-241-05E
AppxMC5-12
DXCL14030F032.ai
(8) Click (Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media) on the taskbar,
and click the USB hard disk being connected.
The “Safe To Remove Hardware” message displays.
NOTE
If the message did not display, open the explorer to make sure there is no USB
hard disk being connected.
(9) Remove the USB hard disk from the USB port of PC.
AWS14030E030.ai
(10) Keep the USB hard disk that the backup data is recorded.
Keep together the setup values noted down in “system repair disc (a DVD-R or a CD-
R)”, “USB hard disk dedicated to backup” and “2.2.1 Confirming the “Startup Type” as
a set.
018-241-05E
AppxMC5-13
2.4 Resetting the Windows Services (3) Double-click “COM+ Event System”.
Restore the Windows services settings to the time before creating backup images.
Make the settings as same as which is noted down in “2.2 Confirming and Changing
Windows Services”.
$ For details on settings, see “2.2 Confirming and Changing Windows Services”.
Procedure of resetting “COM+ Event System” is described as an example. Restore all

the settings for Windows services as required.
(1) Click “Administrative Tools”. DXCL14030F019.ai
The “COM+ Event System Properties (Local Computer)” window opens.
(4) Select the original setup value from the pull-down menu of “Startup
Type” and click [Apply].
DXCL14030F016.ai
The “Administrative Tools” window opens.
(2) Double-click the “Services”.
DXCL14030F033.ai
DXCL14030F017.ai (5) Click .

The “Services” window opens. The system returns to the “Services” window.
018-241-04E
AppxMC5-14
(6) Confirm that the setup value of “Startup Type” has changed.
DXCL14030F034.ai
(7) Perform steps 1 through 6 to restore settings for other Windows

services.
(8) Close the “Services” window.

The system returns to the “Administorative Tools” window.
(9) Close the “Administorative Tools” windows.

(10) Close the “All Control Panel Items” windows.

(11) Restart the PC.
018-241-04E
AppxMC5-15
3. Restoring System Images
For DR-XD 1000, the factory default system image is attached.
This chapter describes how to restore the lost data (at the time point that backup
performed) by using backup image when data lost owing to hard disk broken, etc.
By using the Windows 7 standard function “System Image Recovery” in “System
Recovery Options” to restore from the backup image that was made in the past.
Open “System Recovery Options” from “Create a system repair disc”. The restoration
must be performed on the same device that backup was made. It might be licensing
violations if doing restoration on different devices.
CAUTIONS
After the system image restoration completed, revert the setting.
018-241-04E
AppxMC5-16
3.1 BIOS Setup and Starting from Boot Destination (3) Select the “Save&Exit” tab, select the USB drive, and press the
<Enter> key.
(1) Connect the DVD drive to the USB port of PC, and set the “system
repair” disk into the PC.
(2) Turn ON the PC power while holding down the <Delete> key.
NOTE
- Press the <Delete> key in advance because the logo window displayed for
only a short time after PC is turned ON.
- If the <Delete> key is not pressed with the timeliness, the “Please select boot
device:” window will not open. In such an instance, restart the PC to perform
step (1) above again.
“BIOS” windows opens AWS14030E034.ai
(4) When “Press any key to boot from CD or DVD ...” is displayed, press
the <Enter> key within 5 seconds.
AWS14030E035-1.ai
The “Windows boot Manager” window opens.
DXCL16030F025J.ai
POCX01030E002J.ai
018-241-04E
AppxMC5-17
3.2 Restoring from Backup Images (2) Select “Restore your computer a system image that you created
earlier” , and click [Next].
NOTE
Since the touch panel function is not installed, connect the mouse.
 Restoring from DVD-R

By using the Windows 7 standard function “System Image Recovery” in “System
Recovery Options” to restore from the backup image in DVD-R.
(1) Set the following items, and click [Next].
- Select a keyboard input method : US
AWS14030E097.ai
The “Re-image Your Computer” window opens.
(3) From the DVDs created in “2.3 Creating the Backup Image”, replace
the lastly created DVD media (the second one if two in total) by “system
POCX01030E003E.ai
repair disc”, and click [Retry].
The “System Recovery Options” window opens.
NOTE
If you can not use the mouse and keyboard, turn off the power and restart it.
AWS14030E098.ai
018-241-04E
AppxMC5-18
(4) Select “Select a system image”, and click [Next]. (6) Select the “Date and time” of the backup data to be restored and click
[Next].
AWS14030E110.ai
AWS14030E112.ai
(5) Select the “Location” of the backup data to be restored and click [Next].
(7) Perform the following procedure in accordance with drives to be
restored and the type of hard disk.
 When replace the HDD and restore the all drives

I. Confirm that a checkmark is placed to “Format and repartition disks” and click
[Next].
AWS14030E111.ai
AWS14030E113.ai
The “Your computer will be restored from the following system image:” window
opens.
018-241-04E
AppxMC5-19
(8) Click [Finish]. (12) Clisk [Restart now].
REFERENCE
The PC restarts automatically after about 60 seconds since the window openes.
(13) Restore the “Startup type” to the original setting.

$ See “2.4 Resetting the Windows Services”
AWS14030E119.ai
The confirmation window opens.
(9) Click [Yes].
AWS14030E120.ai
The “Please insert the following disk:” window opens.
(10) Replace the indicated DVD-R and click [OK].

The restoration of system image starts.
The “Please insert the following disk:” window opens.
(11) Insert the specified DVD-R and click [OK].

REFERENCE
For subsequent procedures, when “Please insert the following disk:” is displayed,
follow the instruction and insert the DVD media.
The “Do you want to restart the computer now?” window opens.
018-241-08E
AppxMC5-20
 Restoring from USB Hard Disk (4) When “Press any key to boot from CD or DVD ...” is displayed, press
the <Enter> key within 5 seconds.
Use the Windows 7 standard function “System Image Recovery” in “System Recovery
Options” to restore from the USB hard disk that backup was made in the past.
(1) Connect the DVD drive to the USB port of PC, and set the “system
repair” disk into the PC.
AWS14030E035-1.ai
(2) Turn ON the PC power while holding down the <Delete> key. The “Windows boot Manager” window opens.
NOTE
- Press the <Delete> key in advance because the logo window displayed for
only a short time after PC is turned ON.
- If the <Delete> key is not pressed with the timeliness, the “BIOS” window will
not open. In such an instance, restart the PC to perform step (1) above again.
“BIOS” windows opens DXCL16030F025J.ai
(3) Select the “Save&Exit” tab, select the USB drive, and press the (5) Select the “Windows Setup [EMS Enabled]”, and press the <Enter>.
<Enter> key.
AWS14030E036.ai
The “System Recovery Options” window opens.
AWS14030E034.ai
018-241-04E
AppxMC5-21
(6) Set the following items, and click [Next]. (8) Connect the “dedicated USB hard disk for backup” to the USB port on
- Select a language : English (United States) the PC and click [Retry].
- Select a keyboard input method : US
AWS14030E098.ai
AWS14030E096.ai
The “System Recovery Options” window opens. (9) Select “Select a system image”, and click [Next].
(7) Select “Restore your computer a system image that you created
earlier” , and click [Next].
AWS14030E110.ai
The “Select the location of the backup for the computer you want to restore” window
opens.
AWS14030E097.ai
The “Re-image Your Computer” window opens.
018-241-04E
AppxMC5-22
(10) Select the “Location” of the backup data to be restored and click [Next]. (12) Perform the following procedure in accordance with drives to be
restored and the type of hard disk.
I. Confirm that a checkmark is placed to “Format and repartition disks” and click
[Next].
POCX01030E005E.ai
(11) Select the “Date and time” of the backup data to be restored and click
[Next]. POCX01030E007E.ai
The “Your computer will be restored from the following system image:” window
opens.
(13) Click [Finish].
POCX01030E006E.ai
POCX01030E008E.ai
018-241-04E
AppxMC5-23
(14) Click [Yes].
AWS14030E120.ai
Start repairing the system image.

In a few minutes, the confirmation window opens.
REFERENCE
The use area of hard disk is 15 GB in the status immediately after inserting a
new DVD-R (no data is stored). In this case, it takes about 5 minutes to do the
backup. In case of the use area of hard disk is 50 GB in total, it takes about 25
minutes to do the backup.
(15) Click [Restart now].

Windows starts up. After about one minute, the DR-ID 300CL-AP starts running.
REFERENCE
The PC restarts automatically after about 60 seconds since the window openes.
(16) Restore the “Startup type” to the original setting.

$ See “2.4 Resetting the Windows Services”
(17) Remove the DVD media from the DVD drive.
(18) Remove the HDD connected USB from the USB port.
018-241-08E
AppxMC5-24
3.3 Error Avoidance Procedure at the Time of Image (2) Click [Exit Service Utility].
The desktop screen opens.
Drive Formatting
When the image drive (I:) has been formatted, the DR-ID 300CL application may not (3) Insert the DR-ID 300CL-AP CD into the PC.
start after start of the DR-ID 300CL application, the application may start, but study The “DR Console Setup Tool” main menu automatically opens.
start may not be possible, or other errors may occur.
If an error has occurred, reset drive I according to the following procedure. NOTE
Step (4) is not required if the screen is not displayed automatically. Go to step (5).
REFERENCE
Errors occur when under the following situations.
- When the hard disk partition information is different from the one at the time point (4) Enter “0” and press the <Enter> key.
that backup was performed, and only the system disk (C:) was restored.
- When the hard disk was replaced and only the system disk (C:) was restored. The desktop screen opens.
When errors occur, end the system forcedly and perform the following procedures. (5) From the menu, enter “D:\tools\AssocDataFolder\
(1) Within a period of three seconds after the DR-ID 300CL initial window PreCreateFolder.bat” in the “Start search” area and press the <Enter>
opens, sequentially click the upper left corner and then the upper right key.
corner of the window. The command prompt window opens.
Click the upper left corner and then the upper right corner. “Press any key to continue...” message appears.
(6) Confirm that “Finished” is displayed and press the <Enter> key.
The command prompt window close.
(7) Remove the disk from the PC.
DXL03100001.ai
NOTE
When the following window is displayed, enter the login password (fieldengineer)
for Service Utility and click .
MU000035.EPS
018-241-04E
AppxMC6-1
Appendix 6. Application of the Silent (3) Attach the short connector to the connector.
#1 Attach the short connector to the FAN-A connector.
Fan Kit
From Japanese specification #xxx50221/overseas specification #xxx50227, the POW
board fans have become silent fans, the DDC board fans are not needed.
In conjunction with this, this explains the steps for applying the silent fan kits for silent
fans to be used in older fan equipped machines. #1
$ {MD:6._Noise-reducing Measures} FAN-A
 NOTE 
Shut down the CSL, and pull out the power key and turn OFF the circuit breaker.
If the AC cable is inserted, pull it out, then the power will be completely OFF.
POCX01030F002J.ai
Screws

(4) Fix the FAN-A cable with the clamp of the frame.
Parts name Symbol in the figure Parts code Numbers #1 Fix the FAN-A cable with the clamp of the frame.
TP Screw (3x6) [1] TP3x6 [1] 308S0414 13
Removal procedures

(1) Remove the fan (DDC board).

#1 Remove the FAN-A connector.
#1
POCX01030F003J.ai
#1
(5) Remove the older type POW board fan.
FAN-A
 NOTE 
Since the screws which were removed will be reused when attaching, do not lose
them.
POCX01030F001J.ai
018-241-05E
AppxMC6-2
 #3 Attach the connector.
(1) Attach the newer type POW board fan.

#1 Insert the projections on the upper left of the POW board fan into the frame,
and align them with the positioning holes.
#3
#1
POCX01030F006J.ai
POCX01030F004J.ai
(2) Attach the shield plate of POW board.

#1 Attach the shield plate.
#2
TP3x6 [1] (x2)
#2
TP3x6 [1] (x6)
POCX01030F005J.ai
#1
POCX01030F007J.ai
018-241-04E
AppxMC6-3
(3) Attach the shield plate of DDC board.
#1 Attach the shield plate.
#2
TP3x6 [1] (x5)
#1
POCX01030F008J.ai

018-241-04E
AppxMC6-4
BLANK PAGE
018-241-04E
AppxMC7-1
Appendix 7. Gas Spring’s Reactive Main unit serial NO. Gas spring reactive
force
Main unit serial NO. Gas spring reactive
force
Force 67250031 852.0 76150059 856.5
67250032 853.0 76150060 833.0
On some products on the DR-XD 1000, the gas spring’s reactive forces printed labels
might peel off and drop off. 67250033 854.5 76150061 840.0
When replacing the gas spring, if the gas spring’s reactive forces labels have peeled 67250034 857.5 76150062 841.5
away, refer to the following, and check that the serial numbers for the “Ratings/
Standards/Pharmaceutical labels” are based up the reactive force data, then 67250035 860.0 76150063 864.5
implement the replacing of the gas springs and the adjusting of the ballasts.
67250036 851.5 76150064 837.0
REFERENCE
67250037 846.5 76150065 843.0
Refer to the following in regard to application positions for the “Ratings/Standards/
Pharmaceutical labels”. 67250038 842.0 76150066 828.0
$ {Safety:2.1.5_X-ray Cart Section (2/2)} 67250039 850.0 76150067 850.5
67250040 835.5 76150068 840.0
Gas spring reactive force data

 67250041 843.5 76150069 843.5
67250042 836.5 76150070 849.5
Main unit serial NO. Gas spring reactive Main unit serial NO. Gas spring reactive
force force 67250043 843.0 76150071 849.0
67050001 855.0 67150016 850.0 67250044 832.5 76150072 837.0
67050002 849.5 67150017 845.0 67250045 831.5 76150073 842.5
67050003 845.5 67150018 850.0 67250046 836.0 76150074 841.5
67050004 859.0 67150019 855.0 67250047 845.5 76150075 857.0
67050005 850.0 67150020 857.5 67250048 842.5 76250076 859.0
67150006 856.5 67150021 862.5 67250049 847.0 76250077 855.5
67150007 861.5 67150022 856.5 67250050 839.5 76250078 838.5
67150008 862.5 67150023 851.5 76150051 849.0 76250079 833.0
67150009 845.5 67150024 859.0 76150052 835.5 76250080 851.0
67150010 843.5 67150025 846.5 76150053 851.0 76250081 836.5
67150011 850.0 67150026 856.5 76150054 842.0 76250082 841.5
67150012 860.0 67250027 855.5 76150055 830.0 76250083 852.5
67150013 849.5 67250028 857.5 76150056 848.5 76250084 848.5
67150014 853.0 67250029 863.5 76150057 841.5 76250085 841.5
67150015 861.5 67250030 861.5 76150058 840.5 76250086 855.5
018-241-04E
AppxMC7-2
Main unit serial NO. Gas spring reactive Main unit serial NO. Gas spring reactive Main unit serial NO. Gas spring reactive Main unit serial NO. Gas spring reactive
force force force force
76250087 830.0 76350115 836.0 76350143 842.0 76450153 847.5
76250088 852.5 76350116 828.0 76350144 845.0 76450154 851.0
76250089 843.5 76350117 840.0 76450145 844.0 76450155 840.5
76250090 851.0 76350118 831.0 76450146 833.5 76450156 835.0
76250091 852.0 76350119 842.0 76450147 843.0 76450157 842.5
76250092 848.0 76350120 843.0 76450148 847.0 76450158 845.5
76250093 847.0 76350121 835.0 76450149 848.5 76450159 843.0
76250094 840.5 76350122 833.5 76450150 838.0 76550160 850.0
76250095 844.5 76350123 844.0 76450151 848.0 76550161 842.5
76250096 850.0 76350124 828.5 76450152 846.5 76550163 842.5
76250097 836.0 76350125 845.0
76250098 834.5 76350126 835.0
76250099 846.0 76350127 846.5
76250100 835.5 76350128 827.0
76250101 840.5 76350129 838.5
76250102 845.5 76350130 842.0
76250103 849.0 76350131 846.0
76250104 849.0 76350132 839.5
76250105 854.0 76350133 843.0
76250106 850.5 76350134 832.5
76250107 842.0 76350135 852.5
76350108 847.5 76350136 845.0
76350109 848.0 76350137 845.5
76350110 849.5 76350138 850.5
76350111 849.0 76350139 831.5
76350112 853.0 76350140 839.5
76350113 847.0 76350141 844.0
76350114 838.0 76350142 849.0
018-241-04E
AppxMC7-3
BLANK PAGE
018-241-04E
AppxMC7-4
BLANK PAGE
018-241-04E
AppxMC8-1
Appendix 8. Installing the X-ray Source #2 Align the mono-tank arm section to 0 degrees.
Angle Index Label Kit #2
A seamless kit (898Y200527) has been released in regard to the X-ray source angle
index label. Install it in accordance with customer demands.
 NOTE 
The X-ray source angle index label kit is installed from #xxxx207.
POCX01030H001J.ai
Configuration of the Kit

 (2) Peel off the X-ray source angle index label.
- Long seal (for the inside: 283.9 mm): 1 seal #1 Peel off the X-ray source angle index label.
- Short seal (for the outside: 67.7 mm): 2 seals (1 extra seal) #2 Wipe off the application section with a cloth that has ethanol, etc. applied to
it.
Installation procedures

#1, #2
(1) Use a spirit level and shift the mono-tank to a horizontal position, and
align the mono-tank’s arm section to 0 degrees.
#1 Use a spirit level to shift the mono-tank to a horizontal position.
POCX01030H003J.ai
#1 (3) Peel off the tape on the application surface of the new X-ray source
angle index label (for the inside).
POCX01030H002J.ai
POCX01030H004J.ai
018-241-05E
AppxMC8-2
(4) Align the X-ray source angle index label’s 0 degrees position to
the angle indication label () on the inside of the mono-tank’s arm
section, and apply the X-ray source angle index label (for the inside).
POCX01030H005J.ai
(5) Peel off the tape on the application surface of the new X-ray source
angle index label (for the outside).
(6) Align the X-ray source angle index label’s 0 degrees position to the
angle indication label () on the outside of the mono-tank’s arm
section, and apply the X-ray source angle index label (for the outside).
POCX01030H006J.ai
018-241-04E
AppxMC8-3
BLANK PAGE
018-241-04E
AppxMC8-4
BLANK PAGE
018-241-04E
AppxMC9-1
Appendix 9. Replacing the Operation Removal procedures

Panel Connector Cover (1) Remove the FUJIFILM-made AP.

#2 Remove the USB cable which are connected to the FUJIFILM-made AP’s
This contains the procedures for replacing the older connector covers mounted on the top section.
operation panels with new connector covers.
 NOTE 
The connections configurations between the PC and GNC board are replaced with the
older configured. #2
#1
■ Screws
POC010302038.ai
Bind V3x6 308S4780306 3 (2) Remove the connector cover.

#2
#1
V3x6 (x3) POC010302039.ai
018-241-04E
AppxMC9-2
(3) Remove the connector. (5) Pull out the cable from the connector cover.
#1 Remove the connector. #1 Pull out the cable from the connector cover.
#1 #1 #1
OPP1 FG CSL_PC
#1 POC010302043.ai
REFERENCE
#1 It is best to pull out the cable as per the following sequence.
#4
USB cable
POC010302041 ai
(4) Pull out the FUJIFILM-made AP cable from the cover. #2

#1 Remove the LAN cable which is connected to the FUJIFILM-made AP’s CSL_PC
bottom section.
#3
#3 Pull out the FUJIFILM-made AP LAN cable from the cover. AP cable
#1
OPP1
POCX010302151E.ai
#2
#1#3
LAN cable
POC010302042.ai
018-241-04E
AppxMC9-3
 (2) Attach the connector.
#1 Attach the connector.
(1) Attach the cable to the new connector cover.
#1 Attach the cable to the new connector cover.
#1 #1 #1
#1 OPP1 FG CSL_PC
POCX010302156J.ai
REFERENCE
The depiction of the operation panel rear side wiring is as per the following.
USB #1
AP PC
POCX01030I002J.ai
LAN
FC
FC LAN USB
LAN relay CSL_PC OPP1
connector
FC
: Operation panel external ：External port

wiring ：Tab
: Internal wiring To GNC Board FC ：Ferrite core
: Cables to be wired during installation
POCX01030I001J.ai
018-241-05E
AppxMC9-4
NOTE (3) Attach the LAN cable.
- The ferrite core of the LAN cable between the LAN cable and the relay LAN
connector of the following PC should be attached at a position 60 mm from the
end.
#1
POCX010302163J.ai
60 mm (4) Attach the FUJIFILM-made AP.

#1 Attach the FUJIFILM-made AP cable to the cover.
POCX010302144J.ai
- Clip the LAN cable (hospital) and FUJIFILM-made AP cable on to the operation
panel’s side tab.
#2
POCX01030I003J.ai
#1
LAN cable
POCX010302159E.ai
018-241-04E
AppxMC9-5
(5) Attach the cover.
#3
#1
#2
V3x6 (x3) POCX010302153J-01.ai
018-241-04E
AppxMC9-6
BLANK PAGE
018-241-04E
AppxMC9-7
BLANK PAGE
018-241-04E
AppxMC9-8
BLANK PAGE
018-241-04E
MC10-1
Appendix 10. Carry Cart Reinstallation procedures

(1) Peel off the double-sided tape on the sponges.
1. Handle Corner Protector Sponge
Removal procedures

(1) Remove the sponges.
POCX01030J002J.ai
Sponge
(2) Attach the sponges onto the handle section.
POCX01030J001J.ai
 NOTE 
Sponge
The sponges are applied via double-sided tape.
POCX01030J001J.ai
018-241-04E
DR-XD 1000 Service Manual MC10-1
MC10-2
2. Sponge Pad (Monitor Pedestal) (2) Attach the sponge pads onto the monitor pedestal.
REFERENCE
The monitor pedestal has three sponge pads. The replacement unit is one pad each.
Sponge
Removal procedures
 pad
(1) Remove the sponge pads.
POCX01030J003J.ai
 NOTE 
Refer to the following, and attach the sponge pads onto the monitor pedestal.
Sponge (A) Align the vertical orientations to the plate component’s open edges.
pad (B) Make it so that the right and left orientations are visually centered (about 30
mm from the ends of the plate).
(C) The interval between the sponge pads should be about 45 mm.
(A)
POCX01030J003J.ai
 NOTE 
The sponge pads are applied via double-sided tape.
 (B)
(C)
(1) Peel off the double-sided tape on the sponge pads.
POCX01030J005J.ai
POCX01030J004J.ai
018-241-04E
MC10-3
3. Sponge Pad (Bottom Section of the Monitor Reinstallation procedures

Pedestal) (1) Peel off the double-sided tape on the sponge pads.
REFERENCE
(2) Attach the sponge pads onto the bottom section of the monitor
The bottom section of the monitor pedestal has three sponge pads. The replacement pedestal.
unit is one pad each.
Removal procedures

(1) Remove the sponge pads.
Sponge
pad
POCX01030J006J.ai
Sponge  NOTE 
pad Refer to the following, and attach the sponge pads onto the bottom section of the
monitor pedestal.
(A) Align the vertical orientations to the plate component’s open edges.
POCX01030J006J.ai
(B) Make it so that the right and left orientations are visually centered (about 5
mm from the ends of the plate).
 NOTE 
(A)
The sponge pads are applied via double-sided tape.
(B)
POCX01030J007J.ai
018-241-04E
MC10-4
4. Cart Base Pad Reinstallation procedures

REFERENCE (1) Peel off the double-sided tape on the pads.
There are 3 pads per each side. The replacement unit is one pad per each side.
(2) Attach the pads onto the bottom section of the monitor pedestal.
 NOTE 
Removal procedures
 Refer to the following, and attach the pads to cart part.
(A)
(1) Remove the pads.
- For the vertical orientations attach in a position which is 50 ± 3 mm from the
frame’s end sections.
Buffering - Make it so that the right and left orientations are visually centered (about 5 mm
member from the ends of the frame).
(B)
Align with the frame’s open end sections and the frame’s inside end sections and
attach.
(C)
- Make it so that the vertical orientations are visually centered (about 10 mm
from the ends of the frame).
- For the right and left orientations attach in a position which is 65 ± 3 mm from
the frame’s end sections.
POCX01030J008J.ai
 NOTE 
The pads are applied via double-sided tape.
(A)
(B)
(C)
POCX01030J010J.ai
018-241-04E
MC10-5
5. Handle Section Edge Guard 6. Monitor Pedestal’s Bottom Section Edge
REFERENCE Guard
There are 2 edge guards on the handle. The replacement unit is 1 guard per each
spot. Removal procedures

(1) Remove the edge guard.
Removal procedures

(1) Remove the edge guards.
Edge guard
Edge guard
POCX01030J011J.ai
POCX01030J013J.ai


 NOTE  Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
Align the edge guards with the handle section’s grooves, and attach them so that they
do not float up.
POCX01030J012J.ai
018-241-04E
MC10-6
7. Fork Section Edge Guard 8. DR Slot Pad
REFERENCE
Removal procedures

There are 6 edge guards on the fork. The replacement unit is 1 guard per each spot.
(1) Remove the sponge.
#1 Remove the velcro.
#2 Remove the sponge.
Removal procedures

(1) Remove the edge guards.
#1
Edge guard
(620 mm)
#2
Edge guard
(260 mm) POCX01030J015J.ai
Edge guard

(490 mm)
POCX01030J014J.ai

018-241-04E
MC10-7
9. Rubber Insulator (Front Facing) 10. Rubber Insulator (Downward Facing)
REFERENCE REFERENCE
There are 2 spots where there are rubber insulators (front facing). The replacement There are 2 spots where there are rubber insulators (downward facing). The
unit is 1 per each spot. replacement unit is 1 per each spot.
Removal procedures

(1) Remove the Rubber Insulators (front facing). (1) Remove the Rubber Insulators (downward facing).
#2 Remove the Rubber Insulators (front facing). #2 Remove the Rubber Insulators (downward facing).
#2
#2
#1
#1 TP4x20 (x2)
TP4x20 (x2)
POCX01030J017J.ai
 NOTE 
later, keep them.
POCX01030J016J.ai
 NOTE 
later, keep them. Reinstallation procedures


018-241-04E
MC10-8
11. Caster (50 mm in Diameter) 12. Caster (75 mm in Diameter)
Removal procedures

(1) Tip over the carry cart. (1) Tip over the carry cart.
POCX01030J018J.ai POCX01030J018J.ai
(2) Remove the caster (50 mm in diameter). (2) Remove the caster (75 mm in diameter).
#2 Remove the caster. #2 Remove the caster.
#1
Screws #1
Screws
#2
#2
 Reinstallation procedures

018-241-04E
MC10-9
13. Fork Lock Pin #5 Remove the screws.
#6 Remove the bracket (support plate).
Removal procedures

(1) Remove the fork lock pin presser plate.
#1 Remove the lock pin fixing bolt.
#2 Remove the fork lock pin.
#5
QB5x8 (x2) #6
#2
POCX01030J024J.ai

#1 #8 Remove the bracket.
QB4x16
#8
POCX01030J021J.ai

#4 Remove fork lock pin presser plate. #7
QB5x8 (x3)
#4
POCX01030J025J.ai
(2) Remove the fork lock pin support plate.

#2 Remove the fork lock pin support plate.
#3
QB5x8 (x5) #2
POCX01030J022J.ai
#1
QB5x20(x4)
POCX01030J026J.ai
018-241-04E
MC10-10
 - When attaching the fork lock pin support plates, attach them as per the following
sequence.
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. I. While checking that the fork lock pins move, fix the four screws on both sides of
 NOTE  the fork lock pin support plates.
II.Fix one screw.
- Temporarily tighten the fork lock pin support plate screws until the fork lock pin
support plate fixing pin passes through. III. Fix the two screws on the bracket (plate support).
After the fork lock pin support plate lock pin fixing bolt passes through, then fully
tighten the fork lock pin support plate screws. II.
QB5x8
III.
QB5x8 (x2)
Presser plate
Support plate I.
QB5x8 (x4)
POCX01030J027J.ai
- Be careful to not insert the fork lock pins into the rear more than the following photo. POCX01030J029J.ai
- The configuration of the fork lock pin fixing bolts is as per the following.
POCX01030J028J.ai
POCX01030J044J.ai
018-241-04E
MC10-11
14. Ball Plunger 15. Brake Wire
Removal procedures

(1) Remove the ball plungers (up and down). (1) Tip over the carry cart.
#1 Remove the ball plungers (up and down).
 NOTE 
- Tilt the wire that is going to be replaced upward.
- When laying the trolley on its side, lay it down while applying the brake
because the wheel movement is not stable.
POCX01030J030J.ai

 NOTE 
- Remove the edge guard before removing the ball plunger.
- Fix the ball plunger at the position where the fork lock pin moves.
POCX01030J045J.ai
POCX01030J031J.ai
018-241-05E
MC10-12
(2) Remove the wire from the brake lever part. (3) Remove the wire from the wheel side brake caliper part.
#1 Loosen the nut. #1 Loosen the hexagon socket screw.
#2 Pull out the wires.
 NOTE 
Since the wire is fastened via the double nut configuration, loosen the larger nut,
then loosen the smaller one. #1
M6
#2
#1
POCX01030J046J.ai
POCX01030J047J.ai
#2 Align the slots, and remove the wires. (4) Remove the wire from the on-board frame.
#2
POCX01030J046-01J.ai
POCX01030J048J.ai
018-241-05E
MC10-13
  NOTE 
Arrange on the on-board frame, and follow the following to implement.
(1) Attach the wire to the brake caliper part.
#1 Insert the brake wire into the caliper wire insertion opening.
The short one
is on top
#1
The long one

is on bottom
POCX01030J050E.ai
POCX01030J049J.ai
#2 Pass the wire through the screw hole along the brake groove. Long cable
Connect to the brake
 NOTE  caliper on the side without
At this point do not tighten the wire fastening screw. the brake lever
Short cable
#2
Connect to the brake
caliper on the side with POCX01030J051E.ai
the brake lever
Wire attachment Wire attachment

position position Brake wire Outer cover length
(handle side) (caliper side)
Top On the side with 383N200007 385N200016 187mm
brake lever
Bottom On the side without 383S0003 385N200015 200mm
brake lever
POCX01030J049J-01.ai
018-241-05E
MC10-14
(2) Attach the wire to the brake handle part. (3) Screw down the wire on the brake caliper side while pulling it with
#1 Align with the handle’s double nut slot position, and pull the wire through. pliers.
 NOTE 
Tighten the screw securely here.
When pulling the wire, pull it and continue to press down on the caliper’s wire
fastener so that as much as possible it does not move.
If the wire fastener part moves in the direction which it is pulled, the brake has
#1 been applied.
POCX01030J052J.ai
#2 Set the notch which stops the handle lever wire to face inward. If it faces
outward, the wire will disengage when the brake is adjusted.
#3 Pull the small double nut to the handle side so that tension will not be
applied to the wire on the handle side.
#3 POCX01030J054J.ai
#2
#2
POCX01030J053J.ai
 NOTE 
The wire adjusts the tension in the sequence of the caliper side, and the handle
side. Therefore, at this stage, do not apply tension to the wire.
018-241-05E
MC10-15
 Check/Adjustment Procedures (3) So that the wheels are movable, unlock the lock, and tighten the
tension adjustment nut to adjust the braking effectiveness.
 Adjusting the tension of the wire on the handbrake side  NOTE 
(1) Set up the cart. If it cannot be adjusted completely, repeat from the brake wire attachment
procedure (3).
(2) Pull the brake handle on the handle side, and check that it locks and
that the wheels do not move.
Unlocked state Tension adjustment nut
Locked state
POCX01030J056E.ai
POCX01030J055E.ai  NOTE 
REFERENCE If the tension adjustment nut is tightened towards the arrow, the brake will be
Button at the bottom: locked state more effective.
Button is raised up: unlocked state
018-241-05E
MC10-16
16. Brake Lever (2) Remove the wire from the brake lever part.
#1 Loosen the nut.
Removal procedures
  NOTE 
(1) Remove brake lever. Since the wire is fastened via the double nut configuration, loosen the larger nut
<1>, then loosen the smaller one <2>.
#1
M6 (5mm)
#1
②
POCX01030J057J.ai
POCX01030J046J.ai
#2 Align the slots, and disconnect the wires.
#2
018-241-05E
MC10-17
 (2) Attach the wire to the brake handle part.
#1 Align with the handle’s double nut slot position, and pull the wire through.
(1) Attach the brake lever.
#1 Attach the brake lever at a position 120 mm from the right end.
120mm
#1
POCX01030J052J.ai
POCX01030J060J.ai #2 Set the notch which stops the handle lever wire to face inward. If it faces
#2 Set the brake lever so that it is visually parallel with the floor. outward, the wire will disengage when the brake is adjusted.
#3
#2
#2
POCX01030J053J.ai
 NOTE 
018-241-05E
MC10-18
procedure (3).
Locked state
POCX01030J056E.ai
018-241-05E
MC10-19
17. Disc Brake Caliper (2) Remove the wire from the brake lever part.
#1 Loosen the nut.
Removal procedures (Brake assembly)
  NOTE 
(1) Tip over the carry cart. Since the wire is fastened via the double nut configuration, loosen the larger nut
 NOTE 
#1
POCX01030J046J.ai
POCX01030J045J.ai
#2
018-241-05E
MC10-20
(3) Remove the wire from the wheel side brake caliper part. (5) Replace the brake caliper.
#1 Loosen the hexagon socket screw.
#1
M6
#2
POCX01030J062J.ai
(6) Attach the brake caliper.

 NOTE 
Since the caliper attachment needs to be adjusted, lightly tighten the 2 screws so
that they are loose.
POCX01030J047J.ai
(4) Remove the brake caliper.

#2 Remove the brake caliper.
#1
M6 (x2)
POCX01030J063J.ai
#2 Since they will be adjusted in the next step, do not over-tighten them.
POCX01030J061J.ai
018-241-05E
MC10-21
 Check/Adjustment Procedures (2) Adjust the brake pad position on the top of the brake caliper disc.
#1 Thread the hexagonal wrench through the hole in the wheel, tighten the
(1) Adjust the brake pad position on the bottom of the brake caliper disc. brake pad adjustment bolt, and adjust the brake pad position.
#1 Wedge in a 0.5 mm thick spacer inside the disc, and while holding the
caliper’s brake part in the direction of the arrow, tighten the screws until the
braking effect allows the spacers to come out.
#1
M6 5mm (x6)
POCX01030J066J.ai
 NOTE 
- The screw tightening is a click-click movement since there are notches.
POCX01030J064J.ai
Tighten forward until there is no more clicking, then loosen backwards 1 - 2
 NOTE  notches.
In this state, adjust the wheel so that it turns without problems. (There is no
Use a 0.5 mm shim, or about 0.4 mm to 0.7 mm thick paper or plastic as a problem if it catches a little.)
spacer. - If the wheel motion is too tight, recheck the wheel attachment and the
adjustment of the brake pad position.
#2 When tightening the screws, remove the spacer, and check if the wheel
smoothly rotates.
POCX01030J065J.ai
018-241-05E
MC10-22
Reinstallation procedures (Brake wire)
 (2) Attach the wire to the brake handle part.
#1 Align with the handle’s double nut slot position, and pull the wire through.
(1) Attach the wire to the brake caliper part.
#1
#1
POCX01030J052J.ai
POCX01030J049J.ai
#2 Pass the wire through the screw hole along the brake groove.
#3
 NOTE 
At this point do not tighten the wire fastening screw.
#2
#2
#2
POCX01030J053J.ai
 NOTE 
018-241-05E
MC10-23
(3) Screw down the wire on the brake caliper side while pulling it with  Check/Adjustment Procedures
pliers.
 NOTE   Adjusting the tension of the wire on the handbrake side
Tighten the screw securely here. (1) Set up the cart.
fastener so that as much as possible it does not move. (2) Pull the brake handle on the handle side, and check that it locks and
If the wire fastener part moves in the direction which it is pulled, the brake has that the wheels do not move.
been applied.
Locked state
POCX01030J055E.ai
REFERENCE
POCX01030J054J.ai
Button at the bottom: locked state

018-241-05E
MC10-24
(3) So that the wheels are movable, unlock the lock, and tighten the
 NOTE 
If it cannot be adjusted completely, repeat from the brake wire attachment
procedure (3).
POCX01030J056E.ai
 NOTE 
If the tension adjustment nut is tightened towards the arrow, the brake will be
more effective.
018-241-05E
MC10-25
18. Wheel Assembly (2) Remove the wire from the brake lever part.
#1 Loosen the nut.
Removal procedures
  NOTE 
(1) Tip over the carry cart. Since the wire is fastened via the double nut configuration, loosen the larger nut
 NOTE 
#1
POCX01030J046J.ai
POCX01030J045J.ai
#2
018-241-05E
MC10-26
(3) Remove the wire from the wheel side brake caliper part. (5) Remove the wheel.
#1 Loosen the hexagon socket screw.
 NOTE 
Since the wheel is going to be secured with a double nut, use two wrenches.
#1
M6
#2
POCX01030J067J.ai
(6) Pull out the wheel.

#1 Remove the 2 nuts and 1 flat washer.
POCX01030J047J.ai
(4) Remove the brake caliper.

#2 Remove the brake caliper.
M6 (x2) #2 Pull out the wheel.
#2
POCX01030J061J.ai
POCX01030J069J.ai
018-241-05E
MC10-27
(7) Replace the wheels and assemble them. Reinstallation procedures

 NOTE  (1) Install a flat washer and two nuts.
Before attaching the wheels, remove the screw locks attached to the axle. #1 Put on the screw locks and attach the wheels.
Screw locks that remain affect and hinder the nut tightness.
POCX01030J071J.ai
POCX01030J070J.ai
#2 Tighten the top and bottom nuts so that they can be manually stopped.
POCX01030J072J.ai
#3 Secure the top nut, and turn the bottom nut to the loosening side, and tighten
the top and bottom nuts.
POCX01030J067J.ai
018-241-05E
MC10-28
(2) After tightening the nuts, check that the wheel rotates.  Check/Adjustment Procedures
 NOTE  (1) Adjust the brake pad position on the bottom of the brake caliper disc.
If the wheels do not smoothly rotate, then retighten the nuts. #1 Wedge in a 0.5 mm thick spacer inside the disc, and while holding the
caliper’s brake part in the direction of the arrow, tighten the screws until the
braking effect allows the spacers to come out.
(6) Attach the brake caliper.  NOTE 

Use a 0.5 mm shim, or about 0.4 mm to 0.7 mm thick paper or plastic as a
 NOTE 
spacer.
Since the caliper attachment needs to be adjusted, lightly tighten the 2 screws so
that they are loose. #2 When tightening the screws, remove the spacer, and check if the wheel
smoothly rotates.
Since they will be adjusted in the next step, do not over-tighten them.
018-241-05E
MC10-29
(2) Adjust the brake pad position on the top of the brake caliper disc. Reinstallation procedures (Brake wire)

#1 Thread the hexagonal wrench through the hole in the wheel, tighten the
brake pad adjustment bolt, and adjust the brake pad position. (1) Attach the wire to the brake caliper part.
#1
#1
M6 5mm (x6)
POCX01030J066J.ai
 NOTE 
- The screw tightening is a click-click movement since there are notches.
Tighten forward until there is no more clicking, then loosen backwards 1 - 2
notches.
In this state, adjust the wheel so that it turns without problems. (There is no
problem if it catches a little.)
- If the wheel motion is too tight, recheck the wheel attachment and the
adjustment of the brake pad position.
POCX01030J049J.ai
#2 Pass the wire through the screw hole along the brake groove.
 NOTE 
At this point do not tighten the wire fastening screw.
#2
018-241-05E
MC10-30
(2) Attach the wire to the brake handle part. (3) Screw down the wire on the brake caliper side while pulling it with
#1 Align with the handle’s double nut slot position, and pull the wire through. pliers.
 NOTE 
Tighten the screw securely here.
fastener so that as much as possible it does not move.
If the wire fastener part moves in the direction which it is pulled, the brake has
#1 been applied.
POCX01030J052J.ai
#2
#2
POCX01030J053J.ai
 NOTE 
018-241-05E
MC10-31
procedure (3).
Locked state
POCX01030J056E.ai
018-241-05E
MC10-32
BLANK PAGE
018-241-05E
MC11-1
Appendix 11. Updating MC Software (4) Double-click “SetupRun.exe” in the disc.
NOTE
Version - When the following window is displayed, double-click “SetupRun.exe” and
execute (5) or later.
NOTE
- In this appendix, the procedures for upgrading to MC V16.5 are described. Refer to
the ECN for upgrading to the latest MC.
- With MC V16.5 the DR maintenance software needs to be upgraded.
In order to upgrade the DR maintenance software, the DR maintenance software
needs to be uninstalled once. Since a security unlock key is needed when
reinstalling, prepare one in advance.
$ {MU:4.20_License (Unlocking the Security Lock)}
- If the MC Manager is not installed, then install it.
- When upgrading to V16.5 or later on devices which have the MC software installed
on them, confirm that the MC software versions are any one of V15.2, V15.3, V16.2,
V16.3, or V16.4.
The input instruments for the versions are as per the following. POCX01030K001J.ai
V15.3: #xx173 or later

- Furthermore, when the following window is displayed, double-click “SetupRun.
V16.2: #xx217 or later exe” and execute (5) or later.
1. Updating MC Software Version
1.1 Updating DR Maintenance Software
 Uninstall the DR Maintenance Software


(1) Connect the jig drive to the X-ray cart.
(2) Check that the MC Manager icon has appeared on the task tray.
POCX01030K002J.ai
(3) Set the application disc into the jig drive.
The “Set Up PC-TOOL” window appear.
018-241-05E
MC11-2
(5) Select “.\initial\DRWM\Setup.bat” from the “FILE EXECUTION”, and (6) Press <2> key.
then click [EXECUTE]. The following window opens.
POCX01030K003J.ai
POCX01030K005J.ai
The following window opens.

(7) Press <Y> key.
POCX01030K004J.ai
POCX01030K006J.ai
(8) Check the “Uninstall Succeeded!” is displayed and press <Enter> key.
018-241-05E
MC11-3
 Install the DR Maintenance Software The following window opens.
(1) Double-click “SetupRun.exe” into the application disk drive on the My

Computer.
NOTE
If the application disc is not mounted on the X-ray cart, connect the jig drive to the
X-ray cart, and set the application disc in the jig drive.
Double-click “SetupRun.exe” in the application disc drive in My Computer.
(2) Select “.\initial\DRWM\Setup.bat” from the “FILE EXECUTION”, and

then click [EXECUTE].
POCX01030K004J.ai
(3) Press <1> key.

POCX01030K003J.ai
POCX01030K007J.ai
018-241-05E
MC11-4
(4) Press <1> key. (5) Press <Y> key.
NOTE
Do not set “2. Enhanced” except for in VA related facilities where the US high-
security mode is being sought to be implemented.
Also, even if “2. Enhanced” is selected, it needs to once have a standard
installation.
$ {MC: Appendix 12._Setting the MC VA Expanded Security_1. Setting the
MC VA Expanded Security}
POCX01030K009J.ai
(6) Check the “Install Succeeded!” is displayed and press <Enter> key.
NOTE
If the “This program may not be installed correctly” screen appears, select “This
program was installed correctly”, to complete it.
POCX01030K008J.ai
018-241-05E
MC11-5
(7) Click [EXIT]. (11) Click [OK].
The “Suceeded” window close.
(12) Click [OK].
1200_700489E.ai
POCX01030K051J.ai
The “Set Up PC-TOOL” window close.
(8) Start up the Internet Explorer11.
(9) Enter “http://192.168.0.10:19101/index.html” in the address field and

REFERENCE
“192.168.0.10” is the IP address of the PC on which the MC is installed.
(10) Click [Browse] and specify an authentication key file within the
expiration date.
POCX01030K010E.ai
018-241-05E
MC11-6
1.2 Updating MC Application (3) Click [Exit Service Utility].
(1) Restart the Console PC.

DXL04010001.ai
NOTE POCX01030K013J.ai

When the following window is displayed, enter the login password (fieldengineer)
for Service Utility and click [OK]. NOTE
Just the MC Manager is started up. To upgrade the MC application, the DR-ID
300CL software and MC Manager need to not ever have communicated with
each other. Except for the methods in these procedures, if the DR-ID 300CL
software is terminated by a method other than this procedure (such as when
POCX01030K012J.ai the DR-ID 300CL software is terminated while holding down the <Shift> key),
and since the conditions are not satisfied, be sure to restart the console PC and
implement these procedures.
(4) Start up the “Set Up PC-TOOL”.

NOTE
The “Set Up PC-TOOL” starts.
018-241-05E
MC11-7
(5) Select “./install/remote/MCSetupWizard.bat” from the “FILE NOTE
EXECUTION”, and then click [EXECUTE].
- A connection error occurs if the MC can not be connected due to the mistaken
inputting of the IP address. Upgrade the application again after checking the
connection status.
- If the model media being used differs from the model which was installed, the
error will appear. Confirm the MC application installation status and the media
model information, and upgrade the application again.
POCX01030K017E.ai
- When MC is not registered, the following window is displayed. In this case,

click [OK].
POCX01030K014J.ai
(6) Input “127.0.0.1” and click [Connect].
POCX01030K018E.ai
- Input the MC name on the window that will be displayed next and click [Register].
In DR-XD 1000, the default value is “fpd0”.
POCX01030K015E.ai
The MC version and the media MC version which are installed on the console PC
are displayed
POCX01030K019E.ai
018-241-07E
MC11-8
(7) Check the application version for both of the one in the media and the (9) Confirm that the installation is completed, and click [OK].
one installed in Console PC, and click [Upgrade].
POCX01030K023E.ai
POCX01030K020E.ai (10) Click [EXIT] to exit Set Up PC-TOOL.

(8) Click [Yes]. (11) Remove the application disc from the jig drive.
(13) Follow the instructions below to upgrade MP software version.

$ {MU: 5.1.1_Update MP}
(14) Follow the instructions below to upgrade SE software version.

POCX01030K021E.ai
$ {MU: 5.1.2_Update SE}

REFERENCES
NOTE
The following window is displayed while upgrading.
After updating the SE microcomputer version, if the message “If the MCU
installation failed, after starting up the SE, confirm that the version is the latest.” is
displayed, restart the SE according to the message and confirm the MCU version.
If the version which is displayed is the post upgrade version, then upgrading is
normally completed. If the version which is displayed is the pre-upgrade version,
then reimplement upgrading.
POCX01030K022E.ai
018-241-05E
MC12-1
Appendix 12. Setting the MC VA 1.1 Updating MP
Expanded Security If the MP version is 00.04.03 or lower, implement the following.
REFERENCE
1. Setting the MC VA Expanded Security - To confirm the MP version, open the DR Maintenance Software “UPDATE
Implement when high-security mode operations are required in VA related facilities in SOFTWARE” window, click [GET] and check the version that is displayed in the
the USA, etc. “Current Version” of MP.
In this mode, telnet, ftp, http communications are prohibited.
Also, implement the VA expanded security settings after setting the MC software
V16.5 Standard.
For the VA expanded security settings, MP V00.04.04 or later, and SE CPU V0x227 or
later are required.
NOTE
- When implementing add/replace MP or SE on devices that already have MC VA
expanded security settings implemented on them, the expanded security settings
need to be momentarily canceled.
POCX01030K024E.ai
- Implement the MC VA expanded security settings in accordance with “1. Upgrading
the MC Application”, and upgrade the version all the way to MC application V16.5 or - When updating the MP version on a system other than the DR-XD1000, there are
later. cases whereas the MP OS needs to be updated in advance.
With the DR-XD1000 system, this procedure is unnecessary, since it is equipped
with an updated OS via the first machine.
018-241-07E
MC12-2
1.2 Installing the DR Maintenance Software (4) Double-click “Setup.exe” in the disc.
Uninstall the standard DR Maintenance Software, then install the VA Expanded

NOTE
Security Version DR Maintenance Software. - When the following window is displayed, double-click “SetupRun.exe” and
execute (5) onwards.
 Uninstalling the DR Maintenance Software
Follow the instructions below to uninstall the DR Maintenance Software.
$ see “1.1 Updating DR Maintenance Software” in “Appendix 11. Updating MC
Software Version”
 Installing the DR Maintenance Software


POCX01030K001J.ai

exe” and execute (5) onwards.
POCX01030K002J.ai
018-241-07E
MC12-3
(5) Select “.\initial\DRWM\Setup.bat” from the “FILE EXECUTION”, and (6) Press <1> key.
then click [EXECUTE]. The following window opens.
POCX01030K003J.ai
POCX01030K007J.ai
(7) Press <2> key, and select the expansion security level.
POCX01030K004J.ai
POCX01030K025J.ai
018-241-07E
MC12-4
(8) Press <Y> key. (11) Start up the Internet Explorer11.
(12) Enter “https://192.168.0.10:19101/index.html” in the address field and
open DR Maintenance Software.
The “Certificate error” window opens.
REFERENCE
- The DR Maintenance Software URL is not “http: -”, it is “https: -”.
- “192.168.0.10” is the IP address of the PC on which the MC is installed.
Change it according to the environment.
(13) Select “Continue to this website (not recommended)”.
POCX01030K027J.ai
(9) Input the “vKD7Ay - 8dqZt” and press <Enter> key.
(10) Check the “Install Succeeded!” is displayed and press <Enter> key.
POCX01030K029J.ai
The “Authorization Error” window opens.
POCX01030K028J.ai
018-241-07E
MC12-5
(14) Click [Browse] and specify an authentication key file within the 1.3 MC Configuration Settings
expiration date.
Make the MC application compatible with expanded security.
(1) Open the DR Maintenance Software, and click “OPERATION” - “CONFIG
SETTING”.
(2) Set “FTP over SSL on MC” and “FTP over SSL on FCR” to ON.
POCX01030K010E.ai
(15) Click [OK].

The “Suceeded” window close.
(16) Click [OK].
POCX01030K032E.ai
1200_700489E.ai REFERENCE
Scroll the right side of the window, and search for “FTP over SSL on MC”, and “FTP
over SSL on FCR” items.
(3) Click [SET].

NOTE
Do not restart the MCManager in this step.
018-241-07E
MC12-6
1.4 FTPS Server Settings (3) Input the “WyBf + 4tN9GpC” and press <Enter> key.
Make the MC application compatible with expanded security.

REFERENCE
This procedure is for MC-less environment.
(1) Start up the “Set Up PC-TOOL”.

NOTE
(2) Select “.\initial\PcToolEnhanceSecurity\PcToolEnhanceSecurity.bat”

from the “FILE EXECUTION”, and then click [EXECUTE].
POCX01030K034J.ai
(4) Check the “Succeeded!” is displayed and press <Enter> key.
POCX01030K035J.ai
The window close.

POCX01030K033J.ai (5) Restart the MC Manager.
(6) Click [EXIT] to exit “Set Up PC-TOOL”.

(7) Remove the application disc from the jig drive.
018-241-07E
MC12-7
1.5 Checking Operations (4) Open “DR Maintenance Software” - “OPERATION” - “UPDATE
SOFTWARE” - “Update MP”.
 Checking the SE and MP Version (5) Select MP from the drop-down menu and click [GET].
(1) Open DR Maintenance Software, and open “OPERATION” - “UPDATE (6) Confirm that the displayed “Current Version” is 00.04.04 or higher.
SOFTWARE” - “Update SE”.
(2) Select the connected SE from the drop-down menu and click [GET].
(3) Check the displayed “Current version”, and confirm that the MC
version is V16.5 or higher.
POCX01030K050E.ai
If the version is old, perform the following.

NOTE
When both the SE and MP versions are older, communications cannot be
carried out. In this case, refer to “3. Deactivating the MC’s VA expanded security
functions”, and after returning the MC software to the Standard version, then
upgrade them.
POCX01030K036E.ai
REFERENCE
The respective MC V 16.5 software versions are as per the following.
CPU FPGA GLG MCU PIC
DR-ID1201SE 0x0227 0x0082 302 100B 5
DR-ID1202SE 0x0227 0x00A2 302 100B 5
DR-ID1211SE 0x0227 0x0092 302 100B 5
DR-ID1212SE 0x0227 0x00B2 302 100B 5
DR-ID1213SE 0x0227 0x00BA 302 100B 5
DR-ID1214SE 0x0227 0x00CA 302 100B 5
If any of the versions are old, perform the following.
$ {MU: 5.1.2_Update SE}
018-241-07E
MC12-8
 Checking the FTP/FTPS Server Network Settings
 REFERENCE
- Display example of setting the FTPS server (memory exposure environment)
(1) Open DR Maintenance Software, and open “OPERATION” - “UTILITY” -
“Check FTP”, click [START].
POCX01030K038E.ai
(2) Check the output results.

If they do not match with the chart below, the implementation of a procedure was
probably omitted.
- If the MC VA expanded security is set, implement “2.4 FTPS Server Settings”.
- If the normal security is set, implement “3.2 Clearing the FTP server settings”.
The display details for each security setting
POCX01030K039J.ai
Normal setting VA expanded security

(FTP setting
- Display example of setting the FTP server (memory exposure environment)
environment) (FTP environment)
Testing FTP over SSL on MC Failed Succeeded
Testing FTP over SSL on CSL Log
Failed Succeeded
Directory
Testing FTP over SSL on CSL Image
Failed Succeeded
Directory
Testing FTP over SSL on PPU/SSWS Failed Failed
Testing FTP on MC Succeeded Failed
Testing FTP on CSL Log Directory Succeeded Failed
Testing FTP on CSL Image Directory Succeeded Failed
Testing FTP on PPU/SSWS Failed Failed
NOTE POCX01030K040J.ai
When the memory exposure is not set, the following state occurs. In this case,
set the memory exposure.
- Normal setting
Testing FTP in csl Inage directory: Failed
- VA expanded security setting
Testing FTP over SSL on CSL Image Directory: Failed
018-241-07E
MC12-9
 Checking the Memory Exposure  Checking the Saving of Raw Images
Implement at a facility that uses the memory exposure function. This procedure is not (1) Open DR Maintenance Software, and open “OPERATION” - “CONFIG
needed at the facilities where it is not being used.
SETTING”.
(1) Transition an arbitrary SE to the memory exposure, and exposure.
(2) Scroll to the right side of the window and set “IMAGELOG SAVE” and
(2) After exposure, connect the SE through a wired connection. “IMAGELOG SAVE TO FTP” item to “ON”.
(3) Select the subject SE on the Console PC window, and click the image
acquisition (FPD -> CSL).
(4) Confirm that the image capture has been completed.
POCX01030K043E.ai
018-241-07E
MC12-10
(3) Scroll to the bottom of the right side of the window, and click [SET].
POCX01030K044E.ai
(4) Restart the MC Manager.
(5) Start the DR-ID 300CSL software, and shoot with any SE.
(6) Confirm that there is a folder with the name of the exposure date in C:/
Program Files/FujiFilm/FCR/DR-ID 1200/SYSTEM/127.0.0.1/log/IMAGE.
REFERENCE
The folder name is created with “Year, month, day – NO.”.
(7) Confirm that the file (.low file) exists inside the folder.
(8) Open DR Maintenance Software and return “IMAGELOG SAVE” and

“IMAGELOG SAVE TO FTP” of “OPERATION” - “CONFIG SETTING” to
“OFF”.
(9) Scroll to the bottom of the right side of the window, and click [Set].
018-241-07E
MC12-11
2. Canceling the MC VA Expanded Security (4) Scroll to the bottom of the right side of the window, and click [SET].
Settings
In the environments where “2. Setting the MC VA Expanded Security” are
implemented, the SE (ver.0x0226 or lower) or MP (ver.00.04.03 or lower) cannot be
connected where the MC expanded security settings cannot be supported. When
connecting the SEs and MPs, temporarily cancel the expanded security settings, and
after adding/replacing the MP and SE, reimplement “2. Setting the MC VA Expanded
Security”.
2.1 Uninstalling the DR Maintenance Software Security

Version and Installing the Standard Version
Refer to the following, and install the standard version of the DR Maintenance Software.
$ {MC: Appendix 11._Updating DR Maintenance Software}
REFERENCE
To install the standard version of the DR Maintenance Software, select “1. Standard”
as the “Security Level:” in Step (2) of the “■ DR Maintenance Software installation
procedures”.
2.2 Canceling the MC Configuration Settings

POCX01030K044E.ai
(1) Open DR Maintenance Software, and open “OPERATION” - “CONFIG NOTE

SETTING”.
Do not restart the MCManager in this step.
(2) Scroll the right side of the window, and search for “FTP over SSL on
MC”, and “FTP over SSL on FCR” items.
(3) Set these settings to “OFF”.
POCX01030K047E.ai
018-241-07E
MC12-12
2.3 Canceling the FTPS server settings (4) Select “.\initial\PcToolStandardSecurity\PcToolStandardSecurity.bat”
from the “FILE EXECUTION”, and then click [EXECUTE].
NOTE
- When the following window is displayed, double-click “SetupRun.exe” and
execute (4) or later.
POCX01030K048J.ai
(5) Check the “Succeeded!” is displayed.

POCX01030K001J.ai

exe” and execute (4) or later.
POCX01030K049J.ai
(6) Click [EXIT] to exit “Set Up PC-TOOL”.
(7) Remove the application disc from the jig drive.

POCX01030K002J.ai
018-241-07E
MC12-13
2.4 Verifying Operations After the VA Expanded
Security Functions Are Deactivated
(1) Confirm the operation of the FTP server.
$ {“■ Check the FTP/FTPS Server Network Settings” in “1.5 Check Operations”}
018-241-07E
MC12-14
BLANK PAGE
018-241-07E
MC12-15
BLANK PAGE
018-241-07E
MC12-16
BLANK PAGE
018-241-07E
MC13-1
Appendix 13. Backup/Restoration with 1. Storage Medium for Backup
Acronis True Image 2018 Prepare a storage medium, such as USB memory or USB HDD, having sufficient
space as a destination for backup.
 NOTE 
This section describes backup and restoration procedure using “Acronis True Image
2018” from Acronis in Windows 10 environment. If DVD-R is used for destination to save, restoration requires multiple DVDs which
forces operator to replace the medium frequently. Therefore, do not use DVD as
 NOTE  storage medium because operator possibly needs to replace DVDs more than one
In Windows 10 environment, the factory default PC is not provided with its backup hundred times depending on the targeted files.
image. After installation, follow this procedure to make a backup.
REFERENCE
The following shows an example of backup and restoration of files that use the C
■ Backup software drive.
Use the following medium provided with the PC. “Acronis True Image2018 Build Size of backup Restoration
12510” is printed on the label. Size of backup target Size of backup Backup time
target time
- Win10 Image Backup/Recovery Tool V1.0 (114Y2150323B00)
Approx. 19 GB
(600 G4 HDD) Approx. 7 Approx. 4
USB HDD Approx. 8.8 GB
* C:Drive minutes minutes
(Approx. 16 GB used)
018-241-07E
MC13-2
2. Setting the Boot Drive (6) The “Acronis Loader Boot Menu” window displayed.
2.1 Setting Before Backup/Restoration

(1) Connect a USB drive (jig).
(2) Turn On the PC power.
(3) On the A-Value window at startup, press the <F2> key.

The PC restarts.
NOTE
If the <F2> key is not pressed with the timeliness, the setup window will not open.
In such an instance, restart the PC to perform step 2. above again.
The setup window opens.

POCX01030M003.ai
(4) Insert the “Acronis True Image 2018 Build 12510” Disk into the PC.
(5) Select “Save & Exit”, select “USB DVD drive” displayed in “Boot
Override”, and press <Enter>.
“Starting Acronis Loader ...” is displayed and booted.
POCX01030M001.ai
018-241-08E
MC13-3
3. Backup Procedure (4) Check that all partitions of Disck1 are selected and then click [Next].
 NOTE 
This section shows an example to use “USB HDD” as destination to save the backup.
- If not selected, place a check mark on all check boxes.
(1) On the “Acronis Loader Boot Menu” window, click [Acronis True - Do not place a check mark on the storage medium for backup.
Image].
POCX01030M002.ai
(2) Connect “USB HDD” for backup to the PC. The “Target backup archive” window opens.
(3) Click “My Disks” in the “Back Up” column. (5) Click [Browse] of the Backup location.
The “Browse for location” window opens.
(6) Double-click “USB HDD” for backup.

The “Backup Wizard” window opens.
018-241-08E
MC13-4
(7) Enter a name for a backup file in the Filename column. (9) Click [Next].
REFERENCE
The file name must include date and the backup target.
Example : “FujifilmHosp_HP450G5_Backup_20181005”
The “Summary” window opens.

(8) Click [OK].
The “Target backup archive” window opens.
018-241-07E
MC13-5
(10) Click [Proceed].
The PC starts making a backup.
(11) Place a check mark on “Shut down the computer when the
operation is completed”.
After the backup is completed, the PC is turned off automatically.
(12) Disconnect “USB HDD” for backup from the PC.
(13) Remove the USB connection drive (jig).
018-241-08E
MC13-6
4. Restoration Procedure (4) Click [Browse].
This section shows an example of restoration from “USB HDD” in which the backup
image is stored.
(1) On the “Acronis Loader Boot Menu” window, click [Acronis True
Image].
The “Browse for location” window opens.
POCX01030M002.ai (5) Double-click “USB HDD” in which the backup file is stored.
(2) Connect “USB HDD” in which the backup image is stored to the PC. The list of storage media appears.
(3) Click “My Disks” in the “Recover” column.
The “Recovery Wizard” window opens.
018-241-08E
MC13-7
(6) Select the backup file and click [OK]. (8) Check that “Recover whole disks and partitions” is selected and then
click [Next].
The “Select a backup from which to recover” window opens.
(7) Click [Next].
The “Select the items to recover” window opens.
The “Choose recovery method” window opens.
018-241-07E
MC13-8
(9) Place a check mark on the check box next to Disk1. (11) Select “Disk1” and click [Next].
Respective check boxes of all partitions are checked with a check mark.
(10) Click [Next].
The confirmation dialog opens.
(12) Click [OK].
The “Summary” window opens.
The “Select destination of Disk 1” window opens.
018-241-07E
MC13-9
(13) Click [Proceed].
Restoration starts.
(14) Place a check mark on “Shut down the computer when the
operation is completed”.
After the restoration is completed, the PC is turned off automatically.
(15) Remove “USB HDD” in which the backup image is stored from the PC.
(16) Remove the USB connection drive (jig).
018-241-08E
MC13-10
BLANK PAGE
018-241-07E
MC13-11
BLANK PAGE
018-241-07E
MC13-12
BLANK PAGE
018-241-07E
MC14-1
Appendix 14. Backing Up/Restoring the 1.2 Backing Up CSL Information
Device Settings $ Refer to {IN: 6.1_Backing Up the DR-ID 300CL Setup Files} in the DR-ID 300CL
Service Manual
(1) Backing up the Service Utility setting information.

1. Backing Up the Device Information #1 Start [IIP Service Utility].
This describes how to obtain a backup of device information when installing or #2 Click [Configuration Restore / Backup].
changing the settings, etc.
The files which are backed up here can be restored to the same software version. #3 From the “Configuration Restore / Backup” window, specify the backup data
storage folder in “Configuration Backup” – “Specified Directory”.
#4 Click [Backup].
1.1 Backing Up the Device Information #5 When the “Backup is finished.” Dialog appears, click [OK].
The “File name” is saved in the backup data storage folder.
1) Backing Up the SE Correction Information #6 Click [Cancel] on the “Configuration Restore / Backup” window.
The “Configuration Restore / Backup” window closes.
Back up the correction data from the DR maintenance software’s back up and restore.
Multiple panel information can be collectively backed up. In that case, perform a batch
back up.
$ {MU:5.10.1_SE Correct Data Backup/Restore}
2) Backing Up the MC Device Setting Information

Back up the device setting information from the DR maintenance software’s back up
and restore.
$ {MU:5.10.4_Config Setting Backup/Restore}
3) Backing Up the Error Log

Back up the log from the DR maintenance software’s back up and restore.
4) Backing Up the DR-XD1000 Operating Information

Back up the operating information from the maintenance of the DR maintenance tool.
$ {MU:3.6_Backing Up and Restoring of Operating Information Areas}
018-241-07E
MC14-2
(2) Backing up the network adapter settings. #4 Copy the “C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Work\Utl” folder to the backup data
storage folder.
INSTRUCTION
For the DR-XD1000, do not set Eth1 to For image local network.
If this is set, the communications with the GNC board (MP) will be delayed when
starting up, and a 10731 error may occur.
#1 Click [Network Adapter Configuration] on the “IP Service Utility” window.

The “Network Adapter Configuration” window opens.
DXCL100417007.ai
#2 Click [Backup].
The “Backup is Incomplete.” window opens.
#3 Click [OK].
The “Utl” folder which stored the backup files in the “C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\
IIP\Work” folder will be created.
REFERENCE
The backup files which are stored in the “Utl” folder are as per the following.
Files to be backed up Descriptions
NetworkStatusConfig.xml An XML file which contains registration information
for network adapter settings.
[SSID].profile The wireless LAN profile information file which is
set on the OS side.
It is stored in the “WifiProfile” folder inside the “Utl”
folder.
018-241-07E
MC14-3
(3) Backing Up the User Utility Setting Information #5 Select all of the information which is going to be backed up, and click [Start].
#1 Start User Utility.
The “Enter password” window opens.
#2 Enter user name: FFService, and password: fieldengineer.
#3 Click [OK].
The “Main menu” window opens.
#4 Click [Backup].
POCX01030N002J.ai
The “Folder selection” window opens.

#6 Specify the backup data storage folder, and click [OK].
POCX01030N001J.ai
The “Backup” window opens.
POCX01030N003J.ai
The “Backup is completed” window opens.
018-241-07E
MC14-4
#7 Click [OK]. (4) Backing Up the Various CSL Option Settings
If the following functions are being used, back up the following files to the backup
data storage folder in the external recording medium.
$ Refer to {IN: 6.1_Backing Up the DR-ID 300CL Setup Files} in the DR-ID
300CL Service Manual
- Parameter files for each function
If the corresponding functions are not being used, they do not need to be
backed up.
Function Backup files
Patient information C:\FDRWeb\rmtDisp_PatientInfo\App_Themes\PatientInfo.xsl
display linkage C:\FDRWeb\rmtDisp_PatientInfo\web.config
Remote display C:\FDRWeb\rmtDisp_DisplayImage\web.config
image display C:\FDRWeb\rmtDisp_DisplayImage\App_Themes\Display.css
C:\FDRWeb\rmtDisp_DisplayImage\App_Themes\Display_
Mobile.css
C:\FDRWeb\rmtDisp_DisplayImage\App_Themes\Anotation.css
Same procedure
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Config\TechniqueCodeConvertTbl.
settings for different
POCX01030N004J.ai
ini
selectors
#8 Click [Finish] on the “Backup” window.
The “Backup” window closes. CALNEO Smart
small model size C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Param\TargetPixelSizeList.csv
#9 Click [Finish] on the “Backup” window. settings
The “Main menu” window closes.
018-241-07E
MC14-5
- Parameter files for service tools (5) Saving the list of options installed on the CSL
If the corresponding functions are not being used, they do not need to be Record the list of options which are displayed on the console’s version display
backed up. screen.
Function Backup files
Parameter files for CS
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Config\DicomStorageTag.mdb
Edit Tool for Storage
Parameter files for C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\ImageProcessing\ImageProc\
FNCParamVerUpTool System\DR\Default\User\FNCdu.prm
VGParamVerUpTool System\DR\Default\User\VGPdu.prm
DYNParamVerUpTool Common\EDR2u.prm
Each file in the “C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\
ImageProcessing\ImageProc\System\CR\User\CR”
Each file in the “C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\
ImageProcessing\ImageProc\System\DR\User\DR”
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\ImageProcessing\ImageProc\
System\CR\User\Selectu.prm
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\ImageProcessing\ImageProc\
System\DR\DirFPD\ (Device type name folder) \User\
Selectu.prm
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\ImageProcessing\ImageProc\ POCX01030N005J.ai
System\DR\InDirFPD\ (Device type name folder) \User\
Selectu.prm Refer to the following for the option display names.
$ Refer to {IN: 54._Software Licence_1.2 Checking the Installed Options} in
the DR-ID 300CL Service Manual
018-241-07E
MC14-6
Checking the installed options
 (6) A message is displayed if the processing is successful. Hardware
Unique Key is saved as a text file.
Selecting the installed options on the licence server and reacquiring the licence key is
necessary. Use CSLInfoAcquisionTool distributed by ECN. NOTE
By using, the following can be acquired.
- The value of “H/W info” varies from PC to PC.
- List of options
- Even though the message window opens and shows that the acquisition is
- Computer name successful, the acquirable contents may be different depending on whether
- Hardware Unique Key DR-ID 300CL has been installed or not.
 Advance preparation
Copy the following two files to the root directory of an USB memory.
- CSLInfoAcquision.exe
- LicenceWrapper.dll
NOTE
The following USB memory device is recommended.
- USB memory : TOSHIBA TransMemory TNU-A0008G Information Descriptions
- Format : NTFS
File name [Hardware Unique Key]_[Acquisition date
If the recommended USB memory device is not procurable, prepare an USB memory
(YYYYMMDD)]_[Acquisition time (hhmmss)].txt
device of the same level and do the operation check before use.
(e.g.) 322840113226_20160106_185325.txt
Save to The file will be saved to the following two places.
 Acquiring the Hardware Unique Key - The same directory with the tool in the USB memory
device.
(1) Restart the PC. - The desktop of the Console PC.
After a while, the DR-ID 300CL-AP starts.
(2) When the initial window opens, sequentially click its upper left and
upper right corners within a period of 3 seconds.
The Service Utility starts and the “IIP Service Utility” window opens.

(4) Set the USB memory device which contains “CSLInfoAcquisionTool”

into the PC.
(5) Launch “CSLInfoAcquision.exe” in the USB memory device.
018-241-07E
MC14-7
Information Descriptions (7) Click [OK] to close the window.
Contents [H/W Information] (8) Remove the USB memory device from the PC.
246854196550
[Installed Options]
Annotation Input
Dicom Standard DX Storage (Parameter Output)
5000 Connection
Dicom Fuji Private CR Storage
Dicom Standard CR Storage (Processed)
Dicom Standard CR Storage
Dicom Standard DX Storage
DR Exposure Connection
Dynamic Range Control Processing
Flexible Noise Control Processing
Scanner Connection (FRUP)
HQ Image (FRUP)
Image Magnifing
PACS Connection
Quality Assurance
FPD Connection
Tomographic Artifact Suppression Processing
X Control
Virtual Grid
[HostName]
DP20045
[Console Type/Version]
DR-ID 300CL
APL Software V12.1
[Acquired Date Time]
2019/07/19 08:26:59
NOTE
If the processing fails, the following message appears and the Hardware Unique
Key file will not be saved.
018-241-07E
MC14-8
1.3 Backing Up the PC Information #4 Record the name displayed in [Device name].
(1) Record the computer name.

If the CSLInfoAcquisitionTool was used, the computer is also being saved.
 For Windows 10
#1 Open “Settings” the [Start] menu.
#2 Click [System].
POCX01030N008J.ai
 For Windows 7
#1 Open “Control Panel” from the [Start] menu.
#2 Click [System].
POCX01030N006J.ai
#3 Click [About].
POCX01030N009J.ai
POCX01030N007J.ai
018-241-07E
MC14-9
#3 Record the name displayed in computer.
POCX01030N010J.ai
(2) Record the network settings.

#1 Select “Control Panel” from the [Start] menu.
#2 Click “Network and Sharing Center”.
#3 Click “Change adapter settings”.
#4 Right-click the network adapter which is going to record, and select
“Properties”.
#5 Save the following
Adapter name, IP address (IPv4), subnet mask, default gateway (IPv4), IP
address (IPv6), subnet length, default gateway (IPv6), interface metric
(3) If a shared folder is set, save the settings.

The shared folder is set when the simple ordering / RIS Order USB option is set,
or when the receipt computer and electronic medical records system, etc. are set.
$ Refer to {IN: Appendix 28._ Simple Ordering or RIS Order USB} in the DR-
ID 300CL Service Manual
018-241-07E
MC14-10
2. Restoring the Device Information 2.2 Restore PC Information
Describes how to restore the backed up information.
1) Console License
When a computer is replaced due to malfunctioning, the console license needs to be
reissued.
2.1 Restoring the Device Information
$ Refer to {IN: Appendix 54._Software Licence_2.2.6_Replace Motherboard} in
the DR-ID 300CL Service Manual
INSTRUCTION
The files which are backed up from the DR maintenance software are restored as they
are.
Decompressed Zip format files, or files whose configurations have been changed
cannot be restored.
1) Restoring the MC Device Setting Information

Restore the device setting information from the DR maintenance software’s back up
and restore.
$ {MU:5.10.4_Config Setting Backup/Restore}
2) Restoring the SE Correction Information

Restore the correction data from the DR maintenance software’s back up and restore.
Multiple panel information can be collectively Restore. In that case, perform a batch
Restore.
3) Restoring the DR-XD1000 Operating Information

Restore the operation information saved with the DR-XD1000 maintenance tool.
$ {MU:3.6_Backing Up and Restoring of Operating Information Areas}
018-241-07E
MC14-11
2.3 Restoring CSL Information  DYNParamVerUpTool
Install the DYNParamVerUpTool, and restore the setting files
(1) Installing and restoring the service tool $ Refer to {IN: Appendix 21._VGParamVerUpTool} in the DR-ID 300CL
Install/Restore the following service tool as necessary. Service Manual
Restoration is not required if this function is not used. Recovery file Original folder location
 DICOMTagEditTool EDR2u.prm C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\ImageProcessing\
Install the DICOMTagEditTool ImageProc\Common
$ Refer to {IN: Appendix 10._DICOMTagEditTool} in the DR-ID 300CL Each file in CR folder C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\ImageProcessing\
Service Manual ImageProc\System\CR\User
Each file in DR folder C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\ImageProcessing\
 CS Edit Tool for Storage ImageProc\System\DR\User\
Install the CS Edit Tool for Storage Selectu.prm C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\ImageProcessing\
$ Refer to {IN: Appendix 12._CS Edit Tool for Storage} in the DR-ID 300CL ImageProc\System\CR\User
Service Manual Selectu.prm C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\ImageProcessing\
Recovery file Original folder location ImageProc\System\DR\DirFPD\ (Device type name
folder) \User
DicomStorageTag.mdb C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Config
Selectu.prm C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\ImageProcessing\
ImageProc\System\DR\InDirFPD\ (Device type name
folder) \User
 FNCParamVerUpTool
Install the FNCParamVerUpTool, and restore the setting files
(2) Backing up the Service Utility setting information.
$ Refer to {IN: Appendix 18._FNCParamVerUpTool} in the DR-ID 300CL
Service Manual $ Refer to {MU: 6.1_Backing Up the DR-ID 300CL Setup Files} in the DR-ID
Recovery file Original folder location
#1 Start [IIP Service Utility].
FNCdu.prm C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\ImageProcessing\
ImageProc\System\DR\Default\User #2 Click [Configuration Restore / Backup].
The “Configuration Restore / Backup” window opens.
#3 Specify the backup data storage folder in “Configuration Backup” – “Specified
 VGParamVerUpTool Directory”.
Install the VGParamVerUpTool, and restore the setting files
#4 Click [Restore].
$ Refer to {IN: Appendix 20._VGParamVerUpTool} in the DR-ID 300CL
The “Restore is finished.” window opens.
Service Manual
Recovery file Original folder location #5 Click [OK].
The system returns to the “Configuration Restore / Backup” window.
#6 Click [Cancel].
The “Configuration Restore / Backup” window closes.
018-241-07E
MC14-12
(3) Restoring the network adapter settings (4) Restoring the User Utility Setting Information
#1 Copy the “NetworkStatusConfig.xml” file and “WifiProfile” folder in the #1 Start User Utility.
“Utl” folder where the network adapter settings are backed up to the “C:\ The “Enter password” window opens.
ProgramFiles\FujiFilm\IIP\Config” folder.
#2 Enter user name: FFService, and password: fieldengineer.
#2 Click [Network Adapter Configuration] on the “IP Service Utility” window.
The “Network Adapter Configuration” window opens. #3 Click [OK].
The “Main menu” window opens.
#4 Click [Restore].
DXCL100417007.ai
#3 Click [Restore].
The “Backup is Incomplete.” window opens.
#4 Click [OK].
POCX01030N011J.ai
018-241-08E
MC14-13
#5 Specify the restore data storage folder, and click [OK]. #6 Select all the information to be restored and click [Start].
REFERENCES
Data included in the restoration target is automatically checked.
POCX01030N012J.ai
The “Restore” window opens.
POCX01030N013J.ai
The “Restore is completed” window opens.
018-241-07E
MC14-14
#7 Click [OK]. (4) Restore the Various CSL Option Settings
When the following functions are used, restore the following files to each folder.
Restoration is not required if this function is not used.
$ Refer to {IN: 6.1_Backing Up the DR-ID 300CL Setup Files} in the DR-ID
 Patient information display linkage

PatientInfo.xsl C:\FDRWeb\rmtDisp_PatientInfo\App_Themes
web.config C:\FDRWeb\rmtDisp_PatientInfo
 Remote display image setting file

web.config C:\FDRWeb\rmtDisp_DisplayImage
Display.css C:\FDRWeb\rmtDisp_DisplayImage\App_Themes
POCX01030N014J.ai
The system returns to the “Restore” window. Display_Mobile.css C:\FDRWeb\rmtDisp_DisplayImage\App_Themes

Anotation.css C:\FDRWeb\rmtDisp_DisplayImage\App_Themes
#8 Click [Finish].
The “Restore” window closes.
#9 Click [Finish] on the “Main menu” window.  Setting the same technique for different selectors
The “Main menu” window closes. Recovery file Original folder location
TechniqueCodeConvertTbl.ini C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Config
 CALNEO Smart Small model sizing

TargetPixelSizeList.csv C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Param
 EI correction value of ExposureIndex function

(when EI correction value is customized)
ExposureIndex.prm C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Param
018-241-07E
MC14-15
BLANK PAGE
018-241-07E
MC14-16
BLANK PAGE
018-241-07E
MC15-1
Appendix 15. Installing the RNDIS Driver (2) Right-click “RNDIS/EthernetGadget”, and select “Update Driver
Software”.
in Windows 10 Environment
This describes how to install the RNDIS drivers which are required if a 1-LAN port
configuration is going to be used for DR-XD1000 #***171 or earlier.
Do not implement with 2-LAN port configured machines.
NOTE
- After checking that the FUJIFILM-made AP Power LED lights up green, implement
the following procedures.
- If the FUJIFILM-made AP firmware is less than V1.5, update the firmware before
installing the RNDIS drivers.
$ {MC:Appendix 18._Updating to FUJIFILM-made AP Windows 10 Compatible Firmware
(V1.5)}
1200_700454E.ai
(1) Right-click the button, and select “Device Manager”. The “Update Driver Software” window opens.
(3) Click “Browse my computer for driver software”.

#2
#1
1200_700453E.ai

1200_700455E.ai
018-241-07E
MC15-2
(4) Click “Let me pick from a list of device drivers on my computer”, and (6) Select “Microsoft”, “USB RNDIS6 Adapter”, and click [Next].
click [Next].
1200_700458E.ai
1200_700456E.ai The “Update Driver Warning” window opens.
REFERENCE (7) Click [Yes].

In Windows 10 environments, since the drivers are inside the PCs, the RNDIS6 driver
disk is not required.
(5) Click “Network adapters”, and then [Next].

1200_700459E.ai
(8) Click [Close].
1200_700457E.ai
1200_700460E.ai
018-241-07E
MC15-3
(9) Confirm that “USB RNDIS6 Adapter” appears in “Device Manager”. (13) Select “Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)” and click [Properties].
1200_700461E.ai
(10) Close the “Device Manager” window.

(11) Right-click the button, and select “Network Connections”.
#1 Right-click: menu
#2 Select: [Network Connections]
1200_700463E.ai
(14) Click the [Use the following IP address:] radio button, input the IP
#2 address and Subnet mask below, and click [OK].
- IP address: 192.168.0.10
- Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
#1
1200_700444E.ai
(12) Right-click “Local Area Connection”, and select “Properties”.
1200_700464.ai
1200_700462E.ai
The “Local area connection Properties” window opens.

(15) Close the “Network Connections” window.
018-241-07E
MC15-4
BLANK PAGE
018-241-07E
MC16-1
Appendix 16. Changes in PC-GNC  NOTE 
The GNC board switches are anticipated for these configuration changes, and
Connection (Applying the are implemented via #xx160 or later. Therefore, some machines with the older
configurations also are equipped with the GNC board J editions.
2 LAN Ports Compatible
Cable and Cover Kit)
3. Order Information
1. The Objective of This Appendix In order to change an older configured machine into a newly configured one, purchase
In these work procedures, the procedures for changing older configured machines into the following kit.
new configured ones are described. Part number Item Qty.
Here, the older configuration is a “Configuration which uses RNDIS-USB for the
communications connections between PC-GNC”, and the new configuration is a 898Y201181 2 LAN ports compatible cable and cover kit 1
“Configuration which uses LAN for the communications connections between PC-GNC”. Including
2. Requirement 898Y200484 Cable cover 1

136Y200409B LAN cable for PC-GNC 1
The differences in requirements between the older configured and new configured are
as follows. The LAN cables inside the in-hospital’s connections
136Y200485A 1
operation panel
■ Target machines
350Y200186 Rear cover assembly 1
Distinguished by the last five digits of the serial number.
316S1001 Clamp 1
For Older Configured Machines For New Configured Machines
316S1164 Clamp 1
Serial number #xxx50171 or earlier #xxx50172 or later
If the PC and GNC boards do not meet the requirements, purchase the respective
■ Details of Changes parts.
For Older Configured Machines For New Configured Machines Part number Item Qty.
Connection 898Y200504 PC for Japan (Win7) 1

configurations Directly connect the PC and
Via the FUJIFILM-made AP 898Y200xx PC for Japan (Win10) 1
between the PC and GNC board via LAN cable
GNC board 898Y200505 PC for Japan (Win7) 1
1 LAN port 898Y200xxx PC for Japan (Win10) 1
PC specifications connections and GNC board
connections) 113Y120290
(J version or later) GNC board (2LAN port) 1
The cable cover Set up the hospital LAN Set up the hospital LAN
configuration on the connection LAN connector on the connection LAN connector on
operation panel rear lower side of the monitor the rear side of the monitor
J editions or later
H editions or earlier
3 LAN ports
GNC board 1 LAN port
(FUJIFILM-made AP connections,
(FUJIFILM-made AP connections)
PC connections, extras)
018-241-07E
MC16-2
4. Changing Procedure (5) Connect the AP’s USB cable to the USB port (# 1) on the PC’s LCD
side, and secure it with the 3 tabs (red circles). Connect the LAN cable
(136Y200485, 300 mm) supplied with the kit to LAN port (# 2) on the
4.1 Backing Up the GNC Board right, and secure it with the 2 tabs (yellow circles).
When replacing the GNC board, back up the GNC board. Attach the ferrite core (109S0029) included with the kit to a position 60
$ {MU:3.5_Backing Up and Restoring the GNC Board Data} mm from the connector end of the LAN cable.
4.2 Replacing the Operation Panel Assembly

(1) Remove the operation panel.
#2 #1
(2) Remove the PC.
$ {MC:5.4_Console PC}
NOTE
Implement the following only when replacing the SSD.
mm
$ {MC:5.5_SSD} 60
POCX01030P001J.ai
(3) Attach the PC (2-LAN port type) in reverse order. (6) Attach the operation panel.
NOTE
(4) Attach the rear cover (2-LAN port compatible type) in reverse order.
Do not install unwired wire connections and the connector cover.
REFERENCE
The screw positions are shared in common.
018-241-07E
MC16-3
4.3 Replacing the GNC Board (2) Cut the cable ties (red: 3 places), and separate the cables.
NOTE
(1) Remove the GNC board.
Since the cable ties will be retied, mark the stop position with a marker before
$ {MC:3.7_GNC Board} cutting the cables.
(2) Install the 2-LAN port compatible GNC board.
4.4 Wiring Connections (Main Unit Section)

(1) Remove the USB cover screw.
POCX01030P003J.ai
(3) Pass the LAN cable (136Y200409, 1080 mm) included with the kit
through the USB cover and the opening.
TP3x6 [1] (x2)
POCX01030P002J.ai
POCX01030P004J.ai
018-241-07E
MC16-4
(4) Connect the LAN cable (136Y200409) to the GNC18 connector (red (6) Put the LAN cable (136Y200409) into the cable protection tube, and
circle) on the GNC board. bundle it with the other cables.
POCX01030P005J.ai
(5) Use the cable ties (white) which are included with the kit, and bundle
and secure with the other cables (determine the position based on the
marks in step (2)).
POCX01030P007J.ai
NOTE
Secure the LAN cable so that it is 925 ± 20 mm from the cart section’s outlet (PC
side) at the LAN tip.
POCX01030P006J.ai
018-241-07E
MC16-5
4.5 Wiring Connections (Operation Panel) REFERENCE
The wiring layout is as per the following (diagram viewed from the PC’s rear).
(1) Replace the connector cover on the rear of the operation panel
assembly with the connector cover (350Y200063) included in the kit,
and pass the cables through as per the following. USB
Left hole: #1, #2, #3
Right hole: #4, #5 AP PC
REFERENCE
If the connector cover is passed through in the order of # 4, # 5, # 2, # 1, # 3, it
LAN
will pass through easily. FC
FC LAN LAN USB
(2) Attach the ferrite core at a position 40 mm from the connector end of
LAN relay
connector
CSL_PC OPP1
the LAN cable (GNC).
FC
#1
FC
#4
OPP1
USB cable
40mm #5 wiring ：Tab
LAN cable : Internal wiring To GNC board FC ：Ferrite core
(GNC) : Cables to be wired during installation LAN ： Connector
#2 POCX010302171J.ai
CSL_PC
#3
AP cable (3) Connect the LAN cable coming from the GNC board to the LAN port (red
POCX01030P008J.ai circle) on the left side of the PC.
POCX01030P009J.ai
018-241-07E
MC16-6
(4) Connect the LAN cable coming from the PC to the connector attached (6) Use the cable ties (black) supplied with the kit, and secure the cable to
to the connector cover. the monitor arm.
REFERENCE #1 Turn the operation panel upward in order to adjust the extra cable length.
#2 Wiring the cables.
With the new configuration, this port becomes the in-hospital wired LAN port. #3 Bind cables with two binding bands.
#1
POCX01030P010J.ai
#3
(5) Refer to the following, and connect the remaining cables to the
connectors, and close the connector cover, then fasten it with the #2
screws. POC010707013.ai
$ {MC:2.9.2_For New Configured Machines} (7) Attach the remaining covers.
#1 #1 #1
OPP1 FG CSL_PC
POCX01030P011J.ai
018-241-07E
MC16-7
4.6 Network Settings 4.7 Restoring the GNC Board
Perform this item only when the SSD is replaced. Restore the backed up GNC board data.
Perform the following, and delete the RNDIS-USB drivers, and set the network $ {MU:3.5_Backing Up and Restoring the GNC Board Data}
settings.
$ {MT:Appendix 7._How to Handle a 1-LAN Port Which Was Set for a 2-LAN Port
Configuration}
Perform the following, and calibrate the touch panel.
$ {MT:4.4_When the Touch Panel Operations Feel Strange}
018-241-07E
MC16-8
BLANK PAGE
018-241-07E
MC17-1
Appendix 17. Replacing the Label
This appendix describes how to replace the label.
 NOTE 
When ordering parts, implement the following:
- When ordering parts which have label applied on them, order the label parts
together.
$ {SP:18._Parts that Need Labels}
- When ordering label parts which have serial numbers (S/N) printed on them, the S/N
information which is printed on the original label is required. Obtain photos whereas
the S/N can be read, and send them to the parts supply liaison via e-mail.
- Parts with label and standalone label cannot be ordered. Be sure to order them as a
set.
 NOTE 
Perform the following when replacing the parts.
- Apply the label in the prescribed positions.
- Cut up the old label which is replaced so that it is unusable, take a picture of it, and
send it to TIMS within one month. If the sending of the photo of the discarded old
label is delayed for more than a month, the provision of the relevant part may be
stopped.
018-241-07E
MC17-2
1. For Japan and Brazil Pasting position

List of labels
  #1
Wipe the application position with ethanol, and apply the lable to the following position.
PLACE LABEL PART NAME
#1 Rating/Standard/Identification Label
#2 Mono-tank Label
Horizontal direction: 5 ± 2 mm from the center side

Vertical direction: 15 ± 2 mm from the cover’s lower edge
- Horizontal direction:
5 ± 2 mm from the center side
- Vertical direction:
15 ± 2 mm from the cover’s lower edge
POCX01030Q002.ai
018-241-07E
MC17-3
 #2
POCX01030Q004.ai
 NOTE 
Since the label in #2 are upward compatible, even if the lable are applied before
version D, it is fine to reapply new labels. In that case, leave the date of manufacture
blank.
018-241-07E
MC17-4
2. For US Pasting position

List of labels
  #1
#3 HHS Certification Label
#2 Mono-tank Label
#6 HHS Warning Label
#7 Warning Label for US Model

POCX01030Q002.ai
018-241-07E
MC17-5
 #2  #3
Horizontal: identical
straight line arrangement
Vertical: 5 ± 2 mm
POCX01030Q005.ai
 #4
Cover: 350Y200039*
Align the label’s right end face ± 2 mm with the edge of the tube cover’s locking part
recess
POCX01030Q006.ai
 #5
Horizontally: visually centered
POCX01030Q004.ai
 NOTE 
Since the label in #2 are upward compatible, even if the lable are applied before Vertical: 15 ± 2 mm
blank. POCX01030Q007.ai
018-241-07E
MC17-6
 #6  #7
Vertical:
15 ± 2 mm
Horizontally oriented
Visually centered
POCX01030Q010.ai
Vertical:
15 ± 2 mm
Horizontally: visually centered
POCX01030Q009.ai
018-241-07E
MC17-7
3. For Other Overseas Pasting position

List of labels
  #1
#2 Mono-tank Label
#3 RED Warning Label

POCX01030Q002.ai
018-241-07E
MC17-8
 #2  #3
Align it with the edge of the key switch so that it does not ride up
POCX01030Q011.ai
3 ± 2 mm from the edge of the handle locking recess
POCX01030Q012.ai
POCX01030Q004.ai
 NOTE 
Since the label in #2 are upward compatible, even if the lable are applied before
blank.
018-241-07E
MC18-1
Appendix 18. Updating to FUJIFILM- (1) Remove the LAN cable from the isolator.
made AP Windows 10
Compatible Firmware
(V1.5)
Firmware versions V1.4 or earlier FUJIFILM-made APs cannot perform USB
communications to Windows 10 PCs.
In order to connect to Windows 10 compatible PCs, the firmware needs to be updated
to V1.5 via a wired LAN cable. #1
1200_700441.ai
 INSTRUCTION 
Implement these procedures prior to installing the FUJIFILM-made AP RNDIS drivers. NOTE
When disconnecting the LAN cable from the isolator, push on the LAN connector
REFERENCE tab with a thin pointed object, and unplug the cable.
If the FUJIFILM-made AP firmware is less than V1.5, update the firmware before
installing the RNDIS drivers. #1
$ {MT:Appendix 8._Resolution Methods for When the FUJIFILM-made AP Setting
Screen Cannot Be Accessed}
#2
1200_700442.ai
018-241-07E
MC18-2
(2) Connect the FUJIFILM-made AP and PC with a LAN and USB cable. (5) Select “Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)” and click [Properties].
(6) Select the [Use the next IP address] radio button, and input the
following IP address, subnet mask, then click [OK].
#1 #1 Select: Use the following IP address
#2 Input: IP address (192.168.0.11), Subnet mask (255.255.255.0)
#3 Click: [OK]
#2
1200_700443.ai
(3) Right-click the button, and select “Network Connections”. #1

#1 Right-click: menu #2
#2
#3
1200_700447E.ai
(7) Open the Internet Explorer, enter “192.168.0.25” into the address bar
#1 and press <Enter> key.
 NOTE 
1200_700444E.ai
The “There is a problem with this website’s security certificate.” window will
appear. In this case, select “Continue to this website (not recommended).”
1200_700445E.ai
018-241-07E
MC18-3
(8) Since the following window is displayed, check that the firmware (10) Select “Firm update”.
version is “1.4” or earlier.
1200_700449E.ai
1200_700452E.ai
 NOTE  (11) Click [Browse], then click [Update] after having selected the
If the firmware version is “1.5” or later, steps (9) to (12) are not necessary. “853Y120001.bin” which is attached to ECN.
Proceed to step (13). #1 Click: [Browse]
#2 Select: 853Y120001.bin
#3 Click: [Update]
(9) Input the password for the access point and then click [Log In].
Password: fuj1Film (Default: fujifilm)
#1#2
#3
1200_700448E.ai
1200_700449bE.ai
018-241-07E
MC18-4
NOTE  Restoring the IP Address
Firmware updates take several minutes. Do not unplug the LAN – USB cables If “Automatically acquire IP address” had been set prior to changes being made, “Local
while updating. If the cables are unplugged the FUJIFILM-made AP will be area connection” will revert to the original address.
damaged, and it will no longer be able to be restored.
(1) Right-click the button, and select “Network Connections”.
#1 Right-click: menu
1200_700450E.ai
(12) After the updates are completed, check that the firmware version #2
turned to “1.5.0”.
#1
1200_700444E.ai
1200_700451E.ai
(13) Disconnect the wired LAN cable from the FUJIFILM-made AP and PC.
1200_700445E.ai
018-241-07E
MC18-5
(4) Select “Obtain an IP address automatically”, and click [OK].

#1 Select: Obtain an IP address automatically
#2 Click: [OK]
#1
#2
1200_700466E.ai
018-241-07E
MC18-6
BLANK PAGE
018-241-07E
MC18-7
BLANK PAGE
018-241-07E
MC18-8
BLANK PAGE
018-241-07E
MC19-1
Appendix 19. Procedures for Upgrading
to Windows 10
1. Procedures for Upgrading to Windows 10
This section describes the procedures for changing the OS which is installed in the
DR-XD1000 control PC from Windows 7 Professional Embedded (x64) to Windows 10
LTSC 2019.
The PC (Windows 7 Professional Embedded (x64)) which is being used in the
existing DR-XD1000 console device can be upgraded by using the upgrade kit that
is described in this appendix, and it can be forwarded to the Windows 10 LTSC 2019
system without the hardware being changed.
Precautions

An external multimedia drive must be prepared.
Also, when connecting a keyboard and a mouse for better operability, it is recommended
to prepare USB hubs to connect the keyboard and the mouse.
018-241-08E
MC19-2
Procedure flow
 Install DR-ID 1200MC V17.1. $ “1.10 Installing DR-ID
1200MC Application”
Back up the system image $ “1.2 Backing Up System
(Using Acronis True Image) Image”
Reinstall options and software and configure $ “1.11 Setting Options and
settings Software Settings”
Upgrade DR-ID 300CL application from $ “1.3 Upgrading DR-ID

V10.0-V12.0 to V12.1. 300CL Application”
Restore/reconfigure the settings $ “1.12 Restoring Settings
Data”
Upgrade DR-ID 1200MC from $ “1.4 Upgrading DR-ID

V14.0-V16.7 to V17.1. 1200MC”
Configure additional PC settings $ “1.13 Configuration of
Additional PC Setting”
Update FUJIFILM's AP firmware from $ “1.5 Updating FUJIFILM's

Configure general user rights (if necessary) $ “1.14 Migration to Non-
V1.4 to V1.5. AP firmware (Only for
Administrator Account
updating from V1.4 or
Environment”
earlier)”
Check proper operation $ “1.15 Confirming the

Back up settings data $ “1.6 Backing Up Settings Installation”
- Back up Service Utility Data”
- Back up User Utility
- Back up files
- Record setting values Back up the system image $ “1.16 Backing up System
- Record installed functions and tools Image”
- Back up DR-XD 1000 (Using Acronis True Image)
Upgrade the OS and configure settings. $ “1.7 Upgrading OS (New

Windows 7 to Windows10 LTSC 2019 Installation)”
Install DR-ID 300CL V12.1. $ “1.8 Installing DR-ID 300CL

Activate the licence for DR-ID 300CL Application”
$ “1.9 Acquiring and
Activating Licence”
018-241-08E
MC19-3
1.1 Preparation and Considerations Considerations for Upgrading OS

- The images are not transferred over
Preparation
 The images cannot be transferred over with OS upgrades.
Below are what you should prepare before upgrading to Windows10 LTSC 2019. After Console has started up, confirm that no studies are left in the “Waiting study”,
“Waiting QA”, or “Output Status” tab.
Product name Parts number Media Note
- Studies in the “Waiting study” tab → Finish or delete the studies.
BFC-1208 Win10 LTSC 2019
114Y2150325B00 DVD Software kit - Studies in the “Waiting QA” tab → Finish QA.
Image Disk V1.0 - Studies in the “Output Status” tab → Output the studies or delete the output queues.
DR-ID 300CL Application - Performing maintenance tasks in environment with standard user rights.
114Y2150001L05 DVD Software kit
Software V12.1 (DR-XD 1000)
Use a maintenance account when performing maintenance tasks (e.g., upgrading
DR-ID 300CL Standard KIT versions, applying HF, and changing settings) in an environment to which standard
114Y2150008B03 CD Software kit
V12.1 (DR-XD1000) user rights apply.
DR-ID 300CL V12.1 Reference
114Y2150052B18 CD Software kit
Guide (DR-XD 1000)
Refer to the ECN-
Start order change setting Kit 114Y2150955B00 CD
001633
DR-ID1200 Application
114Y2335100A07 DVD Software kit
Software V17.1 (DR-XD 1000)
Win10 Image Backup/Recovery
114Y2150323B00 DVD Software kit
Tool V1.0
DR-ID 300CL Application Existing options are
- -
Licence transferred over
DR-ID1200 Application
- DVD If necessary
Software V16.7 or earlier
FUJIFILM's AP firmware V1.5 Refer to the
853Y120001.bin File
(853Y120001.zip) ECN:2017-E-0069
RU PC-TOOL Security Prepare the newest
- File
Unlocking Key File version
DR-XD 1000PX Maintenance Refer to the ECN-
114Y2335706A00 CD
Tool Software 001607
DICOMTagEditTool 114Y2150757Bxx CD If this is used.
CS Edit Tool for Storage 114Y2150759Bxx CD If this is used.
FNCParamVerUpTool 114Y2150782Bxx CD If this is used.
VGParamVerUpTool 114Y2150815Bxx CD If this is used.
DYNParamVerUpTool 114Y2150815Bxx CD If this is used.
External DVD-drive - -
Backup media - -
018-241-08E
MC19-4
1.2 Backing Up System Image 1.5 Updating FUJIFILM's AP Firmware (Only for Updating
$ {MC:Appendix 13._Backup/Restoration with Acronis True Image 2018} from V1.4 or earlier)
 NOTE 
Skip this step if the version is already upgraded to FUJIFILM's AP firmware V1.5 or
later.
Update the FUJIFILM's AP firmware to V1.5.

$ {MC:Appendix 18._Updating to FUJIFILM-made AP Windows 10 Compatible
Firmware (V1.5)}
1.3 Upgrading DR-ID 300CL Application 1.6 Backing Up Settings Data

To use the same settings data in the new environment, save the backup data to
 NOTE  external storage media.
Skip this step if the version is already upgraded to DR-ID 300CL V12.1. $ {MC:Appendix 14._Backing Up/Restoring the Device Settings_1. Backing Up
the Device Information}
Upgrade the DR-ID 300CL application software to V12.1.
$ For details about the procedure, see {IN:Appendix 8_Upgrading the AP} of
DR-ID 300CL Service Manual.
1.4 Upgrading DR-ID 1200MC

 NOTE 
Skip this step if the version is already upgraded to DR-ID 1200MC V17.1.
Upgrade the DR-ID 1200MC application software to V17.1.

$ {MC:Appendix 11._Updating MC Software Version}
018-241-08E
MC19-5
1.7 Upgrading OS (New Installation) Restoring Windows10

Upgrade the OS from Windows 7 to Windows10 LTSC 2019.
(1) Insert the “Windows10 LTSC 2019 Image Disk DVD” into the USB DVD
drive.

 BIOS Settings
(2) On the BIOS screen, select “Save & Exit”, select “USB DVD drive”
(1) Connect the USB keyboard (jig) / Mouse (jig) to the USB port. displayed under “Boot Override”, and press <Enter> key.
(2) Connect the USB connection DVD drive (jig) to the USB port. (3) If the message “Press any key to boot from CD or DVD ...” appears,
press the <Enter> key within five seconds.
(3) Turn ON the PC.
(4) If the message “WARNING: All existing files will be deleted before the
(4) When the A-Value window opens, press the <F2> key. restore. Press any key to continue...” appears, press the <Enter> key.
The PC starts.
 NOTE 
If the <F2> key is not pressed with the timeliness, the setup window will not open.
In such an instance, restart the PC to perform step (4) above again.
The BIOS setup window opens.
(5) Select “Advanced” - “CPU Configuration”, set and check the following
item.
- Hyper-threading: Disabled
- Execute Disable Bit: Disabled
- Intel Virtualization Technology: Disabled
POCX01030S001J.ai
Restoration starts.
(6) Select “Advanced” - “AMT Configuration”, set and check the following
item. (5) When the message “The operation completed successfully.” appears,
- Intel AMT: Disabled remove the “Windows10 LTSC 2019 Image Disk DVD” from the USB
DVD drive.
(7) Select “Chipset” - “System Agent(SA) Configuration” - “Graphics
configuration” - “LCD Control”, set and check the following item.
- Backlight brightness: 50%
(8) Select “Boot” - “CSM Parameters”, set and check the following item.
- Boot option filter: Legacy only
(9) Select “Exit” - “Exit Saving Changes”, and press the <Enter> key.
The “Setup Confirmation” window opens.
(10) Select [Yes], and press the <Enter> key.

The PC restarts.
018-241-08E
MC19-6
(6) When the message “Press any key to continue…” appears, press the 
 Starting Windows10
<Enter> key.
(1) “Continue in selected language?” window will be displayed. Select
“English (United States)” and click [Yes].
POCX01030S002J.ai
The PC restarts.
POCX01030S003J.ai
The “Let's start with region. Is this right?” window opens.
(2) Select “United States” and click [Yes].
POCX01030S004E.ai
The “Is this the right keyboard layout?” window opens.
018-241-08E
MC19-7
(3) Select “US” and click [Yes]. 
 Setting Hibernation
(2) Enter “cmd” and click [OK].
POCX01030S014E.ai
POCX01030S005E.ai The command prompt window opens.

The “Want to add a second keyboard layout?” window opens.
(3) Enter “powercfg.exeΔ–hΔoff” for command prompt and then press
(4) Click [Skip]. <Enter> key.
NOTE
Δ is single byte space.
POCX01030S015E.ai
Close command prompt.
POCX01030S006E.ai
(5) The PC will be restarted.
018-241-08E
MC19-8

 Setting Disk Management (4) Select the “Assign the following drive letter” check box, change “D”
to “I”, and click [OK].
(1) Right-click the and click “Disk Management” on the menu.
The “Disk Management” window opens.
(2) Right click “(D:)” and then select “Change Drive Letter and Paths…”
from the menu shown.
POCX01030S018E.ai
The “Do you want continue?” window opens.
(5) Click [Yes].
POCX01030S019E.ai
(6) If the File Explorer opens, close it.

POCX01030S016E.ai
The “Change Drive Letter and Paths for D: (Image)” window opens.
(3) Select “D:” and click [Change...].
POCX01030S017E.ai
The “Change Drive Letter or Path” window opens.
018-241-08E
MC19-9
(7) “Disk Management” window will be displayed. Right click “CD-ROM (9) Place a checkmark to “Assign the following drive letter”, change “E”
0 (E:)” and then select “Change Drive Letter and Paths…” from the to “D”, and click [OK].
menu shown.
POCX01030S022E.ai
The “Do you want continue?” window opens.
(10) Click [Yes].
POCX01030S019E.ai
The “Disk Management” window close.
POCX01030S020E.ai
The “Change Drive Letter and Paths for E: ()” window opens.
(8) Select “E:” and click [Change...].
POCX01030S021E.ai
The “Change Drive Letter or Path” window opens.
018-241-08E
MC19-10

 Setting Event Viewer 
 System Settings
(1) Right-click the and click “Event Viewer” on the menu. (1) Click the and select .
The “Event Viewer” window opens. The “Settings” window opens.
(2) Select “Customize” from the “View”menu.
(2) Click “System”.
POCX01030S029E.ai
The “Customize View” window opens. POCX01030S023E.ai
The “System” window opens.

(3) Remove the checkmark from “Action pane”, and click [OK].
(3) Click “Focus assist”.
POCX01030S030E.ai
The system returns to the “Event Viewer” window.

POCX01030S024E.ai
(4) Close the “Event Viewer” window.

The system returns to the “Disk Management” window.
(5) Close the “Disk Management” window.
018-241-08E
MC19-11
(4) Make the following settings to “Automatic rules”. (6) Click [Rename this PC], enter the “computer name” recorded in “1.6
When I'm duplicating my display: Off Backing Up Settings Data”, and click [Next].
When I'm playing a game: Off
Show me a summary of what I missed
while focus assist was on: Remove the checkmark
POCX01030S025E.ai
(5) On the “System” window, click “About”.
POCX01030S027E.ai
The “Rename your PC” window opens.
(7) Click “Restart now”.
POCX01030S028E.ai
POCX01030S026E.ai (8) Enter the following to log on.

User name: Administrator
Password: fcr-iip
018-241-08E
MC19-12
Network Adapter Settings (Only for 1-LAN Port Configured Machines)
 Disable “RNDIS/Ethernet Gadget” Device (Only for 2-LAN Port

 NOTE 
These procedures are only to be implemented when the DR-XD 1000 control PC is  NOTE 
1-LAN port configured. Do not implement them with 2-LAN port configured machines. These procedures are only to be implemented when the DR-XD 1000 control PC is
2-LAN port configured. Do not implement them with 1-LAN port configured machines.
(1) Right-click the and click “Device Manager”.
The “Device Manager” window opens. (1) Right-click the and click “Device Manager”.
(2) Right-click “Network adapters” - “Intel(R) I120 Gigabit Network
Connection”, and click “Disable device”. (2) Right-click “Other devices” - “RNDIS/Ethernet Gadget”, and click
The “Disabling this device will cause it to stop functioning. Do you really want to “Disable device”.
disable it?” window opens. The “Disabling this device will cause it to stop functioning. Do you really want to
disable it?” window opens.
(3) Click [Yes].
The system returns to the “Device Manager” window. (3) Click [Yes].
(4) Right-click “Other devices” - “RNDIS/Ethernet Gadget”, and click
“Update driver”. (4) Confirm that there is no “!” on the “Other devices” - “RNDIS/Ethernet
The “How do you want to search for drivers?” window opens. Gadget” and close the “Device Manager” window.
(5) Click “Browse my computer for driver software”. NOTE

The “Browse for drivers on your computer” window opens. The FUJIFILM AP’s “POWER” lamp keeps on “flashing red” due to the
disablement of the “RNDIS/Ethernet Gadget” device, but it can be normally used
(6) Click “Let me pick from a list of available drivers on my computer”. without operations being affected.
The “Select your device's type from the list below.” window opens.
(7) Select “Network adapters”, and click [Next].

The “Select the device driver you want to install for this hardware.” window opens.
(8) Select “Manufacturer: Microsoft” - “Model: USB RNDIS6 Adapter”, and

click [Next].
The “Update Driver Warning” window opens.
(9) Click [Yes].

(10) Click [Close].

(11) Confirm that “Network adapters” - “USB RNDIS6 Adapter” is displayed

and close the “Device Manager” window.
018-241-08E
MC19-13

 COM Port Settings 
 Setting Tablet PC
(1) Right-click the and click “Device Manager”. (1) Press <Windows> + <R> key to open the Run window, enter “Control”
The “Device Manager” window opens. and click [OK].
(2) Check that there is no yellow “!”.
(2) Click “Tablet PC Settings”.
(3) Right-click “Ports (COM & LPT)” - “Communications Port (COM1)”, The “Tablet PC Settings” window opens.
and click “Properties”.
The “Communications Port (COM1) Properties” window opens. (3) Click “Calibrate” in the “Display” tab.
The “Calibrate” window opens.
(4) Click the “Port Settings” tab, and set the following:
Bits per second: 4800 (4) Follow the instructions window and touch the window to calibrate.
Parity: Even The “Digitizer Calibration Tool” window opens.
(5) Click [Advanced], select “COM33” for “COM Port Number”, and click (5) Click [Yes].
[OK]. The “Tablet PC Settings” window opens.
The “Communications Port (COM33) Properties” window opens.
(6) Click [OK].
(6) Click [OK]. The system returns to the desktop.
(7) Close the “Device Manager” window.
018-241-08E
MC19-14

 Setting Sound 
 Setting Security and Maintenance
(1) Press <Windows> + <R> key to open the Run window, enter “Control” (1) Press <Windows> + <R> key to open the Run window, enter “Control”
and click [OK]. and click [OK].
The “All Control Panel Items” window opens. The “All Control Panel Items” window opens.
(2) Click “Sound”. (2) Click “Security and Maintenance”.

The “Sound” window opens. The “Security and Maintenance” window opens.
(3) Click the “Sound” tab, select “Default Beep” under “Program Events”. (3) Click “Change Security and Maintenance settings”.
The “Change Security and Maintenance settings” window opens.
(4) Select “Windows Bell” from the “Sound” pull-down menu, and click
[OK]. (4) Remove the checkmark from the following items, and click [OK].
The system returns to the “All Control Panel Items” window. Security messages
- Internet security settings
(5) Click [OK]. - Network firewall
The system returns to the desktop. - User Account Control
- Virus protection
Maintenance messages
- Windows Backup
- Automatic Mentenance
- Drive status
- Windows Troubleshooting
- File History
- Storage Spaces
- Work Folders
The system returns to the “Security and Maintenance” window.
018-241-08E
MC19-15

 Network Settings (9) Right-click “Eth1”, and select “Properties”.
(1) Press <Windows> + <R> key to open the Run window, enter “Control”
and click [OK]. (10) Select “Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)”, and click “Properties”.
The “All Control Panel Items” window opens. The “Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties” window opens.
(2) Click “Network and Shareing Center”.

(11) Select “Use the following IP address”, and perform the following
The “Network and Shareing Center” window opens.
setting, and then click [OK].
(3) Click “Change adapter settings”. - IP Address
- Subnet mask
- Default gateway
(4) Right-click each network adapter icon, click “Rename”, and change NOTE
the names as shown below.
For the settings, enter the values recorded in “1.6 Backing Up Settings Data” - “
- For the 1-LAN port configured machines. Network settings”.
Ethernet Intel(R) Ethernet Connection I218-LM: Eth0
Local Area Connection USB RNDIS6 Adapter: Eth1 The “Eth1 Properties” window opens.
- For the 2-LAN port configured machines.
Ethernet Intel(R) Ethernet Connection I218-LM: Eth1 (12) Click [Advanced].
Ethernet 2 Intel(R) I210 Gigabit Network Connection: Eth0
(13) Remove the checkmark from “Automatic metric”.
(5) Right-click “Eth0”, and click “Properties”.
The “Eth0 Properties” window opens. (14) Enter “1” for “Interface Metric”.
(6) Select “Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)”, and click “Properties”. (15) Click [OK].
The “Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties” window opens. The “Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties” window opens.
(7) Select “Use the following IP address”, and perform the following (16) Click [OK].
setting, and then click [OK]. The “Eth1 Properties” window opens.
- IP Address
- Subnet mask
(17) Click [Close].
- Default gateway The system returns to the “Network Connections” window.
NOTE (18) Close the “Network Connections” window.

For the settings, enter the values recorded in “1.6 Backing Up Settings Data” - “ The system returns to the “Network and Shareing Center” window.
Network settings”.
The system returns to the “Eth0 Properties” window. The system returns to the desktop.
(8) Click [Close].

018-241-08E
MC19-16

 Adding Components 
 Setting Firewall
(1) Press <Windows> + <R> key to open the Run window, enter “Control” (1) Press <Windows> + <R> key to open the Run window, enter “Control”
and click [OK]. and click [OK].
The “All Control Panel Items” window opens. The “All Control Panel Items” window opens.
(2) Click “Programs and Features”. (2) Click “Windows Defender Firewall”.
The “Programs and Features” window opens. The “Windows Defender Firewall” window opens.
(3) Click “Turn Windows features on or off”. (3) Click “Advanced Settings”.
The “Turn Windows features on or off” window opens. The “Windows Defender Firewall with Advanced Security” window opens.
(4) Make the following settings. (Items without indication remain the (4) Select “Windows Defender Firewall with Advanced Security” - “Inbound
default.) Rules”.
- .Net Framework 4.7 Advanced Service
- WCF Service (5) Right-click “FTP Server Passive (FTP Passive Traffic-In)”, and select
- HTTP Activation “Enable Rule”.
- Internet Information Service (6) Close the “Windows Defender Firewall with Advanced Security”
- All items below the FTP Server window.
- All items below the FTP Extensibility
The system returns to the “Windows Defender Firewall” window.
- Telnet Client
REFERENCE
- : indicates it is the item to be installed.
- : indicates a part of the items of its lower layers will be installed.
- After placing a checkmark to an item, all items of its lower layers are also
selected.
(5) Click [OK].

The installation starts.
The “Windows completed the requested changes.” window opens.
NOTE
When asked to restart the PC, click [Restart Now].
(6) Click [Close].

The system returns to the “Programs and Features” window.

018-241-08E
MC19-17

 Setting Autoplay 
 Setting Devices
(1) Press <Windows> + <R> key to open the Run window, enter “Control” (1) Click the and select “Settings”.
and click [OK]. The “Settings” window opens.
(2) Click “Devices”.
(2) Click “AutoPlay”. The “Devices” window opens.
The “AutoPlay” window opens.
(3) Click “Typing”.
(3) Remove the checkmark from “Use AutoPlay for all media and The “Typing” window opens.
devices”, and click [Save].
The system returns to the “All Control Panel Items” window. (4) Click “Spelling”, and perform the following settings.
- Autocorrect misspelled words: Off
(4) Close the “All Control Panel Items” window. - Highlight misspelled words: Off
(5) Click “Typing”, perform the following settings.
- Show text suggestions as I type on the software keyboard: Off
- Add a space after I choose a text suggestion: Off
- Add a period after I double-tap the Spacebar: Off
(6) Close the “Typing” window.

018-241-08E
MC19-18

 Setting Personalization 
 Setting Privacy
(1) Click the and select “Settings”. (1) Click the and select “Settings”.
The “Settings” window opens. The “Settings” window opens.
(2) Click “Personalization”. (2) Click “Privacy”.

The “Privacy” window opens.
(3) Click “Background”, and perform the following settings.
Choose your background color: Navy blue (2nd line, 5th from the left) (3) Select “General”, and set “Let websites provide locally relevant
content by accessing my language list” to “off”.
(4) Click “Start”, and set “Show recently added apps” to “off”.
(4) Select “Background apps”, and set “Let apps run in the background”
(5) Click “Start” - “Choose which folders appear on Start”, and perform to “off”.
the following settings.
File Explorer: On (5) Close the “Privacy” window.
Documents: Off The system returns to the desktop.
Pictures: Off
(6) Close the “Personalization” window.

018-241-08E
MC19-19
 Setting Search
  Setting Start Menu

(1) Click the and select “Settings”. (1) If there are tiles on the Start screen, right-click each tile and click
The “Settings” window opens. “Unpin from Start”.
(2) Click “Search”. (2) From the Start menu, minimize the Start screen. (Width and height)
(3) Click “Cloud Search”.
(4) Set “Cloud Search” to “off” from the “Cloud Search” item.
(5) Set the following from the “Permissions & History” item.
Activity recommendations: Off
My device history: Off
(6) Close the “Search” window.

018-241-08E
MC19-20
1.8 Installing DR-ID 300CL Application (6) Enter “1” (SQL Server) and press the <Enter> key.
NOTE
 Installing Database Management System

- If “Installation Failed.” is displayed and the screen returns to Setup Menu, the
(1) Restart the PC. installation failed. In this case, perform the steps from step (1) again.
After the PC restarts, login window opens. - If re-installing is performed five times and the installation still fails, perform “1.7
Upgrading OS (New Installation)” and the subsequent steps again.
(2) Enter the user name and password, then click [Login].
User name: Administrator NOTE
Password: fcr-iip If “Please reboot the system. And select 1) menu again.” and “Press any key to
continue...” appear, restarting the system is required while SQL Server 2014 is
(3) Insert “DR-ID300CL Application Software V12.1 DVD” into the DVD being installed.
drive of the PC. In this case, perform the following steps. (May be required several times.)
a) Press any key to go back to the setup menu.
(4) Open Explorer and double-click the installation DVD. b) Enter “0” and press the <Enter> key. (Quit)
Console Advance Setup Menu window opens. c) Repeat from step (1).
NOTE d) If the installation is completed, perform step (8) or later because step (7) is
not displayed.
If the command prompt does not start, double-click “Setup.bat” directly under the
installation DVD.
(7) When the “Press any key to continue...” message appears, press the
<Enter> key.
(5) Enter “1” (Install Database Management System) and press the
The system returns to the Setup Menu.
<Enter> key.
The menu for selecting the components which are being installed is displayed. (8) Enter “0” (Quit) and press the <Enter> key.
(9) Remove the DVD from the DVD drive.
(11) After the PC restarts, enter the user name and password, then click
[Login].
User name: Administrator
Password: fcr-iip
018-241-08E
MC19-21
 Installing DR-ID 300CL Application
 (12) Click [Yes].
The system returns to the “Risiip Setup” window.
(1) Insert “DR-ID300CL Application Software V12.1 DVD” into the DVD
drive of the PC. (13) Confirm that “Directory” is “C:\Program Files\Risiip\” and click “Setup
Button (PC icon button)”.
(2) Open Explorer and double-click the installation DVD. The “Risiip - Choose Program Group” window opens.
Console Advance Setup Menu opens.
NOTE (14) Click [Continue] while “Risiip” is being selected (as in the default
state).
If the command prompt does not start, double-click “Setup.bat” directly under the
installation DVD. NOTE
- If “The Destination File is in-Use” window is displayed, click [Ignore]. Then,
click [Yes] on “ignore error?” window opens.
(3) Enter “2” (Install DR Console Application) and press the <Enter> key. - Click [Yes] for all on “Version Conflict” window opens. (more than once)
The “Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for IIP” window opens. - If “An error occurred while ~” message is displayed, click [Ignore].
(4) Click [Next]. The “Risiip Setup was completed successfully” window opens.
The “Ready to Install the Program” window opens.
(15) Click [OK].
(5) Click [Install]. The system returns to the Setup Menu.
The “InstallShield Wizard Completed” window opens.
(16) Enter “19” (Install SKB Launcher) and press the <Enter> key.
(6) Click [Finish]. The SKB installation menu opens.
(7) When the “Press any key to continue...” message appears, press the (17) Enter “1” (Install) and press the <Enter> key.
<Enter> key. The system returns to the Setup Menu.
The system returns to the Setup Menu.
(18) Enter “0” (Quit) and press the <Enter> key.
(8) Enter “10” (Install FRIS Modules) and press the <Enter> key.
The “Welcome to the Risiip Installation Program” window opens. (19) Open Explorer and double-click “D:\tools\AssocDataFolder\
AssocDataFolder.bat”.
(9) Click [OK]. The command prompt window opens.
The “Begin the installation by clicking the button below.” window opens.
(10) Click [Change Directory]. <Enter> key.
The “Change Directory” window opens.
(21) Open Explorer and double-click “D:\tools\
(11) Change the installation destination displayed in “Path” to “C:\Program SetupDRCassetteMemoryMode\SetupDRCasetteMemoryMode.bat”.
Files\Risiip”, and click [OK]. The command prompt window opens.
The “The destination directory...” window opens.
018-241-08E
MC19-22
(22) When the “Press any key to continue...” message appears, press the  Installing Standard KIT

<Enter> key.
(1) Insert “DR-ID 300CL Standard KIT (DR-XD1000) V12.1 CD” into the
(23) Remove the DVD from the DVD drive. DVD drive of the PC.
NOTE (2) Open Explorer and double-click the StandardKit DVD.
If the DR-ID 300CL version is V12.1, perform the steps (24) to (27). StandardKit Menu opens.
NOTE
(24) Insert “Start order change setting Kit CD” into the DVD drive of the If the command prompt does not start, double-click “Setup.bat” directly under the
PC. StandardKit DVD.
(25) Open Explorer and double-click “InstallProcessManagerSettingconfig

(.bat)”. (3) Enter “1” (All) and press the <Enter> key.
The command prompt window opens. The “Select Locale” window opens.
(26) When the “Press any key to continue...” message appears, confirm (4) Enter “2” (English (U.S.A. without mammo menu)) and press the
that “Success.” Is displayed on one line above, and press the <Enter> <Enter> key.
key.
NOTE
(27) Remove the CD from the DVD drive. For other than U.S., enter “4” (English (Other without mammo menu)) and press
the <Enter> key.
(5) When the “Press any key.” message appears, press the <Enter> key.
(6) When “Completed” is displayed, click [OK]. (More than once)
<Enter> key.
The system returns to the Select Locale Menu.
(8) Enter “0” (Quit) and press the <Enter> key.
(9) Remove the CD from the DVD drive.
018-241-08E
MC19-23
 Installing the Electronic Manual
 (12) Perform the “Internet” settings.
a) Select “Internet”.
(1) Insert “DR-ID 300CL V12.1 Reference Guide (DR-XD1000) CD” into the b) Remove the checkmark from “Allow speculative downloading in the background”.
DVD drive of the PC.
(13) Perform the “Security (Enhanced)” settings.
(2) Open Explorer and double-click the “(D drive):\ElectronicManual.vbs”.
a) Select “Security (Enhanced)”.
The “Please select the language” window opens. b) Select “Sandbox Protections”.
c) Remove the checkmark from “Enable Protected Mode at statup”.
(3) Enter “2” (Other) and click [OK].
NOTE
NOTE
The “Are you sure you want to continue?” window opens, click [Yes].
If not, click “3”(Other (With no Mammo)) and click [OK].
The “Please select the installation PC.” window opens. (14) Perform the “Trust Manager” settings.
a) Select “Trust Manager” - “Automatic Adobe Approved Trusted Certificates Updates”.
(4) Enter “1” (Console PC) and click [OK].
b) Remove the checkmark from “Load trusted root certificates from an Adobe server
The “Please select Acrobat Reader ver.” window opens. (no personal information is sent)”.
c) Select “Trust Manager” - “Automatic Europian Union Approved Trusted Certificates
(5) Enter “2” (V11.0 (for Windows10)) and click [OK]. Updates”.
The “The installation succeeded.” window opens. d) Remove the checkmark from “Load trusted root certificates from an Adobe server
(no personal information is sent)”.
(6) Click [OK].
(15) Close the “Adobe Reader” window.
(8) On the desktop, double-click the [Adobe Reader XI].

The “Personal Computer Software License Agreement” window opens.
(9) Click [Accept].

Adobe Reader starts
(10) Select “Edit” - “Preferences”.

The “Preferences” window opens.
(11) Perform the “Updater” settings.

a) Select “Updater”.
b) Place a checkmark to “Do not download or install updates automatically”.
018-241-08E
MC19-24
1.9 Acquiring and Activating Licence 1.10 Installing DR-ID 1200MC Application
Start up the DR-ID 300CL’s Service Utility for the license key to be acquired, and Install the DR-ID 1200MC V17.1 application software.
obtain the chassis information. $ {MC:Appendix 20._Reinstalling OS and Application_1.3 Installing the DR-ID
$ Start procedure of Service Utility, see {IN:Appendix 54 Software Licence_ 300CL Application}
1.1 Obtain the Hardware Unique Key} of DR-ID 300CL Service Manual.
$ Start procedure of Service Utility, see {IN:Appendix 54 Software Licence_
2.1 Logging in the Licence Server_2.2.7 Reissue Licence_■ Reissue Licence}
of DR-ID 300CL Service Manual.
$ Start procedure of Service Utility, see {IN:Appendix 54 Software Licence_
3. Applying the Licence} of DR-ID 300CL Service Manual.
018-241-08E
MC19-25
1.11 Setting Options and Software Settings - DYNParamVerUpTool
Install DYNParamVerUpTool and restore configuration files.
Hardware Option
 File name Original folder path
Configure the connection settings for the following hardware options as required. EDR2u.prm C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\ImageProcessing\ImageProc\Common
- Magnetic Card Reader
- Barcode Reader Files in the CR C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\ImageProcessing\ImageProc\System\CR\
folder User
- Wireless Barcode Reader
Files in the DR C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\ImageProcessing\ImageProc\System\DR\
folder User\
Software Option
 Selectu.prm C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\ImageProcessing\ImageProc\System\CR\
Install or set the following software options as required. User
- Network Image Search Function (Application) Selectu.prm C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\ImageProcessing\ImageProc\System\DR\
- Synapse QA DirFPD\(Device name)\User
Selectu.prm C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\ImageProcessing\ImageProc\System\DR\
InDirFPD\(Device name)\User
Service Tool

Install or restore the settings for the following service tools as required.
- DICOMTagEditTool Other Software

Install DICOMTagEditTool.
Restore settings for the following functions as necessary.
- CS Edit Tool for Storage - DR-XD 1000 Maintenance Tool Software
Install CS Edit Tool for Storage. Refer to the following for the installation procedure.
File name Original folder path $ {MU:Appendix 1._Installing and Uninstalling the DR-XD 1000 Maintenance
Tool}
- Symantec
- FNCParamVerUpTool Reinstall Symantec Endpoint Protection and reconfigure its settings.
Install FNCParamVerUpTool and restore configuration files.
- McAfee
File name Original folder path Reinstall McAfee Application Control and reconfigure its settings.
FNCdu.prm C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\ImageProcessing\ImageProc\System\DR\
Default\User
- VGParamVerUpTool
Install VGParamVerUpTool and restore configuration files.
File name Original folder path
VGPdu.prm C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\ImageProcessing\ImageProc\System\DR\
Default\User
018-241-08E
MC19-26
1.12 Restoring Settings Data Restoring User Utility

Restore the settings data that was backed up (“1.6. Backing Up Settings Data”) before
the OS was upgraded. (1) Start the User Utility.
The Login window opens.
Restoring Service Utility (Config Settings)

 (2) Enter the user name and password, then click [Login].
User name: FFService
(1) Start the [IIP Service Utility] and click [Configuration Restore/Backup]. Password: fieldengineer
The “Configuration Restore/Backup” window opens. The “Main menu” window opens.
(2) Select the backup data storage folder (eg, “\S-BK”) on the external (3) click [Restore].
storage media in “Configuration Restore” - “Specified Directory”, and
click [Restore].
(4) Select the backup data storage folder (e.g., “\U-BK”) on the external
(3) When the “Restore is finished” window opens, click [OK]. storage media, and click [OK].
The “Configuration Restore/Backup” window opens. The “Restore” window opens.
(4) Click [Cancel] to close the “Configuration Restore/Backup” window. (5) Select all items under “Select Information to be restored”, and click
[Start].
(5) Copy “NetworkStatusConfig.xml” and “WifiProfile” folder inside the
“Utl” folder in the backup data storage folder (e.g., “S-BK”) on the (6) When the “Restoring is completed” window opens, click [OK].
external storage media to the “C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Config” The system returns to the “Restore” window.
folder.
The “IIP Service Utility” window opens. (7) Click [Terminate] to close the “Restore” window.
The system returns to the “Main menu” window.
(6) Click [Network Adapter Configuration].
The “Network Adapter Configuration” window opens. (8) Click [Terminate] to close the “Main menu” window.
(7) Click [Restore].

The “Backup is Incomplete” window opens.
(8) Click [OK].
018-241-08E
MC19-27
Overwriting File
 Restoring DR-XD1000 Config


If necessary, overwrite the following files with the files in the backup data storage $ {MC:Appendix 14._Backing Up/Restoring the Device Settings_2.1 Restoring
folder (e.g., “\BkWork\Patient”) on the external storage media without changing their the Device Information}
original folder location.
- Patient Information Display Linkage function
PatientInfo.xsl C:\FDRWeb\rmtDisp_PatientInfo\App_Themes
web.config C:\FDRWeb\rmtDisp_PatientInfo
- Remote Image Display

web.config C:\FDRWeb\rmtDisp_DisplayImage
Display.css C:\FDRWeb\rmtDisp_DisplayImage\App_Themes
Display_Mobile.css C:\FDRWeb\rmtDisp_DisplayImage\App_Themes
Anotation.css C:\FDRWeb\rmtDisp_DisplayImage\App_Themes
- Same technique code is to be set to different selectors

TechniqueCodeConvertTbl. C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Config
ini
- Size setting of D-EVO 2 Small model

TargetPixelSizeList.csv C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Param
018-241-08E
MC19-28
1.13 Configuration of Additional PC Setting  Disabling Services

 Changing On-Screen Keyboard Settings
 (1) Insert “DR-ID300CL Application Software V12.1 DVD” into the DVD
drive of the PC.
The “Run...” window opens. (2) Press <Windows> + <R> key.
(2) Enter “C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\System\IIPServiceUtility.exe” and
press the <Enter> key. (3) Enter “D:\tools\LocalUserSetting\OSSetting\DisableServices.bat” and
The Service Utility starts and the “IIP Service Utility” window opens. press the <Enter> key.
The command prompt window opens.
(3) Click [Setup Configuration Item].
The “Setup Configuration Item” window opens. (4) When the “Press any key to continue...” message appears, press the
any key.
(4) Select “CONFIG” - “SYSTEM CONFIG” - “1.IMAGE MODALITY”.
(5) Setting items will appear in the right pane. Under “No.68 Software
KeyBoard Program Path”, double-click the “Value” field.
(6) The “Value” field can now be changed. Change its value to “C:\
Windows\Sysnative\osk.exe”.
(7) Click “Config” and click [Save] on the displayed menu.
The “Save Configuration?” window opens.
(8) Click [Yes].

The system saves the setup data and returns to the “Setup Configuration Item”
window.
(9) Click “Config" and click [Close] on the displayed menu.

The system returns to the “IIP Service Utility” window.
(10) Click [Exit Service Utility] to close the Service Utility window.
018-241-08E
MC19-29
1.14 Migration to Non-Administrator Account Environment 1.16 Backing Up System Image
 NOTE  Back up the system image of DR-ID 300CL V12.1 that was upgraded to Windows10
LTSC 2019.
Migrate the environment only if you have an environment to which standard user For details about the procedure, refer to the following.
rights apply. $ {MC:Appendix 13._Backup/Restoration with Acronis True Image 2018}
In an environment with standard user rights, the settings are returned to older settings.
In this case, refer to the following to set the non-administrator account environment.
$ {IN:Appendix 20._Allowing Non-Administrator Users to Log In}
1.15 Confirming the Installation

Reboot PC and confirm that Console Application is running.
018-241-08E
MC19-30
BLANK PAGE
018-241-08E
MC19-31
BLANK PAGE
018-241-08E
MC19-32
BLANK PAGE
018-241-08E
MC20-1
Appendix 20. Reinstalling OS and  For New Installation
Application Backing Up the Config $ {MC:Appendix 14._Backing Up/

Restoring the Device Settings_1.
Backing Up the Device Information}
1. Installation Flow Installing and Setting Windows 10 $ “1.1 Installing and Setting
Windows 10”
For Windows 7

 For Installation from the Recovery Disk Setting the OS $ “1.2 Setting the OS”
Backing Up the Config $ {MC:Appendix 14._Backing Up/

Backing Up the Device Information} Installing Database Management System $ “1.3 Installing the DR-ID 300CL
Application_ Installing Database
Management System”
Restoration from the Backup Image $ {MC:Appendix 5._Backing Up
and Restoring System Images in
Windows 7_3. Restoring System Installing DR-ID 300CL Application $ “1.3 Installing the DR-ID 300CL
Images} Application_ Installing DR-ID
300CL Application”
Resetting the Windows Services $ {MC:Appendix 5._Backing Up
and Restoring System Images
in Windows 7_2.4 Resetting the
Installing Standard Kit $ “1.3 Installing the DR-ID 300CL
Application_ Installing Standard
Windows Services}
KIT”
Windows 7 Activation $ “1.6 Activating the OS (For
Windows 7)” Installing the Electronic Manual and $ “1.3 Installing the DR-ID 300CL
Adobe Reader Settings Application_ Installing the
Electronic Manual and Adobe
Reader Settings”
For Windows 10

Changing On-Screen Keyboard Settings $ “1.3 Installing the DR-ID 300CL
 For Installation from the Recovery Disk Application_ Changing On-Screen
Keyboard Settings”
Backing Up the Config $ {MC:Appendix 14._Backing Up/
Disabling Services $ “1.3 Installing the DR-ID 300CL
Backing Up the Device Information}
Application_ Disabling Services”
Restoration from the Backup Image $ {MC:Appendix 13._Backup/

Restoration with Acronis True
Installing the MC Application $ “1.4 Installing the MC Application”
Image 2018_4. Restoration
Procedure}
Installing the DRWM $ “1.5 Installing the DRWM”
018-241-08E
MC20-2
1.1 Installing and Setting Windows 10 (5) Press the <Enter> key.
Equipment Connections

- LAN cable connection: Connect to the HUB to which the jig PC is connected, or the
jig PC.
- Jig USB keyboard + mouse: Connect to the USB2.0 port on the rear side.
- Jig DVD drive: Connect to the front side USB3.0 port.
Power Connection

Power cord + AC adapter: Connect to the AC adapter port on the PC.
 NOTE 
Turn on the jig power switch to start up the PC. POCX01030S001J.ai
Restore starts and the “The operation completed successfully.” window opens.
(6) Remove “BFC-1208 Win10 LTSC2019 Image Disk DVD” from the USB
BIOS Settings
 DVD drive.
$ {MC:Appendix 19. Procedures for Upgrading to Windows 10_1.7 Upgrading The “Press any key to continue...” window opens.
OS (New Installation)_ BIOS Settings}
OS Recovery

(1) Turn ON the PC.
(2) Press the <F2> key when the A-Value window is displayed.
(3) Insert the “BFC-1208 Win10 LTSC2019 Image Disk DVD”disk into the
disk drive (jig).
(4) Select “Save & Exit”, select “Jig DVD drive model” displayed under POCX01030S002J.ai
“Boot Override”, and press <Enter> key.

The “Press any key to boot from CD or DVD...” window opens. Starting Windows10

$ {MC:Appendix 19. Procedures for Upgrading to Windows 10_1.7 Upgrading
(5) Press the <Enter> key within five seconds. OS (New Installation)_ Starting Windows10}
The “WARNING: All existing files will be deleted before the restore. Press any key to
continue...” window opens. PC Restart

(1) Restart the PC.
NOTE
Logging in will be automatic up until this startup.
018-241-08E
MC20-3
1.2 Setting the OS Check SSD

Setting Hibernation
 (1) Open Explorer, right-click the C drive, and select “Properties”.
$ {MC:Appendix 19. Procedures for Upgrading to Windows 10_1.7 Upgrading (2) Select “Tools” tab, and click [Check].
OS (New Installation)_ Setting Hibernation}
The “You don't need to scan this drive” window opens.
 NOTE 
Confirm that just “Standby (S3)” is displayed underneath “The following sleep states
(3) Click “Scan drive”, and check C drive.
are available on this system:” before closing the command prompt screen. NOTE
The errors are not being detected.
Setting Disk Management

$ {MC:Appendix 19. Procedures for Upgrading to Windows 10_1.7 Upgrading Check Device Manager and COM Port Settings

OS (New Installation)_ Setting Disk Management}
OS (New Installation)_ COM Port Settings}
Setting Event Viewer

$ {MC:Appendix 19. Procedures for Upgrading to Windows 10_1.7 Upgrading Setting Tablet PC

OS (New Installation)_ Setting Event Viewer}
OS (New Installation)_ Setting Tablet PC}
System Settings

$ {MC:Appendix 19. Procedures for Upgrading to Windows 10_1.7 Upgrading Setting Sound

OS (New Installation)_ System Settings}
 NOTE  OS (New Installation)_ Setting Sound}
Click “About” in the “System” window, and in “Rename this PC”, change the PC name
to DESKTOP-XXXXXXX: DPxxxxx (“DP” is single-byte capital letters, “xxxxx” is the Setting Security and Maintenance

last 5 digits of the manufactured unit).
After setting, restart the PC. (Subsequent to this startup, until the application is $ {MC:Appendix 19. Procedures for Upgrading to Windows 10_1.7 Upgrading
installed, the logging in will not be automatic.) OS (New Installation)_ Setting Security and Maintenance}
 NOTE 
Implement this step after four minutes have elapsed after the PC is started up.
018-241-08E
MC20-4
Network Settings
 Setting Privacy

$ {MC:Appendix 19. Procedures for Upgrading to Windows 10_1.7 Upgrading $ {MC:Appendix 19. Procedures for Upgrading to Windows 10_1.7 Upgrading
OS (New Installation)_ Network Settings} OS (New Installation)_ Setting Privacy}
 NOTE 
For “Use the following IP address”, enter the following value.
Setting Search

- Eth0 $ {MC:Appendix 19. Procedures for Upgrading to Windows 10_1.7 Upgrading
IP address: 172.16.1.20 OS (New Installation)_ Setting Search}
Subnet mask: 255.255.0.0
Default gateway: Blank (Do not enter) Setting Start Menu

- Eth1
IP address: 192.168.0.10 $ {MC:Appendix 19. Procedures for Upgrading to Windows 10_1.7 Upgrading
OS (New Installation)_ Setting Start Menu}
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Default gateway: Blank (Do not enter)
Adding Components

OS (New Installation)_ Adding Components}
Setting Firewall

OS (New Installation)_ Setting Firewall}
Setting Autoplay

OS (New Installation)_ Setting Autoplay}
Setting Devices

OS (New Installation)_ Setting Devices}
Setting Personalization

OS (New Installation)_ Setting Personalization}
018-241-08E
MC20-5
1.3 Installing the DR-ID 300CL Application 
 Disabling Services
 NOTE  $ {MC:Appendix 19. Procedures for Upgrading to Windows 10_1.13
Configuration of Additional PC Setting_ Disabling Services}
Use application software of DR-ID 300CL V12.1 or later.
 NOTE 
Before taking out the DVD, double-click “D:\tools\LocalUserSetting\OSSetting \

 Installing Database Management System DisableServices_AxedaDesktopServer (.bat)” in “Explorer”. (Disabling the Axeda
related services.)
$ {MC:Appendix 19. Procedures for Upgrading to Windows 10_1.8 Installing When the “Press any key to continue...” message appears, press the any key. The
DR-ID 300CL Application_ Installing Database Management System} command prompt disappears.

 Installing DR-ID 300CL Application
$ {MC:Appendix 19. Procedures for Upgrading to Windows 10_1.8 Installing
DR-ID 300CL Application_ Installing DR-ID 300CL Application}

 Installing Standard KIT
DR-ID 300CL Application_ Installing Standard KIT}

 Installing the Electronic Manual and Adobe Reader Settings
DR-ID 300CL Application_ Installing the Electronic Manual}
 NOTE 
Before closing Adobe Reader, select “Product Improvement Program” from the “Help”
menu. Since the “Product Improvement Program” dialog is being displayed, select “No,
not needed” (if it is selected, leave it as it is), and click [OK].

 Changing On-Screen Keyboard Settings
$ {MC:Appendix 19. Procedures for Upgrading to Windows 10_1.13
Configuration of Additional PC Setting_ Changing On-Screen Keyboard
Settings}
018-241-08E
MC20-6
1.4 Installing the MC Application (5) Enter the following values as the “Network Configuration” settings.
- For integrated MC configuration: 1
(1) Insert the application disk into the DVD drive.
(2) Open Explorer and double-click “SetupRun.exe” in the drive of the

application disc.
The “Set Up PC-TOOL” window starts.
(3) Select “.\Install\local\Install.bat” from the “FILE EXECUTION” and then

click [EXECUTE].
1200_700419.ai
#1 Select: .\Install\local\Install.bat
#2 Click: [EXECUTE] The following window opens.
Set Up PC-TOOL window
#1 1200_700420.ai
#2 (6) Press <Y> key.

The Maintenance mode window open.
1200_700417.ai
1200_700418.ai
(4) Press <Y> key.
018-241-08E
MC20-7
(7) Click [Cancel]. (10) Click [Next].
#1 Click: [Cancel]
#1
1200_700421.ai 1200_700423.ai
The “Do you want to cancel the setup?” window opens. The “License Agreement” window opens.
(8) Click [Yes]. (11) Click [I Agree].
(9) Click [Finish].

#1 Click: [Finish]
1200_700424.ai
#1 The “Installation options” window opens.

1200_700422.ai
When the Installation is completed, the “WinPcap 4.1.3 Setup Wizard” window
opens.
018-241-08E
MC20-8
(12) Confirm that the “Automatically start the WinPcap driver at boot time” (14) Press <Enter> key.
check box is checked, and then click [Install]. The installation has been completed.

DXL04010001.ai
1200_700425.ai
The “Completing the WinPcap 4.1.3 Setup Wizard” window opens. (17) Click “Exit Service Utility”.
(13) Click [Finish]. (18) Open Explorer and double-click “D:\SetupRun (.exe)”.
The “Set Up PC-TOOL Ver.7.00” window opens.
(19) Click [INSTALL].
1200_700426.ai
After the Installation is completed, the following window opens.
POCX01030U001.ai
1200_700427.ai
018-241-08E
MC20-9
(20) Place a checkmark to “For FTP-Server”, then click [SET]. (22) Click [Install].
POCX01030U002.ai
The “Welcome to the RU PC-TOOL Setup wizard” window opens.
(21) Click [Next].
POCX01030U004.ai
The “Completing the RU PC-TOOL Setup wizard” window opens.

NOTE
If the “crKillProcess_ ~” window opens on the way, click [OK] for all.
POCX01030U003.ai
POCX01030U005.ai
The command prompt is displayed, and the installing continues.
018-241-08E
MC20-10
(24) When the “Press any key to continue...” message appears, press any (27) Click [OK].
key. (More than once)
The system returns to the “Set Up PC-TOOL Ver.7.00” window.
(25) Select “.\install\remote\MCSetupWizard.bat” from the “FILE

EXECUTION” and then click [EXECUTE].
POCX01030U008.ai
The “MC Registration” window opens.
(28) After input “fpd0”, click [Register].
POCX01030U009.ai
The MEDIA Version and DEVICE Version window opens.
(29) Click [Upgrade].
POCX01030U006.ai
The IP address input window opens.
POCX01030U010.ai
The “Are you sure you want to upgrade MC?” window opens.
(30) Click [Yes].
POCX01030U007.ai
The “MC is not registered” window opens.
POCX01030U011.ai
018-241-08E
MC20-11
(31) Click [OK]. (33) Check that the installed version is displayed in the list of the “LIST OF
EXISTING RU” on the PC-TOOL window.
RU PC-TOOL window
The system returns to the “Set Up PC-TOOL Ver.7.00” window.
(32) Click [START].
600_700289.ai
(34) On the PC-TOOL window, select “License” - “Key Regist” from the
menu.
RU PC-TOOL window
POCX01030U13.ai
ID900_J0214.ai
The “File Open” window opens.
018-241-08E
MC20-12
(35) Select the supplied license key file and click [Open].
The security lock is unlocked.
(36) Click “X” on the upper right of the PC-TOOL window.

The PC-TOOL window closes.
(37) Click “EXIT” on the “MAINTENANCE TOOLS” window.

The “MEINTENANCE TOOLS” window closes.
(38) Click the MC Manager from the task tray and execute “EXIT”.
(39) Check that the MC Manager icon has disappeared from the task tray,
and then remove the DVD from the DVD drive.
(40) Close all displayed windows.
018-241-08E
MC20-13
1.5 Installing the DRWM (7) Input “1”.
(1) Restart the PC.

POCX010713001J.ai
The “Please select a security level [1,2]?” window opens.
(8) Input “1”.

DXL04010001.ai
(3) Click “Exit Service Utility”.
(4) Insert the “DR-ID1200 Application Software” into the DVD drive.
(5) Open Explorer and double-click “D:\SetupRun (.exe)”.

The “Set Up PC-TOOL” window opens.
(6) Select “.\initial\DRWM\Setup.bat” from the “FILE EXECUTION” and 1200_700484.ai
then click [EXECUTE]. The “Do you want to continue? [Y,N]?” window opens.
(9) Press <Y> key.

The “Install Succeeded!” window opens.
(10) Press <Enter> key.

NOTE
* If “Install Failed!” is displayed, start again from step (1).
POCX01030U14.ai
The “Please select a setup action [1,2]?” window opens.
018-241-08E
MC20-14
1.6 Activating the OS (For Windows 7)
After reinstalling the SSD, activating the OS is required.
(1) Press the “Start” key and enter “SLUIΔ04”, and click the command
search result “SLUI 04”, which is with a key icon on it.
REFERENCE
Δ stands for single-byte space character.
The “Find available phone numbers for activation” window opens.
(2) Select the counry or region where the Windows is installed (e.g.
“Japan”) and click [Next].
The “Activate Windows now” window opens.
(3) Dial the number displayed and follow the instruction to obtain a
confirmation ID.
(4) Enter the confirmation ID into A-H fields and click [Next].
The “Activation was successful” window opens.
(5) Click [Close].
018-241-08E
MC20-15
BLANK PAGE
018-241-08E
MC20-16
BLANK PAGE
018-241-08E
Control Sheet
11.30.2016 02 Revision (FM9462) 14 to 17, 24 to 95
05.31.2017 03 Revision (FM9471) 1 to 36, 52, 85 to 94, 107 to 175

05.31.2017 03 Changes in pagination (FM9471) 37 to 51, 53 to 84, 95 to 106
1 to 33, 105 to 107, 139, 141, 142,
11.30.2017 04 Revision for MC V16.2 (FM9486) 156 to 163, 167, 168, 170, 173,
AppxMU 1-1 to 1-12
34 to 104, 108 to 138, 140,
11.30.2017 04 Changes in pagination (FM9486) 143 to 155, 164 to 166, 169, 171, 172,
174, 175
24, 105, 107, 156, 161 to 166,
174 to 176, 178 to 183
52, 78, 81, 89 to 91, 110, 121, 123,
05.31.2019 06 Revision for U.S. and Brazil (FM9565)
129, 150
Maintenance Utility (MU) 09.30.2019 07 Revision for MC V17.1 (FM9587)

6, 26, 88, 119, 138, 162, 163, 166, 167,
AppxMU 1-5 to 1-8
164, 165, 168 to 187,
AppxMU 1-9 to 1-12
018-241-07E
MU-1
1. Starting/Exiting (3) Enter the password, and click .
the DR-XD 1000 Maintenance Tool
1.1 Starting the Maintenance Tool

(1) Double-click “POCXMntToolFunc” on the desktop.
REFERENCE
The initial password differs according to which item you select.
The login window opens. Item Initial Password
Installation, Maintenance, Replacement service
(2) Click “▼” to display the “Item” pull-down menu, and select the item. Management kanri
The main menu window opens.
• Installation
• Maintenance
• Replacement
• Management
018-241-04E
DR-XD 1000 Service Manual MU-1
MU-2
1.2 Exiting the Maintenance Tool
(1) Click from the main menu window of the DR-XD 1000
maintenance tool.
(1)
018-241-04E
MU-3
2. Functions and Overview of ■ Operation items (“I” in the screen image)
DR-XD 1000 Maintenance Tool

The item selected in the login window is emphasized.
NOTE ■ Menu list (“II” in the screen image)

The items which are notated with < Vx.x > following the item names, are items which Menu list that can be performed according to the item selected in the login window is
need the maintenance tools Vx.x or later. displayed. The menu list differs according to the item selected in the login window.
Items with no notation are items corresponding to V 1.0.
■ Setting content (“III” in the screen image)
The setting content is displayed for the selected menu.
2.1 Main Menu Window
After starting DR-XD 1000 maintenance tool, the following window (main menu ■ [End] button (“IV” in the screen image)
window) will be displayed.
To terminate DR-XD 1000 maintenance tool.
The system will return to the main menu by clicking the [Exit] button in the setting
I window of each menu.
II III
IV
018-241-04E
MU-4
2.2 Operation Items and Menu List ■ Backing up and restoring of operating information areas
Menu lists are displayed according to different operation items shown as below. (“VI” in the screen image)
Taking backups for operating information.
2.2.1 Installation Restoring the backup files.
$ {3.6_Backing Up and Restoring of Operating Information Areas}
I ■ Beep setting (“VII” in the screen image) <V1.4>

Setting the beep.
II
$ {3.7_Beep Setting}
III
VI
VII
■ Irradiation field lighting time (“I” in the screen image)

Set the irradiation field lighting time.
$ {3.1_Irradiation Field Lighting Time}
■ DAP Setting (“II” in the screen image)

Set whether DAP is to be used or not.
$ {3.2_DAP Setting}
■ Displaying and clearing operating information

(“III” in the screen image)
Setting accumulated exposure times, accumulated mAs value, and exposure times for
gas spring and tube.
$ {3.3_Displaying and Clearing Operating Information}
■ Backing up and restoring the GNC board data

(“V” in the screen image)
Taking backups for full region of the GNC board. Restoring the backup files.
$ {3.5_Backing Up and Restoring the GNC Board Data}
018-241-04E
MU-5
2.2.2 Maintenance ■ Check the board version (“IX” in the screen image) <V1.0/V1.4>
Checking the firmware version of the GNC board and POW board.
$ {3.9_Check the Board Version}
III NOTE
IV V1.4 or later is needed for confirming the POW board version.
VIII
IX ■ Adjusting the filament preheating voltage

(“X” in the screen image)
XI
Adjusting the filament voltage to optimize the rising waveform of X-ray tube current.
XII $ {3.10_Adjusting the Filament Preheating Voltage}
XIII
■ kV offset calibration (“XII” in the screen image)
XIV
Correcting the kV offset.
XV $ {3.12_kV Offset Calibration}
■ Displaying and clearing operating information ■ mAs offset calibration (“XIII” in the screen image)
(“III” in the screen image) Correct the mAs integration circuit offset.
Setting accumulated exposure times, accumulated mAs value, and exposure times for $ {3.13_mAs Offset Calibration}
$ {3.3_Displaying and Clearing Operating Information} ■ Collimator potentiometer calibration (“XIV” in the screen image)
Correcting collimator potentiometer calibration offset.
■ Saving log information (“IV” in the screen image) $ {3.14_Collimator Potentiometer Calibration}
Saving the Error log, operation log, running log and tracing log.
$ {3.4_Saving Log Information} ■ Area dose calibration (“XV” in the screen image)
Correcting area dose calibration offset.
■ Updating the GNC board version (“VIII” in the screen image) $ {3.15_Area Dose Calibration}
Upgrading firmware of the GNC board.
$ {3.8_Updating the GNC Board Version}
018-241-04E
MU-6
2.2.3 Replacement ■ Adjusting the filament preheating voltage
(“X” in the screen image)
Adjusting the filament voltage to optimize the rising waveform of X-ray tube current.
III $ {3.10_Adjusting the Filament Preheating Voltage}
V
■ Writing the kV correction voltage (“XI” in the screen image)
VI Reading the corrected kV value.
This function is not used in the DR-XD 1000.
X
$ {3.11_Writing the kV Correction Voltage}
XI
XII ■ kV offset calibration (“XII” in the screen image)

Correcting the kV offset.
XIII
$ {3.12_kV Offset Calibration}
XIV
XV ■ mAs offset calibration (“XIII” in the screen image)

Correct the mAs integration circuit offset.
■ Displaying and clearing operating information $ {3.13_mAs Offset Calibration}
(“III” in the screen image)
Setting accumulated exposure times, accumulated mAs value, and exposure times for ■ Collimator potentiometer calibration (“XIV” in the screen image)
$ {3.3_Displaying and Clearing Operating Information} Correcting collimator potentiometer calibration offset.
$ {3.14_Collimator Potentiometer Calibration}
■ Backing up and restoring the GNC board data (“V” in the screen
image) ■ Area dose calibration (“XV” in the screen image) <V1.2>
Correcting area dose calibration offset.
Taking backups for full region of the GNC board. Restoring the backup files.
$ {3.15_Area Dose Calibration}
$ {3.5_Backing Up and Restoring the GNC Board Data}
■ Backing up and restoring of operating information areas

(“VI” in the screen image) <V1.2>
Taking backups for operating information.
Restoring the backup files.
$ {3.6_Backing Up and Restoring of Operating Information Areas}
018-241-07E
MU-7
2.2.4 Management
XVI
■ Changing password (“XVI” in the screen image)

Changing the login password set for each operation item.
$ {3.16_Changing Password}
018-241-04E
MU-8
3. Menu Setup
This chapter describes DR-XD 1000 maintenance tool setup procedures for each
menu.
NOTE
The jig mouse, jig keyboard and jig disk drive must be connected to the USB ports on
the X-ray cart. Connecting these devices to the USB port on the operation panel may
result in insufficient power, causing the operation panel to malfunction.
■ The required calibration item for each of the replacement parts

The required calibration item for each of the replacement parts are as per the
following.
Target parts Calibration menu Refer to the MU section
ADC board Collimator potentio calibration $ {MU:3.14_Collimator Potentiometer Calibration}
Backing up and restoring the GNC board data* $ {MU:3.5_Backing Up and Restoring the GNC Board Data}
Updating the GNC board version $ {MU:3.8_Updating the GNC Board Version}
*If you do not perform the backup / restore, perform the following.
GNC board - mAs offset calibration $ {MU:3.13_mAs Offset Calibration}
- Area dose calibration $ {MU:3.15_Area Dose Calibration}
- Collimator potentiometer calibration $ {MU:3.14_Collimator Potentiometer Calibration}
- Adjusting the filament preheating voltage $ {MU:3.10_Adjusting the Filament Preheating Voltage}
INV board
Adjusting the filament preheating voltage $ {MU:3.10_Adjusting the Filament Preheating Voltage}
Area dose calibration $ {MU:3.15_Area Dose Calibration}
Gas spring Displaying and clearing operating information (Exposure count for gas spring) $ {MU:3.3_Displaying and Clearing Operating Information}
Collimator assembly
Collimator potentiometer calibration $ {MU:3.14_Collimator Potentiometer Calibration}
Potentiometer Collimator potentiometer calibration $ {MU:3.14_Collimator Potentiometer Calibration}
Mono-tank
Displaying and clearing operating information (Total mAs value, Tube $ {MU:3.3_Displaying and Clearing Operating Information}
exposure count)
Irradiating part cross cover Area dose calibration $ {MU:3.15_Area Dose Calibration}
Displaying and clearing operating information (Exposure count for gas spring) $ {MU:3.15_Area Dose Calibration}
Saving log information $ {MU:3.4_Saving Log Information}
Preventive maintenance Check the board version* $ {MU:3.9_Checking the Board Version}
*Perform updates as necessary
018-241-04E
MU-9
3.1 Irradiation Field Lighting Time (1) Click from the menu list.
The Irradiation field lighting time window opens.
■ When to perform
When changing the irradiation field lighting times at installation, etc. (2) Click [▼] to select setting value of irradiation field lighting time (sec.).
■ Procedures
(3) Click .
NOTE
The selected value is set.
Setting values become enabled after restarting the X-ray cart.
(1) (4) Click .

The system returns to the main menu window.
(2)
(3)
(4)
018-241-04E
MU-10
3.2 DAP Setting
■ When to perform
- When DAP is newly installed.
- When DAP is removed from the X-ray cart.
■ Procedures
NOTE
Setting values become enabled after restarting the X-ray cart.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1) Click from the menu list.

The DAP Setting window opens.
(2) Click [▼] to select whether DAP is to be used or not.
(3) Click .
(4) Click .
018-241-04E
MU-11
3.3 Displaying and Clearing Operating (3) Click at the right-hand side of the entered new setting
Information value.
The entered value is set.
■ When to perform
- When setting each value to “0” after installing. (4) Click .
- When setting the gas spring exposure count to “0” when replacing the gas spring. The system returns to the main menu window.
- When setting the total mAs value and tube exposure count to “0” when replacing the
mono-tank.
NOTE
Do not reset the total exposure count and the total mAs value.
■ Procedures
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

The Displaying and clearing operating information window opens.
(2) Enter the “New settings” field for those items to be changed.
018-241-04E
MU-12
3.4 Saving Log Information (3) Click .
REFERENCE
■ When to perform
When performing preventive maintenance. If click , all of the log files will be saved.
■ Procedures The log file will be saved to the specified place when is clicked.
(1) The message is displayed after saving is finished.
REFERENCE
Depending upon the DR-XD 1000 maintenance tool version, the number of days
of acquirable log information will vary. The version is displayed at the top right of
(2)
the window.
- V1.4 or later: Up to 30 previous days of logs are acquirable
- V1.2, V1.3: Up to 15 previous days of logs are acquirable
(3) - V1.0: Up to 5 previous days of logs are acquirable
Moreover, if there is not log information which can be saved within the above
periods, the following message will be displayed. This display is not an error.
“Corresponding log not exit”.
(4) Click [OK].

(5)
(5) Click .
(1) Click from the menu list. The system returns to the main menu window.
The Saving log information window opens.
(2) Click [...] to specify the saving place for the file that you want to save.
018-241-04E
MU-13
3.5 Backing Up and Restoring the GNC Board
(2) Click .
Data
The backup is taken for all of the GNC board, and the backup file is generated.
■ When to perform REFERENCE
When replacing the GNC board. - The following values are backed up.
Calibration data (kV, filament, mAs)
■ Procedures Accumulated mAs value
Number of exposure
● Backup
- The backup file will be generated in the following folder.
(1) C:¥Program Files¥FujiFilm¥FCR¥DR-XD1000¥system¥MntTool¥LOG¥GNC_
BackUp
- File name is in a format “GNCBUyymmdd.bin” (yymmdd is generated date).
- It takes about 20 mins to take the backup.
(2)
(3) Click .
(3)

The Backing up and restoring the GNC board data window opens.
018-241-04E
MU-14
● Restore
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

The Backing up and restoring the GNC board data window opens.
(2) Click [...] to specify the file that you want to restore.
(3) Click .
GNC board is restored.
REFERENCE
It takes about 20 mins to restore.
(4) Click .
018-241-04E
MU-15
3.6 Backing Up and Restoring of Operating (2) Click .
Information Areas The backup is taken for the part of the EEPROM32KB on the GNC board, and
the backup file is generated.
■ When to perform REFERENCE
When replacing the GNC board. - The following values are backed up.
Accumulated mAs value
■ Procedures Number of exposure
● Backup - The backup file will be generated in the following folder.
C:¥Program Files¥FujiFilm¥FCR¥DR-XD1000¥system¥MntTool¥LOG¥OpInf_
(1) BackUp
- File name is in a format “OpInfBUyymmdd” (yymmdd is generated date).
- It takes about 20 seconds to take the backup.
(3) Click .
(2)
(3)

The Backing up and restoring of operating information areas window opens.
018-241-04E
MU-16
● Restore
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

The Backing up and restoring of operating information areas window opens.
(2) Click [...] to specify the file that you want to restore.
(3) Click .
The part of the EEPROM32KB on the GNC board is restored.
REFERENCE
It takes about 40 seconds to restore.
(4) Click .
018-241-04E
MU-17
3.7 Beep Setting
NOTE
This function is required for the maintenance tools V1.4 and onward.
(1)
(2)
(2)
(2)

The Beep setting window opens.
(2) Click [▼] of “New setting” to set the presence or absence of a beep.
(3) Click .
(4) Click .
018-241-04E
MU-18
3.8 Updating the GNC Board Version ● BIOS setup
(1) Turn OFF the power of PC.
■ When to perform
When the GNC board upgrade is required. The upgrade files are distributed via the (2) Press and hold the <Delete> key, and turn ON the power of PC.
ECN.
■ Procedures
Before perfoming the items in the maintenance tool to upgrade the GNC board, BIOS (3) Select “Advanced” - “ACPI Settings”.
setup and changing the DIP switch of POW board are required.
REFERENCE
If a keyboard and a mouse are going to be used, install them in the USB port on the
top of the Console PC.
POCX010403002J.ai
018-241-04E
MU-19
(4) Select “PWRON After PWR-Fail” and change it to “On”. ● Changing the DIP switch of POW board

#2
#1
TP3x6 (x6)
REFERENCE
If the “PWRON After PWR-Fail” is turned “On”, the following states will occur.
POCX010303008J.ai
- If the power cable is plugged in and the main power is turned ON, it will start
up. (3) Confirm that the main breaker has been turned OFF.
- The main key will no longer function.
(5) Press the <F4> key.
(6) Confirm that “Yes” is selected, and press the <Enter> key.
(7) Turn OFF the power of PC.
018-241-04E
MU-20
(4) Turn ON the DIP switch of POW board. ● Updating the GNC board version
(2)
ON
(3)
(4)
POCX010403001J.ai
REFERENCE
Depending upon the POW board DIP switch states, the tasks which can be
implemented will vary.
(7)
Confirming the version of GNC
DIP switch Upgrading the GNC board
board
OFF No Yes (1) Start the DR-XD 1000 maintenance tool.
ON Yes No
$ {1.1_Starting the Maintenance Tool}

The Updating the GNC board version window opens.

(3) Click [...] of “Version update data” and specify the upgrade file.
(7) Turn ON the power of PC.

(4) Click .
The version of the specified upgrade file is displayed in “Software version”, the
upgrade starts.
018-241-04E
MU-21
(5) Click [OK]. ● Restoring the DIP switch of POW board
The upgrade is completed. (1) Turn OFF the power of PC.
(6) Click . (2) Turn OFF the main breaker.

(7) Terminate the DR-XD 1000 maintenance tool. #1 Remove the screws.
$ {1.2_Exiting the Maintenance Tool}
#2
#1
TP3x6 (x6)
POCX010303008J.ai
NOTE
Access the POW board 1 minute or more after switching OFF the main breaker.
018-241-04E
MU-22
(4) Turn OFF the DIP switch of POW board. ● Confirming the version of GNC board
(1) Start the DR-XD 1000 maintenance tool.
$ {1.1_Starting the Maintenance Tool}
OFF (2) Click from the menu list.

The Updating the GNC board version window opens.
(3) Confirm the GNC board version.
(4) Terminate the DR-XD 1000 maintenance tool.

$ {1.2_Exiting the Maintenance Tool}
(5) Exit Windows, and turn OFF the power of PC.

POCX010303042J.ai

● Restoring the BIOS setup
(1) Press and hold the <Delete> key, and turn ON the power of PC. (8) Install the following components.
NOTE
If the breaker is ON with the security key ON, and the computer power is turned
ON, then the PC might shut down after it is once started up.
In this case, turn the security key OFF, then turn it ON, and turn the PC power
ON again.
(2) Select “Advanced” - “ACPI Settings”.
(3) Select “PWRON After PWR-Fail” and change it to “Off”.
(4) Press the <F4> key.
(5) Confirm that “Yes” is selected, and press the <Enter> key.
018-241-04E
MU-23
3.9 Checking the Board Version
NOTE
Check the version of POW board is required for the maintenance tools V1.4 or later.
(1)
(2)
(3)

The Checking the board version window opens.
(2) Check the board version.
(3) Click .
018-241-04E
MU-24
3.10 Adjusting the Filament Preheating Voltage (3) Follow the instructions on the screen to perform exposure.
NOTE
■ When to perform During adjusting, 20 – 30 exposures will be implemented in succession. Hold
- When replacing the GNC board, mono-tank, INV board. down the irradiation switch.
- When performing the preventive maintenance (every 2 years). If the exposure switch is released part way through, an error will be diaplayed. In
- When it is not same with the actual result. that case, restart the device, and re-expose.
■ Procedures
NOTE
- Perform the calibration near the center of the X-ray room, and in a position whereas
it is almost on the floor.
- Perform with the exposing field adjustment blades fully closed.
- Do not irradiate X-rays towards the SE.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
POCX010403026J.ai

The message “The measurement is finished. Please write the result.” will be
The Adjusting the filament preheating voltage window opens. displayed after the adjustment is finished.
(2) Click .
018-241-05E
MU-25
(4) Click .
(5) Click .
POCX010403026Ja.ai
NOTE
If ERR120 was generated while adjusting the filament preheating voltage, implement
the following operations.
- If replacement operations etc. are being implemented before adjusting the filament
preheating voltage, check the cables.
- Turn the power ON again, reimplement adjusting the filament preheating voltage.
If errors are generated even if the aforementioned is implemented 3 times, refer to the
parse tree (ERR120,122) and resolve.
$ {MT:4.1_ERR120, 122}
018-241-04E
MU-26
3.11 Writing the kV Correction Voltage 3.12 kV Offset Calibration
For the DR-XD 1000, the setting data file of the KV corrective voltage does not need ■ When to perform
to be loaded when the mono-tank, the INV board and the GNC board are replaced.
This function is not used in the DR-XD 1000 system. When the deviation of kV value between setting value and actual result value is over
10%.
■ Procedures REFERENCE
(1) - The procedures are not required when replacing the GNC board.
- The procedures are not required when performing the preventive maintenance.
■ Procedures
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1) Click from the menu list. (2)

The Writing the kV correction voltage window opens.
(3)
(2) Click [...] to specify the adjustment data file that comes with the tank.
REFERENCE
The name of adjustment data file is “KVdata.txt”.
The kV offset calibration window opens.
(3) Click .
The reading is performed. (2) Confirm the “kV offset value”, and confirm that “OK” is displayed.
Click .
(4) Click . The kV offset value is written to EEPROM.
(3) Click .
018-241-07E
MU-27
3.13 mAs Offset Calibration ■ Procedures
NOTE
■ When to perform
- Perform the calibration near the center of the X-ray room, and in a position whereas
• When replacing the GNC board. it is almost on the floor.
• When the deviation between setting value and actual result value is over 20%. - Perform with the exposing field adjustment blades fully closed.
NOTE - Do not irradiate X-rays towards the SE.
Replace the GNC board, mono-tank and INV board when the adjustment cannot be
performed. (1)
REFERENCE
The required accuracy is different according to whether it is bigger (big mAs value) or
smaller (small mAs value) than 6.3 mAs. Perform exposures by follow the conditions
below.
For small mAs : 100 kV, 0.25 mAs, exposure for 3 times
For big mAs : 100 kV, 6.3 mAs, exposure for 3 times
(2)
(3)
(4)

The mAs offset calibration window opens.
018-241-04E
MU-28
(2) When the message “Push the exposure switch.” appears, use the (4) Click .
exposure switch to press and hold the switch.
POCX010403025Jb.ai
POCX010403025J.ai
REFERENCE
Exposure for 6 times (within 1 min) are performed.
(3) After the adjusted value is displayed, click .
POCX010403025Ja.ai
The adjusted value is written to EEPROM.
018-241-04E
MU-29
3.14 Collimator Potentiometer Calibration ■ Procedures
(1)
■ When to perform
- When replacing the GNC board, ADC board, potentiometer, and collimator
assembly.
- The setting value and the actual result values for kV value and the mAs are correct,
but execute this when the area dose setting value and the actual measurement (2)
value differ.
NOTE (3)
In addition to the area dose, if the kV value, or the mAs differ, perform the kV offset
calibration and filament calibration.
REFERENCE
(4)
If the collimator potentio calibration has been performed at shipment, it is not required
when installing.
(5)

The Collimator potentiometer calibration window opens.
(2) When the message “Close the collimator, and click the readout
button.” appears, follow the instruction to fully close the collimator.
(3) Click .
The offset value of the potentiometer is displayed.
018-241-04E
MU-30
(4) Click .
The calibration is performed.
(5) Click .
(6) Click .
018-241-04E
MU-31
3.15 Area Dose Calibration (3) Set the value of “SID” to 100 cm.
(4) Adjust the irradiation field size adjustment knob, and set the
■ When to perform irradiation field size to 30 cm × 30 cm.
When replacing the INV board, GNC board, monotank, collimator assembly, and NOTE
irradiating part cross cover. Refer to the irradiation field size adjustment knob and align for the irradiation field
sizes.
■ Procedures
(1)
(2)
(7)
(10)
(3)
(6)
(13)
(8)
(5) Set up the dosimeter.
(11)
(12) NOTE
Align the X-ray source’s focal point as per the following positions. If the focal
points are aligned with the dosimeter sensor positions, refer to the following.

The Area dose calibration window opens.
(2) Input the “Mono-tank aging coefficient”.

 INSTRUCTION 
Set the aging coefficient as per the following.
Setup, monotank replacement times: 0.9 (default value)
Exceptions to the above (periodic maintenance times, etc.): 1.0
018-241-04E
MU-32
(6) When the message “Push the exposure switch.” appears, hold down ■ Confirming the Calibration Results
the irradiation button.
After implementing the “Area dose calibration”, check the calibration results without
NOTE changing the irradiation field sizes and the SID.
- Exposure irradiating for 2 times as per the following conditions. In addition, the (1) Press the X-ray controller’s DR interlock switch for 2 or more seconds.
irradiation conditions will be automatically set. Changes to the memory exposing non-interlocking mode
First time: 40 kV, 5 mAs
Second time: 100 kV, 5 mAs
(2) Set the dosimeter to 70 kV, 5 mAs and implement dose measuring, and
- Press the irradiation switch in accordance with the DR-XD 1000 maintenance
record the dose value (mR) (measuring dose value 1).
tools screen display.
(3) Press the operation panel “Area dose display switch” button, and
(7) Select [μ Gy] or [mR] as the units for “Dosage measuring value record the area dose value (area dose result 1) which is displayed via
1”, then input the dosage result which was measured via the first the LED.
irradiation.
(4) Implement the following calculations, and check that calculation value
1 is within the range of 0.65 < (V) < 1.15.
(8) Click .
Measuring dose value 1 [μ Gy] × 30 cm × 30 cm ÷ 1000 = Area dose estimate
value 1 [mGy cm2]
(9) When the message “Please press the exposure button.” appears, hold Area dose result 1 [mGy cm2] ÷ Area dose estimate value 1 [mGy cm2] =
down the irradiation button. Calculation value 1
NOTE
(10) Select [μ Gy] or [mR] as the units for “Dosage measuring value 2”, If calculation value 1 deviates from the tolerance range, check the irradiation field
then input the dosage result which was measured via the second sizes and the SID, then reimplement calibrating.
irradiation.
(11) Click .
(12) If “Write the area dose adj. coefficient?” is displayed, then click
.
The “Save complete” window opens.
(13) Click .
018-241-04E
MU-33
3.16 Changing Password (3) Enter the current password to “Current settings” and enter the new
password to “New setting values”.
■ When to perform NOTE
When changing the DR-XD 1000 maintenance tool login password. If you forget the password, reinstall the DR-XD 1000 maintenance tool to initialize
the password.
■ Procedures REFERENCE
(1) The password can be set within 16 one-byte alphanumeric characters (numerals
and lower and upper case alphabets). A space character and Symbols, marks,
etc. cannot be used.
(4) Click [Change] .

(2) The password is changed.
(5) Click [Close] .

(3)
(4)
(5)
(1) Click [Changing the Password] from the menu list.

The Changing the password window opens.
(2) Click [▼] of “Item” to select the item that is to be changed.

- Service (Installation, Maintenance, Replacement)
- Manufacture
- Design
- Administration
018-241-04E
MU-34
4. PC-TOOL  Tree of PC-TOOL
 Outline of the PC-TOOL Tree of PC-TOOL
The PC-TOOL is a tool for exclusive use of the service engineer to set and check the PC-TOOL
RU functional conditions by the operation from the CL.
$ {4.1_NEW}
 PC-TOOL Window $ {4.2_LIST OF EXISTING RU}
RU PC-TOOL Ver.*.* $ {4.3_DELETE}
Configuration(C) Operation(O)
EACH RU SETTING $ {4.4_MUTL}

CONNECTION TEST
RU NAME LIST OF EXISTING RU $ {4.5_PING}
*** RU NAME IP ADDRESS RU TYPE VERSION NEW
RU IP ADDR *** *** *** *** *** ***.***.***.*** ********* ***.*** $ {4.6_MON}
MUTL PING MON FTP DELETE
$ {4.7_FTP}
INSTALL VERSION UP EDIT HISTORY EDIT CONFIGURATION $ {4.8_INSTALL}
EDIT CL NAME
$ {4.9_VERSION UP}
BACKUP RESTORE
$ {4.10_EDIT HISTORY}
EXECUTE EXECUTE
$ {4.11_EDIT CONFIGURATION}
I/O TRACE EXPERT ERROR DB
$ {4.12_EDIT CL NAME}
ALL RUs SETTING $ {4.13_BACKUP}
UNINSTALL VERSION UP
DRID600_G0001.ai
$ {4.14_RESTORE}
$ {4.15_I/O TRACE EXPERT}
$ {4.16_ERROR DB}
$ {4.17_UNINSTALL (All RUs)}
$ {4.18_VERSION UP (All RUs)}
$ {4.19_Configuration}
$ {4.19.1_CDPath}
$ {4.20_License (Unlocking the Security Lock)}
018-241-04E
MU-35
 [INSTALL] Button  [VERSION UP] Button
Unlike other types of machines, clicking [VERSION UP] causes only the MC
 When the PC for the MC exists application programs to be version-updated by the software installed in the HDD of
Clicking [INSTALL], an FTP folder is created in the FTP server HDD and then installed. the DX Console (FTP server).
REFERENCE
The MP and SE application programs are version-updated via the MC, by means of
FTP Server the software installed in the HDD of the DX Console (FTP server).
APL (DX Console) Execute the following command to version-update the MP and SE application
CD-ROM programs.
HDD
- Updating MP Application Software Version
Install >> Install MP Software >> MP1 Install>>MP1 Software VerUp Install
- Updating SE Application Software Version
Install >> Install SE Software >> Install SE FPGA Software, Install SE GLG Software,
Install SE LAN Software and Install SE MCU Software
DX Console
(FTP Server)
SE MP MC HDD
CD-ROM
DRID600_G0061.ai FTP
folder
 When the PC for the MC does not exist

Clicking [INSTALL], an FTP folder is created in the FTP server HDD. After the RU
software is copied in the FTP server, installed in the MC.
FTP Server
APL (Console Advance)
CD-ROM
HDD
MC SE MP MC
Flash Flash HDD

Memory Memory
SE MP DRID600_G0062.ai
DRID800_G0143.ai
018-241-04E
MU-36
 Starting Up and Exiting the PC-TOOL
 Starting up the PC-TOOL
(1) Press the [Windows] key on the keyboard, and enter the Windows
Start menu.
(2) Open the "Run..." window from the Start menu of Windows. Specify
["C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\TOOL\RuPcTool\RuPCTool.exe"], and
then click [OK].
→ The “PC-TOOL” main window appears.
#2 [Type in or select]
...........
RUN ?
...........
Type the name of program, folder, document,or
........... Internet resource, and Windows will open it for you.
........... Open: “C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\Tool\RuPcTool\RuPCTool.exe”
...........
OK Cancel Browse...
...........
RUN...
#3 [Click]
...........
#1 [Click]
...........
Configuration(C)
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
RU NAME LIST OF EXISTING RU
RU IP ADDR
BACKUP RESTORE
ALL RUs SETTING
DRID600_G0002.ai
 Exiting the PC-TOOL

(1) Click located in the upper right corner of the Main Screen of the PC-
TOOL.
018-241-04E
MU-37
4.1 NEW 4.2 LIST OF EXISTING RU
 Function  Function
Sets the name and IP address of the RU when it is to be newly installed or added. Displays a list of RUs that have been completely installed.
 Procedures  Procedures
The example below shows how to register the RU whose IP address is "172.16.1.10". (1) Start up the RU PC-TOOL.
(1) Start up the RU PC-TOOL. $ {MU:4._PC-TOOL}
$ {MU:4._PC-TOOL} The RU PC-TOOL window opens on the CL screen to display the “LIST OF
(2) Click [NEW]. EXISTING RU”, which displays a list of RUs that have been completely installed.
 INSTRUCTION 
(3) Set the “RU NAME” and “RU IP ADDR”.
Uninstall the RU of interest if the “RU TYPE” column is left blank, and again
Configuration(C)
(2) NEW install it.
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
LIST OF EXISTING RU
<Display example>
RU NAME
Configuration(C)
RU IP ADDR
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
CONNECTION TEST RU IP ADDR

RU NAME IP ADDRESS RU TYPE VERSION
(3) #1 ru0 172.16.1.10 V1.0
BACKUP RESTORE
RU NAME ru0 DR-ID1200

ru1 172.16.1.11 V1.0
BACKUP RESTORE
ALL RUs SETTING

RU IP ADDR 172 16 1 10 (3) #2
ALL RUs SETTING
Nothing is displayed.
1200_400001.ai
DRID600_G0003.ai
(4) Exit the RU PC-TOOL.

018-241-04E
MU-38
4.3 DELETE 4.4 MUTL
Delete the RU registered in the “LIST OF EXISTING RU” from the FTP server. Performs Board check details/adjustment/checks and calibration.
 NOTE   Starting Up and Exiting the MUTL
Be sure to back up the data before exercising the “DELETE” function.
 Starting up the MUTL
REFERENCE
(1) Start up the RU PC-TOOL.
Upon execution of “DELETE”, information of the corresponding RU is deleted from the $ {MU:4._PC-TOOL}
“LIST OF EXISTING RU”.
(2) From “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, select an [RU].
 Procedures (3) Click [MUTL].

MUTL window appears on the CL screen.
(1) Start up the RU PC-TOOL. (3) <Display example>
$ {MU:4._PC-TOOL} Configuration(C)
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST RU NAME IP ADDRESS RU TYPE VERSION
(2) Select the RU to be deleted from the RU’s registered in the “LIST OF
RU IP ADDR
ru0 172.16.1.10 DR-ID1200 V1.0
EXISTING RU”. ru1 172.16.1.11 ********* V1.0
BACKUP RESTORE
(3) Click [DELETE].

(2)
ALL RUs SETTING
<Display example>
RU NAME IP ADDRESS RU TYPE VERSION MUTL window
ru0 172.16.1.10 DR-ID1200 V1.0
ru1 172.16.1.11 ********* V1.0
(2)
Configuration(C)
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
(3) DELETE
RU IP ADDR
BACKUP RESTORE
ALL RUs SETTING
1200_400002.ai

1200_400003E.ai
 Exiting the MUTL

(1) Click in the upper right corner of the MUTL window.
018-241-04E
MU-39
 Common MUTL Operating Procedures  "Category change" buttons
The operating procedures common to various MUTL windows are described below: These buttons are used to change the displayed category. When you click the
“Category selection” buttons rightward arrow button, the next category appears on the display. Clicking the leftward
arrow button displays the previous category.
“Category change” buttons The following windows are used for the MUTL categories:
- MUTL window 1: NETWORK SETTING, SE SETTING, VERSION CHECK
“Function execution” buttons - MUTL window 2: INSTALL, BOARD STATE CHECK, CALIBRATION
- MUTL window 3: SYSTEM
 "Function execution" buttons

These buttons are used to execute the MUTL functions.
Some functions are executed the moment a button is clicked. The other functions are
executed when you enter a setting and then click a button.
 "Lower hierarchical level" mark ">>"

When you click a button having this mark, the associated lower hierarchical level
buttons appear on the display.
“Result display area” “Lower hierarchical level” mark 1200_400004E.ai  "Result display area"
Results of operation of the “Function execution” buttons are displayed as a text. The
 "Category selection" buttons
following types of displays are shown.
The "category selection" buttons are used to select an MUTL category. The following - OK/Error indication type
MUTL categories are selectable: Displays the MUTL result as “OK” or “Error”. “OK” appears if the result is good, and
- NETWORK SETTING “Error!!” appears if not. An error code is displayed on the right of “Error” in some
- SE SETTING cases.
- VERSION CHECK - Address indication type
- INSTALL Displays a network address or a MAC address.
- BOARD STATE CHECK - Board version indication type
- CALIBRATION Displays the version of the selected board.
- SYSTEM - Exposure count indication type
Displays the number of exposures in progress (exposure count).
018-241-04E
MU-40
 Tree of MUTL Tree of Maintenance Utility
Tree of Maintenance Utility Connected SE IP Addr

$ {[1]_NETWORK SETTING} Execute SE IP Setting
$ {[1.1]_Local Network PreSetting>>} $ {[1.3]_MP Network Setting>>}
MC ETH1/MP>> $ {[1.3.1]_MP1 Network Setting>>}
MC ETH1 IP Setting for MP1
MP1 Setting for MP2
MP2 $ {[1.3.2]_MP2 Network Setting>>}
SE Network Address Setting>> Setting for MP1
Input "OOO.OOO.OOO" No.(0-255) Setting for MP2
SE1-5>> $ {[1.4]_MC ETH0 IP Setting>>}
SE1 WIRED MC IP Address
SE1 WIRELESS MC SubNetMask
... MC Default GW
SE5 WIRED FTP IP Address
SE5 WIRELESS $ {[1.5]_Update Network Setting (MC ETH0)}
... $ {[1.6]_Update Network Setting (MC ETH1)}
SE46-50>> MC MAC Address
NEXT>> $ {[1.7]_Wireless Speed Measurement>>}
SE51-55>> SE1-10>>
SE51 WIRED Measurement for using SE1
SE51 WIRELESS ...
... Measurement for using SE10
SE55 WIRED ...
SE55 WIRELESS SE91-100>>
... $ {[2]_SE SETTING}
SE96-100>> $ {[2.1]_SE Registration>>}
$ {[1.2]_SE Network Setting>>} SE1-10>>
Connected SE Serial ID SE1 Serial ID
Connected SE Number ...
018-241-04E
MU-41
Tree of Maintenance Utility Tree of Maintenance Utility
SE10 Serial ID Image Reading Mode
... Read Mode
SE91-100>> $ {[2.6]_SE LED Color Setting>>}
$ {[2.2]_SE DELETE>>} Create LED Color>>
SE1-10>> PINK>>
DELETE SE1 R
... G
DELETE SE10 B
... BLUE>>
SE91-100>> R
$ {[2.3]_BATTERY INFORMATIOIN>>} G
DISPLAY BATTERY SERIAL NO LIST B
DELETE BATTERY INFORMATION>> LIME YELLOW>>
Input Battery Serial No R
$ {[2.4]_Battery Remaining Time Threshold>>} G
Inupt Threshold>> B
Threshold1[min] PURPLE>>
Threshold2[min] R
Threshold3[min] G
Regist Threshold>> B
Input SE No. [1-100] ORANGE>>
SE Serial ID R
Regist G
$ {[2.5]_SE Memory Exposure Setting>>} B
Input SE No. [1-100] Selector Color Setting>>
SE Serial ID Input SE No. [1-100]
Mode2 Exposure Time SE Serial ID
GOS Sharpness Filter SE Selector Color
Offset2
018-241-04E
MU-42
$ {[3]_VERSION CHECK} $ {[4.2]_Install SE Software>>}
$ {[3.1]_MC Version>>} Input SE No. [1-100]
Display MC Software Version SE Serial ID
Display MC Kernel Version Install SE FPGA Software
Display MC ALPS Version Install SE GLG Software
$ {[3.2]_MP Version>>} Install SE LAN Software
$ {[3.2.1]_MP1 Version Check>>} Install SE MCU Software
Display MP1 Software Version $ {[5]_BOARD STATE CHECK}
Display MP1 Kernel Version $ {[5.1]_MP Board State>>}
Display MP1 ALPS Version $ {[5.1.1]_MP1 Board State>>}
Display MP1 Driver Version Connector Status
$ {[3.2.2]_MP2 Version Check>>} Fan Status
Display MP2 Software Version Fuse Status
Display MP2 Kernel Version RemoteSW Status
Display MP2 ALPS Version ShotSW Port1 Status
Display MP2 Driver Version ShotSW Port2 Status
$ {[3.3]_SE Version>>} $ {[5.1.2]_MP2 Board State>>}
SE1-10>> Connector Status
Display SE1 Version Info Fan Status
... Fuse Status
Display SE10 Version Info RemoteSW Status
... ShotSW Port1 Status
SE91-100>> ShotSW Port2 Status
$ {[4]_INSTALL} $ {[5.2]_SE Board State>>}
$ {[4.1]_Install MP Software>>} Input SE No. [1-100]
$ {[4.1.1]_MP1 Install>>} SE Serial ID
MP1 Software VerUp Install SE Board State
$ {[4.1.2]_MP2 Install>>} Temperature
MP2 Software VerUp Install Battery
018-241-04E
MU-43
BatteryDateSetting $ {[6.4]_Lag Calibration>>}
GLG Check Input SE No. [1-100]
GLG Calibration>> SE Serial ID
Get X axial Offset Operation Setting
Get Y axial Offset Start
Get Z axial Offset Display Progress Status
Save Offset Data Display ShotRdy
$ {[5.3]_SE SerialID Write>>} Create a Lag Data
$ {[6]_CALIBRATION} $ {[6.5]_SE Correct Data Save Status>>}
$ {[6.1]_Offset Calibration>>} Input SE No. [1-100]
Start $ {[6.6]_SE Correct Data Transfer>>}
Create an Offset Data Input SE No. [1-100]
$ {[6.2]_Gain Calibration>>} $ {[6.7]_SE Correct Data Status>>}
Input SE No. [1-100] Input SE No. [1-100]
SE Serial ID $ {[6.8]_SE FLASH Correct Data Status>>}
Operation Setting Input SE No. [1-100]
Start $ {[7]_SYSTEM}
Display Image Count $ {[7.1]_Termination>>}
Display ShotRdy Terminate
Create a Gain Data Forced Terminate
$ {[6.3]_Defect Calibration>>} Forced Reboot
Input SE No. [1-100] Auto Shutdown Setting
SE Serial ID
Operation Setting
Start
Progress Indicator
Display ShotRdy
Create a Defect Data
018-241-04E
MU-44
[1] NETWORK SETTING  MC/CSL ETH0 and MC/CSL ETH1
MC/CSL ETH0 indicates the network setting between the CSL PC and hospital
 Display Window network, and MC/CSL ETH1 indicates the network setting between the CSL PC and
NETWORK SETTING window
GNC board.
Communications between the CSL-PC and GNCboard are performed between the
MC application on the CSL-PC and MP application on the GNC board.
The connection diagram of the GNC (MP)/CSL PC (MC) and default IP addresses are
shown below.
GNC board (MP) FUJIFILM-made AP CSL PC (MC)

MP
ETH1
192.168.0.20 192.168.0.25 192.168.0.10
LAN LAN USB USB
ETH0
172.16.1.20
POCX010404001J.ai
1200_400005E.ai
 Function Description
Used to set and check the IP addresses and to measure wireless communication rate.
 INSTRUCTION 
The segment No. of the network address must be set to the same value among the
MC, MP, SE and AP. If different network address values are set, the network among
the machines might get disconnected. Initialization of the machines might be needed
in such a case.
How far in the IP address the network address indicates depends on the setting of the
subnet mask. The default value of the subnet mask of the machine is 255.255.255.0,
and locations assigned by 255 (mask value areas) indicate the network address.
Segment No.
192.168.0.0
Network address
Host address
DRID600_G0070.ai
018-241-04E
MU-45
[1.1] Local Network PreSetting >>  Procedures
 INSTRUCTION   Inputting the IP addresses
If the segment No. of the network address is changed, the network address of the
access point (AP) must be changed to include the same segment No. If the network (1) Click [NETWORK SETTING], and click [Local Network PreSetting >>].
address of the access point differs, wireless connection of the SE cannot be made. #1 Click: [NETWORK SETTING]
#2 Click: [Local Network PreSetting >>]
 Display Window
#1
Local Network PreSetting>> window
#2 Local Network
PreSetting >> window
1200_700163E.ai
1200_400006E.ai
Input the set value when the IP address of the local network is to be changed. To
make the changed set value effective, the set value needs to be enabled (setting
executed) respectively for the SE, MP and MC.
018-241-04E
MU-46
(2) Click [MC ETH1/MP>>] and input the MC/MP network address, then (3) Click the target SE, input the SE network address and click [SET].
click [SET]. Clicking [SET], the indication changes over to the input value, but the set value is
Clicking [SET], the indication changes over to the input value, but the set value is not effective. To make the changed set value effective, the set value needs to be
not effective. To make the changed set value effective, the set value needs to be enabled (setting executed) respectively for the SE, MP and MC.
enabled (setting executed) respectively for the SE, MP and MC.
#1 Click: Target SE
#1 Click: [MC ETH1/MP>>] #2 Input: SE network address
#2 Input: MC/MP network address #3 Click: [SET]
#3 Click: [SET] Local Network PreSetting>>window
Local Network PreSetting >> window
#1
#1 SE1-5>>window
MC ETH1/MP>>window
#2
#2
#3
1200_700164E.ai #3
1200_700166E.ai
REFERENCE
By clicking [SE Network Address Setting] on the “Local Network PreSetting>>”
window, the SE Network Address Batch Setting window opens and the SE
network addresses can be set collectively.
(4) Clicking [BACK], return to the Local Network PreSetting window.
(5) If there is any item that you wish to input, click the corresponding
button and repeat procedures (3) to (4).
(6) Clicking [BACK], return to the NETWORK SETTING window.
018-241-04E
MU-47
 Enabling the set value <Enabling set value (MP)>
(1) Click [MP Network Setting >>] on the NETWORK SETTING window.
CAUTION
The MP Network Setting window >> appears.
Enable the set value in the order of the SE, MP and MC to make them effective. (2) Click [MP1 Network Setting >>] on the MP Network Setting window >>.
If a wrong order is taken, the setting does not get effective, and might result in
The MP1 Network Setting >> window appears.
need of initializing the machine.
(3) Click [Setting for MP1].
<Enabling the set value (SE)> The confirmation dialogue box of “Are you sure?” appears.
 INSTRUCTION  (4) Click [OK].
Connect only one SE when enabling the set value (SE). Otherwise, the SE whose IP (5) Check that the set value is effective.
address is changed cannot be identified, and might result in need of initializing the SE. #1 Check: OK indication
MP Network Setting>>window <Display example>
(1) Click [SE Network Setting >>] on the NETWORK SETTING window.
The SE Network Setting >> window appears.
(2) Click [Execute SE IP Setting].
The confirmation dialogue box of “Are you sure?” appears.
(3) Click [OK]. #1
(4) Check that the set value is effective.
#1 Check: OK indication
SE Network Setting>>window <Display example>
1200_700168E.ai
(6) Click [BACK] to return to the MP Network Setting >> window.

(7) Clicking [BACK], return to the NETWORK SETTING window.
#1
(8) Turn OFF the power of the MP, and then turn it ON again.
(9) Start up the MUTL, and click System\Shutdown\Forced Reboot.
1200_700167E.ai
Click [OK] when the confirmation window of “Are you sure?” appears.
(5) Clicking [BACK], return to the NETWORK SETTING window.  NOTE 
(6) Remove the battery pack from the SE. In case of the configuration installing the MC application in the DX Console, left-
click the MC Manager from the task tray and execute "EXIT". Check that the MC
(7) Disconnect the SE cable from the SE. Manager icon has disappeared from the task tray, and then start the MC Manager
from "Start menu" → "Start-up".
(8) If an unspecified SE exists, repeat procedures (1) to (7).
(9) Reinstall the SE cable and battery pack on the SE whose setting has
been completed.
018-241-04E
MU-48
<Enabling set value (MC)> <Restarting the machine and checking the setting effected>
(1) Click [Update Network Setting (MC ETH1)] on the NETWORK SETTING (1) Turn OFF the power in the order named of the CL, MC and MP.
window.
(2) Turn ON the power in the order named of the MP, CL and MC.
(3) Start up the MUTL.
(2) Click [OK].
(4) Click [Network Setting] and click [SE Network Setting >>].
(3) Check that the set value is effective.
Check that the IP address of the SE has been changed.
Update Network Setting REFERENCE
(MC ETH1) <Display example> If you confirm the IP address of the SE, you can determine that the change in
settings of the MP and the MC normally ends. This is because connection of
the SE can be confirmed only when connection between the MC and the MP is
normal.
#1
1200_700169E.ai

 NOTE 
In case of the configuration installing the MC application in the DX Console, left-
Manager icon has disappeared from the task tray, and then start the MC Manager
018-241-04E
MU-49
[1.2] SE Network Setting >> [1.3] MP Network Setting >>
 Display Window  NOTE 
SE Network Setting >> window Not used in the DR - XD 1000 system.
 Display Window
MP Network Setting >> window
1200_400007E.ai
Used to check information such as the serial ID and the SE No of the connected SE.
1200_400008E.ai
- Connected SE Serial ID:  Function Description

The serial ID of the connected SE is displayed.
When not connected: “No SE is Connected” appears. Used to select the MP for making the MP network setting from the MP1 and the MP2.
- Connected SE Number: The MP setting when shipped from the factory is set as MP1.
The SE No. of the connected SE is displayed. When two MP’s are connected, the second MP needs to be set as MP2.
When not connected: “No SE Panel is Connected” appears. $ {MU: [1.3.1]_MP1 Network Setting >>}
- Connected SE IP Addr:
The IP address of the connected SE is displayed.
When not connected: “No SE Panel is Connected” appears.
- Execute SE IP Setting:
The IP address of the SE input in the Local Network Presetting is made effective.
The IP address which is effective appears in the result display area.
018-241-04E
MU-50
REFERENCE [1.3.1] MP1 Network Setting >>
The command tree structure and function description for the MP network setting are
mentioned below.  Display Window
[NETWORK SETTING] MP1 Network Setting >> window
[Local Network PreSetting]
[MP Network Setting >>]
[MP1 Network Setting >>]
[Setting for MP1]

Set the IP address of the MP1 as the MP1 value input in
[Local Network PreSetting].
[Setting for MP2]

Change the setting of the MP1 to the MP2.
The MP2 value input in [Local Network PreSetting]
gets effective.
[MP2 Network Setting >>]

1200_400009E.ai
[Setting for MP1]

Change the MP set as the MP2 to the MP1.  Function Description
Not in use usually. Used to enable the IP address of the MP input in [Local Network PreSetting].
[Setting for MP2] - Setting for MP1:

Change the IP address of the MP2. Sets the IP address of the MP1 as the IP address of the MP1 input in [Local Network
Set the IP address of the MP2 to the MP2 value input in PreSetting].
[Local Network PreSetting]. - Setting for MP2:
Used to change the setting of MP1 to MP2.
1200_700172E.ai
The IP address of the MP2 input in [Local Network PreSetting] is effective, and at
the same time the MP1 is set as the MP2.
018-241-04E
MU-51
[1.3.2] MP2 Network Setting >> [1.4] MC ETH0 IP Setting >>
 Display Window  Display Window

Same as the MP1 Network Setting >> window. MC ETH0 IP Setting >> window
Refer to [1.3.1] MP1 Network Setting >>.
Used to enable the IP address of the MP input in [Local Network Presetting].
- Setting for MP1:

Changes the MP set as MP2 to MP1.
Not in use usually.
- Setting for MP2:
Sets the IP address as the IP address of the MP2 input in [Local Network
Presetting].
1200_400010E.ai
Addresses of the following four items can be set.
The set value gets effective by clicking [Update Network Setting (MC ETH0)] on the
“Network Setting” window. That is, by just clicking [SET], the input value does not get
effective.
- MC IP Address (Default value: 172.16.1.20)

- MC SubNet Mask (Default value: 255.255.0.0)
- MC Default GW (Default value: 0.0.0.0)
- FTP IP Address (Default value: 127.0.0.1)
018-241-04E
MU-52
[1.5] Update Network Setting (MC ETH0) [1.7] Wireless Speed Measurement >>

See the “Network Setting” window. Wireless Speed Measurement >> window
Enables the network address input in the MC ETH0 Network Setting >> window. #1
Clicking [MC ETH0 Network Setting >>] on the “Network Setting” window, the
confirmation window of “Are You Sure?” appears. Clicking [OK] on the confirmation
window, the network address input in the MC ETH0 Network Setting >> window gets
effective.
[1.6] Update Network Setting (MC ETH1)

#2
 Display Window
See the “Network Setting” window.
DRID600_G0092E.ai
Enables the network address input in the Local Network Presetting>> window. #1 Click: Target SE button
#2 Click: Target measurement SE button
Clicking [Update Network Setting (MC ETH1)] on the “Network Setting” window, the
confirmation window of “Are You Sure?” appears. Clicking [OK] on the confirmation
window, the network address of the MC ETH1 input in the Local Network Presetting
>> window gets effective. Communication rate of the SE connected via the wireless LAN can be measured.
Buttons corresponding to the respective SE’s are available, and the communication
rate of the SE corresponding to the pressed button appears in the result display area.
Clicking one of the buttons, the confirmation window of “Are You Sure?” appears.
Clicking [OK] on the confirmation window, measurement of radio wave conditions
starts.
The measurement ends approx. in one minute.
Check that the average time is following status.
- 14' x 17' size FPD: 5000msec or less
(DR-ID 1201SE, 1211SE, 1271SE (only for designated countries), 1273SE (only for
designated countries))
- 24cm x 30cm size FPD: 5000msec or less
(DR-ID 1213SE, 1275SE (only for designated countries), 1214SE (10' x 12' size:
only for Japan))
(DR-ID 1202SE, 1212SE, 1272SE (only for designated countries), 1274SE (only for
designated countries))
018-241-06A
MU-53
[2] SE Setting [2.1] SE Registration >>

SE SETTING window SE Registration >> window
#1
DRID600_G0099E.ai
1200_400011E.ai
#1 Click: Target SE button
 Function Description  Function Description
Used to register or check the set contents of the SE.
Used to register the serial ID of the SE.
- SE Registration
Select the SE to be registered.
- SE DELETE
Inputting the serial ID and clicking [SET], the registration ends.
- BATTERY INFORMATION
- Battery Remaining Time Threshold  NOTE 
- SE Memory Exposure Setting The first letter of the serial ID must be entered as a capital letter.
- SE LED Color Setting
REFERENCE
The serial ID of an SE is mentioned on the surface of the machine-specific data
CDROM.
018-241-04E
MU-54
[2.2] SE DELETE >> [2.3] BATTERY INFORMATION >>

SE DELETE >> window Battery Remaining Time Threshold>> window
#1
DRID600_G0101E.ai
#1 Click: Target SE button 1200_700170E.ai

- DISPLAY BATTERY SERIAL NO LIST:
A registered SE can be canceled.
Serial Nos. of the batteries are displayed.
Used when the SE needs to be replaced.
- DELETE BATTERY INFORMATION >>:
 NOTE  Battery information is deleted. Clicking [DELETE BATTERY INFORMATION >>],
Disconnect the SE cable and remove the battery from the SE before deleting the SE. inputting the battery serial No., and clicking [SET], the battery information is deleted.
Otherwise, the SE cannot be deleted.
REFERENCE
A message indicating that the serial ID of the SE, a replacement count of the
connector and the power supplied time are reset appears in the result display area
upon deregistration.
Deregistration is reflected after the machine is rebooted.
018-241-04E
MU-55
[2.4] Battery Remaining Time Threshold>> [2.5] SE Memory Exposure Setting>>

Battery Remaining Time Threshold>> window SE Memory Exposure Setting>>window
#1
#2
1200_400012E.ai
- Input Threshold >>:
Set the battery remaining time threshold by three levels. Usually use the default
setting.
- Regist Threshold >>: 1200_400013E.ai
Register the battery threshold. Clicking [Regist Threshold >>], inputting the SE No. #1 Input: Target SE No.
and clicking [Regist], the battery threshold set by [Input Threshold >>] is registered #2 Click: [SET]
to the target SE.
Inputting the SE No. and clicking [SET], the memory exposure setting is displayed.
In the Read Mode (read mode setting), set the Read Mode for memory exposure in
addition to the routine exposure. Input [Read Mode] and click [SET].
 NOTE 
Any of "0", "1" or "2" can be inputted into [Read Mode].
018-241-04E
MU-56
[2.6] SE LED Color Setting>>  NOTE 
Restart the SE when the selector color is registered. The selector color registration will
 Display Window be reflected in the SE after restart.
SE LED Color Setting>> window
1200_400014E.ai
- Create LED color >>:
Register the LED color. Usually use the default setting. Clicking the color button,
inputting RGB of the LED color and clicking [SET], the LED color is registered.
- Pink (R,G,B) (Default value: 240, 48, 80)
- Light blue (R,G,B) (Default value: 16, 48, 224)
- Yellow (R,G,B) (Default value: 128, 160, 8)
- Purple (R,G,B) (Default value: 88, 8, 240)
- Orange (R,G,B) (Default value: 240, 48, 0)
- Selector Color Setting >>:
Register the selector color of the SE. Inputting the target SE No. and clicking [SET],
the Selector Color Setting >>window opens. Inputting the selector color according
to the No. displayed on the left side of the window, and clicking [SET], the selector
color registration is completed.
018-241-04E
MU-57
[3] Version Check [3.1] MC Version >>

VERSION CHECK window MC Version >> window
1200_400015E.ai 1200_400016E.ai

Selects the unit whose software version is to be checked. Displays the software versions of the MC. Clicking one of the following buttons, the
- MC Version >> software version of interest appears in the result display area.
- MP Version >> - [Display MC Software Version] button
- SE Version >> - [Display MC Kernel Version] button
- [Display MC ALPS Version] button
018-241-04E
MU-58
[3.2] MP Version >> [3.2.1] MP1 Version Check >>

MP Version >> window MP1 Version >> window
1200_400017E.ai 1200_400018E.ai

Selects the MP whose software version is to be checked. Displays the software versions of the MP1. Clicking one of the following buttons, the
- MP1 Version Check >> software version of interest appears in the result display area.
- MP2 Version Check >> - [Display MP1 Software Version] button
- [Display MP1 Kernel Version] button
- [Display MP1 ALPS Version] button
- [Display MP1 Driver Version] button
018-241-04E
MU-59
[3.2.2] MP2 Version Check >> [3.3] SE Version >>
“Display window” and “Function” are the same as those of MP1 Version Check >>.
Read MP1 as MP2.  Display Window
$ {MU:[3.2.1]_MP1 Version Check >>}
#1
DRID600_G0108E.ai
#1 Click: Target SE button
The software versions of the SE boards are displayed.
- mcu
- mcu data
- aplWlan
- wifiWlan
- ethWlan
- fpgaDrv
- rmv
- fpgaRmv
- adc
- glg
018-241-04E
MU-60
[4] Install [4.1] Install MP Software >>

INSTALL window Install MP Software>> window
1200_400019E.ai 1200_400020E.ai

Selects the unit on which the software is to be installed. Selects the MP on which the MP application is to be installed.
- Install MP Software >> - MP1 Install >>
- Install SE Software >> - MP2 Install >>
018-241-04E
MU-61
[4.1.1] MP1 Install >> [4.1.2] MP2 Install >>
“Display window” and “Function” are the same as those of MP1 Install >>.
 Display Window Read MP1 as MP2.
MP1 Install >> window $ {MU:[4.1.1]_MP1 Install >>}
1200_400021E.ai
MP1 Software VerUp Install:
The MP application is version-updated. The result appears in the result display area.
018-241-04E
MU-62
[4.2] Install SE Software >> [5] Board State Check

Install SE Software >> window BOARD STATE CHECK window
#1
#2
1200_400023E.ai
Checks the conditions of the following boards. Input the SE serial ID also.
- MP board State
- SE board State
1200_400022E.ai - SE Write Serial ID
#1 Input: Target SE button
#2 Click: [SET]
- SE Serial ID:
Displays the SE serial ID.
- Install SE FPGA Software:
Installation of the FPGA application.
- Install SE GLG Software:
Installation of the GLG board application.
- Install SE LAN Software:
Installation of the LAN application
- Install SE MCU Software:
Installation of the MCU application.
018-241-04E
MU-63
[5.1] MP Board State >> [5.1.1] MP1 Board State >>

MP Board State>>window MP1 Board State>>window
1200_400024E.ai 1200_400025E.ai
Selects the MP whose board conditions are to be checked.
- MP1 Board State
- MP2 Board State
018-241-04E
MU-64
 Function Description [5.1.2] MP2 Board State >>
Acquires the conditions of components connected with the board in the MP1. You can “Display window” and “Function” are the same as those of MP1 Board State >>.
view the acquired results in the result display area. Read MP1 as MP2.
$ {MU:[5.1.1]_MP1 Board State >>}
- Connector Status:
The status of the connector connected with the MP board appears in the result
display area.
Normal processing: MPX Connector: ON, Upright SE Connector: ON,
Table SE Connector: ON
Error: Other than above.
- Fan Status:
The status of the fan connected with the MP board appears in the result display
area.
Normal processing: MP Fan Status: ON
- Fuse Status:
The status of the fuse connected with the MP board appears in the result display
area.
Normal processing: MPX Fuse: OK, UprightSE Fuse: OK, TableSE Fuse: OK
- RemoteSW Status:
The ON/OFF status of the remote switch appears in the result display area.
ON: OFF/[ON]
OFF: [OFF]/ON
- ShotSW Port1 Status
The ON/OFF status of the shot switch port 1 appears in the result display area.
ShotSW1 is ON: OFF/[ON]
ShotSW1 is OFF: [OFF]/ON
- ShotSW Port2 Status
The ON/OFF status of the shot switch port 2 appears in the result display area.
ShotSW2 is ON: OFF/[ON]
ShotSW2 is OFF: [OFF]/ON
018-241-04E
MU-65
[5.2] SE Board State >>  Battery:

Displays the following information on the battery in the result display area.
 Display Window Serial No.: 0 to 65535
SE Board State >> window Date of manufacture: YYYY/MM/DD
Battery Status: 0xXXXX
Failure cause (Manufacture Access): 0bXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
#1 Battery capacity: 0 to 65535 [unit mAh/10 mWh]
Fitting (putting on/off) count of battery (B/I Logic Count): 0 to 65535
Charge/discharge count (Cycle Count): 0 to 65535
Remaining time (Time to Empty): 0 to 65535 [unit min]
Battery temperature: 0 to 65535 [0.1 K]
<Display example>
Serial No = 66
Manufacture Date = 2010/09/23
#2 Battery Status = 0x0080
Manufacture Access = 0b1110000000000000
Battery Capacity: 2619 (unit mAh/10 mWh)
B/I Logic Count: 0
Cycle Count: 27
Time to Empty: 65535 (min)
Temperature: 2956 (0.1 K)
 Battery Date Setting

Set the start date for battery use.
Accurate display of the battery capacity becomes possible by performing “Battery
DRID600_G0086E.ai Date Setting”.
#1 Input: Target SE button
#2 Click: [SET]  GLG Check
The following tests are performed for the GLG board, and the results (OK/NG) are
 Function Description displayed in the result display area.
Acquires conditions of components connected with the board in the SE. You can view - Memory check (writing of data to and reading of data from FRAM and RAM)
the result in the result display area. - Data acquisition from RTC
- Low G sensor data setting and data acquisition
 SE Board State - AD converter diagnosis
Acquires the board conditions in the SE, and displays the contents in the result - Reading of set data
display area.
REFERENCE
Normal: WLAN H/W Status: OK, WLAN Power Status: OK, WLAN SettingFile
Status: OK, RMV H/W Status: OK, RMV Power Status: OK Self-diagnosis of the GLG board is performed also at the time of equipment start.
Defective: Other than the above
 Temperature
Displays the temperature of the stand SE panel in the result display area.
Display example: Temperature = 29.4 deg C
018-241-04E
MU-66
 GLG Calibration
 [5.3] SE SerialID Write>>
GLG Calibration>>window
 Display Window
SE Write Serial ID>> window
1200_400026E.ai
Zero point adjustment for the high G sensor (3 directions) is performed. GLG
calibration must be performed at the time of replacement of the GLG board. 1200_400040E.ai
<Procedures>  Function Description

(1) Start the system. When replacing the RMV board, inputting the SE serial ID and clicking [SET], the
serial ID registration is completed.
(2) Place the SE onto a stable surface with no vibrations (the orientation
does not matter).
 NOTE 
(3) Click [Get X axial Offset], [Get Y axial Offset], [Get Z axial Offset]. (The The first letter of the serial ID must be entered as a capital letter.
order of clicking does not matter.)
→ The 0 G output of the high G sensor is acquired. REFERENCE
(4) Click [Save Offset Data]. The serial ID of an SE is mentioned on the surface of the machine-specific data CD-
→ The offset value is stored in the FRAM of the GLG board (restart is not required). ROM.
REFERENCE
After execution of calibration, the actually measured value minus the offset value is
stored in the log as the measured value.
018-241-04E
MU-67
[6] Calibration  INSTRUCTION 
Check to make sure that background calibration (which takes place automatically
 Display Window when the MC is started) is completed before carrying out the following calibration.
CALIBRATION window The image correction data cannot be correctly performed if the calibration takes place
while the background calibration is in progress.
- Offset calibration
- Gain calibration
- Defect calibration
- Lag calibration
You can check whether background calibration is completed on the status lamp
“READY” of the SE
- While background calibration is in progress:
“READY” is flashing.
- While background calibration is not carried out:
“READY” is unlit.
 NOTE 
When performing the calibration with the FIPS MODE set to "ON" in the EDIT
CONFIGURATION, a warning message is displayed to indicate that the data transfer
1200_400027E.ai
rate is slow. Set the FIPS MODE to "OFF" or perform the calibration after wire-line
connecting the SE.
Used to make the following calibration on the SE.
Refer to the Installation manual for the detailed procedures.
$ {IN1:27._Calibration}
- Offset calibration
- Gain calibration
- Defect calibration
- Lag calibration
Also, it is used to confirm or set the SE correct data.
- SE Correct Data Save Status
- SE Correct Data Transfer
- SE Correct Data Status
018-241-04E
MU-68
[6.1] Offset Calibration >> REFERENCE
Whether the check is successfully completed appears on the result display area.
 Display Window An error code is displayed in some cases. Refer to the Troubleshooting manual and
Offset Calibration>> window take appropriate countermeasures.
Correction data for use in still image radiography is generated.

Clicking [Start], the mode setting takes place.
Clicking [Create an Offset Data] thereafter, the correction data is generated.
1200_400028E.ai
Carries out offset calibration.
No exposure is made during offset calibration.
The offset calibration takes place for all of connected SE’s.
 NOTE 
- Always click [Create an Offset Data] after you click [Start]. Processing cannot
be terminated, waiting for data generation, if you click [BACK] without clicking
[Create an Offset Data]. Return to the “Store Mode” window, and again follow the
procedures in this case.
- Clicking [Start] during automatic offset update (always taking place approx. at
10-minute intervals when no exposure menu is selected), “Error 12700 currently
unavailable” is displayed. Again click [Start] approx. 30 seconds later in this case.
018-241-04E
MU-69
[6.2] Gain Calibration >>  NOTES 
- Be sure to make sixteen exposures after you click [Start]. Then click [Create a
 Display Window Gain Data]. Processing cannot be terminated, waiting for data generation, if you
Gain Calibration >> window click [BACK] without clicking [Create a Gain Data]. Return to the “Gain Calibration”
window and again follow the procedures in this case.
- If you click [Create a Gain Data] before you make sixteen exposures, “error code”
is displayed in the result display area. If “error code” appears, continue to make
#1 exposures, and click [Create a Gain Data] after you have made sixteen exposures.
REFERENCE
#2 An error code is displayed in some cases. Refer to the Troubleshooting manual and
take appropriate countermeasures.
- Operation Setting:
Selects the operative method for calibration.
- Start:
- Display Image Count:
Clicking [Display Image Count], you can view the exposure count.
- Display ShotRdy:
Completion of the shooting preparation by the panel is checked.
<Result indication>
DRID600_G0095E.ai - SHOT_READY: Completed
#1 Input: Target SE button - NOT_READY: Not completed
#2 Click: [SET] - Create a Gain Data:
Gain data is generated.
Gain calibration takes place under the following conditions:
- Exposure conditions: Dose of 10 mR (75 kV, 2 mAs, SID = 100 cm)
- Exposure count: 16
018-241-04E
MU-70
[6.3] Defect Calibration >>  NOTES 
- Be sure to make five exposures after you click [Start]. Then click [Create a Defect
 Display Window Data]. Processing cannot be terminated, waiting for data generation, if you click
Defect Calibration >> window [BACK] without clicking [Create a Defect Data]. Return to the “Defect Calibration”
window and again follow the procedures in this case.
- If you click [Create a Defect Data] before you make five exposures, “error code”
is displayed in the result display area. If “error code” appears, continue to make
#1 exposures, and click [Create a Defect Data] after you have made five exposures.
REFERENCE
#2 An error code is displayed in some cases. Refer to the Troubleshooting manual and
- Start:
- Progress Indicator:
Clicking [Progress Indicator], you can view the exposure count.
- Display ShotRdy:
<Result indication>
DRID600_G0096E.ai - SHOT_READY: Completed
#1 Input: Target SE button - NOT_READY: Not completed
#2 Click: [SET] - Create a Defect Data:
Defect data is generated.
Defect correction calibration takes place under the following conditions:
- Exposure count: 5
018-241-04E
MU-71
[6.4] Lag Calibration >>  NOTES 
- Be sure to make a single exposure after you click [Start]. Then click [Create a Lag
 Display Window Data]. Processing cannot be terminated, waiting for data generation, if you click
Lag Calibration >> window [BACK] without clicking [Create a Lag Data]. Return to the “Lag Calibration” window
and again follow the procedures in this case.
#1 unavailable” is displayed. Again click [Start] approx. 30 seconds later in this case.
REFERENCE
An error code is displayed in some cases. Refer to the Troubleshooting manual and
#2
- Start:
- Display Progress Status:
Clicking [Display Progress Status], you can view the number of acquired frame data.
Data of eight frames are acquired by a single exposure.
- Display ShotRdy:
<Result indication>
- SHOT_READY: Completed
DRID600_G0097E.ai - NOT_READY: Not completed
#1 Input: Target SE button - Create a Lag Data:
#2 Click: [SET] Lag correction data is generated.
Lag correction calibration takes place under the following conditions:
- Exposure count: 1
018-241-04E
MU-72
[6.5] SE Correct Data Save Status>> [6.6] SE Correct Data Transfer>>

SE Correct Data Save Status >> window SE Correct Data Transfer >> window
#1 #1
#2
#2
1200_400032E.ai
#1 Input: Target SE No
#2 Click: [SET]
Transfer the SE correct data retained by the MC to the SE.
Display “STILL_DATASAVE” during transfer.
Display “COMPLETE_DATASAVE” after finishing transfer.
 INSTRUCTION 
1200_400031E.ai
After forcing the transfer of the SE correct data, perform “[6.5] SE Correct Data Save
#1 Input: Target SE No Status>>” to check the correction data status.
#2 Click: [SET]
After finishing the full calibration or the SE correct data transfer, check whether the
correction data storage has been completed or not.
Inputting the SE No. and clicking [SET], the correct data save status after the
calibration is displayed.
Display “STILL_DATASAVE” during transfer.
Display “COMPLETE_DATASAVE” after finishing transfer.
018-241-04E
MU-73
[6.7] SE Correct Data Status>> REFERENCE
- There is no problem if the list of correct data is displayed as shown below. In
 Display Window addition, the display of the “Offset Mode3 Data” and “Initial Calibration Mode3”
depends on the setting for the LONG TIME ACCUM MODE. Therefore, there is no
SE Correct Data Status >> window
problem if “NG” is displayed.
Gain Data :OK
Sensitivity Data :OK
#1 Lag Data :OK
Offset Mode0 Data :OK
Defect Data :OK
Initial Calibration :Done
Initial Calibration Mode3 :Done
#2 - If the initialization calibration has not been completed, “Not Yet” is displayed.
1200_400033E.ai
#1 Input: Target SE No
#2 Click: [SET]
Check the list of correct data stored in the SE.
Inputting the SE No. and clicking [SET], the correct data status is displayed.
018-241-04E
MU-74
[6.8] SE Flash Correct Data Status >> [7] SYSTEM

SE Flash Correct Data Status >> SYSTEM window
#1
#2
DRID800_G0149E.ai
#1 Input: Target SE No.

#2 Click: [SET]
 Function Description DRID600_G00115E.ai
Check the list of correct data stored in the FLASH of SE.

Inputting the SE No. and clicking [SET], the flash correct data status is displayed.
Used to select a way to shut down the system.
Each time you click [Auto Shutdown Setting], ON/OFF setting is changed over.
018-241-04E
MU-75
[7.1] Termination >>
 Display Window
Termination>> window
1200_400029E.ai
You can exit from or restart the system by selecting among three kinds of shutdown or
reboot methods on the “Termination” window.
 NOTE 
When the MC application is installed in the Console, the [Terminate], [Forced Terminate],
and [Forced Reboot] buttons are disabled.
- Terminate:
The system is normally shut down including termination calibration.
- Forced Terminate:
The system is shut down without termination calibration.
- Forced Reboot:
The system is restarted without termination calibration.
018-241-04E
MU-76
4.5 PING REFERENCE
“Lost = 0 (0 % loss)” means that there is no problem as a result of executing the PING
 Function command. If other than “(0 % loss)”, it is a sign that there was some problem.
Executes the PING command from the CL on the machine displayed in the “IP <GOOD indication>
Address”, and checks whether the network is correctly connected.
The result is normal when the following message appears.
 Procedures “172.16.1.10” is shown as an example.
| Ping statistics for 172.16.1.10: |
(1) Start up the RU PC-TOOL. | Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss), |
$ {MU:4._PC-TOOL} | Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds: |
| Minimum = 0 ms, Maximum = 0 ms, Average = 0 ms |
(2) Select the machine to be checked.
(3) Click [PING]. <NO GOOD indication>
Other than above.
The “PING” result is displayed on the CL window.
PC-TOOL window
$ {MU:4._PC-TOOL}
(2)
(3)
Check that the display reads “0% loss”. 1200_700171E.ai
018-241-04E
MU-77
4.6 MON 4.7 FTP
The I/O status of the RU (OPEN/CLOSE) appears in real time, but this function is not Used to access the FTP server from the CL and check whether the FTP server is
used in the machine as no corresponding I/O is included. working. Or, used to access the FTP server from the RU and check whether the FTP
server is working.
 Display Window
 Procedures
$ {MU:4._PC-TOOL}
(2) Select the machine to be checked.
(3) Click [FTP].
Operation check results of the FTP server are displayed in the command prompt,
and operation check status is displayed in the message window of the PC-TOOL.
PC-TOOL window
(2)
(3)
DRID600_G0055.ai
Result window
<GOOD indication>
OK value = 0 = 0x0
<NO GOOD indication>

Other than above.
1200_400034E.ai

$ {MU:4._PC-TOOL}
018-241-04E
MU-78
4.8 INSTALL 4.9 VERSION UP
Installs the RU software when a new RU or an additional RU is to be installed. Version-updates the RU software.
 INSTRUCTIONS   Updating RU Software Version
- The RU PC-TOOL needs to be installed beforehand.
$ {IN:14.1.2_Installing the RU PC-TOOL} in DR-ID 1200 Service Manual
(1) In case of the configuration installing the MC application in the DX
Console, restart the CL after clicking the CL software system exit
$ {IN:11.2_Installing the MC Application/DR Maintenance Software} in DR-ID1270 button, and sequentially click the upper left and upper right of the
Service Manual
screen within three seconds after the initial screen appears.
- The RU name and the IP address of the RU need to be installed beforehand. MC Manager only starts.
$ {MU:4.1_NEW}
 NOTE 
If step 1 could not be performed within three seconds, re-execute step 1 when
 Procedures the CL software has started up.
$ {IN:14.1.3_Installing the RU Software} in DR-ID 1200 Service Manual
$ {IN:11._Installing the RU Software} in DR-ID1270 Service Manual (2) Check that the MC Manager icon has appeared on the task tray.
 NOTE  (3) Insert the application disk into the drive.
- To install the MC application in the Console, installing the NIC first and then (4) Select “.\install\remote\MCSetupWizard.bat” from “FILE EXECUTION”
changing the setting of the CSL-PC + performing the BAT are required before area, and click [EXECUTE].
performing [INSTALL].
(5) Input the target MC IP address and click [Connect].
$ {IN:14.1.1_Network Settings} in DR-ID 1200 Service Manual
$ {IN:11.1_Network Settings} in DR-ID1270 Service Manual REFERENCE
- In case of the configuration installing the MC application in the MC, when the MC Input "127.0.0.1" as the MC IP address.
software is installed, the MC restarts automatically after the completion of the
installation. #1 Input: MC IP address
- In case of the configuration installing the MC application in the DX Console, when #2 Click: [Connect]
the MC software is installed, the MC Manager restarts automatically after the
completion of the installation.
#1
#2
800_700200.ai
018-241-06E
MU-79
 NOTE  (8) Check that there are not any problems with the version and the media
version that are installed on the device, and click [Upgrade].
- If the MC could not be connected to due to the mistaken inputting of the IP
address, a connection error occurs. After checking the connection status, re- #1 Check: the version and the media version that are installed on the device
execute the version upgrade. #2 Click: [Upgrade]
- If the MC application was not factory-installed, and if the model media being
used differs from the model which was installed, then the error will appear.
Confirm the MC application installation status and the media model information,
and re-execute the version upgrade. #1
 INSTRUCTION 
If the RU registration has been already completed, steps 6 and 7 are not #2
necessary. Proceed to step 8.
800_700204.ai
(6) If the RU registration has not been completed, the following window (9) Click [Yes].
appears. Click [OK]. #1 Click: [Yes]
#1 Click: [OK]
#1
#1
800_700205.ai
800_700202.ai
The following window opens during the version-update.

(7) Input the RU NAME and click [Register].
#1 Input: RU NAME
#2 Click: [Register]
#1
#2
800_700206.ai
800_700203.ai
The version and the media version that are installed on the device appear.
018-241-04E
MU-80
(10) Check that the installation is completed, and click [OK]. (11) Click [START] in the “Set Up PC-TOOL” window to start the RU PC-
#1 Click: [OK] TOOL window.
#1 Click: [START]
#1 #1
800_700207.ai
RU PC-TOOL window
600_700056.ai
018-241-04E
MU-81
(12) Check that the version indication in the “LIST OF EXISTING RU” has
changed.
RU PC-TOOL window
600_700289.ai
(13) Restart the CL.

 NOTE 
- When the MC software is upgraded, the MC Manager restarts automatically after
the completion of the upgrading.
- The settings become effective after the RU is restarted.
(14) Update SE application software version.

$ {IN1:22.6_Upgrading SE Application}
$ {IN2:22.6_Upgrading SE Application}
(15) Update MP application software version.

$ {IN1:20.5_Updating MP Application Software Version}
$ {IN2:20.2_Updating MP Application Software Version}
018-241-06E
MU-82
4.10 EDIT HISTORY EDIT HISTORY window
 Function
Displays and edits statistic information on use conditions of the SE (FPD).
 Details of Item
No. Item Function
1 INSTALLATION DATE Date when the RU software is installed
2 Reading Count Exposure count
3 Panel Reading Count Panel reading count (exposure count + calibration)
4 Full Dose Total dose of exposures

Dose distribution
5 Dose Distribution (mAs) Displays the exposure count for each of the
following ranges.
<1, 1-3, 3-10, 10-30, 30-100, 100<
Time distribution from menu registration to DRID600_G0057.ai
exposure
6 Time Distribution (s)
 Procedures
Displays the exposure count for each of the
following ranges.  INSTRUCTION 
<5, 5-15, 15-30, 30-300, 300-600, 600<
After exiting the DX Console application, perform the following procedure.
Tube voltage distribution
7 Tube Voltage Distribution (kV) Displays the exposure count for each of the (1) Select the RU in the “LIST OF EXISTING RU”.
following ranges.
<50, 50-70, 70-90, 90-110, 110-130, 130<
(2) Click [EDIT HISTORY].
Panel temperature distribution during exposure
→ The [EDIT HISTORY] window appears.
Shot Panel Temperature “USE” tab: INSTALLATION DATE (item No. 1 in the left table)
8 Displays the exposure count for each of the
Distribution (degrees) “STAND” tab: Stand SE (FPD) (item Nos. 2 to 8 in the left table)
following ranges.
<20, 20-23, 23-26, 26-28, 28-30, 30< “TABLE” tab: Bed SE (FPD) (item Nos. 2 to 8 in the left table)
REFERENCE (3) Confirm or change the settings appearing on the window.

Information in the item Nos. 4 to 8 refer to the exposure performance values (4) Click one of the following buttons.
transmitted from the X-ray high voltage generator, and collected only when the X-ray
high voltage generator connection serial cable is used. [CANCEL]: Cancels the changes, and exit from the [EDIT HISTORY] window.
[RESET]: Clears the displayed value.
[SET]: Stores the changes, and exit from the [EDIT HISTORY] window.
 INSTRUCTION 
To make the input value in the “INSTALLATION DATE” effective, you need to click [SET]
and turn OFF the main power circuit breaker of the MC.
018-241-04E
MU-83
4.11 EDIT CONFIGURATION  Details of Item
 Function <"RU CONFIGURATION SETTING" window>

RU CONFIGURATION SETTING window
System configuration information of the registered RU can be changed depending on
the use conditions at the customer’s site. Changed configuration information is written
in the HDD.
 Procedures
$ {MU:4._PC-TOOL}
(2) Select an [RU] from "LIST OF EXISTING RU".
(3) Click [EDIT CONFIGURATION].
The [RU CONFIGURATION SETTING] window appears.
(4) Set the CONFIGURATION items.
Configuration window includes the following four pages.
- RU CONFIGURATION SETTING
- WIRELESS SETTING
- RU IMAGE FLAG
- SE SLEEP MODE SETTING
(5) Click [SET].
The data is written into the HDD.
 NOTE 
Do not turn OFF the power of the MC during write into the HDD. Otherwise, the
HDD data gets damaged, and the MC cannot boot up.
(6) Left-click the MC Manager from the task tray and execute "EXIT".
Check that the MC Manager icon has disappeared from the task tray, and then start
the MC Manager from "Start menu" → "Start-up".
REFERENCE
1200_400035.ai
The settings become effective after restart of the MC.
018-241-04E
MU-84
 CSL MAC ADDRESS (xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx)  OPE SETTING (TABLE)
 NOTE   NOTE 
For DR-XD 1000 system, this setting does not change from the default value. For DR-XD 1000 system, this setting does not change from the default value.
Inputs the MAC address [Default: 00:00:00:00:00:00]. Specifies to which MP the X-ray shot cable corresponding to the operative method [Bed]
REFERENCE of the X-ray equipment is to be connected.
<Options>
<How to display the MAC address> - None: Not connected
(1) Press the Windows key and the [R] key concurrently. - MP1 [default]: Connected to MP1
→ The “Run...” window appears.
- MP2: Connected to MP2
(2) Input “cmd/k ipconfig/all”, and click [OK]. ( indicates a space.)

→ The MAC address appears in “Physical Address” of the “Ethernet adapter Local  OPE SETTING (FREE)
Area Connection:” block.
 NOTE 
For DR-XD 1000 system, this setting does not change from the default value.
 EDIT RU NAME Specifies to which MP the X-ray shot cable corresponding to the operative method
Input the RU name. [FREE (general)] of the X-ray equipment is to be connected.
<Options>
- None: Not connected
 OPE SETTING (UPRIGHT) - MP1 [default]: Connected to MP1
 NOTE  - MP2: Connected to MP2
 PORT SETTING (UPRIGHT)
Specifies to which MP the X-ray shot cable corresponding to the operative method
[Stand] of the X-ray equipment is to be connected.  NOTE 
<Options> For DR-XD 1000 system, this setting does not change from the default value.
- MP1 [default]: Connected to MP1 Specifies to which terminal block the X-ray shot cable corresponding to the operative
- MP2: Connected to MP2 method [Stand] of the X-ray equipment is to be connected.
<Options>
- MPX1 [default]: Connected to MPX1
- MPX2: Connected to MPX2
018-241-04E
MU-85
 PORT SETTING (TABLE)  NUM OF SE
 NOTE  Specifies the number of SEs (FPDs) to be connected concurrently.
<Settable range>
For DR-XD 1000 system, this setting does not change from the default value. - 1: One SE connected
- 2: Two SEs connected
Specifies to which terminal block the X-ray shot cable corresponding to the operative - 3: Three SEs connected
method [Bed] of the X-ray equipment is to be connected.
- 4: Four SEs connected
<Options>
- 5 [default]: Five SEs connected
- MPX2: Connected to MPX2  TABLE DIRECTION HEAD
Selects the direction of the patient’s head during exposure on the bed.
 PORT SETTING (FREE) <Options>
- LEFT: Left
 NOTE  - RIGHT [default]: Right
Specifies to which terminal block the X-ray shot cable corresponding to the operative
 UPRIGHT 180 REVERSE
method [FREE (general)] of the X-ray equipment is to be connected. Selects whether the exposure image of the stand SE (FPD) is to be rotated
<Options> 180 degrees.
- MPX1 [default]: Connected to MPX1 <Options>
- MPX2: Connected to MPX2 - none [default]: Not rotated
- 180: Rotated 180 degrees
 NUM OF MP
 NOTE   READ MODE
In the DR - XD 1000 system, since it has the MP function on the GNC board, this  NOTE 
setting does not change from the default value (1).
Since this is optimized in the DR-XD 1000 system, this setting does not change from
Specifies the number of MPs to be connected. [2:FIXED MODE (1200ms)].
<Settable range>
- 0: Not connected Sets charge accumulation time of the SE (FPD). Eight options are available and are
(such as a mobile configuration, a configuration using the DS only, etc.) divided into “fixed modes” and “variable modes”.
- 1 [default]: One MP connected - FIXED MODE
- 2: Two MPs connected Sets constant time irrespective of the X-ray irradiation time specified in each
exposure menu of the CL. Used when the X-ray high voltage generator is not
connected.
- VARIABLE MODE
The reading mode is changed over the FIXED MODE (200 ms), the FIXED MODE
(500 ms) and the FIXED MODE (1200 ms) depending on the X-ray irradiation time
specified in each exposure menu of the CL. Used when the X-ray high voltage
generator is connected.
018-241-04E
MU-86
 INSTRUCTION   Setting with the X-ray high voltage generator connected
If the X-ray irradiation time specified by the customer in the X-ray high voltage Select among variable modes when the X-ray high voltage generator is to be
generator is changed, the change cannot be reflected in the mode setting as the connected.
change is not fed back to the MC before exposure. If the X-ray irradiation time X-ray irradiation Charge
changed by the customer is longer than the charge accumulation time specified in the Option time specified in the accumulation Remarks
MC, the irradiation is terminated upon completion of accumulation, and images with exposure menu time
insufficient dose may result.
200 msec or less 200 msec
Instruct the customer not to set the charge accumulation time longer than specified in Accumulation might terminate during
the mode when the customer is to change the X-ray irradiation time. 3: VARIABLE 201 to 500 msec 500 msec X-ray irradiation (irradiation is forced to
MODE (1.0) terminate at the same time), and might
1200 to 3800 result in images with insufficient dose.
REFERENCE 501 msec or more
msec (*)
You can check the X-ray irradiation time specified in each exposure menu through the 181 msec or less 200 msec
user utility of the CL.
4: VARIABLE 182 to 454 msec 500 msec
MODE (1.1)
1200 to 3800
 Settings without the X-ray high voltage generator connected 455 msec or more
msec (*)
Select among the fixed modes when the X-ray high voltage generator is not 166 msec or less 200 msec
connected. Ask the customer about the exposure conditions in which the longest
X-ray irradiation time is required when a fixed mode is to be used, and select the 5: VARIABLE 167 to 416 msec 500 msec
Usually select this mode.
mode with a longer charge accumulation time specified than the X-ray irradiation time. MODE (1.2)
1200 to 3800
417 msec or more
Charge X-ray msec (*)
Option accumulation irradiation Remarks
time time 142 msec or less 200 msec
Select for exposures with low dose or 6: VARIABLE 143 to 357 msec 500 msec
0: FIXED MODE 200 msec MODE (1.4)
200 msec exposures considering throughputs such as 1200 to 3800
(200 ms) or less 358 msec or more
chest mass-screening. msec (*)
1: FIXED MODE 500 msec 117 msec or less 200 msec
500 msec
(500 ms) [default] or less
2: FIXED MODE 1200 to 3800 1200 to 3800 MODE (1.7)
For DR - XD 1000 system, select this mode.
(1200 ms) msec (*) msec 1200 to 3800
295 msec or more
msec (*)
*: Charge accumulation time is set in “MODE2 EXPOSURE TIME”.
 NOTE  *: When selecting any of options 3 to 7, enable the X-CON setting in the DX Console, and
set the appropriate value to the irradiation time in the exposure menu.
With the factory-configured DR-XD 1000 system, “2” is set. Example) If "3" is selected, the charge accumulation time becomes 200 msec when the
irradiation time has been set to 190 msec with the exposure menu of the DX Console.
Also, the charge accumulation time becomes 500 msec when the irradiation time has
been set to 300 msec with the exposure menu.
018-241-04E
MU-87
 MODE 2 EXPOSURE TIME
  EMERGENCY MODE
 NOTE  Set whether the emergency mode is to be used or not.
<Options>
Since this is optimized in the DR-XD 1000 system, this setting does not change from - OFF [default]: Not used
the default value. - ON: Used
Sets the charge accumulation time of READ MODE 2. Set in a range of 1.2 to 3.8 s. REFERENCE
The setting can be changed in 0.2-s steps. Emergency mode is the mode that the calibration would be stopped automatically and
<Settable range> the exposure would be ready when the system starts.
- 1.2 to 3.8 s [default: 1.2 s] Charge accumulation time of READ MODE 2 When it is set to ON, the exposure would be ready as soon as the system starts.
 NOTE 
For the facilities that may use the machine long time under high temperature, to
prevent artifact, it is recommended to set the charge accumulation time of READ  BATTERY WARNING[min]
MODE 2 at or lower than 1.2 seconds. Sets the threshold value of remaining battery charge.
If the remaining battery charge lowers to the set threshold value, exposure cannot be
accepted. The SE LED flashes in this case.
 AUTO DETECT The setting is made as the remaining battery time (minutes).
Always use the setting of 10 [default] in this machine.
 NOTE  <Settable range>
With the DR-XD 1000 system since there are shot signal connections, this setting - 0 to 120 minutes [default: 10]
does not change from the default value (OFF).
Set whether to use the automatic X-ray detection function (AUTO DETECT) or not.  SE BATTERY WATCHING (when connecting cables)
<Options> Set this option to ON for a configuration, such as the mobile configuration, wired with
- OFF [default]: Not used the SE but the battery of which is not charged.
- ON: Used Set this to OFF [default] for a configuration including the MP, DS, and PB.
<Options>
- OFF [default]: Not watched
 CONNECTING CU - ON: Watched
Set to CONNECTED when the machine is to be connected to the DX Console to REFERENCE
which AcSelarete or CALNEO U/T is connected.
Usually, use the setting of NOT CONNECTED [default]. This function depends on whether this machine supplies power to the SE.
<Options> - Supply power to and communicate with the SE.
- NOT CONNECTED [default] Irrespective of ON or OFF, the battery is monitored.
- CONNECTED - Supply no power to but communicate with the SE.
If setting to "OFF", does not activate monitoring of the battery.
If setting to "ON", activates monitoring the battery.
018-241-04E
MU-88
 MC-PC EXISTENCE  SHOT GO OFF DELAY TIME
 NOTE  Set a regulatory time to secure a required irradiation time when irradiation does not
continue for a preset time due to any reason such as a delay in communication.
Not used in the DR-XD 1000 system. [default: 0]
REFERENCE
Set the availability of the PC for the MC.
<Options> The X-ray irradiation time is often stopped by a signal from the MP due to
- NOT EXIST [default]: Select this option when no PC is available for the MC. communication delays, which shortens the exposure time. To ensure the irradiation
- EXIST: Select this option when the PC is available for the MC. time, set the SHOTGO OFF DELAY TIME value to around "the shortage of time + 10"
ms.
 A SYNCHRONOUS MC-SHUTDOWN WITH CONSOLE

 NOTE   FTP over SSL on MC
For DR-XD 1000 system, this setting does not change from the default value. This setting item is added in the MC V16.5. Turn ON this only for facilities that have
enabled the VA security. This setting switches the FTP protocol used in the system to
Set the termination processing queue control of the MC and the Console. the FTP over SSL protocol.
<Options> <Options>
- SYNC [default]: Select this option when no PC is available for the MC. - OFF [default]: For the normal use environment, set this item.
- ASYNC: Select this option when the PC is available for the MC. - ON: For the VA security environment, set this item.
 LONG TIME ACCUM MODE  FTP over SSL on FCR

Set whether long time accumulation mode is to be used or not by selecting "ON" for This setting item is added in the MC V16.5. Turn ON this only for facilities that have
"AUTO DETECT" and "OFF" for "EMERGENCY MODE. enabled the VA security. This setting switches the FTP protocol used in the system to
<Options> the FTP over SSL protocol.
- OFF [default]: Not used <Options>
- ON: Used - OFF [default]: For the normal use environment, set this item.
- ON: For the VA security environment, set this item.
REFERENCE
- It takes 10 seconds to read the images by setting "ON" to "LONG TIME ACCUM
MODE" only when the specified menus are selected in the DX Console. When the  Xair Mode
common menus are selected, the reading time is the one that set by "READ MODE". This setting item is added in the MC V16.6. Turn ON this setting only for facilities that
- When setting "ON" to "LONG TIME ACCUM MODE", set 7 minutes or more to have enabled the Xair. This setting sets the minimum threshold of the tube current
"SLEEP START TIME" in "SE SLEEP MODE SETTING" window. when detecting X-ray from 10 to 5 mA, and the SmartSwitch mode appropriate for the
low output from the Xair.
<Options>
- OFF [default]: For the normal use environment, set this item.
- ON: Set only at the Xair usage site.
018-241-07E
MU-89
<"WIRELESS SETTING" window>  ESSID MANUAL (arbitrary ID setting for wireless LAN)
WIRELESS SETTING window Sets an arbitrary ID in case that “MANUAL” has been selected at “ESSID”.
When two or more SE’s are to be installed in one installation site, make settings so
that the ID's of the respective SE’s do not overlap. Make the same setting of the ID on
the AP.
- A single-byte text string of 32 characters or less [default: blank]
 NOTE 
With the factory-configured DR-XD 1000 system, “FFaQro87” is set.
 CHANNEL & MODE

Selects the wireless channel to be used.
Setting a dual channel with higher communication rate is recommended for the
machine.
If the communication rate drops, overlapping channels in the site are possibly present.
Change the setting.
REFERENCE
1200_400036.ai
- For details on setting correspondence table of the wireless channel for EDIT
 NOTE  CONFIGURATION and access point, refer to the following.
- Modify this setting if necessary depending on the facility. $ {IN: Appendix 12._Wireless Channel Used for the Access Point}
- Select the same settings for the AP.
- When multiple access points are vicinally placed, changing the channel currently used
$ {IN1:18.2_Setting the FUJIFILM-made AP} can prevent decreasing the communication speed due to interferences.
- The Auto 20/40 MHz mode changes the band automatically between 20 and 40
 ESSID MHz. The 40 MHz band can provide faster communication than the 20 MHz band,
but the channel cannot be fixed to the 40MHz band.
Sets the network identifier of the wireless LAN for the SE.
Usually use the setting of FUJIAP01 [default].
When two or more SE’s are to be installed in one installation site, make settings so  NOTE 
that the identifiers of the respective SE’s do not overlap. - In accordance with the Radio Law, the W52 and W53 type channels (36, 40, 44,
Make the same setting of the identifier on the AP. 48, 52, 56, 60 and 64) cannot be used outdoors. If wireless communications are to
<Options> be used outdoors, select a 5 GHz other than the aforementioned channels or a 2.4
- FUJIAP01 to FUJIAP10, MANUAL [default: FUJIAP01] GHz. All of the channels can be used indoors.
- When selecting 2.4 GHz on the FUJIFILM-made AP, select 20 MHz on the “Channel
 NOTE  Width”. Do not select 40 MHz.
With the factory-configured DR-XD 1000 system, “MANUAL” is set.
018-241-06E
MU-90
 NOTE   COUNTRY CODE (xxxx)
When the W53 or W56 type channel is selected, if interference is detected, then Since there is wireless communication with SE, inputting the country code according
perform the following workaround operations. This is because avoiding interference to the country where it used is required.
with the weather radar is required by the DFS (Dynamic Frequency Selection).
- 4-character string or less [default: 4036]
- In order to detect radar waves about one minute before starting the communication with
each channel, the wireless communication cannot be performed during the detection.  NOTE 
- If radar waves are detected during wireless communications, the wireless - Change the country code for the countries where SE is used.
China: 156
again in about one minute, and if no radar waves are detected, then the wireless Taiwan: 158
communications will be resumed on the changed channel. At this time, the SE will - For MC V2.2 or later, input "4036".
- In case of the FUJIFILM-made AP, the “WSTAT” LED flashes red during the DFS  BSSID (AP MAC address)
search operation.
The FUJIFILM-made AP logs that the DFS functioned to alter the channel for check. Input the MAC address of the AP (BSSID) when wireless connection is to be made
For the procedure to check the log, refer to the following. by specifying the AP. Although input is not needed usually, inputting the BSSID is
recommended when two or more AP’s are to be used.
$ {MT:6._Troubleshooting from FUJIFILMmade AP Log}
The MAC address is mentioned on the label or in the instruction manual of the AP.
<Settable range>
- 12-character string [default: 000000000000]
 WLAN OUTPUT
Set whether the wireless LAN output is to be used or not.  NOTE 
<Options> With the factory-configured DR-XD 1000 system, the MAC address is set for the
- OFF: Not used FUJIFILM-made AP which is included.
- ON [default]: Used
 WLAN AUTO RATE  ENCRYPTION (encryption yes/no setting)

Set whether the wireless LAN transmission rate is constant or varible. This sets whether wireless communication is to be encrypted or not.
<Options> <Options>
- CONSTANT [default] • OFF: No encryption
- VARIABLE • ENCRYPTION [default]: WPA2-PSK encryption
REFERENCE • EAP-TLS: EAP-TLS encryption
If the wireless environment is not stable or easily fluctuates, set to “VARIABLE”. If the REFERENCE
wireless environment is stable, use “CONSTANT”. - When selecting "ENCRYPTION", a separate encryption setting on the AP side is
also required.
Encryption method: AES
Authentication method: WPA2-PSK (Wi-Fi Protected Access 2 Pre Shared Key)
- When SE is shared by multiple systems, the encryption settings in the SE are
rewritten by connecting the SE once to the SE cable of the movement destination.
018-241-06E
MU-91
 ENCRYPTION KEY (encryption key) <"RU IMAGE FLAG" window>
Enter the text string (pass phrase) for generation of the encryption key for wireless RU IMAGE FLAG window
communication.
<Setting range>
A single-byte text string of 8 to 63 characters [default: fujifilm]
 NOTE 
With the factory-configured DR-XD 1000 system, “fujifilm34” is set.
REFERENCE
- The pass phrase entered for this item also must be set on the AP side.
- This unit is not compatible with the pass phrase automatic change function (only
manual setting is possible).
 FIPS MODE (encryption setting for image transfer)

This sets whether FIPS MODE is to be used or not.
<Options> 1200_400037.ai
• OFF [default]: Not used

• ON: Used  GOS SHARPNESS FILTER
REFERENCE Select the sharpness of the GOS panel (1201SE, 1202SE, 1271SE, 1272SE).
Image transfer is to be encrypted only for wireless communications. Select HIGH when a highly sharp image is to be obtained, making use of the features
of DR.
Select NORMAL when an image with normal sharpness close to the FCR is to be
obtained.
<Options>
- HIGH [default]: Highly sharp
- NORMAL: Normally sharp
 NOTE 
As this setting causes a large change of the image quality, select according to the
desire of the user.
REFERENCE
This setting does not influence the image quality of the CsI panel (1211SE / 1212SE /
1213SE / 1214SE).
018-241-06E
MU-92
 IMAGE READING MODE  IMAGE LOG SAVE TO FTP
Selects the image compensation processing mode. Selects whether or not the recorded image log is to be stored in the FTP server.
Normally use the default setting. If the noise is generated via image evaluations Always use the setting of OFF [default] in the machine.
whereas physical phantoms such as mesh, etc. were used, change to the Standard <Options>
Mode. - OFF [default] : Not stored
<Options> - ON: Stored
- Standard Mode
 NOTE 
- High-Speed Mode [default]
When set to “ON”, the PC capacity is compressed and the throughput is degraded.
 NOTE 
When this setting has been changed, perform the full calibration after restarting the
MC in the following procedure. If not, the image compensation processing mode is not
switched correctly.  OFFSET2 (blemish/unevenness correction setting)
1. Change the setting. Select whether or not the blemish/unevenness correction is to be performed.
2. Restart the MC. <Options>
3. Perform the full calibration. - OFF: Not performed
- ON [default]: Performed
REFERENCE
Even if the noise is generated via image evaluations whereas physical phantoms such  T2 TIMER(sec)
as mesh, etc. were used, this noise is not generated in human body exposures.
Set the start time (sec) of the calibration executed in the background. When the
exposure has been completed, the calibration begins after the time elapsed that was
set.
 IMAGE LOG SAVE - Character string: [default: 120]
Selects whether or not the recorded image log is to be stored in the HDD.
Always use the setting of OFF [default] in the machine.  AUTO DEFECT CALIBRATION
<Options>
Set whether the automatic defect calibration is to be executed or not.
- OFF [default] : Not stored
<Options>
- ON: Stored
- OFF: Not executed
 NOTE  - ON [default]: Executed
 AUTO DEFECT CALIBRATION START HOURS
When "ON" is selected in "AUTO DEFECT CALIBRATION", input the automatic
execution time hourly.
 AUTO DEFECT CALIBRATION START MINUTES

When "ON" is selected in "AUTO DEFECT CALIBRATION", input the automatic
execution time minutely.
018-241-04E
MU-93
<"SE SLEEP MODE SETTING" window>  EXTRA SLEEP START TIME
SE SLEEP MODE SETTING window Set the time in minutes units until when the extra sleep mode is started.
<Setting range>
- 2 to 999 [default: 999]
REFERENCE
- After all the SEs shift to the sleep mode and past the set time by this setting, shift to
the extra sleep mode.
- When set to “999”, do not shift to the extra sleep mode.
1200_400038.ai
 SE SLEEP MODE
Set the SE sleep mode.
<Options>
- OFF: Disable the power save mode.
- ON [default]: Enable the power save mode.
 SLEEP START TIME

Set the time in minutes units until when the power save mode is started.
<Setting range>
- 2 to 10 [default: 2]
REFERENCE
Shift to the sleep mode mainly in the following cases.
- After completing the initialization calibration
- After completing the exposure
- After cancelling the exposure
- After switching the panel by changing the selector for the DX Console
- After completing the automatic offset update
- After completing the periodical defect calibration
- After completing the automatic log update
018-241-04E
MU-94
 OPE SETTING (UPRIGHT/TABLE/FREE)

OPE SETTING corresponds to Reader Type (selector) set on the DX Console.
Make the OPE SETTING and Reader Type settings coincide with each other.
EDIT CONFIGURATION Selector (DX Console)
Corresponding
1200_400041E.ai
 NOTES 
- If [FPD-U] is registered in any selector, always carry out the following operations.
- Connect the stand-type X-ray shot cable to the MP.
- Specify the destination of connection via the PC-TOOL in [OPE SETTING
(UPRIGHT)] and [PORT SETTING (UPRIGHT)].
- Specify whether the exposure image is to be rotated 180 degrees via the PC-
TOOL in [UPRIGHT 180 REVERSE].
- If [FPD-T] is registered in any selector, always carry out the following operations.
- Connect the bed-type X-ray shot cable to the MP.
(TABLE)] and [PORT SETTING (TABLE)].
- Specify the direction of the patient’s head via the PC-TOOL in [TABLE
DIRECTION HEAD].
- If [FPD-C] is registered in any selector, always carry out the following operations.
- Connect the free X-ray shot cable to the MP.
(FREE)] and [PORT SETTING (FREE)].
018-241-04E
MU-95
 Relation among configurations
Point 1: X-ray shot cable
The name of a connector to which a cable of each operative method is
connected is registered in advance via the PC-TOOL.
Free
MC CSL
Table
X-CON Upright
[EDIT CONFIGURATION] [Selector Setting]
[Selector12]
[OP SETTING(FREE)]
AP [Selector1]
[OP SETTING(TABLE)] Defines the operative method.
[Technique Code]:
[OP SETTING(UPRIGHT)] [Reader Type]:
MP1 [MP1] or [FPD-C]: FREE exposure with FPD or
SE1 MPC7 MPX1 [MP2] or [FPD-T]: TABLE exposure with FPD or
SE serial No. MPC6 MPX2 [None] [FPD-U]: UPRIGHT exposure with FPD
[Caption]: Selector name
[PORT SETTING(UPRIGHT)] [Icon Type]: Selector icon
SE2 [MPX1] or
SE serial No. MP2 [MPX2] or
[Device Name]: Panel identification name
MPC7 MPX1 [None]

SE3 MPC6 MPX2 [Device Setting]
SE serial No. [MUTL] - [SE Registration] [Device Name]: Panel identification name
SE1: SE serial No. [FPD Device ID]: SE Serial No.
SE2: SE serial No. [Device Type]: Defines the panel for use.
SE3: SE serial No. [D-EVO] or
SE4: SE serial No. [AcSelarate]
SE5: SE serial No. [Device Color]: Identification of SE
Point 2: SE serial No.

Serial Nos. of all panels are registered in advance via the PC-TOOL. Image processing is selected
The operative method for exposure and the panel to be used are determined based on the depending on the type of the panel.
CSL setting (not depending on the connector (MPC6 or 7) to which the panel is connected).
DRID600_G0139E.ai
018-241-04E
MU-96
4.12 EDIT CL NAME
 Function
Edits/adds the CL of the image destination, and edits the list of the master CL.
 Procedures for Editing/Adding the Image Destination

(1) Select the RU in which the CL of the image destination is to be edited
or added from the “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, and click [EDIT CL NAME].
→ The “CL NAME” window appears.
(2) Select the CL to be edited and click [MODIFY] when the CL is to be
edited, or click [NEW] when the CL is to be added.
→ The window for prompting the input of “CL IP ADDRESS” and “CL NAME”
appears.
(3) Input “CL IP ADDRESS” and “CL NAME” and click [SET].
(4) Click [SET].
→ The RU PC-TOOL window restores.
 Procedures for Setting the Master CL

(1) Select the CL to be the master CL among those appearing on the “CL
NAME” window.
(2) Click [>>], and click [SET].
→ The RU PC-TOOL window restores.
018-241-04E
MU-97
4.13 BACKUP No. Selection item Data to be backed up
Collectively acquire the data of the registered panels (maximum
3 CORRECT ALL DATA
 Function of 100 pieces).
Copies the configuration information and the error log in the HDD to a desired location CORRECT PANEL Acquire the data of an individual panel by specifying the panel
4
on the CL (a recording medium or a folder). DATA number.
You can back up the following data: SE REGISTRATION
Output the registration information of panels to the log. (*3)
5 C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\DR-ID1200\SYSTEM\<IP
No. Selection item Data to be backed up INFORMATION
address>\log\trace5\SERegistInfo.txt
Configuration file *1: How to read the CALIB LOG file is as follows.
1 CONFIGURATION
Folder name: CONFIG
[2014/10/21 15:29:58] 3AA988 @<P1, L121402, center> <C4> <M0>xxxxx
Logs of Nos. 1 “CONFIGURATION” and 2.1 to 2.9 below are
backed up together. Date and time TICK after SE SE SE Calibration Read Results
Collect the following logs together with the mentioned logs. the MC reg No. serial position type mode
2 LOG ALL
NETWORK: Communication log of TCP application (1-100） ID (DR-ID
STATISTIC: BATTERY.CFG (battery information) and starts up 1305SE
HISTORY.CFG (history information) （10ms units） only)
ERROR LOG: Error log - Calibration type
2.1
File name: ERROR.cab C1: Offset calibration C2: Gain calibration
IO TRACE LOG: Not used in the machine. C3: Lag calibration C4: Automatic offset update
2.2
Folder name: IOT C5: Defect calibration C7: Marker calibration
ISC TRACE LOG: Communication log between packages - Read mode
2.3 (subsystems). For design verification. M0: mode 0 M1: mode 1 M2: mode 2
File name: ISC.cab - Results
SOFT LOG: Communication log between packages For offset calibration:
(subsystems). For design verification. - Results (success, abort, fail)
File name: Trace.cab, Trace2.cab, Trace3.cab, Trace4.cab, - Response results from the SE (3 words)
2.4
Trace5.cab
The X-ray automatic detection log and the compensation data For gain calibration:
share log are included here. - Results (success: "0", fail: other than "0"）
CSL LOG: Communication log between the CL and the MC For defect calibration:
2.5 - Results (success: "0", fail: other than "0"）
File name: CONSOL.cab
RADCON LOG: Serial communication log between the MC and - Defect detection results
2.6 the X-CON - Histogram of the defect size (DefectSizeHistogram)
File name: RADCON.cab - Histogram of the defect cluster (DefectClusterHistogram)
CALIB LOG (*1): Calibration history log - Horizontal line defect / vertical line defect (LineH/LineV)
2.7
File name: CALIB.cab - Number of the defect pixels (NumberOfDefectPixel)
HISTORY LOG: Use status statistic file of the FPD For lag calibration:
2.8 - Results (success: "0", fail: other than "0"）
File name: HISTORY.cab
GLG LOG (*2): Panel drop/impact log - ROI number (NumOfROI_x/NumOfROI_y)
File name: SE_GSENS_[SE serial No.].LOG - ROI coordinates of the exposure part per ROI numbers (IROI/x1/y1/x2/y2)
When the following execution file is copied into the folder where - ROI coordinates of the Pb part per ROI numbers (PbROI/x1/y1/x2/y2)
the log file is saved and is double-clicked, a file converted to a - Acquisition timing for each frame, average QL of ROI for each exposure part,
2.9
viewable format is generated in the same folder (file name after
conversion: GLG_[file name before conversion]). and average QL of ROI for each Pb part (Frame/Time/QLave_X/QLave_Pb)
C:\ProgramFiles\FujiFilm\FCR\DR-ID1200\SYSTEM\ - Judgment results for lag correction ON/OFF (JudgementCorrect)
COMMON\GLG.exe - Decay constant per ROI numbers (IROI/A(iROI))
018-241-04E
MU-98
For marker calibration:
- Results (success: "0", fail: other than "0"）
- Calibration mode (Factory mode: "factory", Maintenance mode: "maintenance")
- Border edge factor for quadruple exposures (BorderEdge)
- Marker calibration results (MarkerCalibResult)
*2: How to read the GLG LOG file is as follows.

date X-x X-y X-z time Y-x Y-y Y-z time Z-x Z-y Z-z time flag
2011/06/21 15:29 80G -169G 6G 0ms 78G -181G -3G 0ms -8G -48G -64G 3ms 02 Panel Impact Detected
2011/06/21 15:29 315G 3G 5G 0ms -1G -6G 4G 11ms 2G -1G -24G 6ms 02 Panel Impact Detected
2011/06/21 15:29 15G 3G 5G 0ms 1G 15G 1G 7ms -6G 0G -266G 3ms 02 Panel Impact Detected
2011/06/21 15:29 -249G -7G -21G 0ms -4G -20G -4G 10ms -29G -12G 90G 2ms 01 Panel Impact Detected
2011/06/21 15:29 -16G 9G -1G 0ms -16G 9G -1G 0ms -3G 2G 317G 0ms 02 Panel Impact Detected
2011/06/21 15:29 -223G 14G -8G 0ms -99G 16G -8G 0ms -55G 11G -14G -1ms 02 Panel Impact Detected
2011/06/21 15:29 61G -100G -3G 0ms 60G -104G 3G 1ms -4G 0G 42G 6ms 00
2011/06/21 15:28 100G -33G 0G 0ms 83G -41G 0G 0ms 75G -6G -35G 3ms 01 Panel Impact Detected
(x,y,z) when X is X peak (x,y,z) when Y is Y peak (x,y,z) when Z is Z peak

Date and time Flag
the maximum moment the maximum moment the maximum moment
00: Only log (no warning notice)
01: Log and warning notice
02: Log and warning notice
(two or more warning peaks that exceed the threshold)
*3: How to read the SERegistInfo.txt file is as follows.
001 Lxxxxxx
002 Lxxxxxx
003 Lxxxxxx
004 Wxxxxxx
005 Nxxxxxx
SE SE
reg No. serial
(1-100） ID
018-241-04E
MU-99
 Procedures 4.14 RESTORE
Select the item to be backed up, and then select the location for backup (drive or
folder).  Function
You can select only the drive or the folder recognized by the CL as the location.
Copies the configuration information and the machine-specific data from a desired
Configuration(C)
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
Select the item to be backuped location on the CL (a recording medium or a folder) to the HDD of the MC.
You can restore the following data:
RU IP ADDR
with the RU PC-TOOL, and then

BACKUP RESTORE
click on "EXECUTE". No. Selection item Data to be restored
ALL RUs SETTING
1 CONFIGURATION Configuration file

2 HISTORY LOG Use status statistic file of the FPD
Update the machine-specific data (defect upon shipment,
Select panel number. 3 INDIVIDUAL PANEL DATA sensitivity correction coefficient) of an individual panel by
specifying the panel number.
Click to change
Update the correction data (gain, offset, dot defect 4, 2, 5,
the region to backup. 4 CORRECT PANEL DATA 6, defect upon shipment, sensitivity correction coefficient)
of an individual panel by specifying the panel number.
 NOTE 
The restored data become effective after the RU is restarted.
Only the drives and directries

recognized by the CL are
displayed as regions to which
the data can be backuped.
Select (double-click) the region

to backup.
The selected
location
appears.
DRID600_G0067a.ai
018-241-04E
MU-100
 Procedures 4.15 I/O TRACE EXPERT
Select the item to be restored, and then select the location where the data resides (drive Not used in the machine.
or folder).
You can select only the drive or the folder recognized by the CL as the location.
 INSTRUCTION 
Do not restore the data (file or folder) while selected via the Windows Explorer.
Restore may result in failure, and an error message may appear.
Select the item to be restored

Configuration(C)
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
RU IP ADDR
with the RU PC-TOOL, and then

BACKUP RESTORE
click on "EXECUTE".
ALL RUs SETTING
Select panel number.

Click to change
the region to restore.
Only the drives and directries

recognized by the CL are
displayed as regions to which
the data can be restored.
Select (double-click) the region

to restore.
The selected ex.: When restoring the

location configuration, do not specify
appears. the folder CONFIG, but the
folder one level higher.
DRID600_G0067.ai
018-241-04E
MU-101
4.16 ERROR DB Item name Function
1 “SELECT” button An error log file to be viewed is selected.
 Function
Of the error log files, only "FATAL" errors are
Refers to the error log data and checks the error name and occurrence conditions. 2 “FATAL" button
displayed.
1 2 3 4 5 6 Of the error log files, only "WARNING" errors are

3 “WARNING” button
displayed.
7
Both “FATAL” and “WARNING” errors windows
4 “BOTH” button
are displayed.
5 “CLEAR” button The error log of the FTP server is cleared.
9
Copies the latest error log data from the HDD of
6 “UPDATE” button
11 the MC to the FTP server of the CL.
The contents of the error log file selected are
12 displayed.
8 7 Error message list box Displays the name and occurrence conditions
on the bottom of the window, when selecting the
displayed data.
13
10
8 “Error Code” text box Displays the code of the selected error message.
Displays the name of the selected error
9 “Error Name” text box
message.
Displays the occurrence conditions of the
10 “Meaning” text box
selected error message.
14 15
DRID600_G0068.ai 11 “Details Info.” button Unusable
12 “Analysis Flow” button Unusable
 Procedures
You can keep a note about the selected error
13 “Memo.” text box
message.
(1) Select an RU from "LIST OF EXISTING RU".
The name of the person (author) who entered
14 “Author” text box
(2) Click [ERROR DB]. text in the “Memo.” text box is entered.
→ The “ERROR DB” window appears. The contents of “Memo.” and “Author” are saved.
15 “SAVE” button To delete them, erase them by use of the Delete
(3) Click [UPDATE], and update the error log. key and press the [SAVE] button again.
018-241-04E
MU-102
4.17 UNINSTALL (ALL RUs) 4.18 VERSION UP (ALL RUs)
Uninstall all of the RU software of a machine type recorded in the CD-ROM (RU The entire RU software recorded in the CD-ROM (RU software) inserted into the CL is
software) inserted into the CL. version-updated.
Upon the uninstallation, the folders of the uninstalled RU's are deleted from the FTP
server and the RU’s disappear from "LIST OF EXISTING RU". CAUTIONS
In addition, the contents of "C:\ProgramFiles\FujiFilm\FCR" directory on the CL are
- Never turn OFF the power of the MC during version-update. Otherwise, the
deleted.
contents of the HDD are damaged, and the MC cannot boot up.
 NOTE  - When one or more RU’s are to be version-updated, the RU application
If a plurality of RU’s of the DR-ID 1200 exist, the software and configuration data program is version-updated sequentially for the connected RU’s. Be sure to
for the RU of the DR-ID 1200 are all deleted from the FTP server upon executing check the RU software version of all RU’s after installation, and make sure
UNINSTALL. that version-update is completed.
 Procedures  Procedures
CAUTIONS (1) Select an RU from "LIST OF EXISTING RU".
- Before executing UNINSTALL, be sure to take note of the IP addresses (user (2) Use the [PING] command to check the connection of the machine.
settings) of the RU, CL, and FTP server. Once UNINSTALL is executed, all the
$ {MU:4.5_PING}
user settings are lost.
- For the RU connected to the CL, back up the following files. Those files must (3) Repeat procedures (1) and (2) for all the RU's connected to the CL.
be restored after installation.
- CONFIGURATION (4) Insert the CD-ROM (RU software) into the CL.
- HISTORY LOG
(5) Click [VERSION UP] on ALL RUs SETTING.
(1) Insert the CD-ROM (RU software) into the CL. (6) Click [OK].
(2) Select an RU from "LIST OF EXISTING RU".
(7) Set the version update conditions, and click [OK].
(3) Click [UNINSTALL] on ALL RUs SETTING.
→ The version update of the RU software starts.
→ The Confirmation window appears.
(4) Click [OK]. (8) Click [OK].
→ The version update starts.
(5) Verify that the RU selected in the procedure (2) is deleted from "LIST
OF EXISTING RU." (9) Check that the version update is completed, and press the [Enter] key.
(10) Click [OK].

→ Return to the RU PC-TOOL window.
(11) Check that the version indication in the “LIST OF EXISTING RU” has
changed.
018-241-04E
MU-103
4.19 Configuration  Procedures for Canceling "CDPath"
(1) Select “CDPath” from the [Configuration (C)] menu.
4.19.1 CDPath
→ The “CD PATH SETTING” window appears.
 Function (2) Click [CLEAR].
When the RU software data is copied in the CL or the like, the RU software is installed → The path in the text box is cleared.
by specifying the folder path in which the data is stored.
(3) Click [SET].
 NOTES 
→ The "CDPath" setting is canceled.
- Copy the whole CD-ROM (RU software) data into a single folder when copying the
data into the CL or the like. If it is partially copied or folder configuration is changed,
the installation might fail.
- Make the “CDPath” setting only when installation is to be made from copied data.
If "CDPath" is set, installation from the CD-ROM (RU software) cannot be executed.
 Procedures for Setting "CDPath"

The procedures for copying the complete CD contents to the "Copy CD-R" of the C
drive are described as an example.
(1) Select “CDPath” from the [Configuration (C)] menu.

→ The “CD PATH SETTING” window appears.
(2) Input or select the path of the folder in which the CD-ROM (RU
software) data is completely copied.
(3) Click [SET].
DRID600_G0069.ai
→ “CDPath” is set.
018-241-04E
MU-104
4.20 License (Unlocking the Security Lock)
For MC V14 (PC TOOL V6) or later, the MUTL function is locked. In order to use it, the
security lock needs to be unlocked.
NOTE
An unlocking key file (PCToolSecKey.key) until June 30, 2017 is supplied inside the
application disk.
Subsequent valid files are distributed via ECN every year around April.
(1) Select “Key Regist” from the RU PC-TOOL “License”.

#1 Select: target RU NAME
#2 Select: “License” – “Key Regist.”
RU PC-TOOL window #2
#1
1200_700482.ai
(2) Select “PCToolSecKeykey” inside the application disk drive, and click
[Open].
ID900_J0215.ai
The security lock is unlocked.
018-241-04E
MU-105
5. DR Maintenance Software 
Starting up the DR Maintenance Software
 INSTRUCTION 
 Outline of the DR Maintenance Software Before starting up the DR Maintenance Software, check that the network cable
The DR Maintenance Software is a tool for exclusive use of the service engineer to connections and the network settings are completed.
set and check the RU functional conditions by the operation from the CL. For mobile configurations, check that the FUJIFILM AP is connected.
The “OPERATION” and “INSTALLATION” exist for the DR Maintenance Software. In
this manual each of the functions in the “OPERATION” are explained. (1) Open the Internet Explorer.
 NOTE  DR Maintenance Software starts.
When installing the device, refer to the “INSTALLATION”.  NOTE 

If “DR Maintenance Software” is not displayed, then refer to “■ How to Register
 NOTE  the DR Maintenance Software Home Page”.
The DR Maintenance Software operating environment is as per the following.
- MC application: V15.2 or later (2) Select the “OPERATION” at the upper left corner of the window.
- OS: Windows7 or Windows10
- Web browser: Internet Explorer 11
 NOTE 
If the version of Internet Explorer installed is older than 11, refer the folllowing, and
install Internet Explorer 11.
$ {IN:Appendix 17._Installing the Internet Explorer 11}
1200_400052E.ai
018-241-05E
MU-106
How to Register the DR Maintenance Software Home Page

(1) Click at the upper right side of the window, and click [Internet
options].
1200_700565E.ai
(2) Input the following address in the “Home page” field, and click [OK].
1200_700566E.ai
DR Maintenance Software address is registered to homepage.
018-241-04E
MU-107
 Tree of DR Maintenance Software Tree of Maintenance Utility
Tree of Maintenance Utility $ {5.7_HISTORY}

$ {5.1_UPDATE SOFTWARE} $ {5.7.1_UPRIGHT}
$ {5.1.1_Update MP} $ {5.7.2_TABLE}
$ {5.1.2_Update SE} $ {5.8_LOG}
$ {5.2_PANEL SETTING} $ {5.9_UTILITY}
$ {5.2.1_SE Registration/Deletion} $ {5.9.1_Terminate MC}
$ {5.2.2_SE Wireless Setting} $ {5.9.2_Reboot MC}
$ {5.2.3_LED Color Setting} $ {5.9.3_Force Reboot MC}
$ {5.2.4_Memory Mode Setting} $ {5.9.4_Web Maintenance Status}
$ {5.2.5_D-EVO GL Panel Registration/Deletion} $ {5.9.5_Check PING}
$ {5.3_CONFIG SETTING} $ {5.9.6_Check FTP}
$ {5.3.1_MC Setting} $ {5.9.7_FTP Network Setting (for Active Line)}
$ {5.3.2_RU Image Flag} $ {5.9.8_Force Serial ID Writing}
$ {5.3.3_Wireless Setting} $ {5.9.9_Replace Long Panel RMV Board}
$ {5.3.4_SE Sleep Mode Setting} $ {5.9.10_Update SE CPU (0x0220)}
$ {5.4_CALIBRATION} $ {5.9.11_Update SE FPGA}
$ {5.4.1_SE Calibration} $ {5.9.12_Replace MP}
$ {5.4.2_Long Panel Calibration} $ {5.9.13_LED Color RGB Setting}
$ {5.4.3_Sensitivity Correction Coefficient} $ {5.9.14_Battery Threshold Setting}
$ {5.4.4_GLG Calibration} $ {5.9.15_Force Charge the Battery}
$ {5.4.5_SE Correct Data Transfer} $ {5.10_BACKUP/RESTORE}
$ {5.5_NETWORK SETTING} $ {5.10.1_SE Correct Data Backup/Restore}
$ {5.5.1_Local Network} $ {5.10.2_D-EVO GL Panel Correct Data Backup/Restore}
$ {5.6_CHECK DEVICE STATE} $ {5.10.3_DR-ID 1422SE Correct Data Back up/Restore}
$ {5.6.1_Check Version} $ {5.10.4_Config Setting Backup/Restore}
$ {5.6.2_Check Board Status} $ {5.10.5_HISTORY Backup}
$ {5.6.3_SE Wireless Setting} $ {5.10.6_LOG Backup}
$ {5.6.4_Battery Information}
$ {5.6.5_SE Registration Information}
018-241-05E
MU-108
5.1 UPDATE SOFTWARE 5.1.2 Update SE
The current versions of each SE software are displayed.
5.1.1 Update MP If “Updated Version” is newer, upgrade will be implemented.
The current versions of each MP software are displayed.
If “Updated Version” is newer, upgrade will be implemented.
(1)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5) (2)
(3)
1200_400053E.ai
(1) Click “UPDATE SOFTWARE” - “Update MP”.

The Update MP window opens. (4)
(2) Select the target MP from the drop-down list box.

(3) Click [GET]. (5)
Update MP appears.
(4) Confirm the “Current Version” and the “Updated Version”.
1200_400054E.ai
(5) If “Updated Version” is newer, click [INSTALL]. (1) Click “UPDATE SOFTWARE” - “Update SE”.
The MP software is updated with the updated version. The Update SE window opens.
(2) Select the target SE from the drop-down list box.
(3) Click [GET].
Update SE appears.
(5) If “Updated Version” is newer, click [INSTALL].
All of the target SE software is updated with the updated version.
018-241-04E
MU-109
5.2 PANEL SETTING  SE Deletion
A registered SE can be canceled.
5.2.1 SE Registration/Deletion Used when the SE needs to be replaced.
Used to register the serial ID of the SE, or to cancel a registered SE.  NOTE 
Disconnect the SE cable and remove the battery from the SE before deleting the SE.
 SE Registration Otherwise, the SE cannot be deleted.
Used to register the serial ID of the SE.
(1)
(1)
(2)
(2)
1200_400056E.ai
1200_400051E.ai
(1) Click “PANEL SETTING” - “SE Registration/Deletion”.

(1) Click “PANEL SETTING” - “SE Registration/Deletion”.
The SE Registration/Deletion window opens.
The SE Registration/Deletion window opens.
(2) Click [Del] for the corresponding SE.
(2) Click [Add].
The Panel Deletion window opens.
The Panel Registration window opens.
(3) Click [OK].
(3) Input the serial ID and click [OK].
The SE Registration is deleted.
1200_400055E.ai
The serial ID of the SE is registered.
 NOTE 
The first letter of the serial ID must be entered as a capital letter.
REFERENCE
The serial ID of an SE is mentioned on the surface of the machine-specific data
CDROM.
018-241-04E
MU-110
5.2.2 SE Wireless Setting  Speed Measurement
Use this when the SE country code display, or when measuring the baud rates. Communication rate of the SE connected via the wireless LAN can be measured.
 SE Country Code Display

Display the SE Country Code
(1)
(2)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(3)
1200_400058E.ai
(1) Click “PANEL SETTING” - “SE Wireless Setting”.

The SE Wireless Setting window opens.
1200_400057E.ai

(1) Click “PANEL SETTING” - “SE Wireless Setting”.
The SE Wireless Setting window opens. (3) Click [START] in the “Speed Measurement”.
(2) Select the target SE from the drop-down list box. Measurement of radio wave conditions starts, and SE wireless communication
speed is appears in pop up window.
(3) Click [GET] in the “SE Country Code Display”. (4) Check that the average speed is following status.
The SE Country Code will be displayed. - 14' x 17' size FPD: 5000msec or less
(DR-ID 1201SE, 1211SE, 1271SE (only for designated countries), 1273SE (only
for designated countries))
(DR-ID 1213SE, 1275SE (only for designated countries), 1214SE (10' x 12'
size: only for Japan))
018-241-06A
MU-111
5.2.3 LED Color Setting 5.2.4 Memory Mode Setting
Register the selector color of the SE. Check the memory exposure information, and set the Read Mode for the memory
The following colors can be selected. exposure mode.
White, Pink, Blue, LimeYellow, Purple, Orange
(1)
(1) (2)
(2) (3)
(3)
(4)
(4)
(5)
(4)
1200_400060E.ai
(1) Click “PANEL SETTING” - “Memory Mode Setting”.

1200_400059E.ai The Memory Mode Setting window opens.
(1) Click “PANEL SETTING” - “LED Color Setting”. (2) Select the target SE from the drop-down list box.
The LED Color Setting window opens.
(3) Click [GET].
(2) Select the target SE from the drop-down list box. The memory exposure information will be displayed.
(3) Click [GET]. (4) To change the Read Mode (Read Mode setting), enter the “Updated
The selector color appears. Value”, and click [SET].
(4) Check “Current Value” and “Updated Value”. The Read Mode is registered.
(5) To change the selector color, select from the drop-down list box, and  NOTE 
click [SET]. In the Read Mode (read mode setting), set the Read Mode for memory exposure
The selector color is registered. in addition to the routine exposure.Any of “0”, “1” or “2” can be inputted into [Read
Mode].
 NOTE 
be reflected in the SE after restart.
018-241-04E
MU-112
5.2.5 D-EVO GL Panel Registration/Deletion
 NOTE 
Not used in the DR-XD 1000 system.
018-241-04E
MU-113
5.3 CONFIG SETTING  NOTE 
In accordance with the device usage configuration, the registered RU system If the current values are not displayed, click [Refresh].
configuration information can be checked and changed. THe information whose
settings have been changed is written on the HDD.
1200_400061E.ai
018-241-04E
MU-114
5.3.1 MC Setting (1) Click “CONFIG SETTING” - “MC Setting”.
The MC Setting window opens.
(2) To change the setting values, input the “Updated Value”, and click [SET]
at the bottom of the window.
 NOTE 
(1)
Check that the MC Manager icon has disappeared from the task tray,
and then start the MC Manager from “Start menu” → “Start-up”.
REFERENCE
(2)
1200_400062E.ai
018-241-04E
MU-115
 Setting Items  OPE SETTING (TABLE)
 NOTE 
 MC ID CODE
Check just the SEs shared via multiple MCs when connected to FUJIFILM APs. For DR-XD 1000 system, this setting does not change from the default value.
The “MC_ID_MODE” checks that other MCs are not redundant, and makes changes if
they are redundant. Specifies to which MP the X-ray shot cable corresponding to the operative method [Bed]
of the X-ray equipment is to be connected.
<Options>
 EDIT RU NAME - None: Not connected
Input the RU name. - MP1 [default]: Connected to MP1
 NOTE  - MP2: Connected to MP2
The RU maximum input character count is 15 one-byte characters.
 OPE SETTING (FREE)
 CSL MAC ADDRESS (xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx)  NOTE 

 NOTE 
For DR-XD 1000 system, this setting does not change from the default value. Specifies to which MP the X-ray shot cable corresponding to the operative method
[FREE (general)] of the X-ray equipment is to be connected.
Inputs the MAC address [Default: 00:00:00:00:00:00]. <Options>
 CSL IP ADDRESS (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) - MP1 [default]: Connected to MP1
 NOTE 
 PORT SETTING (UPRIGHT)
Inputs the IP address [Default: 127.0.0.1].  NOTE 
 OPE SETTING (UPRIGHT)
 NOTE  Specifies to which terminal block the X-ray shot cable corresponding to the operative
method [Stand] of the X-ray equipment is to be connected.
For DR-XD 1000 system, this setting does not change from the default value. <Options>
Specifies to which MP the X-ray shot cable corresponding to the operative method
[Stand] of the X-ray equipment is to be connected.
<Options>
- MP1 [default]: Connected to MP1
018-241-04E
MU-116
 PORT SETTING (TABLE)  NUM OF SE (s)
 NOTE  Specifies the number of SEs (FPDs) to be connected concurrently.
<Settable range>
For DR-XD 1000 system, this setting does not change from the default value. - 1: One SE connected
- 2: Two SEs connected
Specifies to which terminal block the X-ray shot cable corresponding to the operative - 3: Three SEs connected
method [Bed] of the X-ray equipment is to be connected.
- 4: Four SEs connected
<Options>
- 5 [default]: Five SEs connected
 TABLE DIRECTION HEAD (for DR-ID 1422SE)

 PORT SETTING (FREE)
Selects the direction of the patient’s head during exposure on the bed.
 NOTE  <Options>
For DR-XD 1000 system, this setting does not change from the default value. - LEFT: Left
- RIGHT [default]: Right
Specifies to which terminal block the X-ray shot cable corresponding to the operative
method [FREE (general)] of the X-ray equipment is to be connected.
 UPRIGHT 180 REVERSE
<Options>
- MPX1 [default]: Connected to MPX1 Selects whether the exposure image of the stand SE (FPD) is to be rotated
- MPX2: Connected to MPX2 180 degrees.
<Options>
- none [default]: Not rotated
 NUM OF MP (s) - 180: Rotated 180 degrees
 NOTE 
In the DR - XD 1000 system, since it has the MP function on the GNC board, this  READ MODE
setting does not change from the default value (1).  NOTE 
Specifies the number of MPs to be connected. Since this is optimized in the DR-XD 1000 system, this setting does not change from
<Settable range> [2:FIXED MODE (1200ms)].
- 0: MP is not connected
- 1 [default]: One MP connected Sets charge accumulation time of the SE (FPD). Eight options are available and are
divided into “fixed modes” and “variable modes”.
- 2: Two MPs connected
- FIXED MODE
Sets constant time irrespective of the X-ray irradiation time specified in each
exposure menu of the CL. Used when the X-ray high voltage generator is not
connected.
- VARIABLE MODE
The reading mode is changed over the FIXED MODE (200 ms), the FIXED MODE
(500 ms) and the FIXED MODE (1200 ms) depending on the X-ray irradiation time
specified in each exposure menu of the CL. Used when the X-ray high voltage
generator is connected.
018-241-04E
MU-117
 INSTRUCTION   Setting with the X-ray high voltage generator connected
If the X-ray irradiation time specified by the customer in the X-ray high voltage Select among variable modes when the X-ray high voltage generator is to be
generator is changed, the change cannot be reflected in the mode setting as the connected.
change is not fed back to the MC before exposure. If the X-ray irradiation time X-ray irradiation Charge
changed by the customer is longer than the charge accumulation time specified in the Option time specified in the accumulation Remarks
MC, the irradiation is terminated upon completion of accumulation, and images with exposure menu time
insufficient dose may result.
200 msec or less 200 msec
Instruct the customer not to set the charge accumulation time longer than specified in Accumulation might terminate during
the mode when the customer is to change the X-ray irradiation time. 3: VARIABLE 201 to 500 msec 500 msec X-ray irradiation (irradiation is forced to
MODE (1.0) terminate at the same time), and might
1200 to 3800 result in images with insufficient dose.
REFERENCE 501 msec or more
msec (*)
You can check the X-ray irradiation time specified in each exposure menu through the 181 msec or less 200 msec
user utility of the CL.
MODE (1.1)
 Settings without the X-ray high voltage generator connected 1200 to 3800
455 msec or more
msec (*)
Select among the fixed modes when the X-ray high voltage generator is not
connected. Ask the customer about the exposure conditions in which the longest 166 msec or less 200 msec
X-ray irradiation time is required when a fixed mode is to be used, and select the 5: VARIABLE 167 to 416 msec 500 msec
mode with a longer charge accumulation time specified than the X-ray irradiation time. Usually select this mode.
MODE (1.2)
1200 to 3800
Charge X-ray 417 msec or more
msec (*)
Option accumulation irradiation Remarks
time time 142 msec or less 200 msec
Select for exposures with low dose or 6: VARIABLE 143 to 357 msec 500 msec
0: FIXED MODE 200 msec
200 msec exposures considering throughputs such as MODE (1.4)
(200 ms) or less
chest mass-screening. 1200 to 3800
358 msec or more
msec (*)
1: FIXED MODE 500 msec
500 msec Usually select this mode.
(500 ms) [default] or less 117 msec or less 200 msec
2: FIXED MODE 1200 to 3800 1200 to 3800 Image quality might degrade for low dose 7: VARIABLE 118 to 294 msec 500 msec
(1200 ms) msec (*) msec exposures. MODE (1.7)
1200 to 3800
295 msec or more
*: Charge accumulation time is set in “MODE2 EXPOSURE TIME”. msec (*)
 NOTE  *: When selecting any of options 3 to 7, enable the X-CON setting in the DX Console, and
With the factory-configured DR-XD 1000 system, “2” is set. set the appropriate value to the irradiation time in the exposure menu.
Example) If “3” is selected, the charge accumulation time becomes 200 msec when the
irradiation time has been set to 190 msec with the exposure menu of the DX Console.
Also, the charge accumulation time becomes 500 msec when the irradiation time has
been set to 300 msec with the exposure menu.
018-241-04E
MU-118
 MODE 2 EXPOSURE TIME  EMERGENCY MODE
 NOTE  Set whether the emergency mode is to be used or not.
<Options>
Since this is optimized in the DR-XD 1000 system, this setting does not change from - OFF [default]: Not used
the default value. - ON: Used
Sets the charge accumulation time of READ MODE 2. Set in a range of 1.2 to 3.8 s. REFERENCE
The setting can be changed in 0.2-s steps. Emergency mode is the mode that the calibration would be stopped automatically and
<Settable range> the exposure would be ready when the system starts.
- 1.2 to 3.8 s [default: 1.2 s] Charge accumulation time of READ MODE 2 When it is set to ON, the exposure would be ready as soon as the system starts.
 NOTE 
For the facilities that may use the machine long time under high temperature, to  BATTERY WARNING[min]
prevent artifact, it is recommended to set the charge accumulation time of READ Sets the threshold value of remaining battery charge.
MODE 2 at or lower than 1.2 seconds. If the remaining battery charge lowers to the set threshold value, exposure cannot be
accepted. The SE LED flashes in this case.
The setting is made as the remaining battery time (minutes).
 AUTO DETECT Always use the setting of 10 [default] in this machine.
<Settable range>
 NOTE  - 0 to 120 minutes [default: 10]
With the DR-XD 1000 system since there are shot signal connections, this does not
change from the default value (OFF).
 SE BATTERY WATCHING (when connecting cables)
Set whether to use the automatic X-ray detection function (AUTO DETECT) or not. Set this option to ON for a configuration, such as the mobile configuration, wired with
<Options> the SE but the battery of which is not charged.
- OFF [default]: Not used Set this to OFF [default] for a configuration including the MP, DS, and PB.
- ON: Used <Options>
- OFF [default]: Not watched
- ON: Watched
 CONNECTING CU
REFERENCE
Set to CONNECTED when the machine is to be connected to the DX Console to
which AcSelarete or CALNEO U/T is connected. This function depends on whether this machine supplies power to the SE.
Usually, use the setting of NOT CONNECTED [default]. - Supply power to and communicate with the SE.
<Options> Irrespective of ON or OFF, the battery is monitored.
- NOT CONNECTED [default] - Supply no power to but communicate with the SE.
- CONNECTED If setting to “OFF”, does not activate monitoring of the battery.
If setting to “ON”, activates monitoring the battery.
018-241-04E
MU-119
 MC-PC EXISTENCE  SHOT GO OFF DELAY TIME
 NOTE  Set a regulatory time to secure a required irradiation time when irradiation does not
continue for a preset time due to any reason such as a delay in communication.
Not used in the DR-XD 1000 system. [default: 0]
REFERENCE
Set the availability of the PC for the MC.
<Options> The X-ray irradiation time is often stopped by a signal from the MP due to
- NOT EXIST [default]: Select this option when no PC is available for the MC. communication delays, which shortens the exposure time. To ensure the irradiation
- EXIST: Select this option when the PC is available for the MC. time, set the SHOTGO OFF DELAY TIME value to around “the shortage of time + 10”
ms.
 A SYNCHRONOUS MC-SHUTDOWN WITH CONSOLE
 NOTE 
 FTP over SSL on MC
This setting item is added in the MC V16.5. Turn ON this only for facilities that have
Set the termination processing queue control of the MC and the Console. enabled the VA security. This setting switches the FTP protocol used in the system to
<Options> the FTP over SSL protocol.
- SYNC [default]: Select this option when no PC is available for the MC. <Options>
- ASYNC: Select this option when the PC is available for the MC. - OFF [default]: For the normal use environment, set this item.
- ON: For the VA security environment, set this item.
 LONG TIME ACCUM MODE

 FTP over SSL on FCR
Set whether long time accumulation mode is to be used or not by selecting “ON” for
“AUTO DETECT” and “OFF” for “EMERGENCY MODE”. This setting item is added in the MC V16.5. Turn ON this only for facilities that have
<Options> enabled the VA security. This setting switches the FTP protocol used in the system to
- OFF [default]: Not used the FTP over SSL protocol.
- ON: Used <Options>
REFERENCE - ON: For the VA security environment, set this item.
- It takes 10 seconds to read the images by setting “ON” to “LONG TIME ACCUM
MODE” only when the specified menus are selected in the DX Console. When the
common menus are selected, the reading time is the one that set by “READ MODE”.  Xair Mode
- When setting “ON” to “LONG TIME ACCUM MODE”, set 7 minutes or more to “SLEEP This setting item is added in the MC V16.6. Turn ON this setting only for facilities that
START TIME” in “SE SLEEP MODE SETTING” window. have enabled the Xair. This setting sets the minimum threshold of the tube current
when detecting X-ray from 10 to 5 mA, and the SmartSwitch mode appropriate for the
low output from the Xair.
<Options>
- ON: Set only at the Xair usage site.
018-241-07E
MU-120
5.3.2 RU Image Flag (1) Click “CONFIG SETTING” - “RU Image Flag”.
The RU Image Flag window opens.
(1)
 NOTE 
(2)
REFERENCE
1200_400064E.ai
018-241-04E
MU-121
 Setting Items  IMAGE LOG SAVE
Selects whether or not the recorded image log is to be stored in the HDD.
 GOS SHARPNESS FILTER Always use the setting of OFF [default] in the machine.
Select the sharpness of the GOS panel (1201SE, 1202SE, 1271SE, 1272SE). <Options>
Select HIGH when a highly sharp image is to be obtained, making use of the features - OFF [default] : Not stored
of DR. - ON: Stored
Select NORMAL when an image with normal sharpness close to the FCR is to be  NOTE 
obtained.
<Options> When set to “ON”, the PC capacity is compressed and the throughput is degraded.
- HIGH [default]: Highly sharp
- NORMAL: Normally sharp
 NOTE   IMAGE LOG SAVE TO FTP
As this setting causes a large change of the image quality, select according to the Selects whether or not the recorded image log is to be stored in the FTP.
desire of the user. Always use the setting of OFF [default] in the machine.
<Options>
REFERENCE - OFF [default] : Not stored
- ON: Stored
This setting does not influence the image quality of the CsI panel (1211SE / 1212SE /
1213SE / 1214SE).  NOTE 
 IMAGE READING MODE

Selects the image compensation processing mode.  OFFSET2 (blemish/unevenness correction setting)
Normally use the default setting. If the noise is generated via image evaluations Select whether or not the blemish/unevenness correction is to be performed.
whereas physical phantoms such as mesh, etc. were used, change to the Standard
Mode. <Options>
<Options> - OFF: Not performed
- Standard Mode - ON [default]: Performed
- High-Speed Mode [default]
 NOTE 
When this setting has been changed, perform the full calibration after restarting the
MC in the following procedure. If not, the image compensation processing mode is not
switched correctly.
1. Change the setting.
2. Restart the MC.
3. Perform the full calibration.
REFERENCE
Even if the noise is generated via image evaluations whereas physical phantoms such
as mesh, etc. were used, this noise is not generated in human body exposures.
018-241-06E
MU-122
 T2 TIMER(sec) 5.3.3 Wireless Setting
Set the start time (sec) of the calibration executed in the background. When the
exposure has been completed, the calibration begins after the time elapsed that was
set.
- Character string: [default: 120]
(1)
 AUTO DEFECT CALIBRATION

Set whether the automatic defect calibration is to be executed or not.
<Options>
- OFF: Not executed
- ON [default]: Executed
(2)
 AUTO DEFECT CALIBRATION START HOURS
When “ON” is selected in “AUTO DEFECT CALIBRATION”, input the automatic
execution time hourly.
 AUTO DEFECT CALIBRATION START MINUTES

When “ON” is selected in “AUTO DEFECT CALIBRATION”, input the automatic 1200_400065E.ai
execution time minutely.

(1) Click “CONFIG SETTING” - “Wireless Setting”.
The Wireless Setting window opens.
 OFFSET JUDGING (2) To change the setting values, input the “Updated Value”, and click [SET]
Select whether or not the blemish/unevenness correction is to be performed. at the bottom of the window.
<Options> The data is written into the HDD.
- OFF: Not performed
 NOTE 
- ON [default]: Performed
REFERENCE
018-241-04E
MU-123
 Setting Items  CHANNEL & MODE
Selects the wireless channel to be used. [default: MO:11N40P & CH:44]
 NOTE  Setting a dual channel with higher communication rate is recommended for the machine.
- Modify this setting if necessary depending on the facility. If the communication rate drops, overlapping channels in the site are possibly present.
- Select the same settings for the AP. Change the setting.
$ {IN1:18.2_Setting the FUJIFILM-made AP} REFERENCE
$ {IN2:18.2_Setting the FUJIFILM-made AP} - For details on setting correspondence table of the wireless channel for EDIT
CONFIGURATION and access point, refer to the following.
 ESSID $ {IN: Appendix 12._Wireless Channel Used for the Access Point}
Sets the network identifier of the wireless LAN for the SE. - When multiple access points are vicinally placed, changing the channel currently used
can prevent decreasing the communication speed due to interferences.
Usually use the setting of FUJIAP01 [default].
- The Auto 20/40 MHz mode changes the band automatically between 20 and 40
When two or more SE’s are to be installed in one installation site, make settings so
MHz. The 40 MHz band can provide faster communication than the 20 MHz band,
that the identifiers of the respective SE’s do not overlap.
but the channel cannot be fixed to the 40MHz band.
Make the same setting of the identifier on the AP.
<Options>
 NOTE 
- FUJIAP01 to FUJIAP10, MANUAL [default: FUJIAP01]
- In accordance with the Radio Law, the W52 and W53 type channels (36, 40, 44,
 NOTE  48, 52, 56, 60 and 64) cannot be used outdoors. If wireless communications are to
With the factory-configured DR-XD 1000 system, “MANUAL” is set. be used outdoors, select a 5 GHz other than the aforementioned channels or a 2.4
GHz. All of the channels can be used indoors.
- When selecting 2.4 GHz on the FUJIFILM-made AP, select 20 MHz on the “Channel
Width”. Do not select 40 MHz.
 ESSID MANUAL (arbitrary ID setting for wireless LAN)
Sets an arbitrary ID in case that “MANUAL” has been selected at “ESSID”.  NOTE 
When two or more SE’s are to be installed in one installation site, make settings so When the W53 or W56 type channel is selected, if interference is detected, then
that the ID's of the respective SE’s do not overlap. Make the same setting of the ID on perform the following workaround operations. This is because avoiding interference
the AP. with the weather radar is required by the DFS (Dynamic Frequency Selection).
- A single-byte text string of 32 characters or less [default: blank] - In order to detect radar waves about one minute before starting the communication
with each channel, the wireless communication cannot be performed during the
 NOTE 
detection.
With the factory-configured DR-XD 1000 system, “FFaQro87” is set. - If radar waves are detected during wireless communications, the wireless
- In case of the FUJIFILM-made AP, the “WSTAT” LED flashes red during the DFS
search operation.
The FUJIFILM-made AP logs that the DFS functioned to alter the channel for check.
For the procedure to check the log, refer to the following.
$ {MT:6._Troubleshooting from FUJIFILMmade AP Log}
018-241-06E
MU-124
 WLAN OUTPUT  BSSID (AP MAC address)
Set whether the wireless LAN output is to be used or not. Input the MAC address of the AP (BSSID) when wireless connection is to be made
<Options> by specifying the AP. Although input is not needed usually, inputting the BSSID is
- OFF: Not used recommended when two or more AP’s are to be used.
- ON [default]: Used The MAC address is mentioned on the label or in the instruction manual of the AP.
<Settable range>
- 12-character string [default: 000000000000]
 WLAN AUTO RATE
 NOTE 
Set whether the wireless LAN transmission rate is constant or varible.
<Options> With the factory-configured DR-XD 1000 system, the MAC address is set for the
- CONSTANT [default] FUJIFILM-made AP which is included.
- VARIABLE
REFERENCE
 ENCRYPTION (encryption yes/no setting)
If the wireless environment is not stable or easily fluctuates, set to “VARIABLE”. If the
wireless environment is stable, use “CONSTANT”. This sets whether wireless communication is to be encrypted or not.
<Options>
• OFF: No encryption
• ENCRYPTION [default]: WPA2-PSK encryption
 COUNTRY CODE (xxxx) • EAP-TLS: EAP-TLS encryption
Since there is wireless communication with SE, inputting the country code according REFERENCE
to the country where it used is required.
- When selecting “ENCRYPTION”, a separate encryption setting on the AP side is
- 4-character string or less [default: 4036] also required.
 NOTE  Encryption method: AES
Authentication method: WPA2-PSK (Wi-Fi Protected Access 2 Pre Shared Key)
- Change the country code for the countries where SE is used.
- When SE is shared by multiple systems, the encryption settings in the SE are
China: 156 rewritten by connecting the SE once to the SE cable of the movement destination.
Taiwan: 158
- For MC V2.2 or later, input “4036”.
018-241-04E
MU-125
 ENCRYPTION KEY (encryption key)
Enter the text string (pass phrase) for generation of the encryption key for wireless
communication.
<Setting range>
A single-byte text string of 8 to 63 characters [default: fujifilm]
 NOTE 
With the factory-configured DR-XD 1000 system, “fujifilm34” is set.
REFERENCE
- The pass phrase entered for this item also must be set on the AP side.
- This unit is not compatible with the pass phrase automatic change function (only
manual setting is possible).
 FIPS MODE (encryption setting for image transfer)

This sets whether FIPS MODE is to be used or not.
<Options>
• OFF [default]: Not used
• ON: Used
REFERENCE
Image transfer is to be encrypted only for wireless communications.
018-241-04E
MU-126
5.3.4 SE Sleep Mode Setting  Setting Items
 SE SLEEP MODE
Set the SE sleep mode.
<Options>
(1) - OFF: Disable the power save mode.
- ON [default]: Enable the power save mode.
(2)  SLEEP START TIME (min)

Set the time in minutes units until when the power save mode is started.
<Setting range>
- 2 to 10 [default: 2]
1200_400066E.ai
REFERENCE
(1) Click “CONFIG SETTING” - “SE Sleep Mode Setting”. Shift to the sleep mode mainly in the following cases.
The SE Sleep Mode Setting window opens. - After completing the initialization calibration
- After completing the exposure
(2) To change the setting values, input the “Updated Value”, and click [SET] - After cancelling the exposure
at the bottom of the window. - After switching the panel by changing the selector for the DX Console
The data is written into the HDD. - After completing the automatic offset update
 NOTE  - After completing the periodical defect calibration
- After completing the automatic log update
(3) Left-click the MC Manager from the task tray and execute “EXIT”.  EXTRA SLEEP START TIME (min)
Check that the MC Manager icon has disappeared from the task tray, Set the time in minutes units until when the extra sleep mode is started.
and then start the MC Manager from “Start menu” → “Start-up”. <Setting range>
REFERENCE - 2 to 999 [default: 999]
REFERENCE
- After all the SEs shift to the sleep mode and past the set time by this setting, shift to
the extra sleep mode.
- When set to “999”, do not shift to the extra sleep mode.
018-241-04E
MU-127
5.4 CALIBRATION
5.4.1 SE Calibration
Used to make the following calibration on the SE.
(1)
Refer to the Installation manual for the detailed procedures.
$ {IN1:27._Calibration} (2)
- Offset Calibration
- Gain Calibration
- Defect Calibration
- Lag Calibration
 INSTRUCTION 
Check to make sure that background calibration (which takes place automatically (3)
when the MC is started) is completed before carrying out the following calibration.
The image correction data cannot be correctly performed if the calibration takes place
while the background calibration is in progress.
- Offset Calibration
- Gain Calibration
- Defect Calibration
- Lag Calibration
You can check whether background calibration is completed on the status lamp
“READY” of the SE
- While background calibration is in progress:
“READY” is flashing. 1200_400067E.ai
- While background calibration is not carried out: (1) Click “CALIBRATION” - “SE Calibration”.
“READY” is unlit.
The SE Calibration window opens.
 NOTE  (2) Select the target SE from the drop-down list box.
When performing the calibration with the FIPS MODE set to “ON” in the CONFIG (3) Implement each calibration.
SETTING, a warning message is displayed to indicate that the data transfer rate is
slow. Set the FIPS MODE to “OFF” or perform the calibration after wire-line connecting
the SE.
018-241-04E
MU-128
 Offset Calibration (1) Click [START].
The offset correction data generation images (4 frames) are read out from the SE
Carries out offset calibration.
(FPD).
No exposure is made during offset calibration. If the offset correction data is generated and stored in the HDD, “Succeeded”is
REFERENCE displayed on the pop up window.
The offset calibration takes place for all of connected SE’s.  NOTE 
Clicking [START] during automatic offset update (approximately 30 seconds
every 10 minutes), “Error 12700 currently unavailable” is displayed. Again click
[START] approx. 30 seconds later in this case.
REFERENCE
Whether the diagnosis is successfully completed appears on the result display
area.
An error code is displayed in some cases. Refer to the Troubleshooting manual
and take appropriate countermeasures.
(1)
(2) Click [OK].
1200_400069E.ai
018-241-04E
MU-129
 Gain Calibration (1) Select the target operative method from the drop-down list box.
Carries out gain calibration. (2) Click [START].
- Exposure count: 16 If the exposing preparations are finished, then [Ready] will be displayed on the
green button in the pop up window.
 NOTE 
REFERENCE
Whether the calibration is successfully completed appears after completion.
(1)
(2)  NOTE 
If “NOT_READY” is displayed, reimplement after about a 5 second interval, and
after “READY” is displayed, then proceed to the next step (exposing). If exposing
is performed during a “NOT_READY” state, the calibration will fail, and abnormal
images will be generated.
(3) Expose 16 times with the following condition. Confirm that [Ready]
lights with the green button at each exposure.
 NOTE 
Perform the next exposure every time after [Ready] is lit up with the green button
because the [Ready] disappears every exposure.
1200_400070E.ai
- Exposure conditions (DR-ID 1200 series SE, DR-ID1270 series SE): Tube
voltage of 75 kV, dose of 10 mR
The gain correction data generation images (16 frames) are read out from the SE
(FPD).
 INSTRUCTION 
Set the exposure time to 200 msec or less. Exposure for longer than 200 msec
cannot be made, since the maximum exposure time is inherently specified as
200 msec.
018-241-06E
MU-130
When the gain correction data is automatically generated and stored in the HDD,  Defect Calibration
“Succeeded” appears after completion.
Carries out defect calibration.
 NOTE  - Exposure count: 5
If “NG” appeared, check the following.
- Exposure condition
- Exposure field is the entire SE.
 NOTE 
If the calibration failed, restart the MC.
(4) Click [OK].
(1)
(2)
1200_400071E.ai
018-241-04E
MU-131
(1) Select the target operative method from the drop-down list box. When the defect correction data is automatically generated and stored in the HDD,
(2) Click [START].
If the exposing preparations are finished, then “OK” will be displayed in the  NOTE 
results display area. If “NG” appeared, check the following.
 NOTE  - Exposure condition
[START] approx. 30 seconds later in this case. (4) Click [OK].
REFERENCE
If the exposing preparations are finished, then [Ready] will be displayed on the
green button in the pop up window.
(3) Expose 5 times with the following condition.
 NOTE 
Exposure conditions: dose of 5 mR (75 kV, 1 mAs, SID = 100 cm)

The defect calibration correction data generation images (5 frames) are read out
from the SE (FPD).
 INSTRUCTION 
200 msec.
 NOTE 
When performing defect calibration, make sure to have the exposure conditions
such as the correct dose setting (kV, mA, msec, SID) for defect correction
calibration.
If defect correction calibration is performed by using the exposure conditions for
gain correction, a defect is expanded and its size cannot be detected correctly.
As a result, because the number of the defects becomes an erroneous value and
the defect size is increased more than expected, a calibration error may occur.
018-241-04E
MU-132
 Lag Calibration (1) Select the target operative method from the drop-down list box.
Carries out lag calibration. (2) Click [START].
- Exposure count: 1
 NOTE 
REFERENCE
After about 2 minutes, the [Ready] button will be displayed in green in the pop up
window.
 NOTE 
If you perform exposure before [Ready] is lit up with the green button, calibration
will fail and create an abnormal image.
(3) Expose 1 time with the following condition.

Exposure conditions: dose of 40 mR (100 kV, 5 mAs, SID = 100 cm)
(1) Images for lag correction data generation (7 frames) are read from the SE (FPD).
Images of seven frames are read with a predetermined interval for one exposure.
(2) The number of image reads is displayed in the format of “n/7”.
 INSTRUCTION 
1200_400072E.ai
200 msec.
018-241-04E
MU-133
 NOTE  5.4.2 Long Panel Calibration
- In the beginning when afterimage calibration is implemented, record the  NOTE 
exposing conditions, and subsequently be sure to expose with the same
conditions. Not used in the DR-XD 1000 system.
This is for comparing the afterimage amounts over time, so that SE (FPD)
degradation analysis can be done in advance.
- If 100mR or greater irradiating cannot be performed via conditions with a
80kV tube voltage, and maximum irradiating times of 200 ms, then close the
distance between the X-ray tube and the panel as much as possible (to the
limit whereas the entire panel will be irradiated by the X-rays).
Nevertheless, if 100mR or greater irradiating cannot be performed, raise the
tube voltage up to 100kV. With these conditions, if the irradiating is 20mR or
greater, implement the afterimage correction calibrating.
If the aforementioned conditions do not reach 20mR or greater, the afterimage
correction calibrating needs to be implemented via another X-ray device.
When the log correction data is automatically generated and stored in the HDD,
 NOTE 
(4) Click [OK].
018-241-04E
MU-134
5.4.3 Sensitivity Correction Coefficient 5.4.4 GLG Calibration
It is used when selecting the target SE and changing the sensitivity correction Zero point adjustment for the high G sensor (3 directions) is performed. GLG
coefficient. calibration must be performed at the time of replacement of the GLG board.
(1) (1)
(2) (2)
(3)
(3)
(4)
(4)
1200_400074E.ai
(1) Click “CALIBRATION” - “GLG Calibration”.

The GLG Calibration window opens.
(3) Click [START].
1200_400073E.ai If it is successful the high G sensor 0G output will be acquired, “Succeeded”
(1) Click “CALIBRATION” - “Sensitivity Correction Coefficient”. appears in the pop up window.
The Sensitivity Correction Coefficient window opens. (4) Click [OK].
(2) Select the target SE from the drop-down list box. The offset value is stored in the FRAM of the GLG board (restart is not required).
REFERENCE
(3) Click [GET].
The Sensitivity Correction Coefficient are displayed. After execution of calibration, the actually measured value min us the offset value
is stored in the log as the measured value.
(4) When making changes, input them in “Updated Value”, and click [SET].
The SE software will be updated with the updated version.
018-241-04E
MU-135
5.4.5 SE Correct Data Transfer  SE Correct Data Forced Transfer
It is used to confirm or set the SE correct data. Transfer the SE correct data retained by the MC to the SE.
- SE Correct Data Forced Transfer
 INSTRUCTION 
- SE Correct Data Save Status
- SE Correct Data Status (Memory) After forcing the transfer of the SE correct data, perform “ SE Correct Data Forced
- SE Correct Data Status (FLASH) Transfer” to check the correction data status.
(1)
(2)
(1)
(3)
1200_400076E.ai
(1) Click [START].

“Succeeded” appears in the pop up window after finishing transfer.
(2) Click [OK].
1200_400075E.ai
(1) Click “CALIBRATION” - “SE Correct Data Transfer”.

The SE Correct Data Transfer window opens.
(3) Implement the correction data processing.
018-241-04E
MU-136
 SE Correct Data Save Status  SE Correct Data Status (Memory)
After finishing the full calibration or the SE correct data transfer, check whether the Check the list of correct data stored by the memory in the SE.
correction data storage has been completed or not.
(1)
(1)
(2)
(2)
1200_400078E.ai
(1) Click [GET].

The list of correct data is displayed.
(2) Confirm the list of correct data.
1200_400077E.ai
(1) Click [GET].

The correct data save status is displayed.
(2) Confirm the correct data save status.
018-241-04E
MU-137
REFERENCE  Correct Data Status (FLASH)
- There is no problem if the list of correct data is displayed as shown below. Check the list of correct data stored in the FLASH of SE.
In addition, the display of the “Mode3OffsetDataAvailable” -
“Mode6OffsetDataAvailable” and “Mode3InitialCalibrationCompleted” depends on
the setting for the LONG TIME ACCUM MODE. Therefore, there is no problem if “NG”
is displayed.
GainDataAvailable :true
SensitivityDataAvailable :true
LagDataAvailable :true
Mode0OffsetDataAvailable :true
(1)
DotDefectDataAvailable :true (2)
LineDefectDataAvailable :true
InitialCalibrationCompleted :true
Mode3InitialCalibrationCompleted :true
- If the initialization calibration has not been completed, “false” is displayed.
1200_400079E.ai
(1) Click [GET].

The list of FLASH correct data is displayed.
(2) Confirm the list of correction data’s (FLASH) saving conditions.
018-241-04E
MU-138
5.5 NETWORK SETTING  MC ETH0 and MC ETH1
Used to set and check the IP addresses and to measure wireless communication rate. MC/CSL ETH0 indicates the network setting between the CSL PC and Hospital
network, and MC/CSL ETH1 indicates the network setting between the CSL PC and
 INSTRUCTION  GNC board.
Execute the CSL PC-GNC board communications in between the MC applications on
The segment No. of the network address must be set to the same value among the the CSL computer and the MP applications on the GNC board.
MC, MP, SE and AP. If different network address values are set, the network among The connection diagram of the GNC (MP)/CSL PC (MC) and default IP addresses are
the machines might get disconnected. Initialization of the machines might be needed shown below.
in such a case.
How far in the IP address the network address indicates depends on the setting of the MP MC CL
subnet mask. The default value of the subnet mask of the machine is 255.255.255.0,
and locations assigned by 255 (mask value areas) indicate the network address.
ETH1
Segment No. 192.168.0.20 192.168.0.10
192.168.0.0 ETH0
172.16.1.10 172.16.1.20
Network address
DRID600_G00091.ai
Host address
REFERENCE
DRID600_G0070.ai
The previous network configuration (#**174 or earlier) is as below:

GNC board (MP) FUJIFILM-made AP CSL PC (MC)
MP
192.168.0.20 192.168.0.25 192.168.0.10
LAN LAN
ETH1 ETH0
LAN LAN 172.16.1.20
POCX010404002J.ai
018-241-07E
MU-139
5.5.1 Local Network (1) Click [NETWORK SETTING].
Input the set value when the IP address of the local network is to be changed. To The NETWORK SETTING window opens.
make the changed set value effective, the set value needs to be enabled (setting (2) If the Network Address Field and the MC Subnet Mask are to be changed,
executed) respectively for the SE, MP and MC. change the input values.
In order to activate the changed setting values, the respective SEs, MPs, and
CAUTION
MCs need to be activated (settings implemented).
Enable the set value in the order of the SE, MP , AP and MC to make them (3) Implement the network settings pertaining to the respective SEs, MPs,
effective. If a wrong order is taken, the setting does not get effective, and might and MCs.
result in need of initializing the machine.
 NOTE 
 INSTRUCTION  After setting, implement “■ Restarting the config and checking the setting
effected”.
access point (AP) must be changed to include the same segment No. If the network
address of the access point differs, wireless connection of the SE cannot be made.
(1)
(2)
(3)
1200_400111E.ai
018-241-04E
MU-140
 SE Network Setting (1) Click “NETWORK SETTING” - “SE Network Setting”.
The SE Network Setting window opens.
Set the SE’s IP address.
CAUTION
(3) Click [GET].
Enable the set value in the order of the SE, MP, AP and MC to make them The IP Address of the SE (wired wireless) are displayed.
effective. If a wrong order is taken, the setting does not get effective, and might
result in need of initializing the machine. (4) When making changes, input them in “Updated Value”, and click [SET].
The IP Address of the SE will be updated.
<Enabling the set value (SE)> (5) Remove the battery pack from the SE.
 INSTRUCTION  (6) Disconnect the SE cable from the SE.
Connect only one SE when enabling the set value (SE). Otherwise, the SE whose IP (7) If an unspecified SE exists, repeat procedures (2) to (6).
address is changed cannot be identified, and might result in need of initializing the SE.
(8) Reinstall the SE cable and battery pack on the SE whose setting has
been completed.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(4)
1200_400112E.ai
018-241-04E
MU-141
 MP Network Setting (1) Click “NETWORK SETTING” - “MP Network Setting”.
The MP Network Setting window opens.
 Changing the MP IP Address (Preset)
Set the MP’s IP address. (2) When making changes, input them in “Updated Value”, and click [SET].
The IP Address of the MP will be updated.
CAUTION
Enable the set value in the order of the SE, MP and MC to make them effective.
If a wrong order is taken, the setting does not get effective, and might result in (4) Left-click the MC Manager from the task tray and execute “EXIT”.
need of initializing the machine. Check that the MC Manager icon has disappeared from the task tray,
(1)
(2)
1200_400113E.ai
018-241-04E
MU-142
 Changing the MP’s IP addresses (MP2 settings) (7) Left-click the MC Manager from the task tray and execute “EXIT”.
If two MPs are going to be connected, change and set MP1 as MP2. Check that the MC Manager icon has disappeared from the task tray,
(3) REFERENCE
The relationship between the target MP and “Select MP whose destination is to
be changed.” radio button is mentioned below.
● Target MP: MP1
- Setting for MP1
Set the IP address of the MP1 as the MP1 value input in “Changing the MP IP
Address (Preset)”.
- Setting for MP2
The MP2 value input in “Changing the MP IP Address (Preset)” gets effective.
● Target MP: MP2
- Setting for MP1
(4)
Change the MP set as the MP2 to the MP1.
(4) Not in use usually.
(5) - Setting for MP2
Change the IP address of the MP2.
1200_400170E.ai Set the IP address of the MP2 to the MP2 value input in “Changing the MP IP
(1) Turn OFF the power of the first MP.
(2) Turn ON the power of the second MP.
(3) Click “NETWORK SETTING” - “MP Network Setting”.

The MP Network Setting window opens.
(4) Select “MP1” from the drop-down list box, and click [Re-acquire
connected MP].
(5) Select “Setting for MP2”, and click [SET].

The MP2 IP address which was input via “Changing the MP’s IP addresses
(presets)” will be enabled, and at the same time MP1 will be set as MP2.
018-241-04E
MU-143
 MC ETH1 Network Setting  Restarting the config and checking the setting effected
Set the following MC addresses.
- IP Address (Default: 192.168.0.10)
- Subnet Mask (Default: 255.255.255.0)
(4)
CAUTION (5)
Enable the set value in the order of the SE, MP and MC to make them effective. (6)
If a wrong order is taken, the setting does not get effective, and might result in
need of initializing the machine.
(1)
1200_400115E.ai
(1) Turn OFF the power in the order named of the CL, MC and MP.
(2) (3) Start up the MUTL.
(4) Click [NETWORK SETTING] and click [SE Network Setting].
(2) The SE Network Setting window opens.
1200_400114E.ai (6) Click [GET].
(1) Click “NETWORK SETTING” - “MC ETH1 Network Setting”. Check that the IP address of the SE has been changed.
The MC ETH1 Network Setting window opens. REFERENCE
(2) To change the addresses, enter the “Updated Value”, and click [SET]. If you confirm the IP address of the SE, you can determine that the change in
The IP Address of the MC will be updated. settings of the MP and the MC normally ends. This is because connection of
the SE can be confirmed only when connection between the MC and the MP is
normal.
018-241-04E
MU-144
5.6 CHECK DEVICE STATE  Check MP Version
5.6.1 Check Version

Check the version in MC, MP, SE.
 Check MC Version
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(2)
(1)
1200_400081E.ai
(1) Click “CHECK DEVICE STATE” - “Check Version”.

The Check Version window opens.
(2) Select the target MP in “Check MP Version” from the drop-down list
1200_400080E.ai box.
(1) Click “CHECK DEVICE STATE” - “Check Version”. (3) Click [GET].
The Check Version window opens. The MP Version are displayed.
(2) Check the version in “Check MC Version”. (4) Confirm the “Current Version”.
018-241-04E
MU-145
 Check SE Version 5.6.2 Check Board Status
Check the MP and SE board conditions. In addition, implement the settings when the
battery was first used, and run a GLG board self-diagnostic.
(1)
 Check MP Board Status
(2)
(3)
(4) (1)
(2)
(3)
1200_400082E.ai
(1) Click “CHECK DEVICE STATE” - “Check Version”.

The Check Version window opens.
(2) Select the target SE in “Check SE Version” from the drop-down list
box.
(3) Click [GET]. 1200_400083E.ai
The SE Version are displayed. (1) Click “CHECK DEVICE STATE” - “Check Board Status”.
The Check Board Status window opens.
(4) Confirm the “Current Version”.
(2) Select the target MP in “Check MP Board Status” from the drop-down
list box.
018-241-04E
MU-146
(3) Click [GET]. - RemoteSW Status:
The MP board status will be displayed in the pop up window. The ON/OFF status of the remote switch appears.
ON: true
OFF: false
- MPX1 Shot Switch 1st Step Status:
The ON/OFF status of the MPX1 shot switch port 1 appears.
Shot Switch 1st: is ON: true
Shot Switch 1st is OFF: false
- MPX1 Shot Switch 2nd Step Status:
Shot Switch 2nd is ON: true
Shot Switch 2nd is OFF: false
- MPX2 Shot Switch 1st Step Status:
Shot Switch 1st: is ON: true
Shot Switch 1st is OFF: false
- MPX2 Shot Switch 2nd Step Status:
1200_700554E.ai Shot Switch 2nd is ON: true
Shot Switch 2nd is OFF: false
- Fuse Status:
The status of the fuse connected with the MP board appears.
(4) Check the board states, and click [Cancel].
Normal: MPX Board Fuse Status: true, SE1 Fuse Status: true,
SE2 Fuse Status : true
Defective: Other than above.
- Connector Status:
The status of the connector connected with the MP board appears.
Normal: MPX Board Connector Status : true
SE1 Connector Status : true
(when connected with the MPC board’s MPC6 connector cable)
SE2 Connector Status : true
(when connected with the MPC board’s MPC7 connector cable)
- Fan Status:
The status of the fan connected with the MP board appears.
Normal: Fan Status: true
018-241-04E
MU-147
 Check SE Board Status (3) Click [GET].
The SE board conditions will be displayed in the pop up window.
(1)
(2)
(3)
1200_400085E.ai
(1) Click “CHECK DEVICE STATE” - “Check Board Status”.

(2) Select the target SE in “Check SE Board Status” - “Board Status” from 1200_400088E.ai
the drop-down list box. - Board Status

Acquires the board conditions in the SE, and displays the contents.
Normal: Hardware Status : true
Configuration Status : true
Battery Status : true (when there is a battery)
MCU Status : true
SDCard Status : true
- Temperature
Displays the temperature of the stand SE.
Display example: Temperature = 29.4 deg C
018-241-04E
MU-148
- SE Button Status  Battery Start Date Setting
Displays the button status of the SE.
Set the start date for battery use.
Normal: Extra Sleep Button Status: true or false
Accurate display of the battery capacity becomes possible by performing “Battery
Memory Image Button Status: true or false
Start Date Setting”.
- Battery
Displays the following information on the battery
Battery ID: 0 to 65535
Manufacture Date:YYYY/MM/DD
Insert Withdraw Count:0 to 65535
Temperature:0 to 65535[0.1K]
Status:0xXXXX
Cycle Count:0 to 65535
First Use:
(1)
First Use Date:YYYY/MM/DD
(4) Check the board state, and click [Cancel].

(2)
(3)
1200_400086E.ai

(2) Select the target SE in “Check SE Board Status”-“Battery Start Date
Setting” from the drop-down list box.
(3) Click [SET].
If the battery usage start day has been set, and it is successful, a pop up window
displaying “Succeeded” will pop up.
(4) Click [OK].
018-241-04E
MU-149
 GLG Board Self-diagnostic (3) Click [START].
The following tests are performed for the GLG board, and the results (Succeeded/ If the GLG board self-diagnostic has been started, and it is successful, a pop up
Failed) are displayed in the result display area. window displaying “Succeeded” will pop up.
- Memory check (writing of data to and reading of data from FRAM and RAM) (4) Click [OK].
- Data acquisition from RTC
- Low G sensor data setting and data acquisition
- AD converter diagnosis
- Reading of set data
REFERENCE
Self-diagnostic of the GLG board is performed also at the time of equipment start.
(1)
(2)
(3)
1200_400087E.ai

(2) Select the target SE in “Check SE Board Status”-“GLG Board Self-
diagnostic” from the drop-down list box.
018-241-04E
MU-150
5.6.3 SE Wireless Setting (3) Click [START] in the “Speed Measurement”.
Communication rate of the SE connected via the wireless LAN can be measured. The wireless signal state measuring begins, and the SE wireless communications
speed is displayed in a pop up window. The measuring finishes after about one
REFERENCE minute.
The details which are to be measured via “Panel settings” – “SE wireless settings” are
the same.
(1)
(2)
1200_400091E.ai
(4) Check that the average speed is following status, and click [OK].
(3) for designated countries))
1200_400090E.ai
(DR-ID 1213SE, 1275SE (only for designated countries), 1214SE (10' x 12'
size: only for Japan))
(1) Click “CHECK DEVICE STATE” - “SE Wireless Setting”. - 17' x 17' size FPD: 6000msec or less
The SE Wireless Setting window opens. (DR-ID 1202SE, 1212SE, 1272SE (only for designated countries), 1274SE (only
018-241-06A
MU-151
5.6.4 Battery Information 5.6.5 SE Registration Information
Check the battery serial no. In addition, the battery serial no. can be deleted. Check the serial ID and IP address of the SE
(1)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(2)
1200_400092E.ai
(1) Click “CHECK DEVICE STATE” - “Battery Information”.

The Battery Information window opens.
(2) Click [GET].
1200_400093E.ai
Serial No. of the batteries are displayed. (1) Click “CHECK DEVICE STATE” - “SE Registration Information”.
The SE Registration Information window opens.
(3) To delete the battery serial no., click [–], and click the [OK] in the pop
up window. (2) Click [GET].
Serial No. of the batteries are deleted. The registered serial ID and IP address of the SE are displayed.
018-241-04E
MU-152
5.7 HISTORY (3) If the history is to be deleted, click [DELETE], and click [OK] in the pop
up window.
Display and edit statistical information pertaining to the SE exposing history. The history will be deleted.
(1)
(2)
(3)
1200_400094E.ai
 INSTRUCTION 
After exiting the DX Console application, perform the following procedure.
(1) Click “HISTORY”.

The HISTORY window opens.
(2) To confirm and make changes to the following information, input the
“Updated Value”, and click [SET] at the bottom of the screen.
Item Function
Start Date Date when the RU software is installed
The information will be changed.
 INSTRUCTION 
To fix the “Start Date” input values, click [SET] at the bottom of the screen, and
the MC Manager needs to be restarted.
018-241-04E
MU-153
5.7.1 UPRIGHT  INSTRUCTION 
Display and edit statistical information pertaining to the SE(Upright) exposing history. After exiting the DX Console application, perform the following procedure.
(1) (1) Click “HISTORY” - “UPRIGHT”.

The UPRIGHT window opens.
“Updated Value”, and click [SET] at the bottom of the window.
Item Function
Exposure Count Exposure count
Panel Reading Count Panel reading count (exposure count + calibration)

(Exposure Count + Calibration)
Full Dose Total dose of exposures
Dose Distribution (mAs) following ranges.
<1, 1-3, 3-10, 10-30, 30-100, 100<
Time Distribution (s) following ranges.
<5, 5-15, 15-30, 30-300, 300-600, 600<
(2) Tube Voltage Distribution (kV) following ranges.
<50, 50-70, 70-90, 90-110, 110-130, 130<
Shot Panel Temperature
following ranges.
Distribution (degrees)
<20, 20-23, 23-26, 26-28, 28-30, 30<

(3) If the history is to be deleted, click [DELETE], and click [OK] in the pop
up window.
The history is deleted.
1200_400096E.ai
018-241-04E
MU-154
5.7.2 TABLE  INSTRUCTION 
Display and edit statistical information pertaining to the SE(Table) exposing history. After exiting the DX Console application, perform the following procedure.
(1) Click “HISTORY” - “TABLE”.

(1) The TABLE window opens.
“Updated Value”, and click [SET] at the bottom of the window.
Item Function
Exposure Count Exposure count
Panel Reading Count Panel reading count (exposure count + calibration)

(Exposure Count + Calibration)
Full Dose Total dose of exposures
Dose Distribution (mAs) following ranges.
<1, 1-3, 3-10, 10-30, 30-100, 100<
Time Distribution (s) following ranges.
<5, 5-15, 15-30, 30-300, 300-600, 600<
Tube Voltage Distribution (kV) following ranges.
<50, 50-70, 70-90, 90-110, 110-130, 130<
(2) Displays the exposure count for each of the
Shot Panel Temperature
following ranges.
Distribution (degrees)
<20, 20-23, 23-26, 26-28, 28-30, 30<

(3) If the history is to be deleted, click [DELETE], and click [OK] in the pop
up window.
The history is deleted.
1200_400097E.ai
018-241-04E
MU-155
5.8 LOG
Refer to the log data, and check the error names and generation conditions.
(1)
(2)
1200_400095E.ai
(1) Click “LOG”.

The Log window opens.
(2) Click [Refresh] to update the Log.
The latest log data is displayed.
(3) If the log history is to be deleted, click [DELETE] at the bottom of the
window, and click [OK] in the pop up window.
The log history will be deleted.
018-241-04E
MU-156
5.9 UTILITY 5.9.1 Terminate MC
Implement the following utility functions in the maintenance software. Shut down the MC PC in the environments that have MC PC.
- Terminate MC  INSTRUCTION 
- Reboot MC
This function is deactivated in the configuration installing the MC application in the DX
- Force Reboot MC Console.
- Web Maintenance Status
- Check PING
- Check FTP
- FTP Network Setting (Log FTP destination address)
- Force Serial ID Writing
- Replace Long Panel RMV Board
- Update SE CPU (0x0220) (2)
- Replace MP
- LED Color RGB Setting
- Battery Threshold Setting
- Force Charge the Battery (1)
1200_400098E.ai
(1) Click “UTILITY” - “Terminate MC”.

The Terminate MC window opens.
(2) Click [START].
If the MC computers are shut down, and it is successful, a pop up window displaying
“Succeeded” will pop up.
(3) Click [OK].
018-241-05E
MU-157
5.9.2 Reboot MC 5.9.3 Force Reboot MC
Shut down the MC PC in the environments that have MC PC. Reboot the MC Manager.
 INSTRUCTION 
This function is deactivated in the configuration installing the MC application in the DX
Console.
(1)
(2)
(2)
(1)
1200_400100E.ai
(1) Click “UTILITY” - “Terminate MC”.

The Terminate MC window opens.
(2) Click [START] in the “Force Reboot MC”.
1200_400099E.ai
Reboot the MC Manager, and if it succeeds, “Succeeded” will be displayed in the
(1) Click “UTILITY” - “Terminate MC”. pop up window.
The Terminate MC window opens. (3) Click [OK].
(2) Click [START] in the “Reboot MC”.
Reboot the PC.
018-241-04E
MU-158
5.9.4 Web Maintenance Status 5.9.5 Check PING
Check the Web Maintenance Tool versions. Implement a communications check via PING.
(2) (2)
(2)
(1) (1)
1200_400101E.ai 1200_400102E.ai
(1) Click “UTILITY” - “Web Maintenance Status”. (1) Click “UTILITY” - “Check PING”.
The Web Maintenance Status window opens. The Check PING window opens.
(2) Click [GET]. (2) Input the connection confirmation IP address, and click [START].
The Web Maintenance Tool versions appears. PING is implemented, and the confirmation results are displayed in the pop up
window.
1200_400103E.ai
 NOTE 
If the communications verification is normal, “Succeeded” will be displayed.
When it fails, since “Failed” will be displayed, check the network connections.
(3) Click [OK].
018-241-04E
MU-159
5.9.6 Check FTP 5.9.7 FTP Network Setting (Log FTP Destination Address)
Access the FTP server from the CSL-PC, and check whether or not the FTP server is Implement the FTP server network settings.
operating.
 INSTRUCTION 
Also, access the FTP server from the RU, and check whether or not the FTP server is
operating. This is the log forwarding IP address setting. With the DR-XD 1000 system, this does
not change from the default value.
Default value: 127.0.0.1
(2)
(2)
(1) (2)
(1)
1200_400104E.ai
(1) Click “UTILITY” - “Check FTP”. 1200_400106E.ai
The Check FTP window opens. (1) Click “UTILITY” - “FTP Network Setting (Log FTP destination
(2) Click [START]. address)”.
The confirmation results are displayed in the pop up window. The FTP Network Setting (Log FTP destination address) window opens.
1200_400105E.ai
(3) Click [OK].
018-241-04E
MU-160
5.9.8 Force Serial ID Writing 5.9.9 Replace Long Panel RMV Board
Implement SE's serial ID forced writing.  NOTE 
Not used in the DR-XD 1000 system.
(2)
(2)
(1)
1200_400107E.ai
(1) Click “UTILITY” - “Force Serial ID Writing”.

The Force Serial ID Writing window opens.
(2) Input the new SE serial ID, and click [SET].
The force serial ID writing will be implemented, and the implemented results are
displayed in the pop up window.
(3) Click [OK].
(4) Reboot the SE.
018-241-04E
MU-161
5.9.10 Update SE CPU (0x0220)
When upgrading the SE software version, if the SE CPU version is less than 0x0220
(equivalent to MC V11.0), and if it has not been once upgraded to 0x0220, it cannot
be upgraded to the latest version.
If the SE CPU version is less than 0x0220, then use “Update SE CPU (0x0220)”,
and upgrade it to 0x0220 in DR Maintenance Software.
(2)
(3)
(1)
POCX010405002J.ai
(1) Click “UTILITY” - “Update SE CPU (0x0220)”.

The Update SE CPU (0x0220) window opens.
(3) Click [START].

The SE’s CPU version is upgraded, and the implementation results are displayed
on the pop-up screen.
(4) Click [OK].

 INSTRUCTION 
After the above is completed, manually upgrade the SE software version via the
following procedures.
$ {5.1.2_Update SE}
018-241-05E
MU-162
5.9.11 Update SE FPGA (1) Click “UTILITY” - “Update SE FPGA”.
For the MC version V17.1 or later, if the fpgaRmv (FPGA) software shown below The Update SE FPGA window opens.
(corresponding to MC V16.1) or earlier of the SE is upgraded, a message “The
selected SE does not support this function.” appears, resulting in failure of upgrade of (2) Select the target SE from the drop-down list box.
the FPGA software.
(3) Click [START].
The SE’s CPU version is upgraded, and the implementation results are displayed
DR-ID 1201SE 0x0080 on the pop-up screen.
DR-ID 1202SE 0x00A0
(4) Click [OK].
DR-ID 1211SE 0x00B0
 INSTRUCTION 
DR-ID 1212SE 0x00B0 After the above is completed, manually upgrade the SE software version via the
DR-ID 1213SE 0x00B8 following procedures.
$ {5.1.2_Update SE}
DR-ID 1214SE 0x00C8
If the FPGA version of the SE is earlier than these, use “Upgrading the SE FPGA” to
install an in-between version of FPGA software.
(2)
(3)
(1)
1200_400134.ai
018-241-07E
MU-163
5.9.12 Replace MP (2) If the Network Address Field and the MC Subnet Mask have been
changed, then change the input values to the following in order to
 NOTE  connect with the MP’s default IP address.
For the DR-XD1000 system, the MP functions are mounted on the GNC board. In this - Network Address Field: 192.168.0.XXX
section, “MP” means the GNC board. - MC Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
Implement when replacing the GNC board, or when resetting the GNC board’s IP
address.
 MC ETH1 Network Setting
Configure the settings if the MP is to be replaced. Set the following MC addresses. If it is as per the following, then this procedure is not
 NOTE  needed.
- IP Address (Default value: 192.168.0.10)
When changing the MP's IP address from the default, for a 1 LAN port PC, change the
AP's IP address to 192.168.0.25 in advance. - Subnet Mask (Default value: 255.255.255.0)
 Network Address Setting

(1)
(1)
(2)
(2)
(2)
1200_400117E.ai
(1) If the address is to be changed, input “10” in “Updated Value” on the

MC ETH1 Network Setting window, and click [SET].
The address of the MC will be updated.
 NOTE 
1200_400116E.ai
Since the DR Maintenance Software will no longer be able to be accessed, access
“http://192.168.0.10:19101/index.html” in advance.
(1) Click “UTILITY” - “Replace MP”.
The Replace MP window opens.
018-241-07E
MU-164
 MC MP Network Setting  Changing the MP IP Address (Preset)
Set the MP1 and MP2 addresses which are registered in the MC. If the MP IP address is changed from the default, then change the IP address (preset)
which is set in the MP.
(1)
(1)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
1200_400118E.ai
(1) Click “UTILITY” - “Replace MP”.

The Replace MP window opens.
1200_400119E-1.ai
(1) If the MP address is to be changed, input “Updated Value” in the

(2) If the network address part and the MC subnet mask were changed in “■ Changing the MP1 IP Address (Preset) window, and click [SET].
Network Address Setting”, then reset it. The address of the MP will be updated.
(3) Enter “20” in the first line of the “Updated Value” on the MC MP (2) Left-click the MC Manager from the task tray and execute “EXIT”.
network setting window, and enter “21” in the second line, and click Check that the MC Manager icon has disappeared from the task tray,
[SET]. and then start the MC Manager from “Start menu” → “Start-up”.
The MP address which is registered in the MC is updated.
018-241-07E
MU-165
 MP Network Setting (6) Turn the main breaker OFF on the side of the X-ray cart.
Implement if the MP IP address is changed from the default.
(7) After unplugging the power cable, reinsert it.
 NOTE 
When changing the MP's network address, implement until the previous item “■ (8) Turn the main breaker ON on the side of the X-ray cart.
Changing the MP IP Address (Preset)”, then the MP can be connected to. Then
implement these procedures. (9) Start the DR-ID 300CL.
(10) Turn ON the main key of the X-ray cart.
REFERENCE
The relationship between the target MP and “Select MP whose destination is to
(3) be changed.” radio button is mentioned below.
● Target MP: MP1
(4) Set the IP address of the MP1 as the MP1 value input in “Changing the MP IP
(5) Address (Preset)”.
The MP2 value input in “Changing the MP IP Address (Preset)” gets effective.
● Target MP: MP2
- Setting for MP1
Change the MP set as the MP2 to the MP1.
Not in use usually.
1200_400119E.ai
- Setting for MP2
(1) Click “UTILITY” - “Replace MP”. Change the IP address of the MP2.
The Replace MP window opens. Set the IP address of the MP2 to the MP2 value input in “Changing the MP IP
(2) Select “MP1” from the drop-down list box, and click [Re-acquire
connected MP].
(3) Select “Setting for MP1”, and click [SET].

The MP1 IP address which was input via “Changing the MP’s IP addresses
(presets)” will be changed.
(4) Turn OFF the main key of the X-ray cart.
018-241-07E
MU-166
5.9.13 LED Color RGB Setting 5.9.14 Battery Threshold Setting
Set the LED display colors via the RGB. Set the battery reserve threshold values
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4) (1)
(2)
(4) (3)
(4)
(4)
1200_400109E.ai 1200_400110E.ai
(1) Click “UTILITY” - “LED Color RGB Setting”. (1) Click “UTILITY” - “Battery Threshold Setting”.
The LED Color RGB Setting window opens. The Battery Threshold Setting window opens.
(2) Select the target SE from the drop-down list box. (2) Select the target SE from the drop-down list box.
(3) Click [GET]. (3) Click [GET].
The SE LED colors is displayed. The battery reserve threshold values is displayed.
(4) To change the setting values, input the “Updated Value”, and click [SET] (4) To change the setting values, input the “Updated Value”, and click [SET]
at the bottom of the window. at the bottom of the window.
The SE LED colors will be changed. The battery reserve threshold values will be changed.
 NOTE 
be reflected in the SE after restart.
018-241-07E
MU-167
5.9.15 Force Charge the Battery
Perform a forced charge on the battery of DR-ID 12xxSE.
 NOTE 
In the battery’s “Shutdown state”, the battery’s control microcomputer is in a shutdown
state.
In this state, since the SE and the battery cannot communicate with each other, the
battery is not charged even if the battery is inserted into an SE which has a wired
power supply, also the battery status LED display will not be normal. In order to
charge the battery in a shutdown state, for the MC V16.6 or later, charge the battery
forcibly.
For details, refer to the following.
$ {MD:7.4_Restoring from the Battery Shutdown State}
(1)
(2)
(3)
POCX010405001J.ai
(1) Click “UTILITY” - “Force Charge the Battery”.

The Force Charge the Battery window opens.
(3) Click [START].

The Force Charge the Battery starts.
018-241-07E
MU-168
5.10 BACKUP/RESTORE 5.10.1 SE Correct Data Backup/Restore
Backup/restore the configuration information and the error log in the HDD. Backup and restore the SE correction data.
You can backup/restore the following data: Backing up and restoring can be done per each SE1 sheet, or per batches.
- SE Correct Data  NOTE 
For 1 image: YYYYMMDDhhmmss- (Panel ID).ZIP
The restored data become effective after the RU is restarted.
For an SE batch: YYYYMMDDhhmmss-PANELS.ZIP
- MC Configuration Data
YYYYMMDDhhmmss-MC-CONFIG.ZIP  Backup (Per Each SE1 Sheet)
- Exposing History (back up only)
YYYYMMDDhhmmss-MC-STATISTIC.ZIP
- The log (back up only)
ALL LOG: YYYYMMDDhhmmss-MC-ALLLOG.ZIP
CALIBRATION LOG: YYYYMMDDhhmmss-MC-CALIBRATIONLOG.ZIP
ERROR LOG: YYYYMMDDhhmmss-MC-ERRORLOG.ZIP (2)
 NOTE 
- The backup files will be saved in the “Downloads” folder by default.
- The restored data become effective after the RU is restarted.
(1)
1200_400120E.ai
(1) Click “BACKUP/RESTORE” - “SE Correct Data Backup/Restore”.

The SE Correct Data Backup/Restore window opens.
(2) Click [Backup] of the target SE.
The backing up is implemented, and when it is completed the pop up window will be
displayed.
(3) Click [SAVE].
The back up file saving is completed.
 NOTE 
The backup files will be saved in the “Downloads” folder by default.
File name: YYYYMMDDhhmmss-(Panel ID).ZIP
(4) Click [Open folder].

The back up file will be displayed.
018-241-07E
MU-169
 Backup Package  Restore (Per Each SE1 Sheet)
(2) (2)
(3)
(1) (1)
1200_400121E.ai 1200_400122E.ai
(1) Click “BACKUP/RESTORE” - “SE Correct Data Backup/Restore”. (1) Click “BACKUP/RESTORE” - “SE Correct Data Backup/Restore”.
The SE Correct Data Backup/Restore window opens. The SE Correct Data Backup/Restore window opens.
(2) Turn ON the target SE checkbox. (2) Click [Restore] the target SE.
(3) Click [Backup Package]. The correction data restore window is displayed.
The backing up is implemented, and when it is completed the pop up window opens.
(4) Click [SAVE].
(3)
The backup file saving is completed.
 NOTE  (3)
The backup files will be saved in the “Downloads” folder by default. 1200_400123E.ai
File name: YYYYMMDDhhmmss-PANELS.ZIP

The backup file will be displayed.
018-241-07E
MU-170
(3) Click [Browse], and after selecting the target correction data, click [OK].  Restore Package
 NOTE 
Select the file downloaded with DR Maintenance Software.
File name: YYYYMMDDhhmmss-(Panel).ZIP
The restoring is implemented, and if it completed, “Succeeded” will be displayed in (2)

the pop up window.
(4) Click [OK]. (3)
The SE correction data forced transferring is implemented, and if it completed,
“Succeeded” will be displayed in the pop up window.
(5) Click [OK]. (1)
1200_400125E.ai
(1) Click “BACKUP/RESTORE” - “SE Correct Data Backup/Restore”.

The SE Correct Data Backup/Restore window opens.
(2) Turn ON the target SE checkbox.
(3) Click [Restore Package].
The correction data restore window opens.
(4)
(4)
1200_400126E.ai
018-241-07E
MU-171
(4) Click [Browse], and after selecting the target correction data, click [OK]. 5.10.2 D-EVO GL Panel Correct Data Backup/Restore
Select the file downloaded with DR Maintenance Software. Not used in the DR-XD 1000 system.
File name: YYYYMMDDhhmmss-PANELS.ZIP
The restoring is implemented, and if it completed, “Succeeded” will be displayed in

the pop up window.
(5) Click [OK].
 NOTE 
To implement the SE correction data forced transferring, implement each SE.
018-241-07E
MU-172
5.10.3 DR-ID 1422SE Panel Correct Data Backup/Restore 5.10.4 Config Setting Backup/Restore
 NOTE  Backup and restore the MC configuration data.
Not used in the DR-XD 1000 system.  Back up
(2)
(1)
1200_400127E.ai
(1) Click “BACKUP/RESTORE” - “Config Setting Backup/Restore”.

The SE Config Setting Backup/Restore window opens.
(2) Click [Backup].
(3) Click [SAVE].
The backup file saving is completed.
 NOTE 
File name: YYYYMMDDhhmmss-MC-CONFIG.ZIP

The backup file is displayed.
018-241-07E
MU-173
 Restore (3) Click [Browse], and after selecting the target configuration data, click
[OK].
 NOTE 
Select the file downloaded with DR Maintenance Software.
File name: YYYYMMDDhhmmss-MC-CONFIG.ZIP
The restoring is implemented, and if it completed, “Succeeded” will be displayed in

the pop up window.
(4) Click [OK].
(2)
(1)
1200_400128E.ai
(1) Click “BACKUP/RESTORE” - “Config Setting Backup/Restore”.

The Config Setting Backup/Restore window opens.
(2) Click [Restore].
The Restore configuration files is displayed.
(3)
(3)
1200_400129E.ai
018-241-07E
MU-174
5.10.5 HISTORY Backup 5.10.6 LOG Backup
Backup the exposing histories and battery information which is saved on the MC. Back up the following logs.
- All Log
- Calibration Log
- Error Log
(2)
(1)
(1)
1200_400130E.ai
(1) Click “BACKUP/RESTORE” - “HISTORY Backup”. (2)

The HISTORY Backup window opens.
1200_400131E.ai
(2) Click [Backup].

(1) Click “BACKUP/RESTORE” - “LOG Backup”.
(3) Click [SAVE]. The LOG Backup window opens.
The backup file saving is completed. (2) Click [Backup].
 NOTE  The Save Log window opens.
File name: YYYYMMDDhhmmss-MC-STATISTIC.ZIP
(3)
The backup file is displayed.
(3)
1200_400132E.ai
018-241-07E
MU-175
(3) After selecting the log type, click [OK]. No. Select item Function
The target Log will be saved.
ISC TRACE LOG: Communication log
 NOTE  between packages (subsystems). For design
6 verification.
The backup files will be saved in the “Downloads” folder by default. Folder name: ISC
ALL LOG: YYYYMMDDhhmmss-MC-ALLLOG.ZIP File name: ISC.LOG
CALIBRATION LOG: YYYYMMDDhhmmss-MC-CALIBRATIONLOG.ZIP Panel log. For design verification.
ERROR LOG: YYYYMMDDhhmmss-MC-ERRORLOG.ZIP 7
Folder name: MONOLITH
Communication log of TCP
(4) Click [Save]. 8
Folder name: NETWORK
The log file saving is completed. Log between packages (subsystems). For
(5) Click [Open folder]. design verification.
The X-ray automatic detection log, MC
The log file is displayed. 9 communications log, PANEL ID information
which is registered in the MC, etc. are
contained here.
 Log item Folder name: TRACE
Copies the configuration information and the error log in the HDD to a desired location
IO TRACE LOG: Not used in the machine.
on the CL (a recording medium or a folder). 10
Folder name: IOT
You can back up the following data:
If “ALL LOG” is selected, all of the following logs will be backed up at one time. Not used in the machine.
11
Folder name: LP_IMAGE
No. Select item Function
Not used in the machine.
12
Calibration history log Folder name: ES_IMAGE
1 CALIBRATION LOG Folder name: CALIB
File name: CALIB.LOG  NOTE 
Error log Refer to the following for further details on the CALIBRATION LOG files, and GLG log
2 ERROR LOG Folder name: ERROR files.
File name: ERRORB.LOG
$ {MU:4.13_BACKUP}
Configuration file
3
Folder name: CONFIG
Communication log between the CL and the
MC
4
Folder name: CONSOLE
File name: CONSOLE.LOG
GLG log
Overview: Panel drop/impact log
Folder name: GLG
File name: SE_GSENS_<PANEL ID>.LOG
These files are raw data. If the “GLG.bat”
5
which was saved in the log file is implemented,
an error file that was converted into a viewable
format is created in the same folder (file name
after conversion: GLG_[file name before
conversion]).
018-241-07E
MU-176
 NETWORK log  FI.log FPD received signal strength log
- .MACADDR_eth0.txt The radio field intensity of each SE which is connected to the MC can be checked in
- .NETADDR_eth0.txt the time series line from the radio field strength line.
- .NETMASK_eth0.txt How to read: [Log time] tic PANEL ID, radio field strength, noise level, design value,
- .MACADDR_wlan0.txt design value
- .NETADDR_wlan0.txt [2017/02/10 08:30:46] 00327A V120028,-45,-95,94,94
- .NETMASK_wlan0.txt [2017/02/10 08:48:31] 01D278 V120028,-46,-95,94,94
Network port MAC address, network address, and netmask configuration file [2017/02/10 08:48:46] 01D854 V120028,-46,-95,94,94
- AP.LOG [2017/02/10 08:49:01] 01DE33 V120028,-47,-95,94,94
For design [2017/02/10 10:18:38] 0A128A N120109,-41,-95,94,94
- BATTERY.LOG [2017/02/10 10:18:53] 0A184C N120109,-41,-95,94,94
- FI.LOG [2017/02/10 10:19:08] 0A1E2A N120109,-41,-95,94,94
- TCPDUMP.zip [2017/02/10 10:19:23] 0A2409 N120109,-44,-95,94,94
tcpdump_img.log: Image communications port TCP dump [2017/02/10 10:19:38] 0A29E5 N120109,-44,-95,94,94
tcpdump_log: Control communications port TCP dump [2017/02/10 10:19:48] 0A2DCF N120109,-43,-95,94,94
[2017/02/10 10:19:53] 0A2FC4 V120028,-46,-95,94,94
[2017/02/10 10:20:03] 0A33AC N120109,-47,-95,94,94
[2017/02/10 10:20:08] 0A35A0 V120028,-46,-95,94,94
[2017/02/10 10:20:18] 0A3988 N120109,-47,-95,94,94
[2017/02/10 10:20:23] 0A3B7D V120028,-45,-95,94,94
[2017/02/10 10:20:33] 0A3F67 N120109,-49,-95,94,94
[2017/02/10 10:20:38] 0A415B V120028,-43,-95,94,94
[2017/02/10 10:20:48] 0A4543 N120109,-44,-95,94,94
 Battery.log: FPD battery information (for design)

[LOG time] tic PANEL ID, 20,55,7464,64344,1110,3091,51,192,3200,2048,1280,1280,
1280
[2017/02/10 08:30:46] 00327A V120028,20,55,7464,64344,1110,3091,51,192,3200,20
48,1280,1280,1280
[2017/02/10 08:31:01] 00385A V120028,20,54,7630,1268,1106,3091,65535,128,3200
,2048,1280,1280,1280
[2017/02/10 08:31:16] 003E36 V120028,20,55,7653,1250,1111,3091,65535,128,3200,
2048,1280,1280,1280
[2017/02/10 08:31:31] 004414 V120028,20,55,7558,0,1113,3091,65535,128,3200,204
8,1280,1280,1280
[2017/02/10 08:31:46] 0049F1 V120028,20,55,7558,0,1113,3091,65535,128,3200,204
8,1280,1280,1280
[2017/02/10 08:32:01] 004FCF V120028,20,55,7558,0,1113,3091,65535,128,3200,20
48,1280,1280,1280
018-241-07E
MU-177
 CONFIG log  TRACE log
- Battery.cfg - SERegistInfo.txt: The panel ID information which is registered to the MC
SE Battery information file - XFREE.LOG: X-ray automatic detection log
- batterythrtime.conf - MC_WLAN_COM.log: MC-MP and FPD communication log
Setting information file for the SE battery level indicator display threshold
- centerledcolor.conf
SE LED color setting information file  Example for SERegistInfo.txt
- DAP.CFG 001 N120109
Setting information file on DAP 003 N170006
- GLG.CFG 004 W120117
Setting information file on GLG 005 U170001
- HISTORY.CFG 006 W120102
Setting information file pertaining to FPD usage statistics 007 U120133
- IRSET.CFG. IRSTATUS.CFG, NETWORK.CFG
Setting information file on MC
 Example for MC_WLAN_COM.log
- VERSION.DAT
MC version information 2018/04/11 09:27:05 000173CB 192.168.0.40 0005100600010400 RMLRegRq
01004400
2018/04/11 09:27:05 000173CB 192.168.0.40 1006000500010600 RMLRegRs
 Example for battery cfg 0000440000003F07
SerialNo,Manufacture Date,Battery Status,Manufacture Access,Battery Capacity,B/I Logic 2018/04/11 09:27:05 000173CB 192.168.0.40 0005000610010300 RdyStaRq
Count,Cycle Count 0000
132,2014/09/25,0x02C0,0b1100000000000000,2243,0,34
018-241-07E
MU-178
 Relation among configurations
Point 1: X-ray shot cable
The name of a connector to which a cable of each operative method is
connected is registered in advance via the DR Maintenance Software.
Free
MC CSL
Table
X-CON Upright
[DR Maintenance Software] [Selector Setting]
[Selector12]
[OP SETTING(FREE)]
AP [Selector1]
[OP SETTING(TABLE)] Defines the operative method.
[Technique Code]:
[OP SETTING(UPRIGHT)] [Reader Type]:
MP1 [MP1] or [FPD-C]: FREE exposure with FPD or
SE1 MPC7 MPX1 [MP2] or [FPD-T]: TABLE exposure with FPD or
SE serial No. MPC6 MPX2 [None] [FPD-U]: UPRIGHT exposure with FPD
[Caption]: Selector name
[PORT SETTING(UPRIGHT)] [Icon Type]: Selector icon
SE2 [MPX1] or
SE serial No. MP2 [MPX2] or
[Device Name]: Panel identification name
MPC7 MPX1 [None]

SE3 MPC6 MPX2 [Device Setting]
SE serial No. [SE Registration] [Device Name]: Panel identification name
SE1: SE serial No. [FPD Device ID]: SE Serial No.
SE2: SE serial No. [Device Type]: Defines the panel for use.
SE3: SE serial No. [D-EVO] or
SE4: SE serial No. [AcSelarate]
SE5: SE serial No. [Device Color]: Identification of SE
Point 2: SE serial No.

Serial Nos. of all panels are registered in advance via the DR Maintenance Software. Image processing is selected
The operative method for exposure and the panel to be used are determined based on the depending on the type of the panel.
CSL setting (not depending on the connector (MPC6 or 7) to which the panel is connected).
DRID600_G0139E.ai
018-241-07E
MU-179
6. Smart Log Acquisition Tool (SLAT)
 Smart Log Acquisition Tool (SLAT) overview
It is a service tool that can collectively acquire the following logs when problems occur.
This tool is distributed via ECN.
- MC
- CSL
- DR-XD 1000 Maintenance Tool
018-241-07E
MU-180
6.1 Setting the Log Collecting Conditions
(1) Double-click the “SmartLogAcquisitionSetting.exe” inside the SLAT
folder, and execute the log collection condition setting tool. (2)
(2) In “Logs To Collect”, select “Console Log” and “Reader Log”.
(3) Change the save location with “Save Folder” as necessary. (3)
REFERENCE
The default save location is the folder which has SmartLogAcquisitionSetting.exe. (4)
in it.
(5)
(6)
(4) Confirm that “Delete Personal Information” is selected in “Console
Log Setting”. (7)
(5) Enter the log collecting period in “Collect last [ ] day(s)”.

 NOTE 
Enter “2” or higher as the log collecting period.
(6) Select “127.0.0.1” as the IP address in “IR Type Setting”.

(8)
(7) Click [Edit], and select “DR-ID 1200” as the IR type.
POCX010406001J.ai
(8) Click [Close], and close the log collection condition setting tool.
018-241-07E
MU-181
6.2 Collecting Logs
(1) Execute SmartLogAcquisitionTool.exe.
The log is saved in the folder which is specified when setting.
REFERENCE
The saved log name is “Host name _ collection date.zip”.
The Console Log (Host name_NP.zip), and Reader Log are contained inside the
zip folder.
018-241-07E
MU-182
6.3 Log Structure │ │ │ │
│ │ │ └─HOSTS
An example of the Smart Log Acquisition Tool (SLAT) log structure is shown below.
│ │ │ hosts.txt
│ DP20017_NP.zip ///Console log/// │ │ │
│ │ │ ├─Log ///Storing of the various logs///
├─Correct │ │ │ ├─CALIB ///Calibration history///
│ └─DR-ID1200 │ │ │ │ CALIB.LOG
│ └─127.0.0.1 │ │ │ │
│ └─correct │ │ │ ├─CALIBIMAGE ///For designing///
│ ├─Panel1 ///Panel Correct data. Saved for each panel/// │ │ │ │ ├─PANEL1
│ │ Defect02.cmp ...
│ │ DefectBS02.cmp │ │ │ │ ├─PANEL100
│ │ DefectFac02.cmp │ │ │ │ ├─STAND
│ │ DefectList02.xxx │ │ │ │ └─TABLE
│ │ DH.txt │ │ │ ├─CONSOLE ///Communications log between CSL-MC///
│ │ DV.txt │ │ │ │ CONSOLE.LOG
│ │ Gain00.xxx │ │ │ │
│ │ LagData.txt │ │ │ ├─ERROR ///Error log///
│ │ OffsetOnBS00.xxx │ │ │ │ ERRORB.LOG
│ │ OffsetOnBS01.xxx │ │ │ │ VERSION.DAT
│ │ OffsetOnBS02.xxx │ │ │ │
│ │ OffsetOnBS03.xxx │ │ │ ├─ES_IMAGE ///Do not use with the DR-XD 1000///
│ │ PanelCorrectSensitivity.txt │ │ │ │ BackupESImage.bat
│ │ │ │ │ │
│ ├─Panel3 ///It is stored for the registered panel’s portion/// │ │ │ ├─GLG ///GLG log///
│ │ │ │ │ GLG.bat
├─FCR │ │ │ │ glg.exe
│ ├─DR-ID1200 ///MC name. “DR-ID 1200” for DR-XD 1000/// │ │ │ │ glg_devo2.exe
│ │ └─SYSTEM │ │ │ │ SE_GSENS_N120053.LOG ///Generated for each panel///
│ │ └─127.0.0.1 ///MC address. Because it is MC-less “127.0.0.1”/// │ │ │ │ SE_GSENS_N120109.LOG ///Generated for each panel///
│ │ │ VERSION.DAT ///MC software information/// │ │ │ │
│ │ │ │ │ │ ├─IMAGE ///Do not use with the DR-XD 1000///
│ │ ├─Config ///Storing of the setting files/// │ │ │ │ └─20180410-0001
│ │ │ │ BATTERY.CFG │ │ │ │ Image.raw
│ │ │ │ DAP.CFG │ │ │ │ RawImage.raw
│ │ │ │ GLG.CFG │ │ │ │ RawOffset.raw
│ │ │ │ IRSET.CFG │ │ │ │
│ │ │ │ IRSTATUS.CFG │ │ │ ├─IOT ///For designing///
│ │ │ │ NETWORK.CFG │ │ │ │ APL.IO2
│ │ │ │ SHARE_CORDATA.CFG │ │ │ │ IOT.IO2
│ │ │ │ VERSION.DAT │ │ │ │
018-241-07E
MU-183
│ │ │ ├─ISC ///For designing/// │ │ │ │ OIF_SIC.LOG
│ │ │ │ ISC.LOG │ │ │ │
│ │ │ │ │ │ │ ├─TRACE4 ///For designing///
│ │ │ ├─LP_IMAGE ///Do not use with the DR-XD 1000/// │ │ │ │ BKY.LOG
│ │ │ │ BackupLPImage.bat │ │ │ │ CDM.LOG
│ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ COMDAT.LOG
│ │ │ ├─NETWORK ///Network log/// │ │ │ │ MOC.LOG
│ │ │ │ AP.LOG │ │ │ │ SWL.LOG
│ │ │ │ BATTERY.LOG │ │ │ │
│ │ │ │ FI.LOG │ │ │ ├─TRACE5 ///For designing///
│ │ │ │ TCPDUMP.zip │ │ │ │ ALPS_COM.LOG
│ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ ALPS_COM2.LOG
│ │ │ ├─POWBACKUP │ │ │ │ MCMNG.LOG
│ │ │ ├─RADCON │ │ │ │ MC_WLAN_COM.LOG ///Communications log between MC-SE-MP///
│ │ │ ├─STATISTICS ///Battery log/// │ │ │ │ MC_WLAN_COM2.LOG ///Communications log between MC-SE-MP///
│ │ │ │ BATTERY.CFG │ │ │ │ MC_WLAN_ERR.LOG
│ │ │ │ HISTORY.CFG │ │ │ │ MC_WLAN_ERR2.LOG
│ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ MC_WLAN_IF.LOG
│ │ │ ├─TRACE ///For designing/// │ │ │ │ MC_WLAN_IF2.LOG
│ │ │ │ FCT.LOG │ │ │ │ MP1_COM.LOG
│ │ │ │ OPER.LOG │ │ │ │ MP1_ERR.LOG
│ │ │ │ SE_IMGPRM.LOG │ │ │ │ OAL.LOG
│ │ │ │ SQC.LOG │ │ │ │ OAL2.LOG
│ │ │ │ SYS.LOG │ │ │ │ SERegistInfo.txt ///SE registration information///
│ │ │ │ VERSION.DAT │ │ │ │ SE_LOG.zip
│ │ │ │ XFREE.LOG ///Xfree log/// │ │ │ │
│ │ │ │ │ │ │ └─XSC
│ │ │ ├─TRACE2 ///For designing/// │ │
│ │ │ │ ENT.LOG │ └─DR-XD1000
│ │ │ │ HSM.LOG │ │ dummy.txt
│ │ │ │ IMO.LOG │ │ GeneToollog_20161114_1349_41.txt ///For Maintenance tool log design///
│ │ │ │ LONGPANEL.LOG │ │ GeneToollog_20161114_1402_37.txt ///For Maintenance tool log design///
│ │ │ │ RAD.LOG ...
│ │ │ │ │ │ GeneToollog_20180502_1102_57.txt ///For Maintenance tool log design///
│ │ │ ├─TRACE3 ///For designing/// │ │ GeneToollog_20180502_1625_41.txt ///For Maintenance tool log design///
│ │ │ │ EXPCOND.LOG │ │ OPER_20180410.log ///Operation log (each date)///
│ │ │ │ FIL.LOG │ │ OPER_20180411.log ///Operation log (each date)///
│ │ │ │ HST.LOG │ │ RUN_20180410.log ///Running log (each date)///
│ │ │ │ HST2.LOG │ │ RUN_20180411.log ///Running log (each date)///
│ │ │ │ MNT.LOG │ │ ERRB_20180411.log ///Error log (each date)///
│ │ │ │ OIF.LOG │ │
018-241-07E
MU-184
│ ├─GNC_BackUp
│ │
│ └─OpInf_BackUp
│
└─SLAT
│ DRXD1000_Merge.log
│ SmartLogAcquisitionTool.log ///SLAT operation log///
│
└─conf
018-241-07E
MU-185
BLANK PAGE
018-241-07E
MU-186
BLANK PAGE
018-241-07E
MU-187
BLANK PAGE
018-241-07E
AppxMU1-1
Appendix 1. Installing and Uninstalling ■ Installation of POCX Dispatch and Logging Service
the DR-XD 1000 (1) Double-click “SetupPOCX_xx”.

The Welcome to the POCX Dispatch and Logging Service Setup Wizard window
Maintenance Tool opens.
(2) Click [Next].

1. Install
NOTE
Since the DR-XD 1000 maintenance tool is factory-installed, it does not need to be
installed upon installation.
Contains the procedures for installing when the DR-XD 1000 maintenance tool is
upgraded. The upgrading installer is distributed via the ECN.
Use the following three executable files.
- SetupPOCX_xx.exe (“xx” expresses the version. For V1.2, it is “12”.)
- SetupPOCXMntToolFunc.exe
- SetupPOCXLauncher.exe
POCX010402007E.ai
The Select Installation Folder window opens.
(3) Click [Next].
POCX010402008E.ai
The Confirm Installation window opens.
018-241-04E
DR-XD 1000 Service Manual AppxMU1-1
AppxMU1-2
(4) Click [Next], and start installation.
POCX010402009E.ai
The Installation Complete window opens.
(5) Click [Close].
POCX010402010E.ai
The installation has been completed.
018-241-04E
AppxMU1-3
■ Installation of POCX MntToolFunc (4) Click [Next], and start installation.
(1) Double-click “SetupPOCXMntToolFunc”.

The Welcome to the POCX MntToolFunc Setup Wizard window opens.
(2) Click [Next].
POCX010402017E.ai
(5) Click [Close].
POCX010402015E.ai
(3) Click [Next].
POCX010402018E.ai
POCX010402016E.ai
018-241-04E
AppxMU1-4
■ Installation of POCX Launcher (4) Click [Next], and start installation.
(1) Double-click “SetupPOCXLauncher”.

The Welcome to the POCX Launcher Setup Wizard window opens.
(2) Click [Next].
POCX010402013E.ai
(5) Click [Close].
POCX010402011E.ai
(3) Click [Next].
POCX010402014E.ai
POCX010402012E.ai
018-241-04E
AppxMU1-5
2. Uninstall (3) Place a checkmark to “POCX MntToolFunc”, and click [Uninstall].
Uninstall the following three services.

- POCX MntToolFunc
- POCX Launcher
- POCX Dispatch and Logging Service
Uninstall in the above order.
NOTE
If the maintenance tools cannot be uninstalled via these steps, use the force uninstall
tool, and refer to the following to uninstall.
$ {3._Uninstalling via Force Uninstall Tool}
■ Uninstallation of POCX MntToolFunc

(1) Select “Control Panel” from the [Start] menu.
POCX010402022E.ai
(2) Click “Programs and Features”. The “Are you sure you want to uninstall POCX MntToolFunc?” message appears
The “Programs and Features” window opens.
(4) Click [Yes].
POCX010402023E.ai
The “POCX MntToolFunc” window opens.
(5) Place a checkmark to “Automatically close applications and attempt

to restart them after setup is complete.”, and click [OK].
After a while, the installation has been completed.
018-241-07E
AppxMU1-6
■ Uninstallation of POCX Launcher (5) Place a checkmark to “Automatically close applications and attempt
(2) Click “Programs and Features”.

(3) Place a checkmark to “POCX Launcher”, and click [Uninstall].
POCX010402026E.ai
POCX010402024E.ai
The “Are you sure you want to uninstall POCX Launcher?” message appears
(4) Click [Yes].
POCX010402025E.ai
The “POCX Launcher” window opens.
018-241-07E
AppxMU1-7
■ Uninstallation of POCX Dispatch and Logging Service (5) Place a checkmark to “Automatically close applications and attempt
(2) Click “Programs and Features”.

(3) Place a checkmark to “POCX Dispatch and Logging Service”, and

click [Uninstall].
POCX010402021E.ai
(6) Restart your PC.
POCX010402019E.ai
The “Are you sure you want to uninstall POCX Dispatch and Logging Service?”
message appears
(4) Click [Yes].
POCX010402020E.ai
The “POCX Dispatch and Logging Service” window opens.
018-241-07E
AppxMU1-8
3. Uninstalling via Force Uninstall Tool (2) Double-click the program file to open it.
If the maintenance tool cannot be uninstalled via normal steps, use the force uninstall
tools to uninstall.
(1) Download “MicrosoftProgram_Install_and_Uninstall.meta” from the

following site and expand it on the desktop.
https://support.microsoft.com/en-us/help/17588/fix-problems-that-block-programs-
from-being-installed-or-removed
POCX01040A001+++.ai
(3) Click [Next].
POCX01040A007.ai
Click [Download] to start downloading.

REFERENCE
The window above is that at July 2019. The window is subject to change.
POCX01040A002+++.ai
018-241-07E
AppxMU1-9
(4) Click [Uninstalling]. (6) Confirm that it is an application to be forcibly uninstalled, and select
“Yes, try uninstall”.
POCX01040A003+++.ai
POCX01040A005+++.ai
(5) For the following programs that compose the maintenance tool, select
the program that could not be uninstalled by normal steps and click (7) Select “Close the troubleshooter”.
[Next].
- POCX Dispatch and Logging Service
- POCX MntToolFunc
- POCX Launcher
POCX01040A006+++.ai
POCX01040A004+++.ai
018-241-07E
AppxMU1-10
BLANK PAGE
018-241-04E
AppxMU1-11
BLANK PAGE
018-241-04E
AppxMU1-12
BLANK PAGE
018-241-04E
Control Sheet
11.30.2016 02 Revision (FM9462) 3 to 11, 13 to 31
05.31.2017 03 Revision (FM9471) 3 to 11, 13 to 18, 21 to 25, 28
11.30.2017 04 Revision for MC V16.2 (FM9486) 2 to 16, 18 to 32

11.30.2017 04 Changes in pagination (FM9486) 17, 33 to 39
10.31.2018 05 Revision for MC V16.6 (FM9528) 3 to 22, 24 to 32, 34, 35, 37, 38
3 to 6, 9, 11 to 14, 17, 19 to 21,
05.31.2019 06 Revision for U.S. and Brazil (FM9565) 23, 32, 37 to 39,
AppxSP1-1 to 1-4
4, 5, 9 to 13, 15, 17, 20, 27,
32 to 35, 40 to 43
09.30.2019 07 Changes in pagination (FM9587) 36∼39
02.29.2020 08 Revision for CSL V13.0 (FM9630) 4, 9, 26, 36
Service Parts List (SP)
018-241-08E
SP-1
How to Use ● Fault RANK characters (which

provide reference for determining the
■PART NUMBER
PART NUMBER is a code number that is
■REFER TO
The "REFER TO" column shows reference
Service Parts List recom-mended stock quantity) unique to each part. An alphabetic letter at
the rightmost position of the code number
sections concerning the part.Clicking
All parts are assigned with one of the reference section in the "REFER
has the following meaning. TO" column jumps to the top page of
characters A through E.
■RANK Character Significance the reference section where the related
○For hardware
Consumable parts or parts The alphabet denotes the version number information is in.
● Handling RANK characters (parts A that will be replaced at short of a part. If parts have different version
that are handled in a special manner intervals. ■ Quantities of recommended spare
numbers, they are upward-compatible.
during parts operation, such as Parts that may become faulty
○For software parts
management) B accidentally and have a
The alphabet denotes a difference in the It is recommended as a rough guide to hold
relatively high failure rate.
Character Under Warranty Out of Warranty Parts that have a sufficiently long
specifications. Parts differing in the suffix in stock a certain quantity of parts according
R Must be returned. Repairable C MTBF, but are expected to have are not compatible with each other. Version to the rank (A, B, C, D, E) assigned to the
Must be returned. a relatively high failure rate. number is omitted in the list. parts, as follows. For periodically replaced
Q (We use for Not repairable Parts that have a sufficiently parts, hold them in stock separately. Adjust
analysis.) D long MTBF, but are expected to ■PART NAME the stock quantity of service parts depending
become faulty. PART NAME represents a general name of
Must Not be on the number of working units (N).
returned. Parts that are necessary for fault a part. Quantity used in a single system : Q
(Consumable analysis, or parts that may be
E needed in case of unexpected ■QTY. ○N = 1
T part. Not Not repairable
accidents such as man-induced ○QTY. denotes the quantity of parts used in Rank A = 1 + Q × 0.3
applicable to
free-of-charge damage. each unit. Rank C = 1 + Q × 0.05
warranty.) Rank D = 1 + Q × 0.02
<The RANK guide> ○A part whose quantity is suffixed with -S
without Must Not be The Fault RANK characters, Handling represents a small part that is shipped in ○2 ≦ N ≦ 10
Not repairable
R, Q, T returned. RANK characters, and Export regulation- packs of 50. (Even if such a part is ordered Rank A = 2 + N × Q × 0.3
applicable character are assigned in that in quantity of 1, a pack containing 50 pieces Rank C = 2 + N × Q × 0.05
● Export regulation-applicable order. of that part is supplied.) Rank D = 2 + N × Q × 0.02
character(Parts with the following Thus, at least one character or up to three
■REMARKS ○11 ≦ N ≦ 300
character are controlled by Export characters are assigned in the RANK
Rank A = 3 + N × Q × 0.3
The REMARKS column indicates a unique
regulation.) column.
Rank C = 3 + N × Q × 0.05
name of a part or relevant information of
Character Significance ■REF.NO. each part. Rank D = 2 + N × Q × 0.02
Parts applicable to export
＋
regulations.
REF. NO. is a part number indicated in the ■SERIAL NUMBER ■ Precautions to be Observed When
Service Parts Exploded Views. For parts The units may contain different parts Returning Parts for Repair
having different functions, they are clearly depending on their shipment control number.
distinguished in the REMARKS and SERIAL When returning a component for repair,
SERIAL NUMBER indicates the shipment
NUMBER columns. pack it in the same manner as for the
control number to which the relevant parts
supplied substitute, using the substitute
are applicable. If the SERIAL NUMBER
packing materials.
column is blank, the parts are applicable to
The use of different packing materials or
all the relevant units. The shipment control
packing methods may incur damage to
number is represented by lower five digits
packed component during transit.
of eight-digit number indicated on the rating
indication label.
018-241-01E
DR-XD 1000 Service Manual SP-1
SP-2
INDEX
INDEX 01 INDEX 11
● カバー ● 治工具
COVER TOOLS
INDEX 02 INDEX 12
● アーム ● ケーブル
ARM CABLE
INDEX 03 INDEX 13
● タンク ● 回路図
TANK CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
INDEX 04 INDEX 14
● コリメータ ● 部品番号検索表
COLLIMATOR PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE
INDEX 05 INDEX 15
● オペレーションパネル ● 締結用および配線用のサービス部品一覧表
OPERATION PANEL List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring
INDEX 06 INDEX 16
● 制御部 ● ネジ・座金類の記号一覧表
CONTROLLER Table of Screws / Washers Indication Symbols
INDEX 07 INDEX 17
● SE ロック部 ● 消耗品一覧表
SE LOCK UNIT List of Quick Wearing Parts
INDEX 08
● フレーム
FRAME
INDEX 09
● DR スロット
MULTI-FUNCTION DR SLOT
INDEX 10
● オプション
OPTION
018-241-04C
SP-3
01A カバー 1（X 線カート）

COVER 1 (X-RAY CART)
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO REFER TO
モニタ固定用 Securing Member of
1 386N200036B 2 MC: 2.27
緩衝部材 Monitor
E 2 898Y200331 上面カバーアセンブリ Top Cover Assembly 1 MC: 2.10
3 318N200004B モニタアーム受け Monitor Arm Bush 1
4 405N200724C キースイッチ銘板 Key Switch Label 1 -
5 362N200018B ハンドスイッチホルダ Hand Switch Holder 1 -
ハンドスイッチ
6 898Y200258 Hand Switch Assembly 1 MC: 2.29
アセンブリ
Low Thermal
熱膨張対応ワッシャ／
7 898Y200335 Expansion Washer/ 8 -
スペーサアセンブリ
Spacer Assembly
側面カバーアセンブリ Side Cover Assembly
E 8 898Y200598 1 MC: 2.6
（USB 側） (USB Side)
E 9.1 317Y200010D ネジキャップ Screw Cap 5 シルバー／ Silver -
E 9.2 317N200007D ネジキャップ Screw Cap 2 黒／ Black -
CALNEO AQRO
10.1 405N200738 商品銘板 Product Label 1 -
日本向け／ For Japan
D-EVO AQRO
米国向け／ For USA
D-EVO NANO
欧州向け／ For EU
Front-Side Cover
11 898Y200332A 前面カバーアセンブリ 1 *3 MC: 2.1
Assembly
SE 緩衝部材 SE Shock Absorber
12 364Y200002C 3 -
（コーナー） (Corner)
SE 緩衝部材 SE Shock Absorber
13 364N200010 3 -
（ショート） (Short)
SE Shock Absorber
14 364Y200001C SE 緩衝部材（ロング） 1 -
(Long)
AC インレットカバー AC Inlet Cover
15 350Y200072B 1 MC: 2.30
アセンブリ Assembly
Rating/Standard/ 日本向け／
16.1 405N200805A 定格／規格／薬事銘板 1 -
Identification Label For Japan *1
Rating/Standard/ 米国向け／
16.2 405N200694D 定格／規格／薬事銘板 1 -
Identification Label For USA *1
米国・ブラジルを
Rating/Standard/ 除く海外向け／ For
16.3 405N200797A 定格／規格／薬事銘板 1 -
Identification Label Overseas other than
USA and Brazil *1
ブラジル向け／
16.4 405N201981 定格銘板 Rating Label 1
For Brazil *1
側面カバーアセンブリ Side Cover Assembly
E 17 898Y200333C 1 *1 MC: 2.17
（AC インレット側） (AC Inlet Side)
背面カバー用
18 898Y200334 Rear Cover Cushion 1 MC: 2.3
クッション
E 19 350Y200030B 背面カバー Rear Cover 1 MC: 2.2
米国向け／
E 20.1 405N201210 HHS Warning Label HHS Warning Label 1 -
For USA *2
米国・ブラジルを
除く海外向け／ For
E 20.2 405N201393A RED 警告銘板 RED Warning Label 1 -
Overseas other than
USA and Brazil *2
018-241-06A
SP-4
01A カバー 1（X 線カート）

COVER 1 (X-RAY CART)
通常タイプ／
21 340Y200020B X 線カートハンドル Cart Handle 1 MC: 2.16
Normal Type
22 405N201401 SE 誤操作防止銘版 SE Position Label 1 -
SE Connector
23 405N201402 SE コネクタラベル 1 -
Position Label
SE カセッテバリエー
24 405N201403A SE Variation Label 1 -
ションラベル
HHS Certification HHS Certification 米国向け／ For USA
25 405N201211 1 -
Label Label *1
REF27 を含まず
26 316Y200001 メインキーユニット Main Key Unit 1 ／ REF27 is not MC: 2.26
included
キー（タキゲン・
27 316N200010 メインキー Main Key 1 カスタム）/Key -
(Takigen Custom)
海外向け EU-REP EU-REP, 海外向け／ For
28 405N202277 1 -
銘板 AU Sponcered Label Overseas *1
*1: 日本では、REF17 発注時に同時に REF16.1 を発注すること。発注時に、交換前の REF16.1 に記載

されている S/N と製造年月も伝えること。
米国向けでは、REF17 発注時に同時に REF16.2 および REF25 を発注すること。発注時に、交換前
の REF16.2 に記載されている S/N と製造年月も伝えること。
ブラジル向けでは、REF17 発注時に同時に REF16.4 を発注すること。発注時に、交換前の REF16.4
に記載されている S/N と製造年月も伝えること。
米国・ブラジルを除く海外向けでは、REF17 発注時に同時に REF16.3 と REF28 を発注すること。
発注時に、交換前の REF16.3 に記載されている S/N と製造年月も伝えること。
*1: For Japan, order REF16.1 with REF17. Clarify the S/N and manufacturing date written down on
REF16.1 before replacing it.
For USA, order REF16.2 and REF25 with REF17. Clarify the S/N and manufacturing date written
down on REF16.2 before replacing it.
For Brazil, order REF16.4 with REF17. Clarify the S/N and manufacturing date written down on
REF16.4 before replacing it.
For Overseas other than USA and Brazil, order REF16.3 and REF28 with REF17. Clarify the S/N and
manufacturing date written down on REF16.3 before replacing it.
*2: 米国向けでは、REF2 発注時に同時に REF20.1 を発注すること。
米国・ブラジルを除く海外向けでは、REF2 発注時に同時に REF20.2 を発注すること。
*2: For USA, order REF20.1 with REF2.
For Overseas other than USA and Brazil, order REF20.2 with REF2.
*3: 緩衝部材、REF22、REF23、REF24 を含む。
*3: Including shock Absorbers, REF22, REF23 and REF24.
018-241-08C
SP-5
01B カバー 2（DR スロット）

COVER 2 (DR SLOT)
DR スロット
1 356N121139B DR Slot Side Bracket 2 MC: 2.14
側面ブラケット
2 350Y200034D DR スロットフレーム DR Slot Frame 1 MC: 2.15
DR スロット
3 350N200077C DR Slot Base Cover 2 MC: 2.31
ベースカバー
DR スロット
4 809Y200002J DR Slot Assembly 1 *3 MC: 2.14
アセンブリ
DR スロット DR Slot Angle Control
5 356N121143 2 MC: 2.17
角度規制ブラケット Bracket
DR スロット DR Slot Right-Side
6 350Y200039 1 MC: 2.12
右側面カバー Cover
7 317N200007D ネジキャップ Screw Cap 2 黒／ Black
DR スロット前面カ DR Slot Front-Side
8 898Y200368C 1 *1 MC: 2.11
バー Cover
DR スロット左側面 DR Slot Left-Side
9 350Y200038 1 MC: 2.13
カバー Cover
DR スロット保護 DR Slot Protective
10 382N200081 1 *4
シール Film
11 113Y200243 ESD67A 基板 ESD67A Board 1 *2 MC: 8.11
*1: REF10 を含む。

*1: Including REF10.
*2: 搭載号機は、日本：#xxx20222 以降、海外：#xxx20228 以降。
*2: For Japan: #xxx20222 or later. For overseas: #xxx20228 or later.
*3: DR-ID1270SE 搭載号機に使用する場合は J 版以上が必要。
DR-ID1270SE 対応のため、J 版にて DR スロットトップカバー 898Y200345 が変更となっている。
H 版以前を DR-ID1270SE 搭載号機に使用する場合は、故障前の DR スロットトップカバーを使用す
るか、別途 DR スロットトップカバー（898Y200345C）を手配すること。
*3: When using in the DR-ID1270 series SE equipped devices, J versions or later are required.
Since it is compatible with the DR-ID1270 series SE, the DR slot top cover (898Y200345) has been
changed for the J versions.
When using the H versions or earlier in the DR-ID1270 series SE equipped devices, procure a
reserve DR slot top cover (898Y200345C) before the DR slot top cover that is being used breaks.
*4: DR スロット前面カバーをキャスタロックとの干渉から保護するために、DR スロット前面カバーの
下部に貼付ける保護シール。
*4: In order to protect the DR slot's front cover from interfering with the caster locks, a protective film is
applied to the bottom section of the DR slot's front cover.
018-241-06A
SP-6
02A アーム 1
ARM 1
1 317N200007D ネジキャップ Screw Cap 1 黒／ Black -
2 898Y200330A アーム前面カバー Arm Front Cover 1 *2 MC: 2.4
米国以外／
3.1 341Y200033K アームアセンブリ Arm Assembly 1 For countries other MC: 4.6
than USA*1
3.2 341Y200034K アームアセンブリ Arm Assembly 1 MC: 4.7
*1
4 388Y200043 ケーブル保護プレート Cable Protection Plate 1 MC: 4.2
5 398Y200002 ケーブル保護カバー Cable Protection Cover 2 MC: 4.2
6 350Y200028E アーム左側面カバー Arm Left-Side Cover 1 MC: 4.2
7 898Y200337 アーム右側面カバー Arm Right-Side Cover 1
アームロック解除 Arm Unlock Handle
8.1 339Y200005 1
ハンドルアセンブリ Assembly
DAP キット用
Arm Unlock Handle
8.2 339Y200006 アームロック解除 1
Assembly for DAP Kit
ハンドルアセンブリ
Long label (for inside;
283.9 mm) (x1)
X 線源角度目盛銘板 X-ray Source Angle
9 898Y200527 1 Short label
キット Scale Label Kit
(for outside;
67.7 mm) (x2)
X-ray Source
10 405N130031 X 線源角度指標銘板 2
Angle Indicator Label
定期交換部品／
トルクヒンジ Torque Hinge
11 898Y200413 1 Periodically replaced MC: 7.10
アセンブリ（大） Assembly (Large)
parts
12.1 898Y200329A アーム背面カバー Arm Rear Cover 1 MC: 2.5
DAP 用アーム背面 Arm Rear Cover for
12.2 898Y200501 1 MC: 2.5
カバー DAP
13 898Y200336 アームキャップカバー Arm Cap Cover 1
Warning Label Warning Label
14 405N201298 1 米国向け／ For USA
for US Model for US Model
アーム回転部
15 347N200086 Arm Spacer 1 MC: 7.10
スペーサ
16.1 898Y200664 ガイドパーツ Guide parts 1
*1: X 線源部と X 線カートをつなぐケーブル、およびアームのアセンブリである。（ガススプリングアセ

ンブリ、アームカバー、トルクヒンジ（大）は含まれない。）
下記ケーブルは REF3 に含まれている。ケーブル破損時には、REF3 を発注すること。
136Y121509, 136Y121510, 136Y121511, 136Y121512, 136Y121513
*1: The assembly includes the arm and the cable connecting X-ray source section and X-ray cart. (Gas
spring assembly, arm cover, torque hinge (large) are not included.)
Following cables are included in REF3. When cables are damaged, order REF3.
136Y121509, 136Y121510, 136Y121511, 136Y121512, 136Y121513
*2: 米国では、REF2 発注時に REF14 を発注すること。
*2: For USA, order REF14 with REF2.
018-241-06C
SP-7
02B アーム 2
ARM 2
ガススプリング Periodically replaced
1 388Y200021D Gas Spring Assembly 1 MC: 4.5
アセンブリ parts
*1
2 319N130003A ガススプリング用軸 Shaft for Gas Spring 1 MC: 4.5
センターロックピン用 Wire for
3 383N130006D 1 MC: 4.4
ワイヤー Center Lock Pin
4 319N130058A センターロックピン Center Lock Pin 1 MC: 4.9
アーム開閉ロック Arm Open/Close
5.1 898Y200516 ブロックキット Lock Block kit 1
（USA） (for USA)
Arm Open/Close
アーム開閉ロック Lock Block kit
5.2 898Y200511 1 AppxMC4.
ブロックキット (for countries other
than USA)
*1: ガススプリング 2 本、アーム位置固定治具ピン、バラストを含む。

*1: Including gas springs (x2), position fixation jig pin and ballasts.
018-241-05C
SP-8
02C アーム 3
ARM 3
ハーネステンショナ Harness Tensioner
1 388N130046 1 MC: 4.6
ばね Spring
POCX020502003J.ai
018-241-05C
SP-9
03 タンク
TANK
1 898Y200340 バラストアセンブリ Ballast Assembly 1
2 350Y200168A タンク上面カバー Tank Top Cover 1 *1 MC: 7.1
3.1 405N200729F モノタンク銘板 Mono-tank Label 1 *2
HHS Certification HHS Certification 米国向け／
3.2 405N201211 1
Label Label For USA *6
4 314S0139 トルクヒンジ（小） Torque Hinge (Small) 1 Periodically replaced MC: 7.9
parts
MC: 7.5
5 350Y200068D タンクアームカバー Tank Arm Cover 2
MC: 7.6
6 898Y200339 摺動部アセンブリ Sliding Unit Assembly 1 MC: 7.7
タンク背面カバー Rear-Side
7 898Y200328 1 MC: 7.2
アセンブリ Tank Cover Assembly
8 898Y201022 モノタンクアセンブリ Mono-tank Assembly 1 *3 MC: 7.7
タンク前面カバー Front-Side
9 898Y200327 1 MC: 7.2
アセンブリ Tank Cover Assembly
10 603Y200006 Al シート（4 枚） Al Sheet (4pcs) 1 -
Head Arm
11 346N130052B ヘッドアーム補強板 1
Reinforcing Plate
モノタンク部角度計 Angle Scale V2 Kit
12 898Y200581 2 *4 AppxMC8.
V2 キット (Monotank)
*1: 米国以外では、REF2 を交換する場合、REF3.1 も発注して交換後の REF2 に貼付けること。

米国では、REF2 を交換する場合、REF3.1 および REF3.2 も発注して交換後の REF2 に貼付けること。
*1: For other than USA, when replacing REF2, be sure to place an order for REF3.1 and attach it on
REF2 after replacing.
For USA, when replacing REF2, be sure to place an order for REF3.1 and REF3.2, and attach them
on REF2 after replacing.
*2: REF3.1、REF3.2 を発注する場合、発注時に PART NO. と合わせて交換前の REF3.1 に記載されて
いる S/N と製造年月、システムの S/N も伝えること。
*2: When placing an order for REF3.1 and REF3.2, clarify the PART NO., and the S/N and manufacturing
date written down on REF3.1 before replacing it, and the system S/N.
*3: REF3.2 を含む。米国では、REF8 交換時に REF3.2 を貼付けること。他の地域では REF3.2 を廃棄
すること。
*3: Including REF3.2. For USA, attatch REF3.2 when replacing REF8. For other countries, dispose of
REF3.2.
*4: 左右両方のパーツを含む。交換時には、左右両方のパーツを交換すること。
*4: Including both the left side and right side parts. When replacing, replace both parts.
018-241-08C
SP-10
04A コリメータ 1
COLLIMATOR 1
200 mm type
cm 表記／ cm notation
1.1 898Y201024 コリメータアセンブリ Collimator Assembly 1 米国以外／ MC: 6.11
For countries other
than USA
300 mm type
inch 表記／
1.2 898Y201023 コリメータアセンブリ Collimator Assembly 1 MC: 6.11
inch notation
200 mm type
コリメータハンドル Collimator Handle 米国以外／
2.1 339Y200003 2 MC: 6.1
アセンブリ Assembly For countries other
than USA
コリメータハンドル Collimator Handle 300 mm type
2.2 339Y200004 2 MC: 6.1
アセンブリ Assembly 米国向け／ For USA
フィルタレール
3 363Y200024 Filter Rail Assembly 1 *3 MC: 6.5
アセンブリ
Tab Assembly For
光照射野調整用
4 340Y200030A Adjusting Light 2 *1 MC: 6.4
つまみアセンブリ
Irradiation Field
#76450153 号機
照射部カバー Irradiation Parts
5.1 350Y200135 1 以前／ MC: 6.12
アセンブリ Cover Assembly
#76450153 or earlier
#76450154 号機
照射部カバー Irradiation Parts
5.2 350Y200246 1 以降／ MC: 6.12
アセンブリ V2 Cover Assembly V2
#76450154 or later
LED スイッチ
6 128Y200054 LED Switch Assembly 1 *2 MC: 6.3
アセンブリ
cm 表記／ cm notation
米国以外／
7.1 350Y200136 メジャーアセンブリ Measure Assembly 1 MC: 6.2
For countries other
than USA
inch 表記／
7.2 350Y200137 メジャーアセンブリ Measure Assembly 1 inch notation MC: 6.2
樹脂製メジャー Resin measure
7.3 898Y2006708 1 MC: 6.2
アセンブリ（国内） assembly (for Japan)
コリメータ開度表示 Collimator aperture
8 898Y200627A 1
銘板キット indication label Kit
*1: 光照射野調整ノブとネジ隠しシールのアセンブリである。
*1: Including the Light Irradiation Field Adjustment Knob and the screw hidden seals.
*2: LED スイッチケーブル（ADC1）を含む。
*2: Including LED switch cable (ADC1).
*3: フィルタレール（付加フィルタ検出マイクロスイッチを含む）（2 個）、六角穴付きボルト（8 本）、
光照射野調整ノブ部ネジ隠しシール（2 個）を含む。付加 SW-ADC 基板間のケーブル（136Y200058）
は含まない。
*3: Including filter rails (with additional filter detection micro switch) (x2), hexagon socket head bolts (x8)
and screw hidden seals for light irradiation field adjustment knob (x2). Additional SW - ADC board
cable (136Y200058) is not included.
018-241-07C
SP-11
04B コリメータ 2
COLLIMATOR 2
ADC67A 基板 ADC67A Board
1 113Y200142 1 *1 MC: 6.7
コリメータ部 Collimator Unit
2 136Y200279A 1 *2 MC: 6.11
ケーブルアセンブリ Cable Assembly
Light Irradiation Field
内羽根用ポテンショナ Adjustment In-side
3 112Y200002 1 *3 MC: 6.10
アセンブリ Plate Potentioner
Assembly
Light Irradiation Field
外羽根用ポテンショナ Adjustment Out-side
4 112Y200001 1 *3 MC: 6.10
アセンブリ Plate Potentioner
Assembly
5 124Y200003E LED 基板アセンブリ LED Board Assembly 1 *5*7 MC: 6.9
HHS Certification HHS Certification 米国向け／ For USA
E 6 405N201211 1
Label Label *6
7 898Y200726 LED 基板カバー LED Cover 1
LED 調整ブラケット
8 347N130128 LED Spacer (Small) 1
小
LED 調整ブラケット
9 347N130127 LED Spacer (Large) 1
大
ADC 基板ブラケット ADC board bracket
10 898Y200940 1
キット Kit
*1: ADC67A 基板とネジ隠しシール 2 枚を含む。

*1: Including the ADC67A board and 2 screw hidden seals.
*2: ADC67A 基板∼モノタンク部サーミスタ間のケーブルとネジ隠しシールを含む。
*2: Including the cable between ADC67A board and the thermistor (Mono-tank section), and screw
hidden seals.
*3: ポテンショメータおよび ADC67A 基板用ケーブルを含む。
*3: Including the potentiometer and the ADC67A board cable.
*4: ミラーおよび固定部材を含む。
*4: Including the mirror and the securing member.
*5: 光照射野調整用スペーサ 4 個とネジ隠しシール 2 枚を含む。
*5: Including 4 Light Irradiation Field Adjustment Spacers and 2 screw hidden seals.
*6: 米国では、03-REF2、04A-REF1.2 の発注時に同時に REF6 を発注すること。発注時に、モノタンク
銘板に記載されている S/N と製造年月も伝えること。
*6: For USA, order REF6 with 03-REF2 or 04A-REF1.2. Clarify the S/N and manufacturing date written
down on the Mono-tank Label.
*7: #xxxx0150 以前で本パーツを交換する場合は LED カバーパーツ（898Y200726）を購入すること。
*7: When changing this part for #xxxx0150 or earlier, order the LED cover part (898Y200726).
018-241-07C
SP-12
05 オペレーションパネル
OPERATION PANEL
アクセスポイント
1.1 898Y200293A Access Point Assembly 1 国内向け／ For Japan IN1: 15.2
アセンブリ
アクセスポイント海外向け／
1.2 898Y200342 Access Point Assembly 1 IN1: 15.2
アセンブリ For Overseas
アクセスポイント
2 350Y200348 Access Point Cover 1 -
カバー
3 350Y200186B 背面カバーアセンブリ Rear Cover Assembly 1 MC: 5.3
モニタアーム
4 341Y200043A Monitor Arm Assembly 1 Periodically replaced MC: 5.1
アセンブリ
parts
ケーブルカバー V2 Cable Cover V2
5 898Y200484 （LAN ポート背面向 (LAN port for rear 1 *2 AppxMC9.
き） facing)
6 317S1102 USB キャップ USB Cap 2 -
国内向け：#xxx50171
DR-XD 1000 PC DR-XD 1000 PC 以前／ For Japan:
7.1 898Y200279F 1 MC: 5.4
アセンブリ Assembly #xxx50171 or earlier
*1
海外向け：
#76550171 以前、
米国向け：
#76850213 以前／
DR-XD 1000 PC DR-XD 1000 PC
7.2 898Y200280F 1 For overseas: MC: 5.4
#76550171 or
earlier, for USA:
#76850213 or earlier
*1
国内向け：#xxx50172
DR-XD 1000 PC DR-XD 1000 PC 以降／ For Japan:
7.3 898Y200504D 1 MC: 5.4
アセンブリ Assembly #xxx50172 or later
*1
海外向け：
#76550172 以降、
米国向け：
#76850214 以降／
DR-XD 1000 PC DR-XD 1000 PC
7.4 898Y200505D 1 For overseas: MC: 5.4
#76550172 or later,
for USA: #76850214
or later
*1
国内向け #xxx50xxx
DR-XD 1000 PC ア DR-XD 1000 PC
以降／ For Japan:
7.5 898Y201174 センブリ ( 日本仕向・ Assembly (for Japan, 1 MC: 5.4
#xxx50xxx or later
Windows 10 モデル ) Windows 10)
*1
海外 /USA/ ブラジル
DR-XD 1000 PC
DR-XD 1000 PC ア向け #xxx50xxx 以
Assembly
7.6 898Y201175 センブリ ( 海外仕向・ 1 降／ For Overseas MC: 5.4
(for overseas,
Windows 10 モデル ) (incl. USA, Brazil):
Windows 10)
#xxx50xxx or later
フロントベゼル
8 113Y130028A Front Bezel Assembly 1 *3 MC: 5.6
アセンブリ
モニタアームカバー Monitor Arm Cover
9 350Y200157 1 MC: 5.2
018-241-07C
SP-13
05 オペレーションパネル
OPERATION PANEL
DR-XD 1000PX
DR-XD 1000PX AP
13 114Y2335705A AP コンフィグ 1 国内向け／ For Japan -
Configuration Software
ソフトウェア
本体 - オペパネ間／
モニタケーブル保護 Protective Tube
14 316N130016 1 Between main unit IN1: 14.1
チューブ for Monitor Cable
and operation panel
モニタ部抗菌 Hydro-AG Sheet
15 345N130066A 1 IN1: 14.2
フィルム (Monitor)
PC Retention Plate
16 898Y200415 PC 保持板金 KIT 1 MC: 5.4
Kit
オペパネ中継 LAN Opeartion Panel LAN
17 898Y200496 1 MC: 5.7
コネクタキット Connector
ノイズフィルタ Noise Filter
18.1 138S0544 1
(E04SR130525A) (E04SR130525A)
ノイズフィルタ Noise Filter
18.2 138S0589 1
(E04RM251512) (E04RM251512)
オペパネ部ネジ隠し Screw-hole masking
19 351N130010 1
シール sheel
2LAN ポート対応 Connection within PC
20 898Y201181 ケーブル・カバー and GNC Upgrade 1 AppxMC16.
キット Kit
*1: Windows 7 Recovery Boot Disc、リカバリーメディアを含む。PC には DR-ID 1200MC、DR-ID

300CL、DR-XD 1000 メンテナンスユーティリティがインストール済み。
*1: Including Windows 7 Recovery Boot Disc and the recovery media. DR-ID 1200MC, DR-ID 300CL and
DR-XD 1000 Maintenance Utility have been installed on the PC.
*2: REF17、PC- オペパネ中継 LAN コネクタ間用 LAN ケーブル（300mm）、LAN ケーブル用フェライト
コアを含む。
*2: Including REF17, LAN cable (300 mm) between PC and operation panel relay LAN connector and
ferrite core for LAN cable.
*3: OPP67A 基板とフロントベゼルのアセンブリ。
*3: Assembly for the OPP67A board and front bezel.
018-241-07C
SP-14
06A 制御部 1（POW）

CONTROLLER 1 (POW)
POW67A 基板サービ POW67A Board
1 898Y200509A 1 MC: 3.4
スパーツキット Service Parts Kit
2 345Y200024 NFL 基板カバー NFL Board Cover 1 *2 MC: 3.3
3 113Y200055A NFL67A 基板 NFL67A Board 1 MC: 3.3
4.1 898Y200506 静音化ファンキット Silent Fan Kit 1 *1 AppxMC6.
4.2 119Y200017 ファン Fan 1 *1 MC: 3.2
5 345N130027B 遮板 Protect Plate 1 MC: 3.4
6 345N200073 パーマロイ Permalloy 1
*1: 日本国内の場合：#xxx50220 以前でファンを交換する場合は REF4.1 を購入すること。#xxx50221

以降でファンを交換する場合は REF4.2 を購入すること。
*1: For overseas: When changing the fan for #xxx50226 or earlier, order REF4.1. When changing the fan
for #xxx50227 or later, order REF4.2.
*2: NFL 基板カバーを交換する場合は、REF6 を同時に購入すること。
*2: When changing the NFL board cover, order REF6.
018-241-06A
SP-15
06B 制御部 2（DDC）

CONTROLLER 2 (DDC)
1.1 113Y120292C DDC67A 基板 DDC67A Board 1 *2 MC: 3.9
2.5V 出力用 DDC10
コネクタ追加版／
D D C67A B o a r d ( D DDC10 connector
DDC67A 基板（D 版
1.2 898Y201064 version, GPU option 1 additional version MC: 3.9
GPUOp 対応版）
compatible version) for 2.5 V output
S/N: *** 号機以降／
#*** or later
2 898Y200506 静音化ファンキット Silent Fan Kit 1 *1 AppxMC6.
OKAYA
3 138S0588 ノイズフィルタ Noise Filter 1 MC: 3.10
SUP-P10H-E1PR-4
*1: 日本国内の場合：#xxx50220 以前でファンを交換する場合は REF2 を購入すること。

*1: For overseas: When changing the fan for #xxx50226 or earlier, order REF2.
*2: 在庫終了後、REF1.2 に統合される。
*2: After the end of stock, REF1.1 will be integrated into REF1.2.
018-241-07C
SP-16
06C 制御部 3（INV）

CONTROLLER 3 (INV)
1 113Y120294E INV67A 基板 INV67A Board 1 MC: 3.6
2 113Y120241C FET67A 基板 FET67A Board 1 MC: 3.5
3 345Y200038 遮板 Protect Plate 1 MC: 2.24
018-241-05C
SP-17
06D 制御部 4（GNC）

CONTROLLER 4 (GNC)
1 350Y200080C USB カバー USB Cover 1 MC: 2.8
2 317S1102 USB キャップ USB Cap 2
3.1 113Y120290M GNC67A 基板 GNC67A Board 1 *2 MC: 3.7
LAN ポート 3 口モ
G N C67A B o a r d ( N デル／ 3 LAN ports
GNC67A 基板（N 版
3.2 898Y201065 version, GPU option 1 model MC: 2.8
GPUOp 対応版）
compatible version) S/N: *** 号機以降／
#*** or later
48V / 1A for GNC
F1,F2
A 4 137S1417 ヒューズ Fuse 2
M o d e l : L M10 ( D )
CDL (*1)
*1: メーカ / 大東通信機株式会社

*1: Manufacturer / Daito Communication Apparatus Co.
*2: 在庫終了後、REF3.2 に統合される。
*2: After the end of stock, REF3.1 will be integrated into REF3.2.
018-241-07C
SP-18
07 SE ロック部
SE LOCK UNIT
cm model
海外向け（DR-ID
1213SE 対応
1.1 822Y120004A SE ロック部 SE Lock Unit 1 MC: 2.24
モデル）／ For
Overseas (Model for
DR-ID 1213SE)
inch model
国内向け（DR-ID
1.2 822Y120003A SE ロック部 SE Lock Unit 1 1214SE 対応モデル） MC: 2.24
／ For Japan (Model
for DR-ID 1214SE)
2 316N200009 SE ロックキー SE Lock Key 1 MC: 2.25
018-241-05C
SP-19
08A フレーム 1
FRAME 1
バンパー Bumper
1 898Y200639 2 *4 IN1: 13.
（エラストマータイプ）(elastomer type)
2.1 401N200008C 滑止めシール Retaining Seal 2
D 2.2 401N200012 滑止めシール Retaining Seal 2 *3
段差乗越えブロック Lifting Block

3 898Y200343A 2 *1
リアキャスタ
4 898Y200344A Rear Caster Assembly 2 *2 MC: 2.23
アセンブリ
*1: REF2.1、段差乗越えブロック（346N120202）、段差乗越え軸（319N120369）、六角穴付ボルト
（304S3181070）、平座金（309S0120010）、ネジを含む。*3 の対象号機では、REF2.2 を合わせて購
入すること。
*1: Including REF2.1, lifting block (346N120202), lifting shaft (319N120369), hexagonheaded bolt
(304S3181070), ﬂat washer (309S0120010) and screws. For target machine of *3, order REF2.2 with REF3.
*2: REF3、リアキャスタ（367N200001A）を含む。*3 の対象号機では、REF2.2 を合わせて購入すること。
*2: Including REF3 and rear caster (367N200001A). For target machine of *3, order REF2.2 with REF4.
*3: 対象号機は下記のとおり。Target machine No. are followings.
国内向け (For Japan): #67050001 - #67050024, #67050031 - #67050042, #67050050, #67050052 -
#67050054, #67050066
海外向け (For Overseas): #67050025 - #67050030, #67050043 - #67050049, #67050051, #67050059
- #67050061
REF2.1 と REF2.2 では、カート側の角の形状が異なる。Shape of the corner of the cart side is
different from REF2.1 and REF2.2.
REF2.1：カート側の角が R5。Cart side corners are R5.
REF2.2：四隅の角が R10。Four corners are R10.
REF2.1 (NEW) REF2.2 (OLD)
POCX020508003J.ai
*4: バンパー（高剛性タイプ）1 個とバンパー固定専用ショルダーネジ M3x6 (x3) のキット。バンパー交

換時は、ネジも交換すること。
C 版（高剛性タイプ）では、材質を POM からエラストマー（ハイトレル）へ変更した。
#xxx319 号機以降は C 版を搭載している。形状・外観に変更なく互換性があるため、全号機に対し、
C 版の搭載は可能である。
*4: A kit for one bumper (high stiffness type) and fastening shoulder screws M3x6 (x3). When replacing
the bumpers, also replace the screws with the supplied screws.
With the C version (high stiffness type), the materials have been changed from POM (polyoxymethylene)
to an elastomer (Hytrel).
The #xxx319 or later are equipped with the C version. Since the shape and exterior are not changed
and they are interchangeable, C versions can be mounted on all of the devices.
018-241-06A
SP-20
08B フレーム 2
FRAME 2
バンパー Bumper
1 898Y200639 2 *2 IN1: 13.
（エラストマータイプ）(elastomer type)
フロントキャスタ Front Caster
2 367N200002A 2 φ 125 MC: 2.22
（ロック機能付き） (with Lock Function)
ロックペダル
3 331Y200007C Lock Pedal Assembly 1 MC: 2.21
アセンブリ
4 319N200113B ブレーキシャフト Brake Shaft 1 MC: 2.21
DR スロット支え DR Slot Locating MC: 2.18
5 898Y200550 1 *1
V 型台座キット Base Kit MC: 2.19
DR スロット用 DR Slot Damper
6 386S1151 1
ダンパー歯車 Gear
*1: 設置用の調整冶具を含む。
*1: Including positioning jigs for installation.
*2: バンパー（高剛性タイプ）1 個とバンパー固定専用ショルダーネジ M3x6 (x3) のキット。#xxx50319
以降。
*2: A kit for one bumper (high stiffness type) and fastening shoulder screws M3x6 (x3). #xxx50319 or
later.
018-241-07C
SP-21
09A DR スロット 1
DR SLOT 1
DR スロット
DR Slot
1 898Y200345C トップカバー 1 *1 MC: 8.1
Top Cover Assembly
アセンブリ
2.1 388N200084 引張りコイルバネ Extension Coil Spring 1 MC: 2.14
縦置き車載キット用 Coil Spring for
2.2 388N120162A 1 MC: 2.14
バネ In-Vehicle Kit
SE Reference Axis
3 898Y200346A SE 基準軸アセンブリ 1 MC: 8.3
Assembly
Panel Approaching
4 898Y200347A パネル寄せユニット 1 MC: 8.2
Unit
*1: DR-ID1270SE パネル搭載号機には C 版以上が必要。

*1: For the DR-ID1270 series SE equipped devices, C versions or later are required.
018-241-06C
SP-22
09B DR スロット 2
DR SLOT 2
SE 寄せコマ SE Approaching
1 898Y200349A 1 MC: 8.5
アセンブリ Frame Assembly
2 362N120016C 受 Receiver 3 MC: 8.8
3 386N100413D 緩衝部材 Shock Absorber 3 MC: 8.9
4 386S1123 緩衝部材 Shock Absorber 3 MC: 8.10
SE 充電端子 SE Charging terminal
5 898Y200348A 1 MC: 8.6
DSC65A 基板 DSC65A Board
6 857Y120033A 1 MC: 8.7
018-241-05C
SP-23
10A オプション 1
OPTION 1
USB Wireless Adapter
USB 無線アダプタ
1 898Y200355 Installing Position 1
取付け位置延長キット
Extension Kit
018-241-07C
SP-24
10B オプション 2
OPTION 2
1 331S0005 ディスクブレーキ Disc Brake 2
キャスター Caster
2 367S1140 2
(50mm 径 ) (50 mm diameter)
キャスター Caster
3 367S1141 2
(75mm 径 ) (75 mm diameter)
六角穴付き止めネジ Hexagon Socket Set
4 303S1000505 2
(M5x5) Screw (M5x5)
5 308S0791 M5 ボールプランジャ M5 Ball Plunger 1
フォークピンストッ Fork Pin Stopper
6 362N200041A 2
パ受け板金 Support Plate
フォークピン押さえ Fork Pin Presser
7 362Y200018A 2
板金 Plate
フォークピン押さえ Fork Pin Presser
8 332N200037A 2
板金支え Plate Support
9 331S0006 ブレーキレバー Brake Lever 1
ブレーキレバー逆側
ブレーキワイヤ面側／
10 383S0003 Brake Wire (200 mm) 1
(200mm) Brake lever reverse
side
ブレーキレバー側面
ブレーキワイヤ
11 383N200007 Brake Wire (187 mm) 1 側／
(187mm)
Brake lever side
ブレーキレバー逆側
ブレーキワイヤ
Brake Wire Outer 面側／
12 385N200015 アウターカバー 1
Cover (for 200 mm) Brake lever reverse
(200mm 用 )
side
ブレーキワイヤブレーキレバー側面
Brake Wire Outer
13 385N200016A アウターカバー 1 側／
Cover (for 187 mm)
(187mm 用 ) Brake lever side
14 340S0263 フォークピンノブ Fork Pin Knob 2
15 337Y200002 ホイール Assy Wheel Assy 1
018-241-05C
SP-25
10C オプション 3
OPTION 3
1 386N200056 カートベース緩衝材 Cart base Pad 6
2 367S0127 ゴム脚 Rubber Leg 4
フォーク部／
3 364N200021 エッジガード 620mm Edge Guard 620 mm 2
Fork area
フォーク部／
Fork area
フォーク部／
Fork area
モニタ受け部／
6 364N200020 エッジガード 550mm Edge Guard 550 mm 1 Monitor receiving
area
ハンドル部／
Handle area
角部保護スポンジ Corner Protector
8 386N200071 4
(小) Sponge (small)
角部保護スポンジ Corner Protector
9 386N200072 4
(大) Sponge (large)
モニタ受け部／
Monitor receiving
area (x3)
10 386N200054A ハンドル部緩衝材 Handle Pad 6
モニタ受け下部／
Monitor lower
receiving area (x3)
Monitor tensioner
11 382N200070 モニタ固定ベルト 2
strap
ハンドスイッチ固定 Hand Switch
12 382N200071 1
ベルト Tensioner Strap
ハンドル固定ベルト Handle Tensioner
13 316N200015A 2
(黄) Strap (yellow)
DR Slot Pad
DR スロット緩衝材
14 382N200085 Tensioner Velcro 2
固定マジックテープ
Fastener
15 386N200057B DR スロット緩衝材 DR Slot Pad 1
DR-XD 1000 アーム DR-XD 1000 Arm
16.1 386N200067 1
ヘッド部緩衝材 Head Pad
モノタンク部保護用 Mono-tank Pad 縦置き車載キット用
16.2 386N200122 1
緩衝材（US 用） (for US) ／ For In-Vehicle Kit
Monitor tensioner 縦置き車載キット用
17 316N200045 モニタ固定ベルト 1
strap ／ For In-Vehicle Kit
DR スロット固定用 Dummy Cassette for 縦置き車載キット用
18 346N200645 1
ダミーカセッテ Fixing the DR Slot ／ For In-Vehicle Kit
縦置き車載キット Label for In-Vehicle
19.1 405N201941 1
銘版 Kit
縦置き車載キット Label for In-Vehicle
19.2 405N201952 1
銘版（US 用） Kit (for US)
モニタ保護用縦置き車載キット用
20 386N200121A Monitor Pad 1
緩衝材／ For In-Vehicle Kit
018-241-05C
SP-26
10D オプション 4
OPTION 4
外部画像処理 External image External image
1 814Y200271 1
ユニットアセンブリ processing unit Assy processing unit
GPU-GNC
GPU-GNC External image
1 2 136Y202189 communications 1
通信ケーブル processing unit
5 cable
GPU-DDC 電源 GPU-DDC power
External image
3 136Y202252 ケーブル（GPU ∼ cable (GPU ~ relay 1
processing unit
リレーコネクタ） connector)
GPU-DDC 電源 GPU-DDC power External image
4 136Y202251 ケーブル（DDC ∼ cable (DDC ~ relay 1 processing upgrade
リレーコネクタ） connector) kit
外部画像処理 Cover Assy for External image
5 350Y200664 ユニット用カバー external image 1 processing upgrade
アセンブリ processing unit kit
POCX020510005J.ai
018-241-08C
SP-27
11 治工具
TOOLS
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO Jig for installing Jig
DR スロット支え V
TAKIGEN POWER for installing DR
9 347N130138 型台座設置用治具 1 *3*6 MC: 2.18
GREEN Slot Locating Base
（基準側）
モニタアームから異 (Reference side)
音が発生した場合に Jig for installing Jig
1 891S0026 モニタアーム用オイル Monitor Arm Oil 1 MT: 4.6 DR スロット支え V
使用。 for installing DR Slot
10 347N200122 型台座設置用治具 1 *3*6 MC: 2.19
Using when noise is Locating Base
（反基準側）
generated from the (Anti-reference side)
monitor arm.
TAKIGEN DRY
*1: フリクション調整用オイルガン、フリクション調整用オイル、フリクション調整用オイルガン取付け
POWER GREEN ニップルのキットである。このため、REF5、REF6、REF7 の購入は不要である。
鍵の抜き差しに違和 *1: Including Friction Adjustment Grease Gun, Friction Adjustment Grease and Friction Adjustment
感がある場合に使用。
2 891S0023 キー用オイル Key Oil 1
Using when there is a
PM: 4.5 Grease Gun Attaching Nipple. Then it is unnecessary to purchase REF5, REF6, REF7.
feeling of strangeness *2: 定期保守時、使用済みのフリクション調整用オイルを使用せず新品を購入して使用すること。
in inserting and
removing the key. *2: Do not use used Friction Adjustment Grease, buy and use a new one when performing the preventive
ガススプリングを取 maintenance.
外す際に、アーム位 *3: DR スロット支え V 型台座キット（898Y200550）には両側の V 型台座と台座設置用の調整冶具を含む。
置を固定するために
使用。
このため、キット購入時にはこのパーツ単品での購入は不要。
アーム位置固定 Arm Position
3 319N130133
治具ピン Securing Jig Pin
1 Using when *3: Locating bases on both sides and adjustment jigs for installing base are included in the DR Slot
removing the gas Locating Base Kit (898Y200550). Then it is unnecessary to purchase this part separately when
spring for fixing the
arm position. purchasing the kit.
*4 *4: このパーツはガススプリングサービスパーツアセンブリ (388Y200021) に含まれるため、アーム交換
フリクション調整用オ Friction Adjustment 時にはこのパーツ単品での購入は不要。
4 898Y200255 1 *1*5 PM:6.1
イルガンキット Grease Gun Kit
ヤマダコーポレー *4: Since this part is included in the gas spring service parts assembly (388Y200021), it is unnecessary
ション高圧カート to purchase this part separately when changing the arm.
フリクション調整用 Friction Adjustment リッジグリースガン
5 890S0034 1 *5: 定期メンテナンス時にアームフリクション機構へのグリスアップのために使用。
オイルガン Grease Gun CH-650LL
YAMADA CH-650LL *5: Using for grease up to the arm friction mechanism during preventive maintenance.
*5
*6: DR スロット支え V 型台座を交換するときに使用。
住鉱潤滑剤株式会社
グリース（高荷重 *6: Using when replacing the DR Slot locating base.
用リチウムグリー *7: INV 基板、FET 基板、モノタンクのネジ締結時に使用。INV board: 200cNm。FET board: 200cNm。
フリクション調整用 Friction Adjustment ス）スミグリス EP
6 891S0024
オイル Grease
1
No.2 400G Mono-tank: 60cNm。
Sumigrease EP *7: Using when fixing the INV board, FET board and mono-tank. INV board: 200cNm. FET board:
No.2 400G
200cNm. Mono-tank: 60cNm.
*2*5
ミスミグリース
フリクション調整用 Friction Adjustment ニップル GPA6A
7 372S0803 オイルガン Grease Gun 1 MISUMI Grease
取付けニップル Attaching nipple nipple GPA6A
*5
東日製作所
RTD260CN, (+) ビッ
ト B-2, (+) ビット IN1: 10.
トルクドライバ Torque Screwdriver B-3 のキット。 MC: 3.5
8 890Y200065 1
キット Kit Kit for TOHNICHI MC: 3.6
RTD260CN, (+) bit MC: 7.
B-2, and (+) bit B-3.
*7
018-241-08C
SP-28
12 ケーブル
CABLE
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ESC 中継 -DSC
E 32 136Y200161 ケーブル Cable 1 3/3
AC 電源ケーブル（日本） ESC Relay-DSC
E 1 111K86241 ケーブル Cable 1 2/3
AC power cable (for Japan) FET-FU_P 中継
E 33 136Y200201 ケーブル Cable 1 2/3
USB ケーブル（CSL_PC- FET-FU_P Relay
E 2 136N200049E ケーブル Cable 1 GNC） 2/3 E 34 136Y200684 ケーブル Cable 1 ESD67A-DSC(P) 2/3
USB cable (CSL_PC-GNC) LAN Cable 1080 mm
L 型マイクロ USB ケーブル E 35 136Y200409B ケーブル Cable 1 GNC-PC 間／ 3/3
E 3 136N200050 ケーブル Cable 1 2/3
(MicroB) 0.5 m Between GNC board and PC
USB ケーブル（GNC 基板エリ LAN Cable 300 mm
E 4 136Y120114 ケーブル Cable 2 ア） 2/3 E 36 136Y200485A ケーブル Cable 1 オペレーションパネル内／ 2/3
USB cable（GNC board field） Inside operation panel
インレット−サーキットプロ FAN 用ショートアダプタ
E 37 136Y200570 ケーブル Cable 1 2/3
E 5 136Y121493B ケーブル Cable 1 テクタ 2/3 Short adapter for FAN
Inlet - Circuit protector Manufacturer's parts number:
E 38 138S0009 フェライトコア Ferrite Core 1
ノイズフィルタ -NFL E04SR200932
E 6 136Y121494E ケーブル Cable 1 2/3
Noise filter - NFL Manufacturer's parts number:
POW- バッテリ E04SR130525A
E 7 136Y121495C ケーブル Cable 1 2/3
POW-Battery Manufacturer's parts number:
E 8 136Y121496E ケーブル Cable 1 POW-DDC 2/3 E04RM251512
E 9 136Y121498B ケーブル Cable 1 POW-GNC 2/3 Manufacturer's parts number:
E 10 136Y121499C ケーブル Cable 1 GNC-FET 2/3 E04SR130525A
E 11 136Y121500C ケーブル Cable 1 GNC-DDC 2/3
E 12 136Y121501F ケーブル Cable 1 GNC-OPP 2/3 *1: 付加 SW-ADC 基板間のケーブル（136Y200058）と遮光テープのキット。
E 13 136Y121502C ケーブル Cable 1
GNC- 曝射 SW/Key
2/3 *1: Kit for Additional SW - ADC board cable (136Y200058) and the light shielding tape.
GNC- Exposure SW/Key
E 14 136Y121506E ケーブル Cable 1 FET-INV 2/3
E 15 136Y121508C ケーブル Cable 1 GNC-INV 3/3
GNC-DSC 中継
E 16 136Y121517E ケーブル Cable 1 3/3
GNC-DSC Relay
FUJIFILM 製 AP 専用 LAN ケー
ブル（GNC-AP）
E 17 136Y121519A ケーブル Cable 1 2/3
LAN cable for FUJIFILM-made
AP (GNC-AP)
E 18 136Y200004 ケーブル Cable 1 INLET FG 2/3
接地ワイヤ
E 19 136Y200029C ケーブル Cable 1 2/3
Ground wire
FG ケーブル 3m
E 20 136Y200030C ケーブル Cable 1 2/3
FG cable 3 m
E 21 136Y200051C ケーブル Cable 1 DDC-FAN 2/3
ADC- 付加 SW
E 22 898Y200599 ケーブル Cable 1 ADC-Additional SW 3/3
*1
E 23 136Y200059E ケーブル Cable 1 CSL_PC-OPP 2/3
E 24 136Y200060C ケーブル Cable 1 CSL_PC-DDC 2/3
サーキットプロテクタ−ノイ
E 25 136Y200061B ケーブル Cable 1 ズフィルタ 2/3
Circuit protector - Noise filter
E 26 136Y200064B ケーブル Cable 1 DDC-DAP Relay 2/3
E 27 136Y200065E ケーブル Cable 1 GNC-DAP 2/3
E 28 136Y200087C ケーブル Cable 1 NFL-POW 2/3
中継、TH-ADC
E 29 136Y200099C ケーブル Cable 1 3/3
Relay, TH-ADC
DAP_15V- 中継
E 30 136Y200112A ケーブル Cable 1 2/3
DAP_15V-Relay
GNC ショート
E 31 136Y200113 ケーブル Cable 1 3/3
GNC short
018-241-08C
SP-29
13A 回路図（#xxxx0171 号機以前）

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (#xxxx0171 or earlier)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
共通 NF POW7 POW7 BAT_A

111K86241 INLET 136Y121493 136Y200061 136Y121494 NFL1 NFL1 136Y121495 +
LINE_L LINE1 LOAD3 + 1 1
LOAD_L M5
ACｺｰﾄﾞ L CP 1 3 1
NFL + 2 2
-
LINE2
POW67A -
2 3 3
LINE_N ﾊﾞｯﾃﾘ
67A
3 4 4
N 2 4 -
AP
CP LOAD_N LOAD4 DF5A-3S-5C 5
A
SVH-41T-P1.1
A A
PV
VHR-4N
136N200050 1
FG FN1.25-4 DF5A-1822SC 113Y120300 113Y120293 B4P-VH 6
136Y200004 SPS-61T-250 FN2-4 M3

2
E04SR130525A 7
DS-250PU NFL2 NFL2 PL
USB 3
SPS-61T-250 NRF110-10 M4
4 SPS-61T-250
DS-250PU
DS-250PU /IDEC 1
NJC-207-PM
5 SUP-P10H-R-4 2
半田
6
FN2-4 /OKAYA 3 POW8 POW8
VLP-03V-1
小型
7 1
BAT_B
8
SVF-61T-P2.0 2
136Y121519
AP
E04SR130525A
9 3 1
GNC16 GNC16
10
11
1
2
GNC67A NFT-12 136Y200087
POW1
1
POW1 4
5
2
3 M5
+
-
Bluetooth 無線LAN 12
113Y120290 2 6 4
(ﾊﾞｰｺｰﾄﾞﾘｰﾀﾞｰ) (院内用) 有線LAN

3
4
3 7 5 ﾊﾞｯﾃﾘ
1/2
B
ｷｬｯﾌﾟｷｬｯﾌﾟ (院内用)
LX40-12P 5 VLP-03V-1
SVF-61T-P2.0
8
9
6
7
B PV B
6
10 M3
7
GNC13 GNC13 POW2 POW2 PL
8 136Y121498 XADRP-10V NJC-207-PM
1 1
GND B10B-XADSS-N-A SXA-001T-P0.6 半田
ON/OFF SW 2 2
POW_RX_P
5-554169-3 95552-2887 POW6 POW6
CSL_PC 136N200049 3 3
POW_RX_N
ADC_SCK_P
4 4
POW_TX_P 1
POW-ADC_1 LOAD LINE
Avalue Technology USB B ADC_SCK_N
GNC20 5 5
POW_TX_N 2
POW-ADC_2
ADC_SDO_P 2 1
6 6
GND 3
POW-ADC_3
GSB42213EU ADC_SDO_N
7
8
7
8
POW_BAT_CHG_EN 4
ADC_SDI_P
POW-ADC_4 CP
POW_READY 5
POW-ADC_5
COM1 COM2 COM3 9 9 ADC_SDI_N
POW_TEMP_WARNI 6
POW-ADC_6
2 1
・ﾊｰﾄﾞﾃﾞｨｽｸ A GND
・ｷｰﾎﾞｰﾄﾞ GNC21 10 10
POW_TEMP_ERROR 7
POW-ADC_7 →
11 11 CS 3 ADC67
・磁気ｶｰﾄﾞﾘｰﾀﾞｰ POW_BAT_ERROR 8
POW-ADC_8
48408-0003
C ・ﾊﾞｰｺｰﾄﾞﾘｰﾀﾞｰ 12 12
POW_LAMP_ON PHR-8 C
etc. 共通 ICP30-PN-11-20-30
1
5
DEU-9SF-F0 13 13
GND B08B-PH-K-S SPH-002T-P0.5S
DEU-9SF-F0 DEU-9SF-F0
USBｱﾀﾞﾌﾟﾀ POW_LAMP_ON /日本ｻｰﾓ
136Y120114 A
14 14
POW9 POW9
GNC22 15 15
RSV_O 136Y121496
16 16
RSV_I 1
48408-0003 17 17 2
D※C-20-24S-PKG100 DCAC_ON
D※C-20-24S-PKG100 共通 18 18
GND XAP-02V-1
136Y120114 19 19
POW_MODE B02B-XASK-1 SXA-001T-P0.6
USBｱﾀﾞﾌﾟﾀ A
136Y200059 GNC23 20 20
GND POW3 POW3 FET02 FET02 + -
21
POW_5V
48408-0003 22 + 1 1
FET01
B20B-XADSS-N(LF)(SN) XADRP-20V MD1
DC+ 3 2
23
MD2
1
XAP-09V-1 136Y121501 GNC25 GNC25 - 2

OPP3 GNC6 GNC6 24
GND 4 XLP-02V FET05
SXA-001T-P0.6 DC- B02P-XL-HDB
+5V 1
SXF-41T-P0.7 136Y121506
1
B24B-XADSS FET+
D
OPP3 MD1 2
XADRP-24V -N(LF)(SN) M5 + FET+
D
2
3 B04P-XL XLP-04V FET03 FET03
MD2 SXA-001T-P0.6 FN5.5-5
OPP1 OPP1 SXF-41T-P0.7
FET67A
3
OPP4 OPP4 4 GND 4 1
FET-
付属ｹｰﾌﾞﾙ 1
1
5 XAP-04V-1 2
M6 - FET-
2
B04B-XASK-1(LF)(SN) SXA-001T-P0.6 113Y120241 FN5.5-6
2 6
3
DDC01 DDC01 XAP-02V-1 B02B-XASK
7
GNC11 GNC11
4
136Y121499 SXA-001T-P0.6 -1-A
XAP-02V-1 8
POW_IN 1
DDC67A XAP-04V-1
5 1
SXA-001T-P0.6 9
POW_GND 2
6
10
2
FET04 SXA-001T-P0.6
7 XLP-02V
4
8
11
113Y120292 B02P-XL-HDB SXF-41T-P0.7
XAP-02V-1
9
12
DDC09 FU-P FU-S
SXA-001T-P0.6 DDC09 136Y200201
XADRP-12V B12B-XADSS-1
10
DDC_OVP 1 1 1
fu_1
SXA-001T-P0.6
11
DDC04 DDC04 2 2 2
fu_2
12 GNC26 GNC26 136Y121500
電源 GNC2 GNC2 1 DC+15V_GND POW_GND 3
XARR-02V XAP-02V-1
E E
13 10
DC+15V XAP-03V-1 SXAM-001T-P0.6 SXA-001T-P0.6
14 9 DC+15V 1 4
DC-15V B03B-XASK-1 SXA-001T-P0.6
DC+24V 5 2
15 8
DC-15V_GND FAN-A
DC+15V_GND 2 5
DDC06 DDC06
OPP5 16 7
DC+24V_GND
OPP67A 17 6 DC+24V_GND 6 3
DC+24V 136Y200051 4 1
+ FAN-A
GND 3 6
FAN-A_DC 1 3 2
18 5
DDC用
19 4 NC 7
FAN-A_LOCK 2 2 3
Lock
113Y120291 DC-15V 4
5557-06R 5566-06A FAN-A_GND 3 1 4
- 119S0165
20 3
DC-15V_GND 8
5556PBTL FAN-B_DC 4
179228-4 136Y200029
21 2
5
22 1 5557-08R FAN-B_LOCK 179228-4 179518-1
OPP6 23 5556-08A 5556PBTL FAN-B_GND 6
179518-1 292254-4
24 XAP-06V-1
SXA-001T-P0.6
GNC15 GNC15 DDC08 DDC08 B06B-XASK-1 SXA-001T-P0.6 FAN1 FGｸﾘｯﾌﾟ
25
GNC24 GNC24
DDC07 DDC07
26
1 CNT_GND 1 1
CNT_GND 4 1
+ FAN1
F
27
FAN-1_ON 2 2
FAN-1_ON FAN1_DC 1 3 2
F
2
POW用
28
3 FAN-2_ON 3 3
FAN-2_ON FAN1_LOCK 2 2 3
Lock
29 4 4 3 1
4 FAN-3_ON FAN-3_ON FAN1_GND 4
- 119S0165
30
5 FAN_LOCK 5 5
FAN_LOCK FAN2_DC 4
179228-4 R8-5
31
6 CNT_GND 6 6
CNT_GND FAN2_LOCK 5
179228-4 179518-1
32
7 PC+24V_ON 7 7
PC+24V_ON FAN2_GND 6
179518-1 292254-4
33
8 NC 8
XAP-08V-1 XAP-07V-1 FAN3_DC 7
34 8
9 SXA-001T-P0.6 SXA-001T-P0.6 B07B-XASK-3 FAN3_LOCK
35
B08B-XASK-1(LF)(SN) DDC02 DDC02 FAN3_GND 9 136Y200030
10
36
11 GNC1 GNC1 1 XAP-09V-1
DC-12V_2_GND
XADRP-36V B09B-XASK-2 SXA-001T-P0.6 FN1.25-4 FN1.25-4
12
DC-12V_2 1 3
DC-12V_2
SXA-001T-P0.6 13
DC-12V_1 3 2
DC-12V_1_GND 1
DDC03 DDC03 DAP-S DAP-P
UL1007-AWG26黒 14
DC-12V_2_GND 2 4
DC-12V_1 136Y200064 NFT-6 136Y200112 2
CSL_PC B14B-XADSS-1 DC-12V_1_GND 4
DC+15V 1 1 1
E04SR200932 XADRP-14V 2 2 2
G 付属ｹｰﾌﾞﾙ 1 5557-04R 5566-04A DC_GND G
1
0.5-3.7 SXA-001T-P0.6 MP-122C
3 3 5556-04A 5557-04R 5556PBTL
136Y200060 5556PBTL NFT-8 B02B-XASK-1 XAP-02V-1 XAP-02V-1 XARR-02V DAP
2 2
DDC05 DDC05
4 4 SXA-001T-P0.6 SXA-001T-P0.6 SXAM-001T-P0.6 1
PC24V
→ 2 DDC67 PC24V
1
PC24V 6
PC_GND 2
PC24V_GND
5557-04R 5559-04P
PC_GND
2
付属ｹｰﾌﾞﾙ DAP
ﾓﾆﾀ/ﾊﾟﾈﾙ部 5556PBTL 5558PBTL 2 OPP67 ← 7
XHP-2 B2B-XH-2 3
SW SW-P GNC9 GNC9 GNC10 GNC10 SXH-001T-P0.6
136Y121502 136Y200065 8
1 1 1
SHOT_SW1 EX_RS232_RX 1 4
128Y200034 2 2 2
DGND EX_RS232_TX 2 9
曝射SW C2U-40 (黒) 3 3 3

SHOT_SW2 3 5
/ｵﾑﾛﾝ 4 4 4
DGND
XAP-06V-1 5 5
XARR-06V 5
NC B03B-XASK-1(LF)(SN) XAP-03V-1
H SXA-001T-P0.6 6 6
SXAM-001T-P0.6 6
SECURITY_KEY_SW SXA-001T-P0.6 機種ユニット
H
7 2335 -
DGND
Key-S Key-P 名称回路図補助名称
Main Key NO
1 1 1
B07B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN) コード Z22N100005
POC-X
Rev. 1
1 2
316Y200001 2
PHR-7
COM
XAP-02V-1 XARR-02V SPH-002T-P0.5S 頁
S-187-SU/ﾀｷｹﾞﾝ SXA-001T-P0.6 SXAM-001T-P0.6 富士フイルム株式会社 2 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
018-241-08C
SP-30
13A 回路図（#xxxx0171 号機以前）

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (#xxxx0171 or earlier)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
FET+
FET-
本体
NFT-12
ｱｰﾑ部
INV_DC+ INV_DC-
A A
FN5.5-6 FN5.5-6
M3
INV_FG NFT-10 136Y121509 TNK_FG
M6
+ - FG TANK
FN2-M3 ﾌﾛﾝﾄ
DC+ DC- FN2-4
J2 J2 136Y121510
136Y200113 M4 M3
GNC3 GNC3 INV12 CN12 (下) F1_ NFT-11 F1
1
E04SR211132 136Y121508
2 F1 F1
INV_mA_SET 1 1
F2_ FN2-4 FN2-M3 F2
3
AGND 2 2
4 3 3 F2 F2
INV_IF_SET
FN2-4 FN2-M3
5
AGND 4 4
6
INV_KV_SET 5 5
M4 136Y121511 M3
R1_ NFT-11 R1
7
AGND 6 6
R1 R1
8
INV_KV_FB 7 7
8 8 R2_ FN2-4 FN2-M3 R2

AGND
B R2 R2 B
PHR-8 B8B-PH-SM4-TB INV_mA_FB 9 9
FN2-4 FN2-M3
SPH-002T-P0.5S AGND 10 10
INV3 INV3 136Y121512 TNK3 TNK3

B10B-XASK-1(LF)(SN) XAP-10V-1 XAP-10V-1 NFT-6
1 1
SXA-001T-P0.6 SXA-001T-P0.6
GNC67A INV67A 2
3
2
3
TNK67A
GNC4 GNC4 INV13 CN13 (下)
113Y120290 113Y120294 4 4
359Y200006
GND_INV 1 1
PAP-04V-S PAP-04V-S
2/2 EXP_ON 2 2
SPHD-002GW-P0.5 SPHD-002GW-P0.5
NV_ALM_RESET 3 3
INV2 INV2 TNK2 TNK2
HV_OVP 4 4
HV_OCP 5 5 1 1
HV_LVP 6 6 2 2
C HV_TEMP 7 7
PAP-02V-S C
DET_OPEN 8 8
SPHD-002GW-P0.5 PAP-02V-S
TANK_TEMP 9 9
fu_1 SPHD-002GW-P0.5
STB_OK 10 10
fu_2 SW-Th
FIL_OVP 11 11
POW-ADC_1
1 1
12 12
FIL_OCP POW-ADC_2
2 2 温度Fuse
FIL_TEMP 13 13
POW-ADC_3
GND_INV 14 14
POW-ADC_4
XAP-02V-1 XARR-02V
POW-ADC_5
SXA-001T-P0.6 SXAM-001T-P0.6
B14B-XASK-1(LF)(SN) XAP-14V-1 XAP-14V-1 POW-ADC_6
SXA-001T-P0.6 SXA-001T-P0.6 POW-ADC_7

TNK1 TNK1
POW-ADC_8 E04RM251512
1
GNC5 GNC5 INV11 CN11 (上)
2 POW6 ← 2
D
VCC_+15V_INV 1 1 3
D
2 2
GND_INV VHR-3N
VCC_-15V_INV 3 3
SVH-21T-P1.1
INV1 INV1
GND_INV 4 4
NFT-6
TH-P
VCC_+24V_INV 5 5 1
M3
GND_INV 6 6 2 1 1
3 2 2 ｻｰﾐｽﾀ
B06B-XASK-1(LF)(SN) XAP-06V-1 XAP-06V-1
SXA-01T-P0.6 SXA-01T-P0.6 VHR-3N DF3AA-2EP-2C DF3-2S-2C
SVH-21T-P1.1 DF3-EP2428PC DF3-2428SC
136Y200099 ADC5 ADC5

1
2
E E
PAP-02V-S S04B-PASK-2
SPHD-002T-P0.5
ADC7-S ADC7-P ADC7 ADC7
1 1 1
ADC3
2 2 2
1
3 3 3
1
GND
4 4 4
2
3
2
3
信号 PMC1
5 5 5 VCC
136Y121513 6
7
6
7
6
7
ADC67A PHR-3
SPH-002T-P0.5S
半田
8 8 8
113Y120295 ADC4
GNC14 GNC14 XAP-08V-1 PAP-08V-S 1 1
GND
SXA-001T-P0.6 XARR-08V SPHD-002T-P0.5
LED_SW 1
SXAM-001T-P0.6
2 2
3
信号 PMC2
F 付加SW1 2
S08B-PASK-2 3
VCC F
VCC+12V 3
半田
4
GND ADC6-S ADC6-P ADC6 ADC6 S3B-PH-K-S PHR-3
LED_ON 5
1 1 1 SPH-002T-P0.5S
LED_SW
付加SW2 6
2 2 2
付加SW1 ADC2
NC 7
LMP67A
3 3 3
VCC+12V 1
4 4 4
GND 2
B07B-XASK-1(LF)(SN) XAP-07V-1 5 5 5
LED_ON
SXA-01T-P0.6 6 6 6 半田 113Y120296
付加SW2
S2B-PH-K-S PHR-2
GNC8 GNC8 CN31 CN31 XAP-06V-1
136Y121517 136Y200161 SPH-002T-P0.5S
SXA-01T-P0.6 XARR-06V XAP-06V-1
VCC_+12V_1 1 1
2 2 SXAM-001T-P0.6 SXA-001T-P0.6 ADC8 ADC8 SW1

VCC_+12V_1 136Y200058
DGND 3 3
ADC1 ADC1 1 1
DGND 4 4 128N200006 2 2 付加SW1

DSC65A
1 NO_ 1
G
LEDｽｲｯﾁ 1 COM_ 2
3 G
B4B-PH-K-S PHR-4 DSC-S DSC-P PHR-4 4

SW2
SPH-002T-P0.5S SPH-002T-P0.5S 113Y120125 LP01-15CCKNG4K-165E
1 12
半田 179228-2
/NKKｽｲｯﾁｽﾞ PHR-4 1
2 11
179518-1
3 10
FP2563A
SPH-002T-P0.5S 2
付加SW2
GNC7 GNC7 4 9 CN41 CN41
-405 XAP-02V-1
TRANS_TXOP1 1 5 8 1
SXA-001T-P0.6
TRANS_TXON1 2 6 7 2
OUTPUT
TRANS_RXIP1 3 7 6 3
TURMINAL
TRANS_RXIN1 4 8 5 4
BOARD
SE_RS232_TX 5 9 4 5
SE_RS232_RX 6 10 3 6
SE_RSV_IN 7 11 2 7
SE_CONNECT 8 12 1 8
H H
1-179228-2 1-179228-2 機種 2335 ユニット -
B8B-ZR-SM4-TF(LF)(SN) ZHR-8 179518-1 179518-1 SHR-08V-S-B 名称回路図補助名称 POC-X
SZH-002T-P0.5 179610-1 179610-1 SSH-003T-P0.2-H
SZH-003T-P0.5 1-292254-2 コード Z22N100005 Rev. 1
頁
富士フイルム株式会社 3 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
018-241-08C
SP-31
13B 回路図（#xxxx0172 号機以降）

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (#xxxx0172 or later)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
共通 NF POW7 BAT_A
111K86241 INLET 136Y121493 136Y200061 136Y121494 NFL1 NFL1
POW7
136Y121495 +
LINE_L LINE1 LOAD3 + 1 1
LOAD_L
Hospital LAN ACｺｰﾄﾞ L CP 1 3 1
NFL + 2 2 M5
-
LINE2
POW67A -
Battery
2 3 3
LINE_N
67A
3 4 4
N 2 4 -
AP
A
SVH-41T-P1.1
A A
PV
VHR-4N
1
FG FN1.25-4 DF5A-1822SC 113Y120300 113Y120293 B4P-VH 6
2 136Y200004 SPS-61T-250 FN2-4 M3

E04SR130525A 7
USB 3
SPS-61T-250 NRF110-10 M4
Fujifilm_AP
4 SPS-61T-250
DS-250PU /IDEC 1
NJC-207-PM
136Y200485
136N200050
5 DS-250PU SUP-P10H-R-4/OKAYA 2
半田
6 3 POW8 POW8
7 FN2-4
VLP-03V-1 1
8 GNC16 GNC16 BAT_B

SVF-61T-P2.0 2
E04SR130525A
9 1 3 1
136Y121519
10
11
2
3
GNC67A NFT-12 136Y200087
POW1
1
POW1 4
5
2
3 M5
+
-
Bluetooth Hospital LAN
Battery
12 4
113Y120290 2 6 4
(ﾊﾞｰｺｰﾄﾞﾘｰﾀﾞｰ) (院内用) 5 3 7 5
B
ｷｬｯﾌﾟｷｬｯﾌﾟ LX40-12P 6 1/2 VLP-03V-1 8 6
B PV B
7
SVF-61T-P2.0 9 7
8 10 M3
5-554169-3 95552-2887 136Y121498 XADRP-10V NJC-207-PM
ON/OFF SW 136N200049 1 1
2 2
POW_RX_P
USB B GNC20 POW6 POW6
CSL_PC 3 3
POW_RX_N
ADC_SCK_P
GSB42213EU 4 4
POW_TX_P 1
POW-ADC_1 LOAD LINE
Avalue Technology 5 5 ADC_SCK_N
POW_TX_N 2
POW-ADC_2
136Y200409 ADC_SDO_P 2 1
6 6
GND 3
POW-ADC_3
ADC_SDO_N
LAN GNC18 7
8
7
8
POW_BAT_CHG_EN 4
ADC_SDI_P
POW-ADC_4 CP
POW_READY 5
POW-ADC_5
9 9 ADC_SDI_N
POW_TEMP_WARNI 6
POW-ADC_6
2 1
COM1 COM2 COM3 10 10 GND
POW_TEMP_ERROR 7
POW-ADC_7 →
・ﾊｰﾄﾞﾃﾞｨｽｸ CS 3 ADC67
・ｷｰﾎﾞｰﾄﾞ GNC21 11 11
POW_BAT_ERROR 8
POW-ADC_8
C ・磁気ｶｰﾄﾞﾘｰﾀﾞｰ
12 12
POW_LAMP_ON PHR-8 C
・ﾊﾞｰｺｰﾄﾞﾘｰﾀﾞｰ 48408-0003 ICP30-PN-11-20-30
13 13
GND B08B-PH-K-S SPH-002T-P0.5S
etc. 共通 /日本ｻｰﾓ
1
5
DEU-9SF-F0 14 14
POW_LAMP_ON
DEU-9SF-F0 DEU-9SF-F0 POW9 POW9
USBｱﾀﾞﾌﾟﾀ 136Y120114 15 15
RSV_O 136Y121496
A GNC22 16 16
RSV_I 1
17 17 2
48408-0003 DCAC_ON
D※C-20-24S-PKG100 18 18
GND XAP-02V-1
共通
D※C-20-24S-PKG100 19 19
USBｱﾀﾞﾌﾟﾀ 136Y120114 A GNC23 20 20
136Y200059 48408-0003
21
POW_5V
+ 1 1
FET01
22
B20B-XADSS-N(LF)(SN) XADRP-20V MD1
23 DC+ 3 2
MD2
1
XAP-09V-1 136Y121501 GNC25 GNC25 - 2

OPP3 GNC6 GNC6 24
GND 4 XLP-02V FET05
SXA-001T-P0.6 DC- B02P-XL-HDB
+5V 1
SXF-41T-P0.7 136Y121506
1
B24B-XADSS FET+
D
OPP3 MD1 2
XADRP-24V -N(LF)(SN) M5 + FET+
D
2
3 B04P-XL XLP-04V FET03 FET03
MD2 SXA-001T-P0.6 FN5.5-5
OPP1 OPP1
FET67A
3
SXF-41T-P0.7
OPP4 OPP4 4 GND 4 1
FET-
付属ｹｰﾌﾞﾙ 1 GND 1
5 XAP-04V-1 2
M6 - FET-
VCC_+5V 2
B04B-XASK-1(LF)(SN) SXA-001T-P0.6 113Y120241 FN5.5-6
2 6
GNC_RX_P 3
7
GNC11 GNC11
GNC_RX_N 4
136Y121499 SXA-001T-P0.6 -1-A
XAP-02V-1 8
POW_IN 1
GNC_TX_P
DDC67A XAP-04V-1
5 1
SXA-001T-P0.6 9
POW_GND 2
GNC_TX_N 6
10
2
FET04 SXA-001T-P0.6
XLP-02V
GND 7
4
11
GNC_RSV 8
XAP-02V-1 113Y120292 B02P-XL-HDB SXF-41T-P0.7
12
DDC09 FU-P FU-S
OPP67A
9
LED_READY SXA-001T-P0.6 DDC09 136Y200201
LED_EXPOSURE 10
DDC_OVP 1 1 1
fu_1
SXA-001T-P0.6
LED_ERROR 11
DDC04 DDC04 2 2 2
fu_2
113Y120291 GNC26 GNC26 136Y121500
GND 12
XARR-02V XAP-02V-1
E E
SW_KV_INC 13 10
DC+15V XAP-03V-1 SXAM-001T-P0.6 SXA-001T-P0.6
14 9 DC+15V 1 4
SW_KV_DEC DC-15V B03B-XASK-1 SXA-001T-P0.6
DC+24V 5 2
SW_MAS_INC 15 8
DC-15V_GND FAN-A FAN-A 136Y200029
DC+15V_GND 2 5
DDC06 DDC06
OPP5 SW_MAS_DEC 16 7
6 3 DC+24V_GND 4 1
DC+24V_GND 136Y200051
GND 17 6
DC+24V
GND 3 6
FAN-A_DC 1 3 2
SW_BODY_NORMAL 18 5
19 4 NC 7
FAN-A_LOCK 2 2 3
SW_BODY_FAT 136Y200570(*1)
DC-15V 4
5557-06R 5566-06A FAN-A_GND 3 1 4
FGｸﾘｯﾌﾟ
SW_LAMP 20 3
DC-15V_GND 8
5556PBTL FAN-B_DC 4
SW_MODE 21 2
5
5557-08R FAN-B_LOCK 179228-4 179228-4
GND 22 1
OPP6 5556-08A 5556PBTL FAN-B_GND 6
179518-1 179518-1
GND 23
24 XAP-06V-1 292254-4
LED_FILTER SXA-001T-P0.6
GNC15 GNC15 DDC08 DDC08 B06B-XASK-1 SXA-001T-P0.6 FAN1
GNC_PC_ON 25
GNC24 GNC24 R8-5
DDC07 DDC07
SW_GY_UNIT 26
1 CNT_GND 1 1
CNT_GND 4 1
+ FAN1
F GND 27
FAN-1_ON 2 2
F
2
POW用
GNC_COM1_RX 28
3 FAN-2_ON 3 3
Lock
29 4 4 3 1
GNC_COM1_TX 4 FAN-3_ON FAN-3_ON FAN1_GND 4
- 119S0166(*1)
GND 30
5 FAN_LOCK 5 5
FAN_LOCK FAN2_DC 4
179228-4
GNC_COM2_RX 31
6 CNT_GND 6 6
CNT_GND FAN2_LOCK 5
179228-4 179518-1
GNC_COM2_TX 32
7 PC+24V_ON 7 7
179518-1 292254-4
GND 33
8 NC 8
34 8
GNC_COM3_RX 9 SXA-001T-P0.6 SXA-001T-P0.6 B07B-XASK-3 FAN3_LOCK
GNC_COM3_TX 35
10
GND 36
11 GNC1 GNC1 1 XAP-09V-1
DC-12V_2_GND
12
DC-12V_2 1 3
DC-12V_2
SXA-001T-P0.6 13
DC-12V_1 3 2
DC-12V_1_GND 1
DDC03 DDC03 DAP-S DAP-P
UL1007-AWG26黒 14
DC-12V_2_GND 2 4
DC-12V_1 136Y200064 NFT-6 136Y200112 2
DC+15V 1 1 1
E04SR200932 XADRP-14V 2 2 2
G 付属ｹｰﾌﾞﾙ 5557-04R 5566-04A DC_GND G
1 1
0.5-3.7 SXA-001T-P0.6 MP-122C
3 3 5556-04A 5557-04R 5556PBTL
2 2
DDC05 DDC05
PC24V
→ 2 DDC67 PC24V
1
PC24V 6
PC_GND 2
PC24V_GND
5557-04R 5559-04P
PC_GND
2
付属ｹｰﾌﾞﾙ DAP
ﾓﾆﾀ/ﾊﾟﾈﾙ部 5556PBTL 5558PBTL 2 OPP67 ← 7
XHP-2 B2B-XH-2 3
136Y121502 136Y200065 8
1 1 1
128Y200034 2 2 2
DGND EX_RS232_TX 2 9
Hand_SW C2U-40 (黒) 3 3 3

SHOT_SW2 3 5
/ｵﾑﾛﾝ 4 4 4
DGND (Dsubｵｽ) DE-9PF-N
XAP-06V-1 5 5
XARR-06V 5
H SXA-001T-P0.6 6 6
SXAM-001T-P0.6 6
SECURITY_KEY_SW SXA-001T-P0.6 機種ユニット
H
7 2335 -
DGND
Key-S Key-P 名称回路図補助名称
Main Key NO
1 1 1
B07B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN) コード Z22N100005
POC-X
Rev. 2
316Y200001 1 2 2
PHR-7
COM
XAP-02V-1 XARR-02V SPH-002T-P0.5S *1:#XXX50223以前では、ファン119S0165に接続。頁
S-187-SU/ﾀｷｹﾞﾝ SXA-001T-P0.6 SXAM-001T-P0.6 For #XXX50223 or earlier, connect with the fan 119S0165. 富士フイルム株式会社 2 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
018-241-08C
SP-32
13B 回路図（#xxxx0172 号機以降）

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (#xxxx0172 or later)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
FET+
FET-
本体
NFT-12
ｱｰﾑ部
INV_DC+ INV_DC-
A A
FN5.5-6 FN5.5-6
M3
M6
+ - FG TANK
FN2-M3 ﾌﾛﾝﾄ
DC+ DC- FN2-4
J2 J2 136Y121510
136Y200113 M4 M3
1 GNC3 GNC3 INV12 INV12 (CN8) F1_ NFT-11 F1
E04SR211132 136Y121508
2 F1 F1
INV_mA_SET 1 1
(下)
3 F2_ FN2-4 FN2-M3 F2
AGND 2 2
4 3 3 F2 F2
INV_IF_SET
FN2-4 FN2-M3
5
AGND 4 4
6
INV_KV_SET 5 5
M4 136Y121511 M3
7 R1_ NFT-11 R1
AGND 6 6
8 R1 R1
INV_KV_FB 7 7
8 8 R2_ FN2-4 FN2-M3 R2

AGND
B R2 R2 B
FN2-4 FN2-M3
(CN10) INV3 INV3 136Y121512 TNK3 TNK3

1 1
SXA-001T-P0.6 SXA-001T-P0.6
GNC67A 2
3
2
3
TNK67A
GNC4 GNC4 INV13 INV13 (CN9)
113Y120290 4 4
359Y200006
GND_INV 1 1
(下) PAP-04V-S PAP-04V-S
2/2 EXP_ON 2 2
NV_ALM_RESET 3 3
(CN11) INV2 INV2 TNK2 TNK2
HV_OVP 4 4
HV_OCP 5 5 1 1
HV_LVP 6 6 2 2
C HV_TEMP 7 7
PAP-02V-S C
DET_OPEN
TANK_TEMP
8
9
8
9
INV67A SPHD-002GW-P0.5
fu_1
PAP-02V-S
SPHD-002GW-P0.5
STB_OK 10 10
113Y120294 fu_2 SW-Th Thermal fuse
FIL_OVP 11 11
POW-ADC_1
1 1
12 12
FIL_OCP POW-ADC_2
2 2
FIL_TEMP 13 13
POW-ADC_3
GND_INV 14 14
POW-ADC_4
XAP-02V-1 XARR-02V
POW-ADC_5
SXA-001T-P0.6 SXAM-001T-P0.6

TNK1 TNK1
1
GNC5 GNC5 INV11 INV11 (CN7)
2 POW6 ← 2
D
VCC_+15V_INV 1 1
(上) 3
D
2 2
GND_INV VHR-3N
VCC_-15V_INV 3 3
SVH-21T-P1.1
(CN2) INV1 INV1
GND_INV 4 4
NFT-6
TH-P Thermistor
VCC_+24V_INV 5 5 1
GND_INV 6 6 2 1 1
3 2 2 M3
136Y200099 ADC5 ADC5

1
2
E E
PAP-02V-S S04B-PASK-2 ADC3
SPHD-002T-P0.5 1
ADC7-S ADC7-P ADC7 ADC7 1
GND
1 1 1
2
3
2
3
信号 PMC1
2 2 2 VCC
3 3 3 PHR-3 半田
4 4 4 SPH-002T-P0.5S
5 5 5
ADC4
136Y121513 6 6 6
8
7
8
7
8
ADC67A 1
2
1
2
GND
信号 PMC2
3 3
113Y120295 VCC
GNC14 GNC14 XAP-08V-1 PAP-08V-S
半田
LED_SW 1
S3B-PH-K-S PHR-3
SXAM-001T-P0.6
F 付加SW1 2
S08B-PASK-2 SPH-002T-P0.5S F
VCC+12V 3
4 ADC2
GND ADC6-S ADC6-P ADC6 ADC6
LED_ON
付加SW2
5
6
1
2
1
2
1
2
LED_SW
1
2
LMP67A
付加SW1
NC 7
XAP-07V-1 半田 113Y120296
3 3 3
VCC+12V
SXA-01T-P0.6 S2B-PH-K-S PHR-2
4 4 4
GND
B07B-XASK-1(LF)(SN) SPH-002T-P0.5S
5 5 5
LED_ON
6 6 6
付加SW2 ADC8 ADC8 SW1
GNC8 GNC8 CN31 CN31 XAP-06V-1 136Y200058
136Y121517 136Y200161 1 1
VCC_+12V_1 1 1 SXA-01T-P0.6 XARR-06V XAP-06V-1 2 2 Filter_SW1

2 2 SXAM-001T-P0.6 SXA-001T-P0.6 3
VCC_+12V_1
DGND
DGND
3
4
ESD67 3
4
1 NO_
128N200006
ADC1
1
ADC1 4
SW2
136Y200684 113Y200243
G
LED_SW 1 COM_ 2 PHR-4 1 G
B4B-PH-K-S PHR-4 DSC-S DSC-P ESD102 ESD102 ESD101 DSC-P PHR-4

DSC65A SPH-002T-P0.5S 2
Filter SW2
SPH-002T-P0.5S SPH-002T-P0.5S LP01-15CCKNG4K-165E
1 12 1 12
半田 179228-2
113Y120125 /NKKｽｲｯﾁｽﾞ XAP-02V-1
2 11 2 11
179518-1
3 10 3 10 SXA-001T-P0.6
GNC7 GNC7 CN41 CN41 FP2563A
4 9 4 9
-405
TRANS_TXOP1 1 5 8 5 8 1
TRANS_TXON1 2 6 7 6 7 2
OUTPUT
TRANS_RXIP1 3 7 6 7 6 3
TURMINAL
TRANS_RXIN1 4 8 5 8 5 4
BOARD
SE_RS232_TX 5 9 4 9 4 5
SE_RS232_RX 6 10 3 10 3 6
SE_RSV_IN 7 11 2 11 2 7
SE_CONNECT 8 12 1 12 1 8
H H
1-179228-2 機種 2335 ユニット -
B8B-ZR-SM4-TF(LF)(SN) ZHR-8 1-179228-2 1-179228-2 PHR-12 179518-1 SHR-08V-S-B 名称回路図補助名称 POC-X
SZH-002T-P0.5 179518-1 179518-1 179610-1 SSH-003T-P0.2-H
SPH-002T-P0.5S
SZH-003T-P0.5 179610-1 179610-1 コード Z22N100005 Rev. 2
SPH-004T-P0.5S
1-292254-2 頁
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
018-241-08C
SP-33
13C 回路図（#xxx605 号機以降）

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (#xxx605 or later)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
共通 NF
111K86241 I NLET 136Y121493
LINE_L
136Y200061
LINE1 LOAD3
136Y121494 NFL1 NFL1
POW7
+
POW7
136Y121495
BAT_A
+
CP
1 1
NFL
LOAD_L M5
Hospital LAN ACｺｰﾄﾞ L 1 3 1
+ 2 2
POW67A
-
LINE2 -
Bat t er y
2 3 3
67A
LINE_N
N 2 4 -
A
3 4 4
AP
A A
SVH-41T-P1.1
PV
FG FN1.25-4 DF5A-1822SC 113Y120300 113Y120293 B4P-VH
VHR-4N
1 6
2
E04SR130525A 136Y200004 SPS-61T-250 FN2-4 7 M3
USB 3
SPS-61T-250 NRF110-10 M4
Fuj i f i l m_AP
SPS-61T-250
4
DS-250PU /IDEC 1
NJC-207-PM
DS-250PU SUP-P10H-R-4/OKAYA
136Y200485
136N200050
5 2
半田
6 3 POW8 POW8
FN2-4
7
VLP-03V-1 1
GNC16 GNC16 BAT_B
8
SVF-61T-P2.0 2
E04SR130525A
136Y121519
GNC67A
9 1 3 1
POW1 POW1 +
10 2
NFT-12 136Y200087 4 2
M5
11 3 1 5 3
-
Bluetooth Hospital USB 113Y120290 Bat t er y
12 4 2 6 4
(ﾊﾞｰｺｰﾄﾞﾘｰﾀﾞｰ) (院内用)
B
5 3 7 5
ｷｬｯﾌﾟｷｬｯﾌﾟ LX40-12P 6 1/3 VLP-03V-1 8 6

B PV B
7
SVF-61T-P2.0 9 7
8 10 M3
5-554169-3 95552-2887 136Y121498 XADRP-10V NJC-207-PM
ON/OFF SW 136N200049 1 1
POW_RX_P
CSL_PC
2 2
USB B GNC20 POW6 POW6
3 3
POW_RX_N
1 ADC_SCK_P
GSB42213EU 4 4
POW_TX_P LOAD LINE
Avalue Technology 2 ADC_SCK_N
POW-ADC_1
5 5
POW_TX_N
136Y200409 3 ADC_SDO_P
POW-ADC_2
2 1
GND
CP
6 6
4 ADC_SDO_N
POW-ADC_3
LAN GNC18 7 7
POW_BAT_CHG_EN
5 ADC_SDI_P
POW-ADC_4
8 8
POW_READY
6 ADC_SDI_N
POW-ADC_5
9 9
POW_TEMP_WARNI 2 1
COM1 COM2 COM3 7 GND
POW-ADC_6
10 10
POW_TEMP_ERROR →
・ﾊｰﾄﾞﾃﾞｨｽｸ 8 CS
POW-ADC_7
GNC21 11 11
POW_BAT_ERROR 3 ADC67
・ｷｰﾎﾞｰﾄﾞ POW-ADC_8
C ・磁気ｶｰﾄﾞﾘｰﾀﾞｰ 12 12
POW_LAMP_ON PHR-8 C
・ﾊﾞｰｺｰﾄﾞﾘｰﾀﾞｰ 48408-0003 13 13
GND B08B-PH-K-S SPH-002T-P0.5S ICP30-PN-11-20-30
DEU-9SF-F0 etc. 共通 14 14
POW_LAMP_ON /日本ｻｰﾓ
1
5
DEU-9SF-F0 DEU-9SF-F0 POW9 POW9
USBｱﾀﾞﾌﾟﾀ 136Y120114 A GNC22
15 15
RSV_O 136Y121496
16 16
RSV_I 1
48408-0003 17 17
DCAC_ON 2
D※C-20-24S-PKG100 18 18
GND XAP-02V-1
共通
D※C-20-24S-PKG100 19 19
USBｱﾀﾞﾌﾟﾀ 136Y120114 A GNC23 20 20
136Y200059 48408-0003
21
POW_5V
+ 1 1
FET01
B20B-XADSS-N(LF)(SN) XADRP-20V 22
MD1
DC+ 3 2
23
MD2
XAP-09V-1 136Y121501 GNC25 GNC25 - 2
1
OPP3 GNC6 GNC6 24

GND XLP-02V FET05
SXA-001T-P0.6 DC- 4
B02P-XL-HDB
1 +5V 1
B24B-XADSS
SXF-41T-P0.7
FET+ 136Y121506
OPP3 MD1 2
XADRP-24V -N(LF)(SN) M5 +
B04P-XL XLP-04V FET03 FET03
FET+
D 2 D
FET67A
MD2 3
SXA-001T-P0.6 FN5.5-5
OPP1 OPP1 3
SXF-41T-P0.7
OPP4 OPP4 4 GND 4 1
FET-
付属ｹｰﾌﾞﾙ GND 1
XAP-04V-1 2
M6 -
113Y120241
1 5 FET-
2 VCC_+5V 2
6 B04B-XASK-1(LF)(SN) SXA-001T-P0.6 FN5.5-6
GNC_RX_P 3
7
GNC11 GNC11
GNC_RX_N 4
136Y121499 SXA-001T-P0.6 -1-A
DDC67A
XAP-02V-1 8
POW_IN 1
GNC_TX_P 5 1
XAP-04V-1
SXA-001T-P0.6 9
POW_GND 2
GNC_TX_N 6 2
FET04 SXA-001T-P0.6
10
XLP-02V
GND 7
11
113Y120292 B02P-XL-HDB SXF-41T-P0.7
4
GNC_RSV 8
XAP-02V-1
OPP67A
12
DDC09 FU-P FU-S
LED_READY 9
SXA-001T-P0.6 DDC09 136Y200201
LED_EXPOSURE 10
DDC_OVP 1 1 1
SXA-001T-P0.6
fu_1
LED_ERROR 11
DDC04 DDC04 2 2 2
113Y120291 GNC26 GNC26 136Y121500

fu_2
GND 12
XARR-02V XAP-02V-1
E
SW_KV_INC 13 10
DC+15V XAP-03V-1 SXAM-001T-P0.6 SXA-001T-P0.6 E
DC+15V 1 4
SW_KV_DEC 14 9
DC-15V B03B-XASK-1 SXA-001T-P0.6
DC+24V 5 2
SW_MAS_INC 15 8
DC+15V_GND 2 5 DC-15V_GND
DDC06 DDC06
FAN-A FAN-A 136Y200029
OPP5 SW_MAS_DEC 16 7
DC+24V_GND
GND 17 6 DC+24V_GND 6 3
DC+24V 136Y200051 4 1
GND 3 6
FAN-A_DC 1 3 2
SW_BODY_NORMAL 18 5
NC 7
FAN-A_LOCK 2 2 3
SW_BODY_FAT 19 4
DC-15V 4
5557-06R 5566-06A FAN-A_GND 3 1 4 136Y200570 FGｸﾘｯﾌﾟ
SW_LAMP 20 3
DC-15V_GND 8
5556PBTL FAN-B_DC 4
SW_MODE 21 2
5557-08R FAN-B_LOCK 5
179228-4 179228-4
GND 22 1
OPP6 5556-08A 5556PBTL FAN-B_GND 6
179518-1 179518-1
GND 23
XAP-06V-1 292254-4
LED_FILTER 24
SXA-001T-P0.6
GNC15 GNC15 DDC08 DDC08 B06B-XASK-1 SXA-001T-P0.6 FAN1
GNC_PC_ON GNC24 GNC24 R8-5
FAN1
25
DDC07 DDC07
SW_GY_UNIT 26
1 CNT_GND 1 1
CNT_GND 4 1
+
F GND 27
FAN-1_ON 2 2
F
2
POW用
GNC_COM1_RX 28
3 FAN-2_ON 3 3
Lock
GNC_COM1_TX 29
4 FAN-3_ON 4 4
FAN-3_ON FAN1_GND 3 1 4
- 119S0166
GND 30
5 FAN_LOCK 5 5
FAN_LOCK FAN2_DC 4
179228-4
GNC_COM2_RX 31
6 CNT_GND 6 6
CNT_GND FAN2_LOCK 5
179228-4 179518-1
GNC_COM2_TX 32
7 PC+24V_ON 7 7
179518-1 292254-4
GND 33
8 NC 8
GNC_COM3_RX 34
SXA-001T-P0.6 SXA-001T-P0.6 B07B-XASK-3 FAN3_LOCK 8
GNC_COM3_TX 35
9
10
GND 36
GNC1 GNC1 XAP-09V-1
11 1
DC-12V_2_GND
12
DC-12V_2 1 3
DC-12V_2
SXA-001T-P0.6 13
DC-12V_1 3 2
DC-12V_1_GND
DDC03 DDC03 DAP-S DAP-P 1
UL1007-AWG26黒 14
DC-12V_2_GND 2 4
DC-12V_1 136Y200064 NFT-6 136Y200112 2
DC+15V 1 1 1
E04SR200932 XADRP-14V
G 付属ｹｰﾌﾞﾙ 5557-04R 5566-04A DC_GND 2 2 2
G
1 1
0.5-3.7 SXA-001T-P0.6 MP-122C
5556-04A 5557-04R 5556PBTL
3 3
2 2
DDC05 DDC05
→ 2 DDC67 PC24V
PC24V 1
PC24V
DAP
6
PC24V_GND
PC_GND 2
PC_GND
5557-04R 5559-04P 2
付属ｹｰﾌﾞﾙ
ﾓﾆﾀ/ ﾊﾟﾈﾙ部 5556PBTL 5558PBTL 2 OPP67 ← 7
XHP-2 B2B-XH-2 3
136Y121502 136Y200065 8
1 1 1
128Y200034 DGND EX_RS232_TX

Hand_SW
2 2 2 2 9
C2U-40 (黒) 3 3 3
SHOT_SW2 3 5
/ｵﾑﾛﾝ 4 4 4
DGND (Dsubｵｽ) DE-9PF-N
XAP-06V-1 5 5
XARR-06V 5
H SXA-001T-P0.6 6 6
SXAM-001T-P0.6 6
SECURITY_KEY_SW SXA-001T-P0.6 H
機種 2335 ユニット -
7
DGND
Key-S Key-P
Mai n Key NO
名称回路図補助名称 POC-X
B07B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN)
Z22N100005 4
1 1 1
コード Rev.
316Y200001 1 2 2
PHR-7
頁
XAP-02V-1 XARR-02V SPH-002T-P0.5S
富士フイルム株式会社
COM
S-187-SU/ﾀｷｹﾞﾝ SXA-001T-P0.6 SXAM-001T-P0.6 2 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
018-241-08C
SP-34

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
本体
FET+
FET-
NFT-12
ｱｰﾑ部
INV_DC+ INV_DC-
A A
FN5.5-6 FN5.5-6
M3
M6
+ -
FN2-M3
FG
ﾌﾛﾝﾄ
TANK
DC+ DC- FN2-4
J2 J 2 136Y121510
136Y200113 GNC3 GNC3 INV12 I NV12 ( CN8)
M4
F1_ NFT-11 F1
M3
1
E04SR211132 136Y121508 F1 F1
2
INV_mA_SET 1 1
(下)
F2_ FN2-4 FN2-M3 F2
3
AGND 2 2
F2 F2
4
INV_IF_SET 3 3
FN2-4 FN2-M3
5
AGND 4 4
6
INV_KV_SET 5 5
M4 136Y121511 M3
R1_ NFT-11 R1
7
AGND 6 6
R1 R1
8
INV_KV_FB 7 7
R2_ FN2-4 FN2-M3 R2
AGND 8 8
B R2 R2 B
FN2-4 FN2-M3
( CN10) I NV3 INV3 136Y121512 TNK3 TNK3

GNC67A TNK67A
SXA-001T-P0.6 SXA-001T-P0.6 1 1
2 2
3 3
GNC4 GNC4 INV13 I NV13 ( CN9)
113Y120290 4 4
359Y200006
GND_INV 1 1
(下) PAP-04V-S PAP-04V-S
2/3 EXP_ON 2 2
NV_ALM_RESET 3 3
( CN11) I NV2 INV2 TNK2 TNK2
HV_OVP 4 4
HV_OCP 5 5 1 1
HV_LVP 6 6 2 2
I NV67A
C HV_TEMP 7 7
PAP-02V-S C
DET_OPEN 8 8
SPHD-002GW-P0.5 PAP-02V-S
TANK_TEMP 9 9
fu_1 SPHD-002GW-P0.5
STB_OK 10 10
113Y120294 fu_2 SW-Th Thermal fuse
FIL_OVP 11 11
POW-ADC_1
1 1
FIL_OCP 12 12
POW-ADC_2
2 2
FIL_TEMP 13 13
POW-ADC_3
GND_INV 14 14
POW-ADC_4
XAP-02V-1 XARR-02V
POW-ADC_5
SXA-001T-P0.6 SXAM-001T-P0.6

TNK1 TNK1
1
GNC5 GNC5 INV11 I NV11 ( CN7)
2 POW6 ← 2
D VCC_+15V_INV 1 1
(上) 3
D
GND_INV 2 2
VHR-3N
VCC_-15V_INV 3 3
SVH-21T-P1.1
( CN2) I NV1 INV1
GND_INV 4 4
NFT-6
VCC_+24V_INV 5 5 1 TH-P Thermistor
GND_INV 6 6 2 1 1
3 2 2 M3
136Y200099 ADC5 ADC5

1
2
E E
PAP-02V-S S04B-PASK-2 ADC3
SPHD-002T-P0.5
ADC7-S ADC7-P ADC7 ADC7 GND
PMC1
1 1
1 1 1
2 2
信号
2 2 2
3 3
VCC
3 3 3 PHR-3 半田
4 4 4 SPH-002T-P0.5S
5 5 5
ADC4
136Y121513
ADC67A
6 6 6
GND
PMC2
1 1
7 7 7
8 8 8
2 2
信号
113Y120295 VCC
3 3
GNC14 GNC14 XAP-08V-1 PAP-08V-S

半田
LED_SW 1
S3B-PH-K-S PHR-3
SXAM-001T-P0.6
F 付加SW1 2
S08B-PASK-2 SPH-002T-P0.5S F
VCC+12V 3
ADC2
LMP67A
GND 4
ADC6-S ADC6-P ADC6 ADC6
LED_ON 5 1
1 1 1
LED_SW
付加SW2 6 2
2 2 2
付加SW1
NC 7
XAP-07V-1 3 3 3
VCC+12V
半田 113Y120296
SXA-01T-P0.6 S2B-PH-K-S PHR-2
4 4 4
GND
B07B-XASK-1(LF)(SN) SPH-002T-P0.5S
5 5 5
LED_ON
6 6 6
付加SW2 ADC8 ADC8 SW1
136Y200058
GNC8 GNC8 136Y200161 CN31 CN31 XAP-06V-1
136Y121517
Fi l t er _SW1
1 1
SXA-01T-P0.6 XARR-06V XAP-06V-1
VCC_+12V_1 1 1 2 2
SXAM-001T-P0.6 SXA-001T-P0.6
VCC_+12V_1 2 2 3
DGND 3 3
ADC1 ADC1 4
DGND 128N200006 SW2
LED_SW
4 4
1 NO_ 1
G G
PHR-4
Fi l t er SW2
1
DSC65A
1 COM_ 2
B4B-PH-K-S PHR-4 DSC-S DSC-P PHR-4 SPH-002T-P0.5S 2
SPH-002T-P0.5S 1 12 SPH-002T-P0.5S LP01-15CCKNG4K-165E 半田 179228-2

2 11 113Y120125 /NKKｽｲｯﾁｽﾞ 179518-1
XAP-02V-1
SXA-001T-P0.6
GNC7 GNC7
3 10
CN41 CN41 FP2563A
4 9
-405
TRANS_TXOP1 1 5 8 1
TRANS_TXON1 2 6 7 2
OUTPUT
TRANS_RXIP1 3 7 6 3
TURMINAL
TRANS_RXIN1 4 8 5 4
BOARD
SE_RS232_TX 5 9 4 5
SE_RS232_RX 6 10 3 6
SE_RSV_IN 7 11 2 7
SE_CONNECT 8 12 1 8
H H
B8B-ZR-SM4-TF(LF)(SN) ZHR-8 1-179228-2 1-179228-2 SHR-08V-S-B 名称回路図補助名称 POC-X
SZH-002T-P0.5 179518-1 179518-1 SSH-003T-P0.2-H
SZH-003T-P0.5 179610-1 179610-1 コード Z22N100005 Rev. 4
1-292254-2 頁
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
018-241-08C
SP-35

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
GPUオプションユニット
A A
CAR67A GPU67A
DDC67A DDC10 DDC10 136Y202251 GPU_R GPU_P 136Y202252
Connect Tech Nvidia
113Y120292 +12V 2 UL1007-AWG24橙 2 2 UL1007-AWG24橙

+VIN
UL1007-AWG24黒 UL1007-AWG24黒
GND 1 1 1
GND
5557-02R 5559-02P 5557-02R
5556PBTL 5558PBTL 5556PBTL （1546551-2 Tyco）
AWG24∼18 AWG24∼18 AWG24∼18
1.3∼3.1mm 1.3∼3.1mm 1.3∼3.1mm
B B
136Y202189
LAN
C C
GNC19
GNC67A
113Y120290
3/3
D D
E E
F F
G G
H H
名称回路図補助名称 POC-X
コード Z22N100005 Rev. 4
頁
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
018-241-08C
SP-36
14 部品番号検索表
PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE
Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No
109S0029 12-41 136Y200201 12-33 340Y200020B 01A-21 364N200021 10C-3 405N200797A 01A-16.3 898Y200344A 08A-4
111K86241 12-1 136Y200279A 04B-2 340Y200030A 04A-4 364N200022 10C-5 405N200805A 01A-16.1 898Y200345C 09A-1
112Y200001 04B-4 136Y200409B 12-35 341Y200033K 02A-3.1 364N200023 10C-4 405N201210 01A-20.1 898Y200346A 09A-3
112Y200002 04B-3 136Y200485A 12-36 341Y200034K 02A-3.2 364Y200001C 01A-14 405N201211 01A-25 898Y200347A 09A-4
113Y120241C 06C-2 136Y200570 12-37 341Y200043A 05-4 364Y200002C 01A-12 405N201211 03-3.2 898Y200348A 09B-5
113Y120290M 06D-3.1 136Y200684 12-34 345N130027B 06A-5 367N200002A 08B-2 405N201211 04B-6 898Y200349A 09B-1
113Y120292C 06B-1.1 136Y202189 10D-2 345N130066A 05-15 367S0127 10C-2 405N201298 02A-14 898Y200355 10A-1
113Y120294E 06C-1 136Y202251 10D-4 345N200073 06A-6 367S1140 10B-2 405N201393A 01A-20.2 898Y200368C 01B-8
113Y130028A 05-8 136Y202252 10D-3 345Y200024 06A-2 367S1141 10B-3 405N201401 01A-22 898Y200413 02A-11
113Y200055A 06A-3 137S1417 06D-4 345Y200038 06C-3 372S0803 11-7 405N201402 01A-23 898Y200415 05-16
113Y200142 04B-1 138S0009 12-38 346N130052B 03-11 382N200070 10C-11 405N201403A 01A-24 898Y200484 05-5
113Y200243 01B-11 138S0544 05-18.1 346N200645 10C-18 382N200071 10C-12 405N201941 10C-19.1 898Y200496 05-17
114Y2335705A 05-13 138S0544 12-39 347N130127 04B-9 382N200081 01B-10 405N201952 10C-19.2 898Y200501 02A-12.2
119Y200017 06A-4.2 138S0588 06B-3 347N130128 04B-8 382N200085 10C-14 405N201981 01A-16.4 898Y200504D 05-7.3
124Y200003E 04B-5 138S0589 05-18.2 347N130138 11-9 383N130006D 02B-3 405N202277 01A-28 898Y200505D 05-7.4
128Y200054 04A-6 138S0589 12-40 347N200086 02A-15 383N200007 10B-11 603Y200006 03-10 898Y200506 06A-4.1
136N200049E 12-2 303S1000505 10B-4 347N200122 11-10 383S0003 10B-10 809Y200002J 01B-4 898Y200506 06B-2
136N200050 12-3 308S0791 10B-5 350N200077C 01B-3 385N200015 10B-12 814Y200271 10D-1 898Y200509A 06A-1
136Y120114 12-4 314S0139 03-4 350Y200028E 02A-6 385N200016A 10B-13 822Y120003A 07-1.2 898Y200511 02B-5.2
136Y121493B 12-5 316N130016 05-14 350Y200030B 01A-19 386N100413D 09B-3 822Y120004A 07-1.1 898Y200516 02B-5.1
136Y121494E 12-6 316N200009 07-2 350Y200034D 01B-2 386N200036B 01A-1 857Y120033A 09B-6 898Y200527 02A-9
136Y121495C 12-7 316N200010 01A-27 350Y200038 01B-9 386N200054A 10C-10 890S0034 11-5 898Y200550 08B-5
136Y121496E 12-8 316N200015A 10C-13 350Y200039 01B-6 386N200056 10C-1 890Y200065 11-8 898Y200581 03-12
136Y121498B 12-9 316N200045 10C-17 350Y200068D 03-5 386N200057B 10C-15 891S0023 11-2 898Y200598 01A-8
136Y121499C 12-10 316Y200001 01A-26 350Y200072B 01A-15 386N200067 10C-16.1 891S0024 11-6 898Y200599 12-22
136Y121500C 12-11 317N200007D 01A-9.2 350Y200080C 06D-1 386N200071 10C-8 891S0026 11-1 898Y200627A 04A-8
136Y121501F 12-12 317N200007D 01B-7 350Y200135 04A-5.1 386N200072 10C-9 898Y200255 11-4 898Y200639 08A-1
136Y121502C 12-13 317N200007D 02A-1 350Y200136A 04A-7.1 386N200121A 10C-20 898Y200258 01A-6 898Y200639 08B-1
136Y121506E 12-14 317S1102 05-6 350Y200137A 04A-7.2 386N200122 10C-16.2 898Y200279F 05-7.1 898Y200664 02A-16.1
136Y121508C 12-15 317S1102 06D-2 350Y200157 05-9 386S1123 09B-4 898Y200280F 05-7.2 898Y200665 02A-16.2
136Y121517E 12-16 317Y200010D 01A-9.1 350Y200168A 03-2 386S1151 08B-6 898Y200293A 05-1.1 898Y200666 02A-16.3
136Y121519A 12-17 318N200004B 01A-3 350Y200186B 05-3 388N120162A 09A-2.2 898Y200327 03-9 898Y200667 02A-16.4
136Y200004 12-18 319N130003A 02B-2 350Y200246 04A-5.2 388N130046 02C-1 898Y200328 03-7 898Y200668 02A-16.5
136Y200029C 12-19 319N130058A 02B-4 350Y200348 05-2 388N200084 09A-2.1 898Y200329A 02A-12.1 898Y2006708 04A-7.3
136Y200030C 12-20 319N130133 11-3 350Y200664 10D-5 388Y200021D 02B-1 898Y200330A 02A-2 898Y200677 02A-16.6
136Y200051C 12-21 319N200113B 08B-4 351N130010 05-19 388Y200043 02A-4 898Y200331 01A-2 898Y200726 04B-7
136Y200059E 12-23 331S0005 10B-1 356N121139B 01B-1 398Y200002 02A-5 898Y200332A 01A-11 898Y200940 04B-10
136Y200060C 12-24 331S0006 10B-9 356N121143 01B-5 401N200008C 08A-2.1 898Y200333C 01A-17 898Y201022 03-8
136Y200061B 12-25 331Y200007C 08B-3 362N120016C 09B-2 401N200012 08A-2.2 898Y200334 01A-18 898Y201023 04A-1.2
136Y200064B 12-26 332N200037A 10B-8 362N200018B 01A-5 405N130031 02A-10 898Y200335 01A-7 898Y201024 04A-1.1
136Y200065E 12-27 337Y200002 10B-15 362N200041A 10B-6 405N200694D 01A-16.2 898Y200336 02A-13 898Y201064 06B-1.2
136Y200087C 12-28 339Y200003 04A-2.1 362Y200018A 10B-7 405N200724C 01A-4 898Y200337 02A-7 898Y201065 06D-3.2
136Y200099C 12-29 339Y200004 04A-2.2 363Y200024 04A-3 405N200729F 03-3.1 898Y200339 03-6 898Y201174 05-7.5
136Y200112A 12-30 339Y200005 02A-8.1 364N200010 01A-13 405N200738 01A-10.1 898Y200340 03-1 898Y201175 05-7.6
136Y200113 12-31 339Y200006 02A-8.2 364N200019 10C-7 405N200740 01A-10.2 898Y200342 05-1.2 898Y201181 05-20
136Y200161 12-32 340S0263 10B-14 364N200020 10C-6 405N200741 01A-10.3 898Y200343A 08A-3
018-241-08C
SP-37
15 締結用および配線用のサービス部品一覧表
List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring
1. 締結用および配線用のサービス部品について 1. Service Parts for Securing and Wiring
● 発注の際は部品コードと発注数量を明記すること。発注数量は 100 個単位とする。 l Clearly indicate the part code and quantity required when ordering service parts.
Service parts can be ordered in sets of 100.
2. ねじ類
2. Screws
● サービス部品一覧表の中のねじの記載方法の例を以下に示す。この記載方法はサービ
スマニュアル内の記載方法と同じである。 l The following is an example of how screws in the service parts table are described.
This description method is the same as that in this Service Manual.
018-241-08C
SP-38
15 締結用および配線用のサービス部品一覧表
List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring
参考情報参考情報
記号部品コード Reference information 記号部品コード Reference information
Symbol Parts code 形状 Symbol Parts code 形状
部品名称 Parts name 部品名称 Parts name
Shape Shape
V3x6 301S0029 バインド (V3x6) Bind (V3x6) 六角穴付ネジ Low Head Hexagon Socket
Q5x10 304S3180510
(Q5x10) 六角 4 mm Screw (Q5x10) Hexagon 4 mm
V3x6 301S4780306 バインド (V3x6) Bind (V3x6)
六角穴付ネジ Low Head Hexagon Socket
ラミメイト M3x6 Q5x12 304S3180512
301S0035 ラミメイト M3x6 Ramimate M3x6 (Q5x12) 六角 4mm Screw (Q5x12) Hexagon 4mm
Ramimate M3x6
ラミメイト M3x10 Q6x12 304S3180612
301S0068 ラミメイト M3x10 Ramimate M3x10 (Q6x12) 六角 5mm Screw (Q6x12) Hexagon 5mm
Ramimate M3x10
十字穴付トラス Cross Recessed Head Screw Q10x70 304S3181070
T4x15 301S0066 (Q10x70) 六角 8mm Screw (Q10x70) Hexagon 8mm
小ネジ (M4x15) (M4x15)
DT3x6 306S0101 デルタイト (DT3x6) Deltite (DT3x6)
極低頭 Q3x6
極低頭ネジ (Q3x6) Special Low Head Screw 特殊ネジ特殊ネジ
Special Low 304S0043 308N120061 Special Screw 308N120061
六角 1.5 mm (Q3x6) Hexagon 1.5 mm Special Screw 308N120061
Head Q3x6
極低頭 Q6x12 TP3x4 308S0665 TP ネジ (3x4) TP Screw (3x4)
極低頭ネジ (Q6x12) Special Low Head Screw
Special Low 304S0054 TP3x6 [1] 308S0414 TP ネジ (3x6) [1] TP Screw (3x6) [1]
六角 3 mm (Q6x12) Hexagon 3 mm
Head Q6x12
TP3x6 [3] 308S0561 TP ネジ (3x6) [3] TP Screw (3x6) [3]
極低頭 Q5x6
極低頭ネジ (Q5x6) Special Low Head Screw TP3x12 308S0419 TP ネジ (3x12) TP Screw (3x12)
Special Low 304S0103
六角 3 mm (Q5x6) Hexagon 3 mm
Head Q5x6 TP3x18 308S0422 TP ネジ (3x18) TP Screw (3x18)
Special Low 304S0104
六角 2 mm (Q4x8) Hexagon 2 mm TP4x8 308S0424 TP ネジ (4x8) TP Screw (4x8)
Head Q4x8
Special Low 304S0105 シンヘッド 3x6
六角 3 mm (Q5x10) Hexagon 3 mm 308S0653 シンヘッド (3x6) Thin Head (3x6)
Head Q5x10 Thin Head 3x6
低頭ネジ (Q8x18) Low Head Screw (Q8x18) シンヘッド 3x4
Q8x18 304S0116 308S0786 シンヘッド (3x4) Thin Head (3x4)
六角 5 mm Hexagon 5 mm Thin Head 3x4
六角穴付ネジ (Q4x8) Low Head Hexagon Socket B4x5 - B4x5（付属ネジ） B4x5 (Attached screw)
Q4x8 304S3180408
六角 3 mm Screw (Q4x8) Hexagon 3 mm
B8x6 - B8x6（付属ネジ） B8x6 (Attached screw)
Q4x12 304S3180412 Q6x15 (Attached screw) ( 付属ネジ ) 六角 5mm (Attached screw) Hexagon 5mm

Q4x15 304S3180415 308N120002 タフクロス M2x3 Special screw M2x3
018-241-08C
SP-39
16 ネジ・座金類の記号一覧表
Table of Screws / Washers Indication Symbols
ネジ・座金類の表示記号一覧表分解図中の形状
No. 部品名称表示記号サイズ
分解図中の形状記号（例）
No. 部品名称表示記号サイズ
記号（例） M16
12 六角ナット Nu Nu20
M20
1 十字穴付サラ小ネジ S S3 x 10 M3 x 10
13 平座金 W W4 M4
M4 x 8
2 十字穴付トラス小ネジ T *T4 x8
M4 x 10 14 バネ座金 SW SW3 M3
バネ座金組込十字穴付 M2.6 x 3
3 A A2.6 x 16 M2.6 x 16 15 ラミメイト - -
ナベ小ネジ M3 x 6
バネ・平座金組込 M4 x 5 呼び径 4
4 B B4 x 5 16 E 型止め輪 E E6
十字穴付ナベ小ネジ M8 x 6 呼び径 6
M3 x 10 呼び径 4
バネ・平座金組込 M3 x 12 17 K-CL 型止め輪 KL KL4
5 BR BR4 x 8 呼び径 6
十字穴付六角頭小ネジ M4 x 8
M4 x 12 18 バインド V V3 x 6 M3 x 6
M4 x 8 ラミメイ M3 x 6
19 ラミメイト M3 x 6
M4 x 12 ト M3 x 10
M4 x 15 M3 x 6
6 六角穴付ボルト Q Q3 x 20 M5 x 10 M6 x 12
M5 x 12 20 極低頭ネジ極低頭 Q Q3 x 6 M5 x 6
M6 x 12 M4 x 8
M10 x 70 M5 x 10
バネ・平座金組込 21 低頭ネジ Q Q8 x 18 M8 x 18
7 BQ BQ4 x 10 M4 x 10
六角穴付ボルト
22 特殊ネジ 308N120061 特殊ネジ
8 デルタイトネジ DT DT3 x 6 M3 x 6
シンヘッ M3 x 4
9 樹脂用タッピンネジ Ps *Ps3 x 6 呼び径 3 x 6 23 シンヘッド 3x6
ド M3 x 6
M3 x 5 24 タフクロス M M4 x 15 M2 x 3
六角穴付止め小ネジ M4 x 6
10 WP WP4 x 6
（ダブルポイント） M4 x 8
M4 x 15
M3 x 4
M3 x 6
M3 x 12
11 TP ネジ TP TP3 x 6 M3 x 18
M4 x 6
M4 x 8
M4 x 12
＊：先端部非円形セルフタッピンネジ *：ステンレス製囲み：黒染め
018-241-08C
SP-40
17 消耗品一覧表
List of Quick Wearing Parts
消耗品一覧表
No. 部品名称形状
1 押込固定具
2 結束バンド
3 NK クランプ
4 エッジング
5 エッジサドル
018-241-08E
SP-41
18A ラベルが必要な部品（米国）
Parts that Need Labels (For USA)
COVER COVER LABEL LABEL S/N REMARKS
PART NO. PART NAME PART NO. PART NAME
Rating/Standard/ 本銘板に記載の「製造年月」「シリアルナンバー」を連絡のこと
405N200694D 定格銘版 Y
側面カバーアセンブリ Side Cover Assembly Identification Label Clarify the Manufactured Month and the Serial Number
898Y200333A
（AC インレット側） (AC Inlet Side) 本銘板に記載の「製造年月」を連絡のこと
405N201211 HHS 認証銘版 HHS Certification Label Y
Clarify the Manufactured Month
本銘板に記載の「製造年月」「モノタンクシリアルナンバー」を
連絡のこと
405N200729F モノタンク銘板 Mono-tank Label Y
Clarify the Manufactured Month and the Mono-tank Serial
350Y200168A タンク上面カバー Tank Top Cover
Number (*1)
本銘板に記載の「製造年月」を連絡のこと
405N201211 HHS 認証銘版 HHS Certification Label Y
Clarify the Manufactured Month (*1)
本銘板に記載の「製造年月」を連絡のこと
898Y200519A コリメータアセンブリ Collimator Assembly 405N201211 HHS 認証銘版 HHS Certification Label Y
Clarify the Manufactured Month
898Y200331 上面カバーアセンブリ Top Cover Assembly 405N201210 HHS 警告銘版 HHS Warning Label
Warning Label for US
898Y200330A アーム前面カバー Arm Front Cover 405N201298 米国向け注意銘版
Model
*1: タンク上面カバーとモノタンクアセンブリ (898Y201022) を同時に発注する場合は、モノタンク銘板

と HHS 銘板を発注する必要はない。
When order the "Tank Top Cover" and the "Monotank assembly(898Y201022)", do not need to order
Mono-tank Label and HHS Certification Label.
■ 405N200694D Rating/Standard/Identification Label (US) ■ 405N201210 HHS Warning Label

* Serial Number etc. are not required.
POCX020520004J.ai
Manufactured Month
Serial Number ■ 405N201298 Warning Label for US Model
POCX020520001J.ai
■ 405N201211 HHS Certification Label
Manufactured Month
POCX020520003J.ai
POCX020520002J.ai
■ 405N200729F Mono-tank Label
Manufactured Month
Mono-tank
POCX020520005J.ai Serial Number
018-241-08C
SP-42
18B ラベルが必要な部品（ブラジル）
Parts that Need Labels (For Brazil)
側面カバーアセンブリ Side Cover Assembly Rating/Standard/ 本銘板に記載の「製造年月」「シリアルナンバー」を連絡のこと
898Y200333A 405N201981 定格／規格／薬事銘板 Y
（AC インレット側） (AC Inlet Side) Identification Label Clarify the Manufactured Month and the Serial Number
連絡のこと
350Y200168A タンク上面カバー Tank Top Cover 405N200729F モノタンク銘板 Mono-tank Label Y
Number (*1)

を発注する必要はない。
Mono-tank Label.
■ 405N201981 Rating/Standard/Identification Label
Manufactured Month
Serial Number
POCX020520009J.ai
Manufactured Month
Mono-tank
018-241-08C
SP-43
18C ラベルが必要な部品（米国・ブラジルを除くその他海外）
Parts that Need Labels (For Overseas Other than USA and Brazil)
898Y200333A 405N200797A 定格／規格／薬事銘板 Y
連絡のこと
Number (*1)
898Y200331 上面カバーアセンブリ Top Cover Assembly 405N201393A RED 警告銘版 RED Warning Label

を発注する必要はない。
Mono-tank Label.
■ 405N200797A Rating/Standard/Identification Label
Manufactured Month
Serial Number
POCX020520006J.ai
Manufactured Month
Mono-tank
■ 405N201393A RED Warning Label

POCX020520007J.ai
018-241-08C
SP-44
18D ラベルが必要な部品（日本）
Parts that Need Labels (For Japan)
898Y200333A 405N200805B 定格／規格／薬事銘板 Y
連絡のこと
Number (*1)
*1: タンク上面カバーとモノタンクアセンブリ (898Y201022) を同時に発注する場合は、モノタンク銘板を発注する必要はない。

When order the "Tank Top Cover" and the "Monotank assembly(898Y201022)", do not need to order Mono-tank Label.
■ 405N200805B 定格／規格／薬事銘板
Manufactured Month
Serial Number
POCX020520010J.ai
■ 405N200729F モノタンク銘板
Manufactured Month
Mono-tank
018-241-08C
SP-45
BLANK PAGE
018-241-08C
SP-46
BLANK PAGE
018-241-08C
SP-47
BLANK PAGE
018-241-08C
AppxSP1-1
A01 ブラジル DR-XD 1000 専用 D-EVO2 パネル

D-EVO2 Panels for Brazilian DR-XD 1000
D-EVO2-77G D-EVO2-77G
1 898Y200741 ボトムハウジング Bottom Housing 1
2,4
2 812Y200128 D-EVO2-77G D-EVO2-77G 1
D-EVO2-47G D-EVO2-47G
3 898Y200740 ボトムハウジング Bottom Housing 1
4 812Y200127 D-EVO2-47G D-EVO2-47G 1
上記以外のパネル部品については、DR-ID 1200 サービスマニュアルを参照すること。

For panel parts other than above, refer to the DR-ID 1200 Service Manual.
1,3
POCX020520008J.ai
018-241-06A
DR-XD 1000 Service Manual AppxSP1-1
AppxSP1-2
BLANK PAGE
018-241-06A
AppxSP1-3
BLANK PAGE
018-241-06A
AppxSP1-4
BLANK PAGE
018-241-06A
Control Sheet
11.30.2016 02 Revision (FM9462) 2, 8, 9, 12, 14, 17, 18
05.31.2017 03 Revision (FM9471) 2, 3, 11, 12, 17 to 26

11.30.2017 04 Revision for MC V16.2 (FM9486) 2 to 13, 18 to 26
2, 3, 5 to 7, 9, 12 to 19, 24 to 28, 33,
34
10.31.2018 05 Changes in pagination (FM9528) 8, 10, 11, 20 to 23, 29 to 32, 35
Preventive Maintenance (PM)
018-241-05E
PM-1
1. Preventive Maintenance Program 1.2 Notation of Age
The following notations are mentioned for the respective maintenance programs.
Check what the notation means before starting the task.
1.1 How to Use
: Procedure performed at an age of 1.0 year.
the Preventive Maintenance Volume
1.0Y
2.0Y : Procedure performed at an age of 2.0 years.
- Perform the corresponding maintenance programs according to the notations of age 3.0Y : Procedure performed at an age of 3.0 years.
( 1.0Y , 2.0Y , 3.0Y , 4.0Y , 5.0Y ). 4.0Y : Procedure performed at an age of 4.0 years.
- The preventive maintenance program list is prepared for the respective ages of 1, 2, 5.0Y : Procedure performed at an age of 5.0 years.
3, 4 and 5 years. As the tasks to be performed depend on the age of service, follow
the list in carrying out the preventive maintenance program.
018-241-01E
DR-XD 1000 Service Manual PM-1
PM-2
1.3 Preventive Maintenance Program List
The preventive maintenance program is defined in terms of the age of the machine. When the age of the machine reaches the specified value, take each action of the preventive
maintenance program corresponding to the age. Take the action referring to the list, as the program differs depending on the age of the machine.
 INSTRUCTION 
Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power cable and additional protective ground wire connections and securing the parts with retaining screws. To
maintain safety, ensure that the parts and retaining screws removed for servicing purposes are restored to states existing upon installation. After the parts and retaining screws are
restored to the above-mentioned states, follow the procedures set forth in this service manual to verify that the retaining screws are securely tightened to properly secure the parts.
 Preventive Maintenance Program List

Cycle Time
Ref. Maintenance program requirements Replacement parts Remarks
1.0Y 2.0Y 3.0Y 4.0Y 5.0Y (minute)
2. Checking the Error Log ○ ○ ○ ○ - 10.0
3. Removing the Cover
3.1 Removing the Cover (the 1st year) ○ - - - - 5.0
3.2 Removing the Cover (the 2nd and 4th year) - ○ - ○ - 10.0
4. Cart Section
4.1 Checking the Cart Handle ○ ○ - ○ - 5.0
4.2 Checking the Casters ○ ○ - ○ - 5.0
4.3 Checking the Additional Protective Earthing ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 3.0
4.4 Replacing the Monitor Arm - ○ - ○ - 10.0 Monitor Arm: 341Y200043
4.5 Checking the Main Key - ○ - ○ - 1.0
4.6 Checking the Cart Bumper - ○ - ○ - 3.0
For # xxx50224 or later, since a DDC board
fan is not attached, no DDC board fan
4.7 Cleaning the Cooling Fan - ○ - ○ - 5.0 cleaning is required.
4.8 Checking the Arm's Horizontal Rotation - ○ - ○ - 3.0
4.9 Checking the Arm's Center Pin Receiver - ○ - ○ - 1.0
4.10 Checking the Looseness of the Brake Shaft - ○ - ○ - 5.0
4.11 Replacing the Monitor Securing Member - ○ - ○ - 3.0
4.12 Checking the Battery Remaining Capacity - ○ - ○ - 1.0
4.13 Checking the Swiveling Mechanism - ○ - ○ - 1.0
4.14 Checking the Battery’s Tightness - ○ - ○ - 1.0
4.15 Checking the Round Terminal of the INV/FET Board - ○ - ○ - 3.0
018-241-05E
PM-3
Cycle Time
Ref. Maintenance program requirements Replacement parts Remarks
1.0Y 2.0Y 3.0Y 4.0Y 5.0Y (minute)
5. SE Locking Section
5.1 Checking the SE Locking Mechanism ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1.0
5.2 Check the Locking Key ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1.0
6. Arm Section
Prepare an grease gun.
6.1 Applying Grease on the Friction Mechanism - ○ - ○ - 10.0 (Grease gun kit: 898Y200255,
Grease: 891S0024)
Gas spring assembly:
6.2 Replacing the Gas Spring Assembly - ○ - ○ - 5.0
388Y200021
7. Mono-tank Section
Torque hinge (Large):
898Y200413
7.1 Replacing the Torque Hinge - ○ - ○ - 10.0
Torque hinge (Small):
314S0139
7.2 Checking the Rotation ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1.0
8. Installing the Cover
8.1 Installing the Cover (the 1st Year) ○ - - - - 5.0
8.2 Installing the Cover (the 2nd, 4th Year) - ○ - ○ - 10.0
8.3 Cleaning the Cover ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 5.0
9. Collimator
9.1 Checking the Lighting of Light Irradiation Field ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1.0
9.2 Checking the Filter ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1.0
Checking the Opening and Closing for
9.3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1.0
the Irradiation Field Adjustment Blade
9.4 Checking the Rotation ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1.0
Checking the Deviation between
9.5 - ○ - ○ - 20.0
Light Irradiation Field and X-ray Irradiation Field
10. Preventive Maintenance Items via Maintenance Tool
10.1 Saving the Log Information ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1.0
10.2 Updating the GNC Board Version ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 5.0
10.3 Adjusting the Filament Preheating Voltage ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 5.0
11. Visual Inspection and Cleaning ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 5.0
018-241-05E
PM-4
2. Checking the Error Log
1.0Y , 2.0Y , 3.0Y , 4.0Y , 5.0Y
(1) Check the error log.

$ {IN1:32._Checking the Error Log}
$ {IN2:32._Checking the Error Log}
018-241-04E
PM-5
3. Removing the Cover 3.2 Removing the Cover (the 2nd and 4th year)
2.0Y , 4.0Y ,
3.1 Removing the Cover (the 1st year) (1) Remove the following components.
1.0Y $ {MC:2.1_Front Cover}
(1) Remove the rear cover. $ {MC:2.4_Arm Front Cover}
$ {MC:2.2_Rear Cover} $ {MC:2.6_Right-side Cover (GNC Board Side)}
NOTE
In #xxx50224 or later, the following procedure is unnecessary.
018-241-05E
PM-6
4. Cart Section (2) Check that there is no looseness at the cart handle.
If it is loose, refasten the following screws, and apply a screw locking adhesive.
4.1 Checking the Cart Handle

1.0Y , 2.0Y , 4.0Y
(1) Check the looseness of the screws fixing the cart handle.
#1 Check the looseness of the screws.
POCX010604029.ai
NOTE
If the screws are loose, remove the screws once, and apply a screw locking
adhesive, then reattach the screws.
018-241-05E
PM-7
4.2 Checking the Casters (2) Check the looseness of the screws fixing the back casters.
#1 Remove the non-slip sheets (401N200008C or 401N200012).
1.0Y , 2.0Y , 4.0Y
#3 Attach the non-slip sheets (401N200008C or 401N200012).
(1) Check the looseness of the screws fixing the front casters.
NOTE
- If the screws are loose, remove the screws once, and apply a screw locking
adhesive, then reattach the screws.
- The non-slip sheets which are used differ depending on the machine. For
details, refer to the following.
$ {SP:08A_FRAME 1}
018-241-05E
PM-8
4.3 Checking the Additional Protective Earthing
1.0Y , 2.0Y , 3.0Y , 4.0Y , 5.0Y
(1) Refasten the additional protective earthing.

#1 Refasten the additional protective earthing.
018-241-05E
PM-9
4.4 Replacing the Monitor Arm (4) Check that there is no looseness at the base of the monitor arm.
#1 Check that the screws are not loose.
2.0Y , 4.0Y
#2 Check that the screws on the rear side of the monitor support post attachment
plate are not loose.
(1) Remove the operation panel assembly. If it is loose, refasten the following screws, and apply a screw locking adhesive.
(2) Replace the monitor arm.

(3) Reinstall the operation panel assembly.

$ {MC:2.9_Operation Panel Assembly} #2
#1
#1 #2
POCX010604025.ai
NOTE
If the #2 screws are loose, remove the monitor from the monitor support post and
retighten the screws.
#2
#1
#2
#1
POCX010604026.ai
018-241-05E
PM-10
4.5 Checking the Main Key 4.6 Checking the Cart Bumper
2.0Y , 4.0Y 2.0Y , 4.0Y
(1) Check the main key. (1) Check the cart bumper.
#1 Check if the key can be inserted/removed (lock/unlock) smoothly. #1 Check that there is no deformation and obvious flaw.
#2 Refasten the screws.
INSTRUCTION
When the operations above cannot be performed smoothly, apply some Drilube
around the key hole.
018-241-05E
PM-11
4.7 Cleaning the Cooling Fan (3) Install the shield plate by reversing step 1.
2.0Y , 4.0Y
(4) Remove the shield plate of the DDC board.
(1) Remove the shield plate of the POW board. #1 Remove the screws.
#1 Remove the screws. #2 Remove the shield plate.
(5) Clean the cooling fan of the DDC board.

#1 Clean the fan.
(2) Clean the cooling fan of the POW board.
#1 Clean the fan.
(6) Install the shield plate by reversing step 4.
018-241-05E
PM-12
4.8 Checking the Arm's Horizontal Rotation (2) Check that there is no looseness at the base of the gas spring.
If the arm does not lift up smoothly, and the gas spring base is loose, replace the arm.
2.0Y , 4.0Y
(1) Check the arm's horizontal rotation.

#1 Raise up the arm.
#2 Check if the arm can be rotated horizontally (left-right direction).
POCX010604028.ai
018-241-05E
PM-13
4.9 Checking the Arm's Center Pin Receiver (3) Check that there is no looseness at the arm pipe.
If it is loose, replace the arm.
2.0Y , 4.0Y
(1) Perform the following steps.

#1 Rotate the arm to the left or the right by 15 degree.
#2 Lower the arm.
POCX010604027.ai
(4) Check that the rotating shaft is not loose.

(2) Check if the center pin works. If it is loose, refasten the following screws, and apply a screw locking adhesive.
#1 Move the arm back to the center position.
#2 Check if the arm is fixed to the position by the center pin.
POCX010604030.ai
018-241-05E
PM-14
4.10 Checking the Looseness of the Brake Shaft (3) Lift up the X-ray cart and return it to its normal condition.
2.0Y , 4.0Y
(1) Tip over the X-ray cart.

POCX010302092J.ai
(2) Check the looseness of the brake shaft.
POCX010610009.ai
018-241-05E
PM-15
4.11 Replacing the Monitor Securing Buffering (3) Attach the monitor securing buffering member.
#1 Attach it against the cart handle holding arm.
Member
2.0Y 、4.0Y
(1) Remove the monitor securing buffering member.

#1 Remove the monitor securing buffering member including the double-stick #1
tape.
#1
POCX010708004J.ai
INSTRUCTION
Attach the monitor securing buffering member with the cut side down.
POCX010708004J.ai
(2) Peel off the double-stick tapes from the monitor securing buffering
member.
#1 Peel off the double-stick tapes.
#1
POCX010708003J.ai
018-241-05E
PM-16
4.12 Checking the Battery Remaining Capacity 4.13 Checking the Swiveling Mechanism
2.0Y , 4.0Y 2.0Y , 4.0Y
(1) Acquire the cart part logs, and check the battery’s remaining capacity. (1) Check that the swiveling mechanism is not loose.
If the battery’s remaining capacity has become less than 50%, replace the battery. If it is loose, refasten the following screws, and apply a screw locking adhesive.
$ {MT:1.4_How to Use the Cart Part Log}
POCX010604019.ai
018-241-05E
PM-17
4.14 Checking the Battery’s Tightness (1) Check that the battery’s connector is not loose.
If it is loose, refasten the following connectors.
2.0Y , 4.0Y
(1) Check that the battery’s fixture is not loose.

If it is loose, refasten the following screws.
POCX010604022.ai
POCX010604020.ai
POCX010604021.ai
018-241-05E
PM-18
4.15 Checking the Round Terminal of the INV/ (2) Remove the shield plate on the rear surface (INV board) of the device.
FET Board #2 Remove the shield plate.
2.0Y , 4.0Y
(1) Remove the shield plate of the panel lock assembly.

#1
TP3x6 [1] (x6)
#2
POCX010303018J.ai
018-241-05E
PM-19
(3) Check that the round terminal of the INV/FET board is not loose.
#1 Check that the round terminal of the INV board is not loose.
#1
POCX010604023.ai
#2 Check that the round terminal of the FET board is not loose.
#2
POCX010604024.ai
If it is loose, refasten the above screws.

(4) Reverse the step (2) and reinstall the shield plate on the rear surface
(INV board) of the device.
(5) Reverse the step (1) and reinstall the shield plate of the panel lock
assembly.
018-241-05E
PM-20
5. SE Locking Section (2) Check the SE locking mechanism
#1 Move the SE locking section upwardly.
#2 Check that the SE locking section is locked at the positions of panel sizes.
5.1 Checking the SE Locking Mechanism

1.0Y , 2.0Y , 3.0Y , 4.0Y , 5.0Y
(1) Move the SE locking section to the bottommost position.

#1 Release the jack-up for the X-ray cart.
#2 Move the SE locking section to the bottommost position.
018-241-05E
PM-21
5.2 Check the Locking Key
1.0Y , 2.0Y , 3.0Y , 4.0Y , 5.0Y
(1) Check the locking key.

#1 Check if the key can be inserted/removed (lock/unlock) smoothly.
INSTRUCTION
When the operations above cannot be performed smoothly, apply some Drilube
around the key hole.
018-241-05E
PM-22
6. Arm Section (2) Set the grease to the grease gun.
#1 Attach the grease.
#2 Attach the cylindrical container.
6.1 Applying Grease on the Friction Mechanism

#3 Release the lock on the bottom of the container.
2.0Y , 4.0Y
6.1.1 Preparing a Grease Gun

NOTE
Grease for the grease gun cannot be reused. Replace the grease that is remaining in
the grease gun.
#1 #2
(1) Remove the cylindrical container of grease. #3
#1 Remove the cylindrical container. POCX010606004J.ai
#2 Pull the chain.

#3 Lock the bottom of the container.
(3) Eject the grease.
#1 Eject all of the remaining grease (old) in the grease gun.
#2 Keep ejecting until the new grease fills the grease gun.
#2
#1 #3
#2
POCX010606003J.ai
#1
POCX010606005J.ai
018-241-05E
PM-23
6.1.2 Injecting the Grease (2) Injecting the grease.
#1 Connect the grease gun to the grease nipple.
(1) Attach the grease nipple. #2 Inject the grease 3 to 4 times until it spills out from the slit of the friction mechanism.
NOTE #3 Move the arm up and down 10 times to spread the grease.
Firmly attach the grease nipple. The grease may not be able to reach the inner
part of the friction mechanism if the grease nipple is not attached firmly.

#2 Attach the grease nipple to the screw hole.
#2
#3
#1
#1 #2
POCX010606002.ai
#2
(3) Check that the tube stands still from a random position.
POCX010606001.ai
018-241-05E
PM-24
6.2 Replacing the Gas Spring Assembly
2.0Y 、4.0Y
CAUTIONS
The ballast is clad in lead. If you touch it with your hands, wash them off well.
(1) Replace the gas spring assembly, use the ballast to perform the
weight adjustment, and clear the number of exposure for gas spring.
018-241-05E
PM-25
7. Mono-tank
7.1 Replacing the Torque Hinge

2.0Y , 4.0Y
(1) Replace the torque hinge (large).

(2) Replace the torque hinge (small).

$ {MC:7.9_Torque Hinge (Small)}
018-241-05E
PM-26
7.2 Checking the Rotation INSTRUCTION
1.0Y , 2.0Y , 3.0Y , 4.0Y , 5.0Y Step (3) or later should only be implemented in inspections in even-number years.
(1) Check the rotation of the mono-tank. (3) Check that the collimator’s horizontal rotation is not loose.
#1 Check that the mono-tank can be rotated 270° (180° forward / 90° backward) If it is loose, refasten the following screws, and apply a screw locking adhesive.
smoothly.
#2 Check that the mono-tank can be rotated 330° around the arm's center.
POCX010607002.ai
(4) Check that the collimator’s handle is not loose.

If it is loose, refasten the following screws, and apply a screw locking adhesive.
(2) Check that the tube is motionless in a random position.
POCX010607003.ai
018-241-05E
PM-27
(4) Check that the collimator part is not loose. - When retightening the tank screws, apply 0.5 cc or more of the grease to the
If it is loose, refasten the following screws, and apply a screw locking adhesive. flange’s upper surface (C) so that it is contiguous. Furthermore, apply 1.5 cc
or more of the grease so that it is contiguous on the flange groove (retaining
screw contact part) (D).
C
D
POCX010608002.ai
- When attaching the collimator section to the tube section, install the collimator’s
mechanism (E) so that it is positioned outside of the red arrow (F) range of the
tube section’s mating section.
E
POCX010607004.ai
NOTE
- When retightening the collimator’s screws, apply 0.125cc or more of the grease
to the four concave screw holes (A) so that the grease becomes convex. Also,
apply 1cc or more of the grease so that it will be contiguous around the entire
circumference of the corners (B). Use the following grease.
891S0024: Sumico Lubricant Co., Ltd. Sumigrease EP No. 2
B
F
POCX010608003.ai
POCX010608001.ai
018-241-05E
PM-28
8. Installing the Cover 8.3 Cleaning the Cover
1.0Y , 2.0Y , 3.0Y , 4.0Y , 5.0Y
8.1 Installing the Cover (the 1st Year) (1) Clean the cover.
1.0Y
(1) Install the rear cover.

8.2 Installing the Cover (the 2nd, 4th Year)

2.0Y , 4.0Y

NOTE
In #xxx50224 or later, the following procedure is unnecessary.
018-241-05E
PM-29
9. Collimator (2) Check that the light irradiation field is lighting.
#1 Press the switch of light irradiation field on the operation panel, and check if the
light irradiation field lights up.
9.1 Checking the Lighting of Light Irradiation Field

#2 Press the switch of light irradiation field on the collimator, and check if the light
irradiation field lights up.
1.0Y , 2.0Y , 3.0Y , 4.0Y , 5.0Y #3 Turn the adjust knob, and check if the light irradiation field lights up.
(1) Turn ON the power of the X-ray cart.

#1 Turn ON the circuit protector.
#2 Turn ON the main key.
018-241-05E
PM-30
9.2 Checking the Filter 9.3 Checking the Opening and Closing for the
1.0Y , 2.0Y , 3.0Y , 4.0Y , 5.0Y Irradiation Field Adjustment Blade
NOTE 1.0Y , 2.0Y , 3.0Y , 4.0Y , 5.0Y
The procedures here are not required if the filter is not being used. (1) Check the opening and closing for the irradiation field adjustment
blade.
(1) Check that the filter is detected. #1 Check that the adjust knob can be operated smoothly.
#1 Attatch the filter to the collimator. #2 Check that the light irradiation field disappears when turning the knob to full close.
#2 Check that the additional filter lamp lights up on the operation panel.
018-241-05E
PM-31
9.4 Checking the Rotation 9.5 Checking the Deviation between Light
1.0Y , 2.0Y , 3.0Y , 4.0Y , 5.0Y Irradiation Field and X-ray Irradiation Field
(1) Check the rotation of the collimator. 1.0Y ,
, 3.0Y , 4.0Y , 5.0Y
2.0Y
#1 Check that the collimator can be rotated 270° smoothly. $ {MC:6.8_LED Board Assembly_ Check/Adjustment Procedures_ Checking
the variation between the light field and imaging range}
(1) Set the light irradiation field and light it up.

#1 Check the angle meter and angle scale, make the X-ray irradiation orientation
perpendicular in relation to the floor.
#2 Set the distance between the tube and the wall or floor (SOD) to 1,000 mm.
#3 Turn the adjust knob to match any scale.
(2) Measure the light irradiation field on the floor.
(3) Check if the following 2 values are same.

#1 The scale value of the irradiation field knob that was set at step 1.
#2 The dimension measured at step 2.
018-241-05E
PM-32
10. Preventive Maintenance Items via (3) Click “Saving log information”.
Maintenance Tool
10.1 Saving the Log Information

1.0Y , 2.0Y , 3.0Y , 4.0Y , 5.0Y
(1) Start the maintenance tool for the X-ray cart.

The login window opens.
(2) Login the maintenance tool.

#1 Select “Maintenance”.
#2 Enter the password.
#3 Click [Login].
POCX010610001E.ai
The “Saving log information” window opens.

#1
#2 (4) Click [Save all].
#3
POC010710003E.ai
The “Maintenance” window opens.
POCX010610002E.ai
The log saving result window opens.
(5) Click [OK].

The systems returns to the “Saving log information” window.
(6) Click [Shut down].

The systems returns to the “Maintenance” window.
018-241-05E
PM-33
10.2 Updating the GNC Board Version 10.3 Adjusting the Filament Preheating Voltage
1.0Y , 2.0Y , 3.0Y , 4.0Y , 5.0Y 1.0Y , 2.0Y , 3.0Y , 4.0Y , 5.0Y
(1) Click “Updating the GNC board version”. (1) Click “Adjusting the filament preheating voltage”.
POCX010610003E.ai POCX010610004E.ai
The “Updating the GNC board version” window opens.

The “Adjusting the filament preheating voltage” window opens.
(2) Check the “Software version”, and update the software of the GNC
(2) Adjust the filament preheat voltage.
board as needed.
$ {MU:3.8_Updating the GNC Board Version}
NOTE
During adjusting, 20 – 30 exposures will be implemented in succession. Hold
The systems returns to the “Maintenance” window. down the irradiation switch.
If the exposure switch is released part way through, an Error will be diaplayed. In
that case, restart the device, and re-expose.

The systems returns to the “Maintenance” window.
018-241-05E
PM-34
11. Visual Inspection and Cleaning NOTE
If dust remains inside the DR slot, gather the dust on the opposing reference side
1.0Y , 2.0Y , 3.0Y , 4.0Y , 5.0Y with the air duster, put the tip of the vacuum cleaner on the opposing reference
side, and vacuum up the dust.
(1) Check that there is no dust, trash, etc. around the device. Clean it
when it is dirty.
(2) Wipe the X-ray cart with a cloth with ethanol applied.
(3) Clean the X-ray cart with air duster or the like.
(4) Blow away the dust inside the DR slot with an air duster.
#1 Manually push open the DR Slot top cover.
#2 Blow away the dust inside the DR slot with an air duster from the DR slot reference
side to the opposing reference side. POCX010611002J.ai
There is a terminal on the DR slot’s reference side. To prevent it from getting

damaged, do not insert the vacuum cleaner into the reference side.
In addition, if the dust cannot be vacuumed up since the tip of the vacuum cleaner
cannot get into the DR slot, remove the DR slot and the DR slot top cover, then
put the tip of the vacuum cleaner into the opposing reference side and vacuum
up the dust.
#1 $ {MC:8.1_DR Slot Top Cover}
#2
POCX010611001J.ai
018-241-05E
PM-35
BLANK PAGE
018-241-05E
Control Sheet
10.31.2018 05 Revision for MC V16.6 (FM9528) 1
Installation (IN)
018-241-05E
IN-1
How to Read the Installation Manual
The installation procedures vary depending upon the application version that is being
used in installing this machine. Refer to the procedures which correspond to the
application version that is being used.
 MC application V15.2 or later

The procedures for using the DR Web Maintenance Tool.
$ {Installation (IN1) (DR Web Maintenance Tool)}
 NOTE 
The DR Web Maintenance Tool operating environment is as per the following.
- MC applicatio: V15.2 or later
- OS: Windows7 or Windows10
- Web browser: Internet Explorer 11
 NOTE 
If the version of Internet Explorer installed is older than 11, refer the folllowing, and
install Internet Explorer 11.
 MC application V15.0 or earlier

The procedures for using the RU PC-TOOL.
$ {Installation (IN2) (RU PC-TOOL)}
018-241-05E
DR-XD 1000 Service Manual IN-1
IN-2
BLANK PAGE
018-241-03E
IN-3
BLANK PAGE
018-241-03E
Control Sheet
1 to 4, 7 to 13, 15, 17 to 36, 40 to 48,
50 to 57, 59 to 61, 67 to 69, 71 to 73,
11.30.2017 04 Revision for MC V16.2 (FM9486) 75, 79 to 81, 84 to 86, 90, 101, 105,
108, 109, 111, 113, 117 to 128,
DR-XD 1000 Service Manual 133 to 138

14, 16, 37 to 39, 49, 58, 62 to 66, 70,
74, 76 to 78, 82, 83, 87 to 89,
91 to 100, 102 to 104, 106, 107, 110,
112, 114 to 116, 129 to 132, 139
1 to 4, 11 to 14, 16, 17, 19 to 40,
42 to 45, 47 to 58, 60, 61, 63 to 66,
69 to 71, 73, 74, 77 to 96, 98, 100,
102 to 111, 113, 115 to 117, 119 to 121,
123 to 129, 131 to 133, 135, 138 to 140,
Installation (IN1) 10.31.2018 05 Changes in pagination (FM9528)

142 to 147
15, 18, 41, 46, 59, 62, 67, 68, 72, 75,
76, 97, 99, 101, 112, 114, 118, 122,
(DR Maintenance Software) 05.31.2019 06 Revision for U.S. and Brazil (FM9565)
130, 134, 136, 137, 141
15, 89, 90, 93 to 95, 97, 98, 104, 105,
114, 139, 148, 149
96, 99 to 103, 106 to 113, 115 to 138,
140 to 147, 150, 151
51, 70, 71, 82, 87, 89, 90, 92,
96 to 100, 104, 148, 149
88, 91, 93 to 95, 101 to 103,
105 to 147, 150 to 155
02.29.2020 08 Revision for CSL V13.0 (FM9630) 61, 71
018-241-08E
IN1-1
1. Installation Work Flowchart A
10. Attaching the Cover
START
2. Installation Preparations 11. Checking the Power Cable
2.1 Tools and Measuring Instruments Required for 12. Attaching the Monitor Securing Buffering Members (Optional)
Installation
13. Attaching the Cart Bumper
3. Precautions in Installation
14. Installing the Monitor

4. Transfer and Unpacking
14.1 Installing the Operation Panel Assembly
4.1 Unloading and Preparation for Transfer
14.2 Installing the Hydro-AG Sheet
4.2 Transfer of Instruments
15. Installing the FUJIFILM-made Access Point
4.3 Unpacking the DR-XD 1000PX
4.4 Unpacking the Battery 15.1 Attaching the Velcro Tape (Dual Lock)
4.5 Unpacking the FUJIFILM-made Access Point 15.2 Installing the FUJIFILM-made Access Point
4.6 Unpacking the SE 16. Safety Check / Operation Setup of Each Section
5. Checking the Items Supplied
16.1 Checking the Key Switch
5.1 Items Supplied with DR-XD 1000PX 16.2 Checking the Caster Lock
5.2 Items Supplied with Flat Panel Sensor 16.3 Checking the Moving Motion
5.3 Option Items 16.4 Checking the Arm Lock
6. Removing the Cover 16.5 Checking the Arm Motion
16.6 Checking the Arm Centering Function

7. Installing and Confirming for the Battery
16.7 Checking the Collimator Operation
8. Installing the DAP Kit (Optional) 16.8 Checking the Light Irradiation Field
16.9 Setting the Lighting Time of the Light Irradiation Field

9. Attaching the Optional Items 1
16.10 Setting the DAP (Optional)
A
B
018-241-05E
DR-XD 1000 Service Manual IN1-1
IN1-2
B C
16.11 Aging 22. SE Registration
16.12 Checking the X-ray Dose
22.1 Registering SE on DR-ID 300CL
17. Difference between Default Setup of DR-ID 1200
and DR-XD 1000 system (Reference) 22.2 Changing the GOS Exposure Conditions for DR-ID 300CL
22.3 Registering SE Serial ID on DR Maintenance Software

18. Setting the FUJIFILM-made Access Point and Network
22.4 Changing the SE Country Code
18.1 Setting the Country Code for 22.5 Setting IP Address for SE
FUJIFILM-made AP (Overseas Only)
22.6 Upgrading SE Application
18.2 Setting the FUJIFILM-made AP
22.7 Setting the Color for SE
19. Upgrading MC Application
22.8 Installing the Machine-Specific Data
20. Installing the DR Maintenance Software/Unlocking the Security Lock 23. Changing the IP Address of the System (SE/MP/MC)
20.1 Installing the DR Maintenance Software 24. Checking the MC_ID_MODE

20.2 Unlocking the DR Maintenance Software’s Security Lock
25. Setting the MAC Address Filtering
20.3 Starting up the DR Maintenance Software
20.4 Preparation before Setting DR Device 26. Checking the Radio Wave Conditions
20.5 Updating MP Application Software Version

27. Calibration
21. Configuration Setup
27.1 Preparations
C 27.2 Offset Calibration
27.3 Gain Calibration
27.4 Defect Calibration
27.5 Lag Calibration
27.6 Checking the Calibration Results
018-241-05E
IN1-3
D E
28. Attaching the Optional Items 2 35. Final Checks
29. Checking the X-ray Source 35.1 Operation Check for DR Lock Knob
35.2 Operation Check for DR Slot

Imaging Range 35.3 Final Checks for X-ray Cart
29.2 Checking for Foreign Material in X-ray Tube 36. Visual Inspection and Cleaning of the Device
29.3 Operation Check for DAP (Optional)
END
29.4 Checking the Reproducibility (Optional)
29.5 Calibration for Exposure Index (EI) (Optional)
30. Checking for Image Problems

White Blank Portion, and Sensitivity Problems in the Images
30.2 Checking the Format
30.3 Checking for False Images, Problems in Read Center and

Film Character Format Information
31. Initial Settings for SE Battery Pack
33. Clearing the Operational Information
34. Backing Up the Data
018-241-05E
IN1-4
2. Installation Preparations
2.1 Tools and Measuring Instruments Required

for Installation
When installing the machine, the tools required are as per the following.
Tool name Size Work covered
Spanner 8mm (x2) $ {IN1:7._Installing and Confirming for the
Battery}
Spanner 13mm $ {IN1:4.3_Unpacking the DR-XD 1000PX}
Spanner 17mm (x2) $ {IN1:4.3_Unpacking the DR-XD 1000PX}
Nippers or Cutter - $ {IN1:4.3_Unpacking the DR-XD 1000PX}
Vinyl tape - $ {IN1:7._Installing and Confirming for the
Battery}
Digital multimeter - $ {IN1:7._Installing and Confirming for the
Battery}
Phillips screwdriver - All
Allen wrench 4mm $ {IN1:7._Installing and Confirming for the
Battery}
Allen wrench 5mm $ {IN1:14._Installing the Monitor}
Cutter - $ {IN1:14._Installing the Monitor}
Torque driver M5, M6 $ {IN1:7._Installing and Confirming for the
Battery}
Allen wrench 1.5mm $ {IN1:13._Attaching the Cart Bumper}
NOTE
Refer to the following in regard to torque driver specifications.
$ {MC:10.2_Special Tools and Measuring Instruments}
018-241-05E
IN1-5
WARNING/CAUTION
Observe the warning and precautions mentioned in “Safety Precaution”.
CAUTION
When connecting or disconnecting the cable connector, wear an antistatic wrist
band to ground the human body. Otherwise, static electricity charged in the
human body might damage electronic components.
INSTRUCTION
- It is recommended that you should not install machine cables (such as the power
cables and communication cables) near such instruments that generate magnetic
field noise (such as a motor, transducer and switching power source) and other
cables to assure appropriate image quality.
- Connect to the USB port of X-ray cart when using mouse jig, keyboard jig and Disc
drive jig. If connecting to the USB port of operation panel, power supply may be
insufficient and incorrect operation may occur on the operation panel.
018-241-03E
IN1-6
4. Transfer and Unpacking 4.3 Unpacking the DR-XD 1000PX
CAUTION
4.1 Unloading and Preparation for Transfer Perform the following unpacking procedures securely.
CAUTION The machine may get damaged if not performed.
Before unloading the machine, secure a proper machine transfer route. (1) Cut the PP bands.
#1 Cut the PP bands (horizontal).
 INSTRUCTION  #2 Take out the slope.
Fully leave the machine with the plastic cover put on in the room. If the cover is put #3 Cut the PP bands (vertical).
off immediately after the machine is transferred into the room, the machine might get
condensation.
#3
CAUTION #2
If the machine is to be transferred over uneven floor, slowly move the machine #1
not to shock it. Note that the carrier can come over a difference in height up to
approx. 10 mm.
POC010704001.ai
NOTE
Save the PP bands which were disconnected in these procedures since they will
be used when the slope is secured by the subsequent procedures.
018-241-03E
IN1-7
(2) Remove the cardboard box. (3) Remove the base presser.
#1 Remove the upper cardboard. #1 Remove the bolts.
#2 Remove the joints. #2 Remove the base presser.
#3 Remove the side cardboard.
#2
#1
#3
#1
POC010704002.ai
17 mm (x4)
CAUTION
Remove the base presser securely. #2
If unpacking without removing it, the brake kit may be deformed. POC010704012.ai
REFERENCE
The base presser is secured with the bolts which are on the top and bottom.
(4) Remove the plastic cover.
(4)
POC010704003.ai
POC010704004.ai
018-241-04E
IN1-8
(5) Secure the slope with the PP bands. (7) Raise the X-ray cart and carry it down from the pallet.
NOTE
Use the PP bands that secure the slope for the things which were disconnected in
the procedure (1).
(7)
(5)
POC010704007.ai
POC010704005.ai
CAUTION
(6) Remove the U-shape bolt. When unpacking the unit, the X-ray cart is unlocked. Be careful when raising the
cart.
(8) Take out the X-ray source device from the buffers.
#1 Spread the arm lock to unlock it.
#2 Spread the arm.
#3 Remove the buffers.
#1 #2
(6)
#3
(6)
13 mm
POC010704006.ai
018-241-04E
IN1-9
(9) Remove the buffers protecting the cables. (11) Take out the operation panel from the plastic sheet.
#1 Remove the buffers. #1 Remove the plastic sheet.
#1
#1
#2
POC010704009.ai
POCX010704001J.ai

#1 Cut the PP bands.
#2 Remove the operation panel.
#1
#2
POC010704008.ai
NOTE
Depending upon the machines, the operation panel is packed in cardboard.
018-241-04E
IN1-10
4.4 Unpacking the Battery
(1) Take out the battery from shipment box.
(1)
POC010704011.ai
4.5 Unpacking the FUJIFILM-made Access Point

(1) Take out the Access Point from shipment box.
(1)
POC010704013.ai
4.6 Unpacking the SE

(1) Take out the SE from shipment box.
018-241-04E
IN1-11
5. Checking the Items Supplied Item Image Qty. Remarks Refer
Check the items based on the packing manual (PACKING LIST) supplied.
5.1 Items Supplied with DR-XD 1000PX USB port cover

4
$ {IN1:14._
Installing the
(317S1102*)
Monitor}
Main Unit Components

Item Image Qty. Remarks Refer POC010705004.ai
$ {IN1:14.1_
- For Japan Installing the
Power cord
1 only Operation
(111K86241*) $ {IN1:14.2_
- 100 V Panel Hydro-AG sheet for
Assembly} operation panel 1 Installing the
(345N130066*) Hydro-AG
Sheet}
$ {IN1:7._ POC010705005.ai
FG cable Installing and
1 3m
(136Y200030*) Confirming for
the Battery}
For installing $ {IN1:14.1_
the FG cable Installing the
Hexagon TP screw
POC010705001.ai
1 inside the Operation
(308S0665*)
operation Panel
panel Assembly}
Key $ {IN1:16.1_
2 Checking the
POC010705029.ai
(316N200010*)
Key Switch}
POC010705002.ai
For the $ {IN1:14.1_
Cross-recessed Installing the
monitor
pan head screw 2 Operation
cable
(301S2782606*) Panel
$ {IN1:7._ clamps
Assembly}
Screw cap (black) Installing and POC010705030.ai
3
(317N200007*) Confirming for
the Battery}
POC010705017.ai
$ {IN1:14.1_
Clamp for monitor Installing the
cable 2 Operation
(316S1408*) Panel
$ {IN1:7._ Assembly}
Screw cap (silver) Installing and
5
(317Y200010*) Confirming for POC010705003.ai
the Battery}
POC010705018.ai
$ {IN1:14.1_
Binding band for Installing the
monitor cable 1 Operation
(316S1164*) Panel
POC010705019.ai Assembly}
018-241-05E
IN1-12
Item Image Qty. Remarks Refer SE Maintenance Jig

Item Parts number Image Qty. Remarks
Battery securing $ {IN1:7._
Installing and Positioning jig for
bracket 1 319N120132* 2
Confirming for SE assembly
(301S2782606*)
the Battery}
POC010705020.ai
Jig for resetting the

120N120011* 1
IP address
Hexagonal head TP For securing $ {IN1:7._
screw 2 the battery Installing and
(308S0424*) bracket Confirming for POC010705027.ai
the Battery}
POC010705021.ai
Added after
Special screw M2x3 308N120002* 52
#xxx271
Cart bumper POC010705031.ai
(#xxx50318 or $ {IN1:13._
earlier: 304S0043*, 2 Attaching the Added after
Screw cap seal 317N120032* 4
#xxx50319 or later: Cart Bumper} #xxx271
386N200023*)
Added after
Plug seal 317Y120002* 4
POC010705022.ai
#xxx271
Hexagon socket For securing $ {IN1:13._

head cap screw 6 the cart Attaching the
(304N200022*) bumper Cart Bumper}
POC010705023.ai
$ {IN1:12._
Attaching
Hand switch holder the Monitor
1 Securing
(362N200018*)
Buffering
Members
(Optional)}
POC010705024.ai
$ {IN1:12._
Attaching
Fixation buffering the Monitor
member for monitor 2 Securing
(386N200036*) Buffering
Members
POC010705025.ai
(Optional)}
SE cassette $ {IN1:13._
variation labels 1 Attaching the
(405N201403*) POC010705026.ai Cart Bumper}
018-241-07E
IN1-13
Manual
 Software

Item Parts number Image Qty. Remarks Item Parts number Image Qty. Remarks
Report of
completion of 897N101226* 1 For Japan only
installation
DR-ID 300CL
DR-XD 1000 Application 114Y2150001L* 1
897N200035 1 For Japan only
attached document Software
DR-XD 1000
897N200036* 1 For Japan only
Operation manual POC010705015.ai
DR-XD 1000
performance
confirmation check
list DR-ID 300CL
Standard Kit 114Y2150008B* 1
Console Advance (DR-XD 1000)
(DR-ID 300CL) 897Y200111* 1 For Japan only
Operation manual
POC010705011.ai
FDR nano Only for FDR

897N200038* 1
Operation Manual nano
DR-XD 1000
Antibacterial Only for FDR DR-ID 300CL
897N200653* 1 114Y2150052B* 1
Coating Operation nano Reference Guide
Manual
X-RAY OUTPUT Only for FDR

897N201055* 1 POC010705013.ai
CHECK SHEET nano
Only for FDR

nano
Packing material DR-ID 1200
Packing
for the X-ray output 490S0009* 1 Application 114Y2335100A* 1
material for
check sheet Software
X-RAY OUTPUT
CHECK SHEET
POC010705014.ai
FDR AQRO Only for FDR
897N200723* 1
Operation Manual AQRO
DR-XD 1000
Antibacterial Only for FDR USB RNDIS
897N200826* 1 For Japan
Coating Operation AQRO driver disc for the 114Y2255903A* 1
Manual_US only
FUJIFILM-made AP
POC010705010.ai
018-241-05E
IN1-14
Win 7 Recovery
114Y2335703A* 1
Boot Disk
POC010705012.ai
Recovery
114Y2150307B* 1
Image Disk 1
POC010705028.ai
Recovery
114Y2150308B* 1
Image Disk 2
POC010705016.ai
Standard Optional Items


Item Qty. Remarks
- Battery assembly
(125Y200022+139N200007(x2)
Battery pack (X-ray cart) 1 + 382N120301(x3) + 405N200728)
- Hexagonheaded bolt (Q5x10) (x4)
For battery fixing (304S3180510)
- Radio law aggregation label
- Driver CD for FUJIFILM-made AP
- Velcro tape (Dual lock) (For operation
Access point (For overseas) 1
panel: 2 pcs., for FUJIFILM-made
AP: 2 pcs.)
- FUJIFILM-made AP
018-241-05E
IN1-15
5.2 Items Supplied with Flat Panel Sensor 5.2.2 1213SE/1214SE
Item Qty. Remarks
5.2.1 1201SE/1202SE/1211SE/1212SE SE (Flat panel sensor) 1 -
Item Qty. Remarks Memory element (Machine-specific data) 1
SE (Flat panel sensor) 1 - Special screw M2x3 34
Memory element (Machine-specific data) 1 Small size plug seal 3
1201SE/1211SE: 46 pcs. Small size screw cap assembly 2
Special screw M2x3 -
1202SE/1212SE: 52 pcs.
Small size screw dynok tape 2
Screw cap seal 4
Stopper seal 2
Plug seal 4
Small size stopper seal 3
Stopper seal 4
Dummy battery assembly 1
Small size connector cover assembly 1
Connector part cover assembly 1
Screw seal 4 For short side: 2 pcs., For long side: 2 pcs.
Seal including antibacterial paint
1201SE/1211SE: 14inch; 2 pcs., Screw seal (Thick) 4 For short side: 2 pcs., For long side: 2 pcs.
Screw seal 4
17inch; 2 pcs.
1202SE/1212SE: 17inch; 4 pcs. Green label 4 Spare part: 2 pcs.
Seal including antibacterial paint Gray label 4 Spare part: 2 pcs.
1201SE/1211SE: 14inch; 2 pcs.,
Screw seal (Thick) 4 Small size insertion position 1
17inch; 2 pcs.
1202SE/1212SE: 17inch; 4 pcs.
Notes on the X-ray exposure 1
Green label 4 Spare part: 2 pcs.
Antibacterial coating 1
Gray label 4 Spare part: 2 pcs.
Letter of guarantee 1 For Japan only
Installation confirmation report 1
Report of completion of installation 1 For Japan only
DR-ID 1200 performance confirmation
1 For Japan only
Antibacterial coating 1 check list
DR-ID 1200 flat panel sensor product DR-ID 1200 flat panel sensor product
1 1 For Japan only
operation manual operation manual
Letter of guarantee 1 For Japan only Software (Country Code) 1 For Japan only
DR-ID 1200 performance confirmation DR-ID 1200 operation manual 1 For overseas only
1 For Japan only
check list
Supplementary Material 1 For overseas only
Software (Country Code) 1 For Japan only
Radio law aggregation label 1 For overseas only
DR-ID 1200 operation manual 1 For overseas only
$ For DR-ID1270SE series, refer to DR-ID1270 Service Manual.
018-241-06E
IN1-16
5.3 Optional Items Item Qty. Remarks
- Cross-recessed head screw (x2)
5.3.1 Optional Item List Magnetic card reader fixation kit 1
- Fixture
- Stand
Item Qty. Remarks - Tape (x42)
- Hexagon socket head cap screw

(M4x10: 4 pcs) NOTE
Additonal filter 1 - Attached document Since protective film has been added for the additional filters for S/N 20071 or later, do
Essential item for exposure when the
object is a child.
not peel it off.
Travel handle high type option 1

- Accessory case
Accessory kit 1
- Buffering member 5.3.2 Flat Panel Sensor Related
- Blue tooth barcode reader Item Qty. Remarks
(OPN-3002i)
Bluetooth barcode reader kit 1 SE battery pack 1
- USB adapter
(Wireless USB Adapter OPA-3201) SE adapter 1 For 1201SE, 1202SE, 1211SE, 1212SE
- Wipe holder SE adapter (Small) 1 For 1213SE, 1214SE
Wet tissue holder 1 - Magic tape
- Buffering member
- Screw (x4)
X-ray protection apron hanger 1 - Screw hidden cap
- Pipe
- Cable between GNC board and DAP
- DAP relay cable
- Electrical filter
- DAP fixing screw
- Hexagonheaded TP screw (x2)
Area dosimeter fixation kit 1 - Bundled parts (x8)
- Cord clamp (x7)
- Slide tape
- Open/Close handle label (x2)
- DAP cable fixing rail
- DAP handle
X-ray cart carry cart 1
Barcode reader kit (Japan) 1
Barcode reader kit (overseas) 1
Magnetic card reader (JIS, Japan) 1
Magnetic card reader (ISO, Japan) 1
Magnetic card reader (ISO, overseas) 1
018-241-05E
IN1-17
6. Removing the Cover (1) Unpack the battery.
#1 Cut off the binding band.
CAUTION
- Be careful not drop the battery, doing so might cause injuries.
- Do not remove the battery terminals protective covers until the battery is
installed. Keep the protective covers after removing them from the battery
terminals.
#1
POCX010706002J.ai
POC010706001.ai (2) Turn OFF the main breaker and temporarily secure it with tape.
- The battery may be broken if not being replaced correctly. Do not use batteries #1 Turn OFF the main breaker.
other than the type (or equivalent level) specified by the maker. #2 Use tapes to temporarily fasten the main breaker.
- Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions from the battery maker.
#2
#1 POC010706002.ai
NOTE
The battery is shipped with the main breaker switched ON. Be sure to switch it OFF
when starting any work.
018-241-05E
IN1-18
NOTE (5) Remove the rear cover.
In order to prevent the screw covers and screws from falling, cover over the DR slot #1 Remove the screws.
openings with tape, etc. #2 Remove the rear cover.
(3) Remove the front cover.

NOTE
NOTE
When removing the rear cover, since there are tabs on the topside of the cover, lift
- The front cover is secured by velcro tape (dual lock). Be careful when removing it. the cover up a little (1), then press on both the right and left sides (2), and remove it
- When detaching the front cover, lift up the topside a little, then remove the front on the rear side.
side.
(4) Spread the arm. (2) (2)

(1)
#1 Spread the arm.
POCX010707009J.ai
018-241-05E
IN1-19
(6) Remove the front cover of arm. - Velcro tapes (Dual locks)
#2
POCX010707006-01J.ai
- Tabs on the cover

Since the shapes of the tabs are such that they are pressed in downwards,
#3 when removing the cover, they need to be directed upwards.
#1
TP3x6 [1]
POC010302012.ai
NOTE
To detach the cap and cover, peel the portions around the velcro tapes (dual locks) POCX010707007J.ai
until the velcro tapes (dual locks) click. Face the cover upwards then detach it - Since the screws do not fall into the arm’s inside section, cover over the base of
according to the tabs. the arm with tape, etc.
POCX010707005J.ai
POCX010707020J.ai
018-241-05E
IN1-20
(7) Perform the following procedures before removing the right and the (8) Remove the right cover.
left cover. #1 Loosen the screws on the inner side of the cover.
#1 Rotate the arm to a position that will not block the upper cover. #2 Push the upper cover to move up a little.
REFERENCE #3 Remove the screws.
The top cover does not need to be completely removed. #5 Remove the right cover.
#3
TP3x6 (x3)
#1
#2
TP3x12 (x2)
POC010302051.ai
INSTRUCTION
When removing the right cover, pass the USB cover and the cables through the
gap to remove the right cover.
Cover gap
POC010302052E.ai
018-241-05E
IN1-21
(9) Remove the left cover.
#2 Push the upper cover to move up a little.
#5 Remove the left cover.
NOTE
The screws removed at #3 are also on the inner side of the switch cover. Be sure
to remove them.
018-241-05E
IN1-22
7. Installing and Confirming for the (2) Retracting the cables and connectors.
#1 Retract the connector cables which are connected to the battery to the
Battery clamp.
#2 Retract the AC inlet side cables to the clamp.
(1) Remove the 3 brackets.
#7 Remove the inlet assembly. #1
#2
POCX010303005J.ai
018-241-05E
IN1-23
(3) Mount the battery in the device. (4) Press in the included battery bracket, and secure the battery.
NOTE #1 Fix the bolts (Battery bundled items).
#2 Embed the battery bracket (Main bundled items).
- When installing the battery it might get caught midway. Push it in so that the far #3 Loosen the nut (upper side).
side of the battery rises up. #4 Attach the nut (lower side) to the position of the bracket and fix it.
- Push the battery all the way in, then pull on it slightly. The bolts will be easier to #5 Fix the nut (upper side).
secure in the next step. #6 Attach the screws (Main bundled items).
- Be careful not to let the cables or connectors stick between the cart and
battery.
#1 Mount the battery into the device.
#3#5 #2
Na5 (8 mm)
#4
Na5 (8 mm)
#6
#1 TP4x8 (x2)
#1
Q5x10 (x2) (4 mm) POC010707007.ai
REFERENCE
POCX010707021J.ai
- #5 Na5 (8 mm): 120 cNm
018-241-05E
IN1-24
(5) Connect the connector to the battery. (6) Attach the cable from the battery to the FET board.
#1 Release the clamp and remove the connector that connects to the battery. #1 Pass the cable through the two clamps.
#2 Connect the connector to the battery. #2 Remove the terminal protective caps.
#3 Attach the round terminals (upper side: red, lower side: black).
#4 Attach the screw on the + side with 200 cNm ± 20% torque.
#1
#5 Attach the screw on the - side with 200 cNm ± 20% torque.
NOTE
Be careful to not mistake the installation positions when installing the round terminals
#2 onto the FET board.
BAT_B In addition, the mounting torque is specified for the round terminals. Be careful not
#2 Cable color Terminal size Installation torque
BAT_A
+ side red M5 (smaller) 200 cNm ± 20%
- side black M6 (larger) 200 cNm ± 20%
POC010707005.ai
REFERENCE
#3
Rotate the encircled section in the photo, and detach/connect the connector. #1
#2
POCX010707015J.ai #4
#1
#5
POC010707006.ai
018-241-07E
IN1-25
(7) Remove the tapes securing the main breaker. (9) Before attaching the cover, check that the AC inlet terminal (except
for the GND terminal) via a tester that they are not conducting with the
(8) Attach the bolts. device’s frame.
#1 Attach the bolts.
POC010704014.ai
NOTE
- If the power is switch ON and the AC inlet terminal (except for the GND
terminal) are conducting with the device’s frame, the institution’s power source
and the battery might be damaged.
- If the AC inlet terminal (except for the GND terminal) is conducting with the
device’s frame, the cables might be pinched in the frame or in the batteries.
Check the cable connections, and if the cables are damaged, replace them.
(10) Turn ON the main breaker, and confirm that it powers ON.
NOTE
(12) Reinstall the bracket by reversing the step (1).
018-241-05E
IN1-26
8. Installing the DAP Kit (Optional) Configuration of the DAP Kit

Use the option item “Recommended DAP fixation kit” to install the DAP to the DR-XD 1000.
REFERENCE
GNC-DAP cable Assy
The recommended DAP is as follows. Purchase both items as a set. (356N200355+136Y200065
- Vacutech-made VacuDAP OEM No.1560015 +357S0016 x 2+316S1121)
- Cable: Vacutech-made VacuDAP Interface Cable RS-232 No.9520061, cable
lengths: 3.0 m
- Guide: Vacutech-made U-Guide-pair 132mm No.1560048 POCX01070A042J.ai
CAUTION DAP 15V relay cable

136Y200112
In order to avoid damaging the connectors, do the work without loosening the
DAP cable connector screws. POCX01070A043J.ai
Ferrite core
138S0195
POCX01070A008J.ai POCX01070A044J.ai
DAP fastening screws

308N130007
POCX01070A045J.ai
Hexagonal head TP screws (x2)

308S0414
POCX01070A046J.ai
Binding band (x8)

POCX01070A040J.ai
Sliding tape
382N130042*
018-241-05E
IN1-27
DAP handle paint Assy

(340Y130011+382N130078)
Clamp Assy (x2)
(316S1409+386N130040) POCX01070A050J.ai
DAP rail paint Assy

POCX01070A009J.ai
(363Y130017+382N130063 x 2)
Lock release label
(382N130036) POCX01070A038J.ai
POCX01070A047J.ai
Lock release label Arm cover Assy

(382N130049) (350Y130112+382N200058 x 4
POCX01070A048J.ai
+386N200038 x 2+405N200702 x 2)
POCX01070A015J.ai
* Included for D version or later.

Code clamp (x2)
(316S1410)
POCX01070A010J.ai
DAP Tape
(382N130093)
POCX01070A014J.ai
Cushioning
(386N200039)
POCX01070A012J.ai
Cushioning
(386N200040)
POCX01070A013J.ai

(340Y130010+382N130078)
POCX01070A049J.ai
018-241-05E
IN1-28
Installing the DAP
 (4) Remove the shield plate of the GNC board.
(1) Remove the top cover of mono-tank. #2 Remove the shield plate.
(2) Remove right and left, one each weights II on the tank upper cover.
#2 Remove the weight fixing plates. TP3x6 (x6)
#3 Remove weights II (x2) (right and left, one each).
#2
POCX010303022J.ai
(5) Connect the serial conversion connector.

#3 Connect the serial conversion connector.
#4 Connect the power supply cable.
#3
REFERENCE #4
The shape of weights I (weight 50g) and weights II (weight 150g) is as follows.
#2
TP3x6 (x2)
#1
POC010320017.ai
(3) Attach the top cover of mono-tank.

018-241-05E
IN1-29
(6) Connect the connector. (7) Attach the ferrite.
#1 Connect the connector. #1 Attach the ferrite to the DAP cable (2 coils).
#2 Fix the cable with clamps. #2 Fix the ferrite with binding band (up and down side of the ferrite).
#1 #3 Fix the cable with binding band.
GNC10
#2
#1
#2
#2
#3
POC010320016.ai POC010320015.ai
 INSTRUCTION
The binding band should be secured by running it through the holes on the X-ray
cart.
Fold the binding band as shown below.
POC010320021.ai
018-241-05E
IN1-30
(8) Remove the USB cover. #3 Run the DAP cable through the USB cover.
#2
#3
POC010320019.ai
POCX01070A041J.ai
(9) Run the DAP cable through the USB cover.

#1 Cut the binding band. (10) Paste two clamps (316S1409) in a mono-tank.
#1 Align the clamps with the lines as per the below, install them in a position 40
#1 mm from the right side. The interval between the top and bottom clamps is 2
mm.
2 mm
#1
40 mm
POC010320018.ai
#2 Run the DAP cable through the edge saddle.
POCX01070A017J.ai
#2
POCX01070A016J.ai
018-241-05E
IN1-31
(11) Apply the clamps (316S1410) in 2 places on the arm. (12) Apply the 2 kinds of cushioning on the arm.
#1 Align the clamp on the beginning of the curved line on the cover as per the #1 Align the cushioning (386N200039) with the resin component edge face (A)
below, and install it so that horizontally it is visually centered. and the head of the screw below (B) and install them.
#2 Align the cushioning (386N200040) with the side of the existing cushioning
(C), and install it so that vertically it is visually centered.
#1
(B)
POCX01070A018J.ai
#1
(A)
#2 Align the clamp with the edges, and install it so that vertically it is visually
centered.
(C)
#2
POCX01070A020J.ai
#2 (13) Remove the handle.

#1 Peel off the labels on both the right and left sides of the arm.
POCX01070A019J.ai
#1
POC010320005.ai
018-241-05E
IN1-32
#2 Remove the screws on both sides of the arm. (14) Remove the DAP arm rail.
#1 Peel off of the double-sided tapes from the DAP arm rail.
#1
POCX01070A023J.ai
#2 Apply the DAP arm rail onto the arm.
#2
Q3x6 (x4)
POCX01070A021J.ai
#3 Remove the handle.

#2
POCX01070A024J.ai
REFERENCE
Since the positioning pin is in the DAP arm rail, its installation orientation cannot
be reversed.
#3
POCX01070A022J.ai
 NOTE  POCX01070A025J.ai
Do not reuse the labels.
018-241-05E
IN1-33
(15) Attach the DAP. (16) Wire the cable.
#1 Attach the DAP to the rail. #1 The cable length position from the base of the connector is 630 mm to 645
mm, and secure the DAP cable via the clamp on the end of the arm.
 NOTE 
- Install the DAP so that the DAP cable is arranged towards the back.
If it installed to the contrary, when the collimator is rotated, then the cable
length will be insufficient.
- Exercise care not to put load on the DAP cable.
- Twist the cable before installing it to prevent it from getting in the light field. (A)
#1
POCX01070A026J.ai
POCX01070A001J.ai
#2 Install the screws. (17) Attach the DAP cable to the arm rail.
#1 Attach the DAP cable to the arm rail.
#1
#2 #1
POC010320001.ai
#1
POCX01070A027J.ai
018-241-05E
IN1-34
(18) Attach handle cover for DAP option included as option. (20) Secure the DAP cable onto the arm socket clamp.
#1 Insert the DAP handle in the direction of the arrow, and snap it in. #1 Secure the DAP cable onto the arm socket clamp.
#1
#1 POCX01070A031J.ai
(21) Secure the DAP cable with tape.

POCX01070A028J.ai
#1 Mark the DAP cable with a marker at a position 500 mm from the arm socket
#2 Install the screws from both the right and left sides of the arm. clamp.
#1
#2
Q3x6 (x4)
POCX01070A032J.ai
POCX01070A029J.ai
#2 Align the marked position (A) on the DAP cable, and the top edge of the
#3 Apply the labels on both the right and left sides of the arm. cushioning, then secure them with tape (382N130093).
#3
#2
POCX01070A030J.ai
(A)
(19) Check that the lock function of DAP handle works.
Cushion
POCX01070A033J.ai
018-241-05E
IN1-35
(22) Fit the DAP optional arm rear cover which is bundled as an option into (23) Adjust the surplus length of the DAP cable.
the arm for adjusting the surplus length of the DAP cable. #1 Adjust the surplus length of the DAP cable inside the cart so that cable
#1 Snap the arm rear cover into the arm. length is 250 mm or longer up to the cart (B) from the arm’s rear cover (A).
 NOTE 
Do not fasten the cover with screws here.
(A)
#2 Stow the DAP cable inside the arm rear cover.
250mm or more
#1
(B)
POCX01070A035J.ai
#1 #2 Rotate the arm right and left, and check that DAP cable does not get taut.
#2 (24) Secure the DAP cable.

#1 Bind the binding bands, and secure the DAP cable.
POCX01070A034J.ai
#3 Check how the DAP cable is wound around, and secure the arm rear cover
with screws.
#4 Move the arm up and down, and check that DAP cable does not get taut.
#1
POCX01070A036J.ai
(25) Attach the shield plate of the GNC board.
(26) Attach the USB cover.
018-241-05E
IN1-36
If necessary, install the following optional items before attaching the cover.
NOTE
The setting of the DAP kit, setting of the magnetic card reader, and setting of the NFC
card reader are performed after the setting up of the CSL and MC.
- Installing the magnetic card reader

$ {IN:Appendix 4._Installing and Setting the Magnetic Card Reader}
- Installing the NFC card reader

$ {IN:Appendix 11._Installation of the NFC Card Reader for Contactless IC
Cards}
- Attaching the high type handle
$ {IN:Appendix 6._Attaching the Optional Items_4. Attaching the High Type
Handle}
018-241-05E
IN1-37
10. Attaching the Cover - When attaching the left side cover, since the main power switch and the left
side cover may interfere with each other, fasten the screws as per the following
sequence.
(1) Reinstall the covers by reversing the step (3) to (9) in “6. Removing
the Cover”.
#1 Attach the left side cover.
OK NG
POCX010706003J.ai
#1 Install the screws (TP3x6) in the sequence of (A) → (B) in a position where
the breaker lever and the cover’s notch edge do not strike each other. The
installation sequence for the other screws is not the same sequence.
(A) (B)
INSTRUCTION
- When attaching the left side cover, attach cushioning on to TP3x12 (x4). The POCX010706004J.ai
orientation of the cushioning is as per the following. #2 After installing all of the above screws, there will be a gap between the breaker
OK
NG
POCX010302138J.ai
It catches
on the cover
POCX010706005J.ai
018-241-05E
IN1-38
#2 Attach the right side cover. #3 Attach the top cover.
INSTRUCTION
when attaching the top cover, secure the TP3x6 (#2) while pressing on the top
INSTRUCTION Since the front cover latches on to and secures the top cover, if the top cover is
not pushed upward and not secured, the front cover cannot be attached.
- When attaching the right side cover, attach cushioning on to TP3x12 (x4). The
POCX010302138J.ai
#2 #2 #2
#1
POCX010302131J.ai
018-241-05E
IN1-39
#4 Attach the arm front cover. #5 Spread the arm.
#6 Attach the arm rear cover.
INSTRUCTION
When installing the arm front cover, install them from the lower side of the arm.
Then press the covers around the velcro tapes (dual locks) since the velcro tapes
(dual locks) are at the following positions.
POCX010707006J.ai
018-241-05E
IN1-40
#7 Attach the front cover. (2) Attach the screw covers.
#1 Attach the screw covers (tab position vertical).
#2 Attach the screw covers (tab position horizontal).
REFERENCE
There are 2 patterns for positioning the screw cover tabs, vertically and
horizontally attaching.
018-241-05E
IN1-41
018-241-05E
IN1-42
11. Checking the Power Cable
WARNING
Unplug the power cable when measuring resistance value.
(1) Connect the power cable to the X-ray cart’s AC inlet.
(2) Measure the resistance value.

(Reference value)
Terminal L-N L-E N-E
Resistance value More than 100 kΩ ∞ ∞
(3) Measure the resistance value between the E terminal of the power
cable and the bottom of the machine frame, and make sure that there
is continuity.
018-241-05E
IN1-43
12. Attaching the Monitor Securing (2) Attach the monitor securing buffering members.
Buffering Members (Optional)
By using the monitor securing buffering members, the monitor will be more stable
while moving. #1
POCX010708004J.ai
INSTRUCTION
Install the monitor securing buffering members with the cut side down.
Monitor securing
buffering members
POCX010708005E.ai
INSTRUCTION
Whether to attach the monitor securing buffering members is optional.
Explain the merits of attach the securing member and let users to decide whether to
install it or not.
(1) Remove the double-stick tape from the monitor securing buffering
members.
#1 Remove the double-stick tape.
#1
POCX010708003J.ai
018-241-05E
IN1-44
(1) Attaching the Cart Bumper.
#1 Attaching the cart bumper.
#2 Fasten the screws.
#2
#1
#2
#2 V3x6 (x2)
Low head
Q3x6 (x4)
POCX010709009E.ai
018-241-05E
IN1-45
14. Installing the Monitor (1) Remove the hexagonal bolts from the cart.

Depending upon the PC-GNC connection configuration, some of the installing
procedures for the operation panel assembly are different.
This installation procedures for newly configured machines will be explained.
NOTE
(1)
- Refer to the following in regard to the differences in PC-GNC connection Q6x15 (5 mm)
configurations.
- Refer to the following regarding the installation procedures for older configured
machines.
$ {IN:Appendix 13._Installing the Operation Panel Assembly (For Older Configured POCX010707016J.ai
Machines)}
(2) Install the operation panel assembly.
#1 Install the operation panel assembly.
#2 Fasten it with a hexagon bolt.
#1
#2
Q6x15 (5 mm)
POC010707011.ai
018-241-04E
IN1-46
NOTE (3) Remove the connector cover of the operation panel assembly.
- Make the arm vertically straight when inserting the operation panel assembly. #1 Remove the screws.
#1
POC010707012.ai
#2 V3x6 (x3)
- Wind the cable around so that it passes through the center of the monitor arm POCX010707017-01J.ai
and cart arm.
POC010707019.ai
018-241-04E
IN1-47
(4) Peel the cable protection tube about 10 cm long, and insert the cables (5) Insert the cable of FUJIFILM-made AP into the cover.
into the connector cover. #1 Remove the cover.
#1 Peel the cable protection tube about 10 cm long. #2 Insert the cable of FUJIFILM-made AP into the cover.
#2 Insert the cables into the connector cover. #3 Attach FUJIFILM-made AP LAN cable, and USB cable to the FUJIFILM-made
AP.
PC OPP1
AP REFERENCE
The FUJIFILM-made AP LAN cable is attached to the bottom side of the AP, and
GND the USB cable is attached to the top side of the AP.
#4 Attach the cover.

#2
#1
LAN
#2
USB
POC010707014-1.ai
REFERENCE
The operation panel rear wiring is a depiction as per the following.
Use LAN relay connector LAN port for connecting to hospital LAN.
USB
AP PC #1,4 #3
POC010707015.ai
LAN
FC REFERENCE
FC LAN LAN USB In overseas, FUJIFILM-made AP is a separate packing item. Installed by “15.
LAN relay Installing the FUJIFILM-made Access Point”.
CSL_PC OPP1
connector FC
FC

wiring ：Tab
: Cables to be wired during installation LAN ：Connector
POCX010302171J.ai
018-241-04E
IN1-48
(6) Connect the connectors. NOTE
#1 Connect the connector. - Install the two ferrite cores so as not to overlap each other when wiring the
#2 Attach the LAN cable (GNC) to the PC. cables.
#3 Fix the ground cable.
POCX010707008J.ai
- In the wiring inside the operation panel, clip the LAN cable (Hospital) and the
FUJIFILM-made AP’s USB cable on to the tabs on the operation panel’s side.
#1 #1 Moreover since these have already been done at the factory, work is normally
OPP1 CSL_PC not needed.
#1
Tab
#2
POCX010302147J.ai
LAN cable (GNC)
#3
#4 Attach the LAN cable (in-hospital) to the relay LAN connector on the back lid.
POC010302041-1E.ai
POC010707020.ai
018-241-04E
IN1-49
(6) Attach the connector cover. (8) Attach the binding band to the clamp.
#1 Attach the connector cover. #1 Secure the clamp with screws.
#2 Install the screws. #2 Attach the binding band to the clamp.
#2 #1
#2
#1 V3x6 (x3)
POC010302039-1.ai
POC010707018.ai
(7) Cut off the extra cable protection tube. (9) Fix the cables with binding bands.
#1 Cut off the extra portion of cable protection tube that goes through the #1 In order to adjust the surplus length of the cable, face the operation panel
connector cover. upwards.
#2 Cut off the extra cable protection tube. #2 Wiring the cables.
#3 Return the cable protection tube to the original place. #3 Bind cables with two binding bands.
#1, #3
#1
#2 #3
#2
POC010707013.ai
(11) Connect the power cable to an inlet, and use commercial power
POCX010708002J.ai
NOTE source to charge the X-ray cart’s battery.

Cut off the extra cable protection tube from the depressed portion shown as #2 in
the image above.
018-241-04E
IN1-50
14.2 Installing the Hydro-AG Sheet (3) Peel back the center section of the Hydro-AG sheet and apply it to the
monitor.
INSTRUCTION
It is optional as to whether the Hydro-AG sheet is to be attached.
After conveying the merits of it being attached, follow the user’s decision.
(1) Open the Hydro-AG sheet package.
POCX010707012J.ai
(4) While pressing down so that the center section of the Hydro-AG sheet
does not move, peel back one side and apply it to the monitor.
POCX010707010J.ai
NOTE
Peel back from the film’s edges and apply it.
(2) Use the attached cleaning cloth and the dust removal seal, and wipe
off any particles, and dust, etc. from the monitor.
POCX010707011J.ai
POCX010707013J.ai
(5) Peel back the opposite side of the Hydro-AG sheet and apply it to the
monitor.
018-241-04E
IN1-51
15. Installing (2) Attach the velcro tape (dual lock) (long) on the place where FUJIFILM-
made AP is to be installed.
the FUJIFILM-made Access Point #1 Remove the double-stick tape from the velcro tape (dual lock) (long).
#2 Align the right side of the velcro tape (dual lock) (long) with the end of the
screw hole (horizontal alignment).
15.1 Attaching the Velcro Tape (Dual Lock) #3 Place the velcro tape (dual lock) (long) between the ribs (vertical alignment).
#4 Attach the velcro tape (dual lock) (long).
INSTRUCTION #2
Depending on a country where the device is installed, a radio law label needs to
be attached. Refer to the following to attach the label.
$ {IN: Appendix 18._Attaching the FUJIFILM-made AP Radio Law Label}
(1) Open the rear cover of the monitor. #3

#1, #4
POCX010707001J.ai
(3) Attach the velcro tape (dual lock) (short) on FUJIFILM-made AP.
(1) #1 Remove the double-stick tape from the velcro tape (dual lock) (short).
#2 Align the right side of the velcro tape (dual lock) (short) with the right side of
rating plate.
#3 Align the upper limit of the lower velcro tape (dual lock) (short) with the lower
POC010707016.ai
limit of the barcode, then attach the lower velcro tape (dual lock).
#4 Align the lower limit of the upper velcro tape (dual lock) (short) with the upper
end of the screw hole, then attach the upper velcro tape (dual lock).
#2
#1
#4
#3
#1
POCX010707002J.ai
018-241-07E
IN1-52
15.2 Installing the FUJIFILM-made Access Point (3) Attach the rear cover of the monitor.
#1 Attach the rear cover of the monitor.
(1) Connect the connector to the FUJIFILM-made AP.
#1 Insert the cable of FUJIFILM-made AP into the cover.
#1
POC010302042.ai
#1
POC010707018.ai
(2) Install the FUJIFILM-made AP.

#1 Install the FUJIFILM-made AP.
#1
POC010707017.ai
INSTRUCTION
Press the FUJIFILM-made AP onto the operation panel, and firmly install the
FUJIFILM-made AP to make sure velcro tape (dual lock) can properly work.
018-241-05E
IN1-53
16. Safety Check / Operation Setup of (4) Turn OFF the key switch.
#1 Twist the key counterclockwise.
Each Section #2 Remove the key from the key switch.

(2) Turn ON the key switch.

#1 Insert the key in the key switch.
#2 Twist the key clockwise.
#1 #2
POCX010710003J.ai
REFERENCE
#2 The CSL remains started up.

#1
(5) Confirm that the XCON operation panel is OFF.
POCX010710001J.ai
CSL start up.
(3) Confirm that the XCON operation panel is ON.
POCX010710004J.ai
POCX010710002J.ai
018-241-05E
IN1-54
16.2 Checking the Caster Lock 16.3 Checking the Moving Motion
CAUTION (1) Check that the moving motion is smooth.
When working by two persons, be careful not to get pinched by around the
caster pedal. The front caster pedal and the back caster pedal are interlocked
one another. If the front caster pedal and the back caster pedal are being
operated by 2 persons at the same time, it may cause injury.
(1) Lower the caster lock pedals into the locked position.
(2) Confirm that the caster is locked.
(3) Raise the caster lock pedals into the orientation regulatory position.
(4) Confirm that the direction of casters is controlled.
(5) Confirm that the front caster pedal and the back caster pedal are
interlocked one another.
018-241-05E
IN1-55
16.4 Checking the Arm Lock 16.5 Checking the Arm Motion
(1) Pull up the arm lock release knob and check that the arm lock can be (1) Pull up the arm lock release knob, raise the arm to a arbitrary angle.
released smoothly.
(2) Check that the arm keeps at the same angle with hands off.
NOTE
If the lock release knob is pulled up while the arm is being lifted up, then the lock
will not be released. In order to avoid subjecting the lock release block to loads,
check that the arm lock has been released, then lift up the arm.
(1)
POCX010710007J.ai
(2) Raise the arm to a arbitrary angle.
(3) Restore the arm to the fixed position and check that the arm is locked
smoothly.
018-241-05E
IN1-56
16.6 Checking the Arm Centering Function 16.7 Checking the Collimator Operation
(1) Lower the arm section and stow it away, move it until it is in a (1) Check that the collimator can rotate smoothly.
symmetrically centered position (until it clicks).
(2) Check that no looseness or slip on the collimator
REFERENCE
The device’s rotation range is as per the following.
POCX010302085J.ai
(2) Check that the arm does not move to the right or left.
018-241-05E
IN1-57
16.8 Checking the Light Irradiation Field (3) Turn the “adjust knob 1” and the “adjust knob 2” to the position of
minimum.
(4) Check that there is no light irradiation field.

#2 #1
POCX010710001J.ai
CSL start up.
(2) Press the irradiation field lighting button to light up the irradiation
field.
POCX010710002J1.ai
018-241-05E
IN1-58
16.9 Setting the Lighting Time of (3) Click [Irradiation field lighting time] at the left-hand side of the window.
the Light Irradiation Field

→ The login window is displayed.
(2) Select “Installation” from the pull-down menu and login.

#1 Select: Installation
#2 Input: the password
#3 Click:
POC010710001E.ai
#1 → The “Irradiation field lighting time” window is displayed.
#2
(4) Change the Irradiation field lighting time as needed.
#1 Select the setting value from the “Set value” pull-down menu.
#2 Click:
#3
POC010717001E.ai
REFERENCES #1
The default password for “Installation” is “service”.
→ The “Installation” window is displayed.

#2
POC010710002E.ai
REFERENCES
The default value of Irradiation field lighting time is “30”.
(5) Implement as per the following, and restart the DR-XD 1000
maintenance tool.
- Exit the DR-XD 1000 Maintenance Tool
- Exit Windows OS
- OFF of the main key
- OFF of main breaker
018-241-05E
IN1-59
(6) Implement as per the following, and check that the light irradiation
field illumination time has been changed.
- ON of main breaker
- ON of the main key
- Press the light irradiation field button
018-241-05E
IN1-60
16.10 Setting the DAP (Optional)  DAP Setup on DR-ID 300CL
(1) Using DR-ID 300CL Service Utility to set DAP setting items.
 DR-XD 1000 Maintenance Tool Setup #1 Set “Enable Connecting DAP Directly” to “Yes”.
(1) Use DR-XD 1000 maintenance tool to set “DAP setup” to “Exist”. #2 Set “DAP Device Type” to “2:VacuDAP OEM”.
#3 Set “DAP Serial_TX Control Port” to “4”.
$ {DR-ID 300CL Service Manual}
$ {MU:3.2_DAP Setting}
018-241-05E
IN1-61
16.11 Aging (4) Check the time passed from the manufactured month from rating/
standard/medical rating plate.
In order to suppress the depletion of the X-ray tube, age the tube before using the
X-ray cart. REFERENCES
NOTE
- Perform aging near the center of the X-ray room, and in a position whereas it is
almost on the floor.
Manufactured month
- Explain these things to the customers so that they implement “Aging before using
the device”.
Perform the aging processing of X-ray tube in advance to slow down the decrepitude
of the tube.
(1) Turn ON the main breaker and main key. (5) Follow the following chart, and change the tube voltage and mAs
value, then irradiate the X-rays.
(2) Turn the adjust knob to fully close the irradiation field of collimator.
(3) Press and hold the DR interlock switch on the X-ray controller for 2
seconds.
POCX010710013J.ai
POCX010710013J.ai
→ The system is switched to the non-interlock mode of memory exposure.
018-241-08E
IN1-62
● Less than 6 months after the manufactured date
Step Tube mAs Standby Number of
voltage (kV) time (sec) times
1 60 25 10 5
2 80 25 10 5
3 90 25 10 5
4 100 25 10 5
● More than 6 months after the manufactured date

1 40 12.5 10 5
2 60 12.5 10 5
3 70 12.5 10 5
4 80 12.5 10 5
5 90 12.5 10 5
6 100 12.5 10 5
7 60 3.2 10 5
8 70 3.2 10 5
9 80 2.5 10 5
10 60 25 10 5
11 80 25 10 5
12 100 25 10 5
018-241-05E
IN1-63
16.12 Checking the X-ray Dose (2) Expose the mAs three times respectively with 1 mAs, 3.2 mAs, 10
mAs via the conditions 80 kV, SID = 150 cm, and record the X-ray dose
NOTE values (mR) and the actual mAs values.
- Check the X-ray dose in the X-ray room. Measure the X-ray dose with the dosimeter and the actual mAs with
- Use a dosimeter which has been corrected. values displayed on the CSL.
NOTE
(1) Place the dosimeter at the center of the irradiation field. For each measurement, perform with a fixed SID, tube voltage and irradiation
field.
Check the linearity of the X-ray dose by the procedure shown below.
I. Calculate “(dose average value)/( mAs average value)” at 1 mAs
II. Calculate “(dose average value)/( mAs average value)” at 3.2 mAs
III.Calculate “(dose average value)/( mAs average value)” at 10 mAs
IV. Calculate the average value of I to III.
V. Check that the following condition is satisfied.
The calculated linearity values of “I/IV”, “II/IV”, and “III/IV” are within the range
0.95 to 1.05.
NOTE
In order to eliminate the effects of dosimeter variations if the calculated linearity
values are out of the allowable range, change the exposing frequencies for each
of the conditions respectively 10 times, and reexecute, then check the linearity.
If the linearity calculation values which were rechecked improve so that they are
within the allowable range, they are not a problem since it can be considered that
the first calculation value affects the dosimeter variations.
REFERENCE
To calculate the linearity, use “Installation check calculation sheet” attached to the
service manual. By entering the X-ray dose (mR) and mAs value into the sheet,
the linearity is automatically calculated. Be sure to record the calculated linearity
values.
018-241-05E
IN1-64
17. Difference between Default Setup of ■ The difference between DR Maintenance Software default setup
of DR-ID 1200 system and DR-XD 1000 system
DR-ID 1200 and DR-XD 1000 system
● RU CONFIGURATION SETTING
(Reference) Default setup
The difference between default setup of DR-ID 1200 system and DR-XD 1000 system DR-ID 1200 system DR-XD 1000 system
is shown as below. Configure the settings based on the DR-XD 1000 system default
NUM OF MP 1 1
setup.
READ MODE 1 2
■ Software applications that is installed in PC for DR-XD 1000 MODE2 EXPOSURE
1.2s 1.2s
system TIME
- DR-ID 300CL AUTO DETECT OFF OFF

- DR-ID 1200MC
- DR-XD 1000 maintenance tool NOTE
NOTE Do not correct the above settings since they are optimized for the DR-XD 1000
system.
For the DR-ID 300CL, apply “DR-ID 300CL Standard KIT (DR-XD 1000)” which is
supplied with the device. When this is applied, the following settings and default
options for the DR-XD 1000 are enabled. ● WIRELES SETTING
For details, refer to the DR-ID 300CL Service Manual.
- Setting the DR-XD 1000 exposure condition preset values Default Setup
- XCON connection setting DR-ID 1200 system DR-XD 1000 system
- Setting the resolution (1024 x 768)
- Memory exposure mode ESSID FUJIAP01 MANUAL
- MC connection setting ESSID MANUAL (Blank) FFaQro87
- The exposure menu, and display group display settings
CHANNEL & MODE MO:11N40P & CH:44 MO:11N40P & CH:44
REFERENCE WLAN OUTPUT ON ON
For the Japanese 1 LAN port PC, the “USB-RNDIS driver” was installed for WLAN AUTO RATE VARIABLE VARIABLE
communications between the FUJIFILM-made AP and PC. With the #xxx50172 or
COUNTRY CODE 4036 4036
later, the communications between the FUJIFILM-made AP and PC are realized via
LAN, so the “USB-RNDIS driver” is unnecessary. (The MAC address of the
BSSID 000000000000
bundled FUJIFILM-made AP)
ENCRYPTION ENCRYPTION ENCRYPTION
ENCRYPTION KEY fujifilm fujiFilm34
FIPS MODE OFF OFF
NOTE
If correcting needs to be done based upon the institutions, correct the settings as per
the above.
018-241-05E
IN1-65
18. Setting the FUJIFILM-made AP and (4) Click [Exit Service Utility].
Network (5) Start the Internet Explorer.
18.1 Setting the Country Code for the (6) Enter “192.168.0.25” to the address bar and press the <Enter> key.
is disabled. POCX010709001E.ai

AP.
REFERENCES
To set the FUJIFILM-made AP country code, the RNDIS driver needs to be installed
and the IP address of the DR-ID 300CL needs to be set in advance.
For DR-XD 1000, setting the FUJIFILM-made AP country code is not required
because the RNDIS driver and DR-ID 300CL IP address settings have been set as
factory default.
18.1.1 Checking the IP Address of the FUJIFILM-made AP

the default one.
(2) Turn ON the switch key. POCX010709002E.ai
The DR-ID 300CL-AP starts. The FUJIFILM-made AP setup window opens.
(3) Within a period of 3 seconds after the initial window opens, (8) Terminate the Internet Explorer.
DXL04010001.ai
018-241-05E
IN1-66
18.1.2 Setting the Country Code for FUJIFILM-made AP (2) Double-click the “region_set_to_xx.bat” file in the “AP_Countrycode”
folder.
■ Executing the batch file for FUJIFILM-made AP country code REFERENCES
country.
 INSTRUCTION 
DR-ID 300CL. 1200_700300.ai
Therefore, copy the “AP_Countrycode.zip” file and paste it to the DR-ID 300CL,
then unzip it in DR-ID 300CL. The command prompt window opens.
REFERENCES
For overseas, the batch file for setting the country code is distributed with ECN.
ECN Country 1200_700301.ai
2015-E-0203 USA
2015-E-0252 Canada (3) Press the <Enter> key.
2015-E-0249 Europe The country code setup starts.
2015-E-0254 China The command prompt automatically terminates after the settings.
2015-E-0266 Taiwan NOTE
2015-E-0270 Russia, Serbia When the message “mini-AP not working...” appears, check the following items,
Mexico, Brazil, Colombia, Argentina, Venezuela, Nicaragua, and redo the procedures from step 1.
Costa Rica, Australia, New Zealand, Hong Kong, India, Thailand, - Check that the DR-ID 300CL is connected correctly to the FUJIFILM-made AP.
Singapore, Vietnam, Malaysia, Bahrain, Cambodia, UAE, Israel,
2015-E-0271 Saudi Arabia, South Africa, Morocco, Algeria, South Korea, - Check if FUJIFILM-made AP can be connected by using “192.168.0.25”.
Chile, Panama, Uruguay, Guatemala, the Dominican Republic,
Bangladesh, the Philippines, Nepal, Tunisia, Iraq, Egypt, Kuwait, El
Salvador, (Ecuador)
2015-E-0253 Indonesia
2015-E-0272 Qatar, Honduras
1200_700302.ai
018-241-05E
IN1-67
Before setting
1200_700337E.ai

After setting
POCX010709001E.ai
1200_700338E.ai
POCX010709002E.ai
018-241-05E
IN1-68
■ Troubleshooting
● Phenomenon
1200_700339.ai
● Cause
batch file.
● Coping strategy
018-241-05E
IN1-69
18.2 Setting the FUJIFILM-made AP 18.2.1 Network Settings
 INSTRUCTION   Setting the IP address

If the keyboard jig and mouse jig have not been connected, connect them to the USB
port of X-ray cart in advance. Setting the IP address.

REFERENCES
In case of Japan, the factory default settings of FUJIFILM-made AP are shown as #1 Click: [Start] menu
below. #2 Click: [Control Panel]
Setting item Setting value #2
SSID FFaQro87
Ch 44ch
Bandwidth 40 MHz (dual)
Encryption WPA2-PSK
Encryption key fujiFilm34
Stealth setting YES
#1
Login password fujifilm
600_700237.ai

(3) Confirm that “Unidentified network” is set to “Public network” and
select “Change adapter settings”.
600_712030.ai
018-241-05E
IN1-70
(4) Set the local network for the device. (9) Click [Cancel].
#1 Set the adapter name of the Intel(R) Ethernet Connection I218-LM to Eth1. The system returns to the “Network Connections” window.
(5) Right-click “Eth1” and select “Properties”. NOTE
- The Eth1 must be set. Otherwise, any failure may occur on operations such as
(6) Select “Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)” and click [Properties]. image acquisition, panel upgrading, etc.
- If the Remote NDIS6 based network adapter is displayed on the window,
a wrong RNDIS device driver has possibly been installed. Check the
configuration again and delete the RNDIS device driver, if unnecessary.
If the device is for the previous configuration, set the Remote NDIS6 based
network to Eth1, 192.168.0.10.
(10) Set the in-hospital local network.

#1 Set the adapter name of the Intel(R) I210 Gigabit Network Connection to Eth0.
#2 Set IP address (Follow in-hospital settings, eg 172.16.1.20)
NOTE
When using wireless LAN adapters for the in-hospital local network, set the
following.
600_712031.ai
Wired LAN adapter Wireless LAN adapter
The “Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties” window opens. Constitution Adapter Enabled/ Adapter Enabled/
name Disabled name Disabled
(7) Select “Use the following IP address” and make the following settings.
For wireless connection
Eth2 Disabled Eth0 Enabled
with the hospital network
For wireless and wired
connection with the Eth0 Enabled Eth2 Enabled
hospital network
REFERENCE
I. Following figure shows an example pattern 2.
II.
III.
600_712033.ai

III. Keep the Default gateway in blank. (Do not enter)
NOTE
Set the IP address in this procedure to connect to the SE.
(8) Click [OK]. 700_700075E.ai
018-241-07E
IN1-71
 Setting the Network Priority 18.2.2 Changing the Login Password of FUJIFILM-made AP
NOTE (1) Start the Internet Explorer.
- This procedure must be executed only in the Windows 7 environment.
- When the OS is Windows 10, the network priority is not required since the interface
metric has been set during factory setting.
When DR-ID 300CL has one of the following configurations, the network priority must
be set.
- Wired connection to the in-hospital and wireless connection to the image local POCX010709001E.ai
network The login window of FUJIFILM-made AP opens.

- Wireless connection to the in-hospital and wired connection to the image local REFERENCE
network
For the FUJIFILM AP with the firmware V1.7 or later, [TLS 1.0] in the Internet
- Wired and wireless connection to the in-hospital network and wireless connection to
option needs to be enabled to display the access point setting window. By default,
the image local network
this setting has been enabled.
- Integrated MC configuration
The network priority setting procedures for DR-ID 300CL is shown below. $ {MT: Appendix8._Resolution Methods for When the FUJIFILM-made AP
Setting Screen Cannot Be Accessed}
(1) Select “Advanced Settings” from the [Advanced] menu.
REFERENCE
When the menu bar is not displayed, press the [Alt] key. (3) Enter “fujifilm” into the password field and click [Login].

name) to be displayed in order from highest to lowest priority.
When changing the network priority, select the target protocol and click the up-
arrow button or down-arrow button.
priority in the following order.
- In case of a wired connection with the hospital network, set the network priority
Eth1 → Eth0 (Wired) → Eth2 (Wireless)
- In case of wired and wireless connections with the hospital network, set the
network priority in the following order. POCX010709002E.ai

(3) Click [OK].

018-241-08E
IN1-72
(4) Select “Password” from the “Detail Configuration” menu. (6) Select “Restart” from “Maintenance” menu.
POCX010709003E.ai
The “Password Configuration” window opens.
(5) Enter the new password and click [Submit].

POCX010709005E.ai
The “Restart” window opens.

New Password : fuj1Film
Confi rm New Password : fuj1Film (7) Click [Yes].
1200_700381E.ai
The FUJIFILM-made AP restarts.
POCX010709004E.ai
018-241-05E
IN1-73
18.2.3 Changing the Wireless Settings of FUJIFILM-made AP (4) Select “General” from the “General Configuration” menu, change the
following items for FUJIFILM-made AP if needed.
CAUTION - Channel Bandwidth
- Channel
Click [Submit] within 5 minutes after changing the settings. When changing the - SSID
settings costs more than 5 minutes, the system will return to the login window - Network Authentication
automatically and the setting will not be saved. If this happens, it is required to
configure the settings again.
POCX010709001E.ai
(3) Enter “fuj1Film” into the password field and click [Login].
700_700053E.ai
NOTE
- Do not change the settings excepting “Channel Bandwidth”, “Channel”, “SSID”,
“Network Authentication”.
- When changing settings of “Channel Bandwidth”, “Channel”, “SSID”, “Network
Authentication”, change as following.
Item Set value

Channel Bandwidth “20MHz” or “40MHz”
Channel *1 One of “1CH” to “165CH”
POCX010709002E.ai One of “FUJIAP01” to “FUJIAP10”, or set the unique
The FUJIFILM-made AP setup window opens. SSID *2
SSID
Network Authentication “WPA2-PSK” or “OPEN”
018-241-05E
IN1-74
REFERENCES ● DFS (Dynamic Frequency Selection) function
- Set the same value in the DR Maintenance Software “Wireless settings” for the - In the communications channel band of W53 (ch 52 – 64) and W56 (ch 100 –
value set here. 140), due to regulations, weather radar, aviation radar, etc. are prioritized for
$ {IN1:21._Configuration Setup} wireless LAN communications. Therefore, in these bands, in order to avoid
interference with radar waves if radar waves are detected by the access point,
- See the following for the setting correspondence table for the wireless channels the DFS function is implemented which causes the channel being used by the
of access point and “Wireless Setting” in DR Maintenance Software. access point to transit to another channel.
$ {IN:Appendix 12._Wireless Channel Used for the Access Point} - In the DFS band, the access point performs the following operations.
- Before wireless LAN communications are used, it confirms that for 1
*2 When setting values other than “FUJIAP 01” to “FUJIAP 10” for SSID in
minute there are no radar waves, then it starts communications.
FUJIFILM-made AP, set “MANUAL”for “ESSID” in “Wireless Setting” in
DR Maintenance Software, and set the same value as “SSID” to “ESSID Therefore, while it is detecting, communications cannot be conducted.
MANUAL”. - If radar waves are detected while communicating, the communication
will be interrupted and the channel will be changed.
Perform the radar detection again with the changed channel for about
● Communication channel setting 1 minute. If no radar wave is detected, communication restarts with the
changed channel.
- When multiple access points are vicinally placed, changing the channel
As FUJIFILM-made AP channel changed, the SE communication channel
currently used can prevent decreasing the communication speed due to
will also change automatically. The communication continues with the
interferences.
changed SE communication channel until the FUJIFILM-made AP restarts.
● Channel setting when using wireless access point outdoors - In case of the FUJIFILM-made AP, the “WSTAT” LED flashes in red
during the DFS search operation.
- In accordance with the radio law, the W52 (36 to 48ch) and W53 (52 to 64ch)
- The log will record that the FUJIFILM-made AP channel changes
type channels cannot be used outdoors.
according to the DFS. You can check the log by perform the following
- If DR-XD 1000 is to be used outdoors, select a 5 GHz other than the confirmation procedures.
aforementioned channels or a 2.4 GHz. All of the channels can be used
indoors. $ {MT:6._Troubleshooting from FUJIFILM-made AP Log}
*1 There are some different restrictions on “Channel” by different country.
Country Restriction
- When the wireless band is 2.4 GHz, only one of channels 1
USA CH to 11 CH can be selected.
- Channels from 100 CH to 140 CH cannot be selected.
Japan/Europe Channels from 149 CH to 165 CH cannot be selected.
China - When the wireless band is 2.4 GHz, only one of channels 1
CH to 11 CH can be selected.
In compliance with the radio law, do not select channels from
Korea
48 CH to 165 CH.
Other countries Channels from 52 CH to 165 CH cannot be selected.
- For Egypt, in accordance with the radio law, the dual channel cannot be used
outdoors.
- When selecting 2.4 GHz on the FUJIFILM-made AP, select 20 MHz on the
“Channel Width”. Do not select 40 MHz.
- The usable radio channels in each country are changed according to the set
country code.
018-241-05E
IN1-75
(5) Set the “Stealth Mode” to “ENABLE”. (6) Configure the following settings to encode the wireless
communication.
Item Set value
Network Authentication *1 “WPA2-PSK”
Encryption Mode*2 “AES”
A single-byte text string of 8 to 63 characters [default:
Pre-Shared Key *3
fujiFilm34]
*1: It is required to set the “ENCRYPTION” in “Wireless Setting” to “ON” in DR
Maintenance Software.
*2: When the “Network Authentication” is “OPEN”, “Encryption Mode” will not be
displayed.
*3: It is required to match the “ENCRYPTION KEY” with the “Wireless Setting” in DR
1200_700306E.ai
1200_700304E.ai
018-241-05E
IN1-76
(7) Click [Submit] and select “Restart” from “Maintenance” menu. The FUJIFILM-made AP restarts.
700_700064E.ai
After the FUJIFILM-made AP restarts, the system returns to the login window.
NOTE
POCX010709008E.ai
If the following windows opens, click the update button after about 20 seconds,
and confirm that the login window opens.
(8) Click [Yes].
700_700065E.ai
700_700056E.ai
018-241-05E
IN1-77
(9) Enter “fuj1Film” into the password field and click [Login]. 18.2.4 Confirming the MAC Address of FUJIFILM-made AP
REFERENCES
- The MAC address of FUJIFILM-made AP is required when setting the “BSSID” of
“EDIT CONFIGURATION” in RU PC-TOOL. When entering the MAC address of
FUJIFILM-made AP, do not enter the “:” (e.g.: 1cbdb98a00dc).
- After setting the BSSID, even though there are multiple access points with same
ESSID setting. the SE is still able to communicating with a specific access point.
(1) Select “System” from the “Status” menu and confirm the MAC address.
POCX010709002E.ai
(10) Confirm that the changed settings are reflected.
700_700054E.ai
018-241-05E
IN1-78
18.2.5 Confirming the Stealth Settings
(1) Start up the InSSIDer etc. to confirm that the target channel is
invisible.
REFERENCES
The target channel is in the status below.
- The SSID is “Unknown”.
- The MAC address is not displayed.
1200_700309.ai
When the stealth settings are not successful, perform from step 5 in “18.2.3
Changing the Wireless Settings of FUJIFILM-made AP” again.
$ {IN:18.2.3_Changing the Wireless Settings of FUJIFILM-made AP}
018-241-05E
IN1-79
19. Upgrading MC Application (6) Start up the “Set Up PC-TOOL”.
 INSTRUCTION 
(7) Select “.\install\remote\MCSetupWizard.bat” from “FILE EXECUTION”
The procedures here are not required if the latest MC software has been installed. area, and click [EXECUTE].
NOTE
When upgrading the MC applications, the windows might be hidden behind the #1 Input : 127.0.0.1
command prompt. If the relevant windows are missing, check behind the command #2 Click : [Connect]
prompt.

#1
(2) Within a period of 3 seconds after the initial window opens, #2
800_700200.ai
NOTE
connection status.
DXL04010001.ai
NOTE error will appear. Confirm the MC application installation status and the media
each other. Except for the methods in these procedures, if the DR-ID 300CL (9) Click [OK].
the DR-ID 300CL software is terminated while holding down the <Shift> key), #1 Click: [OK]

#1
(4) Check that the MC Manage Icon is displayed in the task tray.
800_700202.ai
018-241-05E
IN1-80
(10) Input the RU NAMEand click [Register]. (12) Click [Yes].
#1 Input: RU NAME #1 Click: [Yes]
#1
#1
#2
1200_700434.ai
REFERENCES
800_700203.ai
The installed MC version and the MC version in the media is displayed.
(11) Check the application version for both of the one in the media and the 1200_700435.ai
one installed in DR-ID 300CL, and click [Upgrade].

#1 Check : the media version and the version that are installed on the device
#2 Click : [Upgrade]
(13) Confirm that the installation is completed, and click [OK].
#1 Click : [OK]
#1
#1
#2 1200_700436.ai
800_700204.ai (14) Restart the DR-ID 300CL.

REFERENCE
- MC Manager will restart automatically after the upgrade of MC software is
completed.
- The setting configured will be enabled after restarting the MC.
- When ACTIVE LINE has been installed, if restarting the PC during the setup procedure,
select “Start” menu – “All Programs” – “Remote Maintenance Processing Skip”, it is
best to select “Skip”. Thereby, the execution of the remote maintenance processing
shutdown script is forcibly skipped, so that the OS restarting time is shortened.
018-241-05E
IN1-81
20. Installing the DR Maintenance The following window opens.
Software/Unlocking the Security

Lock
20.1 Installing the DR Maintenance Software 1200_700483.ai
NOTE (3) Press <1> key.

Internet Explorer 11 is needed in order to use the DR Maintenance Software. If the
Internet Explorer version is older, update Internet Explorer before installing the DR
(1) Double-click “SetupRun.exe” into the application disk drive on the My

Computer.
1200_700484.ai
(2) Select “.\install\DRWM\Setup.bat” from the “FILE EXECUTION”, and

then click [EXECUTE].  INSTRUCTION 
#1 Select: .\install\DRWM\Setup.bat For the MC V16.5 or later, select the standard mode or the VA expanded security
#2 Click: [EXECUTE] mode here. Normally, select “1. Standard” (standard mode).
#1
POCX010713001J.ai
(4) Press <Y> key.
(5) Press <Enter> key.

1200_700482_1.ai
018-241-05E
IN1-82
20.2 Unlocking the DR Maintenance Software’s (2) Click on the upper right side of the window, and click [Internet
options].
Security Lock
In order to use DR Maintenance Software, the security lock needs to be unlocked.
NOTE
An unlocking key file (PCToolSecKey.key) for the security lock is supplied via ECN
every year around April.
The key file to be distributed is active until June 30 in a given year specified with
YYYY in the file name.
1200_700565E.ai
 INSTRUCTION 
(3) Input the following address in the “Home page” field, and click [OK].
Check that FUJIFILM-made AP is connected before starting DR Maintenance
Software.
(1) Open Internet Explorer, enter the following address into the address
bar and press the [Enter] key.
The following window is displayed.
1200_700486E.ai
1200_700566E.ai
REFERENCES
DR Maintenance Software address is registered to homepage.
Procedures (2) to (3) are procedures that registered homepage above address.
018-241-07E
IN1-83
(4) Click the [Browse] in the DR Maintenance Software, select the 20.3 Starting up the DR Maintenance Software
“PCToolSecKey.key” in the application disk of top directory, and click
[Open]. (1) Open the Internet Explorer.
DR Maintenance Software starts.
(2) Select the “INSTALLATION” at the upper left corner of the window.
1200_700487E.ai
(5) Click [OK].

1200_700564E.ai
NOTE
Perform the subsequent procedure according to the DR Maintenance Software.
REFERENCES
When the DR Maintenance Software is restarted, open the Internet Explorer
1200_700488E.ai
again.
Security Lock is canceled.
(6) Click [OK].
1200_700489E.ai
018-241-05E
IN1-84
20.4 Preparation before Setting DR Device ■ Checking the Network Settings
(1) Check that there is no problem in MC application and Network Settings.
■ Checking the access point
(1) When the SE radio function is used, check that the access point has
been set.
$ {IN1:18._Setting the FUJIFILM-made AP and Network}
(2) Click [Next].
1200_700490E.ai
1200_700491E.ai
(2) Click [Next].
018-241-05E
IN1-85
20.5 Updating MP Application Software Version  Updating MP Application Software Version
NOTE NOTE
In the DR - XD 1000, the MP functions are mounted on the GNC67A board which is Follow the procedures below only when the version update of the MP application
used in the DR-ID 1200 etc. software is necessary.
(1) Make sure that the install disk is inserted in the jig drive.
 Checking the MP Application Software Version
(1) Select “MP1” from the drop-down list box, and click [GET].
REFERENCES
If “Current Version” and “Updated Version” are identical with each other, the
[INSTALL] cannot be clicked.
1200_700492E.ai
The MP Application Software Version appears.

1200_700493E.ai
INSTRUCTION The MP Application Software Version has been updated.

If “Current Version” and “Updated Version” are identical with each other, click the NOTE
[Next] to go to the following procedure.
If the MP application failed in upgrading the version, restart the MP and retry from
$ {IN1:21._Configuration Setup}
connection check.
018-241-05E
IN1-86
(3) Turn OFF the power in the order of the PC and X-ray cart, then turn ON
the power in the order of the X-ray cart and PC.
REFERENCES
The MP is restarted by carrying out this step.
(4) Click [GET] and confirm the “Current Version” and the “Updated
Version” are the same.
$ {IN1:20.5_Updating MP Application Software Version_ Checking the MP
Application Software Version}
018-241-05E
IN1-87
21. Configuration Setup (2) Select “Terminate MC” from “OPERATION” - “UTILITY”.
(3) Click [START] at the bottom of the window.

(1) Setting the configurations.
NOTE
Several configurations of the DR-XD 1000 have been set at a factory before
shipping. When the DR-XD 1000 is used under the default configuration, no
alteration is needed.
Refer to the following for details of each item.

$ {MU:5.3_CONFIG SETTING}
■ Activating the Setting

If changed the settings, follow the steps below to activate them.
(1) Click [SET] at the bottom of the window.
POCX010719017J.ai
MC Manager restarts.
REFERENCES
The altered settings are enabled after the MC Manager is re-booted.
(4) Open “CONFIG SETTING” in “OPERATION”.
(5) Click [Next].
POCX010719016J.ai
018-241-07E
IN1-88
■ Setting Items  RU Image FLAG
Setting Items Default value Modifiable
 MC Setting
GOS SHARPNESS FILTER HIGH Change as necessary
IMAGE READING MODE High-speed Mode Change as necessary
MC ID CODE Change as necessary
IMAGELOG SAVE OFF Can not change
EDIT RU NAME Change as necessary
IMAGELOG SAVE TO FTP OFF Can not change
CSL MAC ADDRESS 00:00:00:00:00:00 Can not change
OFFSET2 ON Change as necessary
CSL IP ADDRESS 127.0.0.1 Can not change
T2 TIMER(sec) 120 Change as necessary
OPE SETTING(UPRIGHT) MP1 Can not change
AUTO DEFECT CALIBRATION ON Change as necessary
OPE SETTING(TABLE) MP1 Can not change
AUTO DEFECT CALIBRATION START
OPE SETTING(FREE) MP1 Can not change 4 Change as necessary
HOURS
PORT SETTING(UPRIGHT) MPX1 Can not change AUTO DEFECT CALIBRATION START
0 Change as necessary
MINUTES
PORT SETTING(TABLE) MPX1 Can not change
OFFSET2 JUDGING ON Change as necessary
PORT SETTING(FREE) MPX1 Can not change
NUM OF MP 1 Can not change
NUM OF SE 5 Change as necessary  Wireless Setting

TABLE DIRECTION HEAD RIGHT Change as necessary Setting Items Default value Modifiable
Stand Up Side Down none Change as necessary ESSID MANUAL Change as necessary
2:FIXED MODE ESSID MANUAL FFaQro87 Change as necessary

READ MODE Can not change
(1200ms)
CHANNEL & MODE MO:11N40P & CH:44 Change as necessary
MODE2 EXPOSURE TIME 1.2s Can not change
WLAN OUTPUT ON Change as necessary
AUTO DETECT OFF Can not change
WLAN AUTO RATE VARIABLE Change as necessary
CONNECTING CU NOT CONNECTED Change as necessary
COUNTRY CODE 4036 Change as necessary
EMERGENCY MODE OFF Change as necessary
(MAC address for the
BATTERY WARNING SE[min] 10 Can not change BSSID FUJIFILM-made AP Change as necessary
which is included.)
SE BATTERY WATCHING (when Can not change when
OFF ENCRYPTION ENCRYPTION Change as necessary
connecting cables) MP, DS, PB are included
MC-PC EXISTENCE - - ENCRYPTION KEY fujiFilm34 Change as necessary
A SYNCHRONOUS MC-SHUTDOWN FIPS MODE OFF Change as necessary

SYNC Can not change
WITH CONSOLE
LONG TIME ACCUM MODE OFF Change as necessary
SHOT GO OFF DELAY TIME 0 Change as necessary
018-241-07E
IN1-89
REFERENCE If the BSSID is set to 000000000000, the BSSID function can be set to OFF. In this
case, the SE can communicate with the AP having the same ESSID/Channel & Mode/
Among the wireless connection settings, the ESSID (ESSID MANUAL), the BSSID,
Encryption, irrespective of AP’s MAC address.
the CHANEL & MODE, Encryption and Encryption Key need to be the same as those
of a wireless LAN-AP to be connected.
Items corresponding to each other are as in the table below.
MC
Item FUJIFILM-made AP
Configuration Supplement
No. items
items
When SSID is FUJI AP01 to 10, select
from ESSID. For other than above,
1 ESSID SSID
select Manual and set to ESSID
Manual.
When the SSID is other than (FUJIAP01
2 ESSID MANUAL SSID
to 10) above, set to ESSID MANUAL.
4
Specify a MAC address of the wireless 3
AP. Remove “:” form the address to
enter.
The item functions as a white list type 1,2
MAC address filtering, and the SE can 5
3 BSSID MAC address communicate only with APs having the
MAC address registered here.
* If the FUJIFILM-made AP displays no
MAC address, no country code may POCX010719018J.ai
be set in the AP.
Communication Select a combination of a  SE Sleep Mode Setting

4 Channel & Mode channel and channel communication channel and a channel
bandwidth bandwidth. Setting Items Default value Modifiable
Select Encryption OFF when the SE SLEEP MODE ON Change as necessary
Network network authentication is Open, and
5 Encryption authentication and ENCRYPTION when the network SLEEP START TIME(min) 2 Change as necessary
encryption method authentication is WPA2-PSK and the
encryption method is AES. EXTRA SLEEP START TIME(min) 999 Change as necessary
5 Encryption Key Shared key
$ {IN:Appendix 12._Wireless Channel Used for the Access Point}
018-241-07E
IN1-90
22. SE Registration (4) Set the following and click [OK].
NOTE
- For [Device Name], enter an arbitrary name up to 5 characters.
22.1 Registering SE on DR-ID 300CL - Be sure to enter a serial ID into “FPD Device ID”, which is labeled on the
front face of the serial number data CD-ROM and the battery mounting
(1) Start the DR-ID 300CL. surface. Also, the serial ID must be the same with “SE serial ID” displayed
in “Setting the panel” - “Registering and canceling the SE” window of the DR
(2) Within a period of 3 seconds after the initial window opens, Maintenance Software. In addition, change the default “?????” properly. If not,
an unregistered ID error will occur when the Console is started up.
$ {MU:5.2.1_SE Registration/Deletion}
- Be sure to set [Device Color] in [IIP Service Utility] of [Device Setting] to
coincide with the LED color set to the SE.
$ {IN1:22.7_Setting the Color for SE}
- Do not use the SmartSwich function (X-free) with the DR-XD1000. “Enable
X-Free” is to leave the “No”.
DXL04010001.ai #1 Input : “Device Name”

The “IIP Service Utility” window opens. #2 Input : “FPD Device ID” (Displayed on the battery mounting surface of
the panel)
#3 Set : CALNEO Smart C/D-EVO II C (for DR-ID 1211SE/1212SE/
(3) Click [Device Setting], and click [Add].
1213SE/1214SE/1273SE/1274SE/1275SE) or
#1 Click : [Deice Setting] CALNEO Smart G/D-EVO II G (for DR-ID 1201SE/1202SE/
#2 Click on the first line. 1271SE/1272SE)
#3 Click : [Modify] #4 Set : “Device Color”
IIP Service Utility window #5 Click : [OK]
Device Setting window
Battery mounting surface
#1
#2
#3
#4
#1 #2 #3
1200_700136.ai
#5
POCX010719007E.ai
018-241-07E
IN1-91
(5) Click [Selector Setting]. NOTE
#1 Click : [Selector Setting] - Correspond with the MC settings.
IIP Service Utility window - In order to use the memory mode, set “FPD-C” as “Ready Type”.
- Set the DR-ID 300CL to match the settings for the “Enable Virtual Grid” and “Shot
#1 Ready Notification”.
- The “InitialActiveButton” should be checked when the selector that is selecting
sets the DR-ID 300CL startup’s initial selection state.
1200_700138.ai
The “Selector Setting” window opens.

NOTE
(6) Set the following and click [OK]. Depending on the SE registration count, set the image folder sizes.
#1 Set : “Technique Code” As needed, click “SYSTEM CONFIG” – “99.CONFIG FIX” via the IIP Service
#2 Set : “host Name” (Host name which the 1200MC registered) Utility window – [Setup Configuration Item], and set the “MaximumDataSize”
#3 Set : FPD-C values. If the setting values are incorrect, then the “[MD10016] hard disc is full.”
#4 Input : “Caption” (Characters displayed as the panel name on the error might be displayed.
Console window. Up to 5 characters) For details, see “21. Setting the Images Folder Size (V7.3 or later)” in “MC:
#5 Set : “Icon Type” Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts”under “DR-ID 300CL Service
#6 Set : “Device Name” Manual”.
#7 Select : “Enable Virtual Grid”
#8 Select : “Shot Ready Notification”
#9 Click : [OK]
Selector Setting window
Panel name on the Console window
#1 (Set as FD35G, FD43C)
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
#7
#8
#9
POCX010719008E.ai
018-241-07E
IN1-92
22.2 Changing the GOS Exposure Conditions for (8) Enter “0” (Quit )and press the <Enter> key.
DR-ID 300CL
(9) Remove the disk from the jig drive.
There are 2 types of exposure conditions, for Csl use and for GOS use.
The exposure conditions are set for Csl use as default settings when the DR-ID 300CL (10) Remove the USB connection jig drive from the DR-ID 300CL.
Standard Kit is installed. If GOS panel is to be used, GOS exposure conditions have
to be set when installing.
 INSTRUCTION 
These procedures are only to be executed when the GOS type SE is going to be
implemented.
NOTE
All the exposure menus will be initialized after performing the procedures below.
REFERENCE
For details of this procedure, refer to the following.
$ {4._Changing to GOS Exposure Conditons} in “Appendix 61_Connecting to DR-
XD 1000” under DR-ID 300 Service Manual
(1) Set the USB connection jig drive to the DR-ID 300CL.
(2) Set the DR-ID 300CL Standard KIT (DR-XD 1000) Disk to the jig drive.
(3) Double-click the “Setup.bat” in the disk.

The “DR Console SettingKit” window opens.
(4) Enter “4” (Install MenuDB Settings) and press the <Enter> key.
The language selection window opens.
(5) Enter the number of the language for the menu to be installed, and
The “Select Xcon Parameter Type” window opens
(6) Enter “1” (1) for GOS) and press the <Enter> key.
After the installation is completed, the “Installation finished.” message is
displayed.
(7) If “Press any key to continue ...” is displayed, press the <Enter> key.
018-241-07E
IN1-93
22.3 Registering SE Serial ID on DR (4) Input the serial ID, and click [OK].
Maintenance Software
(1) Click [Next] on the DR Maintenance Software.
1200_400055E.ai
The serial ID of the SE is registered.

 NOTE 
REFERENCE
1200_700496E.ai
The serial ID of the SE is mentioned on the surface of the machine-specific CD-

(2) Set the SE to the DR slot. ROM.
 NOTE 
Set only the SE to be registered in the DR slot, and do not power on the other (5) Confirm that the serial ID is displayed, then click [Next].
SEs.
To register multiple SEs, repeat “22.3 Registering the SE Serial ID on DR
Maintenance Software” – “22.5 Setting IP Address for SE” for each SE.
(3) Click [Add] on the DR Maintenance Software.
1200_700498E.ai
1200_700497E.ai
The Panel Registration window appears.
018-241-07E
IN1-94
22.4 Changing the SE Country Code 22.4.2 Setting
NOTE  INSTRUCTION 
Be sure to perform this procedure in order to observe the Radio Law. Turn ON the power when changing the SE country code for only one SE.
The SE radio function is turned OFF at the factory. (1) Set the SE to the DR slot.
The SE country code needs to be changed in order to perform  NOTE 
the wireless connection. When the following error appears, click [OK].
NOTE
method is needed for setting the SE country code. The new country code settings are
distributed via the ECN.
22.4.1 Preparation
NOTE
Before changing the SE country code, check that the MC wireless settings have been 800_700190.ai
completed.
$ {IN1:21._Configuration Setup}_ “ Wireless Setting” (2) Close all unnecessary windows.
Items that need to be set are as follows: (3) Exceute the batch file (replace_countrycode.bat).
ESSID, CHANNEL&MODE, BSSID, ENCRYPTION, WLAN OUTPUT, WLAN AUTO REFERENCE
RATE, COUNTRY CODE(MC) The batch file for changing the SE country code is supplied by ECN.

(1) Copy the zip file in the country code media supplied by ECN to the
DR-ID 300CL and unzip it on the DR-ID 300CL.
 INSTRUCTION  800_700191.ai
Since the unzipped folder contains invisible files, the batch file will not run
properly if just the visible files are copied.
018-241-07E
IN1-95
(4) When the following window opens, enter the IP address of SE and (5) When the following window opens, enter the IP address (default:
click [OK]. 192.168.0.10) for the image local network side of DR-ID 300CL, and
click [OK].
POCX010719009J.ai
POCX010719010E.ai
REFERENCE
REFERENCE
In an environment of MC V16.4 or earlier, the IP address display prompt opens.
800_700192.ai
1200_700303.ai
 NOTE 
address of SE or DR-ID 300CL is different. In this case, check the IP address
and perform the procedures from step (1).
- When the Standard mode, and Enhance mode selections are displayed, select
“2. Enhanced” only when setting the VA expanded security. Normally, select “1.
Standard”.
POCX010719011J.ai
018-241-07E
IN1-96
(6) Check that the following window is displayed. (11) Restart the MC Manager.
- A completion message is displayed #1 Left-click the MC Manager from the task tray and perform “EXIT”.
#2 Check that the MC Manager icon has disappeared from the task tray, and
then start the MC Manager from “Start menu” → “Start-up”.
800_700193.ai
 NOTE 
When it cannot be done even if it is done again, refer to the following.
$ {IN1:22.4.4_Troubleshooting (MC V16.5 or Earlier)}
lighting up.
(10) Restart the SE.

REFERENCE
After restarting the SE 3 times, the wireless output of the SE will turn to ON.
- After restarting the SE for the second time, the wireless setting is enabled.
- After restarting the SE for the third time, the error state is cleared and the
wireless output of the SE will turn ON.
018-241-07E
IN1-97
22.4.3 Checking the Settings (3) Refer to the “Country code (SE)” in the table below, check that a
correct country code has been set and click [Next].
$ {MD:11._Usable Radio Frequency Bands in Each Country for DR-ID
(2) Select the target SE from the drop-down list box in DR Maintenance
Software, and click [GET].
 NOTE 
This list box does not respond right after MC Manager is started. If SE is not
displayed, read it again after a while.
1200_700500E.ai
 NOTE 
1200_700499E.ai
018-241-07E
IN1-98
22.4.4 Troubleshooting (MC V16.5 or Earlier) - Non-existent invisible files
■ Phenomena
The SE country code batch file stops at the following window while it is being
- Wrong SE IP address
1200_700340.ai
- Wrong IP address for image local network side of DR-ID 300CL

1200_700342.ai
■ Countermeasure / Action
address for image local network side of DR-ID 300CL and then check that the
all the above, execute the batch file again.
1200_700341.ai
018-241-07E
IN1-99
22.4.5 Troubleshooting (MC V16.6 or later) C.If the MC’s IP address was mistakenly input
(In this example “192.168.0.30” was input)
A.If it could be correctly set
SE IP address: 192.168.0.34, MC IP address: 192.168.0.10,
Without VA security settings
800_712018.ai
After setting, “!!!!! Processing ERROR !!!!!” is displayed.

D.If the VA security was mistakenly selected
(In this example “2. Enhanced” was selected)
800_712016.ai
REFERENCE
The SE IP address’ initial value is 192.168.0.30. For the example in the above screen
it is shown as 192.168.0.34.
B.If the SE’s IP address was mistakenly input

(In this example “192.168.0.30” was input)
800_712019.ai
After setting, “Start Connecttion Error![ErrorCode:10060” is displayed, “!!!!! Processing After select [Security Level], “Connection timed out” is displayed.
Completion !!!!!” is not displayed. After setting, “!!!!! Processing ERROR !!!!!” is displayed.
018-241-07E
IN1-100
E. Non-existent invisible files
POCX010719014J.ai
After entering the MC’s IP address, “File not found – countrycode.conf” is displayed.
After setting, “!!!!! Processing ERROR !!!!!” is displayed.
800_712020.ai
018-241-07E
IN1-101
22.5 Setting IP Address for SE (2) When changing, input the “Updated Value”, and click [SET].
NOTE
(1) Select the target SE from the drop-down list box, and click [GET].
The IP address of the SE, either the one for the wired mode or the one for the
wireless mode, is automatically assigned corresponding to the connected SE
No. When the IP address is duplicated, “Error 10214 IP addresses multiple
connections error” or a communications malfunction occurs.
SE No. IP address
Wired mode Wireless mode
1 192.168.0.30 192.168.0.40
2 192.168.0.31 192.168.0.41
3 192.168.0.32 192.168.0.42
4 192.168.0.33 192.168.0.43
5 192.168.0.34 192.168.0.44
1200_700501E.ai
The IP Address of the SE (wired/wireless) appears.
1200_700502E.ai
The IP Address of the SE will be updated.
018-241-07E
IN1-102
(3) Click [OK], and restart the SE.
1200_700503E.ai
(4) Click [GET], confirm that the IP address has been changed, and click
[Next].
1200_700505E.ai
018-241-07E
IN1-103
22.6 Upgrading SE Application 22.6.2 Upgrading SE Application
NOTE
22.6.1 Checking the SE Application Software Version Follow the procedures below only when the version update of the SE application
(1) Select the target SE from the drop-down list box, and click [GET]. software is necessary.
1200_700505E.ai
The software version of the SE appears.

1200_700506E.ai
(2) Confirm the “Current Version” and the “Updated Version”. The software version of the SE has been updated after update version.
INSTRUCTION NOTE
If “Current Version” and “Updated Version” are identical with each other, click the - If any error occurred during version upgrade of the SE application, restart the
[Next] to go to the following procedure. SE and retry the version upgrade again.
$ {IN1:22.7_Setting the Color for SE} - The version upgrade of SE application renews necessary software only. Wait a
while until a completion message appears.
018-241-07E
IN1-104
NOTE (3) Click [GET], confirm that the SE application version has been updated,
and click [Next].
- When the CPU software installed in the SE is old
If the CPU software installation fails during a software update, check the CPU
software version.
If the CPU software version is less than 0x0220 (corresponding MC V11.0),
this function cannot be updated because the CPU software installed in the SE
is old.
Upgrade the SE application version again after updating the FPGA software
from “OPERATION>UTILITY> Update SE CPU (0x220)”.
$ {MU:5.9.10_Update SE CPU (0x0220)}
- When the FPGA software installed in the SE is old
When updating the software, if the message “This function is not supported by
the selected SE” is displayed and the FPGA software installation fails, check
the version of the FPGA software.
If the FPGA software version is earlier than the following version, the FPGA
software installed in the SE is old and cannot be updated directly.
DR-ID1201SE 0x0080 1200_700508E.ai
DR-ID1202SE 0x00A0 $ {IN:22.6.1_Checking the SE Application Software Version}

DR-ID1211SE 0x00B0
DR-ID1212SE 0x00B0
DR-ID1213SE 0x00B8
DR-ID1214SE 0x00C8
Upgrade the SE application version again after updating the FPGA software
from “OPERATION>UTILITY> Update SE FPGA”.
$ {MU:5.9.11_Update SE FPGA}
(2) Check that the installation is completed, click [OK], and restart the SE.
1200_700507E.ai
018-241-07E
IN1-105
22.7 Setting the Color for SE (3) When changing the selector color, select it from the drop-down list
box, and click [GET].
(1) Select the target SE from the drop-down list box, and click [GET].
1200_700510E.ai
1200_700509E.ai
The selector color is registered.
The SE color appears. (4) Click [OK], and restart the SE.
REFERENCE
The selector color is following 6 colors.
- White
- Pink
- Blue 1200_700511E.ai
- Lime Yellow
- Purple
(5) Click [GET], confirm that the SE color setting has been updated, and
click [Next].
- Orange
1200_700512E.ai
018-241-07E
IN1-106
22.8 Installing the Machine-Specific Data (3) Click [Browse], and select all of the files inside the folders in the
“CORRECTH” folder for the GOS panel, and inside the folders in the
 INSTRUCTION  “INDIVIDUALH” for the CsI panel from the DVD drives.
If two or more SE’s are present, use a machine-specific data CD-R corresponding to NOTE
each of them for installation.
Folders cannot be specified as reference destinations. Therefore, open up
If the machine-specific data corresponding to each SE has not been installed, correct
the relevant folder, and specify all of the files inside of that folder.
results cannot be obtained by calibration.
(1) Insert the machine-specific data CD into the jig drive.
(2) Click [Install] of the SE where you want to install the machine-specific
data.
1200_700544E.ai
1200_700514E.ai
IMAGE READING MODE

Panel type
1200_700513E.ai
High-Speed Mode Standard Mode
GOS panel
CORRECTH CORRECTS
(1201SE, 1202SE, 1271SE, 1272SE)
CsI panel
(1211SE, 1212SE, 1213SE, 1214SE, INDIVIDUALH INDIVIDUALS
1273SE, 1274SE, 1275SE)
018-241-07E
IN1-107
REFERENCE NOTE
Select the “CORRECTH” folder for the GOS panel or the “INDIVIDUALH” folder Steps (6) to (8) are for the GOS type of SEs only. Do not perform the steps for other
for the CsI panel nomally. types.
However, if in the acceptance check the noise was generated in the image For the CsI type of SE, go to step (9).
whereas physical phantoms such as mesh, etc. are used to expose, select the
respective “CORRECTS” folder, or the “INDIVIDUALS” folder. For the procedure GOS type FPD : DR-ID1201SE, 1202SE, 1271SE, 1272SE
for changing the folder selection, refer to “_IMAGE READING MODE” of CsI type SE : DR-ID 1211SE, 1212SE, 1213SE, 1273SE, 1274SE, 1275SE
“MU5.3.2_RU Image Flag”.
$ {MU:5.3.2_RU Image Flag}
(6) Click [OK].
(4) Click [OK].
1200_700517E.ai
(7) Click [Next].

1200_700515E.ai
The Machine-Specific Data has been installed. (8) In order to confirm the transfer status of the SE correct data, select
the target SE from the drop-down list box, and click [GET].
NOTE
In case of installing the machine-specific data failed, restart the SE and execute
from SE connection confirmation again.
(5) For the GOS panel, click [OK] in order to forcibly transfer SE correct
data from the MC to the SE.
For the CsI panel, click [Cancel], go to step (9).
1200_700516E.ai
1200_700518E.ai
SE correct data is forcibly transferred. Wait for the transfer status to be “Transferring complete” then proceed. If the status
is “Transferring”, wait for a while, then click “GET” again.
NOTE
Usually this process will take several minutes.
In case of correct data forced transfer failed, restart the SE and execute from SE
connection confirmation again.
018-241-07E
IN1-108
(9) Backup the SE correct data. (10) Click [Next].
I. Click [Backup], and backup the correct data.
1200_700519E.ai
(11) Remove the machine-specific data CD from the CL.

1200_700557E.ai
REFERENCE (12) If there are two or more SE’s, repeat the procedures (1) to (12).
To back up correct data of multiple SEs together, click [Backup Package].
(13) Complete the CSL and confirm that the background calibration is
performed.
II. Open “PanelCorrectSensitivity.txt” with WordPad.
If the number is other than 150,8000: Restoration of the serial number is REFERENCE
successful. Defect correction data is generated according to the background calibration
If the number is 150,8000: Compare with machine-specific CD and confirm during the CSL termination.
that time stamp and contents are the same. If they are the same, the machine-
specific has been successfully restored. If it is different, restoring the machine-
specific has failed, so install the machine-specific again. NOTE
In case of the background calibration failed, restart the SE and execute from SE
connection confirmation again.
018-241-07E
IN1-109
23. Changing the IP Address of the  INSTRUCTION 
If the IP address of the MP or the SE is lost by mistake during the operation
System (SE/MP/MC) procedures, restore the IP address.
$ {MT:5._GNC Board/SE IP Address Resetting Procedures}
NOTE
- Take the following procedures only when the network address of the system is to be
changed from the default value. (1) Change the Network Address Field and MC Subnet Mask of MC ETH 1
- In this procedure, after changing the network address, change the IP address from Network (Local).
the device far from the MC. Change the IP address in the following order according
to target machines.
- New Configured Machines: SE - AP - MP - MC
- Older Configured Machines: SE - MP - AP - MC
The devices which were changed can no longer be accessed until the MP’s IP
address is changed. If operational procedures were mistaken and the MP or SE can
no longer be accessed, then restore the IP address. If the AP cannot be accessed,
then restore the AP’s IP address.
In this case, set the network address to 192.168.0.x and start from the beginning.
■ Changing the Network Address Field and the MC Subnet Mask

 INSTRUCTION 
- The segment No. of the network address must be set to the same value
among the MC, MP, SE and AP. If different network address values are set,
the network among the machines might get disconnected. Initialization of the
1200_700520E.ai
machines might be needed in such a case.

How far in the IP address the network address indicates depends on the setting
of the subnet mask. As the default value of the subnet mask of the machine is
255.255.255.0, and locations assigned by 255 (mask value areas) indicate the
network address.
Segment No.
192.168.0.0
Network address
Host address
600_700206.ai
- If the segment No. of the network address is changed, the network address
of the access point (AP) must be changed to include the same segment No. If
the network address of the access point differs, wireless connection of the SE
cannot be made.
018-241-07E
IN1-110
■ Changing the SE Network Setting (3) Restart the DR Maintenance Software.
REFERENCE
 INSTRUCTION 
When restarting the DR Maintenance Software, open the Internet Explorer again.
Perform this setting for each connected SE.
In addition, the SE can be used in combination only as a system which possesses the
same network address. (4) Click [Next].
(1) Select the target SE from the drop-down list box then click [GET], INSTRUCTION
confirm the address and click [SET]. When using the access point in the new configured machines, change the access
point IP address here.
1200_700521E.ai
(2) Click [OK].
1200_700522E.ai
018-241-07E
IN1-111
■ Changing the MP Network Setting (3) Click [OK].
(1) Confirm the address with “Changing the MP IP Address (Preset)” and INSTRUCTION
click [SET]. When using the access point in the older configured machines, change the
access point IP address here.
REFERENCES
The MP is restarted by carrying out these procedures.
POCX010719001J.ai
(2) Confirm that “Setting for MP1” is selected via the “MP Network
Setting”, then click [SET].
POCX010719002J.ai
018-241-07E
IN1-112
■ Changing the MC Network Setting (4) Change the address in the “Home page” field, and click [OK].
(1) Confirm the address with “MC ETH1 Network Setting” and click [SET].
1200_700566E.ai
■ Restart the system

POCX010719004J.ai
(2) When “Unexpected error” is displayed, enter the changed address in

Internet Explorer’s address bar and press <Enter> key.
(3) Click at the upper right side of the Internet Explorer, and click
[Internet options].
1200_700565E.ai
018-241-07E
IN1-113
24. Checking the MC_ID_MODE (2) If “MC_ID_MODE” overlaps other MC, change “Updated Value” and
click [SET].
NOTE
Perform the following procedures only when connecting the FUJIFILM-made AP and
sharing the SE with multiple MCs.
Make sure that the “MC_ID_MODE” does not duplicate other MCs.
Make a note of the other MC “MC_ID_MODE” in advance, and check that it is not
duplicated.
REFERENCE
The “MC_ID_MODE” will be generated based upon the dates and times when
installed.
(1) Check “Current value”, and confirm that “MC_ID_MODE” is not

duplicated with other MCs.
1200_700529E.ai
1200_700528E.ai
018-241-07E
IN1-114
25. Setting the MAC Address Filtering (3) Check the SE MAC address.
#1 Click: Client Information
#2 Check: SE MAC addresses that connect with the access point are displayed
<Optional Setting Item> #3 Copy: Select the MAC address and press <Ctrl>+<C> to copy it
 INSTRUCTION 
- Perform this procedure only when activating the MAC address filtering.
- Configure the SE and AP settings, and set the wireless connections in advance.
#1
and press the [Enter] key. #2
area and click [Login]. #3
1200_700371E.ai
700_700051E.ai
018-241-07E
IN1-115
(4) Set the SE MAC address that allows the MAC address filtering. (5) Check that the following window is displayed and select “Restart”.
#1 Click: Wireless LAN
#2 Click: Security Configuration
#3 Select: ALLOW
#4 Paste: MAC address that is copied in step (3)
#5 Click: [Add]
#6 Check: Additional SE MAC address is displayed
#7 Click: [Submit]
 NOTE 
If there are two or more SEs, repeat #4 through #6 as many times as the number
of the SEs.
Be sure to input the MAC address in the form of “xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx”.
1200_700373E.ai
#2
(6) Click [Yes].
#1
#3
#6
#4
#5 1200_700374E.ai
#7
1200_700372E.ai
018-241-07E
IN1-116
26. Checking the Radio Wave Conditions (5) Check the measurement result, and click [OK].
Check that the average time is following status.
To confirm the AP’s optimum position in the wireless connection between SE and SE Average tine
FUJIFILM-made AP, measure the wireless communication speed.
DR-ID 1201SE
(1) Check that the battery pack is mounted on the SE.
DR-ID 1211SE
(2) Remove the SE from the DR Slot. DR-ID 1213SE
(3) Start the DR Maintenance Software. DR-ID 1214SE 5000 msec

DR-ID 1271SE
(4) Click [START] of “Speed Measurement”.
DR-ID 1273SE
 NOTE 
DR-ID 1275SE
Here check that the SE whose wireless signal status is to be checked is
connected via the wireless LAN. DR-ID 1202SE
DR-ID 1212SE
6000 msec
DR-ID 1272SE
DR-ID 1274SE
1200_700531E.ai
1200_700530E.ai
Measurement of radio wave conditions starts. (6) Click [Next].

The measurement ends in approx. 1 minute.
018-241-07E
IN1-117
(7) Check the radio wave strength on the DR-ID 300CL.
#1 Check: Radio wave strength
#1
1200_700246.ai
REFERENCE
When the DR-ID 300CL and the SE can not communicate wirelessly, check the
following items again.
- The settings of the FUJIFILM-made AP and the CONFIGURATION (ESSID,
SSID, CH, and encryption) are the same.
- Other APs are operating with the same channel, whose communication status
can be checked visually (such as inSSIDer).
- The MAC address of the FUJIFILM-made AP is appeared on the inSSIDer.
018-241-07E
IN1-118
27. Calibration REFERENCE
Refer to the table below for the kinds of calibration to be executed.
A total of required time is approx. 35 minutes per SE.
INSTRUCTION
Calibration type Exposure conditions Grid
- In case of the GOS type SE, calibration during installation is not required.
- Check that background calibration automatically executed upon startup of the Offset No exposure Can be kept mounted.
machine is completed before carrying out calibration.
Exposure conditions:
- Keep the DR-ID 300CL running. If the DR-ID 300CL is terminated, the MC software - Tube voltage of 75 kV
power will be automatically turned OFF, and calibration might result in failure. Gain - Dose of 10 mR
(75 kV, 2 mAs, SID = 100 cm)
REFERENCE Number of exposures: 16
Messages of “Calibrating” and “Urgent use is possible” alternately appear on the DR- Exposure conditions:
- Tube voltage of 75 kV
ID 300CL status indication area. Defect
- Dose of 5 mR Cannot be mounted.
#1 Check: Status indication correction
(75 kV, 1 mAs, SID = 100 cm)
Number of exposures: 5
Lag
- Dose of 40 mR or more (*)
correction
(100 kV, 5 mAs, SID = 100 cm)
*: Set the exposure time to 200 msec or less.
REFERENCE
- Calibration can take place either in a wired or wireless mode.
- If calibration takes place in a wireless mode, radio wave strength may be weakened
when the SE is placed on a concrete floor. In this case, distance the SE from the
#1 concrete floor surface and calibration takes place.
1200_700172E.ai
018-241-07E
IN1-119
27.1 Preparations 27.2 Offset Calibration
(1) Remove the grid. REFERENCE
Offset calibration is carried out for all SE’s which are connected.
(2) Clean the SE exposure plane with a dry cloth.
(3) Adjust the X-ray tube position to SID = 100 cm. (1) Click [START] of “Offset Calibration”.
(4) Adjust the irradiation field to cover the entire exposure plane.
1200_700532E.ai
Images for offset correction data generation (4 frames) are read from the SE
(FPD).
If the offset correction data which was generated is stored on a HDD, a pop up
window displaying “Succeeded” pops up.
1200_700489E.ai
 NOTE 
If you click [START] during automatic offset update (for 30 seconds every approx.
10 minutes), “Error 12700 currently unavailable” appears. Click [START] again
after an interval of approx. 30 seconds, in this case.
018-241-07E
IN1-120
REFERENCE
area. CAUTION
Keep to the exposure interval defined in the Operation Manual of the X-ray high
voltage generator when making continuous exposures. An interval of 1 minute
or longer normally needs to be taken.
 NOTE 
If the calibration failed, restart the SE and retry from connection check. REFERENCE
The focal size of the X-ray high voltage generator may be either large or small.
(2) Click [OK].
(1) Select a SE to be calibrated and set an operation with “Operation
(3) Click [Next]. Setting”, and then click [START] of “Gain Calibration”.
1200_700533E.ai
If exposing preparations are completed, the [Ready] button will be displayed in

green in the pop up window.
1200_700546E.ai
018-241-07E
IN1-121
If you click [Start] during automatic offset update (for 30 seconds every approx. If the calibration freezes in the above procedures, restart the SE and the MC,
10 minutes), “Error 12700 currently unavailable” appears. Click [Start] again after then re-execute from the SEs whose connections have been checked.
an interval of approx. 30 seconds, in this case.
REFERENCE (3) Click [OK].

 NOTE 
Before going to the next step (exposure), check that [Ready] is lit up with the 1200_700548E.ai
green button.
If you perform exposure before [Ready] is lit up with the green button, calibration (4) Click [Next].
(2) Expose 16 times with the following condition. Confirm that [Ready]
lights with the green button at each exposure.
$ For details of exposure method, refer to the DR-XD 1000 Operation Manual
REFERENCE
Dose of 10 mR (75 kV, 2 mAs, SID = 100 cm)

Images for gain correction data generation (16 frames) are read from the SE.
 INSTRUCTION 
200 msec.
When the gain correction data is automatically generated and stored in the HDD,
 NOTE 
018-241-07E
IN1-122
27.4 Defect Calibration REFERENCE
CAUTION An error code is displayed in some cases. Refer to the Troubleshooting manual
If exposing preparations are completed, the [Ready] button will be displayed in
or longer normally needs to be taken.
green in the pop up window.
REFERENCE

Setting”, and then click [START] of “Defect Calibration”.
1200_700549E.ai
 NOTE 
REFERENCE
Keep DR-ID 300CL running. If DR-ID 300CL is ended, 102 error occurs in the
card unit each time during exposure.
1200_700534E.ai
 NOTE 
018-241-07E
IN1-123
(2) Expose 5 times with the following condition.
 NOTE 

Images for gain correction data generation (5 frames) are read from the SE.
 INSTRUCTION 
- Correctly set the exposure conditions. If the defect corrections are implemented
via the gain calibration conditions, the number of defects and the defect sizes
may not be correctly detected, and calibration errors may occur.
- Set the exposure time to 200 msec or less. Exposure for longer than 200 msec
200 msec.
When the defect correction data is automatically generated and stored in the
HDD, “Succeeded” appears after completion.
 NOTE 
 NOTE 
If the calibration failed, restart the SE and retry from connection check.
(3) Click [OK].
1200_700550E.ai
(4) Click [Next].
018-241-07E
IN1-124
27.5 Lag Calibration After about 2 minutes, the [Ready] button will be displayed in green in the pop up
window.
REFERENCE

Setting”, and then click [START] of “Lag Calibration”.
1200_700551E.ai
 NOTE 
REFERENCE
Keep DR-ID 300CL running. If DR-ID 300CL is ended, 102 error occurs in the
card unit each time during exposure.
(2) Expose 1 time with the following condition.

Images for lag correction data generation (7 frames) are read from the SE.
1200_700535E.ai Images for lag correction data generation (7 frames) are read from the SE (FPD).
 NOTE  The number of image reads is displayed in the format of “n/7”.
REFERENCE
1200_700552E.ai

 INSTRUCTION 
200 msec.
018-241-07E
IN1-125
 NOTE  (5) Select “Shut Down” in the menu of the DR-ID 300CL.
- Record the exposure conditions when lag calibration is executed for the first (6) Check that the READY LED (green) of the SE flashes and becomes
time, and subsequently, always make exposures under the same conditions.
unlit, and the calibration has been completed when the system
This is to compare the lag amounts serially and analyze deterioration of the SE terminates. Then, wait for the DR-ID 300CL being powered OFF.
(FPD).
- If irradiation of 100 kV or over cannot be performed with the condition of the
(7) Turn OFF the power of the X-ray cart main key.
tube voltage of 80 kV and the maximum exposure time of 200 msec, move the
X-ray tube and the panel close to each other as much as possible (to the limit
which the whole panel is irradiated with X-ray). (8) Remove the battery and SE cable from the SE, and turn OFF the power
If irradiation of 100 kV or over still cannot be performed with this condition, of the SE.
increase the tube voltage to 100 kV.
If the irradiation does not become 20 mR or over with the aforementioned (9) Connect the battery and SE cable to the SE, and turn ON the power of
condition, you have to perform the lag calibration by using another X-ray the X-ray cart main key.
equipment.
When the log correction data is automatically generated and stored in the HDD,
 NOTE 
 NOTE 
(3) Click [OK].
1200_700553E.ai
(4) Click [Next].
018-241-07E
IN1-126
27.6 Checking the Calibration Results Check that the time stamp of LagData.txt is newer than the time stamp
of GAIN00.xxx in the opt/config/machine/correct/panel** folder.
The calibration results can be checked after the calibration.
When the time stamp of LagData.txt is older, the lag calibration has not been
(1) Click [Backup] in the “SE Correct Data Backup/Restore” in the performed.
“BACKUP/RESTORE”, and back up the SE correction data. REFERENCE
The description of the defect calibration is an example of the IMAGE READING
MODE in CONFIGURATION that is “High-speed Mode”.
If two lines appeared for “Standard Mode”, there is no problem.
 INSTRUCTION 
Perform the procedures from “27.2_Offset Calibration” to “27.6_Checking the
Calibration Results” at an installation site where two or more SEs are connected.
$ {IN1:27.2_Offset Calibration}
1200_700558E.ai
REFERENCE
To backup correct data of multiple SEs together, click [Backup Package].
(2) Open the files written below with the Word Pad.
- Gain calibration: PanelCorrectSensitivity.txt
If the number is other than 150,8000: Restoration of the serial number is
successful.
If the number is 150,8000: Compare with machine-specific CD and confirm
that time stamp and contents are the same. If they are the same, the machine-
specific has been successfully restored. If it is different, restoring the machine-
specific has failed, so install the machine-specific again.
- Defect calibration: DV.txt
If the data do not line more than or equal to 19 lines for the 14 x 17 inch SE or
23 lines for the 17 x 17 inch SE, the restoration of the machine-specific data or
the defect calibration failed.
018-241-07E
IN1-127
If necessary, install the following optional items.

Cards}
- Attaching the apron hanger
$ {IN:Appendix 6._Attaching the Optional Items_5. Attaching the Apron Hanger}
- Attaching accessory case

$ {IN:Appendix 6._Attaching the Optional Items_1. Attaching Accessory Case}
- Attaching wet tissue holder

$ {IN:Appendix 6._Attaching the Optional Items_2. Attaching Wet Tissue
Holder}
- Attaching the wifi adapter
$ {IN:Appendix 2._Recommended Wifi Adapter}
- Attaching the bluetooth barcode reader

$ {IN:Appendix 3._Connecting the Bluetooth Barcode Reader}
- Attaching the additional filter

$ {IN:Appendix 6._Attaching the Optional Items_3. Attaching the Additional
Filter}
018-241-07E
IN1-128
29. Checking the X-ray Source (2) Place a hexagonal wrench, steel scale, etc. according to the radiation
field.
#1
29.1 Checking the Variation between the Light
Field and Imaging Range
This procedure complies with the procedure for IEC 61223-3-1.
(1) Set the SID to 100 cm and adjust the light field such that it fits inside
the border of the SE.
REFERENCE
When using a 1417 panel, the light field should be adjusted as shown in the
picture below.
POCX010306003J.ai
REFERENCE
A phantom may be used instead of a hexagonal wrench or steel scale.
(3) Perform imaging in the desired condition and check that the variation
between the light field and imaging range is within ± 2 cm.
 INSTRUCTION 
POCX010306002J.ai
To change the size of the light field : Perform “ Adjust the light field size in
{MC:6.9_LED Board Assembly}”
To change the position of the light field : Perform “ Adjust the light field position
in {MC:6.9_LED Board Assembly}”.
When adjusting both the size and position of the light field, make sure to perform “
Adjust the light field size” first.
REFERENCE
So that the misalignment between the center of the light irradiation field reflection
area and the X-ray irradiation field conforms to IEC standards, it is shipping
adjusted to within 2 cm (within 2% of SID) via an SID at 1 m.
018-241-07E
IN1-129
29.2 Checking for Foreign Material in X-ray Tube 29.3 Operation Check for DAP (Optional)
 NOTE 
→ The X-ray cart and DR-ID 300CL are started.
Checking X-ray tube for foreign material in X-ray room.
(2) Perform the exposure with the following condition.
- SID: 100 cm
(1) Fully open the collimator and use the SE to perform the exposure with
- Irradiation field: Full open
50 kV, 0.8 mAs, SID = 50 cm.
- Voltage: 75 kV
 INSTRUCTION  - 25 mAs
If the irradiation field is not confined to the SE’s effective domain, expose by
shifting the SE several times to divide up the exposing so that the exposed (3) Check the area dose.
images in the irradiation’s entire domain can be confirmed.
- SID: 100 cm
- Voltage: 75 kV
- 12.5 mAs
(5) Confirm that the area dose rate is within the range of half the value ±15%.
(2) Rotate the SE 90 degrees and perform the exposure with same
conditions at step 1.
(3) Check that there is no foreign material in the images taken at step 1
and step 2.
018-241-07E
IN1-130
29.4 Checking the Reproducibility (Optional)  Tube Voltage
This procedure complies with the procedure for IEC 61223-3-1. (1) Set the dosimeter and expose 1 time each with 60 kV, 80 kV, and 100
kV respectively with 100 cm of SID.
 Dose
(2) Check that each tube voltage deviation is less than 10%.
(1) Set the dosimeter and expose 10 times with 75 kV, 2.5 mAs and 100  INSTRUCTION 
cm of SID.
If the deviation is outside the range, check the following measurement
(2) Check that the dose value deviations for 10 times are less than 10%. environments.
- Measuring instrument is calibrated?
 INSTRUCTION 
- No filter is included?
If the deviation is outside the range, check the following measurement - Direction of the tube voltmeter is correct?
environments.
- Irradiation field is hanging on the shadow?
- Irradiation field is at the margin of the measuring instrument?
- Direction of the tube voltmeter is correct?
018-241-07E
IN1-131
29.5 Calibration for Exposure Index (EI) (Optional)  The EI Calibrating Steps
This procedure is excerpted from ECN:2014-E-0036_1 for the DR-XD 1000. 29.5.1 Installation Preparation
 If EI Calibration Is Needed - Prepare needed tool

- Calibrate the FPD
EI calibration does not need to be implemented periodically.
- Set the Console (validate EI values, set display)
However if the following cases apply, after consulting with the institution side, then
implement.
- If beginning to initially use the EI/DI display (when determining the EIt, it needs to be 29.5.2 Determine the Radiation Quality
implemented).
- If the X-ray radiation quality which arrives in the receiver changes (e.g.: switching Continue adjusting the tube voltage, and measure the dosage D0 when the device’s
the X-ray device, changing the additional filters, and changing the exposure stands, additional filter has a 21 mm AI, and measure the dosage DHVL when the device has a 6.8
etc.). mm AI, then the 6.8 mm AI can find the half-value layer tube voltage Vref.
- If the S values have changed 20% or more in the S value periodic inspections. These conditions of radiation quality will be the radiation quality RQ45 which has been
Recommended for 15% or more. (*) defined by the IEC 61267 that is utilized in EI calibration.
* If the S values have changed 20% or more, first reconfirm that there are not any
concerns about unsatisfactory inspection steps, or device defects. 29.5.3 Determine the Irradiation Dose
In particular, great S value fluctuations are not expected in regard to the DR panel.
Find the 1mR mAs values via the tube voltage Vref which was determined in
Here the EI, EIt, and DI, respectively indicate the index value Exposure Index (EI) which is “29.5.2 Determine the Radiation Quality”.
proportional to the dosages, and indicates the index value Deviation Index (DI) which indicates
the degree of divergence with the ideal EI values (EIt).
29.5.4 Confirm the EI Value
With the mAs values which were determined via the tube voltage Vref determined in
“29.5.2 Determine the Radiation Quality”, and in “29.5.3 Determine the Irradiation
Dose”, confirm that the EI values which were irradiated in the FPD that is being used
are appropriate.
If they are not appropriate, then adjust the EI values based upon “29.5.5 Adjust the EI
Value”.
29.5.5 Adjust the EI Value
If the “29.5.4 Confirm the EI Value” results are not appropriate, then adjust the
correction coefficients which are contained in “ExposureIndex. prm” that are saved on
the Console PC, put the EI values in an appropriate range.
018-241-07E
IN1-132
29.5.1 Installation Preparation  Setting the Console (validating the EI, and setting the display)
When images are received from the Image Reader, the index value Exposure Index
 Prepare needed tool (EI), and index value Deviation Index which indicates the degree of deviation with the
- Dosimeter ideal EI value (EIt) are calculated and displayed. The EI and DI values are displayed
- Aluminum 21 mm thick and aluminum 6.8 mm thick as overlay items.
Here the procedures for displaying the EI and DI values are described.
 NOTE 
Use a dosimeter which has been calibrated. CAUTIONS
- If the EI and DI values are used for actual image quality control, periodically
calibrate the Image Reader. In doing so, use the Image Reader QC tool to
 Calibrate the FPD assuredly calibrate it.
- Even if the exposure menus, and exchange of images were done in relation
Before starting the EI calibration, calibrate the FPD. to the exposure menus, the EI and DI values are displayed in accordance
with the original exposure menu functions (even if the exposure energy
subtraction menus are changed to the RT menus, the EI and DI values will
not be displayed). After the exposure menus are changed, and the images are
exchanged, if the EI and DI values are checked, select the correct exposure
menu, then implement the studies.
- If the studies are terminated without the long-view menus being integrated,
and the EI and DI values will not be displayed since the functions will be
handled as long-view (WS).
 NOTE 
- The EI value accuracy is ±20%.
- The Exposure Index function does not support the Mammography exposure menus.
As a result, the EI and DI values will not be calculated leaving the relevant display
boxes to be blank.
- The EI value and the DI value will not be output in the film output.
- The EI and DI values will be displayed only when the determined functionality is “RT”.
- With respect to a study image that has already been subjected to the study, the EI
and the DI values will not be recalculated even if the ideal EI value (EIt) that is to be
used as a guidepost for the exposure menu is changed.
018-241-07E
IN1-133
REFERENCE  User Utility settings
The Exposure Index will be displayed as the following window as an overlay item. Add “EI/DI” into the “Setting the Overlay Display Items” display items.
 Saving and Outputting Exposure Index

The EI, DI and EIt values are stored under the following DICOM tags (Standard).
- EI value :(0018,1411) VR name : DS
- DI value :(0018,1413) VR name : DS
- EIt value :(0018,1412) VR name : DS
The EI value, DI value, and EIt value can be output in the following service classes
(including media storage).
- DICOM Standard CR Storage (image processed)
- DICOM Private CR Storage (standardized)
- DICOM Unstandarlized CR Storage (before standardized)
 Correction coefficient parameter file

Correction coefficient specific to each of the Image Readers (cassette type: IP VN/VI,
dual-side cassette type: ST-BD, built-in type) are stored in the “ExposureIndex.prm”
file that is located under the following folder.
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Config\ExposureIndex.prm
Do not change unless it is absolutely necessary to do so.
DXL040H0002.ai
 Service Utility settings

With the use of the Service Utility capability, it is possible to enable or disable the
Exposure Index function.
Table: IMAGE MODALITY setup item
No. Name Selection Meaning
312 Enable Exposure  Yes Specifying whether to enable or
Index Function Enables the Exposure disable the Exposure Index function.
Index function.
 No
Disables the Exposure
Index function.
018-241-07E
IN1-134
29.5.2 Determine the Radiation Quality
Utilize 21 mm thick aluminum as an additional filter, and confirm the dosage quality
(RQA5) so that the EI is calibrated as defined per IEC 61267.
So that the half value becomes 6.8 mmAl ( ± 0.3 mmAl), adjust the X-ray tube voltage
from the range of 66 kV – 74 kV.
REFERENCE
A combination of 21 mm thick aluminum, 0.5 mm thick copper and 2 mm thick
aluminum can be substituted.
(1) Arrange the additional filter (21 mm thick aluminum), and measure the
standard dosage (D0).
(2) Arrange the additional filter (21 mm thick aluminum) and the half-value
layer filter 6.8 mm (±0.3 mm) thick aluminum, and measure the half-
value layer dosage (DHVL).
(3) Record the tube voltage Vref which is the closest to half (50%) which
are the dosages measured in the above (1) and (2).
Vref[kV] = D0[mR] / DHVL[mR]
Example: Find the X-ray tube voltage that achieves almost 50%.
If the results are as per the following, the tube voltage Vref is 70 kV.
Step (1) Step (2) Step (3)

kV 21mmAL [mR] 21+6.8mmAL [mR] Percentage [mR]
68 1.01 0.46 45%
69 1.07 0.51 47%
70 1.16 0.58 50%
71 1.24 0.63 51%
72 1.29 0.67 52%
018-241-07E
IN1-135
29.5.3 Determine the Irradiation Dose (3) With the additional filter (21 mm thick aluminum) attached, select the
mAs value so that the dosage becomes approximately 1mR (=8.76μ
(1) Place the detector so that the distance from the X-ray source to the Gy).
surface of detector is 180 cm.
When a distance of 180 cm is not ensured or a dosemeter has low
sensitivity, the distance can be reduced (from 180 to 100 cm) or dose (4) With the additional filter (21 mm thick aluminum) attached, irradiate
can be increased (by 1 to 5 mR). X-ray must be irradiated to 15x15 cm the X-rays, and record the dose.
area at the center of the plate. (*) Repeat the X-ray irradiating and recording of the dose several times. It
Fig 1 and Fig 2 show the arrangement of exposure area and dosemeter. is recommended that they be repeated three times.
 NOTE  (5) Record the following information:

- If X-ray fails to be irradiated to 15x15 cm area at the center of the plate, EI will - X-ray exposure conditions: _____mA; _____ msec;
be calculated incorrectly. - Dose measurement results ( D1 _____ mR; D2 _____ mR; D3 _____ mR; )
- Be sure to use a dosemeter that has been calibrated. - Mean dose: Dave _____ mR
Fig 1: Radiation source, detector and the position of the dosimeter

POC010724001.ai
(2) Select the tube voltage Vref which is determined in “26.5.2 Determine
the Radiation Quality”.
018-241-07E
IN1-136
29.5.4 Confirm the EI Value (4) Comfirm the EI value displayed on the Console monitor.
Following example, “EI/DI:879/0.0” is displayed.
(1) Enter patient information and click [Next].
 NOTE 
(2) Select [QC/TEST] in the exposure menu region list and [sensitivity] in The setting procedure to display the EI value on the monitor is described in the
the exposure menu list. Then click [Start study]. Console service manual. See Console service manual, if necessary.
(3) Set the conditions which were determined in “26.5.2 Determine the
Radiation Quality”, and “26.5.3 Determine the Irradiation Dose”, and
with the additional filter (21 mm thick aluminum) attached, irradiate
the X-rays.
 NOTE 
At this time, remove the things which can be removed (ex; grids except the
additional filter (21 mm thick aluminum), photo timer, etc.). In addition, be careful
not to place things, which are not needed for X-ray irradiating and detecting,
between the X-ray source and the detector.
Fig 2: Console Display

POC010724003.ai
(5) Record the EI (EIdisp) value displayed on the monitor.

EIdisp: _____
018-241-07E
IN1-137
(6) Correct as follows the distance of the mean dose (Dave) recored in step (7) Divide The EI value displayed on the monitor (EIdisp) by the surface of
“26.5.3 Determine the Irradiation Dose”. detector dose (Dsurf) to get the EI value per 1 mR (EI1mR).
Multiply the mean dose (Dave) by the distance correction factor to get the dose of the EI1mR = Eidisp ÷ Dsurf
exposed surface (Dsurf).
Dsurf = Dave× [( SID – A )2 ÷ ( SID ) 2 ] (8) Make sure that the EI value per 1 mR is within 876±10% (from 788 to
A is the distance from the surface of detector to the surface of X-ray sensor window. 963).
SID is the distance from the X-ray source to the surface of detector. If the EI1mR is within 876 ± 10%, the task is complete.
The arrangement relationship of the X-ray source, additional filter, dosimeter and If the EI1mR is not within 876 ± 10%, continue implementing the following tasks.
detector are illustrated in Fig. 3.  NOTE 
According to IEC, EI value is acceptable up to 876±20%.
Adjust so that it becomes within ±10% in service adjusting.
Fig. 3: Layout plan of the X-ray source, additional filter, dosimeter and detector.
POC010724004.ai
018-241-07E
IN1-138
29.5.5 Adjust the EI Value Corection
Items coefficient Device type Reader type
(1) Divide 876 by the EI value per 1mR (EI1mR) acquired in step (7) in (Default value)
“26.5.4 Confirm the EI Value” to get the ratio (R).
R = 876 ÷ EI1mR 9\CsI02 0.460 CALNEO- HC SQ (Japan) FPD-U
10\CsI02 0.460 FPD-T
(2) Confirm the value of correction coefficient (Coef) corresponding to the
12\CsI02 0.460 FPD-C
Device type and Reader type described in “ExposureIndex.prm” file of
the following path. 9\CsI03 0.531 CALNEOSmart FPD-U
C47/C77/C12(Japan)
C:\\ProgramFiles\Fujifilm\Param\ExposureIndex.prm 10\CsI03 0.531 FDR D-EVO II C35/C43/C24 FPD-T
Tabel1 shows the correction coefficient (Coef) correstponding to the Device type, (Overseas)
Reader type and the items described in the “ExposureIndex.prm” file. 12\CsI03 0.531 FPD-C
Table1 Parameter described in the “ExposureIndex.prm” file  NOTE 

Corection Confirm the Device type which is going to be connected, and use the values in
Items coefficient Device type Reader type the chart that correspond to that type.
(Default value)
Buitin 0.681 CR buitin -

(3) Seek the value (Coefnew) which multiplied the ratio (R) that was sought
ST-Vn/VI 0.708 CR cassete ST-Vn/VI - in Step (1) in the device’s correction coefficient (Coef) that adjusts the
ST-BD 0.704 CR cassete ST-BD - EI values.
Coefnew = Coef x R
9\a-Se 0.580 BENEO(Japan) FPD-U
FDR AcSelerate(Overseas)
10\a-Se 0.580 FPD-T (4) Substitute the device’s correction coefficient (Coef) that is adjusted in
9\GOS 0.564 CALNEO-U/MT/MB(Japan) FPD-U “ExposureIndex.prm” with the sought value (Coefnew) and save it.
FDR D-EVO(Overseas)
10\GOS 0.564 FPD-T  NOTE 
12\GOS 0.564 CALNEO-C(Japan) FPD-C As reference, a calculation example of Steps (1) through (4) are shown in “■ E.g.:
FDR D-EVO(Overseas) Calculating the EI Correction Coefficient in Relation to the CALNEO-C (Japan)
Cassette”.
9\GOS01 0.581 CALNEO Smart G47/G77(Japan) FPD-U
FDR D-EVO II G35/G43 (Overseas)
10\GOS01 0.581 FPD-T
12\GOS01 0.581 FPD-C (5) In accordance with the steps in “26.5.4 Confirm the EI Value”, confirm
that the EI values per 1mR are within 876±10% (from 788 to 963).
9\CsI 0.460 CALNEO-C SQ(Japan) FPD-U
FDR D-EVO plus(Overseas) If the EI values per 1mR are within 876±10% (from 788 to 963), then the task is
10\CsI 0.460 FDR AcSelerate_CsI(Overseas) FPD-T complete.
12\CsI 0.460 FPD-C
9\CsI01 0.460 CALNEO-C mini SQ(Japan) FPD-U
FDR D-EVO plus C24(Overseas)
10\CsI01 0.460 FPD-T
12\CsI01 0.460 FPD-C
018-241-07E
IN1-139
 E.g.: Calculating the EI Correction Coefficients in Relation to the The initial value of correction coefficient (Coef) is 0.564 as framed in Fig4.
CALNEO-C (Japan) Cassette”.
Illustrates the calculating of the EI correction coefficients for EIdisp, Dave, SID, A as the
following values.
EIdisp = 1140
Dave = 1.100mR
SID = 180.0 cm
A = 2.0 cm,
Calculate Dsurf as folllows
Dsurf = Dave× [( SID – A )2 ÷ ( SID )2 ]
= 1.100× [( 180.0 – 2.0 )2 ÷ ( 180.0 )2 ]
= 1.0756……
Rounded off to the third decimal place
= 1.076.
Next, calculate the EI1mR as follows
EI1mR = EIdisp ÷ Dsurf
= 1140÷ 1.076 Fig 4: Contents in “ExposureIndex.prm” file
= 1059.479…… POC010724005.ai
Rounded off to the nearest whole As framed in Fig5, change the correction coefficient (Coef) by multiplying it with the
= 1059. ratio (R)
Now EI1mR becomes 1059 which is greater than the maximum 1051. 0.564 ×0.827
Therefore adjusting the EI value is needed. =0.466428
Caluculate R as follows Rounded off to the third decimal place
R = 876 ÷ EI1mR = 0.466
= 876÷ 1059
=0.8271……
= 0.827.
Comfirm the value of correction coefficient (Coef) corresponding to the Device type of
FDR D-EVO and Reader type of FPD-C described in the “ExposureIndex.prm” file.
Fig 5: Contents in “ExposureIndex.prm” file after changing

the value from 0.564 to 0.466
POC010724006.ai
Overwrite save the“ExposureIndex.prm” file .
018-241-07E
IN1-140
 Supplementary: Confirmation procedures for Device type and (5) Click [Selector Setting].
Reader type
(1) Start up the “IIP Service Utility”.
(2) Click [Device Setting] on the IIP Service Utility window.
POC010724009.ai
(6) The “ReaderType” and “DeviceName” are displayed.

The DeviceName is associated with the DeviceType as stated in the aforementioned.
POC010724007.ai
The “Device Setting” window opens.
(3) Device Type is displayed on the Device setting window.

Device Type is associated with Device Name.
POC010724010.ai
POC010724008.ai
(4) Click [OK].

018-241-07E
IN1-141
30. Checking for Image Problems (5) Check for sensitivity and density problems.
Check to make sure that the system sensitivity value and the film density value
appearing on the output film are approximately 200 and 1.2, respectively.
30.1 Checking for Irregularities,  NOTE 
Density Problems, White Blank Portion, and If the S value is more than 300 or less than 100, the Machine-Specific Data may
not be correctly installed. In such a case, reinstall the Machine-Specific Data and
Sensitivity Problems in the Images perform “27. Calibration”.
$ {IN:22.8_Installing the Machine-Specific Data}
 INSTRUCTION
Check for the irregularities and the density problems respectively with the grid REFERENCE
removed and with the grid mounted.
- The S-value or a density value might vary with the photo-timer mounted.
If the grid is not to be used, you only need to check with the grid removed.
- The S-value varies from 206 to 210 when the X-ray absorption factor is 3 to 5%.
(1) From the DR-ID 300CL, register the following exposure menu:
- “QC-Test” - “IMAGE-FORMAT” (size: 17 inches x 17 inches)
(2) Expose an IP.

Expose an IP to a dose of 1 mR (80 kV, 0.63 mAs).
 NOTE 
If the exposure is performed with the exposure menu other than the specified
ones or with the exposure condition other than the referred one, abnormal
images, such as horizontal streak, may be found despite no error in the SE since
the study conditions are tight.
When an abnormal image occurred, perform the exposure with the specified
exposure menu and exposure condition, and check the images.
(3) Output the film in the one-image format to the printer.
(4) Check the output film for irregularities, partial density problems, and
white blank portions.
If moiré is determined to occur on the image, identify the cause and deal with the
problem according to the procedures mentioned in the Troubleshooting manual. The
image problems might be possibly caused by the movable grid.
$ {MT:4.1_Analyzing Moiré} in DR-ID 1200 Service Manual
$ {MT:4.1_Analyzing Moiré} in DR-ID1270 Service Manual
018-241-07E
IN1-142
 Procedures for Checking the Format
(1) Check to make sure that the image in the SE exposure frame is
correctly read.
 NOTE 
The exposure frame lines on the SE exposure plane do not exactly indicate
edges of the image recording area. The effective image recording area is approx.
1 mm inward from the exposure frame lines.
Effective image Exposure frame line

recording area
1200_700173E2.ai
018-241-07E
IN1-143
30.3 Checking for (5) Check to make sure that no false image is included in the image of the
frame and the steel rule on the output film.
 Checking for False Image
- “QC-Test” - “IMAGE-FORMAT” (Size: 17 inches×17 inches)
(2) Attach 150 mm steel rules to the center of the vertical and horizontal
exposure center lines on the SE front cover. 600_700099.ai
(6) Detach the steel rules.
Exposure center
Steel rule
SE front cover
Exposure center 600_700098.ai
(3) Expose an IP.

(4) Output the film in the two-image format to the printer.
018-241-07E
IN1-144
 Checking the Read Center  Checking the Film Character Format Information
Have on hand the output film used for “ Checking for False Image”. Check that the Make sure that the film character format information is displayed on the output film.
steel rule images are centered with respect to the vertical and horizontal exposure Verify that none of the characters look blurred or broken.
center lines.
(1) Check the film character format information.
Check the following:
- The film character format information that has been set is correct.
- There is nothing abnormal such as blurred or broken characters.
Read center Read center
REFERENCE
The details of the film character format information and the character display
locations are as follows.
Hospital name (medical institution name)
600_700100.ai FUJI HOSPITAL 04001676 A0000 A020
IP barcode No.
EDR mode and menu code
System ID and image No.
Patient ID
Patient Film mark
Image processing conditions name
Sex
Age or date of birth
G 1.0G#0.7+0.50R5Q0.5 R->L G1.0G#0.7+0.50R5Q1.0
SKULL GENERAL
L 0000000001 Hanako Fuji [F] 23
Date of
exposure1992. 11. 27 [17:43] SCALE: 50% RT-04
Exposure menu Set processing information

Standardization conditions Reduction ratio
and correction item Exposure time
Film density Image reversal mark Date of exposure
System sensitivity 600_700101.ai
018-241-07E
IN1-145
Perform the start date settings for the SE battery pack.
 INSTRUCTION
Perform the following procedures for all the new batteries.
(1) Mount the battery pack on the SE.
(2) Select the target SE from the drop-down list box, and click [SET].
1200_700573E.ai
The start date for the SE battery pack is set.
(3) Click [OK].
1200_700489E.ai
018-241-07E
IN1-146
 DR Maintenance Software
(1) Start up the DR Maintenance Software.
(2) Click [Check the error log] and check the error log.
(3) Click [DELETE].
1200_700536E.ai
(4) Click [OK] to clear the error log.
1200_700537E.ai
018-241-07E
IN1-147
33. Clearing the operational (3) Click “Displaying and clearing operating information” at the left hand
side of the window.
Information
 INSTRUCTION
Terminate the DR-ID 300CL and perform the following procedures.

→ The login window opens.
(2) Select “Installation” and log in.

#1 Select “Installation”.
#2 Enter the password. POC010717003E.ai
→ The “Operating information” window opens.

#3 Click .
(4) Reset the operational information.

#1 #1 Enter “0” to each “New setting values” field.
#2 #2 Click .
#3 Click .
#3 #1
#2
POC010717001E.ai
REFERENCE
→ The“Installation” window opens.

#3
POC010717002E.ai
018-241-07E
IN1-148
34. Backing Up the Data (3) Make a backup of the device configuration.
#1 Scroll down: Window
#2 Click: [Backup] (Column of the device configuration backup and restoration )
 Backing up the device information #3 Click: [Save]
(1) Click [Next] on the DR maintenance software.

Backup window of various data is displayed.
(2) Back up SE Correct Data.

#1 Click: [Select Package] #1
#2 Click: [Backup Package]
#3 Click: [Save] #2
#3
1200_700605.ai
Device setting information is saved.

#1
REFERENCE
#2
The device setting information are saved in the backup folder of the Window with
a file name “YYYYMMDDhhmmss-MC-CONFIG.ZIP”. “YYYYMMDDhhmmss” is a
time stamp at saving.
#3 $ {MU:5.10.4_Config Setting Backup/Restore}
1200_700604.ai
SE correction data is saved.

REFERENCE
The correction data are saved in the backup folder of the Window with a file name
“YYYYMMDDhhmmss-PANELS.ZIP”. “YYYYMMDDhhmmss” is a time stamp at
saving.
018-241-07E
IN1-149
(4) Back up the error log. REFERENCE
#1 Click: [Se The error log are saved in the backup folder of the Window with a file name
“YYYYMMDDhhmmss-MC-ALLLOG.ZIP”. “YYYYMMDDhhmmss” is a time stamp
at saving.
(5) Exit the DR Maintenance Software.
 Back up the device information

$ {MC:Appendix 14._Backing Up/Restoring the Device Settings_1.2 Backing Up
CSL Information}
$ {MC:Appendix 14._Backing Up/Restoring the Device Settings_1.3 Backing Up
the PC Information}
 Back up the hard disk image

Back up the hard disk image after installation.
● For Windows 7
$ {MC:Appendix 5._Backing Up and Restoring System Images in Windows 7}
● For Windows 10
$ {MC:Appendix 13._Backup/Restoration with Acronis True Image 2018}
1200_700540.ai  INSTRUCTION 
#2 Click: [All Log] For devices with Windows 10 installed, be sure to make an image backup now.
#3 Click: [OK] Unlike devices with Windows 7 installed, no image disk is included in the Windows 10
devices.
1200_700559E.ai
The log file is saved.
018-241-07E
IN1-150
35. Final Checks 35.3 Final Checks for X-ray Cart
(1) Confirm that the X-ray cart is not damaged.
35.1 Operation Check for DR Lock Knob
(2) Confirm that the bumpers, caster bolts and covers of the X-ray cart
(1) Check that the DR lock knob is locked in each size position of the SE. are neither loose nor wobbly.
(2) Insert the key into the DR lock key and confirm that the DR lock knob (3) Confirm that no errors occur at power-on.
is unlocked.

(1) Check if the DR slot can be opened and closed without any problem.
(2) Insert the SE with a battery attached into the DR slot and confirm that
the SE’s battery is charged.
018-241-07E
IN1-151
35.4 Applying the Product Label for the NOTE
DR-ID1270 Panel Since the product labels have different designs for each panel, apply the product
labels in accordance with the panel.
 Checking the external appearance  The product label designs

1271SE
(1) Check that the SE is not damaged.
 Applying the product label

The product label is not applied to the SE. A transparent protective film is applied to it.
The product label needs to be applied at the time of purchase. 1272SE
1273SE
1274SE
The serial No. The manufacturing Transparent
display position date display position film
1275SE
1270_700009E.ai
1270_700005.ai
018-241-07E
IN1-152
(1) Peel off the protective film. (3) Confirm that the serial No. and manufacturing date are visible.
The serial No. The manufacturing

(1) display date display
1270_700006.ai
1270_700008E.ai
(2) Apply the product label in an orientation whereas the serial No. and
manufacturing date are visible.
The serial No. and manufacturing

date display window
(2)

display position date display position
1270_700007E.ai
018-241-07E
IN1-153
36. Visual Inspection and Cleaning of
the Device
Visually check the each unit for damage.
If contaminated, wipe off with a dry cloth.
 NOTE 
Cover those unused USB ports with the lids which is included with the device.
018-241-07E
IN1-154
BLANK PAGE
018-241-07E
IN1-155
BLANK PAGE
018-241-07E
Control Sheet
1, 2, 6, 7, 10, 13 to 21, 23, 24, 26, 27,
31, 37, 39, 51 to 78, 83, 85 to 90, 93,
11.30.2016 02 Revision (FM9462)
95, AppxIN 1-1, 1-3 to 1-7, AppxIN
2-1, AppxIN 4-2, AppxIN 5-1 to 5-8

22, 25, 28 to 30, 32 to 36, 38, 40 to
50, 79 to 82, 84, 91, 92, 94, 96 to 103
1, 2, 6 to 23, 26, 27, 31 to 37, 40,
05.31.2017 03 Revision (FM9471) 47 to 49, 63, 64, 68 to 80, 82 to 89,
95, 103, 117, 118
3, 24, 25, 28 to 30, 38, 39, 41 to 46,
50 to 62, 65 to 67, 81, 90 to 94,
96 to 102,
104 to 116, 119 to 127
1 to 4, 7 to 13, 15, 17 to 36, 40 to 48,
11.30.2017 04 Revision for MC V16.2 (FM9486) 50 to 57, 59 to 61, 67 to 69, 71, 82,
83, 106, 109, 118 to 129, 134 to 139
14, 16, 37 to 39, 49, 58, 62 to 66, 70,
Installation (IN2) (RU PC-TOOL) 11.30.2017 04 Changes in pagination (FM9486) 72 to 81, 84 to 105, 107, 108,
110 to 117, 130 to 133
1 to 4, 11 to 14, 16, 17, 19 to 40,
42 to 45, 47 to 58, 60, 61, 63 to 66,
10.31.2018 05 Revision for MC V16.6 (FM9528) 69 to 71, 73, 74, 77 to 95, 97 to 99,
101 to 104, 106 to 109, 111, 113 to 127,
129 to 131, 133, 136 to 138, 140 to 145
15, 18, 41, 46, 59, 62, 67, 68, 72, 75,
10.31.2018 05 Changes in pagination (FM9528) 76, 96, 100, 105, 110, 112, 128, 132,
134, 135, 139, 146
15, 88, 89, 92 to 94, 96, 97, 104, 105,
05.31.2019 06 Revision for U.S. and Brazil (FM9565)
107, 113, 137, 146, 147
95, 98 to 103, 106, 108 to 112,
114 to 136, 138 to 145, 148 to 151
018-241-08E
IN2-1
1. Installation Work Flowchart A
10. Attaching the Cover
START
2. Installation Preparations 11. Checking the Power Cable
2.1 Tools and Measuring Instruments Required for 12. Attaching the Monitor Securing Buffering Members (Optional)
Installation
14. Installing the Monitor

4. Transfer and Unpacking
14.2 Installing the Hydro-AG Sheet
15. Installing the FUJIFILM-made Access Point
4.3 Unpacking the DR-XD 1000PX
4.4 Unpacking the Battery 15.1 Attaching the Velcro Tape (Dual Lock)
4.5 Unpacking the FUJIFILM-made Access Point 15.2 Installing the FUJIFILM-made Access Point
4.6 Unpacking the SE 16. Safety Check / Operation Setup of Each Section
5. Checking the Items Supplied
5.1 Items Supplied with DR-XD 1000PX 16.2 Checking the Caster Lock
5.2 Items Supplied with Flat Panel Sensor 16.3 Checking the Moving Motion
5.3 Optional Items 16.4 Checking the Arm Lock
6. Removing the Cover 16.5 Checking the Arm Motion
16.6 Checking the Arm Centering Function

7. Installing and Confirming for the Battery
16.7 Checking the Collimator Operation
8. Installing the DAP Kit (Optional) 16.8 Checking the Light Irradiation Field
16.9 Setting the Lighting Time of the Light Irradiation Field

16.10 Setting the DAP (Optional)
A
B
018-241-05E
IN2-2
B C
16.11 Aging 22. SE Registration
16.12 Checking the X-ray Dose
22.1 Registering SE on DR-ID 300CL
17. Difference between Default Setup of DR-ID 1200 and
DR-XD 1000 system (Reference) 22.2 Changing the GOS Exposure Conditions for DR-ID 300CL
22.3 Registering SE Serial ID on RU PC-TOOL

18. Setting the FUJIFILM-made AP and Network
22.4 Changing SE Country Code
18.1 Setting Country Code for the FUJIFILM-made AP 22.5 Setting IP Address for SE
(Overseas Only)
22.6 Upgrading SE Application
18.2 Setting the FUJIFILM-made AP
22.7 Setting the Color for SE
19. Upgrading MC Application
22.8 Installing the Machine-Specific Data
20. Unlocking the RU PC-TOOL’s Security Lock 22.9 Forced Transfer of SE Correction Data
23. Changing the IP Address of System (SE/MP/MC)

20.1 Unlocking the RU PC-TOOL’s Security Lock
20.2 Updating MP Application Software Version 24. Checking the MC_ID_MODE
21. Configuration Setup

25. Setting the MAC Address Filtering
C
26. Checking the Radio Wave Conditions
27. Calibration
27.1 Preparations
27.2 Offset Calibration
27.4 Defect Calibration
27.5 Lag Calibration
018-241-05E
IN2-3
D E
28. Attaching the Optional Items 2 35. Final Checks
29. Checking the X-ray Source 35.1 Operation Check for DR Lock Knob

Imaging Range 35.3 Final Checks for X-ray Cart
29.2 Checking for Foreign Material in X-ray Tube 36. Visual Inspection and Cleaning of the Device
29.3 Operation Check for DAP (Optional)
END
29.4 Checking the Reproducibility (Optional)
29.5 Calibration for Exposure Index (EI) (Optional)
30. Checking for Image Problems

White Blank Portion, and Sensitivity Problems in the Images
30.3 Checking for False Images, Problems in Read Center and

33. Clearing the Operational Information
018-241-05E
IN2-4
2. Installation Preparations
2.1 Tools and Measuring Instruments Required

for Installation
When installing the machine, the tools required are as per the following.
Tool name Size Work covered
Spanner 8mm (x2) $ {IN2:7._Installing and Confirming for the
Battery}
Spanner 13mm $ {IN2:4.3_Unpacking the DR-XD 1000PX}
Spanner 17mm (x2) $ {IN2:4.3_Unpacking the DR-XD 1000PX}
Nippers or Cutter - $ {IN2:4.3_Unpacking the DR-XD 1000PX}
Vinyl tape - $ {IN2:7._Installing and Confirming for the
Battery}
Digital multimeter - $ {IN2:7._Installing and Confirming for the
Battery}
Phillips screwdriver - All
Allen wrench 4mm $ {IN2:7._Installing and Confirming for the
Battery}
Allen wrench 5mm $ {IN2:14._Installing the Monitor}
Cutter - $ {IN2:14._Installing the Monitor}
Torque driver M5, M6 $ {IN2:7._Installing and Confirming for the
Battery}
Allen wrench 1.5mm $ {IN2:13._Attaching the Cart Bumper}
NOTE
Refer to the following in regard to torque driver specifications.
$ {MC:10.2_Special Tools and Measuring Instruments}
018-241-05E
IN2-5
WARNING/CAUTION
Observe the warning and precautions mentioned in “Safety Precaution”.
CAUTION
When connecting or disconnecting the cable connector, wear an antistatic wrist
band to ground the human body. Otherwise, static electricity charged in the
human body might damage electronic components.
INSTRUCTION
- It is recommended that you should not install machine cables (such as the power
cables and communication cables) near such instruments that generate magnetic
field noise (such as a motor, transducer and switching power source) and other
cables to assure appropriate image quality.
- Connect to the USB port of X-ray cart when using mouse jig, keyboard jig and Disc
drive jig. If connecting to the USB port of operation panel, power supply may be
insufficient and incorrect operation may occur on the operation panel.
018-241-01E
IN2-6
4. Transfer and Unpacking 4.3 Unpacking the DR-XD 1000PX
CAUTION
4.1 Unloading and Preparation for Transfer Perform the following unpacking procedures securely.
CAUTION The machine may get damaged if not performed.
Before unloading the machine, secure a proper machine transfer route. (1) Cut the PP bands.
#1 Cut the PP bands (horizontal).
 INSTRUCTION  #2 Take out the slope.
Fully leave the machine with the plastic cover put on in the room. If the cover is put #3 Cut the PP bands (vertical).
condensation.
#3
CAUTION #2
If the machine is to be transferred over uneven floor, slowly move the machine #1
approx. 10 mm.
POC010704001.ai
NOTE
Save the PP bands which were disconnected in these procedures since they will
be used when the slope is secured by the subsequent procedures.
018-241-03E
IN2-7
(2) Remove the cardboard box. (3) Remove the base presser.
#1 Remove the upper cardboard. #1 Remove the bolts.
#2 Remove the joints. #2 Remove the base presser.
#3 Remove the side cardboard.
#2
#1
#3
#1
POC010704002.ai
17 mm (x4)
CAUTION
Remove the base presser securely. #2
If unpacking without removing it, the brake kit may be deformed. POC010704012.ai
REFERENCE
The base presser is secured with the bolts which are on the top and bottom.
(4) Remove the plastic cover.
(4)
POC010704003.ai
POC010704004.ai
018-241-04E
IN2-8
(5) Secure the slope with the PP bands. (7) Raise the X-ray cart and carry it down from the pallet.
NOTE
Use the PP bands that secure the slope for the things which were disconnected in
the procedure (1).
(7)
(5)
POC010704007.ai
CAUTION
POC010704005.ai
(6) Remove the U-shape bolt.

When unpacking the unit, the X-ray cart is unlocked. Be careful when raising the
cart.
(8) Take out the X-ray source device from the buffers.
#1 Spread the arm lock to unlock it.
#2 Spread the arm.
#1 #2
(6)
#3
(6)
POC010704006.ai
018-241-04E
IN2-9
(9) Remove the buffers protecting the cables. (11) Remove the buffers protecting the cables.
#1 Remove the buffers. #1 Remove the buffers.
#1
#1
#2
POC010704009.ai
POCX010704001J.ai

#2 Remove the operation panel.
#1
#2
POC010704008.ai
NOTE
Depending upon the machines, the operation panel is packed in cardboard.
018-241-04E
IN2-10
4.4 Unpacking the Battery
(1) Take out the battery from shipment box.
(1)
POC010704011.ai
4.5 Unpacking the FUJIFILM-made Access Point

(1) Take out the Access Point from shipment box.
(1)
POC010704013.ai
4.6 Unpacking the SE

(1) Take out the SE from shipment box.
018-241-04E
IN2-11
5. Checking the Items Supplied Item Image Qty. Remarks Refer
Check the items based on the packing manual (PACKING LIST) supplied.
5.1 Items Supplied with DR-XD 1000PX USB port cover $ {IN2:14._
4 Installing the
(317S1102*)
Monitor}
Main Unit Components

Item Image Qty. Remarks Refer POC010705004.ai
$ {IN2:14.1_
- For Japan Installing the
Power cord
1 only Operation
(111K86241*)
- 100 V Panel
Hydro-AG sheet for $ {IN2:14.2_
Assembly} Installing the
operation panel 1
(345N130066*) Hydro-AG
Sheet}
$ {IN2:7._
FG cable Installing and
POC010705005.ai
1 3m
(136Y200030*) Confirming for
the Battery}
For installing $ {IN2:14.1_
the FG cable Installing the
Hexagon TP screw
POC010705001.ai
1 inside the Operation
(308S0665*)
operation Panel
panel Assembly}
Key $ {IN2:16.1_
2 Checking the POC010705029.ai
(316N200010*)
Key Switch}
POC010705002.ai
For the $ {IN2:14.1_
Cross-recessed Installing the
monitor
pan head screw 2 Operation
cable
(301S2782606*) Panel
$ {IN2:7._ clamps
Assembly}
Screw cap (black) Installing and POC010705030.ai
3
(317N200007*) Confirming for
the Battery}
POC010705017.ai $ {IN2:14.1_
Clamp for monitor Installing the
cable 2 Operation
(316S1408*) Panel
$ {IN2:7._ Assembly}
Screw cap (silver) Installing and
5
(317Y200010*) Confirming for POC010705003.ai
the Battery}
POC010705018.ai
$ {IN2:14.1_
Binding band for Installing the
monitor cable 1 Operation
(316S1164*) Panel
POC010705019.ai Assembly}
018-241-05E
IN2-12
Item Image Qty. Remarks Refer SE Maintenance Jig

Battery securing $ {IN2:7._
Installing and Positioning jig for
bracket 1 319N120132* 2
Confirming for SE assembly
(301S2782606*)
the Battery}
POC010705020.ai
Jig for resetting the

120N120011* 1
IP address
Hexagonal head TP For securing $ {IN2:7._
screw 2 the battery Installing and
(308S0424*) bracket Confirming for POC010705027.ai
the Battery}
POC010705021.ai
Added after
Special screw M2x3 308N120002* 52
#xxx271
Cart bumper POC010705031.ai
(#xxx50318 or $ {IN2:13._
earlier: 304S0043*, 2 Attaching the Added after
Screw cap seal 317N120032* 4
#xxx50319 or later: Cart Bumper} #xxx271
386N200023*)
Added after
Plug seal 317Y120002* 4
POC010705022.ai
#xxx271
Hexagon socket For securing $ {IN2:13._

head cap screw 6 the cart Attaching the
(304N200022*) bumper Cart Bumper}
POC010705023.ai
$ {IN2:12._
Attaching
Hand switch holder the Monitor
1 Securing
(362N200018*)
Buffering
Members
(Optional)}
POC010705024.ai
$ {IN2:12._
Attaching
Fixation buffering the Monitor
member for monitor 2 Securing
(386N200036*) Buffering
Members
POC010705025.ai
(Optional)}
SE cassette $ {IN2:13._
variation labels 1 Attaching the
(405N201403*) POC010705026.ai Cart Bumper}
018-241-07E
IN2-13
Manual
 Software

Item Parts number Image Qty. Remarks Item Parts number Image Qty. Remarks
Report of
completion of 897N101226* 1 For Japan only
installation
DR-ID 300CL
DR-XD 1000 Application 114Y2150001L* 1
897N200035 1 For Japan only
attached document Software
DR-XD 1000
Operation manual POC010705015.ai
DR-XD 1000
performance
confirmation check
list DR-ID 300CL
Standard Kit 114Y2150008B* 1
Console Advance (DR-XD 1000)
(DR-ID 300CL) 897Y200111* 1 For Japan only
Operation manual
POC010705011.ai
FDR nano Only for FDR

897N200038* 1
Operation Manual nano
DR-XD 1000
Antibacterial Only for FDR DR-ID 300CL
897N200653* 1 114Y2150052B* 1
Coating Operation nano Reference Guide
Manual
X-RAY OUTPUT Only for FDR

897N201055* 1 POC010705013.ai
CHECK SHEET nano
Only for FDR

nano
Packing material DR-ID 1200
Packing
for the X-ray output 490S0009* 1 Application 114Y2335100A* 1
material for
check sheet Software
X-RAY OUTPUT
CHECK SHEET
POC010705014.ai
FDR AQRO Only for FDR
897N200723* 1
Operation Manual AQRO
DR-XD 1000
Antibacterial Only for FDR USB RNDIS
897N200826* 1 For Japan
Coating Operation AQRO driver disc for the 114Y2255903A* 1
Manual_US only
FUJIFILM-made AP
POC010705010.ai
018-241-05E
IN2-14
Win 7 Recovery
114Y2335703A* 1
Boot Disk
POC010705012.ai
Recovery
114Y2150307B* 1
Image Disk 1
POC010705028.ai
Recovery
114Y2150308B* 1
Image Disk 2
POC010705016.ai
Standard Optional Items


Item Qty. Remarks
- Battery assembly
(125Y200022+139N200007(x2)
Battery pack (X-ray cart) 1 + 382N120301(x3) + 405N200728)
- Hexagonheaded bolt (Q5x10) (x4)
For battery fixing (304S3180510)
- Radio law aggregation label
- Driver CD for FUJIFILM-made AP
- Velcro tape (Dual lock) (For operation
Access point (For overseas) 1
panel: 2 pcs., for FUJIFILM-made
AP: 2 pcs.)
- FUJIFILM-made AP
018-241-05E
IN2-15
5.2 Items Supplied with Flat Panel Sensor 5.2.2 1213SE/1214SE
Item Qty. Remarks
5.2.1 1201SE/1202SE/1211SE/1212SE SE (Flat panel sensor) 1 -
Item Qty. Remarks Memory element (Machine-specific data) 1
SE (Flat panel sensor) 1 - Special screw M2x3 34
Memory element (Machine-specific data) 1 Small size plug seal 3
1201SE/1211SE: 46 pcs. Small size screw cap assembly 2
Special screw M2x3 -
1202SE/1212SE: 52 pcs.
Small size screw dynok tape 2
Screw cap seal 4
Stopper seal 2
Plug seal 4
Small size stopper seal 3
Stopper seal 4
Small size connector cover assembly 1
Connector part cover assembly 1
Screw seal 4 For short side: 2 pcs., For long side: 2 pcs.
Seal including antibacterial paint
1201SE/1211SE: 14inch; 2 pcs., Screw seal (Thick) 4 For short side: 2 pcs., For long side: 2 pcs.
Screw seal 4
17inch; 2 pcs.
1202SE/1212SE: 17inch; 4 pcs. Green label 4 Spare part: 2 pcs.
Seal including antibacterial paint Gray label 4 Spare part: 2 pcs.
1201SE/1211SE: 14inch; 2 pcs.,
Screw seal (Thick) 4 Small size insertion position 1
17inch; 2 pcs.
1202SE/1212SE: 17inch; 4 pcs.
Green label 4 Spare part: 2 pcs.
Antibacterial coating 1
Gray label 4 Spare part: 2 pcs.
Letter of guarantee 1 For Japan only
Installation confirmation report 1
Report of completion of installation 1 For Japan only
DR-ID 1200 performance confirmation
1 For Japan only
Antibacterial coating 1 check list
DR-ID 1200 flat panel sensor product DR-ID 1200 flat panel sensor product
1 1 For Japan only
operation manual operation manual
Letter of guarantee 1 For Japan only Software (Country Code) 1 For Japan only
DR-ID 1200 performance confirmation DR-ID 1200 operation manual 1 For overseas only
1 For Japan only
check list
Supplementary Material 1 For overseas only
Software (Country Code) 1 For Japan only
DR-ID 1200 operation manual 1 For overseas only
Radio law aggregation label 1 For overseas only $ For DR-ID1270SE series, refer to DR-ID1270 Service Manual.
018-241-06E
IN2-16
5.3 Optional Items Item Qty. Remarks
- Cross-recessed head screw (x2)
5.3.1 Optional Item List Magnetic card reader fixation kit 1
- Fixture
- Stand
Item Qty. Remarks - Tape (x42)
- Hexagon socket head cap screw

(M4x10: 4 pcs) NOTE
Additonal filter 1 - Attached document Since protective film has been added for the additional filters for S/N 20071 or later, do
Essential item for exposure when the
object is a child.
not peel it off.
Travel handle high type option 1

- Accessory case
Accessory kit 1
- Buffering member 5.3.2 Flat Panel Sensor Related
- Blue tooth barcode reader Item Qty. Remarks
(OPN-3002i)
Bluetooth barcode reader kit 1 SE battery pack 1
- USB adapter
(Wireless USB Adapter OPA-3201) SE adapter 1 For 1201SE, 1202SE, 1211SE, 1212SE
- Wipe holder SE adapter (Small) 1 For 1213SE, 1214SE
Wet tissue holder 1 - Magic tape
- Buffering member
- Screw (x4)
X-ray protection apron hanger 1 - Screw hidden cap
- Pipe
- Cable between GNC board and DAP
- DAP relay cable
- Electrical filter
- DAP fixing screw
- Hexagonheaded TP screw (x2)
Area dosimeter fixation kit 1 - Bundled parts (x8)
- Cord clamp (x7)
- Slide tape
- Open/Close handle label (x2)
- DAP cable fixing rail
- DAP handle
X-ray cart carry cart 1
Barcode reader kit (Japan) 1
Barcode reader kit (overseas) 1
Magnetic card reader (JIS, Japan) 1
Magnetic card reader (ISO, Japan) 1
Magnetic card reader (ISO, overseas) 1
018-241-05E
IN2-17
6. Removing the Cover (1) Unpack the battery.
#1 Cut off the binding band.
CAUTION
- Be careful not drop the battery, doing so might cause injuries.
- Do not remove the battery terminals protective covers until the battery is
installed. Keep the protective covers after removing them from the battery
terminals.
#1
POCX010706002J.ai
POC010706001.ai (2) Turn OFF the main breaker and temporarily secure it with tape.
- The battery may be broken if not being replaced correctly. Do not use batteries #1 Turn OFF the main breaker.
other than the type (or equivalent level) specified by the maker. #2 Use tapes to temporarily fasten the main breaker.
- Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions from the battery maker.
#2
#1 POC010706002.ai
NOTE
The battery is shipped with the main breaker switched ON. Be sure to switch it OFF
when starting any work.
018-241-05E
IN2-18
NOTE (5) Remove the rear cover.
In order to prevent the screw covers and screws from falling, cover over the DR slot #1 Remove the screws.
openings with tape, etc. #2 Remove the rear cover.
(3) Remove the front cover.

NOTE
NOTE
When removing the rear cover, since there are tabs on the topside of the cover, lift
- The front cover is secured by velcro tape (dual lock). Be careful when removing it. the cover up a little (1), then press on both the right and left sides (2), and remove it
- When detaching the front cover, lift up the topside a little, then remove the front on the rear side.
side.
(4) Spread the arm. (2) (2)

(1)
#1 Spread the arm.
POCX010707009J.ai
018-241-05E
IN2-19
(6) Remove the front cover of arm. - Velcro tapes (Dual locks)
#2
POCX010707006-01J.ai
- Tabs on the cover

Since the shapes of the tabs are such that they are pressed in downwards,
#3 when removing the cover, they need to be directed upwards.
#1
TP3x6 [1]
POC010302012.ai
NOTE
To detach the cap and cover, peel the portions around the velcro tapes (dual locks) POCX010707007J.ai
until the velcro tapes (dual locks) click. Face the cover upwards then detach it - Since the screws do not fall into the arm’s inside section, cover over the base of
according to the tabs. the arm with tape, etc.
POCX010707005J.ai
POCX010707020J.ai
018-241-05E
IN2-20
(7) Perform the following procedures before removing the right and the (8) Remove the right cover.
left cover. #1 Loosen the screws on the inner side of the cover.
#1 Rotate the arm to a position that will not block the upper cover. #2 Push the upper cover to move up a little.
REFERENCE #3 Remove the screws.
The top cover does not need to be completely removed. #5 Remove the right cover.
#3
TP3x6 (x3)
#1
#2
TP3x12 (x2)
POC010302051.ai
INSTRUCTION
When removing the right cover, pass the USB cover and the cables through the
gap to remove the right cover.
Cover gap
POC010302052E.ai
018-241-05E
IN2-21
(9) Remove the left cover.
#2 Push the upper cover to move up a little.
#5 Remove the left cover.
NOTE
The screws removed at #3 are also on the inner side of the switch cover. Be sure
to remove them.
018-241-05E
IN2-22
7. Installing and Confirming for the (2) Retracting the cables and connectors.
#1 Retract the connector cables which are connected to the battery to the
Battery clamp.
#2 Retract the AC inlet side cables to the clamp.
(1) Remove the 3 brackets.
#7 Remove the inlet assembly. #1
#2
POCX010303005J.ai
018-241-05E
IN2-23
(3) Mount the battery in the device. (4) Press in the included battery bracket, and secure the battery.
NOTE #1 Fix the bolts (Battery bundled items).
#2 Embed the battery bracket (Main bundled items).
- When installing the battery it might get caught midway. Push it in so that the far #3 Loosen the nut (upper side).
side of the battery rises up. #4 Attach the nut (lower side) to the position of the bracket and fix it.
- Push the battery all the way in, then pull on it slightly. The bolts will be easier to #5 Fix the nut (upper side).
secure in the next step. #6 Attach the screws (Main bundled items).
- Be careful not to let the cables or connectors stick between the cart and
battery.
#1 Mount the battery into the device.
#3#5 #2
Na5 (8 mm)
#4
Na5 (8 mm)
#6
#1 TP4x8 (x2)
#1
Q5x10 (x2) (4 mm) POC010707007.ai
REFERENCE
POCX010707021J.ai
- #5 Na5 (8 mm): 120 cNm
018-241-05E
IN2-24
(5) Connect the connector to the battery. (6) Attach the cable from the battery to the FET board.
#1 Release the clamp and remove the connector that connects to the battery. #1 Pass the cable through the two clamps.
#2 Connect the connector to the battery. #2 Remove the terminal protective caps.
#3 Attach the round terminals (upper side: red, lower side: black).
#4 Attach the screw on the + side with 200 cNm ± 20% torque.
#1
#5 Attach the screw on the - side with 200 cNm ± 20% torque.
NOTE
Be careful to not mistake the installation positions when installing the round terminals
#2 onto the FET board.
BAT_B In addition, the mounting torque is specified for the round terminals. Be careful not
#2 Cable color Terminal size Installation torque
BAT_A
+ side red M5 (smaller) 200 cNm ± 20%
- side black M6 (larger) 200 cNm ± 20%
POC010707005.ai
REFERENCE
#3
Rotate the encircled section in the photo, and detach/connect the connector. #1
#2
POCX010707015J.ai #4
#1
#5
POC010707006.ai
018-241-07E
IN2-25
(7) Remove the tapes securing the main breaker. (9) Before attaching the cover, check that the AC inlet terminal (except
for the GND terminal) via a tester that they are not conducting with the
(8) Attach the bolts. device’s frame.
#1 Attach the bolts.
POC010704014.ai
NOTE
- If the power is switch ON and the AC inlet terminal (except for the GND
terminal) are conducting with the device’s frame, the institution’s power source
and the battery might be damaged.
- If the AC inlet terminal (except for the GND terminal) is conducting with the
device’s frame, the cables might be pinched in the frame or in the batteries.
Check the cable connections, and if the cables are damaged, replace them.
(10) Turn ON the main breaker, and confirm that it powers ON.
NOTE
(12) Reinstall the bracket by reversing the step (1).
018-241-05E
IN2-26
8. Installing the DAP Kit (Optional) Configuration of the DAP Kit

Use the option item “Recommended DAP fixation kit” to install the DAP to the DR-XD 1000.
REFERENCE
GNC-DAP cable Assy
The recommended DAP is as follows. Purchase both items as a set. (356N200355+136Y200065
- Vacutech-made VacuDAP OEM No.1560015 +357S0016 x 2+316S1121)
- Cable: Vacutech-made VacuDAP Interface Cable RS-232 No.9520061, cable
lengths: 3.0 m
- Guide: Vacutech-made U-Guide-pair 132mm No.1560048 POCX01070A042J.ai
CAUTION DAP 15V relay cable

136Y200112
In order to avoid damaging the connectors, do the work without loosening the
DAP cable connector screws. POCX01070A043J.ai
Ferrite core
138S0195
POCX01070A008J.ai POCX01070A044J.ai
DAP fastening screws

308N130007
POCX01070A045J.ai
Hexagonal head TP screws (x2)

308S0414
POCX01070A046J.ai
Binding band (x8)

POCX01070A040J.ai
Sliding tape
382N130042*
018-241-05E
IN2-27

(340Y130011+382N130078)
Clamp Assy (x2)
(316S1409+386N130040) POCX01070A050J.ai
DAP rail paint Assy

POCX01070A009J.ai
(363Y130017+382N130063 x 2)
Lock release label
(382N130036) POCX01070A038J.ai
POCX01070A047J.ai
Lock release label Arm cover Assy

(382N130049) (350Y130112+382N200058 x 4
POCX01070A048J.ai
+386N200038 x 2+405N200702 x 2)
POCX01070A015J.ai
* Included for D version or later.

Code clamp (x2)
(316S1410)
POCX01070A010J.ai
DAP Tape
(382N130093)
POCX01070A014J.ai
Cushioning
(386N200039)
POCX01070A012J.ai
Cushioning
(386N200040)
POCX01070A013J.ai

(340Y130010+382N130078)
POCX01070A049J.ai
018-241-05E
IN2-28
Installing the DAP
 (4) Remove the shield plate of the GNC board.
(1) Remove the top cover of mono-tank. #2 Remove the shield plate.
(2) Remove right and left, one each weights II on the tank upper cover.
#2 Remove the weight fixing plates. TP3x6 (x6)
#3 Remove weights II (x2) (right and left, one each).
#2
POCX010303022J.ai
(5) Connect the serial conversion connector.

#3 Connect the serial conversion connector.
#4 Connect the power supply cable.
#3
REFERENCE #4
The shape of weights I (weight 50g) and weights II (weight 150g) is as follows.
#2
TP3x6 (x2)
#1
POC010320017.ai
(3) Attach the top cover of mono-tank.

018-241-05E
IN2-29
(6) Connect the connector. (7) Attach the ferrite.
#1 Connect the connector. #1 Attach the ferrite to the DAP cable (2 coils).
#2 Fix the cable with clamps. #2 Fix the ferrite with binding band (up and down side of the ferrite).
#1 #3 Fix the cable with binding band.
GNC10
#2
#1
#2
#2
#3
POC010320016.ai POC010320015.ai
 INSTRUCTION
The binding band should be secured by running it through the holes on the X-ray
cart.
Fold the binding band as shown below.
POC010320021.ai
018-241-05E
IN2-30
(8) Remove the USB cover. #3 Run the DAP cable through the USB cover.
#2
#3
POC010320019.ai
POCX01070A041J.ai
(9) Run the DAP cable through the USB cover.

#1 Cut the binding band. (10) Paste two clamps (316S1409) in a mono-tank.
#1 Align the clamps with the lines as per the below, install them in a position 40
#2 mm from the right side. The interval between the top and bottom clamps is 2
mm.
2 mm
#1
#1
40 mm
POC010320018.ai
#2 Run the DAP cable through the edge saddle.
POCX01070A017J.ai
#2
POCX01070A016J.ai
018-241-05E
IN2-31
(11) Apply the clamps (316S1410) in 2 places on the arm. (12) Apply the 2 kinds of cushioning on the arm.
#1 Align the clamp on the beginning of the curved line on the cover as per the #1 Align the cushioning (386N200039) with the resin component edge face (A)
below, and install it so that horizontally it is visually centered. and the head of the screw below (B) and install them.
#2 Align the cushioning (386N200040) with the side of the existing cushioning
(C), and install it so that vertically it is visually centered.
#1
(B)
POCX01070A018J.ai
#1
(A)
#2 Align the clamp with the edges, and install it so that vertically it is visually
centered.
(C)
#2
POCX01070A020J.ai
#2 (13) Remove the handle.

#1 Peel off the labels on both the right and left sides of the arm.
POCX01070A019J.ai
#1
POC010320005.ai
018-241-05E
IN2-32
#2 Remove the screws on both sides of the arm. (14) Remove the DAP arm rail.
#1 Peel off of the double-sided tapes from the DAP arm rail.
#1
POCX01070A023J.ai
#2 Apply the DAP arm rail onto the arm.
#2
Q3x6 (x4)
POCX01070A021J.ai
#3 Remove the handle.

#2
POCX01070A024J.ai
REFERENCE
Since the positioning pin is in the DAP arm rail, its installation orientation cannot
be reversed.
#3
POCX01070A022J.ai
 NOTE  POCX01070A025J.ai
Do not reuse the labels.
018-241-05E
IN2-33
(15) Attach the DAP. (16) Wire the cable.
#1 Attach the DAP to the rail. #1 The cable length position from the base of the connector is 630 mm to 645
mm, and secure the DAP cable via the clamp on the end of the arm.
 NOTE 
- Install the DAP so that the DAP cable is arranged towards the back.
If it installed to the contrary, when the collimator is rotated, then the cable
length will be insufficient.
- Exercise care not to put load on the DAP cable.
- Twist the cable before installing it to prevent it from getting in the light field. (A)
#1
POCX01070A026J.ai
POCX01070A001J.ai
#2 Install the screws. (17) Attach the DAP cable to the arm rail.
#1 Attach the DAP cable to the arm rail.
#1
#2 #1
POC010320001.ai
#1
POCX01070A027J.ai
018-241-05E
IN2-34
(18) Attach handle cover for DAP option included as option. (20) Secure the DAP cable onto the arm socket clamp.
#1 Insert the DAP handle in the direction of the arrow, and snap it in. #1 Secure the DAP cable onto the arm socket clamp.
#1
#1 POCX01070A031J.ai
(21) Secure the DAP cable with tape.

POCX01070A028J.ai
#1 Mark the DAP cable with a marker at a position 500 mm from the arm socket
#2 Install the screws from both the right and left sides of the arm. clamp.
#1
#2
Q3x6 (x4)
POCX01070A032J.ai
POCX01070A029J.ai
#2 Align the marked position (A) on the DAP cable, and the top edge of the
#3 Apply the labels on both the right and left sides of the arm. cushioning, then secure them with tape (382N130093).
#3
#2
POCX01070A030J.ai
(A)
(19) Check that the lock function of DAP handle works.
Cushion
POCX01070A033J.ai
018-241-05E
IN2-35
(22) Fit the DAP optional arm rear cover which is bundled as an option into (23) Adjust the surplus length of the DAP cable.
the arm for adjusting the surplus length of the DAP cable. #1 Adjust the surplus length of the DAP cable inside the cart so that cable
#1 Snap the arm rear cover into the arm. length is 250 mm or longer up to the cart (B) from the arm’s rear cover (A).
 NOTE 
Do not fasten the cover with screws here.
(A)
#2 Stow the DAP cable inside the arm rear cover.
250mm or more
#1
(B)
POCX01070A035J.ai
#1 #2 Rotate the arm right and left, and check that DAP cable does not get taut.
#2 (24) Secure the DAP cable.

#1 Bind the binding bands, and secure the DAP cable.
POCX01070A034J.ai
#3 Check how the DAP cable is wound around, and secure the arm rear cover
with screws.
#4 Move the arm up and down, and check that DAP cable does not get taut.
#1
POCX01070A036J.ai
(25) Attach the shield plate of the GNC board.
(26) Attach the USB cover.
018-241-05E
IN2-36
If necessary, install the following optional items before attaching the cover.
NOTE
The setting of the DAP kit, setting of the magnetic card reader, and setting of the NFC
card reader are performed after the setting up of the CSL and MC.


Cards}
- Attaching the high type handle
$ {IN:Appendix 6._Attaching the Optional Items_4. Attaching the High Type
Handle}
018-241-05E
IN2-37
10. Attaching the Cover - When attaching the left side cover, since the main power switch and the left
side cover may interfere with each other, fasten the screws as per the following
sequence.
(1) Reinstall the covers by reversing the step (3) to (9) in “6. Removing
the Cover”.
#1 Attach the left side cover.
OK NG
POCX010706003J.ai
#1 Install the screws (TP3x6) in the sequence of (A) → (B) in a position where
the breaker lever and the cover’s notch edge do not strike each other. The
installation sequence for the other screws is not the same sequence.
(A) (B)
INSTRUCTION
- When attaching the left side cover, attach cushioning on to TP3x12 (x4). The POCX010706004J.ai
orientation of the cushioning is as per the following. #2 After installing all of the above screws, there will be a gap between the breaker
OK
NG
POCX010302138J.ai
It catches
on the cover
POCX010706005J.ai
018-241-05E
IN2-38
#2 Attach the right side cover. #3 Attach the top cover.
INSTRUCTION
when attaching the top cover, secure the TP3x6 (#2) while pressing on the top
INSTRUCTION Since the front cover latches on to and secures the top cover, if the top cover is
not pushed upward and not secured, the front cover cannot be attached.
- When attaching the right side cover, attach cushioning on to TP3x12 (x4). The
POCX010302138J.ai
#2 #2 #2
#1
POCX010302131J.ai
018-241-05E
IN2-39
#4 Attach the arm front cover. #5 Spread the arm.
#6 Attach the arm rear cover.
INSTRUCTION
When installing the arm front cover, install them from the lower side of the arm.
Then press the covers around the velcro tapes (dual locks) since the velcro tapes
(dual locks) are at the following positions.
POCX010707006J.ai
018-241-05E
IN2-40
#7 Attach the front cover. (2) Attach the screw covers.
#1 Attach the screw covers (tab position vertical).
#2 Attach the screw covers (tab position horizontal).
REFERENCE
There are 2 patterns for positioning the screw cover tabs, vertically and
horizontally attaching.
018-241-05E
IN2-41
018-241-05E
IN2-42
11. Checking the Power Cable
WARNING
Unplug the power cable when measuring resistance value.
(1) Connect the power cable to the X-ray cart’s AC inlet.
(2) Measure the resistance value.

(Reference value)
Terminal L-N L-E N-E
Resistance value More than 100 kΩ ∞ ∞
(3) Measure the resistance value between the E terminal of the power
cable and the bottom of the machine frame, and make sure that there
is continuity.
018-241-05E
IN2-43
12. Attaching the Monitor Securing (2) Attach the monitor securing buffering members.
Buffering Members (Optional)
By using the monitor securing buffering members, the monitor will be more stable
while moving. #1
POCX010708004J.ai
INSTRUCTION
Install the monitor securing buffering members with the cut side down.
Monitor securing
buffering members
POCX010708005E.ai
INSTRUCTION
Whether to attach the monitor securing buffering members is optional.
Explain the merits of attach the securing member and let users to decide whether to
install it or not.
(1) Remove the double-stick tape from the monitor securing buffering
members.
#1 Remove the double-stick tape.
#1
POCX010708003J.ai
018-241-05E
IN2-44
(1) Attaching the Cart Bumper.

#1 Attaching the cart bumper.
#2 Fasten the screws.
#2
#1
#2
#2 V3x6 (x2)
Low head
Q3x6 (x4)
POCX010709009E.ai
018-241-05E
IN2-45
14. Installing the Monitor (1) Remove the hexagonal bolts from the cart.

This installation procedures for newly configured machines will be explained.
NOTE
(1)
- Refer to the following in regard to the differences in PC-GNC connection Q6x15 (5 mm)
configurations.
- Refer to the following regarding the installation procedures for older configured
machines.
$ {IN:Appendix 13._Installing the Operation Panel Assembly (For Older POCX010707016J.ai
Configured Machines)}
#1
#2
Q6x15 (5 mm)
POC010707011.ai
018-241-04E
IN2-46
NOTE (3) Remove the connector cover of the operation panel assembly.
- Make the arm vertically straight when inserting the operation panel assembly. #1 Remove the screws.
#1
POC010707012.ai
#2 V3x6 (x3)
- Wind the cable around so that it passes through the center of the monitor arm POCX010707017-01J.ai
and cart arm.
POC010707019.ai
018-241-04E
IN2-47
(4) Peel the cable protection tube about 10 cm long, and insert the cables (5) Insert the cable of FUJIFILM-made AP into the cover.
into the connector cover. #1 Remove the cover.
#1 Peel the cable protection tube about 10 cm long. #2 Insert the cable of FUJIFILM-made AP into the cover.
#2 Insert the cables into the connector cover. #3 Attach FUJIFILM-made AP LAN cable, and USB cable to the FUJIFILM-made
AP.
PC OPP1
AP REFERENCE
GND the USB cable is attached to the top side of the AP.

#2
#1
LAN
#2
USB
POC010707014-1.ai
REFERENCE
The operation panel rear wiring is a depiction as per the following.
Use LAN relay connector LAN port for connecting to hospital LAN.
USB
AP PC #1,4 #3
POC010707015.ai
LAN
FC REFERENCE
FC LAN LAN USB In overseas, FUJIFILM-made AP is a separate packing item. Installed by “15.
LAN relay Installing the FUJIFILM-made Access Point”.
CSL_PC OPP1
connector FC
FC

wiring ：Tab
: Cables to be wired during installation LAN ：Connector
POCX010302171J.ai
018-241-04E
IN2-48
(6) Connect the connectors. NOTE
#1 Connect the connector. - Install the two ferrite cores so as not to overlap each other when wiring the
#2 Attach the LAN cable (GNC) to the PC. cables.
#3 Fix the ground cable.
POCX010707008J.ai
- In the wiring inside the operation panel, clip the LAN cable (Hospital) and the
FUJIFILM-made AP’s USB cable on to the tabs on the operation panel’s side.
#1 #1 Moreover since these have already been done at the factory, work is normally
OPP1 CSL_PC not needed.
#1
Tab
#2
POCX010302147J.ai
LAN cable (GNC)
#3
#4 Attach the LAN cable (in-hospital) to the relay LAN connector on the back lid.
POC010302041-1E.ai
POC010707020.ai
018-241-04E
IN2-49
(6) Attach the connector cover. (8) Attach the binding band to the clamp.
#1 Attach the connector cover. #1 Secure the clamp with screws.
#2 Install the screws. #2 Attach the binding band to the clamp.
#2 #1
#2
#1 V3x6 (x3)
POC010302039-1.ai
POC010707018.ai
(7) Cut off the extra cable protection tube. (9) Fix the cables with binding bands.
#1 Cut off the extra portion of cable protection tube that goes through the #1 In order to adjust the surplus length of the cable, face the operation panel
connector cover. upwards.
#2 Cut off the extra cable protection tube. #2 Wiring the cables.
#3 Return the cable protection tube to the original place. #3 Bind cables with two binding bands.
#1, #3
#1
#2 #3
#2
POC010707013.ai
POCX010708002J.ai
NOTE source to charge the X-ray cart’s battery.

the image above.
018-241-04E
IN2-50
14.2 Installing the Hydro-AG Sheet (3) Peel back the center section of the Hydro-AG sheet and apply it to the
monitor.
INSTRUCTION
It is optional as to whether the Hydro-AG sheet is to be attached.
After conveying the merits of it being attached, follow the user’s decision.
(1) Open the Hydro-AG sheet package.
POCX010707012J.ai
(4) While pressing down so that the center section of the Hydro-AG sheet
does not move, peel back one side and apply it to the monitor.
POCX010707010J.ai
NOTE
Peel back from the film’s edges and apply it.
(2) Use the attached cleaning cloth and the dust removal seal, and wipe
off any particles, and dust, etc. from the monitor.
POCX010707011J.ai
POCX010707013J.ai
(5) Peel back the opposite side of the Hydro-AG sheet and apply it to the
monitor.
018-241-04E
IN2-51
15. Installing (3) Attach the velcro tape (dual lock) (short) on FUJIFILM-made AP.
#1 Remove the double-stick tape from the velcro tape (dual lock) (short).
the FUJIFILM-made Access Point #2 Align the right side of the velcro tape (dual lock) (short) with the right side of
rating plate.
#3 Align the upper limit of the lower velcro tape (dual lock) (short) with the lower
15.1 Attaching the Velcro Tape (Dual Lock) limit of the barcode, then attach the lower velcro tape (dual lock).
#4 Align the lower limit of the upper velcro tape (dual lock) (short) with the upper
end of the screw hole, then attach the upper velcro tape (dual lock).
(1) Open the rear cover of the monitor.
#2
#1
#4
(1)
#3
POC010707016.ai
#1
(2) Attach the velcro tape (dual lock) (long) on the place where FUJIFILM- POCX010707002J.ai
made AP is to be installed.
#1 Remove the double-stick tape from the velcro tape (dual lock) (long).
#2 Align the right side of the velcro tape (dual lock) (long) with the end of the
screw hole (horizontal alignment).
#3 Place the velcro tape (dual lock) (long) between the ribs (vertical alignment).
#4 Attach the velcro tape (dual lock) (long).
#2
#3
#1, #4
POCX010707001J.ai
018-241-05E
IN2-52
15.2 Installing the FUJIFILM-made Access Point (3) Attach the rear cover of the monitor.
#1 Attach the rear cover of the monitor.
(1) Connect the connector to the FUJIFILM-made AP.
#1 Insert the cable of FUJIFILM-made AP into the cover.
#1
POC010302042.ai
#1
POC010707018.ai
(2) Install the FUJIFILM-made AP.

#1 Install the FUJIFILM-made AP.
#1
POC010707017.ai
INSTRUCTION
Press the FUJIFILM-made AP onto the operation panel, and firmly install the
FUJIFILM-made AP to make sure velcro tape (dual lock) can properly work.
018-241-05E
IN2-53
16. Safety Check / Operation Setup of (4) Turn OFF the key switch.
#1 Twist the key counterclockwise.
Each Section #2 Remove the key from the key switch.


#1 #2
POCX010710003J.ai
REFERENCE
#2 The CSL remains started up.

#1
(5) Confirm that the XCON operation panel is OFF.
POCX010710001J.ai
CSL start up.
(3) Confirm that the XCON operation panel is ON.
POCX010710004J.ai
POCX010710002J.ai
018-241-05E
IN2-54
16.2 Checking the Caster Lock 16.3 Checking the Moving Motion
CAUTION (1) Check that the moving motion is smooth.
When working by two persons, be careful not to get pinched by around the
caster pedal. The front caster pedal and the back caster pedal are interlocked
one another. If the front caster pedal and the back caster pedal are being
operated by 2 persons at the same time, it may cause injury.
(1) Lower the caster lock pedals into the locked position.
(2) Confirm that the caster is locked.
(3) Raise the caster lock pedals into the orientation regulatory position.
(4) Confirm that the direction of casters is controlled.
(5) Confirm that the front caster pedal and the back caster pedal are
interlocked one another.
018-241-05E
IN2-55
16.4 Checking the Arm Lock 16.5 Checking the Arm Motion
(1) Pull up the arm lock release knob and check that the arm lock can be (1) Pull up the arm lock release knob, raise the arm to a arbitrary angle.
released smoothly.
(2) Check that the arm keeps at the same angle with hands off.
NOTE
If the lock release knob is pulled up while the arm is being lifted up, then the lock
will not be released. In order to avoid subjecting the lock release block to loads,
check that the arm lock has been released, then lift up the arm.
(1)
POCX010710007J.ai
(2) Raise the arm to a arbitrary angle.
(3) Restore the arm to the fixed position and check that the arm is locked
smoothly.
018-241-05E
IN2-56
16.6 Checking the Arm Centering Function 16.7 Checking the Collimator Operation
(1) Lower the arm section and stow it away, move it until it is in a (1) Check that the collimator can rotate smoothly.
symmetrically centered position (until it clicks).
(2) Check that no looseness or slip on the collimator
REFERENCE
The device’s rotation range is as per the following.
POCX010302085J.ai
(2) Check that the arm does not move to the right or left.
018-241-05E
IN2-57
16.8 Checking the Light Irradiation Field (3) Turn the “adjust knob 1” and the “adjust knob 2” to the position of
minimum.
(4) Check that there is no light irradiation field.

#2 #1
POCX010710001J.ai
CSL start up.
(2) Press the irradiation field lighting button to light up the irradiation
field.
POCX010710002J1.ai
018-241-05E
IN2-58
16.9 Setting the Lighting Time of (3) Click [Irradiation field lighting time] at the left-hand side of the window.
the Light Irradiation Field

→ The login window is displayed.
(2) Select “Installation” from the pull-down menu and login.

#1 Select: Installation
#2 Input: the password
#3 Click:
POC010710001E.ai
#1 → The “Irradiation field lighting time” window is displayed.
#2 (4) Change the Irradiation field lighting time as needed.

#1 Select the setting value from the “Set value” pull-down menu.
#2 Click:
#3
POC010717001E.ai
REFERENCES #1
→ The “Installation” window is displayed.

#2
POC010710002E.ai
REFERENCES
The default value of Irradiation field lighting time is “30”.
(5) Implement as per the following, and restart the DR-XD 1000
maintenance tool.
- Exit the DR-XD 1000 Maintenance Tool
- Exit Windows OS
- OFF of the main key
- OFF of main breaker
018-241-05E
IN2-59
(6) Implement as per the following, and check that the light irradiation
field illumination time has been changed.
- ON of main breaker
- ON of the main key
- Press the light irradiation field button
018-241-05E
IN2-60
16.10 Setting the DAP (Optional)  DAP Setup on DR-ID 300CL
(1) Using DR-ID 300CL Service Utility to set DAP setting items.
 DR-XD 1000 Maintenance Tool Setup #1 Set “Enable Connecting DAP Directly” to “Yes”.
(1) Use DR-XD 1000 maintenance tool to set “DAP setup” to “Exist”. #2 Set “DAP Device Type” to “2:VacuDAP OEM”.
#3 Set “DAP Serial_TX Control Port” to “4”.
$ {MU:3.2_DAP Setting}
018-241-05E
IN2-61
16.11 Aging (4) Check the time passed from the manufactured month from rating/
standard/medical rating plate.
In order to suppress the depletion of the X-ray tube, age the tube before using the
X-ray cart. REFERENCES
NOTE
- Perform aging near the center of the X-ray room, and in a position whereas it is
almost on the floor.
Manufactured month
- Explain these things to the customers so that they implement “Aging before using
the device”.
Perform the aging processing of X-ray tube in advance to slow down the decrepitude
of the tube.
(1) Turn ON the main breaker and main key. (5) Follow the following chart, and change the tube voltage and mAs
value, then irradiate the X-rays.
(2) Turn the adjust knob to fully close the irradiation field of collimator.
(3) Press and hold the DR interlock switch on the X-ray controller for 2
seconds.
POCX010710013J.ai
POCX010710013J.ai
→ The system is switched to the non-interlock mode of memory exposure.
018-241-08E
IN2-62
● Less than 6 months after the manufactured date
1 60 25 10 5
2 80 25 10 5
3 90 25 10 5
4 100 25 10 5
● More than 6 months after the manufactured date

1 40 12.5 10 5
2 60 12.5 10 5
3 70 12.5 10 5
4 80 12.5 10 5
5 90 12.5 10 5
6 100 12.5 10 5
7 60 3.2 10 5
8 70 3.2 10 5
9 80 2.5 10 5
10 60 25 10 5
11 80 25 10 5
12 100 25 10 5
018-241-05E
IN2-63
16.12 Checking the X-ray Dose (2) Expose the mAs three times respectively with 1 mAs, 3.2 mAs, 10
mAs via the conditions 80 kV, SID = 150 cm, and record the X-ray dose
NOTE values (mR) and the actual mAs values.
- Check the X-ray dose in the X-ray room. Measure the X-ray dose with the dosimeter and the actual mAs with
- Use a dosimeter which has been corrected. values displayed on the CSL.
NOTE
(1) Place the dosimeter at the center of the irradiation field. For each measurement, perform with a fixed SID, tube voltage and irradiation
field.
Check the linearity of the X-ray dose by the procedure shown below.
I. Calculate “(dose average value)/( mAs average value)” at 1 mAs
II. Calculate “(dose average value)/( mAs average value)” at 3.2 mAs
III.Calculate “(dose average value)/( mAs average value)” at 10 mAs
IV. Calculate the average value of I to III.
V. Check that the following condition is satisfied.
The calculated linearity values of “I/IV”, “II/IV”, and “III/IV” are within the range
0.95 to 1.05.
NOTE
In order to eliminate the effects of dosimeter variations if the calculated linearity
values are out of the allowable range, change the exposing frequencies for each
of the conditions respectively 10 times, and reexecute, then check the linearity.
If the linearity calculation values which were rechecked improve so that they are
within the allowable range, they are not a problem since it can be considered that
the first calculation value affects the dosimeter variations.
REFERENCE
To calculate the linearity, use “Installation check calculation sheet” attached to the
service manual. By entering the X-ray dose (mR) and mAs value into the sheet,
the linearity is automatically calculated. Be sure to record the calculated linearity
values.
018-241-05E
IN2-64
17. Difference between Default Setup of ■ The difference between EDIT CONFIGURATION default setup of
DR-ID 1200 system and DR-XD 1000 system
DR-ID 1200 and DR-XD 1000 system
● RU CONFIGURATION SETTING
(Reference) Default setup
The difference between default setup of DR-ID 1200 system and DR-XD 1000 system DR-ID 1200 system DR-XD 1000 system
is shown as below. Configure the settings based on the DR-XD 1000 system default
NUM OF MP 1 1
setup.
READ MODE 1 2
■ Software applications that is installed in PC for DR-XD 1000 MODE2 EXPOSURE
1.2s 1.2s
system TIME
- DR-ID 300CL AUTO DETECT OFF OFF

- DR-ID 1200MC
- DR-XD 1000 maintenance tool NOTE
NOTE Do not correct the above settings since they are optimized for the DR-XD 1000 system.
For the DR-ID 300CL, apply “DR-ID 300CL Standard KIT (DR-XD 1000)” which is
supplied with the device. When this is applied, the following settings and default ● WIRELES SETTING
options for the DR-XD 1000 are enabled.
For details, refer to the DR-ID 300CL Service Manual. Default Setup
- Setting the DR-XD 1000 exposure condition preset values DR-ID 1200 system DR-XD 1000 system
- XCON connection setting
- Setting the resolution (1024 x 768) ESSID FUJIAP01 MANUAL
- Memory exposure mode ESSID MANUAL (Blank) FFaQro87
- MC connection setting
- The exposure menu, and display group display settings CHANNEL & MODE MO:11N40P & CH:44 MO:11N40P & CH:44
WLAN OUTPUT ON ON
REFERENCE
WLAN AUTO RATE VARIABLE VARIABLE
For the Japanese 1 LAN port PC, the “USB-RNDIS driver” was installed for
COUNTRY CODE 4036 4036
communications between the FUJIFILM-made AP and PC. With the #xxx50172 or
later, the communications between the FUJIFILM-made AP and PC are realized via (The MAC address of the
BSSID 000000000000
LAN, so the “USB-RNDIS driver” is unnecessary. bundled FUJIFILM-made AP)
ENCRYPTION ENCRYPTION ENCRYPTION
ENCRYPTION KEY fujifilm fujiFilm34
FIPS MODE OFF OFF
NOTE
If correcting needs to be done based upon the institutions, correct the settings as per
the above.
018-241-05E
IN2-65
18. Setting the FUJIFILM-made AP and (4) Click [Exit Service Utility].
Network (5) Start the Internet Explorer.
18.1 Setting the Country Code for the (6) Enter “192.168.0.25” to the address bar and press the <Enter> key.
is disabled. POCX010709001E.ai

AP.
REFERENCES
To set the FUJIFILM-made AP country code, the RNDIS driver needs to be installed
and the IP address of the DR-ID 300CL needs to be set in advance.
For DR-XD 1000, setting the FUJIFILM-made AP country code is not required
because the RNDIS driver and DR-ID 300CL IP address settings have been set as
factory default.
18.1.1 Checking the IP Address of the FUJIFILM-made AP

the default one.
(2) Turn ON the switch key. POCX010709002E.ai
The DR-ID 300CL-AP starts. The FUJIFILM-made AP setup window opens.
(3) Within a period of 3 seconds after the initial window opens, (8) Terminate the Internet Explorer.
DXL04010001.ai
018-241-05E
IN2-66
18.1.2 Setting the Country Code for FUJIFILM-made AP (2) Double-click the “region_set_to_xx.bat” file in the “AP_Countrycode”
folder.
■ Executing the batch file for FUJIFILM-made AP country code REFERENCES
country.
 INSTRUCTION 
DR-ID 300CL. 1200_700300.ai
Therefore, copy the “AP_Countrycode.zip” file and paste it to the DR-ID 300CL,
then unzip it in DR-ID 300CL. The command prompt window opens.
REFERENCES
For overseas, the batch file for setting the country code is distributed with ECN.
ECN Country 1200_700301.ai
2015-E-0203 USA
2015-E-0252 Canada (3) Press the <Enter> key.
2015-E-0249 Europe The country code setup starts.
2015-E-0254 China The command prompt automatically terminates after the settings.
2015-E-0266 Taiwan NOTE
2015-E-0270 Russia, Serbia When the message “mini-AP not working...” appears, check the following items,
Mexico, Brazil, Colombia, Argentina, Venezuela, Nicaragua, and redo the procedures from step 1.
Costa Rica, Australia, New Zealand, Hong Kong, India, Thailand, - Check that the DR-ID 300CL is connected correctly to the FUJIFILM-made AP.
Singapore, Vietnam, Malaysia, Bahrain, Cambodia, UAE, Israel,
2015-E-0271 Saudi Arabia, South Africa, Morocco, Algeria, South Korea, - Check if FUJIFILM-made AP can be connected by using “192.168.0.25”.
Chile, Panama, Uruguay, Guatemala, the Dominican Republic,
Bangladesh, the Philippines, Nepal, Tunisia, Iraq, Egypt, Kuwait, El
Salvador, (Ecuador)
2015-E-0253 Indonesia
2015-E-0272 Qatar, Honduras
1200_700302.ai
018-241-05E
IN2-67
Before setting
1200_700337E.ai

After setting
POCX010709001E.ai
1200_700338E.ai
POCX010709002E.ai
018-241-05E
IN2-68
■ Troubleshooting
● Phenomenon
1200_700339.ai
● Cause
batch file.
● Coping strategy
018-241-05E
IN2-69
18.2 Setting the FUJIFILM-made AP 18.2.1 Network Settings
 INSTRUCTION   Setting the IP address

If the keyboard jig and mouse jig have not been connected, connect them to the USB
port of X-ray cart in advance. Setting the IP address.

REFERENCES
In case of Japan, the factory default settings of FUJIFILM-made AP are shown as #1 Click: [Start] menu
below. #2 Click: [Control Panel]
Setting item Setting value #2
SSID FFaQro87
Ch 44ch
Bandwidth 40 MHz (dual)
Encryption WPA2-PSK
Encryption key fujiFilm34
Stealth setting YES
#1
600_700237.ai

(3) Confirm that “Unidentified network” is set to “Public network” and
select “Change adapter settings”.
600_712030.ai
018-241-05E
IN2-70
(4) Change the adapter name of the local area connection, enable/disable, (5) Right-click “Eth1” and select “Properties”.
and the IP address as shown in the following table. The “Eth1 Properties” window opens.
Network adapter (6) Select “Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)” and click [Properties].
Wired local area Wireless
connected to
network network
GNC board*
Pattern 1:
Eth2 disabled
In case of a wired Eth0 Eth1
(automatic
connection with the (172.16.1.20) (192.168.0.10)
acquisition)
hospital network
Pattern 2:
In case of a wireless Eth2 disabled Eth0 Eth1
connection with the (automatic aquisition) (172.16.1.20) (192.168.0.10)
hospital network
Pattern 3:
In case of wired and Eth0 Eth2 Eth1
wireless connections with (172.16.1.20) (172.16.1.21) (192.168.0.10)
the hospital network
NOTE 600_712031.ai
- Set the name “Eth1”, and the IP address “192.168.0.10” to the network adapter The “Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties” window opens.
which is connected to the GNC board.
For newly configured machines, set to wired LAN. (7) Select “Use the following IP address” and make the following settings.
For older configured machines, set to Remote NDIS6 based network.
- For newly configured machines, if the RNDIS (Remote NDIS6 based network)
network adapter is displayed here, then the RNDIS device driver may be
installed by mistake.
Reconfirm the configuration, and if the RNDIS device driver is not needed, then
delete it.
REFERENCE I.
II.
Following figure shows an example pattern 2. III.
600_712033.ai

III. Keep the Default gateway in blank. (Do not enter)
NOTE
Set the IP address in this procedure to connect to the SE.
(8) Click [OK].

700_700075E.ai
(9) Click [Cancel].
018-241-05E
IN2-71
 Setting the Network Priority 18.2.2 Changing the Login Password of FUJIFILM-made AP
(1) Select “Advanced Settings” from the [Advanced] menu. (1) Start the Internet Explorer.
REFERENCE
When the menu bar is not displayed, press the [Alt] key. (2) Enter “192.168.0.25” to the address bar and press the <Enter> key.

name) to be displayed in order from highest to lowest priority. POCX010709001E.ai
When changing the network priority, select the target protocol and click the up- The login window of FUJIFILM-made AP opens.
arrow button or down-arrow button.
priority in the following order.
- In case of a wired connection with the hospital network, set the network priority
- In case of wired and wireless connections with the hospital network, set the
network priority in the following order.
(3) Click [OK].

POCX010709002E.ai
The system returns to the desktop screen. The FUJIFILM-made AP setup window opens.
018-241-05E
IN2-72
(4) Select “Password” from the “Detail Configuration” menu. (6) Select “Restart” from “Maintenance” menu.
POCX010709003E.ai
The “Password Configuration” window opens.
(5) Enter the new password and click [Submit].

POCX010709005E.ai
The “Restart” window opens.

New Password : fuj1Film
Confi rm New Password : fuj1Film (7) Click [Yes].
1200_700381E.ai
The FUJIFILM-made AP restarts.
POCX010709004E.ai
018-241-05E
IN2-73
18.2.3 Changing the Wireless Settings of FUJIFILM-made AP (4) Select “General” from the “General Configuration” menu, change the
following items for FUJIFILM-made AP if needed.
CAUTION - Channel Bandwidth
- Channel
Click [Submit] within 5 minutes after changing the settings. When changing the - SSID
settings costs more than 5 minutes, the system will return to the login window - Network Authentication
automatically and the setting will not be saved. If this happens, it is required to
configure the settings again.
POCX010709001E.ai
(3) Enter “fuj1Film” into the password field and click [Login].
700_700053E.ai
NOTE
- Do not change the settings excepting “Channel Bandwidth”, “Channel”, “SSID”,
“Network Authentication”.
- When changing settings of “Channel Bandwidth”, “Channel”, “SSID”, “Network
Authentication”, change as following.
Item Set value
Channel Bandwidth “20MHz” or “40MHz”
Channel *1 One of “1CH” to “165CH”
One of “FUJIAP01” to “FUJIAP10”, or set the unique
SSID *2
POCX010709002E.ai
SSID
Network Authentication “WPA2-PSK” or “OPEN”
018-241-05E
IN2-74
REFERENCES ● DFS (Dynamic Frequency Selection) function
- Set the same value in the RU PC-TOOL “Wireless settings” for the value set - In the communications channel band of W53 (ch 52 – 64) and W56 (ch 100 –
here. 140), due to regulations, weather radar, aviation radar, etc. are prioritized for
$ {IN2:21._Configuration Setup} wireless LAN communications. Therefore, in these bands, in order to avoid
interference with radar waves if radar waves are detected by the access point,
- See the following for the setting correspondence table for the wireless channels the DFS function is implemented which causes the channel being used by the
of access point and “EDIT CONFIGURATION” in RU PC-TOOL. access point to transit to another channel.
$ {IN:Appendix 12._Wireless Channel Used for the Access Point} - In the DFS band, the access point performs the following operations.
- Before wireless LAN communications are used, it confirms that for 1
*2 When setting values other than “FUJIAP 01” to “FUJIAP 10” for SSID in
minute there are no radar waves, then it starts communications.
FUJIFILM-made AP, set “MANUAL”for “ESSID” in “EDIT CONFIGURATION” in
RU PC-TOOL, and set the same value as “SSID” to “ESSID MANUAL”. Therefore, while it is detecting, communications cannot be conducted.
- If radar waves are detected while communicating, the communication
$ {MU:5.3.3_Wireless Setting} will be interrupted and the channel will be changed.
● Communication channel setting Perform the radar detection again with the changed channel for about
1 minute. If no radar wave is detected, communication restarts with the
- When multiple access points are vicinally placed, changing the channel changed channel.
currently used can prevent decreasing the communication speed due to
As FUJIFILM-made AP channel changed, the SE communication channel
interferences.
will also change automatically. The communication continues with the
● Channel setting when using wireless access point outdoors changed SE communication channel until the FUJIFILM-made AP restarts.
- In case of the FUJIFILM-made AP, the “WSTAT” LED flashes in red
- In accordance with the radio law, the W52 (36 to 48ch) and W53 (52 to 64ch) during the DFS search operation.
type channels cannot be used outdoors.
- The log will record that the FUJIFILM-made AP channel changes
- If DR-XD 1000 is to be used outdoors, select a 5 GHz other than the according to the DFS. You can check the log by perform the following
aforementioned channels or a 2.4 GHz. All of the channels can be used confirmation procedures.
indoors.
$ {MT:6._Troubleshooting from FUJIFILM-made AP Log}
*1 There are some different restrictions on “Channel” by different country.
Country Restriction
- When the wireless band is 2.4 GHz, only one of channels 1
USA CH to 11 CH can be selected.
Japan/Europe Channels from 149 CH to 165 CH cannot be selected.
China - When the wireless band is 2.4 GHz, only one of channels 1
CH to 11 CH can be selected.
In compliance with the radio law, do not select channels from
Korea
48 CH to 165 CH.
Other countries Channels from 52 CH to 165 CH cannot be selected.
- For Egypt, in accordance with the radio law, the dual channel cannot be used
outdoors.
- When selecting 2.4 GHz on the FUJIFILM-made AP, select 20 MHz on the
“Channel Width”. Do not select 40 MHz.
- The usable radio channels in each country are changed according to the set
country code.
018-241-05E
IN2-75
(5) Set the “Stealth Mode” to “ENABLE”. (6) Configure the following settings to encode the wireless
communication.
Item Set value
Network Authentication *1 “WPA2-PSK”
Encryption Mode*2 “AES”
A single-byte text string of 8 to 63 characters [default:
Pre-Shared Key *3
fujiFilm34]
*1: It is required to set the “ENCRYPTION” in “EDIT CONFIGURATION” to “ON” via “RU
PC-TOOL”.
*2: When the “Network Authentication” is “OPEN”, “Encryption Mode” will not be
displayed.
*3: It is required to match the “Pre-Shared Key” with the “ENCRYPTION KEY” setting in
“EDIT ONFIGURATION”.
1200_700306E.ai
1200_700304E.ai
018-241-05E
IN2-76
(7) Click [Submit] and select “Restart” from “Maintenance” menu. The FUJIFILM-made AP restarts.
700_700064E.ai
After the FUJIFILM-made AP restarts, the system returns to the login window.
NOTE
POCX010709008E.ai
If the following windows opens, click the update button after about 20 seconds,
and confirm that the login window opens.
(8) Click [Yes].
700_700065E.ai
700_700056E.ai
018-241-05E
IN2-77
(9) Enter “fuj1Film” into the password field and click [Login]. 18.2.4 Confirming the MAC Address of FUJIFILM-made AP
REFERENCES
- The MAC address of FUJIFILM-made AP is required when setting the “BSSID” of
“EDIT CONFIGURATION” in RU PC-TOOL. When entering the MAC address of
FUJIFILM-made AP, do not enter the “:” (e.g.: 1cbdb98a00dc).
- After setting the BSSID, even though there are multiple access points with same
ESSID setting. the SE is still able to communicating with a specific access point.
(1) Select “System” from the “Status” menu and confirm the MAC address.
POCX010709002E.ai
(10) Confirm that the changed settings are reflected.
700_700054E.ai
018-241-05E
IN2-78
18.2.5 Confirming the Stealth Settings
(1) Start up the InSSIDer etc. to confirm that the target channel is
invisible.
REFERENCES
The target channel is in the status below.
- The SSID is “Unknown”.
- The MAC address is not displayed.
1200_700309.ai
When the stealth settings are not successful, perform from step 5 in “18.2.3
Changing the Wireless Settings of FUJIFILM-made AP” again.
$ {IN2:18.2.3_Changing the Wireless Settings of FUJIFILM-made AP}
018-241-05E
IN2-79
19. Upgrading MC Application (6) Double-click “Setup.exe” in the disc.
 INSTRUCTION 
(7) Select “.\install\remote\MCSetupWizard.bat” from “FILE EXECUTION”
The procedures here are not required if the latest MC software has been installed. area, and click [EXECUTE].
NOTE
When upgrading the MC applications, the windows might be hidden behind the #1 Input : 127.0.0.1
command prompt. If the relevant windows are missing, check behind the command #2 Click : [Connect]
prompt.

#1
(2) Within a period of 3 seconds after the initial window opens, #2
800_700200.ai
NOTE
connection status.
DXL04010001.ai
NOTE error will appear. Confirm the MC application installation status and the media
each other. Except for the methods in these procedures, if the DR-ID 300CL (9) Click [OK].
the DR-ID 300CL software is terminated while holding down the <Shift> key), #1 Click: [OK]

#1
(4) Check that the MC Manage Icon is displayed in the task tray.
800_700202.ai
018-241-05E
IN2-80
(10) Input the RU NAMEand click [Register]. (12) Click [Yes].
#1 Input: RU NAME #1 Click: [Yes]
#1
#2
#1
800_700205.ai
800_700203.ai REFERENCES
The installed MC version and the MC version in the media is displayed.
(11) Check the application version for both of the one in the media and the
one installed in DR-ID 300CL, and click [Upgrade].
#1 Check : the media version and the version that are installed on the device
#2 Click : [Upgrade]
#1 800_700206.ai
#2 (13) Confirm that the installation is completed, and click [OK].

#1 Click : [OK]
800_700204.ai
#1
800_700207.ai
018-241-05E
IN2-81
(14) Click [START] in the “Set Up PC-TOOL” window. (15) Confirm that the version display of “LIST OF EXISTING RU” has been
#1 Click : [START] changed.
Set Up PC-TOOL window RU PC-TOOL window
#1
600_700289.ai
(16) Restart the DR-ID 300CL.

REFERENCE
RU PC-TOOL window - MC Manager will restart automatically after the upgrade of MC software is
completed.
- The setting configured will be enabled after restarting the RU.
- When ACTIVE LINE has been installed, if restarting the PC during the setup procedure,
select “Start” menu – “All Programs” – “Remote Maintenance Processing Skip”, it is
best to select “Skip”. Thereby, the execution of the remote maintenance processing
shutdown script is forcibly skipped, so that the OS restarting time is shortened.
600_700056.ai
The “RU PC-TOOL” window opens.
018-241-05E
IN2-82
20. Unlocking the RU PC-TOOL’s (2) Select “PCToolSecKeykey” inside the application disk drive, and click
[Open].
Security Lock
20.1 Unlocking the RU PC-TOOL’s Security Lock

For MC V14 (PC TOOL V6) or later, the MUTL function is locked. In order to use it, the
security lock needs to be unlocked.
NOTE
An unlocking key file (PCToolSecKey.key) until June 30, 2017 is supplied inside the
application disk. ID900_J0215.ai
Subsequent valid files are distributed via ECN every year around April. The security lock is unlocked.
REFERENCE
 INSTRUCTION 
There are following cases where an error occurs when the MUTL starts up.
Check that FUJIFILM-made AP is connected before starting RU PC-TOOL. - The security of the RU PC-TOOL is not unlocked.
- The MUTL is started up without selection of the RU.
(1) Select “Key Regist” from the RU PC-TOOL “License”.
#1 Select: target RU NAME
#2 Select: “License” – “Key Regist.”
RU PC-TOOL window
#2
#1
1200_700482.ai
018-241-05E
IN2-83
20.2 Updating MP Application Software Version (3) Click [Display MP1 Software Version] on the MP1 Version Check >>
window to display the version of the MP application software.
NOTE Check that the displayed version coincides with the version indicated in Readme.
txt in the MC APL software DVD.
In the DR - XD 1000, the MP functions are mounted on the GNC67A board which is
used in the DR-ID 1200 etc. #1 Click: [Display MP1 Software Version]
#2 Check: Version
Display MP1 Software Version <Display example>
 Checking the MP Application Software Version
(1) Start up the MUTL. #1
(2) Click [VERSION CHECK] command, and then click [MP Version >>]
and [MP1 Version Check >>]. #2
#1 Click: [VERSION CHECK]
#2 Click: [MP Version >>]
#3 Click: [MP1 Version Check >>]
#1
1200_700093E.ai
#2 INSTRUCTION
MP Version>>window Follow the procedures below when the version coincides with the version
$ {IN2:21._Configuration Settings}
REFERENCE
The appropriate version of the MP application software is indicated in Readme.txt
in the DR-ID 1200 MC APL software DVD.
Readme.txt <Display example>
MP Software ver
MP1 Version Check>>window
#3
1200_700119.ai
1200_700092E.ai
018-241-05E
IN2-84
 Updating MP Application Software Version (3) Click [MP1 Software VerUp Install] on the MP1 Install >> window.
#1 Click: [MP1 Software VerUp Install]
NOTE MP1 Install>>window
Follow the procedures below only when the version update of the MP application
software is necessary.
#1
(1) Make sure that the install disk is inserted in the jig drive.
(2) Click [INSTALL] command, and then click [Install MP Software >>] and
[MP1 Install >>].
#1 Click: [INSTALL]
#2 Click: [Install MP Software >>]
#3 Click: [MP1 Install >>]
INSTALL window
1200_700095E.ai
#1
(4) Click [OK] when the confirmation window opens.
#2
NOTE
MP Install>>window
If the MP application failed in upgrading the version, restart the MP and retry from
connection check.
MP1 Install>>window
#3
1200_700094E.ai
018-241-05E
IN2-85
(5) Check that the installation is completed, turn OFF the power in the
order of the PC and X-ray cart, then turn ON the power in the order of
the X-ray cart and PC.
REFERENCES
The MP is restarted by carrying out this step.
#1 Check: OK
MP1 Install>>window
#1
1200_700096E.ai
(6) Check the MP application software version.

$ {IN2:20.2_Updating MP Application Software Version_ Checking the MP
Application Software Version}
018-241-05E
IN2-86
21. Configuration Setup ■ Setting Items
 RU CONFIGURATION SETTING
(1) Setting the configurations.
$ {MU:4.11_EDIT CONFIGURATION} Setting Items Default value Modifiable
NOTE MC ID CODE Change as necessary
With the DR-XD 1000, the various configuration settings are factory-configured. If EDIT RU NAME Change as necessary
it is going to be used with the default values, they do not need to be changed. CSL MAC ADDRESS 00:00:00:00:00:00 Can not change
When the settings are changed, restart the MC in order to reflect the settings. CSL IP ADDRESS 127.0.0.1 Can not change
Left-click the MC Manager from the task tray and perform “EXIT”. OPE SETTING(UPRIGHT) MP1 Can not change
Check that the MC Manager icon has disappeared from the task tray, and then start
the MC Manager from “Start menu” → “Start-up”. OPE SETTING(TABLE) MP1 Can not change
REFERENCES OPE SETTING(FREE) MP1 Can not change
The set details become effective after restarting the MC Manager. PORT SETTING(UPRIGHT) MPX1 Can not change
PORT SETTING(TABLE) MPX1 Can not change
PORT SETTING(FREE) MPX1 Can not change
NUM OF MP 1 Can not change
NUM OF SE 5 Change as necessary
TABLE DIRECTION HEAD RIGHT Change as necessary
Stand Up Side Down none Change as necessary
2:FIXED MODE
READ MODE Can not change
(1200ms)
MODE2 EXPOSURE TIME 1.2s Can not change
AUTO DETECT OFF Can not change
CONNECTING CU NOT CONNECTED Change as necessary
EMERGENCY MODE OFF Change as necessary
BATTERY WARNING SE[min] 10 Can not change
SE BATTERY WATCHING (when Can not change when
OFF
connecting cables) MP, DS, PB are included
MC-PC EXISTENCE - -
A SYNCHRONOUS MC-SHUTDOWN
SYNC Can not change
WITH CONSOLE
LONG TIME ACCUM MODE OFF Change as necessary
SHOT GO OFF DELAY TIME 0 Change as necessary
018-241-05E
IN2-87
 RU Image FLAG  SE SLEEP MODE SETTING
Setting Items Default value Modifiable Setting Items Default value Modifiable
GOS SHARPNESS FILTER HIGH Change as necessary SE SLEEP MODE ON Change as necessary
IMAGE READING MODE High-speed Mode Change as necessary SLEEP START TIME(min) 2 Change as necessary
IMAGELOG SAVE OFF Can not change EXTRA SLEEP START TIME(min) 999 Change as necessary
IMAGELOG SAVE TO FTP OFF Can not change
OFFSET2 ON Change as necessary
T2 TIMER(sec) 120 Change as necessary
AUTO DEFECT CALIBRATION ON Change as necessary
HOURS
MINUTES
OFFSET2 JUDGING ON Change as necessary
 WIRELESS SETTING

ESSID MANUAL Change as necessary
ESSID MANUAL FFaQro87 Change as necessary
CHANNEL & MODE MO:11N40P & CH:44 Change as necessary
WLAN OUTPUT ON Change as necessary
WLAN AUTO RATE VARIABLE Change as necessary
COUNTRY CODE 4036 Change as necessary
(MAC address for the
BSSID FUJIFILM-made AP Change as necessary
which is included.)
ENCRYPTION ENCRYPTION Change as necessary
ENCRYPTION KEY fujiFilm34 Change as necessary
FIPS MODE OFF Change as necessary
018-241-05E
IN2-88
22. SE Registration (4) Set the following and click [OK].
NOTE
- For [Device Name], enter an arbitrary name up to 5 characters.
22.1 Registering SE on DR-ID 300CL - Be sure to set [FPD Device ID] to coincide with [SE Serial ID] displayed in the
MUTL “Install SE Software >>” window in the RU PC-TOOL.
$ {MU:[4.2]_Install SE Software >>}
- Be sure to set [Device Color] in [IIP Service Utility] of [Device Setting] to

(2) Within a period of 3 seconds after the initial window opens, coincide with the LED color set to the SE.
$ {IN2:22.7_Setting the Color for SE}
- Do not use the SmartSwich function (X-free) with the DR-XD1000. “Enable
X-Free” is to leave the “No”.
#1 Input : “Device Name”

#2 Input : “FPD Device ID”
#3 Set : CALNEO Smart C/D-EVO II C (for DR-ID 1211SE/1212SE/
1213SE/1214SE/1273SE/1274SE/1275SE) or
DXL04010001.ai CALNEO Smart G/D-EVO II G (for DR-ID 1201SE/1202SE1202SE
The “IIP Service Utility” window opens. /1271SE/1272SE)
#4 Set : “Device Color”
#5 Click : [OK]
(3) Click [Device Setting], and click [Add].
Battery mounting surface
#1 Click : [Deice Setting]
#2 Click : [Add]
IIP Service Utility window #1
#2
#1
#3
Device Setting window #4
#5
#2
POCX010719007E.ai
1200_700136.ai
018-241-06E
IN2-89
(5) Click [Selector Setting]. NOTE
#1 Click : [Selector Setting] - Correspond with the MC settings.
IIP Service Utility window - In order to use the memory mode, set “FPD-C” as “Ready Type”.
- Set the DR-ID 300CL to match the settings for the “Enable Virtual Grid” and “Shot
#1 Ready Notification”.
- The “InitialActiveButton” should be checked when the selector that is selecting
sets the DR-ID 300CL startup’s initial selection state.
1200_700138.ai
The “Selector Setting” window opens.

NOTE
(6) Set the following and click [OK]. Depending on the SE registration count, set the image folder sizes.
#1 Set : “Technique Code” As needed, click “SYSTEM CONFIG” – “99.CONFIG FIX” via the IIP Service
#2 Set : “host Name” (Host name which the 1200MC registered) Utility window – [Setup Configuration Item], and set the “MaximumDataSize”
#3 Set : FPD-C values. If the setting values are incorrect, then the “[MD10016] hard disc is full.”
#4 Input : “Caption” (Characters displayed as the panel name on the error might be displayed.
Console window. Up to 5 characters) For details, see “21. Setting the Images Folder Size (V7.3 or later)” in “MC:
#5 Set : “Icon Type” Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts”under “DR-ID 300CL Service
#6 Set : “Device Name” Manual”.
#7 Select : “Enable Virtual Grid”
#8 Select : “Shot Ready Notification”
#9 Click : [OK]
Selector Setting window
Panel name on the Console window
#1 (Set as FD35G, FD43C)
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
#7
#8
#9
POCX010719008E.ai
018-241-06E
IN2-90
22.2 Changing the GOS Exposure Conditions for
DR-ID 300CL
There are 2 types of exposure conditions, for Csl use and for GOS use.
The exposure conditions are set for Csl use as default settings when the DR-ID 300CL
Standard Kit is installed. If GOS panel is to be used, GOS exposure conditions have
to be set when installing.
 INSTRUCTION 
These procedures are only to be executed when the GOS type SE is going to be
implemented.
NOTE
All the exposure menus will be initialized after performing the procedures below.
REFERENCE
For details of this procedure, refer to the following.
$ {4._Changing to GOS Exposure Conditons} in “Appendix 61_Connecting to DR-
XD 1000” under DR-ID 300 Service Manual
(1) Set the USB connection jig drive to the DR-ID 300CL.
(2) Set the DR-ID 300CL Standard KIT (DR-XD 1000) Disk to the jig drive.
(3) Double-click the “Setup.bat” in the disk.

The “DR Console SettingKit” window opens.
(4) Enter “4” and press the <Enter> key.
The language selection window opens.
(5) Enter the number of the language for the menu to be installed, and
The “Select Xcon Parameter Type” window opens
(6) Enter the number of the parameter that is to be installed, and press
the <Enter> key.
After the installation is completed, the “Installation finished.” message is
displayed.
(8) Remove the disk from the jig drive.
(9) Remove the USB connection jig drive from the DR-ID 300CL.
018-241-05E
IN2-91
22.3 Registering SE Serial ID on RU PC-TOOL (4) Input the serial ID of the SE to be registered, and click [SET].
NOTE
(1) Set the SE to the multiple function DR slot.
(2) Start MUTL of RU PC-TOOL.
REFERENCES
 NOTE 
The serial ID of the SE is mentioned on the surface of the machine-specific CD-
Set only the SE to be registered in the DR slot, and do not power on the other
ROM.
SEs.
To register multiple SEs, repeat “22.3 Registering SE Serial ID on RU PC-TOOL”
#1 Input : Serial ID
– “22.5 Setting IP Address for SE” for each SE.
#2 Click : [SET]
SE1-10>>window
(3) Click [SE SETTING] command, and then click [SE Registration >>] and
[SE1-10 >>].
#1 Click : [SE SETTING]
#1
#2 Click : [SE Registration >>]
#3 Click : [SE1-10 >>]
SE SETTING window
#1
#2
SE Registration>>window
#2
1200_700103E.ai
(4) Check that the serial ID appears in the registration frame.

#1 Check : Serial ID
SE Registration>>window <Input example>
#1
SE1-10>> window
#3
1200_700099E.ai
(5) Left-click the MC Manager from the task tray and select “EXIT”.
(6) Check that the MC Manager icon has disappeared from the task tray,
1200_700098E.ai
018-241-05E
IN2-92
22.4 Changing the SE Country Code 20.4.2 Setting
NOTE  INSTRUCTION 
Be sure to perform this procedure in order to observe the Radio Law. Turn ON the power when changing the SE country code for only one SE.
The SE radio function is turned OFF at the factory. (1) Set the SE to the DR slot.
The SE country code needs to be changed in order to perform  NOTE 
the wireless connection. When the following error appears, click [OK].
NOTE
method is needed for setting the SE country code. The new country code settings are
distributed via the ECN.
22.4.1 Preparation
NOTE
Before changing the SE country code, check that the MC wireless settings have been 800_700190.ai
completed.
$ {IN2:21._Configuration Setup}_ “ WIRELESS SETTING” (2) Close all unnecessary windows.
Items that need to be set are as follows: (3) Exceute the batch file (replace_countrycode.bat).
ESSID, CHANNEL&MODE, BSSID, ENCRYPTION, WLAN OUTPUT, WLAN AUTO REFERENCE
RATE, COUNTRY CODE(MC) The batch file for changing the SE country code is supplied by ECN.

(1) Copy the zip file in the country code media supplied by ECN to the
DR-ID 300 CL and unzip it on the DR-ID 300 CL.
 INSTRUCTION  800_700191.ai
Since the unzipped folder contains invisible files, the batch file will not run
properly if just the visible files are copied.
018-241-06E
IN2-93
(4) When the following window opens, enter the IP address of SE and (5) When the following window opens, enter the IP address (default:
click [OK]. 192.168.0.10) for the image local network side of DR-ID 300CL, and
click [OK].
POCX010719009J.ai
POCX010719010E.ai
REFERENCE
REFERENCE
800_700192.ai
1200_700303.ai
 NOTE 
address of SE is different. In this case, check the IP address and perform the
procedures from step (1).
- When the Standard mode, and Enhance mode selections are displayed, select
“2. Enhanced” only when setting the VA expanded security. Normally, select “1.
Standard”.
POCX010719011J.ai
018-241-06E
IN2-94
(6) Check that the following window is displayed. (7) Close the command prompt.
- A completion message is displayed
(9) Restart the SE.

REFERENCE
After restarting the SE twice, the wireless output of the SE will turn to ON.
- After restarting the SE for the second time, the wireless setting is enabled and
the wireless output of the SE will turn ON.

#1 Left-click the MC Manager from the task tray and perform “EXIT”.
#2 Check that the MC Manager icon has disappeared from the task tray, and
then start the MC Manager from “Start menu” → “Start-up”.
800_700193.ai
 NOTE 
When it cannot be done even if it is done again, refer to the following.
$ {IN2:22.4.4_Troubleshooting}
018-241-06E
IN2-95
22.4.3 Checking the Settings (4) Click [SE Board State] and check that the correct country code has
been set.
Country Code
(2) Start up the MUTL. Japan 4015
(3) Click [BOARD STATE CHECK], and then click [SE Board State >>]. USA, Canada 841
#1 Click: [BOARD STATE CHECK] Europe 56
#2 Click: [SE Board State >>] China 156
#3 Input: Target SE No. Taiwan 158
#4 Click: [SET] Russia, Serbia 643
BOARD STATE CHECK window Indonesia 360
#1 Qatar 586
Qatar, Honduras 634
Mongolia, Bolivia, Oman, Cuba, Afghanistan, Albania, Ukraine,
#2 Kazakhstan, Kenya, Sri Lanka, Tajikistan, Paraguay, Palestine, Peru,
SE Board State >> window Bosnia and Herzegovina, Moldova, Montenegro, Jordan, Lebanon,
Traderto Tobacco, Iran, Myanmar, Tanzania, Zambia, Mexico, Brazil,
Colombia, Argentina, Venezuela, Nicaragua, Costa Rica, Australia,
392
New Zealand, Hong Kong, India, Thailand, Singapore, Vietnam,
Malaysia, Bahrain, Cambodia, UAE, Israel, Saudi Arabia, South
Africa, Morocco, Algeria, South Korea, Chile, Panama, Uruguay,
Guatemala, the Dominican Republic, Bangladesh, the Philippines,
Nepal, Tunisia, Iraq, Egypt, Kuwait, El Salvador, Ecuador
#1 Click: [SE Board State]

#2 Check: SE country code
#3 #4
#2
#1
1200_700383.ai
1200_700382.ai
 NOTE 
018-241-06E
IN2-96
22.4.4 Troubleshooting - Wrong IP address for image local network side of DR-ID 300CL (MC V16.6 or later)
■ Phenomena
The SE country code batch file stops at the following window while it is being
- Wrong SE IP address (MC V16.5 or earlier)
1200_700340.ai
- Wrong SE IP address (MC V16.6 or later)
POCX010719012J.ai
- Wrong IP address for image local network side of DR-ID 300CL (MC V16.5 or
earlier)
POCX010719013J.ai
1200_700341.ai
018-241-06E
IN2-97
- Non-existent invisible files (MC V16.5 or earlier) ■ Countermeasure / Action
address for image local network side of DR-ID 300CL and then check that the
all the above, execute the batch file again.
1200_700342.ai
- Non-existent invisible files (MC V16.6 or later)
POCX010719014J.ai
018-241-06E
IN2-98
22.5 Setting IP Address for SE (5) Check the IP address which is set.
REFERENCES
(1) Start the MUTL.
The IP address of the SE, either the one for the wired mode or the one for the
wireless mode, is automatically assigned corresponding to the connected SE
(2) Click [NETWORK SETTING], and click [SE Network Setting >>]. No. When the IP address is duplicated, “Error 10214 IP addresses multiple
#1 Click: [NETWORK SETTING] connections error” or a communications malfunction occurs.
#2 Click: [SE Network Setting >>] IP address
NETWORK SETTING window SE No. Wireless
Wired mode
#1 mode
#2 1 192.168.0.30 192.168.0.40
2 192.168.0.31 192.168.0.41
SE Network Setting>> window
3 192.168.0.32 192.168.0.42
4 192.168.0.33 192.168.0.43
5 192.168.0.34 192.168.0.44
#1 Check : IP address
#1
1200_700126E.ai

REFERENCES
If an error occurs on the following display, again click [Execute SE IP Setting]
several minutes later.
The error occurs while the SE is being initialized.
1200_700127E.ai
<Error indication>
System Status is not IDLE. Please retry after returning System Status “IDLE”
Error!!
(4) Click [OK].
018-241-06E
IN2-99
22.6 Upgrading SE Application (3) Click [Display SE1 Version Info] and check the SE application software
version.
22.6.1 Checking the SE Application Software Version
(4) Check that the displayed version coincides with the version indicated
(1) Start the MUTL. in Readme. txt in the MC APL software DVD. Check the version in
three subjects of “aplWlan ver”, “fpgaRmv ver”, and “glg ver”.
(2) Click [VERSION CHECK], and click [SE Version >>] and [SE1-10 >>]. #1 Click : [Display SE1 Version Info]
#2 Check : aplWlan ver
#1 Click : [VERSION CHECK]
#3 Check : fpgaRmv ver
#2 Click : [SE Version >>]
#4 Check : glg ver
#3 Click : [SE1-10 >>]
SE1-10>>window <Input example>
#1
#1
#2
SE Version>>window
#2/#3/#4
1200_700101E.ai
 INSTRUCTION 
Follow the procedures below when the version does not coincide with the version
SE1-10>>window indicated in Readme.txt.
$ {IN2:22.6.2_Upgrading SE Application}
#3
1200_700100E.ai
018-241-06E
IN2-100
REFERENCES 22.6.2 Upgrading SE Application
The appropriate version of the SE application software is indicated in Readme.txt
NOTE
in the DR-ID 1200 MC APL software DVD.
Follow the procedures below only when the version update of the SE application
Readme.txt <Display example> software is necessary.
aplWlan ver
(1) Set the installation disc to the jig drive.
(2) Click [INSTALL] and click [Install SE Software >>], then input the target
SE No.
#1 Click : [INSTALL]
fpgaRmv ver
#2 Click : [Install SE Software >>]
#3 Input : SE No.
INSTALL window
glg ver #1
#2
Install SE Software>>window
1200_700102.ai
#3
1200_700120E.ai
018-241-06E
IN2-101
(3) Click [Install SE FPGA Software]. (6) Check that the installation is completed, and click [Install SE LAN
#1 Click : [Install SE FPGA Software] Software].
Install SE1 Software>>window #1 Check : OK
#2 Click : [Install SE LAN Software]
Install SE1 Software>>window
#1
#2
1200_700125E.ai
(4) Click [OK]. #1 1200_700122E.ai
(5) Check that the installation is completed, and click [Install SE GLG
Software]. (7) Click [OK].
#1 Check : OK
#2 Click : [Install SE GLG Software]
#2
#1 1200_700121E.ai
018-241-06E
IN2-102
(8) Check that the installation is completed, and click [Install SE MCU (9) Check that the installation is completed, and restart the SE.
Software]. #1 Check : OK
#1 Check : OK Install SE1 Software>>window
#2 Click : [Install SE MCU Software]
#2
#1 1200_700124E.ai
#1 1200_700123E.ai (10) Check the SE application software version.

NOTE $ {IN2:22.6.1_Checking the SE Application Software Version}
When the SE MCU software is updated successfully, “Successed Please Reboot
SE OK” appears after about 80 seconds. In this case, this procedure is completed
successfully. Updating the SE application software version is completed after
restarting the SE.
In addition, if about 40 seconds elapse after “OK” appears, “Make sure if MCU
software is latest version.” appears. Ignore this message if “Successed” has
already appeared.
If “Successed” has not appeared and only “Make sure if MCU software is latest
version.” is displayed, restart the SE and check the SE application software
version.
If the update is not performed, update the SE MCU software version once again.
018-241-06E
IN2-103
22.7 Setting the Color for SE (4) Input the target SE No. and click [SET].
#1 Input : SE No.
(1) Start the MUTL. #2 Click : [SET]
Selector Color Setting>>window
(2) Click [SE SETTING], and click [SE LED Color Setting >>].
#1 Click : [SE SETTING]
#2 Click : [SE LED Color Setting >>] #1
SE SETTING window
#1
#2
#2
1200_700130E.ai
(5) Refer to the SE color number on the left side of the screen, then input
the SE color number and click [SET].
1200_700128E.ai NOTE
If there are two or more SEs, specify the colors that are not duplicated as much
(3) Click [Selector Color Setting>>]. as possible to consider the operations at the installation site.
#1 Click: [Selector Color Setting>>]
SE LED Color Setting>>window #1 Input : SE color No.
#2 Click : [SET]
Selector Color Setting>>window
#1
#1
1200_700129E.ai
#2
1200_700131E.ai
(6) Verify that the LED of the SE is in the correct color as specified.
(7) Remove and re-install the SE battery, and restart SE only.
018-241-06E
IN2-104
22.8 Installing the Machine-Specific Data (3) Select the menu corresponding to the panel type from the “RESTORE”
pull-down menu and click [EXECUTE].
 INSTRUCTION  #1 Click : Pull-down button
If two or more SE’s are present, use a machine-specific data CD-R corresponding to #2 In case of GOS panel (1201SE, 1202SE, 1271SE, 1272SE): Select
each of them for installation. “CORRECT PANEL DATA”
In case of Csl panel (1211SE, 1212SE, 1213SE, 1214SE, 1273SE, 1274SE,
If the machine-specific data corresponding to each SE has not been installed, correct
1275SE): Select “INDIVIDUAL PANEL DATA”
results cannot be obtained by calibration.
#3 Click : [EXECUTE]
RU PC-TOOL window
(1) Insert the machine-specific data CD into the jig drive.
(2) Select the RU whose machine-specific data is to be installed from the

“LIST OF EXISTING RU” of the RU PC-TOOL.
#1 Select : RU
RU PC-TOOL window
#3
#1
RESTORE #1
CONFIGURATION
HISTORY LOG
#2
INDIVIDUAL PANEL DATA
CORRECT PANEL DATA
600_700090.ai
1200_700177.ai
018-241-06E
IN2-105
(4) Select the target panel number and the folder (for the GOS panel: REFERENCES
“CORRECTH” folder, for the CsI panel: “INDIVIDUALH” folder) in the Select the “CORRECTH” folder for the GOS panel or the “INDIVIDUALH” folder
CD drive. for the CsI panel nomally.
#1 Select : Panel number However, if in the acceptance check the noise was generated in the image
#2 Click : [...] whereas physical phantoms such as mesh, etc. are used to expose, select the
#3 Select : The DVD drive folder below respective “CORRECTS” folder, or the “INDIVIDUALS” folder. Refer to “ IMAGE
READING MODE” in “5.3.2 RU Image FLAG” in the MU, and change “IMAGE
IMAGE READING MODE
READING MODE” of RU Image Flag setting to “Standard”.
Panel type High-speed Standard Mode $ {MU:4.11_EDIT CONFIGURATION}
Mode
GOS panel
CORRECTH CORRECTS (5) Click [OK].
(1201SE, 1202SE, 1271SE, 1272SE)
#1 Click : [OK]
CsI panel
(1211SE, 1212SE, 1213SE, 1214SE, INDIVIDUALH INDIVIDUALS Directory selection window
1273SE, 1274SE, 1275SE)
#4 Click : [OK]
NOTE #1
600_700094.ai
Select the folder corresponding with the IMAGE READING MODE settings in Edit “Completed” is displayed.
Configuration.
(6) Click [OK].
Directory selection window #1 Click : [OK]
Completed window
#1
#2
#1
600_700095.ai
#3 (7) Remove the machine-specific data CD from the jig drive.
#4 (8) Left-click the MC Manager from the task tray and select “EXIT”.
1200_700190.ai (9) Check that the MC Manager icon has disappeared from the task tray,
018-241-06E
IN2-106
(10) Terminate the DR-ID 300CL and confirm that the background
calibration is performed.
REFERENCES
Defect correction data is generated according to the background calibration
during the DR-ID 300CL termination.
(11) Check that the machine-specific data is restored.

I. Back up the CORRECT DATA on the RU-PC TOOL.
$ {MU:4.13_BACKUP}
II. Open “PanelCorrectSensitivity.txt” with WordPad.
successful.
that time stamp and contents are the same. If they are the same, the
machinespecific has been successfully restored. If it is different, restoring the
machinespecific has failed, so install the machine-specific again.
018-241-06E
IN2-107
22.9 Forced Transfer of SE Correction Data 22.9.2 Checking the Save Status of SE Correction Data
 INSTRUCTION  (1) Click [SE Correct Data Save Status >>] and input the target SE
number, then click [SET].
Take the following procedures only for the GOS type SE (DR-ID 1201SE, DR-ID #1 Click : [SE Correct Data Save Status >>]
1202SE, DR-ID 1271SE, DR-ID 1272SE).
#2 Input : Target SE number
#3 Click : [SET]
22.9.1 Forced Transfer of SE Correction Data CALIBRATION window
#1
(1) Start the MULT if the it has not been started, and then click
[CALIBRATION].
The calibration window opens. SE Correct Data Save Status >>
window
(2) Click [SE Correct Data Transfer >>], and input the target SE number,
and then click [SET].
#1 Click : [SE Correct Data Transfer >>] #2
#2 Input : Target SE number
#3 Click : [SET]
CALIBRATION window
#1
SE Correct Data Transfer >>
window #3
1200_700186E.ai
#2 (2) Check that saving of the SE correction data is completed.

#1 Check : Save result
SE Correct Data Save Status >> window
#3 #1
1200_700185E.ai
The SE correction data stored in the MC is transferred to the SE.

NOTE
Make sure that “COMPLETE_DATASAVE” is displayed in the SE Correct Data
Status >> window. “STILL_DATASAVE” is displayed during transfers.
1200_700187E.ai
(3) Click [BACK].
018-241-06E
IN2-108
23. Changing the IP Address of the  INSTRUCTION 
If the IP address of the MP or the SE is lost by mistake during the operation
System (SE/MP/MC) procedures, restore the IP address.
$ {MT:5._GNC board/SE IP Address Resetting Procedures}
NOTE
- Take the following procedures only when the network address of the system is to be
changed from the default value.
- In this procedure, after changing the network address, change the IP address from
the device far from the MC. Change the IP address in the following order according
to target machines.
- New Configured Machines: SE - AP - MP - MC
- Older Configured Machines: SE - MP - AP - MC
The devices which were changed can no longer be accessed until the MP’s IP
address is changed. If operational procedures were mistaken and the MP or SE can
no longer be accessed, then restore the IP address. If the AP cannot be accessed,
then restore the AP’s IP address.
In this case, set the network address to 192.168.0.x and start from the beginning.
(1) Change the IP address of the system (SE/MP/MC) from the default value.
$ {IN:Appendix 5._Replacement Procedure of the Local Network}
 INSTRUCTION 
- The segment No. of the network address must be set to the same value
among the MC, MP, SE and AP. If different network address values are set,
the network among the machines might get disconnected. Initialization of the
machines might be needed in such a case.
How far in the IP address the network address indicates depends on the setting
of the subnet mask. As the default value of the subnet mask of the machine is
255.255.255.0, and locations assigned by 255 (mask value areas) indicate the
network address.
Segment No.
192.168.0.0
Network address
Host address
600_700206.ai
- If the segment No. of the network address is changed, the network address
of the access point (AP) must be changed to include the same segment No. If
the network address of the access point differs, wireless connection of the SE
cannot be made.
018-241-06E
IN2-109
24. Checking the MC_ID_MODE (2) Open IRSET.CFG file with a text editor, notepad, etc., and make sure
that the “MC_ID_MODE” do not duplicate with other MC.
NOTE
Perform the following procedures only when connecting the FUJIFILM-made AP and
sharing the SE with multiple MCs.
Make sure that the “MC_ID_MODE” does not duplicate other MCs.
Make a note of the other MC “MC_ID_MODE” in advance, and check that it is not
duplicated.
REFERENCE
The “MC_ID_MODE” will be generated based upon the dates and times when
installed.
(1) Select the RU to confirm the MC_ID_MODE from the “LIST OF 1200_700202.ai
EXISTING RU” of the RU PC-TOOL, select [CONFIGURATION] from

“BACKUP”, and click [EXECUTE].
#1 Select : RU
#2 Select : CONFIGURATION
#3 Click : [EXECUTE]
RU PC-TOOL window
#1
#2
#3
1200_700201.ai
After selecting the location, IRSET.CFG file is generated in CONFIGURATION

folder.
018-241-06E
IN2-110
25. Setting the MAC Address Filtering (3) Check the SE MAC address.
#1 Click: Client Information
#2 Check: SE MAC addresses that connect with the access point are displayed
<Optional Setting Item> #3 Copy: Select the MAC address and press <Ctrl>+<C> to copy it
 INSTRUCTION 
- Perform this procedure only when activating the MAC address filtering.
- Configure the SE and AP settings, and set the wireless connections in advance.
#1
and press the [Enter] key. #2
area and click [Login]. #3
1200_700371E.ai
700_700051E.ai
018-241-06E
IN2-111
(4) Set the SE MAC address that allows the MAC address filtering. (5) Check that the following window is displayed and select “Restart”.
#1 Click: Wireless LAN
#2 Click: Security Configuration
#3 Select: ALLOW
#4 Paste: MAC address that is copied in step (3)
#5 Click: [Add]
#6 Check: Additional SE MAC address is displayed
#7 Click: [Submit]
 NOTE 
If there are two or more SEs, repeat #4 through #5 as many times as the number
of the SEs.
Be sure to input the MAC address in the form of “xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx”.
1200_700373E.ai
#2
(6) Click [Yes].
#1
#3
#6
#4
#5 1200_700374E.ai
#7
1200_700372E.ai
018-241-06E
IN2-112
26. Checking the Radio Wave Conditions (6) Click [Wireless Speed Measurement >>], and then click [SE1-10 >>]
and [Measurement for using SE1].
To confirm the AP’s optimum position in the wireless connection between SE and Clicking [Measurement for using SE1], the confirmation window as to whether the
FUJIFILM-made AP, measure the wireless communication speed. measurement is to be started opens.
#1 Click: [Wireless Speed Measurement >>]
(1) Check that the battery pack is mounted on the SE. #2 Click: [SE1-10 >>]
(2) Remove the SE from the DR Slot. #3 Click: [Measurement for using SE1]
(3) Start the MUTL.
(4) Click [NETWORK SETTING], and click [SE Network Setting >>].
#1
Check that the SE whose radio wave conditions are to be checked is connected
via the wireless LAN. Wireless Speed
#1 Click: [NETWORK SETTING] Measurement>> window
#2 Click: [SE Network Setting >>]
#3 Check: Serial ID of the connected SE and IP address of the connected SE
#1
#2
SE1-10>>window
#2
#3
#3
1200_700132E.ai
(5) Click [BACK] to return to the NETWORK SETTING window. 1200_700133E.ai
(7) Click [OK] when the confirmation window opens.

Clicking [OK], measurement of radio wave conditions starts.
The measurement ends in approx. 1 minute.
018-241-06E
IN2-113
(8) Check the measurement result. (9) Check the radio wave strength on the DR-ID 300CL.
Check that the average time is following status. #1 Check: Radio wave strength
SE Average tine
DR-ID 1201SE
DR-ID 1211SE
DR-ID 1213SE
DR-ID 1214SE 5000 msec
DR-ID 1271SE
DR-ID 1273SE
DR-ID 1275SE
DR-ID 1202SE #1
DR-ID 1212SE
6000 msec
DR-ID 1272SE 1200_700246E.ai
DR-ID 1274SE
REFERENCE
#1 Check: Average time
SE1-10>>window If the wireless communication cannot be established, check the following items
again.
- The settings of the FUJIFILM-made AP and the EDIT CONFIG (ESSID, SSID,
CH, and encryption) are the same.
- Other APs are operating with the same channel, whose communication status
can be checked visually (such as inSSIDer).
- The MAC address of the FUJIFILM-made AP is appeared on the inSSIDer.
#1
1200_700134E.ai
018-241-06E
IN2-114
27. Calibration REFERENCE
Refer to the table below for the kinds of calibration to be executed.
A total of required time is approx. 35 minutes per SE.
INSTRUCTION
Calibration type Exposure conditions Grid
- In case of the GOS type SE, calibration during installation is not required.
- Check that background calibration automatically executed upon startup of the Offset No exposure Can be kept mounted.
machine is completed before carrying out calibration.
- Keep the DR-ID 300CL running. If the DR-ID 300CL is terminated, the MC software - Tube voltage of 75 kV
power will be automatically turned OFF, and calibration might result in failure. Gain - Dose of 10 mR
(75 kV, 2 mAs, SID = 100 cm)
REFERENCE Number of exposures: 16
Messages of “Calibrating” and “Urgent use is possible” alternately appear on the DX Exposure conditions:
Console status indication area. Defect
- Dose of 5 mR Cannot be mounted.
#1 Check: Status indication correction
(75 kV, 1 mAs, SID = 100 cm)
Lag
- Dose of 40 mR or more (*)
correction
(100 kV, 5 mAs, SID = 100 cm)
*: Set the exposure time to 200 msec or less.
REFERENCE
- Calibration can take place either in a wired or wireless mode.
- If calibration takes place in a wireless mode, radio wave strength may be weakened
when the SE is placed on a concrete floor. In this case, distance the SE from the
#1 concrete floor surface and calibration takes place.
1200_700172E.ai
018-241-06E
IN2-115
27.1 Preparations 27.2 Offset Calibration
(1) Remove the grid. REFERENCE
Offset calibration is carried out for all SE’s which are connected.
(2) Clean the SE exposure plane with a dry cloth.
(3) Adjust the X-ray tube position to SID = 100 cm. (1) Click [Offset Calibration >>] on the calibration window.
The Offset Calibration >> window opens.
(4) Adjust the irradiation field to cover the entire exposure plane.
(2) Click [Start].
(5) Start up the MUTL. Images for offset correction data generation (4 frames) are read from the SE
(FPD).
(6) Click [Calibration]. “OK” appears in the result display area when the processing is completed
The Calibration window opens. normally.
 NOTE 
If you click [Start] during automatic offset update (for 30 seconds every approx.
10 minutes), “Error 12700 currently unavailable” appears. Click [Start] again after
(3) Click [Create an Offset Data].

The confirmation dialogue box of “Are you sure?” opens.
(4) Click [OK].

When the offset correction data is generated and stored in the HDD, [OK]
appears in the result display area.
REFERENCE
area.
 NOTE 
(5) After operations are completed, click [BACK] to return to the

Calibration window.
018-241-06E
IN2-116
27.3 Gain Calibration (3) Click [Operation Setting] and set the operative method.
#1 Click: [Operation Setting]
CAUTION Gain Calibration >> window <Display example>
or longer normally needs to be taken. #1
REFERENCE
(1) Click [Gain Calibration >>] on the Calibration window.

The Gain Calibration >> window opens.
(2) Input the SE No. for calibration into [Input SE No.] and click [SET]. 600_700178E.ai
#1 Input: SE No. (4) Click [Start].

#2 Click: [SET] “OK” appears in the result display area upon completion of the preparation for
Gain Calibration >> window exposure.
 NOTE 
#1 If you click [Start] during automatic offset update (for 30 seconds every approx.
(5) Click [Display ShotRdy] and confirm display of "SHOT_READY" in the

result indication column.
 NOTE 
#2 If "NOT_READY" is indicated, wait for approx. 5 seconds, try again, and proceed
to the next step (exposure) after "SHOT_READY" is indicated.
600_700273.ai
When exposure is executed in "NOT_READY" status, the calibration fails and an
abnormal image is generated.
REFERENCE
Keep the DR-ID 300CL running. If the DR-ID 300CL is terminated, the 102 error
will occur at the cart unit with every shot.
018-241-06E
IN2-117
(6) Expose 16 times with the following condition. Click [Display ShotRdy] (9) Click [BACK] to return to the Calibration window.
at each exposure and confirm display of “SHOT_READY” in the result
indication column.
$ For detials about how to perform the exposure, see the user manual of DR-XD1000.
 NOTE 
REFERENCE
Clicking [Display Image Count], you can know the number of exposures.
The count is displayed in the format of “n/16” in the result display area after
n-times of exposures.

Images for gain correction data generation (16 frames) are read from the SE (FPD).
 INSTRUCTION 
200 msec.
(7) Click [Create a Gain Data].

REFERENCE
If you click [Create a Gain Data] when less than sixteen exposures have been
made, “Error!!” appears in the result display area. Continue to make exposures
until sixteen exposures are made, and click [Create a Gain Data], in this case.
(8) Click [OK].

When the defect correction data is generated and stored in the HDD, [OK]
 NOTE 
 NOTE 
If the calibration freezes in the above procedures, restart the SE and the MC,
then re-execute from the SEs whose connections have been checked.
018-241-06E
IN2-118
27.4 Defect Calibration (3) Click [Operation Setting] and set the operative method.
CAUTION Defect Calibration >> window <Display example>
or longer normally needs to be taken. #1
REFERENCE
(1) Click [Defect Calibration >>] on the Calibration window.

The Defect Calibration >> window opens.
600_700179E.ai
(2) Input the SE No. for calibration into [Input SE No.] and click [SET].
#1 Input: SE No. (4) Click [Start].
#2 Click: [SET] “OK” appears in the result display area upon completion of the preparation for
exposure.
Defect Calibration >> window
 NOTE 
#1 If you click [Start] during automatic offset update (for 30 seconds every approx.
(5) Click [Display ShotRdy] and confirm display of "SHOT_READY" in the

result indication column.
 NOTE 
#2 If "NOT_READY" is indicated, wait for approx. 5 seconds, try again, and proceed
600_700274.ai
to the next step (exposure) after "SHOT_READY" is indicated.
REFERENCE
018-241-06E
IN2-119
(6) Expose 5 times with the following condition. (9) Click [BACK] to return to the Calibration window.
Images for defect correction data generation (5 frames) are read from the SE (FPD).
 INSTRUCTION 
- Correctly set the exposure conditions. If the defect corrections are implemented
via the gain calibration conditions, the number of defects and the defect sizes
may not be correctly detected, and calibration errors may occur.
- Set the exposure time to 200 msec or less. Exposure for longer than 200 msec
200 msec.
REFERENCE
Clicking [Progress Indicator], you can know the number of exposures.
The count is displayed in the format of “n/5” in the result display area after
n-times of exposures.
(7) Click [Create a Defect Data].

REFERENCE
If you click [Create a Defect Data] when less than five exposures have been
made, “Error!!” appears in the result display area. Continue to make exposures
until five exposures are made, and click [Create a Defect Data], in this case.
(8) Click [OK].

When the defect correction data is generated and stored in the HDD, [OK]
 NOTE 
 NOTE 
then re-execute from the SEs whose connections have been checked.
018-241-06E
IN2-120
27.5 Lag Calibration (3) Click [Operation Setting] and set the operative method.
REFERENCE
Lag Calibration >> window <Display example>
(1) Click [Lag Calibration >>] on the Calibration window. #1

The Lag Calibration >> window opens.
(2) Input the SE No. for calibration into [Input SE No.] and click [SET].
#1 Input: SE No.
#2 Click: [SET]
Lag Calibration >> window
600_700180E.ai
#1
(4) Click [Start].
“Please wait for a few minutes” appears.
 NOTE 
If you click [Start] during automatic offset update (for 30 seconds every approx.
#2
600_700275 .ai
REFERENCE
(5) Click [OK].

“OK” appears in the result display area approx. 2 minutes later.
018-241-06E
IN2-121
(6) Click [Display ShotRdy] and confirm display of "SHOT_READY" in the (8) Click [Create a Lag Data].
result indication column. The confirmation dialogue box of “Are you sure?” opens.
 NOTE  (9) Click [OK].
If "NOT_READY" is indicated, wait for approx. 5 seconds, try again, and proceed When the lag correction data is generated and stored in the HDD, “OK” appears
to the next step (exposure) after "SHOT_READY" is indicated. in the result display area.
 NOTE 
REFERENCE - Exposure condition
 NOTE 
(7) Expose 1 time with the following condition. then re-execute from the SEs whose connections have been checked.
Images for lag correction data generation (7 frames) are read from the SE (FPD). (10) Select “Shut Down” in the menu of the DR-ID 300CL.
Clicking [Display Progress Status], you can know the number of image reads. The (11) Check that the READY LED (green) of the SE changes from flashing
count is displayed in the format of “n/7” in the result display area after n-times of to unlit, and the calibration has been completed when the system
reads. terminates. Then, wait for the DR-ID 300CL being powered OFF.
 INSTRUCTION  (12) Turn OFF the main key of the X-ray cart.
cannot be made, since the maximum exposure time is inherently specified as (13) Remove the battery and SE cable from the SE, and turn OFF the power
200 msec. of the SE.
(14) Connect the battery and SE cable to the SE, and turn ON the main key.
 NOTE 
- Record the exposure conditions when lag calibration is executed for the first
time, and subsequently, always make exposures under the same conditions.
This is to compare the lag amounts serially and analyze deterioration of the SE
(FPD).
- If irradiation of 100 kV or over cannot be performed with the condition of the
tube voltage of 80 kV and the maximum exposure time of 200 msec, move the
X-ray tube and the panel close to each other as much as possible (to the limit
which the whole panel is irradiated with X-ray).
If irradiation of 100 kV or over still cannot be performed with this condition,
increase the tube voltage to 100 kV.
If the irradiation does not become 20 mR or over with the aforementioned
condition, you have to perform the lag calibration by using another X-ray
equipment.
018-241-06E
IN2-122
The calibration results can be checked after the calibration.
(1) Start up the RU PC-TOOL and back up the CORRECT DATA.
$ {MU:4.13_BACKUP}
(2) Open the files written below with the Word Pad.
- Gain calibration: PanelCorrectSensitivity.txt
successful.
that time stamp and contents are the same. If they are the same, the
machinespecific has been successfully restored. If it is different, restoring the
machinespecific has failed, so install the machine-specific again.
- Defect calibration: DV.txt
If the data do not line more than or equal to 19 lines for the 14 x 17 inch SE or
23 lines for the 17 x 17 inch SE, the restoration of the machine-specific data or
the defect calibration failed.
Check that the time stamp of LagData.txt is newer than the time stamp
of GAIN00.xxx in the opt/config/machine/correct/panel** folder.
When the time stamp of LagData.txt is older, the lag calibration has not been
performed.
REFERENCE
The description of the defect calibration is an example of the IMAGE READING
MODE in EDIT CONFIGURATION that is “High-speed Mode”.
If two lines appeared for “Standard Mode”, there is no problem.
 INSTRUCTION 
Perform the procedures from “27.2_Offset Calibration” to “27.6_Checking the
Calibration Results” at an installation site where two or more SEs are connected.
$ {IN2:27.2_Offset Calibration}
018-241-06E
IN2-123
If necessary, install the following optional items.

Cards}
- Attaching the apron hanger
$ {IN:Appendix 6._Attaching the Optional Items_5. Attaching the Apron Hanger}
- Attaching accessory case

$ {IN:Appendix 6._Attaching the Optional Items_1. Attaching Accessory Case}
- Attaching wet tissue holder

$ {IN:Appendix 6._Attaching the Optional Items_2. Attaching Wet Tissue
Holder}
- Attaching the wifi adapter
$ {IN:Appendix 2._Recommended Wifi Adapter}
- Attaching the bluetooth barcode reader

$ {IN:Appendix 3._Connecting the Bluetooth Barcode Reader}
- Attaching the additional filter

$ {IN:Appendix 6._Attaching the Optional Items_3. Attaching the Additional
Filter}
018-241-06E
IN2-124
29. Checking the X-ray Source (2) Place a hexagonal wrench, steel scale, etc. according to the radiation
field.
#1
29.1 Checking the Variation between the Light
Field and Imaging Range
This procedure complies with the procedure for IEC 61223-3-1.
(1) Set the SID to 100 cm and adjust the light field such that it fits inside
the border of the SE.
REFERENCE
When using a 1417 panel, the light field should be adjusted as shown in the
picture below.
POCX010306003J.ai
REFERENCE
A phantom may be used instead of a hexagonal wrench or steel scale.
(3) Perform imaging in the desired condition and check that the variation
between the light field and imaging range is within ± 2 cm.
 INSTRUCTION 
POCX010306002J.ai
To change the size of the light field : Perform “ Adjust the light field size in
{MC:6.9_LED Board Assembly}”
To change the position of the light field : Perform “ Adjust the light field position
in {MC:6.9_LED Board Assembly}”.
When adjusting both the size and position of the light field, make sure to perform
“ Adjust the light field size” first.
REFERENCE
So that the misalignment between the center of the light irradiation field reflection
area and the X-ray irradiation field conforms to IEC standards, it is shipping
adjusted to within 2 cm (within 2% of SID) via an SID at 1 m.
018-241-06E
IN2-125
29.2 Checking for Foreign Material in X-ray Tube 29.3 Operation Check for DAP (Optional)
 NOTE 
→ The X-ray cart and DR-ID 300CL are started.
Checking X-ray tube for foreign material in X-ray room.
- SID: 100 cm
(1) Fully open the collimator and use the SE to perform the exposure with
50 kV, 0.8 mAs, SID = 50 cm.
- Voltage: 75 kV
 INSTRUCTION  - 25 mAs
If the irradiation field is not confined to the SE’s effective domain, expose by
shifting the SE several times to divide up the exposing so that the exposed (3) Check the area dose.
images in the irradiation’s entire domain can be confirmed.
- SID: 100 cm
- Voltage: 75 kV
- 12.5 mAs
(5) Confirm that the area dose rate is within the range of half the value ±15%.
(2) Rotate the SE 90 degrees and perform the exposure with same
conditions at step 1.
(3) Check that there is no foreign material in the images taken at step 1
and step 2.
018-241-06E
IN2-126
29.4 Checking the Reproducibility (Optional)  Tube Voltage
This procedure complies with the procedure for IEC 61223-3-1. (1) Set the dosimeter and expose 1 time each with 60 kV, 80 kV, and 100
kV respectively with 100 cm of SID.
 Dose
(2) Check that each tube voltage deviation is less than 10%.
(1) Set the dosimeter and expose 10 times with 75 kV, 2.5 mAs and 100  INSTRUCTION 
cm of SID.
If the deviation is outside the range, check the following measurement
(2) Check that the dose value deviations for 10 times are less than 10%. environments.
 INSTRUCTION 
If the deviation is outside the range, check the following measurement - Direction of the tube voltmeter is correct?
environments.
- Direction of the tube voltmeter is correct?
018-241-06E
IN2-127
29.5 Calibration for Exposure Index (EI) (Optional)  The EI Calibrating Steps
This procedure is excerpted from ECN:2014-E-0036_1 for the DR-XD 1000. 29.5.1 Installation Preparation
 If EI Calibration Is Needed - Prepare needed tool

- Calibrate the FPD
EI calibration does not need to be implemented periodically.
- Set the Console (validate EI values, set display)
However if the following cases apply, after consulting with the institution side, then
implement.
- If beginning to initially use the EI/DI display (when determining the EIt, it needs to be 29.5.2 Determine the Radiation Quality
implemented).
- If the X-ray radiation quality which arrives in the receiver changes (e.g.: switching Continue adjusting the tube voltage, and measure the dosage D0 when the device’s
the X-ray device, changing the additional filters, and changing the exposure stands, additional filter has a 21 mm AI, and measure the dosage DHVL when the device has a 6.8
etc.). mm AI, then the 6.8 mm AI can find the half-value layer tube voltage Vref.
- If the S values have changed 20% or more in the S value periodic inspections. These conditions of radiation quality will be the radiation quality RQ45 which has been
Recommended for 15% or more. (*) defined by the IEC 61267 that is utilized in EI calibration.
* If the S values have changed 20% or more, first reconfirm that there are not any
concerns about unsatisfactory inspection steps, or device defects. 29.5.3 Determine the Irradiation Dose
In particular, great S value fluctuations are not expected in regard to the DR panel.
Find the 1mR mAs values via the tube voltage Vref which was determined in
Here the EI, EIt, and DI, respectively indicate the index value Exposure Index (EI) which is “29.5.2 Determine the Radiation Quality”.
proportional to the dosages, and indicates the index value Deviation Index (DI) which indicates
the degree of divergence with the ideal EI values (EIt).
29.5.4 Confirm the EI Value
With the mAs values which were determined via the tube voltage Vref determined in
“29.5.2 Determine the Radiation Quality”, and in “29.5.3 Determine the Irradiation
Dose”, confirm that the EI values which were irradiated in the FPD that is being used
are appropriate.
If they are not appropriate, then adjust the EI values based upon “29.5.5 Adjust the EI
Value”.
29.5.5 Adjust the EI Value
If the “29.5.4 Confirm the EI Value” results are not appropriate, then adjust the
correction coefficients which are contained in “ExposureIndex. prm” that are saved on
the Console PC, put the EI values in an appropriate range.
018-241-06E
IN2-128
29.5.1 Installation Preparation  Setting the Console (validating the EI, and setting the display)
When images are received from the Image Reader, the index value Exposure Index
 Prepare needed tool (EI), and index value Deviation Index which indicates the degree of deviation with the
- Dosimeter ideal EI value (EIt) are calculated and displayed. The EI and DI values are displayed
- Aluminum 21 mm thick and aluminum 6.8 mm thick as overlay items.
Here the procedures for displaying the EI and DI values are described.
 NOTE 
Use a dosimeter which has been calibrated. CAUTIONS
- If the EI and DI values are used for actual image quality control, periodically
calibrate the Image Reader. In doing so, use the Image Reader QC tool to
 Calibrate the FPD assuredly calibrate it.
- Even if the exposure menus, and exchange of images were done in relation
Before starting the EI calibration, calibrate the FPD. to the exposure menus, the EI and DI values are displayed in accordance
with the original exposure menu functions (even if the exposure energy
subtraction menus are changed to the RT menus, the EI and DI values will
not be displayed). After the exposure menus are changed, and the images are
exchanged, if the EI and DI values are checked, select the correct exposure
menu, then implement the studies.
- If the studies are terminated without the long-view menus being integrated,
and the EI and DI values will not be displayed since the functions will be
handled as long-view (WS).
 NOTE 
- The EI value accuracy is ±20%.
- The Exposure Index function does not support the Mammography exposure menus.
As a result, the EI and DI values will not be calculated leaving the relevant display
boxes to be blank.
- The EI value and the DI value will not be output in the film output.
- The EI and DI values will be displayed only when the determined functionality is “RT”.
- With respect to a study image that has already been subjected to the study, the EI
and the DI values will not be recalculated even if the ideal EI value (EIt) that is to be
used as a guidepost for the exposure menu is changed.
018-241-06E
IN2-129
REFERENCE  User Utility settings
The Exposure Index will be displayed as the following window as an overlay item. Add “EI/DI” into the “Setting the Overlay Display Items” display items.
 Saving and Outputting Exposure Index

The EI, DI and EIt values are stored under the following DICOM tags (Standard).
- EI value :(0018,1411) VR name : DS
- DI value :(0018,1413) VR name : DS
- EIt value :(0018,1412) VR name : DS
The EI value, DI value, and EIt value can be output in the following service classes
(including media storage).
- DICOM Standard CR Storage (image processed)
- DICOM Private CR Storage (standardized)
- DICOM Unstandarlized CR Storage (before standardized)
 Correction coefficient parameter file

Correction coefficient specific to each of the Image Readers (cassette type: IP VN/VI,
dual-side cassette type: ST-BD, built-in type) are stored in the “ExposureIndex.prm”
file that is located under the following folder.
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Config\ExposureIndex.prm
Do not change unless it is absolutely necessary to do so.
DXL040H0002.ai
 Service Utility settings

With the use of the Service Utility capability, it is possible to enable or disable the
Exposure Index function.
Table: IMAGE MODALITY setup item
312 Enable Exposure  Yes Specifying whether to enable or
Index Function Enables the Exposure disable the Exposure Index function.
Index function.
 No
Disables the Exposure
Index function.
018-241-06E
IN2-130
29.5.2 Determine the Radiation Quality
Utilize 21 mm thick aluminum as an additional filter, and confirm the dosage quality
(RQA5) so that the EI is calibrated as defined per IEC 61267.
So that the half value becomes 6.8 mmAl ( ± 0.3 mmAl), adjust the X-ray tube voltage
from the range of 66 kV – 74 kV.
REFERENCE
A combination of 21 mm thick aluminum, 0.5 mm thick copper and 2 mm thick
aluminum can be substituted.
(1) Arrange the additional filter (21 mm thick aluminum), and measure the
standard dosage (D0).
(2) Arrange the additional filter (21 mm thick aluminum) and the half-value
layer filter 6.8 mm (±0.3 mm) thick aluminum, and measure the half-
value layer dosage (DHVL).
(3) Record the tube voltage Vref which is the closest to half (50%) which
are the dosages measured in the above (1) and (2).
Vref[kV] = D0[mR] / DHVL[mR]
Example: Find the X-ray tube voltage that achieves almost 50%.
If the results are as per the following, the tube voltage Vref is 70 kV.
Step (1) Step (2) Step (3)

kV 21mmAL [mR] 21+6.8mmAL [mR] Percentage [mR]
68 1.01 0.46 45%
69 1.07 0.51 47%
70 1.16 0.58 50%
71 1.24 0.63 51%
72 1.29 0.67 52%
018-241-06E
IN2-131
29.5.3 Determine the Irradiation Dose (3) With the additional filter (21 mm thick aluminum) attached, select the
mAs value so that the dosage becomes approximately 1mR (=8.76μ
(1) Place the detector so that the distance from the X-ray source to the Gy).
surface of detector is 180 cm.
When a distance of 180 cm is not ensured or a dosemeter has low
sensitivity, the distance can be reduced (from 180 to 100 cm) or dose (4) With the additional filter (21 mm thick aluminum) attached, irradiate
can be increased (by 1 to 5 mR). X-ray must be irradiated to 15x15 cm the X-rays, and record the dose.
area at the center of the plate. (*) Repeat the X-ray irradiating and recording of the dose several times. It
Fig 1 and Fig 2 show the arrangement of exposure area and dosemeter. is recommended that they be repeated three times.
 NOTE  (5) Record the following information:

- If X-ray fails to be irradiated to 15x15 cm area at the center of the plate, EI will - X-ray exposure conditions: _____mA; _____ msec;
be calculated incorrectly. - Dose measurement results ( D1 _____ mR; D2 _____ mR; D3 _____ mR; )
- Be sure to use a dosemeter that has been calibrated. - Mean dose: Dave _____ mR
Fig 1: Radiation source, detector and the position of the dosimeter

POC010724001.ai
(2) Select the tube voltage Vref which is determined in “26.5.2 Determine
the Radiation Quality”.
018-241-06E
IN2-132
29.5.4 Confirm the EI Value (4) Comfirm the EI value displayed on the Console monitor.
Following example, “EI/DI:879/0.0” is displayed.
(1) Enter patient information and click [Next].
 NOTE 
(2) Select [QC/TEST] in the exposure menu region list and [sensitivity] in The setting procedure to display the EI value on the monitor is described in the
the exposure menu list. Then click [Start study]. Console service manual. See Console service manual, if necessary.
(3) Set the conditions which were determined in “26.5.2 Determine the
Radiation Quality”, and “26.5.3 Determine the Irradiation Dose”, and
with the additional filter (21 mm thick aluminum) attached, irradiate
the X-rays.
 NOTE 
At this time, remove the things which can be removed (ex; grids except the
additional filter (21 mm thick aluminum), photo timer, etc.). In addition, be careful
not to place things, which are not needed for X-ray irradiating and detecting,
between the X-ray source and the detector.
Fig 2: Console Display

POC010724003.ai
(5) Record the EI (EIdisp) value displayed on the monitor.

EIdisp: _____
018-241-06E
IN2-133
(6) Correct as follows the distance of the mean dose (Dave) recored in step (7) Divide The EI value displayed on the monitor (EIdisp) by the surface of
“26.5.3 Determine the Irradiation Dose”. detector dose (Dsurf) to get the EI value per 1 mR (EI1mR).
Multiply the mean dose (Dave) by the distance correction factor to get the dose of the EI1mR = Eidisp ÷ Dsurf
exposed surface (Dsurf).
Dsurf = Dave× [( SID – A )2 ÷ ( SID ) 2 ] (8) Make sure that the EI value per 1 mR is within 876±10% (from 788 to
A is the distance from the surface of detector to the surface of X-ray sensor window. 963).
SID is the distance from the X-ray source to the surface of detector. If the EI1mR is within 876 ± 10%, the task is complete.
The arrangement relationship of the X-ray source, additional filter, dosimeter and If the EI1mR is not within 876 ± 10%, continue implementing the following tasks.
detector are illustrated in Fig. 3.  NOTE 
According to IEC, EI value is acceptable up to 876±20%.
Adjust so that it becomes within ±10% in service adjusting.
Fig. 3: Layout plan of the X-ray source, additional filter, dosimeter and detector.
POC010724004.ai
018-241-06E
IN2-134
29.5.5 Adjust the EI Value Corection
Items coefficient Device type Reader type
(1) Divide 876 by the EI value per 1mR (EI1mR) acquired in step (7) in (Default value)
“26.5.4 Confirm the EI Value” to get the ratio (R).
R = 876 ÷ EI1mR 9\CsI02 0.460 CALNEO- HC SQ (Japan) FPD-U
10\CsI02 0.460 FPD-T
(2) Confirm the value of correction coefficient (Coef) corresponding to the
12\CsI02 0.460 FPD-C
Device type and Reader type described in “ExposureIndex.prm” file of
the following path. 9\CsI03 0.531 CALNEOSmart FPD-U
C47/C77/C12(Japan)
C:\\ProgramFiles\Fujifilm\Param\ExposureIndex.prm 10\CsI03 0.531 FDR D-EVO II C35/C43/C24 FPD-T
Tabel1 shows the correction coefficient (Coef) correstponding to the Device type, (Overseas)
Reader type and the items described in the “ExposureIndex.prm” file. 12\CsI03 0.531 FPD-C
Table1 Parameter described in the “ExposureIndex.prm” file  NOTE 

Corection Confirm the Device type which is going to be connected, and use the values in
Items coefficient Device type Reader type the chart that correspond to that type.
(Default value)
Buitin 0.681 CR buitin -

(3) Seek the value (Coefnew) which multiplied the ratio (R) that was sought
ST-Vn/VI 0.708 CR cassete ST-Vn/VI - in Step (1) in the device’s correction coefficient (Coef) that adjusts the
ST-BD 0.704 CR cassete ST-BD - EI values.
Coefnew = Coef x R
9\a-Se 0.580 BENEO(Japan) FPD-U
FDR AcSelerate(Overseas)
10\a-Se 0.580 FPD-T (4) Substitute the device’s correction coefficient (Coef) that is adjusted in
9\GOS 0.564 CALNEO-U/MT/MB(Japan) FPD-U “ExposureIndex.prm” with the sought value (Coefnew) and save it.
FDR D-EVO(Overseas)
10\GOS 0.564 FPD-T  NOTE 
12\GOS 0.564 CALNEO-C(Japan) FPD-C As reference, a calculation example of Steps (1) through (4) are shown in “■ E.g.:
FDR D-EVO(Overseas) Calculating the EI Correction Coefficient in Relation to the CALNEO-C (Japan)
Cassette”.
9\GOS01 0.581 CALNEO Smart G47/G77(Japan) FPD-U
FDR D-EVO II G35/G43 (Overseas)
10\GOS01 0.581 FPD-T
12\GOS01 0.581 FPD-C (5) In accordance with the steps in “29.5.4 Confirm the EI Value”, confirm
that the EI values per 1mR are within 876±10% (from 788 to 963).
9\CsI 0.460 CALNEO-C SQ(Japan) FPD-U
FDR D-EVO plus(Overseas) If the EI values per 1mR are within 876±10% (from 788 to 963), then the task is
10\CsI 0.460 FDR AcSelerate_CsI(Overseas) FPD-T complete.
12\CsI 0.460 FPD-C
9\CsI01 0.460 CALNEO-C mini SQ(Japan) FPD-U
FDR D-EVO plus C24(Overseas)
10\CsI01 0.460 FPD-T
12\CsI01 0.460 FPD-C
018-241-06E
IN2-135
 E.g.: Calculating the EI Correction Coefficients in Relation to the The initial value of correction coefficient (Coef) is 0.564 as framed in Fig4.
CALNEO-C (Japan) Cassette”.
Illustrates the calculating of the EI correction coefficients for EIdisp, Dave, SID, A as the
following values.
EIdisp = 1140
Dave = 1.100mR
SID = 180.0 cm
A = 2.0 cm,
Calculate Dsurf as folllows
Dsurf = Dave× [( SID – A )2 ÷ ( SID )2 ]
= 1.100× [( 180.0 – 2.0 )2 ÷ ( 180.0 )2 ]
= 1.0756……
= 1.076.
Next, calculate the EI1mR as follows
EI1mR = EIdisp ÷ Dsurf
= 1140÷ 1.076 Fig 4: Contents in “ExposureIndex.prm” file
= 1059.479…… POC010724005.ai
Rounded off to the nearest whole As framed in Fig5, change the correction coefficient (Coef) by multiplying it with the
= 1059. ratio (R)
Now EI1mR becomes 1059 which is greater than the maximum 1051. 0.564 ×0.827
Therefore adjusting the EI value is needed. =0.466428
Caluculate R as follows Rounded off to the third decimal place
R = 876 ÷ EI1mR = 0.466
= 876÷ 1059
=0.8271……
= 0.827.
Comfirm the value of correction coefficient (Coef) corresponding to the Device type of
FDR D-EVO and Reader type of FPD-C described in the “ExposureIndex.prm” file.
Fig 5: Contents in “ExposureIndex.prm” file after changing

the value from 0.564 to 0.466
POC010724006.ai
Overwrite save the“ExposureIndex.prm” file .
018-241-06E
IN2-136
 Supplementary: Confirmation procedures for Device type and (5) Click [Selector Setting].
Reader type
(1) Start up the “IIP Service Utility”.
(2) Click [Device Setting] on the IIP Service Utility window.
POC010724009.ai
(6) The “ReaderType” and “DeviceName” are displayed.

The DeviceName is associated with the DeviceType as stated in the aforementioned.
POC010724007.ai
The “Device Setting” window opens.
(3) Device Type is displayed on the Device setting window.

Device Type is associated with Device Name.
POC010724010.ai
POC010724008.ai
(4) Click [OK].

018-241-06E
IN2-137
30. Checking for Image Problems (5) Check for sensitivity and density problems.
Check to make sure that the system sensitivity value and the film density value
appearing on the output film are approximately 200 and 1.2, respectively.
30.1 Checking for Irregularities,  NOTE 
Density Problems, White Blank Portion, and If the S value is more than 300 or less than 100, the Machine-Specific Data may
not be correctly installed. In such a case, reinstall the Machine-Specific Data and
Sensitivity Problems in the Images perform “27. Calibration”.
$ {IN2:22.8_Installing the Machine-Specific Data}
 INSTRUCTION
Check for the irregularities and the density problems respectively with the grid REFERENCE
removed and with the grid mounted.
- The S-value or a density value might vary with the photo-timer mounted.
If the grid is not to be used, you only need to check with the grid removed.
- The S-value varies from 206 to 210 when the X-ray absorption factor is 3 to 5%.
- “QC-Test” - “IMAGE-FORMAT” (size: 17 inches x 17 inches)
(2) Expose an IP.

 NOTE 
If the exposure is performed with the exposure menu other than the specified
ones or with the exposure condition other than the referred one, abnormal
images, such as horizontal streak, may be found despite no error in the SE since
the study conditions are tight.
When an abnormal image occurred, perform the exposure with the specified
exposure menu and exposure condition, and check the images.
(3) Output the film in the one-image format to the printer.
(4) Check the output film for irregularities, partial density problems, and
white blank portions.
If moiré is determined to occur on the image, identify the cause and deal with the
problem according to the procedures mentioned in the Troubleshooting manual. The
image problems might be possibly caused by the movable grid.
$ {MT:4.1_Analyzing Moiré} in DR-ID 1200 Service Manual
$ {MT:4.1_Analyzing Moiré} in DR-ID1270 Service Manual
018-241-06E
IN2-138
 Procedures for Checking the Format
(1) Check to make sure that the image in the SE exposure frame is
correctly read.
 NOTE 
The exposure frame lines on the SE exposure plane do not exactly indicate
edges of the image recording area. The effective image recording area is approx.
1 mm inward from the exposure frame lines.
Effective image Exposure frame line

recording area
1200_700173E2.ai
018-241-06E
IN2-139
30.3 Checking for (5) Check to make sure that no false image is included in the image of the
frame and the steel rule on the output film.
 Checking for False Image
- “QC-Test” - “IMAGE-FORMAT” (Size: 17 inches×17 inches)
(2) Attach 150 mm steel rules to the center of the vertical and horizontal
exposure center lines on the SE front cover. 600_700099.ai
(6) Detach the steel rules.
Exposure center
Steel rule
SE front cover
Exposure center 600_700098.ai
(3) Expose an IP.

(4) Output the film in the two-image format to the printer.
018-241-06E
IN2-140
 Checking the Read Center  Checking the Film Character Format Information
Have on hand the output film used for “ Checking for False Image”. Check that the Make sure that the film character format information is displayed on the output film.
steel rule images are centered with respect to the vertical and horizontal exposure Verify that none of the characters look blurred or broken.
center lines.
(1) Check the film character format information.
Check the following:
- The film character format information that has been set is correct.
- There is nothing abnormal such as blurred or broken characters.
REFERENCE
The details of the film character format information and the character display
locations are as follows.
Hospital name (medical institution name)
600_700100.ai FUJI HOSPITAL 04001676 A0000 A020
IP barcode No.
EDR mode and menu code
System ID and image No.
Patient ID
Patient Film mark
Image processing conditions name
Sex
Age or date of birth
G 1.0G#0.7+0.50R5Q0.5 R->L G1.0G#0.7+0.50R5Q1.0
SKULL GENERAL
L 0000000001 Hanako Fuji [F] 23
Date of
exposure1992. 11. 27 [17:43] SCALE: 50% RT-04
Exposure menu Set processing information

Standardization conditions Reduction ratio
and correction item Exposure time
Film density Image reversal mark Date of exposure
System sensitivity 600_700101.ai
018-241-06E
IN2-141
31. Initial Settings for SE Battery Pack (4) Click [Battery Date Setting].
#1 Click: [Battery Date Setting]
Perform the start date settings for the SE battery pack. SE Board State >> window
 INSTRUCTION
Perform the following procedures for all the new batteries.
(1) Mount the battery pack on the SE.

#1
(3) Click [BOARD STATE CHECK] command and [SE Board State >>].
#1 Click: [BOARD STATE CHECK]
#2 Click: [SE Board State >>]
#3 Input: Target SE No. 1200_700382-2.ai
#4Click: [SET] The start date for the SE battery pack is set.
BOARD STATE CHECK window
#1
#2
#3 #4
1200_700382-1.ai
018-241-06E
IN2-142
■ RU PC-TOOL
(1) Start the RU PC-TOOL.
(2) Click [ERROR DB].

The ERROR-DB window opens.
(3) Check the error log.
(4) Click [CLEAR] to clear the error log.
(5) Terminate the RU PC-TOOL.
018-241-06E
IN2-143
33. Clearing the operational (3) Click “Displaying and clearing operating information” at the left hand
side of the window.
Information
 INSTRUCTION
Terminate the DR-ID 300CL and perform the following procedures.

→ The login window opens.
(2) Select “Installation” and log in.

#1 Select “Installation”.
#2 Enter the password. POC010717003E.ai
→ The “Operating information” window opens.

#3 Click .
(4) Reset the operational information.

#1 #1 Enter “0” to each “New setting values” field.
#2 #2 Click .
#3 Click .
#3 #1
#2
POC010717001E.ai
REFERENCE
→ The“Installation” window opens.

#3
POC010717002E.ai
018-241-06E
IN2-144
(1) Start the RU PC-TOOL.
(2) Take backups for “LOG ALL” and ”CORRECT ALL DATA”.
(3) Terminate the RU PC-TOOL.
018-241-06E
IN2-145
35. Final Checks 35.3 Final Checks for X-ray Cart
(1) Confirm that the X-ray cart is not damaged.
35.1 Operation Check for DR Lock Knob
(2) Confirm that the bumpers, caster bolts and covers of the X-ray cart
(1) Check that the DR lock knob is locked in each size position of the SE. are neither loose nor wobbly.
(2) Insert the key into the DR lock key and confirm that the DR lock knob (3) Confirm that no errors occur at power-on.
is unlocked.

(1) Check if the DR slot can be opened and closed without any problem.
(2) Insert the SE with a battery attached into the DR slot and confirm that
the SE’s battery is charged.
018-241-06E
IN2-146
35.4 Applying the Product Label for the NOTE
DR-ID1270 Panel Since the product labels have different designs for each panel, apply the product
labels in accordance with the panel.
 Checking the external appearance  The product label designs

1271SE
(1) Check that the SE is not damaged.
 Applying the product label

The product label is not applied to the SE. A transparent protective film is applied to it.
The product label needs to be applied at the time of purchase. 1272SE
1273SE
1274SE
The serial No. The manufacturing Transparent
display position date display position film
1275SE
1270_700009E.ai
1270_700005.ai
018-241-06E
IN2-147
(1) Peel off the protective film. (3) Confirm that the serial No. and manufacturing date are visible.

(1) display date display
1270_700006.ai
1270_700008E.ai
(2) Apply the product label in an orientation whereas the serial No. and
manufacturing date are visible.
The serial No. and manufacturing

date display window
(2)

display position date display position
1270_700007E.ai
018-241-06E
IN2-148
36. Visual Inspection and Cleaning of
the Device
Visually check the each unit for damage.
If contaminated, wipe off with a dry cloth.
 NOTE 
Cover those unused USB ports with the lids which is included with the device.
018-241-06E
IN2-149
BLANK PAGE
018-241-06E
IN2-150
BLANK PAGE
018-241-06E
IN2-151
BLANK PAGE
018-241-06E
Control Sheet
AppxIN 1-1 to 1-3, AppxIN 2-1, 2-2,
05.31.2017 03 Revision (FM9471)
AppxIN 5-1, 5-7, AppxIN 6-1 to 6-4,
AppxIN 2-1, 2-3, 2-4, AppxIN 5-1,
AppxIN 6-1 to 6-4, AppxIN 7-1 to 7-4,
AppxIN 8-1 to 8-28,
AppxIN 10-1 to 10-4
DR-XD 1000 Service Manual 11.30.2017 04 Changes in pagination (FM9486) AppxIN 9-1 to 9-4
AppxIN 2-1, AppxIN 3-1, AppxIN 4-1,
AppxIN 11-1 to 11-16,
AppxIN 12-1 to 12-4,
AppxIN 14-1 to14-4,
AppxIN 17-1 to 17-4
10.31.2018 05 Changes in pagination (FM9528) AppxIN 4-2 to 4-8
AppxIN 14-1, AppxIN 17-2,
AppxIN 18-1 to 18-4
Installation (AppxIN) 09.30.2019
02.29.2020
07
08
Changes in pagination (FM9587)
Revision for CSL V13.0 (FM9630)

AppxIN 17-3, 17-4
AppxIN 19-1 to 19-16,
AppxIN 20-1 to 20-16,
AppxIN 21-1 to 21-4
018-241-08E
AppxIN1-1
Appendix 1. Nothing
018-241-03E
DR-XD 1000 Service Manual AppxIN1-1
AppxIN1-2
BLANK PAGE
018-241-03E
AppxIN1-3
BLANK PAGE
018-241-03E
AppxIN2-1
Appendix 2. Recommended Wifi  INSTRUCTION
The USB port on the rear of the cart might not be able to be mounted due to the shape
Adapter of the Wi-Fi adapter. Therefore, follow the following to mount it.
- WN-AC433UK, TP-LINK AC600: Mounting into the USB port on the rear side of the
cart.
The DR-ID 300CL for the DR-XD 1000 can communicate with the in-hospital network
using a recommended Wi-Fi adapter.
1. Available Wifi adapters

The following Wi-Fi adapters can be used:
The other
Manufacturer, Type Appearance Japan U.S.
countries
I/O-DATA
WHG-AGDN/US-X ○ - -
(Discontinued)
I/O-DATA
○ - -
WN-AC433UK
I/O-DATA
○ - -
WHG-AC433US
Buffalo
○ - -
WI-U2-433DMS
POCX01070B005.ai
- Other than WN-AC 433 UK, TP-LINK AC600: Mount in the USB port at the top of the
TP-LINK AC600 - - ○ console computer.
L-com Item
WLAN- - ○ -
LCUSB2458*1
Proxim ORiNOCO
- ○ -
USB-9100-US
*1 When using “WLAN-LCUSB2458”, make sure to install it using the “USB Wi-Fi Adapter
Installation Kit (DR-XD1000)” service parts.
POCX01070B004.ai
018-241-05E
AppxIN2-2
2. Attaching WLAN-LCUSB 2458 (3) Mount the USB extension cord, and secure the WLAN-LCUSB2458 via
the velcro tapes (dual locks).
Since the WLAN-LCUSB2458 has a long antenna component, if the operation panel is
moved the antenna will become unstable. Therefore, use the service parts “USB Wi-Fi
Adapter Mounting Kit (DR-XD1000)”, and secure it via the velcro tapes (dual locks).
(1) Attach the velcro tape (dual lock) on the upper rear of the operation
panel.
 INSTRUCTION POCX01070B003.ai
The velcro tape (dual lock) should be attached in the following position.
POCX01070B001.ai
(2) Attach the velcro tape (dual lock) on the WLAN-LCUSB 2458.
 INSTRUCTION
Mount the velcro tapes (dual locks) on the rear side of the label application
surface.
POCX01070B002.ai
018-241-03E
AppxIN2-3
3. Attaching the WHG-AGDN/US-X (3) Attach the USB extension cord, and secure the WHG-AGDN/US-X via
the velcro tape (dual lock).
 INSTRUCTION
Prepare a USB extension cord (about 30 cm) and commercial dual lock.
 When attaching on to the operation panel (recommended)

(1) Attach the velcro tape (dual lock) on the operation panel’s rear.
 INSTRUCTION
POCX01070B008.ai
 NOTE 
Wire the cables so that when the operation panel is moved, the cables do not get
pinched nor caught.
POCX01070B006.ai
(2) Attach the velcro tape (dual lock) on to the WHG-AGDN/US-X’s rear.
 INSTRUCTION
Trim the velcro tape (dual lock) to an appropriate size, and attach it.
POCX01070B007.ai
018-241-04E
AppxIN2-4
 When attaching to the cart unit (3) Attach the USB extension cord, and secure the WHG-AGDN/US-X via
the velcro tape (dual lock).
If there are problems visible, etc. on the rear of the operation panel, then attach via
the following steps.
(1) Attach the velcro tape (dual lock) on the cart unit.
 INSTRUCTION
Do not have the arm side protrude.
POCX01070B010.ai
 NOTE 
Wire the cables so that when the operation panel is moved, the cables do not get
pinched nor caught.
POCX01070B009.ai
(2) Attach the velcro tape (dual lock) on WHG-AGDN/US-X.

 INSTRUCTION
Trim the velcro tape (dual lock) to an appropriate size, and attach it.
POCX01070B007.ai
018-241-04E
AppxIN3-1
Appendix 3. Connecting the Bluetooth 2. Disabling the Bluetooth Network Connection
Barcode Reader When any Bluetooth device is recognized, “Bluetooth Network Connection” becomes
enabled. Therefore, it needs to be disabled according to the following procedure:
This section describes how to connect and set the barcode reader.
(1) Select “Control Panel” from the menu.
 NOTE 
Only one barcode reader is to be connected.
(2) Click “Network and Sharing Center”.
REFERENCE
The barcode reader used on DR-XD 1000 is a option item of bluetooth barcode reader
in the “Bluetooth barcode reader kit”.
(3) Click “Change adapter settings”.
For details, refer to the following.
$ {Spec:8._Other Specifications}
(4) Right-click “Bluetooth Network Connection” and select “Disable”.
1. Connecting DR-ID 300CL and (5) Close the “Network Connections” window.
the Bluetooth Barcode Reader The system returns to the desktop screen.
 NOTE 
- If installed near a wireless device using the 2.4GHz frequency band, there is
a possibility that the communication speed becomes slower or communication
disconnection occurs.
- Do not install the wireless device near devices that generate electromagnetic waves
(CT, MRI, high frequency therapy equipment, mobile phone, RFID, etc.).
- When the LED on the barcode reader is orange and flashing, or if is lighting red
when reading the barcode, the barcode reader is low battery. Connect it to the PC
using the USB cable included, and charge.
- Do not “Enable” the Outside-Range Memory setting (Operation not guaranteed).
- If using bluetooth barcode reader, do not use other barcode reader.
REFERENCE
If you read the barcode when the Bluetooth is disconnected, the barcode reader
automatically reconnects with the PC. Therefore, it takes some time for the barcode
information to show.
(1) Connect the wireless USB adapter (OPA-3201-USB) to the USB port of
the operation panel.
The Windows standard driver is installed.
018-241-05E
AppxIN3-2
BLANK PAGE
018-241-01E
AppxIN3-3
BLANK PAGE
018-241-01E
AppxIN3-4
BLANK PAGE
018-241-01E
AppxIN3-5
3. Setting the OPN-3002i (Factory Setting)
Read the barcodes shown below from the top in sequence.
REFERENCE
- Performing initialization or factory default setup by reading following barcodes when the performance is unstable can solve problems.
- When read following barcodes, the connection settings for PC and the barcode reader are also initialized. Therefore, “4. Pairing setting for PC and the barcode reader” needs to be
performed again.
setup
Factory default
setup
Initialization
End
is pressed:Not sending.
when the function key
Delivery code setting
start
Function key settings
Disable auto connect

Bluetooth address
1 minute
Auto reconnect:
Disabled
Auto disconnect:
redundancy = 2
Read 3 times,
Data collation:
ST/SP:abcd/abcd
Codabar (NW7):
Transmit ST/SP
Code39:
EXT
(Common suffix)
Postamble
Set
End
Default settings
Set
018-241-01E
AppxIN3-6
BLANK PAGE
018-241-01E
AppxIN3-7
4. Pairing Setting for PC and the Barcode Reader (11) Enter the following character string into the command prompt and
(1) Hold down the function key of the barcode reader till the blue LED D:\Tools\COMPortOpener\COMPortOpener.exeΔX
flashes. (Δ is a one-byte space, and “X” is the COM Port number on the Outgoing side
which was noted down in step 6.)
(2) Click the “Bluetooth Devices” icon displayed in the notification area  NOTE 
on the task bar and select “Add a Device”.
The command shall be executed while the blue LED is flashing.
The “Select a device to add to this computer” window opens.
The LED of the barcode reader lights out and the buzzer sounds several times.
(3) Select “OPN-3002i[XXXXXX]” (XXXXXX: Serial No.) and click [Next]. The pairing is complete.
The “This device has been successfully added to this computer” message appears.  NOTE 
After about 20 seconds, reconnection is tried (The blue LED flashes and the
(4) Click [Close]. buzzer sounds. Then, the LED lights out.). If this trial is repeated more than once,
After a while, the buzzer sounds from the barcode reader and the LED lights out. the setup of the barcode reader is failed. Perform from step 1 again.
The registration is complete.

(5) Click the “Bluetooth Devices” icon displayed in the notification area
on the task bar and select “Open Settings”.
 NOTE 
(6) With the “COM Ports” tab, note down the COM Port number and If pairing is needed again, delete the registered barcode reader first.
Direction set for OPN-3002i. The deletion procedure is as follows:
I. Click the “Bluetooth Devices” icon displayed in the notification area on
(7) Connect the USB connection Disk drive (jig) to the USB port on the the task bar and select “Show Bluetooth Devices”.
PC. The “Devices and Printers” window opens.
II. Right-click “OPN-3002i” and select “Remove Device”.

(8) Insert the DR-ID 300CL-AP Disk into the Disk drive. The “Remove Device” window opens.
III. Click [Yes].

(9) Enter “cmd” into the “Search programs and files” column from the The system returns to the “Bluetooth Devices” window
menu, then press the <Enter> key. IV. Close the “Bluetooth Devices” window.
The command prompt opens.
(10) Hold down the function key of the barcode reader till the blue LED
flashes.
018-241-01E
AppxIN3-8
5. Setting the Configuration Items
(1) Restart the PC.

upper right corners within a period of 3 seconds.
The Service Utility starts and the “IIP Service Utility” window opens.
(3) Click [Setup Configuration Item].

The “Setup Configuration Item” window opens.
(4) Select “CONFIG” - “SYSTEM CONFIG” - “5.CSL/IDT FUNCTION” and

set up the following configuration items.
Setting whether or not
Enable
367 Set up to “Yes”. to use the 2D barcode
2D Barcode
reader.
BCR Device Setting the type of BCR
381 Set up to “1:Bluetooth(SPP)”.
Type to use.
Set the COM Port number on the
Bluetooth Incoming side which was noted Setting the COM port
382 BCR Com down in step 6 of “4. Pairing number to use Bluetooth
Port setting for PC and the barcode connection.
reader”.
(5) Click “Config” - “Save”.

(6) Click [Yes].

The system saves the setup data and returns to the “Setup Configuration Item”
window.
(7) Click “Config” - “Close”.


018-241-01E
AppxIN3-9
6. Verification (8) Select the COM port number which you noted down in thestep 6 of “4.
Pairing Setting for PC and the Barcode Reader” from among the items
in the “Connect using” field, and click [OK].
■ The barcode reader setting and verification The “COMxx Properties” window opens.
(1) Restart the PC.
After a while, the DR-ID 300CL-AP starts. (9) Click [OK].
The “BCR - HyperTerminal” window opens.
upper right corners within a period of 3 seconds. (10) Read the barcode shown below, and make sure that “a0123456789c♥”
The Service Utility starts and the “IIP Service Utility” window opens. is displayed in “BCR - HyperTerminal” window.

The system return to the desktop screen.
(4) Insert the “DR-ID300CL Standard KIT (POCX)” CD into the Disk drive.  NOTE 
If a reading error occurs or if the LED blinks blue when reading
(5) Start up Explorer and open “D:\SerialPortCheckTool\EXP” folder. barcodes, the factory default setup is failed.
Re-execute “3. Setting the OPN-3002i (Factory Setting)” and “4. Pairing Setting
(6) Double-click “hypertrm.exe”. for PC and the Barcode Reader”.
 NOTE 
- When the “Default Telnet Program?” window displayed, click [Yes]. (11) Read the barcode of step 10 again, and make sure that
- When “Location Information” window display, enter “03” to “What area code (or “a0123456789c♥a0123456789c♥” is displayed in “BCR -
city code) are you in now?” and click [OK]. HyperTerminal” window.
- When “Phone and Modem” window opened, click [OK].
 NOTE 
The “Connection Description” window opens. If plural results of reading are not displayed, the factory default setup is failed.
(7) Enter “BCR” to “Name:” column and click [OK]. for PC and the Barcode Reader”.
The “Connect To” window opens.
(12) Click [Disconnect].

Communication is disconnected and the barcode reader generates a buzzer
sound.
(13) Close “BCR - HyperTerminal” window.

The “HyperTerminal” window opens.
018-241-01E
AppxIN3-10
(14) Click [No]. ■ The DR-ID 300CL-AP verification
The LED of the barcode reader blinks blue about 20 seconds after the buzzer
sound. (1) Start up the DR-ID 300CL.
Then the buzzer sounds several times about 20 seconds after it and the LED After a while, the registration window opens.
goes out.
 NOTE  (2) Read the barcode shown below, and make sure that “0123456ABC” is
Wait for about a minute after the above-mentioned behavior. If this behavior is entered in Patient ID or Accession Number.
repeated more than once, the factory default setup is failed.
for PC and the Barcode Reader”.
REFERENCE
(15) Remove the CD from the Disk drive.
- When the barcode is read for the first time after the startup of the barcode
reader, reconnection from the barcode reader to PC is performed. Therefore, it
(16) Remove the Disk drive from the PC. takes some time to display the data after reading the barcode.
- Whether the data is entered in Patient ID or Accession Number depends on
the setting of Service Utility.
018-241-01E
AppxIN3-11
BLANK PAGE
018-241-01E
AppxIN3-12
BLANK PAGE
018-241-01E
AppxIN4-1
Appendix 4. Installing and Setting the 1. Installing the Magnetic Card Reader
Magnetic Card Reader (1) Remove the cover.
Use the option item “Magnetic card reader fixation kit” to install the magnetice card
reader. $ {MC:2.2_Rear Cover}
$ {MC:2.4_Arm Front Cvover}
 NOTE 
When using both the NFC card reader and the magnetic card reader, apply the magnetic $ {MC:2.7_Left-side Cover (INV Board Side)}
card reader to the center part of the top cover. For the installation procedures, refer to the
following.
$ {IN:Appendix 11._Installing the NFC Card Reader for Contactless IC Cards} (2) Run the magnetic card reader cable through the right side of the X-ray
cart to the inner side.
#1 Run the magnetic card reader cable into the X-ray cart.
#1
POCX01070D002J.ai
POCX01070D001J.ai
018-241-05E
AppxIN4-2
(3) Connect the magnetic card reader connector to the USB port of the (6) Attach the velcro tapes (dual locks).
GNC board. #1 Attach velcro tapes (dual locks) to the rear side of the magnetic card reader.
#1 Connect the connector to the USB port. #2 Attach velcro tapes (dual locks) to the top cover.
#1
#1 #2
POC010703004.ai
(7) Install the magnetic card reader.

#1 Install the magnetic card reader on the top cover.
POC010703002.ai #1
(4) Attach the clamp.

#1 Remove the double-stick tape from the clamp.
#2 Attach the clamp.
POC010703005.ai
 NOTE 
#1, #2
Be sure that the velcro tapes (dual locks) function well when installing the
magnetic card reader.
POC010703001.ai
(5) Attach the cover to the magnetic card reader.

#1 Attach the cover to the rear side of the magnetic card reader.
#2 Install the screws (M3x6(x2)).
018-241-05E
AppxIN4-3
(8) Clamp the extra cable of the magnetic card reader.
#1 Bundle the cables.
#2 Clamp the cable.
#1
#2
POC010703003.ai
(9) Install the cover.

$ {MC:2.4_Arm Front Cvover}
018-241-05E
AppxIN4-4
2. Installing the Driver of Magnetic Card reader (11) Click [Close].
→ The system returns to the “Device Manager” window.
(1) Turn ON the main key of the X-ray cart.

(12) Confirm that the correct USB driver has been installed.
→ After a while, DR-ID 300CL-AP starts.
 NOTE 
(2) When the initial window opens, sequentially click its upper left and After the magnetic card reader has been connected to the DR-ID 300CL, be
upper right corners within a period of 3 seconds. sure to restart the OS. Although a window opens immediately after magnetic
→ The Service Utility starts. The “IIP Service Utility” window opens. card reader connection to indicate that driver software installation has been
completed, you cannot immediately use the magnetic card reader because it is
not recognized by the DR-ID 300CL-AP yet.
→ The desktop of Windows is displayed.
(4) Select the “Control Panel” from the menu.

→ The “All Control Panel Items” window opens.
(5) Click .
→ The “Device Manager” window opens.
(6) In the “Device Manager” window, right-click “Human Interface

Devices” and then “USB Human Interface Device” to select “Update
Driver Software...”.
→ The “Update Driver Software - USB Human Interface Device” window opens.
(7) Select “Browse my computer for driver software”.

→ The “Browse for driver software on your computer” window opens.
(8) Select “Let me pick from a list of device drivers on my computer”.

→ The “Select the device driver you want to install for this hardware.” window opens.
(9) Select “WinUSB MCR (NEURON Magnetic Card Reader)”, and click
[Next] .
→ The “Windows Security” window opens.
(10) Select “Install this driver software anyway”.

→ A window opens to indicate that installation processing has ended.
018-241-05E
AppxIN4-5
3. Setting the Magnetic Card Reader and Magnetic
Card
(1) Use the Service Utility of DR-ID 300CL to set the items related to the
magnetic card reader.
018-241-05E
AppxIN4-6
BLANK PAGE
018-241-05E
AppxIN4-7
BLANK PAGE
018-241-05E
AppxIN4-8
BLANK PAGE
018-241-05E
AppxIN5-1
Appendix 5. Replacement Procedure of  Inputting the IP addresses
the Local Network (1) Click [NETWORK SETTING], and click [Local Network PreSetting >>].
#1 Click: [[NETWORK SETTING]]
#2 Click: [Local Network PreSetting >>]
 NOTE  NETWORK SETTING window
These procedures are for when the RU PC-TOOL is going to be used. If the DR
Maintenance Software is going to be used, refer to the following, and execute the #1
Local network changes. #2 Local Network
$ {MU:5.5.1_Local Network} PreSetting>>window
1. Local Network PreSetting >>

Change the following IP address.
- MC ETH1 IP
- MP1
- SE1 WIRED
- SE1 WIRELESS
To make the changed set value effective, the set value needs to be enabled (setting
executed) respectively for the SE, MP and MC.
1200_700163E.ai
CAUTION
When changing the network addresses, input all of the addresses to be changed
via the " Inputting the IP addresses" following the next sections. Enable the
set value in the order of the SE, MP and MC to make them effective.
 INSTRUCTION 
access point (AP) must be changed to include the same segment No. If the network
address of the access point differs, wireless connection of the SE cannot be made.
REFERENCE
The GNC board has the same function as the MP.
018-241-04E
AppxIN5-2
(2) Click [MC ETH1/MP>>] and input the MC/MP network address, then (3) Click the target SE, input the SE network address and click [SET].
click [SET]. #1 Click: Target SE
#1 Click: [MC ETH1/MP>>] #2 Input: SE network address
#2 Input: MC/MP network address #3 Click: [SET]
#3 Click: [SET] Local Network PreSetting>>window
Local Network PreSetting >> window
#1
#1 SE1-5>>window
MC ETH1/MP>>window
#2
#2
#3
1200_700164E.ai #3
1200_700166E.ai
(4) Click [BACK] to return to the NETWORK SETTING window.
018-241-02E
AppxIN5-3
 Enabling the set value (4) Check that the set value is effective.
The IP addresses of the SE and the MC are rewritten, and the IP addresses are
Enable the network address input in the Local Network PreSetting>> window.
reflected after restarting the SE and the MC.
 NOTE 
CAUTION
Restart only the SE in this procedure.
Enable the set value in the order of the SE, MP and MC to make them effective.
If a wrong order is taken, the setting does not get effective, and might result in #1 Check: OK indication
need of initializing the machine. SE Network Setting>>window <Display example>
<Enabling the set value (SE)>

 INSTRUCTION 
Connect only one SE when enabling the set value (SE). Otherwise, the SE whose IP
address is changed cannot be identified, and might result in need of initializing the SE.
#1
(1) Click [SE Network Setting >>] on the NETWORK SETTING window.
The SE Network Setting >> window appears.
1200_700167E.ai
(3) Click [OK].

(5) Click [BACK] to return to the NETWORK SETTING window.
(6) Remove the battery pack from the SE.
(7) Disconnect the SE cable from the SE.
(8) If an unspecified SE exists, repeat procedures (1) to (7).
(9) Connect the SE cable to the specified SE and reinstall the battery pack
on the specified SE.
018-241-02E
AppxIN5-4
<Enabling set value (MP)> <Enabling set value (MC)>
(1) Click [MP Network Setting >>] on the NETWORK SETTING window. (1) Click [Update Network Setting (MC ETH1)] on the NETWORK SETTING
The MP Network Setting window >> appears. window.
(2) Click [MP1 Network Setting >>] on the MP Network Setting window >>.
The MP1 Network Setting >> window appears. (2) Click [OK].
(3) Click [Setting for MP1]. (3) Check that the set value is effective.
The confirmation dialogue box of “Are you sure?” appears. The IP address of the MC is rewritten, and the IP address is reflected after
restarting the MC.
(4) Click [OK].
(5) Check that the set value is effective. Update Network Setting
The IP address of the MP is rewritten, and the IP address is reflected after (MC ETH1) <Display example>
restarting the MP.
MP Network Setting>>window <Display example>
#1
#1
1200_700169E.ai

1200_700168E.ai
(6) Click [BACK] to return to the MP Network Setting >> window.  NOTE 
(7) Click [BACK] to return to the NETWORK SETTING window. click the MC Manager from the task tray and execute "EXIT". Check that the MC
(8) Turn OFF the power of the MP, and then turn it ON again. Manager icon has disappeared from the task tray, and then start the MC Manager
 NOTE 
018-241-02E
AppxIN5-5
<Restarting the machine and checking the setting effected>
(1) Turn OFF the power in the order named of the CL, MC and MP.
 NOTE 
click the MC Manager from the task tray and execute "EXIT".
 NOTE 
In case of the configuration installing the MC application in the DX Console,
check that the MC Manager icon has disappeared from the task tray, and then
start the MC Manager from "Start menu" → "Start-up".

(4) Click [NETWORK SETTING], [SE Network Setting >>] and the target SE
button.
Check that the IP address of the SE has been changed.
018-241-02E
AppxIN5-6
2. MC ETH0 IP Setting >> (2) Input the network address values, and click [SET].
#1 Input: Set value
#2 Click: [SET]
 Inputting the IP addresses MC ETH0 IP Setting>>window
Input the following IP address.
- MC IP Address (Default value: 172.16.1.10)
- FTP IP Address (Default value: 172.16.1.20)
The set value gets effective by clicking [Update Network Setting (MC ETH0)] on the
“NETWORK SETTING” window. That is, by just clicking [SET], the input value does #1
not get effective.
(1) Click [NETWORK SETTING], and click [MC ETH0 IP Setting >>].
#1 Click: [NETWORK SETTING]
#2 Click: [MC ETH0 IP Setting >>]
#2
#1 1200_700171E.ai
 Enabling the set value

Enable the network address input in the MC ETH0 IP Setting >> window.
#2 (1) Click [Update Network Setting (MC ETH0)] on the NETWORK SETTING
window.
(2) Click [OK].
(3) Check that the network address input in the MC ETH0 IP Setting >>
1200_700170E.ai
window gets effective.
 NOTE 
018-241-02E
AppxIN5-7
3. Changing Folder Name
 INSTRUCTION 
Perform the following procedure only when installing the MC application in the MC and
when the MC ETH0 address has been set to "192.168.0.xx".
(1) Change the folder name of the IP address under C:\Program Files\
FujiFilm\FCR\DR-ID1200\SYSTEM to that of the current IP address of
the MC.
Ex: Change the folder name "172.16.1.10" to "192.168.0.53".
(2) Start up the RU PC-TOOL and check the following.
- The IP ADDRESS of RU TYPE for the DR-ID1200 on the RU PC-TOOL is the
modified address.
- It is possible to check that the SE and MP are connected.
(3) Check that the network address input in the MC ETH0 IP Setting >>
window gets effective.
 NOTE 
018-241-03E
AppxIN5-8
BLANK PAGE
018-241-02E
AppxIN6-1
Appendix 6. Attaching the Optional 2. Attaching Wet Tissue Holder
Items (1) Peel off the stickers (x3) on the top right of the rear cover blinders.
Attach the optional items to the DR-XD 1000.
1. Attaching Accessory Case

Attach the accessory cases on the top left, bottom left and bottom right of the rear
cover. Here, attaching the bottom right of the rear cover is used as an illustration.
(1) Peel off the stickers (x2) on the rear cover blinders.
(1)
POCX01070F002.ai
(2) Attach the wet tissue holder.
(2)
(2) Attach the accessory case.
POCX01070F001.ai
018-241-04E
AppxIN6-2
3. Attaching the Additional Filter 4. Attaching the High Type Handle
(1) Attach the additional filter on the DAP/filter rail. Screws

#1 Attach the additional filter on the topside of the DAP/filter rail.
Symbol in the
figure
Hexagonal socket
hexagon 3 mm Q4x8 304S3180408 8
head bolt (Q4x8)
Extra low head
Extra low head
hexagonal socket hexagon 3 mm 304S0054 8
6x12
head screw
Removal procedures

(1) Remove the rear cover.
(2) Remove the screws which secure the knob’s top ring.
POCX01070F005.ai
(2) Check that the panel section’s lamps are lit up.
Q4x8 (x8)
POCX01070F007.ai
POCX01070F006.ai
018-241-04E
AppxIN6-3
(3) Remove the screws which secure the handle. (5) Attach the high type handle.
Reinstall the reverse procedure of (1) - (4).
Extra low
head
6×12 (×8)
POCX01070F008.ai
(4) Remove the handle. POCX01070F010.ai
POCX01070F009.ai
018-241-04E
AppxIN6-4
5. Attaching the Apron Hanger (3) Fix the apron hanger.
#1 Attach the apron hanger.
Screws

Symbol in the
figure
Hexagonal socket
hexagon 3 mm Q4x6 304S3180406 4
head bolt
Removal procedures
 #2
#1 Q4×6 (x4)
(1) Remove the cap on the arm section.
POCX01070F013.ai
(4) Attach the apron blinder.
POCX01070F011.ai
(2) Peel off the Dual Lock tape.
POCX01070F014.ai
(2)
POCX01070F012.ai
018-241-04E
AppxIN7-1
Appendix 7. Installing the Irradiation Removal procedures

Dose Correction Kit (1) Remove the following components.

Attach the irradiation dose correction aluminum plates to the DR-XD 1000. $ {MC:7.2_Bottom Cover of Mono-tank}
 NOTE  $ {MC:7.4_Mono-tank Bottom Bracket}
This is a jig which reduces the irradiation dose in order to comply with specific
countries where there are regulations that pertain to the size of the irradiation dose. (2) Remove the collimator assembly.
#1 Loosen the screws.
Number of additional aluminum filter plates
 #3 Remove the connector.
Refer to the description in the inspection sheet attached this product, decide the #4 Remove the collimator assembly.
number of additional aluminum filter plates
Country Criteria (X-ray Output) [μGy/mAs]
FUJIFILM RADIATION OUTPUT 30 or more, 26 or more,
Group Result [μGy/mAs] and less than 65 and less than 69
(Spain etc.) (UK etc.)
A Less than 65 None None
B 65 to less than 68 1 sheet None
C 68 to less than 73 2 sheets 1 sheet
D 73 to less than 77 3 sheets 2 sheets
E 77 or more 4 sheets 3 sheets
018-241-04E
AppxIN7-2
(3) Tape up the stipulated number of aluminum filter plates with the (4) Attach the collimator assembly.
double-sided tape so that the irradiation aperture of the mono-tank is Reverse the removal procedures for procedure (2).
completely covered up.
#1 Peel off the double-sided tape sticker which is applied to the jig plate.
#2 Attach the aluminum filter plates.
#1
#2
POCX01070G001.ai
 NOTE 
- The thickness of the aluminum filter plates is 0.3 mm. Be careful in handing
them so that they do not get bent, scratched, or dented.
- Grease has been applied to the ring section. If grease is on the aluminum filter
plates, apply ethanol to it with a cloth, and attach them after cleaning them off.
- So that nothing gets into the irradiation aperture, do not tape it over with the
double-sided tape.
- Attach the aluminum filter plates so that the irradiation aperture is completely
covered up.
Irradiation
aperture
Ring section
POCX01070G002.ai
018-241-04E
AppxIN7-3

 Checking for Foreign Material in X-ray Tube
$ {IN1:29.2_Checking for Foreign Material in X-ray Tube}
 Dose check
Execute dose measuring as per the following conditions, and check the dose per mAs.
- Measuring conditions: 80 kV, 10 mAs, SID = 100 cm
In regard to detailed procedures, follow the guidelines for each country.
 Area dose Calibration

When installing the irradiation dose correction kit, perform area dose calibration.
$ {MU:3.15_Area dose Calibration}
When using this option, fill out the number of aluminum filter plates and measuring
dose value in the performance check sheet, and then submit it as the installation
report.
018-241-04E
AppxIN7-4
BLANK PAGE
018-241-04E
AppxIN8-1
Appendix 8. Individual (Figure 1) Maintenance > Checking the board version
Countermeasures at
Installation
In accordance with the machines this contains the individual countermeasures
required st installation.
1. Release of Maintenance Tool Ver.1.4 (ECN-000116)
Released items

Released software (114Y2335704A05)
- SetupPOCX_V14.msi
- SetupPOCXlauncher64_V14.msi
- SetupPOCXMntToolFunc_V14.msi
Target machines

POCX01070H001.ai
Notify the switching unit separately after it turns out.

(Figure 2) Installation > Beep setting
Product

Additional functions and changes provided by DR-XD1000 maintenance software V1.2
are as follows.
No. Subject Outline
[Improvement] The period for log acquisition has been changed
1
Extended period for log acquisition from 15 days to 30 days.
[Improvement] The time needed for backup and restoration
Shortened time for backup and of the GNC board has been changed from 45
2
restoration of the GNC board minutes and 100 minutes to 25 minutes and 25
minutes.
[Additional function] The menu name under “Maintenance” has been
Addition of the POW board version changed from “GNC board version” to “Checking
3 to the board version display the board version”.
The POW board version has been added to the
items displayed (Figure 1).
[Additional function] Under “Installation”, “Beep setting” has been
Addition of the function to set added.
the beep sound heard when the An item has been added to set the beep sound
4
exposure button is pressed heard when the exposure button of DR-XD1000 POCX01070H002.ai
is pressed to the first level. The default setting is
Off. (Figure 2)
[Improvement] Wording in English has been revised entirely.
5
Correction of English
018-241-04E
AppxIN8-2
 Restrictions/precautions
To enable the setting of beep sound heard when the exposure button is pressed,
XCON software V1.1 to be released separately (scheduled in the end of July) is
needed.
 Installation procedure
Uninstall the maintenance tool that has been installed and then install the maintenance
tool Ver.1.4.
$ {AppxMU:1._Installing and Uninstalling the DR-XD 1000 Maintenance Tool}
018-241-04E
AppxIN8-3
2. Release of POW Board Firmware V0012 and Checking the version of the POW board

Firmware Upgrade Procedure (ECN-000128) (1) After starting the device, exit the CSL.
Outline
 (2) Start up the DR-XD 1000 maintenance tool.
In the DR-XD 1000, the POW board may fail when the breaker is rapidly turned off
and on. (3) Select “Board version check”, and confirm that “POW Ver .:” is
To improve the margin of the failure, the POW firmware needs to be upgraded to “0x0012”.
V0012.
When “POW Ver.:” is “0x0012”, the version of the POW board is the latest and there
This section releases the firmware upgrade procedure. is no need to perform this work.
Target machines

#67150025 - #76550161, #76550163
Product

 Precautions
- If the version upgrading steps are incorrect, then the POW board might malfunction.
Prepare the POW board service parts kit (898Y200509), and update.
- The jig cable 136Y200542 (provided with ECN) is required for the upgrade.
- The POW board may fail when starting DR-XD 1000 by the battery drive force with
the jig cable 136Y200542 connected. When performing this upgrade work, the AC
cable must be connected at the time of turning on the power.
In case of failure, replace the POW board with the new one (113Y120293D or later)
as the power cannot be turned on even if the main breaker is turned on.
POCX01070H001.ai
 Preparations
- Download “Flash Development Toolkit V.4.09 Release 03” (File name: fdt_4_09_03.
exe) from the following URL beforehand.
https://www.renesas.com/en-us/software/D3017334.html
- To check the version of the POW board, the version of the maintenance tool must
be upgraded to V1.4 or later. The maintenance tool V1.4 is released in ECN-000116.
018-241-04E
AppxIN8-4
Checking for a failure of the POW board
 Upgrade procedure

(1) Remove the covers of the POW board so that the POW board is (1) Terminate DR-ID 300CL and switch OFF the main breaker and main
accessible. key.
$ {MC:3.4_POW Board}
(2) Remove the shield plate of the GNC board.
(2) Measure the resistance value between the lower side of F3 and the left $ {MC:3.7_GNC Board}
side of D59 (circled in red below) of the POW board mounted on the
device and check that the value is 10kΩ or more.
(3) Remove the cable connected to the connector J2.
If the value is less than 10kΩ, the POW board has failed and needs to be replaced #1 Remove the cable.
with the prepared POW board (898Y200509) according to Service Manual. If the
value is 10kΩ or more, perform the upgrade according to the procedure below.
#1
POCX01070H003.ai
POCX01070H004.ai
 NOTE 
Since the removed cable needs to be reattached after the POW board version is
upgraded, do not lose it.
018-241-04E
AppxIN8-5
(4) Connect the jig cable (136Y200542) to the J3 connector.  Installing the updating tool
#1 Connect the jig cable (136Y200542).
(1) Double-click “fdt_4_09_03.exe”.
(2) Click [OK].
POCX01070H006.ai
“IIP Service Utility” window opens.
(3) Click [Next].

#1
POCX01070H005.ai
 NOTE 
Do not insert the harness inserted into the J2 connector into J3 connector.
(5) Make sure that the main breaker is turned off and then connect the AC
cable.
POCX01070H007.ai
 NOTE 
- While the jig cable is connected, make sure to always turn on the power with
the AC cable connected.
- Make sure to perform this work while the main breaker is turned off.
(6) Turn ON the key switch and start the PC.

 NOTE 
ERR100 (POW communication error) is displayed. This error can be ignored
because it is caused by the cable inserted into the connector J3 and there is no
problem.
(7) Terminate the CSL and display the Windows screen.
018-241-04E
AppxIN8-6
(4) Select “International (English)” and click [Next]. (6) Click [Next].
POCX01070H008.ai POCX01070H010.ai
(5) Select “I accept …” and click [Next]. (7) Click [Next].
POCX01070H009.ai POCX01070H011.ai
018-241-04E
AppxIN8-7
(8) Click [Next]. (10) Click [Install].
POCX01070H014.ai

POCX01070H012.ai
(9) Click [Install].
POCX01070H015.ai
POCX01070H013.ai
018-241-04E
AppxIN8-8
 Installing the flash development tool kit (4) Select “COM33” for “Select port” and click [Next].
#1 Select: COM33
(1) Click [Start Menu] - [All Programs] - [Renesas] - [Flash Development #2 Click: [Next]
Toolkit 4.09 Basic].
Start the tool for starting the upgrade.
(2) When the “Choose Device And Kernel” window is opened, enter
“R5F21238” in the space next to “Filter”.
#1
#2
POCX01070H018.ai
(5) Remove the checkmark from “Use Default” and select “19200” for
“Recommended Speeds:” and then Click [Next].
POCX01070H017.ai
#1 Remove the checkmark: Use Default
Select: “19200” for “Recommended Speeds:”
(3) Select “R5F21238” and click [Next]. #2 Click: [Next]
#1 Select: R5F21238
#2 Click: [Next]
#1
#1
#2
POCX01070H019.ai
#2
POCX01070H016.ai
018-241-04E
AppxIN8-9
(6) Make the following settings and click [Finish]. (8) Select the distributed firmware “POWFW_0012.mot” and click [Open].
#1 Select: Automatic
#2 Select: Advanced (9) Click [Program Flash].
#3 Select: Yes
The upgrade starts.
#4 Click: [Finish]
#1
#2
#3
#4
POCX01070H020.ai
(7) Place a checkmark to “User / Data Area” and click .
POCX01070H023.ai
POCX01070H021.ai
“Open File” window opens.
018-241-04E
AppxIN8-10
(10) When “Verification OK” is displayed, click [Disconnect] and then click (13) Remove the jig cable from the J3 connector.
[Exit] to close the tool.
POCX01070H025.ai
(14) Connect the cable (136Y200113) that was connected before the
removal to the J2 connector.
POCX01070H024.ai
(12) Remove the AC cable and turn off the device.
POCX01070H026.ai
018-241-04E
AppxIN8-11
(15) Connect the AC cable and activate the security key switch to start up Checking the operation after upgrade

the PC.
 NOTE 
(16) Terminate the CSL application to display the Windows screen and Before checking the operation, make sure to confirm that the jig cable is removed.
start the maintenance tool.
 NOTE  (1) Without connecting the AC cable, turn on the breaker and then turn on
the device.
The version of the maintenance tool must be V14 or later.
 NOTE 
If the device is not turned on even with a fully charged battery, the POW board
(17) Select “Board version check” and confirm that “POW Ver.:” is may have failed. In that case, check whether the jig cable has been removed and
“0x0012”. other harnesses are not pulled out, and then replace the POW board with the
new one (113Y120293D or later).
(2) Activate the security key switch and confirm that no error occurs in
the 7-segment display of the XCON operation panel.
(3) When the console is started, confirm that the XCON icon shows the
connecting state (as the icon marked with the square in the figure
below).
POCX01070H001.ai
POCX01070H027.ai
(18) Click [Start Menu] - [Control Panel] - [Programs and Features].  NOTE 
If an error occurs in (2) or no connecting state is shown in (3), the cable
(19) Select “Renesas Flash Development Toolkit (v4.09)” from the program reconnected in the step (3) may not be inserted successfully.
list and click [Uninstall].
(4) After checking the operation, reinstall the covers of the device.
(20) Follow the instructions to uninstall the program.  NOTE 
If the covers are open due to other tasks, attach the covers after all of the tasks
(21) Shut down the PC and remove the AC cable. are completed.
018-241-04E
AppxIN8-12
3. Release of BIOS Upgrade Procedure for Correcting Upgrade procedure

PC Time Error (ECN-000126)  Upgrade
(1) Turn ON the main breaker of DR-XD 1000 and connect the AC cable.
Outline

In the DR-XD 1000, a PC time error has occurred resulting in 1 hour early on the first
Sunday of April and 1 hour slow on the last Sunday of October. Since BIOS needs to (2) Activate the security key and turn on the PC.
be upgraded to address this issue, this section releases the BIOS upgrade procedure.
(3) Terminate the 300CL application to return to the normal Windows
screen.
Target machines

#67150025 - #76550171
(4) Copy “5822LA-6.zip” on the desktop and extract.
(5) Click “FlashRom.bat” to start the upgrade.

 NOTE 
- When the upgrade process starts, a command prompt window is displayed.
Upon completion of the upgrade, the PC automatically restarts.
- Never turn off the main breaker during the upgrade process.
018-241-04E
AppxIN8-13
 Checking procedure after the upgrade (4) Select “Discard Changes and Reset” and press the <Enter> key. Select
“Yes” and press the <Enter> key.
(1) Connect the keyboard and then start the PC while pressing the
<Delete> key.
BIOS window opens.
(2) Check that “BIOS Revision” is “5822LA-6” in the “Main” tab.
POCX01070H030.ai
Windows starts.
(5) Check that the CSL starts without any problem.

POCX01070H029.ai
(3) Select the “Save & Exit” tab using the <←> <→> keys.
018-241-04E
AppxIN8-14
4. Prevention of Loading Error of 10 x 12 Inch/24 x 30 cm Product

SE into DR Slot (ECN-000132)  Things to be prepared
- Cassette Approaching Label - SE Connector Label
Outline
 (405N201401) (405N201402)
In the DR-XD 1000, to call better attention of users, the labels need to be added to
describe the front/back and left-aligned position of the SE, the position of the charging
connector or the edge position of the small size SE. This section provides the
attachment procedure of the labels.
Also, Operation Manual needs to be replaced due to addition of the labels and the
procedure to check the loading of the SE into the DR Slot.
- SE Cassette Variation Label

Target machines
 (405N201403A)
#67150025 - #76750198
- DR-XD 1000 Operation Manual

(897N200038D)
POCX01070H031.ai
018-241-04E
AppxIN8-15
 Procedure to attach additional labels (3) In the facilities which possess the DR-ID 1213SE/1214SE, visually
center them appropriately in accordance with their sizes so that they
(1) Clean the application spots on the front cover and the DR slot are on the edges of the SE as per the following diagram, and apply the
assembly front cover with a cloth that has ethanol, etc. applied to it. SE cassette variation label so that it fits in the white lines.
#1 Peel off 405N200739 and clean it. #1 Attach the SE cassette variation label.
#2 Peel off SE shock absorber (short) (364N200010) and clean it.
#3 Clean the flat upper part of the DR slot front cover.
#3
#2
#1
#1
POCX01070H034.ai
POCX01070H032.ai
 Checking procedure
Load the SE left-aligned and straight while paying attention to the front and back sides
according to the procedure described in “3.10 Storing and Charging the Flat Panel
(2) Attach the cassette approaching label and SE connector label.
Sensor” of Operation Manual.
#1 Attach the cassette approaching label. After loading the SE, make sure that a buzzer sounds like “beep” and the battery life
#2 Attach the SE connector label. indicator of the panel starts flashing.
#1
#2
#2
#1
POCX01070H033.ai
018-241-04E
AppxIN8-16
5. Checking Tightness of Mono-tank Fixing Screws (3) Check the tightness of the following screws (x6) and tighten it if
loosened.
(ECN-000131)
Outline

In the DR-XD 1000, it has been found that poor tightening of the screws fixing
the mono-tank unit generates looseness of the unit, causing failure in making an
exposure.
This section describes the procedure to check and manage the tightness of the
screws to prevent failure in making an exposure.
Target machines

67250043, 67250044, 67250045, 67250046, 67250047, 67250048, 67250049,
76150051, 76150056, 76150057, 76150058, 76150059, 76150060, 76150061,
76150062, 76250083, 76250084, 76250085, 76250088, 76250089, 76250092,
76250094, 76250100, 76250101, 76350112, 76350122, 76350123, 76350124
POCX01070H035.ai
Product
 (4) Replace and attach the head arm reinforcement plate (346N130052) on
In accordance with these confirmation steps, check the tightened state of the screws/ to new products.
implement measures.  NOTE 
(1) Turn off the power of the device. Reuse the screws mounted on the device.

$ {MC:7.5_Right Cover of Mono-tank Retention Arm} (5) Replace and attach the mono-tank retainer arm side cover (350Y200068)
$ {MC:7.6_Left Cover of Mono-tank Retention Arm} on to new products.
 NOTE 
Reuse the screws mounted on the device.
018-241-04E
AppxIN8-17
6. Checking Tightness of Main Switch Fixing Nut (3) Remove the screws on the top cover side.
(ECN-000125) #2 Remove the screw on the back side of the top cover.
#3 Remove the screw on the front side of the top cover.
Outline
 REFERENCE
In the DR-XD 1000, it has been found that poor tightening of the nut fixing the main Remove the screws, but the top side cover itself does not need to be removed.
switch may generate looseness of the switch. This section provides the procedure to
check and manage the tightness of the nut to prevent looseness of the switch.
Target machines

67150025, 67150026, 67250027, 67250028, 67250029, 67250043, 67250045,
67250046
Product

(1) Turn OFF the power of the device.

018-241-04E
AppxIN8-18
(4) Lift the top cover at the right corner of the front surface to check the If a gap is not generated, perform #2.
tightness of the main switch fixing nut.
POCX01070H036.ai
#1 Check if a gap is generated between the bracket and the fixing nut.
If a gap is generated, tightening is necessary, perform step (5).
POCX01070H038.ai
#2 Check if looseness is generated in the fixing nut with the hands.

If looseness is generated, tightening is necessary, perform step (5).
If looseness is not generated, perform step (6).
POCX01070H037.ai
POCX01070H039.ai
(5) Refer to the following, tighten the main switch fixing nut.
$ {MC:2.26_Main Key Assembly}
(6) Attach the cover which was removed.

Perform the reverse procedure of steps (3) and (2).
018-241-04E
AppxIN8-19
7. Checking the Position of Tape in the DR Slot (ECN- Product

000127) (1) Turn OFF the power of the device.
Outline
 (2) Open the shutter.
This section explains the procedure to determine whether the DR-XD 1000 has a #1 Pull the DR to the front.
battery charge failure.
Perform the procedure in this section to determine whether the device falls into
Category I or II. For the device determined as unacceptable, replace the DR slot.
Target machines

67150025, 67150026, 67250027, 67250028, 67250029, 67250043, 67250044,
67250045, 67250046, 67250047, 67250048, 67250049, 76150051, 76150056,
76150057, 76150058, 76150059, 76150060, 76150061, 76150062, 76250083,
76250084, 76250085, 76250086, 76250087, 76250088,76250089, 76250090,
76250091, 76250092, 76250093, 76250094, 76250095, 76250096, 76250098,
76250099, 76250100, 76250101, 76250102, 76250103, 76250104, 76250105, POCX01070H040.ai
76250106,76250107, 776350108, 76350109, 76350110

#2 Open the shutter on the top of DR slot while pressing it.
POCX01070H041.ai
018-241-04E
AppxIN8-20
(3) <Judgment I> See the inside of DR slot to check the position of black (4) <Judgment II> Press down the plate spring (marked with the green
tape marked with the red circle in the photo below. arrow) in the DR slot by using a pointed tool such as screwdriver.
Check whether the spring comes into contact with the edge of tape or
metal plate.
POCX01070H042.ai
If the black tape is placed over the opening of the metal plate beyond the plate edge
(pink line in the photo below): Reject. Go to step (4).
POCX01070H045.ai
POCX01070H044.ai
If there is no contact: Passed. The following steps are not needed. Charging the
If the black tape does not protrude, and the plate edges are visible: Passed. The battery is feasible.
following steps are not needed. Charging the battery is feasible. If contact can be visually confirmed, or it feels like it is catching due to contact
when it is pressed: Reject. Go to step (5).
 NOTE 
- Do not press the plate spring so that its top is lower than the height of the metal
plate or tape. Otherwise, the spring may be deformed.
- Do not hit the screwdriver or other tools against the charging terminal (in the
blue frame). Do not bend the terminal.
POCX01070H043.ai
(5) If it rejected in the step (4), replace the DR slot with reference to the
following.
(6) After the replacement, start the device to make sure that the SE can be
charged.
018-241-04E
AppxIN8-21
8. Checking the Loosening of the PC Power Cable (3) When the screw moves, rotate it to secure and perform step (2) again.
Secure the screw until it does not move.
(ECN-000133)
Outline

There were cases where the PC power cable on the DR-XD 1000 was loosened
gradually during the operation because of insufficient securing at the time of
installation. For such a cable, a connection failure occurred due to vibration during
transportation, causing the PC to be turned off.
By performing the procedure in this section at the time of installation or periodical visit,
make sure that the applicable part is secured.
POCX01070H047.ai
Target machines

#67150025 - #76750199 (4) Refer to the following, attach the connector cover.
$ {IN1:14._Installing the Monitor}
Product

(1) Refer to the following, remove the connector cover.
$ {IN1:14._Installing the Monitor}
(2) Hold the power cable. Swing the cable to the right and left five times
or more as shown in the photo to make sure that the screw does not
move.
POCX01070H046.ai
018-241-04E
AppxIN8-22
9. Replacing the GNC Board
(10753 Error countermeasure) (ECN-xxxxxx)
Outline

In regard to cases whereas 10753 errors were being generated while the DR-XD 1000
was being used, it has been ascertained that problems have been discovered in the
MP power source for GNC67A boards so MC-MP line disconnecting is occurring.
In relation to the aforementioned problems, since this has been replaced with the
permanent countermeasures version GNC board H version, this is explained in these
steps.
Target machines

67150025, 67150026, 67250027, 67250028, 67250029, 67250043, 67250045,
67250046
Product

Replace the GNC board (113Y120290) of the target machines.
$ {MC:3.7_GNC Board}
REFERENCE
For the DR-XD 1000, the MP functions which are used via the DR-ID 1200 etc., are
mounted on the GNC67A board. If the communications between the MC and GNC67A
board are severed, then 10753 errors are generated.
018-241-04E
AppxIN8-23
10. Updating the Demo Machine’s Board (ECN-xxxxxx)  INV67A board
Replace the INV board.
$ {MC:3.6_INV Board}
Outline

Since the POW board was malfunctioning due to inrush currents at the start of battery After replacement, perform filament calibration.
charging, problems whereas charging could no longer be facilitated were being $ {MU:3.10_Adjusting the Filament Preheating Voltage}
generated, so in accordance with these steps, replace the boards.
 NOTE 
- POW67A board - After the INV67A board is replaced, promptly return it to quality assurance.
Since the POW board was malfunctioning due to inrush currents at the start of - Just the INV67A boards with blue painted screws are not moisture-proof treated.
battery charging, problems whereas charging could no longer be facilitated were Those which are moisture-proof treated have red painted screws added to them.
discovered (just the demo machines), so replace the POW board (C versions or - Since the C versions are distinguished in the red encircled sections in the following
later). In regard to machines which are already replaced with the C versions or later, it is clear which boards already have moisture-proofing applied to them, so confirm
if replaced with a C version, then upgrade the firmware version. For D versions, this them before installing them.
is not required.
- INV67A board
Replace with the INV board C versions (moisture-proofing already applied).
(just the demo machines)
Target machines

The machines with the last two digits are the devices as per the following.
POW67A board: 01-10, 12, 13 (Total 12 units)
INV67A board: 02, 04-13 (Total 11 units)
POCX01070H048.ai
Product

 POW67A board
Replace the POW board.
$ {MC:3.4_POW Board}
After replacing, confirm that the AC cable is connected and that battery charging is
being facilitated by the flashing battery LED.
 NOTE 
- If replaced with a POW board C version, upgrade the firmware version as per the
following after having replaced the board.
$ {MU:3.9_Checking the Board Version}
- In regard to machines which have already been replaced with C versions or later, if
the replaced board is C version, upgrade the firmware version. If the replaced board
is D version, this task is not required.
018-241-04E
AppxIN8-24
11. Checking the Tightening of the Front Wheel Casters (3) Jack up the caster on the opposite side of the X-ray carts locking
function caster.
(ECN-000183)
Outline

It has been found that the nuts used for the front wheels of the DR-XD 1000 may be
loosened due to tightening failure, causing the casters to be removed.
This section explains the procedure to check and correct the tightening of the nuts in
order to prevent the failure.
Target machines

67150025, 67150026, 67250027, 67250028, 67250029, 67250043, 67250045,
67250046
POCX01070H050.ai
Product

(4) Remove the two retaining seals.
 Check rotation angle
(1) Turn OFF the power of the device.
(2) Step on the caster lock pedal to lock the casters.
POCX01070H051.ai
POCX01070H049.ai
018-241-04E
AppxIN8-25
(5) Fit hexagonal wrenches onto the bolt and the nut and rotate the bolt (3) Tighten the nut.
in the direction of tightening. Check the rotation angle (for the left and
right sides).
POCX01070H054.ai
POCX01070H052.ai
- If the rotation angle is within 0 to 45°, perform “ Installation”. (4) Check the movement of the caster.
- If the rotation angle is larger than 45°, perform “ Fault response”.
 Fault response
(1) Fit the hexagonal wrenches onto the upper and lower side bolts
securing the caster and remove the nut at the lower side.
346N120202 Stopper
After the installation, check the following:
• S mooth rotation of the wheel
• Up and down movement of 346N120202
• Fixation of the stopper
POCX01070H055.ai
Then perform “ Installation”.
POCX01070H053.ai
(2) Apply screw lock coatings (Three Bond 1401B) to the nut.
018-241-04E
AppxIN8-26
 Installation
(1) Release the caster on the opposite side of the X-ray carts locking
function caster from the jack.
(2) Remove the two retaining seals.

 NOTE 
Apply the seals along the shapes marked on the base frame.
POCX01070H056.ai
018-241-04E
AppxIN8-27
BLANK PAGE
018-241-04E
AppxIN8-28
BLANK PAGE
018-241-04E
AppxIN9-1
Appendix 9. Nothing
018-241-04E
AppxIN9-2
BLANK PAGE
018-241-04E
AppxIN9-3
BLANK PAGE
018-241-04E
AppxIN9-4
BLANK PAGE
018-241-04E
AppxIN10-1
Appendix 10. Carry Cart 1.3 Unpacking the Carry Cart
CAUTION
1. Transfer and Unpacking Perform the following unpacking procedures securely.
The machine may get damaged if not performed.
(1) Remove the cardboard box.
CAUTION #1 Remove the joints.
#2 Remove the cardboard box.
Before unloading the machine, secure a proper machine transfer route.
 INSTRUCTION  #1
Fully leave the machine with the plastic cover put on in the room. If the cover is put
condensation.
#2

CAUTION
If the machine is to be transferred over uneven floor, slowly move the machine POCX01070J001.ai
approx. 10 mm. (2) Cut the PP bands.
#1
POCX01070J002.ai
018-241-04E
AppxIN10-2
(3) Remove the accessories. #2 Attach the DR slot buffering members.
#1 Remove the pad for the bulb.
#2
POCX01070J007.ai
POCX01070J011.ai
#2 Remove the other accessories.

#3 Secure with the DR slot buffering members securing Velcro.
(4) Attach the DR slot buffering members.

#1 Attach the DR slot buffering members securing Velcro.
#3
#1
POCX01070J012.ai
(5) Lower the carry cart down from the pallet.

POCX01070J010.ai
018-241-04E
AppxIN10-3
2. Checking the Packing Contents
Item Parts number Image Qty.
Handle securing belt 316N200015A 2

POCX01070J003.ai
Monitor securing belt 382N200070 2

POCX01070J004.ai
Hand switch securing belt 382N200071 1

POCX01070J005.ai
DR slot buffering members

382N200085 2
securing Velcro
POCX01070J008.ai
DR slot buffering members 386N200057B 1

POCX01070J009.ai
DR-XD 1000 arm head

386N200067 1
buffering members
POCX01070J006.ai
Manual 897N200882 1
018-241-04E
AppxIN10-4
BLANK PAGE
018-241-04E
AppxIN11-1
Appendix 11. Installing the NFC Card  NOTE 
Since the removed cable needs to be reattached after the POW board version is
Reader for Contactless IC upgraded, do not lose it.
Cards
- surface fastener tape
SJ-3550J (3M) or SJ-3560 (3M)
- Cable clamp
Install the NFC card reader in the DR-XD 1000. DKN-20GSP4.0 (Takeuchi Kogyo)
- The specifications of the cable clamp are as follows.
1. Locally Procured Item - Use one with the double-sided tape (thickness of 1.1 mm or less).
- The presence or absence of a sponge is unnecessary
- The dimensions are as per the following. (Unit: mm)
NFC card reader side surface
fastener tapes Bundle wire
(with double-sided tape) A B C D (E) (F) (G) (H)
diameter (Φ)
Short: 25 mm x 12.5mm
Long: 40 mm x 12.5mm 12.0 - 17.0 30.0 40.0 4.1 18.0 46.1 7 - 21.5*1 29.4 7 - 11.5*2
POCX01070K001.ai
*1 Without the sponges

*2 With the sponges
Cart side surface fastener
tapes (with double-sided tape)
40 mm x 12.5mm (x2)
POCX01070K002.ai
Cable clamp
POCX01070K003.ai
Double sided
adhesive tape
POCX01070K022.ai
- When using both the NFC card reader and the magnetic card reader, use the
NFC card reader magnetic card reader cable clamps.
- IC card reader
Sony-made IC card reader (RC-S380/S)
- The IC card reader subject card formats are as per the following.
Felica Standard / Felica Lite-S
POCX01070K004.ai
Mifare Ultralight / Mifare Standard 1K / Mifare Standard 4K / Mifare PLUS 4K

/Mifare DESFire 8K
018-241-05E
AppxIN11-2
2. Attaching the NFC Card Reader (2) In accordance with the surface fastener tape which was applied in
step (1), attach the surface fastener tape onto the cart’s side.
(1) Apply the NFC card reader side surface fastener tape to the back of #1 In accordance with the surface fastener tape which was applied in step (1),
the NFC card reader. attach the surface fastener tape onto the cart’s side.
#1 Peel off the surface fastener tape (short) seal, and apply it on the top.
#2 Peel off the surface fastener tape (long) seal, and apply it on the bottom.
#1
#1
#2
POCX01070K007.ai
(3) Apply the NFC card reader onto the top cover of the cart.
#1 Peel off the seal of the surface fastener tape on the cart side.
POCX01070K005.ai
 INSTRUCTION 
Align the lower surface fastener tape with the red line as per the following photo,
and visually center the right and left and apply it.
#1
POCX01070K007.ai
POCX01070K006.ai
018-241-05E
AppxIN11-3
#2 Apply the NFC card reader onto the top cover of the cart. (4) Remove the rear cover.
 INSTRUCTION  REFERENCE
In order to avoid loading the USB connector, apply the NFC card reader onto the Refer to the following for the removal procedures.
following position on the top cover of the cart. $ {MC:2.1_Front Cover}
- Visually center the right and left in the depression $ {MC:2.2_Rear Cover}
- The front and rear positions are 25 mm to 28 mm from the end of the top cover
If the NFC card reader is applied beyond the range of 25 mm to 28 mm from
the end of the top cover, a load is applied to the USB connector’s base via the (5) Attach the cable clamp to the rear of the cart.
unevenness, and the connector part might get damaged. #1 Attach the cable clamp on the top and bottom along the top side of the plate,
and visually center the right and left and apply it.
#2
25 - 28 mm
#1
POCX01070K008.ai
 NOTE 
When using both the NFC card reader and the magnetic card reader, apply the POCX01070K010.ai
magnetic card reader onto the following position.
Magnetic card reader
NFC card reader

POCX01070K009.ai
018-241-05E
AppxIN11-4
(6) Wiring the cable of the NFC card reader. #2 Wrap the cable’s extra length around the cable clamp.
#1 Wiring the cable.
#2
POCX01070K012.ai
#1  NOTE 
When using both the NFC card reader and the magnetic card reader, arrange the
POCX01070K011.ai
cables as per the following.
POCX01070K023.ai
018-241-05E
AppxIN11-5
#3 Insert the cable into the USB connector. (7) Attach the rear cover.
 INSTRUCTION 
Pass the USB connector side’s cable through the slot in the right side cover.
● USB connector side
#3
POCX01070K013.ai
POCX01070K014.ai
The INV board cable should pass through the following clearance.
● INV board side
POCX01070K024.ai
REFERENCE
Refer to the following for the reinstallation procedures.
018-241-05E
AppxIN11-6
3. Radiographer Login via Contactless IC (6) If [FUJIFILM] exists in the taskbar, select “End” from the right-click
menu.
Card
 NOTE 
 NOTE  For integrated MC configuration, perform the following procedures.
- This item is quoted from the DR-ID 300CL Service Manual. 1. When “MCManager” exists on the task bar, click the task and select [Exit].
- In order to implement this item, the DR-ID 300CL V11 or later is required. 2. Proceed to step (7) after waiting for about 30 seconds.
To reduce the logging in work and enhance the security, the radiographer login
function via IC card is provided. (7) After waiting for about 5 seconds, start up the task manager, and exit
the following processes if they are being activated.
 NOTE 
- CooperManager.exe
- The IC card which is altered every time its ID is used for individual identifi cation is - RemoteLoginChecker.exe
read, is not supported. - PPSMonitor.exe (Only when using mobile PC and PPS Cache server)
- In the following cases, support for IC card operation is not covered. - SKBLaucher.exe (Only when using mobile PC)
- Special account such as FFService/Guest/VIP.
- Reading of the IC card when several are stacked together (8) “NFC Port Driver For RC-S380S” (114Y2150818BXX) into the PC.
- More than one IC card read have been connected simultaneously on one
console. (9) Open the Explorer, right-click “NFCPortWithDriver.exe”, and select
- Supported with Windows 7 or later. “Run as administrator”.
3.1 Setting Procedure of IC Card Reader (RC-S380/S)

made by Sony
Use the IC card reader (RC-S380/S) made by Sony, and install the NFC port software.
(2) Check that there is no queue left in output queue.

- If a queue is left in the output queue, either wait for the output, or delete the  NOTE 
output queue and clear it. Confirm that the IC card reader is not connected with PC, and then install the
NFC port software.
The “NFC Port Software Setup” window opens.
(4) Restart the PC, and start up the Service Utility.

018-241-05E
AppxIN11-7
(10) Click [Next]. (12) Click [Next].
The “License Agreement” window opens.

The “Installshield Wizard Complete” window opens.
(11) Select “I accept the tems of the license agreement” and click [Next].
The “Start Copying Files” window opens.
(15) Connect the IC card reader to the PC.
018-241-05E
AppxIN11-8
(16) Press <Windows> + <R> to open the Run window, enter “Control” and
click [OK].
(17) Click .
The NFC Port/PaSoRi window opens.
(18) Select “External” tab, set the following items and click [OK].
 NOTE 
After setting, restart the PC when it is requested.
● For Windows 7
- “Category” - “PC/SC Enable”
- “Polling Interval” - “Hi”
018-241-05E
AppxIN11-9
3.2 Service Utility Settings How to change setting items

Set “Enable User Security Function” in the Service Utility. With the DR-XD 1000, since the Enable User Security Function default setting is “0:
None”, the setting items need to be changed when using the IC card reader.
Table: Setting item in IMAGE MODALITY

(1) Restart the PC.
Enable User  0 None Specifying whether
Security Does not use the user or not to use the user (2) When the initial window opens, sequentially click its upper left and
Function authentication function authentication function. upper right corners within a period of 3 seconds.
 1 ID/Password
Authenticate by entering account / The Service Utility starts and the “IIP Service Utility” window opens.
password manually.
346  2 SmartCard or ID/Password (3) Click [Setup Configuration Item].
Authenticate by IC card, or entering
account/password manually.
 3 SmartCard and ID/Password
After authenticating by the IC card,
authenticate by entering account/
password manually.
 NOTE 
When using the cards, select “2 SmartCard or ID/Password” or “3 SmartCard and ID/
Password”. For details, refer to the following.
$ {3.4_Login}
POCX01070K018.ai
(4) Click on “+” in [SYSTEM CONFIG].
POCX01070K019.ai
018-241-05E
AppxIN11-10
(5) Click [1_IMAGE MODALITY], and since by double-clicking on the
“No 364 Name Enable User Security Function Value” frame makes it
becomes selectable, select “2” or “3”.
POCX01070K020.ai
(6) Click “Config” - “Save”.
POCX01070K021.ai
018-241-05E
AppxIN11-11
3.3 User Utility Settings (6) Click [Technologist Information Setting].
Perform SmartCardID registration (connecting with the radiographer) in the The “Technologist Information Setting” window opens.
Technologist Information Input window.
The “IC card information” region is only displayed when the system setting is “2:
SmartCard or ID / Password” or “3: SmartCard and ID / Password”.
Refer to the icon for status of unregistered SmartCardID or registered SmartCardID.
(1) From the menu, sequentially select “All Programs”,“Fuji Film”

and “ConsoleAdvance”.
The DR-ID 300CL opening window opens.
In about two minutes, the DR-ID 300CL-AP reception window opens.
(2) Click “User Utility” from the [User Utility] menu. (7) Click [Registration].
The following window opens. The “Technologist Information Input” window opens.
(3) Click [OK]. (8) Input the registration information and click [Register].
(4) Input the “User Name” and “Password”, and click [OK].
The “Main Menu” window opens.
DXCL10040B003.ai
(5) Click .
The “Table Setting” window opens.
 NOTE 
“Smart card infomation” field is only displayed when the system setting is “2:
SmartCard or ID / Password” or “3:SmartCard and ID/Password”.
The “Smart card infomation” window opens.
018-241-05E
AppxIN11-12
(9) Read IC card.
If the authentication is successful, it returns to the “Technologist Information Input”
window, the icon for the Smart card infomation field will be updated to “Registered”.
 NOTE 
- When the authentication failed, authentication failure message appears.
Click [Cancel] in the IC card information window, and perform from step (6)
again.
- In Technologist Information Input window, click [Delete] to delete the IC card
information, and the icon image will become “Not registered”.
REFERENCE
Even with operation using IC card only, the items shown in the “Technologist
Information Input” window need to be registered.
- Technologist code
- Technologist name
- User Name
- Passward
- User group
(10) Click [OK].

The “Technologist Information Setting” window opens.
(11) Click [OK].

The “Table setting” window opens.
(12) Click [OK].

(13) Click [Exit].

“User Utility” exits.
018-241-05E
AppxIN11-13
Checking the SmartCardID
 (7) Click [Reference].
The “Smart card infomation” window opens.
(2) Click “User Utility” from the [User Utility] menu.

(3) Click [OK].

(8) Read IC card.
(4) Input the “User Name” and “Password”, and click [OK]. If Reference is successful, the “IC Smart card infomation” window closes, and the
The “Main Menu” window opens. “Technologist Information Input” window opens.
DXCL10040B003.ai
(5) Click .
(6) Click [Technologist Information Setting].

 NOTE 
Perform the IC card Reference 5 times or more, and the IC cards which display
the target radiographer information for all of the Reference are the support
targets.
IC cards that perform the operations other than the above are not covered.
(9) Click [OK].

(10) Click [OK].

The “Table setting” window opens.
(11) Click [OK].

(12) Click [Exit].

“User Utility” exits.
018-241-05E
AppxIN11-14
Checking the SmartCardID
 (7) Click [Reference].
Refer which radiographer information is connected is The SmartCardID which was The “Smart card infomation” window opens.
read from IC card.
 NOTE 
“Smart card infomation” field is only displayed when the system setting is “2:
SmartCard or ID / Password” or “3:SmartCard and ID/Password”.

(8) Read IC card.
When authentication is successful, “Technologist Information Input” window of the
(2) Click “User Utility” from the [User Utility] menu. corresponding user appears.
(9) Click [OK].
(3) Click [OK]. The “Technologist Information Setting” window opens.
(4) Input the “User Name” and “Password”, and click [OK]. (10) Click [OK].
The “Main Menu” window opens. The “Table setting” window opens.
(11) Click [OK].

DXCL10040B003.ai
(12) Click [Exit].
(5) Click . “User Utility” exits.
(6) Click [Technologist Information Setting].

018-241-05E
AppxIN11-15
3.4 Login  When authenticating by entering account/password manually
Input account/password.
DR-ID 300CL login

 For “2: SmartCard or ID/Password” The “Login” window opens.
Authenticate by IC card, or by entering account/password manually.
 Authentication by IC card
The “Login” window opens.
(2) Input account/password, and click [OK].

The “study reception screen” or “study list” window opens.
(2) Read IC card.

When the authentication is successful, the study reception screen or study list
screen opens.
REFERENCE
Account information of the login user remains in the login record.
When authentication failed, login failure will be notified and it will return to the
login window.
REFERENCE
When authentication failed, login failure will be notified and it will return to the
login window.
 NOTE 
An account which has been already locked by the user cannot be logged into
even if the IC card is skimmed over.
018-241-05E
AppxIN11-16
 For “3:SmartCard and ID/Password” User utility login

 For “2: SmartCard or ID/Password”
After the IC card authentication, authenticate by entering account/password manually.
 When authenticating by IC card

(1) Start up the User Utility.
(2) Read IC card.
When authentication is successful, the main menu window appears.
When authentication failed, login failure will be notified and it will return to the login
window.
 When authenticating by entering account/password manually
Input account/password.
(1) Start up the User Utility.
(2) Read IC card. The “Login” window opens.
The name of the radiographer which performed IC card authentication is displayed (2) Input account/password, and click [OK].
in the User Name on the “Login” window, and the password can be input.
The Main menu window opens.
 For “3: SmartCard and ID/Password”

Same as “● For “2: SmartCard or ID/Password””
Switching user by IC card reading


Read the IC card, and switch to the user which has the radiographer information that
matches.
The user can be switched on the following screens.
- Study reception screen
- Anatomical region selection screen
- Study list screen (F-RIS screen excluded)
The following operations are performed while switching depending on the system
 NOTE  setting value (Enable User Security Function).
When authentication failed, login failure will be notified, and it will return to the Value Operation at switching
login window. Perform step (2) again.
2: SmartCard or ID/Password The radiographer name after the change will be displayed.
(3) Enter the password and click [OK]. 3: SmartCard and ID/Password The “Set user ID/password for Administrator” window
opens, and the radiographer user name has been input in
The “Study registration window” or “Study list” window opens. the user name field.
018-241-05E
AppxIN12-1
Appendix 12. Wireless Channel Used for  Setting correspondence table for the wireless channels
the Access Point

Setting correspondence table of the wireless channel for DR Maintenance Software
or EDIT CONFIGURATION and access point is shown as follows (the bold characters
are the default value).
Flowchart for setting the wireless channel

 ● Channel width 20MHz
START DR Maintenance
Software or AP Setting
Channel Type
EDIT CONFIGURATION
Install the DR-ID 1200 in the facilities to be used *3*4
Wireless Channel Channel Width
where the DR-ID 600 and DR-ID 700 is CHANNEL & MODE
already installed? Band *1 *2
YES MG:11N20 & CH:1 2.4GHz 1 20MHz 1
NO MG:11N20 & CH:2 2.4GHz 2 20MHz 2
Only select the already being
used channel. MG:11N20 & CH:3 2.4GHz 3 20MHz 3
MG:11N20 & CH:4 2.4GHz 4 20MHz 4
Use any Wireless Band？ MG:11N20 & CH:5 2.4GHz 5 20MHz 5
5GHz 2.4GHz MG:11N20 & CH:6 2.4GHz 6 20MHz 6
MG:11N20 & CH:7 2.4GHz 7 20MHz 7
Use the dual channel? Use the dual channel? MG:11N20 & CH:8 2.4GHz 8 20MHz 8
YES YES MG:11N20 & CH:9 2.4GHz 9 20MHz 9
NO NO MG:11N20 & CH:10 2.4GHz 10 20MHz 10
Select from Select from MG:11N20 & CH:11 2.4GHz 11 20MHz 11
MO:11N40P & CH:36 MG:11N40P & CH:1
to to MG:11N20 & CH:12 2.4GHz 12 20MHz 12
MO:11N40P & CH:157, and MG:11N40P & CH:9, and
MO:11N40M & CH:40 MG:11N40M & CH:5
MG:11N20 & CH:13 2.4GHz 13 20MHz 13
to to MO:11N20 & CH:36 5GHz 36 20MHz 36
MO:11N40M & CH:161 MG:11N40M & CH:13
MO:11N20 & CH:40 5GHz 40 20MHz 40
W52
Select from Select from MO:11N20 & CH:44 5GHz 44 20MHz 44
MO:11N20 & CH:36 MG:11N20 & CH:1 MO:11N20 & CH:48 5GHz 48 20MHz 48
to to
MO:11N20 & CH:165 MG:11N20 & CH:13 MO:11N20 & CH:52 5GHz 52 20MHz 52
1200_700184E.ai
MO:11N20 & CH:56 5GHz 56 20MHz 56

W53
MO:11N20 & CH:60 5GHz 60 20MHz 60
MO:11N20 & CH:64 5GHz 64 20MHz 64
018-241-05E
AppxIN12-2
DR Maintenance ● Channel width AUTO20/40MHz
Channel Type DR Maintenance
EDIT CONFIGURATION
to be used *3*4 Software or AP Setting
Wireless Channel Channel Width Channel Type
CHANNEL & MODE EDIT CONFIGURATION
Band *1 *2 to be used *3*4
MO:11N20 & CH:100 5GHz 100 20MHz 100 CHANNEL & MODE
Band *1 *2
MO:11N20 & CH:104 5GHz 104 20MHz 104 MG:11N40P & CH:1 2.4GHz 1 AUTO20/40MHz 1,5
MO:11N20 & CH:120 5GHz 120 20MHz 120 W56 MG:11N40P & CH:5 2.4GHz 5 AUTO20/40MHz 5,9
MO:11N20 & CH:140 5GHz 140 20MHz 140 MO:11N40P & CH:36 5GHz 36 AUTO20/40MHz 36,40
MO:11N20 & CH:149 5GHz 149 20MHz 149 W52
MO:11N40P & CH:44 5GHz 44 AUTO20/40MHz 44,48
MO:11N20 & CH:157 5GHz 157 20MHz 157 W58 W53
MO:11N40P & CH:116 5GHz 116 AUTO20/40MHz 116,120 W56
W58
MG:11N40M & CH:5 2.4GHz 5 AUTO20/40MHz 5,1
MO:11N40M & CH:40 5GHz 40 AUTO20/40MHz 40,36
W52
W53
W56
018-241-05E
AppxIN12-3
DR Maintenance
Channel Type
EDIT CONFIGURATION
to be used *3*4
CHANNEL & MODE
Band *1 *2
MO:11N40M & CH:128 5GHz 128 AUTO20/40MHz 128,124 W56
W58
*1 USA: When the wireless band is 2.4 GHz, only one of channels 1 CH to 11 CH
can be selected.
Japan/Europe: Channels except 149CH to 165CH can be selected.
China: Channels except 100CH to 140CH can be selected.
When the wireless band is 2.4 GHz, only one of channels 1 CH to 11 CH
can be selected.
Other countries: Channels except 52CH to 165CH can be selected.
When the panels of DR-ID 600 series are used at the same time, only one of channels 36
CH, 40 CH, 44 CH or 48 CH can be used.
*2 The Auto 20/40 MHz mode changes the band automatically between 20 and 40 MHz. The
40 MHz band can provide faster communication than the 20 MHz band, but the channel
cannot be fixed to the 40MHz band.
*3 In accordance with the Radio Law, the W52 and W53 type channels (36, 40, 44, 48,
52, 56, 60 and 64) cannot be used outdoors. If wireless communications are to be used
outdoors, select a 5 GHz other than the aforementioned channels or a 2.4 GHz. All of the
channels can be used indoors.
*4 When the W53 or W56 type channel is selected, if interference is detected, then perform
the following workaround operations. This is because avoiding interference with the
weather radar is required by the DFS (Dynamic Frequency Selection).
- In order to detect radar waves about one minute before starting the communication
with each channel, the wireless communication cannot be performed during the
detection.
- If radar waves are detected during wireless communications, the wireless
REFERENCE
When multiple access points are vicinally placed, changing the channel currently used
can prevent decreasing the communication speed due to interferences.
018-241-05E
AppxIN12-4
BLANK PAGE
018-241-05E
IN13-1
Appendix 13. Installing the Operation NOTE
- Make the arm vertically straight when inserting the operation panel assembly.
Panel Assembly (For Older
This installation procedures for older configured machines will be explained.
(1) Remove the hexagonal bolts from the cart.
POC010707012.ai
- Wind the cable around so that it passes through the center of the monitor arm
and cart arm.
(1)
Q6x15 (5 mm)
POCX010707016J.ai

POC010707019.ai
#1
#2
Q6x15 (5 mm)
POC010707011-1.ai
018-241-05E
IN13-2
(3) Remove the connector cover of the operation panel assembly. (4) Peel the cable protection tube about 10 cm long, and insert the cables
#1 Remove the screws. into the connector cover.
#1 Remove the connector cover. #1 Peel the cable protection tube about 10 cm long.
#2 Insert the cables into the connector cover.
#2
#2
#1 #1
V3x6 (x3) POCX010707017J.ai
POC010707014.ai
REFERENCE
When passing the cable through the connector cover, arrange the cables as
follow. The connector cover will become easier to attach.
The other cables: back
The thick cable: front
POCX010708001E.ai
018-241-05E
IN13-3
(5) Insert the cable of FUJIFILM-made AP into the cover. (6) Connect the connectors.
#1 Remove the cover. #1 Connect the connector.
#2 Insert the cable of FUJIFILM-made AP into the cover. #2 Wire two cables.
#3 Attach FUJIFILM-made AP LAN cable, and USB cable to the FUJIFILM-made #3 Fix the ground cable.
AP.
REFERENCE
the USB cable is attached to the top side of the AP.
#1 #1
OPP1 CSL_PC
#1
#2
#2
#1,4 #3
POC010707015.ai
REFERENCE
In overseas, FUJIFILM-made AP is a separate packing item. Installed by “14.
Installing the FUJIFILM-made Access Point”.
#3
POC010302041.ai
018-241-05E
IN13-4
NOTE (8) Cut off the extra cable protection tube.
- Install the two ferrite cores so as not to overlap each other when wiring the #1 Cut off the extra portion of cable protection tube that goes through the
cables. connector cover.
#2 Cut off the extra cable protection tube.
#3 Return the cable protection tube to the original place.
POCX010707008J.ai
- Secure the near side USB cable with just 1 tab as per the following.
#1, #3
#2
NOTE
(7) Attach the connector cover. the image above.
(9) Attach the binding band to the clamp.
#1 Secure the clamp with screws.
#2 Attach the binding band to the clamp.
#2 #1
#1
#2
V3x6 (x3) POC010302039.ai
POC010707018.ai
018-241-05E
IN13-5
(10) Fix the cables with binding bands.
#1 In order to adjust the surplus length of the cable, face the operation panel
upwards.
#2 Wiring the cables.
#3 Bind cables with two binding bands.
#1
#3
#2
POC010707013.ai
source to charge the X-ray cart’s battery.
018-241-05E
IN13-6
BLANK PAGE
018-241-05E
IN13-7
BLANK PAGE
018-241-05E
IN13-8
BLANK PAGE
018-241-05E
AppxIN14-1
Appendix 14. Initializing the
FUJIFILM-made AP
This explains the initialization of FUJIFILM-made AP procedures.
(1) While holding down the FUJIFILM-made AP restart button, start up the
FUJIFILM-made AP, and continue pressing the button for 5 seconds or
more.
The FUJIFILM-made AP is initialized with the factory settings, and is started up.
USB cable connection terminal
Wireless LAN
toggle switch
Restart switch
POCX01070N001.ai
NOTE
The country code is not initialized.
After the FUJIFILM-made AP is initialized, the settings are as below.

Setting items Setting details
SSID FUJIAP05
Communication channel 44ch
Channel bandwidth 20 MHz
Network authentication OPEN (none)
Shared key None
Stealth mode DISABLE (none)
IP address 192.168.0.25
018-241-07E
AppxIN14-2
BLANK PAGE
018-241-05E
AppxIN14-3
BLANK PAGE
018-241-05E
AppxIN14-4
BLANK PAGE
018-241-05E
AppxIN15-1
Appendix 15. Precautions When Item Image Qty. Remarks
Attaching the In-Vehicle Kit High-strength DR slot spring

388N120162
1
Explain precautions when attaching the In-Vehicle kit. In-Vehicle kit Operation
Manual
For Japan: 897N201506
1
Supplied items
 For overseas countries other
than US: 897N201510
Item Image Qty. Remarks For US: 897N201511
Head buffering members Replacing the DR slot spring


For countries other than US: Before installing the In-Vehicle kit, the already installed tension coil spring needs to be
1
386N200067
For US: 386N200122
replaced with the high-strength DR slot spring which is bundled in the In-Vehicle kit.
Refer to the following to replace the tension coil spring with a high-strength DR slot
POCX01070O003.ai
spring.
Display cushioning material

1
386N200121A
POCX01070O004.ai
Dummy cassette
1
346N200645
POCX01070O005.ai
Identification Label
For countries other than US:
1
405N201941
For US: 405N201952
Arm tensioner strap

1
316N200015A
POCX01070O001.ai
Display section fixture belt

2
316N200045
POCX01070O002.ai
018-241-05E
AppxIN15-2
BLANK PAGE
018-241-05E
AppxIN15-3
BLANK PAGE
018-241-05E
AppxIN15-4
BLANK PAGE
018-241-05E
AppxIN16-1
Appendix 16. Measuring Method of mAs Refer to the following in regard to the test pin’s location.
Value
The method for measuring the mAs feedback value from the mono-tank will be
described.
Required measuring instruments


Oscilloscope
#1
Measuring procedures

#2
(1) Turn OFF the main breaker, and remove the AC cable.
(2) Refer to the following, remove the right side cover and shield plate.
(3) Connect the oscilloscope probe to the GNC67A board’s “mAs_FB” (#A) POCX01070P001.ai
and “mAs_ FB_L” (#B) test pins (#1). Connect the oscilloscope’s GND
 NOTE 
clip to the DR-XD 1000 frame (metal housing section) (# 2).
The “mAs_FB” test pin and the “mA_FB” test pin are in close proximity. To
prevent short circuiting, do not power ON the power supply with these pins
connected to the probe.
(5) Turn off the “DR link switch”, and change the DR-XD 1000 state to
“Non-linking mode”.
(6) Perform exposure and measure the voltages of “mAs_FB” or “mAs_

#A FB_L”.
#B
POCX01070P004.ai
018-241-05E
AppxIN16-2
(7) In order to calculate the mAs value, the measured voltage (V) is ● Example 2
applied to the calculation formula in the following chart.
Calculation formula for calculating
mAs value Test pin the mAs value from the measured
voltage (V)
6 mAs or less mAs_FB_L V x 1.611
More than 6mAs mAs_FB V x 14.65
* DR-XD 1000 conforms to the IEC standard (- 10% to + 10% + 0.2 mAs).
 NOTE 
Change the test pins and calculation formula in accordance with the mAs value.
POCX01070P003.ai
● Example 1 - Exposure condition

40 (kV), 0.5 (mAs), Non-linking mode, collimator full open, no additional filter
- Oscilloscope
Tektronix TDS 3034B, Time range: 400ms/div, Value range: 100mV/div
Ch1: mAs_FB
Ch2: mAs_FB_L
- mAs_FB value: 0.304 (V)
mAs value = 0.304 x 1.611 = 0.489 mAs
POCX01070P002.ai
40 (kV), 20 (mAs), Non-linking mode, collimator full open, no additional filter
- Oscilloscope
Tektronix TDS 3034B, Time range: 400ms/div, Value range: 500mV/div
Ch1: mAs_FB
Ch2: mAs_FB_L
- mAs_FB value: 1.31 (V)
mAs value = 1.31 x 14.65 = 19.19 mAs
018-241-05E
AppxIN16-3
(8) Turn OFF the DR-XD 1000 and oscilloscope.
(9) Turn OFF the main breaker, and if the AC cable is connected, then
disconnect it.
(10) Remove the oscilloscope.
(11) Refer to the following, attach the right side cover and shield plate.
 NOTE 
If there is no oscilloscope, a digital multimeter can be used instead. The digital
multimeter specifications are as per the following.
- Maximum voltage (DC): > 10V
- Resolution: <0.001V
- Accuracy: <1%
- Function: Peak hold available
- Accessory: Alligator clip
Example: Fluke 83V
http://en-us.fluke.com/products/digital-multimeters/fluke-83v-digital-multimeter.
html#overview
The measuring procedures and the test pins are the same for the oscilloscope.
018-241-05E
AppxIN16-4
BLANK PAGE
018-241-05E
AppxIN17-1
Appendix 17. Installing the Internet (5) Confirm the display contents on the following window, and press the
<1> key.
Explorer 11
To use the DR Maintenance Software in Windows 7, Internet Explorer 11 needs to be
installed.
 Installing the Internet Explorer 11

(1) Turn ON the CSL-PC power.
1200_7C0015.ai
(2) Within a period of 3 seconds after the initial window opens, INSTRUCTION
To change the installation contents, press the <2> key, and change the OS bit
The “IIP Service Utility” window opens. count and OS language.
- OS bit count selection window
DXL04010001.ai
(3) Insert the install disk into the DVD drive of the CSL-PC.
1200_7C0016.ai
INSTRUCTION
- OS language selection window
Use the following installation media.
Internet Explorer 11 installation media: 114Y2312721A00
(4) When the following window opens, press any key on the keyboard.
1200_7C0017.ai
1200_7C0014.ai The installation processing starts.
018-241-05E
AppxIN17-2
INSTRUCTION  Errors and workaround methods when installing
Restarting might be generated a maximum of three times during the installing.
After restarting, execute steps 2 and 4.  If an 1058 error is generated by the installing (Step 01) of a
compulsory update program before the installing of IE11.
The “IE11 Install Success” appears.
(6) Press any key on the keyboard to complete the installation.
1200_7C0018.ai
(7) Restart the PC.
1200_7C0024.ai
If a Windows service “Windows Update(wuauserv)” required for applying a security

patch is not started up, the 1058 error will occur, failing in installation. Move to “Control
panel” - “Management tool” - “Service” to check if the “Windows Update” has started
up.
018-241-07E
AppxIN17-3
 If an error is generated by the installing (Step 01) of a compulsory  If an error is generated by the IE11 Install (Step02)
update program before the installing of IE11.
1200_7C0020.ai
If the installing of IE11 has failed as per the following, verify the troubleshooting, and
1200_7C0019.ai
do a workaround.
Check the following Windows Update error code list, and do a workaround. - Troubleshooting for when the installing of IE11 has failed
- Windows Update error code list https://support.microsoft.com/ja-jp/kb/2872074
https://support.microsoft.com/ja-jp/kb/938205
018-241-07E
AppxIN17-4
 If an error is generated by the installing (Step 03) of a compulsory
update program after the installing of IE11.
1200_7C0021.ai
Check the following Windows Update error code list, and do a workaround.
- Windows Update error code list
https://support.microsoft.com/ja-jp/kb/938205
018-241-07E
AppxIN18-1
Appendix 18. Attaching the FUJIFILM-
made AP Radio Law Label Chile
If a FUJIFILM-made AP is going to be installed, you might need to check whether the

Radio Law Label is properly stuck on.
Vietnam
 NOTE 
The Radio Law Labels for each nation are included with the FUJIFILM-made AP.
When installing, be sure to stick on the Radio Law Label for your nation. For nations
not covered, the “Radio Law Label” does not need to be stuck on. Mexico
 Attaching the label

(1) If the spot where the label is to be stuck on is dirty, clean that spot Argentina
with a cloth applied with ethanol, etc.
(2) Stick on the Radio Law Label and double-sided tape which indicate
the subject nation’s Radio Law Conformance. Brazil1
Country Radio law label
Morocco Brazil
Brazil2
Taiwan
Australia/
New Zealand
UAE
Serbia
018-241-07E
AppxIN18-2
 NOTE 
- Refer to the following illustrations regarding the attachment positions for the
Radio Law Labels and the double-sided tape.
Except for Brazil:
#1 double-sided tape (upper depression)
#2 Radio Law Label (lower depression)
#1
#2
1200_7C0001.ai
For Brazil:
#1 double-sided tape (upper depression)
#2 Brazil 2 Radio Law Label (Do not overlap the labels. Spaces are OK.)
#3 Brazil 1 Radio Law Label (Do not overlap the labels. Spaces are OK.)
#2 #3
Visually align
from the edge
#1 of the flat
surfase 1 mm
Visually align
from the edge
of the cover
1 mm
1200_7C0002.ai
- Visually approximate half of the short end of the double-sided tape and cut it in
half with scissors, etc. and stick it on against the Radio Law Label.
Discard the cut magic tape that is not used for attaching.
018-241-07E
AppxIN18-3
BLANK PAGE
018-241-07E
AppxIN18-4
BLANK PAGE
018-241-07E
IN19-1
Appendix 19. External Image 2. Precondition
Processing Unit Option In order to apply the external image processing kit, the DR-XD1000 needs to meet the
following requirements.
If these requirements are not met, apply the upgrade kit option for the external image
processing kit (external image processing upgrade kit), then apply the external image
1. Overview processing unit option.
Use the “External image processing unit” option, and install an external image Item Version
processing kit on the DR-XD 1000.
DR-ID 300CL Application Software V13.0 or later
The data which are processed via the external image processing kit can be acquired
from the image data which was obtained via portable exposure by using this option. DR-ID 1200 MC Software V17.1 or later
[Usage example for the external image processing unit] XCON Software V1.1 or later
Hospital network
DR-ID 1000 GNC Board N version or later
DDC Board D version or later
External image processing kit
① Transmitting
captured image
③ Displaying of captured image

and generated data
② Receiving generated
data
POCX01070R001E+.ai
018-241-08E
IN19-2
3. Optional Information 3.3 External Image Processing Upgrade Kit
Item Part No. Qty
3.1 Order Information DDC board for External image processing upgrade kit 898Y201064 1
Option name Part No. Remark DDC67A board 113Y120292 1
External image processing unit 898Y201045 GNC board for External image processing upgrade kit 898Y201065 1
For devices that do not meet the above GNC67A board 113Y120290 1
External image processing preconditions, purchase this upgrade kit
898Y201046
upgrade kit in conjunction with the external image GPU-DDC power cable (DDC ~ relay connector) 136Y202251 1
processing unit.
Cover Assy for external image processing upgrade unit 350Y200664 1
Front cover for external image processing unit 350Y200621 1
3.2 External Image Processing Unit Cushion for front cover 386N200621 1
Item Part No. Qty Tape for cushion 382N200024 2
External image processing unit Assy 814Y200271 1 Cable tie 316S1076 1
GPU67A: GPU board (NVIDIA Jetson TX2i) 113Y200516 1
CAR67A: GPU control board (Connect Tech Inc. 113Y200517 1
ASG003)
Adjusting part (specer) 347S1188 4
Spring washer 309S0220003 4
Flat head screw M3x25 301S7780325 4
Nuts M3 305S1117803 4
Bracket 356N201977 1
Wing edge saddle (LES-0503) 316S1432 2
GPU-GNC communications cable 136Y202189 1
GPU-DDC power cable (GPU ~ relay connector) 136Y202252 1
External image processing unit cover Assy 350Y200689 1
External image processing unit cover 350N131088A 1
Shock absorption sheets 386N200185 1
Infilling Tape 386N200186 2
Screw for the external image processing unit cover (TP 308S0414 4
M3x6)
Harness support clamp 316S1099A 3
Option instruction manual 897N202390 1
018-241-08E
IN19-3
4. Applying the External Image Processing
Unit
4.1 Removing the Cart Unit Cover
In order to avoid damaging the device, be sure to turn off the device’s power (main
key and main breaker), and work with the AC cable disconnected.
018-241-08E
IN19-4
4.2 Applying the External Image Processing Upgrade Kit (2) Refer to the following, replace the GNC board.
Implement only if the upgrade kit is being applied. $ {MC:3.7_GNC Board}
(1) Refer to the following, replace the DDC board.

NOTE
The fan for the DDC board has not been installed since #***224.
$ {MC:3.9_DDC Board}
NOTE
Connect the relay cable to the DDC board’s DDC10 connector, and take out the
DDC section from the side hole.
018-241-08E
IN19-5
4.3 Installing the External Image Processing Unit (3) Secure the power cable onto the GPU control board.
Install the “External Image Processing Unit” to the DR-XD 1000. #1 Insert the cable into the connector.
#2 Secure the cable (minus screw).
(1) Remove the adjustment plate underneath the top cover.
#1
M4x8 (x4)
#2
#1
POCX01070R006.ai
CAUTION
Insert the cable (black) labeled GND onto the GND side, and the cable (orange)
labeled +VIN onto the +VIN side.
After they are attached, check that the power cable does not come unplugged.
POCX01070R005.ai
(2) Secure the external image processing kit.

(4) Wire the DDC-GPU power cable.
#1 Fix with screws.
#1 Attach the clamps (x3) onto the cable, and wire it.
#1 #2 Attach to the relay connector which extends from the DDC board.
M4x8 (x2)
#1
#2
POCX01070R010.ai
 INSTRUCTION 
Use the screws removed in step (1).
POCX01070T009.ai
018-241-08E
IN19-6
(5) Wire the GNC-GPU signal cable.
#1 Attach the LAN cable to the RJ45 connector on the GPU control board.
#2 Wire the LAN cable.
#3 Attach to the GNC board’s RJ45 connector (GNC 19).
#1
#2
POCX01070T010.ai
 INSTRUCTION 
When installing the embedded software for the external image processing
unit, perform the “4.4 Installing the Embedded Software for the External Image
Processing Unit”. If not installing, proceed to “4.5 Assembly”.
018-241-08E
IN19-7
4.4 Installing the Embedded Software for the External
Image Processing Unit
Follow these steps only when you want to install the embedded software.
(1) Start up the external image processing unit.
#1 Connect the AC cable to the device.
#2 Turn ON the main breaker.
#3 Turn ON the key switch.
REFERENCE
When the key switch is switched ON, the GPU control board is being fed power.
(2) Check that the power LED lights up.
(3) Perform installing in accordance with the instruction manual for the
embedded software for the external image processing unit.
(4) Turn OFF the device’s power.

#1 Turn OFF the Console PC’s power.
#2 Turn OFF the key switch.
#3 Turn OFF the main breaker.
CAUTION
Be sure to perform the following tasks with the power turned off to avoid
damage to the equipment.
018-241-08E
IN19-8
4.5 Assembly (2) Attach the following components.
Assembling After Applying the External Image Processing
 $ {MC:2.4_Arm Front Cover}
Upgrade Kit NOTE
NOTE When applying the external image processing upgrade kit, use the optional cover
(front cover for external image processing unit) for the arm front cover.
Perform this step only if the external image processing upgrade kit is applied.

$ Refer to the {MC:3.7_GNC Board} to attach the shield for the GNC board.
NOTE
The fan for the DDC board has not been installed since #***223.

POCX01070R009.ai
Assembling After Applying the External Image Processing Kit

 $ {MC:2.2_Rear Cover}
(1) Attach the external image processing unit cover.
#1 Attach the screws (x4, TP M3x6).
POCX01070R008.ai
018-241-08E
IN19-9
5. Settings (General Data Receiving and Operating flows and details for each screen

DICOM SC Outputting)  Operating flows
Because devices that can add on external image processing unit functions are being Starting studies – Processing external images – To outputting DICOM SC output.
sold, external image processing functions are provided by using them as an image (1) Image input
processing server.
Option key
 (2) Image adjustment
Apply the External Image Processing Unit Linking Option Key (External Image
Processing Unit Link).
(3) Image output
outp
ou put + Read back
(4) Click [Execute external image processing]

GPU Media
(5) Result details display

(6) Image + DICOM SC Output
PACS
POCX01070T001.ai
(1) Image input

Register the study, and after starting the study, implement exposure.
(2) Image adjustment
(3) Image output + Read back
Implement for diagnostic operations.
(4) Click [Execute external image processing]
After clicking, the message that external image processing is being executed is
displayed.
(5) Result details display
Open the external image processing results display screen, and check the results.
When [Execute external image processing] is clicked, the results screen is
automatically displayed.
(6) Image + DICOM SC Output
018-241-08E
IN19-10
 Details for each screen - QA image controller (not displayed in the QA functions list)
- External image processing results display screen
The sizes and positions
are changeable
External External image processing
image execution results display
processing (scrollable)
results *Can be set to not display
in the system settings
image
The ON/OFF switch button
for automatically outputting
DICOM SC output
ON: automatically outputs Execute external
DICOM SC output when image processing
outputting the CSL image
output
OFF: does not output DICOM
SC output Show external
Disclaimer
Close the screen image processing
statement
POCX01070T002.ai result POCX01070T004.ai
- Study screen (Shortcut for QA functions) REFERENCE

When external image processing is unexecuted, then [Show external image
processing result] cannot be clicked.
- “External image processing in progress” display
Execute external
image processing
Show external POCX01070T005.ai
image processing
result POCX01070T003.ai
REFERENCE
When external image processing is unexecuted, then [Show external image
processing result] cannot be clicked.
018-241-08E
IN19-11
Menus which cover the executing of external image processing
 Warning displays when executing external image processing

When newly installing CSL, it is presumed that the menus which cover the external The following messages are displayed when external image processing is being
image processing shall be as per the following. conducted, when the QA operations (image rotating/image processing/image
replacing/changing existing exposure menus, etc.) are performed, and prompting is
 Japan, overseas given for conducting the external image processing again.
FCR0200-0001 CHEST FRN (P→A)
FCR0200-0002 CHEST FRN (A→P)
 USA
FCR0200-0002 CHEST AP NON GRID
FCR0200-0003 CHEST PA
FCR0200-0007 CHEST AP GRID
When installing version upgrades, implement them as per the following procedures.
(1) Start up “MenuImportExportTool V9.0” in the V13 version upgraded
environment, and execute exporting.
POCX01070T006.ai
(2) Edit the exported files. The places to be edited are as per the If “Do not ask me again.” is checked, from the next time it will not be displayed when
following. the external image processing is executed. After the setting has been changed to not
Change the setting values for “Sheet1” sheet ID = CADKind (AX column) to the display, it can be made to display again via the user utility.
following for the exposure menu which pertains to the front chest regions for “Sheet1”
sheet ID = CD (column A).
Target exposure menus CADKind
Outputting data when executing external image processing

The following information will be output, and saved in the CSL.
Not covered 0
- External image processing results
Just external image processing 1 - External image processing images
Just gauze recognition functions 2
Both external image processing + gauze
3
recognition functions
(3) Import the files which were edited in (2).
018-241-08E
IN19-12
Secondary capture output
 The details for issuing numbers for the Study Instance UID/SOP Instance UID are as
per the following.
The external image processing output results can be output to storage. “Service Utility”- “SetUp Configuration Item” - “CONFIG” - “SYSTEM CONFIG” -
- DICOM SC output (format with Dicom information added to the external image “1.IMAGE MODALITY”
processing images (JPEG))
In addition, the external image processing results (standard tags) and image producer
Lunit (private tags) can be output to PACS. 367 Enable  Yes Yes: Delivers newly issued numbers
Issuance  No when initially delivering. When re-
Report Study delivering, the numbers are the
 Handling the secondary capture output UID Instance UID same as for the initial time. (Make
the UID different from the study
Have the UID numbers be issued as per the following when executing external image exposure images.)
processing. No: does not issue numbers. (Make
No. UID Meaning the UID identical to the study
exposure images.)
1 Study Instance UID The numbers are issued in accordance with the system
settings “Enable Issuance Report Study Instance UID” (new). 368 Enable  Yes Yes: Both the initial delivery and re-
Issuance  No delivery are delivered with newly
2 Series Instance UID The numbers are issued in accordance with the system Report SOP issued numbers.
settings “DICOM Series Generation Logic” (existing). Instance UID No: Delivers newly issued numbers
when initially delivering. When re-
3 SOP Instance UID The numbers are issued in accordance with the system delivering, the numbers are the
settings “Enable Issuance Report SOP Instance UID” (new). same as for the initial time.
: Default setting
The details for issuing numbers for the Series Instance UID are as per the following.
“Service Utility”- “SetUp Configuration Item” - “CONFIG” - “SYSTEM CONFIG” -
“1.IMAGE MODALITY”  Secondary capture output modality
The Modality is in accordance with the system settings when outputting DICOM SC
output.
13 DICOM Series  0: 1 Study - N series and Delivers newly issued numbers “Service Utility”- “SetUp Configuration Item” - “CONFIG” - “SYSTEM CONFIG” -
Generation 1 Series - 1 Image when initially delivering. When re- “1.IMAGE MODALITY”
Logic delivering the numbers are the same
as for the initial time. No. Name Selection Meaning
 1: 1 Study - N series and Regardless of whether it is initially 369 Modality  0:Image Modality Specify the report modalities.
1 Series - M Images delivering or re-delivering, it always Setting For  1:OT Select “0: Image Modality” to use
makes the UID the same as the Report the target image modality.
 2: 1 Study - 1 Series and report study’s exposure images.
1 Series - N Images : Default setting
: Default setting  Editing secondary capture output tags

When outputting the images which were generated by the Lunit linkage functions to
the server, add DICOM tags to the images and output them. Edit the DICOM tags
with the CS Edit TOOL for Storage in accordance with the output destination server’s
specifications.
The field name subject to being edited is “SecondaryCaputureImageStorage”.
$ For editing instructions of DR-ID 300CL Service Manual, see “Appendix 12 CS
Edit Tool for Storage” in “MU: Maintenance Utility”.
018-241-08E
IN19-13
Resolving for when errors occur
 Setting the Service Utility

Resolving is divided into the following 3 patterns. (1) Start up the DR-ID 300CL Service Utility mode.
1. An error has occurred when executing external image processing.
2. An error has occurred when displaying the external image processing results. $ For details of DR-ID 300CL Service Utility mode startup, see “1. Starting/
Exiting the Service Utility” in “MU: Maintenance Utility”.
3. An error has occurred other than the ones in the above 1 and 2.
No. Timing Resolutions Remarks (2) Click [Setup Configuration Item].
1 - Creating input The following messages are When executing the
information in the displayed, and processing is external image processing,
external image suspended. different IFs are executed
processing --------- three times, but wherever
- Executing the external External image processing an error occurs, the
image processing execution has failed. message display +
- Saving the external ● Re-operate. processing is suspended
image processing ○ If the same error occurs and it is returned to its
results after the system is restarted, original state.
then contact maintenance.
2 - Displaying the external The following messages are -
image processing displayed, and processing is
results suspended. DCL804001.EPS
--------- The “Setup Configuration Item” window opens.

Displaying the external
image processing results
has failed.
● Re-operate.
○ If the same error occurs
after the system is restarted,
3 Except for the above The following messages are - 00000404.EPS
displayed, and processing is
suspended. (3) Click the “+” mark of the “SYSTEM CONFIG” field.
---------
An error has occurred in the
external image processing (4) Click “1.IMAGE MODALITY”.
results.
● Re-operate.
○ If the same error occurs
after the system is restarted,
018-241-08E
IN19-14
(5) Set the following item. No. Name Selection Selection Meaning
No. Name Selection Selection Meaning 372 Secondary “” MAX256 Model name of the
Capture * Default value: secondary acquisition
366 Auto Send Yes  Yes Whether to Device None device (external
Report  No automatically output Manufacturer's image processing
DICOM SC output Model Name unit)
367 Enable Yes  Yes Specify to newly
Issuance  No issue/not issue 373 Secondary “” MAX256 The software version
Report Study numbers for Study Capture * Default value: of the secondary
Instance UID Instance UID in Device None acquisition device
DICOM SC output Software (external image
when executing Versions processing unit)
external image
processing 374 Save Text Yes  Yes Whether to save
Result For  No the external image
368 Enable Yes  Yes Specify to newly External Image processing execution
Issuance  No issue/not issue Processing results. (Yes: save
Report SOP numbers for SOP image + text/No: save
Instance UID Instance UID in image only)
DICOM SC output
when re-executing 375 App Name For 1  0: cxr The application name
external image External Image  1:cxr-ca which executes
processing Processing the external image
processing
369 Modality 1:OT  0:Image Modality Specify the modalities
Setting For  1:OT when outputting : Default setting
Report DICOM SC output
Select “0: Image (6) Select “Save” from the “Config” menu.
Modality” to use the
target image modality. The confirmation window opens.
370 External Image http://192.168.0.15/ MAX256 The external image (7) Click [Yes].
Processing processing unit’s URL
Unit Link URL The setting is saved.
13 DICOM Series 0  0: 1 Study - N Specify the logic for (8) Select “Close” from the “Config” menu.
Generation series and 1 the series’ number
Logic Series - 1 Image issuing The system returns to the main menu.
 1: 1 Study -
N series and (9) Click [Exit Service Utility].
1 Series - M
Images The system returns to the desktop.
 2: 1 Study -
1 Series and
1 Series - N
Images
371 Secondary “” MAX256 Manufacturer of the
Capture * Default value: secondary acquisition
Device None device (external
Manufacturer image processing
unit)
018-241-08E
IN19-15
Setting the User Utility
 Precautions

- ES/WS/TO make the menus which cover the external image processing.
 Setting the warning displays when executing the external image - The following functions come with restrictions.
processing
Function Resolution policies
“Do not show this message again” can be set in the warning dialog which is displayed
when processing the external images in the User Utility environment settings screen. Moving images The external image processing menus can be moved between studies.
between However, since the external image processing results are not moved, the
studies external image processing needs to be re-executed.
 Setting the external image processing execution button
By customizing the User Utility’s QA shortcut button and the QA control button, the Copying The external image processing menu images can be copied. However,
images the external image processing results cannot be copied.
external image processing execution button and the external image processing results
display button can be set. Changing The external image processing menus as well as the existing exposure
the existing menus can be changed. However, since the external image processing
exposure results cannot be changed, the external image processing needs to be
menus manually re-executed.
Replacing The external image processing menus as well as the images can be
images replaced. However, since the external image processing results cannot
be changed, the external image processing needs to be manually re-
executed.
QA function The QA functions can be executed in relation to the external image
processing menus. However, since the external image processing results
cannot be changed, the external image processing needs to be manually
re-executed.
POCX01070T007.ai
Use the following character strings for the function names.

- External image processing execution functions: Execute external image processing
- External image processing results display screen display functions: Display external
image processing results
 Setting the secondary capture output

By setting the user utility Distribution Code settings, and the Host settings for the
delivery setting storage output, the Secondary Capture Image Storage can be output.
NOTE
Set the image output destination and the Secondary Capture output destination to the
same AE name.
018-241-08E
IN19-16
BLANK PAGE
018-241-08E
IN20-1
Appendix 20. Allowing Non-Administrator 1.1 Adding an Account
Add a maintenance account (FFService) and an operation account (XrayConsole).
Users to Log In The procedure is as shown below.
(1) Turn on the PC.
The installer is equipped with a tool that migrates an administrator account to general
a user account.
This should be applied to facilities that prefer operations with a general user account.
(2) Check that there is no study “waiting for output”. (If any, delete its
output or output queue.)
1. Migration flow (DR-ID 300CL-AP) (3) Terminate DR-ID 300CL and turn off the PC.
1.1 Adding an Account (4) Check that the PC is turned off, and then turn on the PC.
1.2 Uninstalling DR-ID 300CL-AP (5) Within three seconds after the initial screen appeared, click on the
upper right and the upper left of the monitor screen in this order.
Click on the upper left and then upper right.
1.3 Re-installing DR-ID 300CL-AP
1.4 Setting the Operation Account (XrayConsole)
1.5 Confirming the Installation
Service Utility starts up and the “IIP Service Utility” window opens.

(7) If a “FUJIFILM” task exists in the task bar, right-click the task and
select “End”.
(8) Wait around five seconds then start up Task Manager, and terminate
the following processes if any have started up.
- CooperManager.exe
- RemoteLoginChecker.exe
- PPSMonitor.exe
- SKBLauncher.exe
018-241-08E
IN20-2
(9) Close the “Windows Task Manager” window. (13) Open Explorer, and double-click “D:\Tools\LocalUserSetting\
LocalUserSetting.bat”.
(10) Set the DR-ID 300CL-AP disk into the PC.
(11) Open Explorer, and double-click “D:\Tools\LocalUserSetting\

OSSetting\(OS name)\OS_Setting.bat”.
REFERENCE
For the OS name folders, refer to the table below.
Model OS Market OS name folder Memo
DR-ID 300CL Windows 10 (RS5) Overseas Win10_eng_ppu The “Local User Setting” window opens.

The “Type a password for the user (FFService):” window opens.
The command prompt window opens.

The command prompt window closes.
018-241-08E
IN20-3
(15) Enter “fieldengineer” and press <Enter> key.
REFERENCE
If “The passwords do not match” appeared, enter the password again.
“Retype the password to confirm:” appears.
(16) Enter the password again.

The following screen appears.
(17) Press the <Enter> key and terminate the command prompt.
(18) Remove the DR-ID 300CL-AP disk.
(19) Turn off the PC.
018-241-08E
IN20-4
1.2 Uninstalling DR-ID 300CL-AP (6) When installing, the exposure result log/mis-exposure image log are
This section describes uninstallation of DR-ID 300CL-AP installed with
deleted. Make a backup of the exposure result log/mis-exposure image
log depending on the operation of the facility.
the Administrator account.
(1) Turn on the PC.  NOTE 
The procedures are not required if the actual exposure result data file output
(2) In the “Choose privacy settings for your device” window, make the function and/or mis-exposure comment input function is not used.
following settings and click [Accept].
- Online speech recognition No
- Location No I. Select the “User Utility” from menu.
- Inking & typing No II. Click [User Utility].
- Tailored experiences No
The “Console Confirmation” window opens.
- Advertising ID No
The desktop of the XRayConsole account opens. III. Click [OK].
The “Enter Password” window opens.
(3) Sign out the “XRayConsole”account.
I. Click → and then click “Sign out”.
The “Sign in” window opens.
(4) Select “Administrator” account, and enter “fcr-iip” in the password to

sign in the system.
After a while, DR-ID 300CL-AP starts up.
IV. Enter the following.
(5) Check that there is no study that is waiting for study, QA, or output. User name: FFService
- Finish or delete studies that are waiting for study Password: fieldengineer
- Finish QA of the studies that are waiting for QA
- Execute output or delete its output queue of the studies waiting for output (Only V. Click [OK].
facilities that activate the DXA function) VI. Perform the following procedures.
- Check that there is no study that is waiting for DXA (DXAStatus is DXAWaiting).
- For facilities with Retake Analysis function enabled
1) Perform Retake Analysis function, collect the logs at the time.
- For facilities with Exposure Result Log/Mis-exposure Comment (not Retake
Analysis) enabled
1) Save logs by using “Exposure Result Log” function.
2) Clear logs by using “Exposure Result Log” function.
VII. Shut down the User Utility.
018-241-08E
IN20-5
(7) Make backups of the following setup files that need manual migration/ (13) If a “FUJIFILM” task exists in the task bar, right-click the task and
edition again after reinstallation. select “End”.
If this function is used, it is not needed to make a backup.
(14) Wait around five seconds then start up Task Manager, and terminate it
No. Function Setup file
if the following processes have started up.
1 Patient information - C:\FDRWeb\rmtDisp_PatientInfo\App_Themes\ - CooperManager.exe
display linkage PatientInfo.xsl - RemoteLoginChecker.exe
- C:\FDRWeb\rmtDisp_PatientInfo\web.config
- PPSMonitor.exe
2 Remote image - C:\FDRWeb\rmtDisp_DisplayImage\web.config - SKBLauncher.exe
display - C:\FDRWeb\rmtDisp_DisplayImage\App_Themes\
Display.css (15) Uninstall applications listed in “5.1 Application List”, if any.
- C:\FDRWeb\rmtDisp_DisplayImage\App_Themes\
Display_Mobile.css $ “5.1 Application List”
Anotation.css  NOTE 
3 Setting same C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Config\ To uninstall the application, use the same version of the application software
technique to TechniqueCodeConvertTbl.ini medium according to the description in the service manual. Before uninstallation,
different selectors see the application version to check the functions that have been installed.
4 DicomStorageTag. In the case of a facility that edits DicomStorageTag.mdb
mdb setting by using CS Edit TOOL for Storage
(16) Set the DR-ID 300CL-AP disk into the PC.
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Config\DicomStorageTag.
mdb
(17) Open Explorer and double-click the installation DVD.
(8) Terminate DR-ID 300CL and turn off the PC. The “DR Console Setup Tool” main menu opens.
 NOTE 
(9) Check that the PC is turned off, and then turn on the PC.
If the window does not open automatically, double-click the executable file (Setup.
The desktop of the XRayConsole account opens. bat) directly.
(10) As with steps (3) and (4), sign out the XRayConsole acccount, and
sign in with the Administrator account.
After a while, DR-ID 300CL-AP starts up.
(11) Within three seconds after the initial screen appeared, click the upper
right and the upper left of the monitor screen in this order.
The “Programs and features” window opens.
Service Utility starts up and the “IIP Service Utility” window opens.
018-241-08E
IN20-6
(19) Select “IIP” and click “Uninstall”.
(20) Click [Yes].
(21) Close the “Programs and features” window.

The system returns to the “DR Console Setup Tool” main menu.
(24) Turn off the PC.
018-241-08E
IN20-7
1.3 Re-installing DR-ID 300CL-AP Re-installing DR-ID 300CL-AP

Settings for maintenance account (FFService)
 (1) Set the DR-ID 300CL-AP disk into the PC.
Install DR-ID 300CL-AP again with the FFService account. (2) Open Explorer and double-click the installation DVD.
(1) Turn on the PC. The “DR Console Setup Tool” main menu opens.
The desktop of the XRayConsole account opens.  NOTE 
(2) Sign out the “XRayConsole”account. If the window does not open automatically, double-click the executable file (Setup.
bat) directly.
I. Click → and then click “Sign out”.
The “Sign in” window opens.
(3) Select the “FFService” accountand enter “fieldengineer” in the

password to sign in the system.
(4) When using Windows10 (RS5), make the following settings in the
“Choose privacy settings for your device” window and click [Accept].
- Online speech recognition No
- Location No (3) Enter “2” and press the <Enter> key.
- Find my device No The “Select Locale” window opens.
- Diagnostics data Basic
- Inking & typing No
- Tailored experiences No
- Advertising ID No
The desktop of the FFService account opens.
(5) Depending on each environment, execute the separate setup.

(4) Enter the item number of the language to set and press the <Enter>
 NOTE  key.
- Target items are those with “” attached at the “FFService” column. The “Select Parameter Type” window opens.
- Check that the items are set to the settings specified separately. If not, set the
item according to the specified settings.
- Some item cannot be set depending on the account/OS version. If any item is
not found, skip it to go to the next item.
$ “5.2 Profile list (DR-ID 300CL DR-XD1000 (Windows10 LTSC))”
018-241-08E
IN20-8
(5) Enter the item number of the parameter type to set and press the (10) Re-install the applications that were uninstalled in step (15) of “1.2
<Enter> key. Uninstalling DR-ID 300CL AP”.
The installer starts up and the “Welcome to the Installshield Wizard for IIP” window $ “1.2 Uninstalling DR-ID 300CL AP”
opens.
(11) Open Explorer, and double-click “D:\Tools\FirewallSetting.bat”.
REFERENCE
If the “Press any key to continue...” message appears, press the <Enter> key.
(6) Click [Next].
(12) Remove the DR-ID 300CL-AP disk from the PC.
(13) Insert “Start order change setting Kit CD” into the PC.
The “DVD RW drive (D drive)” window opens.
(14) Double-click “InstallProcessManagerSettingconfig(.bat)”.

(7) Click [Install]. The command prompt window opens.
 NOTE  (15) “Press any key to continue...” will be displayed. Confirm that
If the following error occurred, go back to step (5) and execute installation again. “Success.” is displayed on one line above, then press any key.
Error1722 There is a problem with this windows
Installer package. ~
(16) Remove the CD from the PC.
If the similar status continues after re-installation, there may be other problem,
which will require re-installation from OS.
After several minutes, the installation will be finished and a window opens to indicate
that the installation has ended.
(8) Click [Finish].


The system returns to the “DR Console Setup Tool” main menu.
018-241-08E
IN20-9
(17) Overwrite the files backed up in step (7) of “1.2 Uninstalling DR-ID
300CL-AP”.
$ “1.2 Uninstalling DR-ID 300CL AP”
 NOTE 
For the functions not used, no setup is needed.
No. Function Condition/procedure

1 Patient If the following setup file is customized in a facility that is
information using the patient information display function, carry on the
display linkage settings manually.
- C:\FDRWeb\rmtDisp_PatientInfo\App_Themes\
PatientInfo.xsl
- C:\FDRWeb\rmtDisp_PatientInfo\web.config
2 Remote image If the following setup file is customized in a facility that is
display using the remote image display function, carry on the settings
manually.
- C:\FDRWeb\rmtDisp_DisplayImage\web.config
- C:\FDRWeb\rmtDisp_DisplayImage\App_Themes\Display.
css
Display_Mobile.css
Anotation.css
3 Setting same For a facility that customizes the technique code conversion
technique file “TechniqueCodeConvertTbl.ini” to apply the same
to different technique setting to different selectors, carry on the following
selectors settings manually.
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Config\TechniqueCodeConvertTbl.
ini
(18) Setting the functions that need to be edited.

 NOTE 
For the functions not used, no setup is needed.
No. Function Condition/procedure

1 DicomStorageTag. In the case of a facility that edits DicomStorageTag.mdb
mdb setting by using CS Edit TOOL for Storage, edit DicomStorageTag.
mdb again.
018-241-08E
IN20-10
1.4 Setting the Operation Account (XrayConsole) (5) Open Explorer, and double-click “D:\Tools\LocalUserSetting\
Execute setup for the operation account.
LocalUserSetting.bat”.
The “Local User Setting” window opens.
(1) Reboot the PC.
(2) Log in with the “XRayConsole” account automatically.

The desktop of the XRayConsole account opens.
(3) Depending on each environment, execute the separate setup.

 NOTE 
- Target items are those with “” attached at the “FFService” column.
- Check that the items are set to the settings specified separately. If not, set the
item according to the specified settings.
- Some item cannot be set depending on the account/OS version. If any item is
not found, skip it to go to the next item.
$ “5.2 Profile list (DR-ID 300CL DR-XD1000 (Windows10 LTSC))” (7) Press the <Enter> key.
The “Local User Setting” window closes.
(4) Insert the DR-ID 300CL-AP disk into the PC.
(9) Reboot the PC.
(10) After reboot, log in with the “XRayConsole” account automatically.
(11) If a message appeared to prompt to enter the password for FFService

as shown below, enter “fieldengineer” and press <Enter> key.
REFERENCE
The password entered is not displayed on the monitor.
(12) DR-ID 300CL starts up.
(13) Terminate DR-ID 300CL and turn off the PC.
018-241-08E
IN20-11
1.5 Confirming the Installation (5) Click “Windows log” - “Security”.
Confirm the installation with the XrayConsole account as shown below.
(1) Turn on the PC.
(2) Within three seconds after the initial screen appeared, click on the
upper right and the upper left of the monitor screen in this order.
(6) Check that one or more logs shown below are output.
Event ID: 4648 log on
Service Utility starts up and the “IIP Service Utility” window opens. Account name: XrayConsole
(3) Check that the following text line is arranged at the lower right of the
wall paper of the desktop.
“Local user account is NOT allowed to change settings. Service user account is
allowed to change settings.”
(4) Click [View Event Log] of Service Utility.
(7) Close “Event viewer”.

The “Event viewer” window opens. The desktop screen opens.
018-241-08E
IN20-12
2. Maintenance after Migration to Non- 3. Changing Password for FFService Account
Administrator (XrayConsole) Account (Optional)
Before maintenance operations (version upgrading, applying HF, modifying settings, (1) Sign in with the “FFService” account.
etc.) after the migration, use the following accounts to log in.
- DR-ID 300CL: FFService account
(2) Press <Windows> + <R> together, enter “Control” in the opened
 NOTE  window, and click [OK].
Execute the procedure below only when version upgrading from V12.0HF0002. The “All Control Panel Items” window opens.
After version upgrading of DR-ID 300CL-AP or PPU to the latest version, execute the (3) Click “Administrative Tools”.
following respectively. The “Administrative Tools” window opens.
(1) Insert the disk into the PC. (4) Double-click “Computer Management”.
For DR-ID 300CL: DR-ID 300CL Application Software DVD The “Computer Management” window opens.
(2) Open Explorer, and double-click “D:\Tools\LocalUserSetting\ (5) Select “Local Users and Groups” - “Users” - “FFService”, right-click
LocalUserSetting.bat”. and select “Password setup”.
The “Local User Setting” window opens.
(6) Set an arbitrary password.
(7) After setup of the password, reboot the PC.
(8) After reboot, log in with the “XrayConsole” account automatically.
(9) If a message appeared to prompt to enter the password for FFService,

enter the password set in step (6) and press the <Enter> key.
REFERENCE
The password entered is not displayed on the monitor.
The following screen appears.
(10) DR-ID 300CL-AP starts up.
(4) Press the <Enter> key and terminate the command prompt.
(5) Remove the disk from the PC.
018-241-08E
IN20-13
4. Cautions
- To execute the following operation, use the maintenance account.
- Installation for version upgrading of the DR-ID 300CL-AP/PPU application.
- Applying Hotfix
- Changing settings on OS
- Changing settings of DR-ID 300CL-AP through ServiceUtility
- Service tools of Console
- PCTool
 NOTE 
The operations above are not guaranteed to work with the XrayConsole account.
- To see whether you log in with the XRayConsole account, refer to the wall paper.
(DR-ID 300CL main body only)
XRayConsole account:
Uses the wall paper with the following text line inserted in its lower right position.
“Local user account is NOT allowed to change settings. Service user account is
allowed to change settings.”
Other accounts:
Uses the conventional wall paper.
- Under the environment where a white list anti-virus software is used, recreate the
white list to be able to execute the account migration tool.
- The FFService/XRayConsole accounts cannot enter the domain.
- Do not disclose the passwords of the Administorator/FFService/XRayConsole/fujifilm

accounts to the users.
- Do not save files created and edited with each account on the desktop. Otherwise,
the desktop of the FFSevice account may appears, resulting in displaying an
unintended file if you start up the Windows folder selection dialog and select the
desktop when operating a console function with the XRayConsole account.
018-241-08E
IN20-14
5. Reference
5.1 Application List
# Application name Note
1 Precise enlargement function -
2 Referral viewing function -
3 Free layout print function -
4 Network image search -
function
5 ROI measurement function -
(ROI)
6 Measurement -
(distance and accuracy)
7 WakeOnLAN application Make a memo of the following settings from the FF-
WakeOnLAN Utility before uninstallation, because re-
installation requires the settings.
- MAC address of the other device
- IP address of the other device
- Host name of the other device
8 RAID status display tool -
9 PPS cashing server Make a memo of the following settings from the
environmental setting window of the PPS cashing
server before uninstallation, because re-installation
requires the settings. After the console started up, set
up the following on the environmental setting window
again.
- IP address of RIS to connect
- AE name of RIS to connect
- Port number of RIS to connect
10 SKB launcher -
(software keyboard)
11 Remote image display Connection of TightVNC needs to be set up depending
on each account.
Therefore, installation and connection setting of
TightVNC need to be executed with XRayConsole.
12 SynapseWebQuery -
13 F-RIS client -
14 Exposure guidance -
018-241-08E
IN20-15
5.2 Profile list (DR-ID 300CL DR-XD1000 (Windows10 LTSC))
Setting item Settings location Settings FFService XrayConsole
Control Panel Start - All apps - Windows System - Control Panel Switch View in the top right corner to Large Icon.  
Sound Control Panel - Sound - Playback tab - Speakers(Default Device) - Internal Speaker/Headphone : Set the value to 100.  
Properties - Levels tab
Control Panel - Sound - Sounds tab - Default Beep Sounds : Windows Ding  
Taskbar Start - Settings - Personalization - Taskbar Automatically hide the taskbar in desktop mode : On  
Taskbar Right-click three icons next to the Start button one by one and select  
Unpin this program from taskbar from the menu that appears.
Display Control Panel - System - Advanced System Settings - Performance Show window contents while dragging : Uncheck the box.  
- Setting - Visual Effects tab
Control Panel - Ease of Access Center - Make the mouse easier to Prevent windows from being automatically arranged when moved to the  
use edge of the screen : Check the box.
Power options Control Panel - Power Options High Performance : Check the box.  
Control Panel - Power Options - High performance : Change plan Hard Disk - Turn off hard disk after : Never  
settings - Change advanced power settings
USB Setting - USB selective suspend setting : Disable  
* Set the same settings for both “On battery” and “Plugged in”.
Power buttons and lid - Power button action - Do noting  
Power buttons and lid - Sleep button action : Do noting  
Display - Turn off display after : 20 (minutes)  
Security and Control Panel - Security and Maintenance - Change Security and Uncheck the following boxes more than 4 minutes after the PC starts.  
Maintenance Maintenance settings Security messages
- Internet security setting
- Network firewall
- User Account Control
- Virus protection
Maintenance messages
- Windows Backup
- Automatic Maintenance
- Drive Status
- Windows Troubleshooting
- HomeGroup * Grayed-out and cannot clear the checkbox.
- File History
- Storage Spaces
Intel RST Control Panel - Intel® Rapid storage Technology - Preferences Show the notification area icon : Uncheck the box.  
* When the Hide Notification Area Icon dialog appears, click [Yes].
018-241-08E
IN20-16
Setting item Settings location Settings FFService XrayConsole
System Start - Settings - Apps - Apps & featuers Uninstall the following App&features more than 4 minutes after the PC  
starts.
- Microsoft Solitaire Collection
- OneNote
- Print 3D
- Skype
- Xbox Live
- App Installer
- Tips
- Feedback Hub
- My Office
- Weather
Start - Settings - Apps - Offline maps Automatically update maps: Off  
Start - Settings - Apps - Default Apps Photo viewer : Paint  
Web browser : Internet Explorer  
When the Before you switch dialog appears, click Switch anyway.
Personalization Start - Settings - Personalization - Background Background : Solid color  
Choose your background color: Navy blue (2nd line, 5th from the left)  
Start - Settings - Personalization - Colors Choose your color - Windows Colors: Navy blue (3rd line, 2nd from the left)  
Show accent coior on the following surfaces :  
Start, taskbar, and action center: Check the box
Title bars and windows borders: Check the box
Tranceparency effects : Off  
Start Menu Minimize the start screen.  
018-241-08E
IN21-1
Appendix 21. Nothing
018-241-08E
IN21-2
BLANK PAGE
018-241-08E
IN21-3
BLANK PAGE
018-241-08E
IN21-4
BLANK PAGE
018-241-08E
Control Sheet
11.30.2016 02 Revision (FM9462) 2, 3

05.31.2019 06 Revision for U.S. and Brazil (FM9565) 1
Performance Check (PC)
018-241-06E
PC-1
DR-XD 1000 Performance Check List ■ Installation Information
Pharmaceutical
The purpose of this performance check list is used at the time of DR-XD 1000 Model DR-XD 1000
S/N
installation to record the steps performed, measured values, and settings, which
are based on the instructions set forth in the Service Manual. This checklist is not
supposed to replace the installation steps set forth in the DR-XD 1000 Service Manual DR-ID1200MC . . .
but is to be followed concurrently.
Model IP address (In hospital) . . .
Verify the proper equipment operations at installation and after servicing by checking DR-ID300CL
the system connection and output image quality, and then pass the equipment over to (local) . . .
the customer.
Model S/N
NOTE
To check DR-ID 1200 series SE, see the checklist in DR-ID 1200 Service Manual. Collimator
To check DR-ID1270 series SE, see the checklist in DR-ID1270 Service Manual. X-ray tube device
Pharmaceutical
Panel ID Wire IP address Wireless IP address
S/N
SE[1] . . . . . .
SE[2] . . . . . .
SE[3] . . . . . .
SE[4] . . . . . .
SE[5] . . . . . .
018-241-06E
DR-XD 1000 Service Manual PC-1
PC-2
■ Operation checks 2. Cart section
Check Item Standard
1. Power/battery
- Checking for short-circuiting of power voltage/machine power source □ OK □ NG Check that there is no looseness on the main
key (turn it ON-OFF to check), handle holder,
Cart section □ OK □ NG
Item Measured value Value of standard cart bumper, caster bolt, covers around the cart
section.
______________V 100V±10%
Power voltage (□ Single-phase two-wire When the caster lock pedal is at the lower
□ Single-phase three-wire) position, the caster is locked. When at the
Mobility, medium position, the caster can move freely.
□ OK □ NG
Resistance value ______________Ω Electrical continuity can lock mechanism When at the upper position, the direction is
between E and FG be observed. controlled (restrictions on left-right motion and
rotation, and sidling).
Resistance value ______________Ω ∞Ω
Turn the SE lock key, then the SE will be locked
between N and E SE lock section □ OK □ NG
at each position of size.
Resistance value ______________Ω ∞Ω When release the arm unlock lever, the arm
between L and E moves and the rotation of the arm brace member
Arm section □ OK □ NG
is locked. Raise the arm and fold it, and then the
Resistance value ______________Ω More than 100kΩ brace member can be smoothly rotated.
between L and N
Collimator lamp can light up, the irradiation size
Collimator,
can be changed, the collimator and X-ray tube □ OK □ NG
X-ray tube device
device can be rotated smoothly.
The battery charge remaining is displayed,
Operation panel section □ OK □ NG
battery charging condition is displayed.
The slot can be opened and closed smoothly.
DR slot section The sound continues while inserting the panel. □ OK □ NG
The panel is charged when it is inserted.
018-241-05E
PC-3
3. X-ray exposure ■ Checking optional items
- Checking the linearity of the X-ray dose □ OK □ NG □ X-ray protection apron hanger
Exposure conditions Measured value Value of standard □ Battery charger
□ Magnetic card reader
Condition1 :80kV, SID=150cm, 1 mAs ______________ 0.95 to 1.05 □ Barcode reader kit
Condition2 :80kV, SID=150cm, 3.2 mAs ______________ 0.95 to 1.05 □ Bluetooth barcode reader kit
□ High-type cart handle (1000mm height from the ground)
Condition3 :80kV, SID=150cm, 10 mAs ______________ 0.95 to 1.05
□ Accessory case
□ Wet-tissue holder
- Checking the image result □ OK □ NG
□ Additional filter (filter sensor operation □OK □NG)
Exposure conditions Standard □ Aluminum sheet (Number of sheets:____sheet, dose value:______μGy/mAs)
- Without filter, 50kV, 0.8mAs, SID =50cm No foreign object is observed.
- Fully open the collimator and rotate the receiver
90 degree, then take 2 solid images. ■ Test equipment used for the chec
Test equipment:_____________ Model:_____________ S/N:_____________
Test equipment:_____________ Model:_____________ S/N:_____________
4. Wireless setup Test equipment:_____________ Model:_____________ S/N:_____________
IP address . . . SSID
Channel Channel width
□ YES □ NO Wireless Avg._________sec
Stealth setup
communication speed
018-241-04E

FDR Nano Service Manual - 018-241-08E

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

FDR Nano Service Manual - 018-241-08E

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FUJIFILM DIGITAL RADIOGRAPHY

The relationship between mR (milliroentgen), which

FDR is a trademark or a registered trademark of FUJIFILM Corporation.

<No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted.>

Copyright © 2016 - 2020 FUJIFILM Corporation. All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval

2-26-30 Nishiazabu, Minato-ku, Tokyo

DR-ID 1270 (Flat panel sensor system)

CAUTION  Notation in the Manual

- Half-punch indicator: Indicates that it is necessary to align the half-punches

- 3B: Indicates that screw-locking bond needs to be applied

 Instruments and Tools That Require Inspection/Calibration

Calipers  () - FF-015

: A block gauge for use in inspection requires calibration.

1. Safety Precautions ...................................................... Safety-1 4. Cautions on Electromagnetic Waves ...................... Safety-22

2. Labels ........................................................................... Safety-9

3. CLASSIFICATION ...................................................... Safety-21

3. Space for Use ................................................................ Spec-7

4. Means for Moving and Fixing the Machine ................. Spec-8

5. Environmental Conditions ........................................... Spec-9

6. Electrical Specifications ............................................. Spec-10

7. DR-XD 1000PX Specifications.................................... Spec-12

8. Other Specifications ................................................... Spec-13

9. Supported Disinfectants............................................. Spec-17

Machine Description (MD)

1. Summary of the Machine................................................. MD-1 6. Noise-reducing Measures ............................................. MD-21

3.2 Center of the Image................................................................MD-15 9.3 DR-XD1000 Maintenance Tool ...............................................MD-40

5. Changes in PC-GNC Connection Specifications ........ MD-18

10. Design Changes Which Are Associated with

11. Usable Radio Frequency Bands in Each Country

12. Changed the Installed OS

Appendix 1. Block Diagram

1. Overview of Troubleshooting...........................................MT-1 4.8 If Irradiating Cannot Be Done ................................................. MT-48

2. Error Code Table ...............................................................MT-8

4. Parse Tree ........................................................................MT-37

Appendix 3. Procedures for Acquiring the Logs ... AppxMT3-1

Appendix 4. How to Obtain the Image Files When

Appendix 5. Analysis Procedures When 11240 Line

Appendix 6. Windows OS Recovery Procedures

Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC)

4. Arm Unit ........................................................................ MC-112 6.3 LED Switch ...........................................................................MC-180

8. DR Slot .......................................................................... MC-230 10. List of Tools .................................................................. MC-258

Appendix 20. Reinstalling OS and Application.... Appx MC20-1

Maintenance Utility (MU)

[3.2] MP Version >>.................................................................................... MU-58 4.9 VERSION UP .........................................................................MU-78

Service Parts List (SP)

Preventive Maintenance (PM)

3. Removing the Cover ........................................................ PM-5 6. Arm Section .................................................................... PM-22

9.4 Checking the Rotation ............................................................ PM-31

10. Preventive Maintenance Items via Maintenance Tool ... PM-32

11. Visual Inspection and Cleaning .................................... PM-34

How to Read the Installation Manual ....................................... IN-1

Installation (IN2) (RU PC-TOOL)

Appendix 1. Nothing ..................................................... AppxIN1-1 3. Changing Folder Name ...........................................................AppxIN5-7

1. Locally Procured Item....................................................Appx IN11-1 3. Optional Information ......................................................Appx IN19-2

Appendix 20. Allowing Non-Administrator Users to

Appendix 21. Nothing .............................................. Appx IN21-1

Performance Check (PC)

DR-XD 1000 Performance Check List .....................................PC-1

DR-XD 1000 Service Manual

1.1 General Precautions

<For bed-type machine>

<For stand-type machine>

Environmentally Friendly Use Period (EFUP)